SRL Namunalarimiwa rastlina inilah . ..... .. ... E ur. DINTINIUS egi WILLIAMS --...... ..... THO I SCIENTIA ARTES SINISTRULING RARYVERITA'S SITYOF MUCHIGAN. NIVERSIY OF MICHIO HUSU nikaliumiturityihiinnittiiniinicitra PLURIBUS Ubunt 000.000OOOOO0000 T milli A TCEBOR u kwa NW . V W IS .. WE OLOLO SIQUÆRIS.PLH KA MINSULAMA IMAMONAM . TT.... UMSPICE iTV GULO. .VIEW.0.0.VUS WOUWW.CVU.V. 0.0: llNIMI 1011111TILISELTS UNIT .......... inintuitiRLINBIRIIIIIODINYANIHiiuinorituu * THE AMMINILLUMINAZINI Birincis DUFFIEL :-LIBRARY: .... A Pw ||||||||||| IIIIHIIIUMIN I DITOIMIIIIIIIIII SaveMornhimmiminuinitunukiluminaturlililinmirl |||IIDIDUNT UNLIMNULUMUUWIDUJOMISIUNIIDUITDJIDILIULUI . huntillit . . . . . . THE GIFT OF TI TAPPAX PRESIBY- TERLAX ASSOCIATION Hilminin TUTTO . . 1000 . . . . IIIIIIIIIII . hitinnituv M GYM hittituotminsini Wilih VTVTillintuitirir. . . . १30.5 C73 GERMAN COURSE; ADAPTED TO USE IN COLLEGES, HIGH-SCHOOLS, AND ACADEMIES. BY GEO. F. COMFORT, A.M., PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND ESTILET108 IN ALLEGUANY COLLECR, MEADVILLE, PA. NEW YORK: UARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISIERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE. 1870. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1869, by II AR PER & BROTIIERS, · In the Clerk's Oflice of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York.. CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. Page INTRODUCTION ...... .................... i li ................... 1 . PART FIRST. PRACTICAL LESSONS. Lesson 1. Pronunciation ............ II. Pronunciation (continued) ...... III. Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Verb fcin, to be............ IV. Present and Imperfect Tenses of Regular Verbs. Thc Definite Article. The Accusative Case ............ ............... V. Present and Imperfect Tenses of haben, to have. Accusative Case of Personal Pronouns ....... .............. VI. Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Regular Verbs................... VII. Prepositions with the Accusative Case. Gender of Nouns ..... VIII. The Genitive Case............ IX. The Dative Case............................ X. Prepositions with the Accusative and Dative Cases............... XI. Personal Pronouns. Forms of Address. Contractions of Prep- ositions with the Definite Article....... XII. The Irregular Verb werdent, to become. Future Tenses. XIII. German Current Hand. ..... XIV. Conjugation of Irregular Verbs........................................ XV. Plural of Nouns and of the Definite Article..................... XVI. The Indefinite Article ...... XVII. Cardinal Numbers.................................... XVIII. Adjectives used predicatively and attributively. Old Declen- sion of Adjectives... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ XIX. Possessive Pronouns................ XX. New Declension of Adjectives.. XXI. Mixed Declension of Adjectives...................... XXII. Comparison of Adjectives...................... XXIII. Ordinal Numbers. ........ XXIV. Irregular Verbs of the First Class ........... XXV. Irregular Verbs of the Second, Third, and Fourth Classes...... XXVI. Irregular Verbs of the Fifth and Sixth Classes. ................. XXVII. Irregular Verbs of the Seventh Class. Recapitulation of Irreg- ular Verbs.. ............. ...... 86 iv CONTENTS OF 59 102 .......... 105 120 128 Lesson Page XXVIII. Verbs with ſcin, to be, as Auxiliary .......... XXIX. The Infinitive Moqd.............................. XXX. Participles ..... ............................... XXXI. The Potential Verbs fönnteil and miiſſen... XXXII. The Potential Verbs wolcit and mögen ..... XXXIII. The Potential Verbs ſollen and diirfcii... .... XXXIV. Separable Compound Verbs ................ .... 108 XXXV. Inseparable Compound Verbs .......... ....... 111 XXXVI. Compound Nouns........... .............................. 115 XXXVII. Derivative Nouns.............. XXXVIII. Derivative and Compound Adjectives ............................. XXXIX. Cases governed by Adjectives....................... 135 XL. Use of the Article............................ 139 XLI. Personal and Possessive Pronouns..... XLII. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns.... XLIII. Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns............................ 147 XLIV. Reflexive Verbs .......................................................... 150 XLV. Agreement of Verbs with Nominative. Verbs governing the Accusative Case. Apposition .......... 154 XLVI. Verbs governing the Genitive Case. XLVII. Verbs governing the Dative Case... ................ 161 XLVIII. The Passive Voice ......... XLIX. Construction of Prepositions. .......... 166 L. Adverbs. Conjunctions. Order of Words...................... LI. Imperative, Subjunctive, and Conditional Moods .............. 141 147 158 163 No. PART SECOND. I. Conversations. Page No. Page 1. Salutation, a visit ..... .. 175 9. The Post-office........... 182 2. At Breakfast in a Hotel...... 176 10. At a Banker's............ 3. Dinner............ 177 1 In a Bookstore ............. 4. In a Confectionery Shop...... 12. At a Tailor's.................... 5. The Hotel ....................... '178) 13. In a Dry Goods Store......... 185 0. The Railroad.................... 179/14. At a Shoemaker's.............. 7. The Steamer .................... 180 15. With a physician............... 8. The Custom-house............. 182) 16. At a Watchmaker's............ .. 18S 187 II. German and English Idioms. ... 1. Idioms with habent and to have.............. 2. Idioms with ſcint and to be .................................................... 190 3. Idioms with fverdest and to become .............., ............. 191 4. The Potential Mood and Future Indicative of the English Verb.... 192 ....................... 189 THE GERMAN COURSE. V No. Puge 5. Idioms with the verb laſſen, to leave, to let ................................ 193 6. Idioms with the Verb to get..... 193 7. Idioms with Prepositions ................................................... 194-197 III. Examples of Synonyms. 1. Adfer, Ferd, land ............ 198 2. Adersmann, Landwirtſy, Bauer.............. 198 3. Aufſtehen, erſtehen, auferſtehen.................................................. 4. Ausfillren, volbringen, vollführen, vollziehen, vollſtreden...... . 199 5. Meer, See............. 6. Naſeweis, neugierig, vorwitzig ........ 200 7. Mögen, wollen.. 198 199 ....... 200 M 201 202 IV. Letters and Forms of Business. 1. Ein Neffe ineldet ſeinein Onkel deir Todesfall ſeiner Sdyweſter ........ 2. Glüdwunſdy zum Geburtstag eines Vaters. 201 3. Ceremonielle Form der Einladung............... 202 4. Antwort auf dieſelbe............. 5. Bertraulidie Form der Einladung....... 202 6. Antwort auf dieſelbe............... 7. Höflidie Form der Einladung ......... 203 8. Antivort auf dieſelbe....... 203 9. Wedſelbrief ................... 203 10. Anweiſung 203 11. Quittung ............ 202 ......... 203 204 205 205 206 207 207 208 V. Reading Lessons. Die Deutſche Spradje ............ Der Straßenjunge .......... Des Deutſden Vaterland ............................................... Der junge Muſiker....... Der Bettier und der Staiſer Friedrid)...... Ein Abenteuer ........ Die Hunnent...... Eintritt ist die deutſdie Sdyweiz ............ Johann Wolfgang von Göthe ........ Des Sönigs Grab........... Aufruf des Stönigs von Preußen........ Sturzweilige Fragen ........... Meeresſtille ..... .......................... Der Cirkniper See ...................... Der vorſidytige Träumer ............... Was der Mond erzählt. ............ 209 211 ....., 212 213 12 vi CONTENTS OF No. 228 230 243 .. 24-5 246 .......... PART THIRD. COMPEND OF GERMAN GRAMMAR. I. Introduction. . Page 1. History of the German Language............ 217 2. Characteristics of the German Language. ............. 3. Extent of Use of the German Language.................................... 4. German Dialects............ 231 5. Comparison of Words in the Indo-European Languages................. 234 6. Comparison of Words in the Teutonic Languages........................... 236 7. Illustration of the Historical Development of Words in the German Language ......... 238 II. German Grammar. I. ORTHOGRAPHY............. 1. Vowels and Diphthongs .. 241 I Dipuitnongs .............. 2. Consonants ................................ . . . . . . . . .... 3. Division of Syllables................................ 4. Accent 6 ..... 5. Capital Letters................. ............ 247 6. Comparison of German and English Words. . 24.8 II. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX..... 252 1. The Article............... 253 Syntax of the Article................. 2. The Noun................... 1. Accidents of the Noun............... 2. Gender of the Noun ............ 258 3. Declension of the Noun............ 261 4. Syntax of the Noun........... 3. The Adjective ... 269 1. Declension of the Adjective........... 2. Comparison of the Adjective........... 3. Syntax of the Adjective......... ...... 275 4. Numerals................................ 276 1. Cardinal Numbers........ 2. Ordinal Numbers ............ 278 3. Numeral Nouns............... 280 4. Numeral Adverbs ........... 281 5. The Pronoun. .................. 281 1. Personal Pronouus............ 282 2. Possessive Pronouns .............. 3. Demonstrative Pronouns.... 284 4. Indefinite Pronouns ..., ...................................... 254 2012 266 .......................... 270 272 277 283 286 THE GERMAN COURSE. vii Page 292 294 . No. 5. Interrogative Pronouns .......... 289 6. Relative Pronouns ................ 290 7. Syntax of the Pronoun ........... 291 6. The Verb ......................................... 1. Conjugation .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... .... 293 1. Moods................................ 293 1. The Indicative Mood.... 293 2. The Subjunctive Mood .......... 294 3. The Conditional Mood ..... .................................... 294 4. The Imperative Mood. ................... 5. The Infinitive Mood ............... 293 2. Participles ....... 296 1. The Present Participle... 297 2. The Perfect Participle................ 297 3. Tenses ......................................... 298 4. The Passive Voice ............................................. 299 2. Auxiliary Verbs.................................................... 300 1. Conjugation of havcit, to have............ 301 2. Conjugation of ſcint, to be ................. 303 3. Conjugation of werden, to become ........... 305 3. Regular Verbs .................. 307 Conjugation of the Regular Verb licbcn, to love.............. 307 4. Irregular Verbs.............. · 1. Classified List of Irregular Verbs ...................................... 311 2. Alphabetical List of Irregular Verbs................ 314 3. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb (dlageit, to strike............ 322 4. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb kommen, to come............. 324 . 5. Compound Vcrbs........... ................. 326 1. Separable Compound Verbs. ................ 326 Conjugation of the Separable Compound Verb annchment, to accept................ 328 2. Inseparable Compound Verbs .......... ........................... 329 Conjugation of the Inseparable Compound Verb verſicheit, to understand.............. 332 3. Doubly-compounded Verbs.................................................. 334 6. Reflexive Verbs (Conjugation of)........... 335 7. Impersonal Verbs .......................... 8. The Passive Voice ............... 338 9: The Potential Verbs............. 340 1. The Verb folcit .............. 340 2. The Verb wollen ............. 343 3. The Verb könncii................ 4. The Verb mögcit ............. ... 347 5. The Verb diirfcii .................... ................................. . 349 6. The Verb miſſcut.............. .............. 352 .. 310 ................ ...... 337 ........... ! ... 315 viii ULU CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. No. 1 Page 10. The Syntax of the Verb........... 354 1. Verbs governing the Accusative Case. 354 2. Verbs governing the Genitive Case.......... ................ 356 3. Verbs governing the Dative Case ....... 358 7. The Adverb............ 360 1. Classification of Adverbs..................... 366 2. Comparison of Adverbs ............... 368 3. Syntax of Adverbs .............. 369 8. Prepositions. ........ 372 1. Construction of Prepositions............. ....................... 373 2. Prepositions governing the Genitive Case............... 375 3. Prepositions governing the Dative Case................................... 4. Prepositions governing the Accusative Case 5. Prepositions governing the Dative and Accusative Cases........... 388 6. Remarks upon Prepositions ........ 392 9. Conjunctions ....... ....................... 394 1. List of Conjunctions ............................. 395 2. Co-ordinative Conjunctions ........... 396 . 3. Subordinative Conjunctions......... 4. Remarks upon Conjunctions ....... 398 10. The Interjection ............. 404 11. Arrangement of Words.......... 405 ............ 380 385 S........ C 1 397 404 . ................. 415 PART FOURTH. VOCABULARIES. I. Personal Proper Names ............. II. Geographical Proper Names........ III. Abbreviations. ........... IV. German Moneys, Weights, and Measures ..... V. Classified List of Words........... VI. German-English Vocabulary ............. . . . . . . . . . . ....... VII. English-German Vocabulary .......... VIII, General Index ........ ................................................ 12V 423 431) 477 495 A GERMAN COURSE. Part First; CONTAINING PRACTICAL LESSONS FOR LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. A 2 INTRODUCTION TO THE GERMAN COURSE, İN preparing this German Course, it has been the aim of the author to incorporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as held by the best wri- ters upon philology, and the best practical educators in Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features of approved works for the study of mod- ern languages which, in Europe more especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features have also been introduced, which have been adopted with eminent success by the most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. Care has been taken to give due relative prominence to each of these tried and approved principles, and to mould them into a homogeneous system adapted to the wants of classes in the Colleges, Academies, and other high-schools of learning in America. Farther than this, but little claim is laid to originality, and none is laid-to novelty of method. The German Course consists of four parts : Part First; containing practical lessons for learning to read, write, and speak the German Language. Part Second; containing familiar conversations in Ger- man and English, models of letters, and forms of business, and selections from German literature. Part Third; containing a compend of German Grainmar, INTRODUCTION. with an introduction upon the listory, characteristics, and dialects of the language. Part Fourth; "containing tables of German moneys, weights, and measures, abbreviations, personal and geo- graphical proper names, and German-English and English- German vocabularies. In Part FIRST, the Lessons are arranged with reference to the rapid and natural learning of the German Language, . guage. A person thrown suddenly into a foreign country, the language of which he wishes to learn, finds himself embar- rassed at the outset by five chief wants. He needs equally and immediately a vocabulary of words, a knowledge of grammatical forms, of syntactical laws, and of idiomatic construction, and of the laws of pronunciation. It is the aim, in the Lessons, to meet these wants, in such consecutiveness of order as to make the knowledge of the language a natural and symmetrical growth. The points of contact and resemblance of the German with the English language are presented first, more recon- dite, complicated, and divergent principles being reserved till later in the lessons. As far as possible, every word and grammatical princi- ple is presented in a living, natural sentence, before it is defined or explained. The concrete thus precedes the ab- stract. The practice precedes the theory. The principles of the language are presented to the mind of the learner as the result of his deductions from the examples, which are given before the rules. Many expert students will indeed detect the meaning of the new words and the new gram- matical laws without referring to the vocabulary or to the grammatical part of the lesson. The habits of scrutiny, of investigation, of independent analysis and classification, which are so strongly developed in translating works of the classic authors, and which are justly esteemed to be among INTRODUCTION. the most important results of linguistic study, are by this means called into exercise at the very outset in the study of the language. Experience shows, also, that this method, while of great value to the earnest student, at the same time awakens interest and even enthusiasm in the compar- atively listless scholar. . The Lessons are usually composed of five parts. In the first part a few sentences are given, with English transla- tion, and containing the new grammatical principles of the lesson ingrafted upon words already known. The atten- tion is thus drawn at first solely to the new principle. Secondly, the same principles are applied to sentences, without translation, and containing new words. From similarity to corresponding English words, or from the connection of the sentence, the meaning of these new words will often be surmised. Thirdly, the Vocabulary contains the new words used in the lesson. These are not arranged alphabetically, but they are grouped according to their logical 09 grammatical similarity or contrast in meaning and use. Fourthly is given an explanation, with appropriate illus- tration, of the new grammatical principles involved in the preceding exercises. Advantage is taken, both in the para- digms in the lessons and in the formal grammar of Part Second, of heavier type and of spaced letters, to attract the eye to the variable part of the inflected word. Fifthly, the lesson closes with an exercise of English sentences containing the new words and principles, to be translated into German. The exercises in pronunciation contain short and simple sentences with many proper names. They contain no words the meaning of which is not readily discerned, nor do they involve more difficulties of pronunciation than occur in ordinary discourse. In the exercises of the subsequent lessons two things are avoided: on the one hand, platitudes and unmeaning or INTRODUCTION. unnatural sentences; on the other hand, proverbs and sen- tences of recondite meaning. As far as possible, the sen- tences are such as would be used in ordinary conversation. Facts in German history, geography, biography, literature, and daily life are frequently introduced, thus assisting the student to feel that he is learning the German language. That the student may not unconsciously acquire the habit of translating every thing from English into German liter- ally, a few simple idiomatic expressions are introduced early into the lessons. But, in order not to bewilder the student, idioms are not given extensively until after the development of the laws of etyinology and syntax. As it is desirable to introduce the difficulties to the lan- guage gradually, the use of the German Current Hand is re- served until the eye of the student shall have become famil- iar with the printed German type. The formation of deriv- atire and compound verbs, nouns, and adjectives is illustra- ted with much fullness. In the latter part of the Lessons, after the student has gathered gradually and progressively a partial knowledge of the grammatical principles of the language and has applied these principles to gror of words, he is referred to appropriate portions of the Com- pend of German Grammar in Part Third for the further elucidation of grammatical principles, and to the vocabula- ries in Part Fourth for new words that may occur in the Exercises. In order to familiarize the eye with different kinds of type, various sizes and styles of letters are intro- duced in the exercises of the last few lessons. That the student may also be finally thrown entirely upon his own resources, the English exercises, to be translated into Ger- man, are omitted from several of the last lessons. PART SECOND can be used by travelers and others, to whom a facility in conversing and in using forms of busi- ness is an immediate necessity. The references to the les- sons and the Grammar will assist in understanding the construction of the sentences. The conversations will also 1 INTRODUCTION. serve to initate the student, who has passed through the lessons of Part First, more fully into the idiomatic spirit of the German language. The reading lessons will suffice to prepare the way for the German Reader. PART THIRD contains a Compend of German Grammar, which is sufficiently comprehensive to meet all ordinary wants, even in reading classic authors. The Grammar is preceded by an Introduction, which will serve to show the position the German language occupies among its cognate languages, the chief epochs of its history, its most promi- nient characteristics, and, above all, to show that the Ger- man, like all other living languages, has been, and is yet subject to growth, development, and change. In the body of the Grammar itself are also introduced frequent notes upon the history and development of grammatical forms. To the earnest student, this philosophical and historical method of studying the German language will serve as a stepping-stone to higher studies in the broader fields of philology. Part Fourth contains, in addition to the usual vocabu- laries and index, a list of the most important abbreviations, and tables of the moneys, weights, and measures of the lead- ing states of Germany. In conclusion, the author commits the German Course to the American public, with the liope that it may contrib- ute something to the promotion of the study of this noble ture, science, history, and criticism, and to the introduction of a more practical, and, at the same time, of a more truly philosophic method of studying the living languages into our Colleges and other schools of learning. Page Missing in Original Volume Page Missing in Original Volume LESSON I. PRONUNCIATION. German Letters. Karl, Vater, Paar, Vater, Paar, Peter, Peter, Geheii, Beſſer, Eliſa, Berliit, Besser, Elisa, Ijt, Ist, Sind, Marie, Gotha, Polen, Sohi, Morgen, Rubeis, Bruder, Mutter, Brann, Rhein, Mai, Europa, Wiell, Johann, Juli, Lektion, Cato, Cicero, Quotient, Exercise I. Roman English English Letters. Pronunciation. Translation. Karl, Karl, Charles. Fah'-ter, Father. Pahr, Pair. Pay'-ter, Peter. Gehen, Gay'-en, Go. Bes'-ser, Better. Ay-lee'-eah, Elisa. Berlin, Ber-leen', Berlin. Ist, Is. Sind, Zint, Are. Marie, Mah-ree', Mary. Gotha, Go-tah, Gotha. Polen, Po'-len, Poland. Solin, Zone, Son. Morgen, Mor'-gen, Morning Rubens, Roo'-bens, Rubens. Broo'cer Brother. Moot'-ter, Mother. Brown, Brown. Rhine. Mai, My, Europa, Oy-ro'-pah, Europe. Wien, Veen, Vienna. Johann, Yohann', John. Juli, bo'-lee, July. Lektion, Lek-tsee-on', Lesson. Cato, Cah-to, Cato. . Cicero, Tsee'-tsay-ro, Cicero. Quotient, Quo-tsee-ent', Quotient. Bruder, Mutter, Braun, Rhein, Rhine, May. 12 · PRONUNCIATION. Grammatical. 1. The German Alphabet has twenty-six letters: German Roman Names of German Roman Names of Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. A, a, A, a, Ah. N, 11, N, n, Enn. B, 6, Bay. | 0,0, 0, 0, Oh. C, C, $, P, P, P, Pay. D, d, 2,9, Q, q, Koo. E, e, R, r, R, 1, Err. Eff. S, ſ, (®), Ess. G, g, Gay. 2, t, T, t, Tay. H, 1, Hah. 11, 1, U, u, do. I, i, Ee. V, V, V, v, Fow. 3, 1, J, j, Yote. W, w, W, w, Vay. h, k, K, k, Kah. *, Ľ, X, X, Iks. 2,1, , 1, El. Y, , Y, y, Ip-sce-lon. M, 11, M, m,. Emm. 1 3,ô, Z, Z, Tset. T'say. Day. Ay. Wa wim ndã cã each F, f, Rem. The short form & is used at the end of syllables: Nu'-bens, Pots': dant, Bres'-lait, Dres'-sci. 2. The Vowels a, e, i, o, it are pronounced thus: 1. A, a, like a in father: Va'-ter, Ca'-to, Starl, Go'-tha. 2. E, e, “ a “ mate: Pe'ster, Gershen, Ersden. ee“ meet: E-li-ſa, g'-ſi-dor, Ber-lin'. 4. 0,0," “ mote: Go'-tha, Po'-len, Lektion'. 5. U, 11, “ 00" moot: Ru'-bens, U'-ti-ka, Bru'-der. 3. The Diphthongs at, ci, eu are pronounced thus: 1. Au, au, like ou in mound : Braun, Xu'-guſt, Haus. 2. Ei, ei, o į 6 might: Rhein, Stei'-er-mark. (Ey, ey), “ “ “ : Mey'-er-heim, Spy'-er. (Ai, ai), « « «6 « : Mai, Mainz, Bai'-ern. 3. Eu, eu, “ o “ moist : Eu-ro'-pa, Neu-eng'-land. Rem. The form cy is used only in a few proper names; the form ai is used -- in but a few words. PRONUNCIATICN. 4. The Vowel is long: 1. When doubled in the same syllable: Paar, Spree. 2. With silent h « « « « : Sohn, Noth. 3. When it closes a syllable (especially when it is ac- cented): Va'-ter, E-li-ſa, Pe'-ter, Po'-len, da, ſo. Rem. 1. 3, followed by silent e, is long: Wien (veen), Ma-rie'. Rem. 2. Diphthongs are always long: An'-guſt, Bai'-ern, Eu-ro'-pa. Rem. 3. Great care is necessary not to give a short sound to long vowels. 5. The Vowel is short when followed by: 1. Double consonants: Mut'-ter, bet-ſer, Jo-hann'. 2. Two consonants (as a rule): Lef-ti-on', Nu'-bens. 3. A single consonant (in a few monosyllables); as: in, mit, das, e8, mart, was, bin, hat, etc. Rem. In most unaccented syllables, the c is almost suppressed: Þe'-ter, 6. The Consonants are pronounced thus: 1. B, d, f, h, 1, 1, 111, 1t, p, q, r, t are pronounced like B, d, f, h, k, l, m, n, P, 9,?', t in English. Exc. 1. V, at the end of a syllabl 2, like p in deep: Dieb, thief. Exc. 2. D, 66 66 66 66 t o boat: Vad, bath. Exc. 3. R, not beginning a syllable, is trilled: Bru'-ocr, Va'-ter. Ecc. 4. 2, in final -tion (not preceded by 8), like ts : Lef-ti-on'. 2. C, before a, 0, or it (or before a conso- ilant) is pronounced like k in king: Ca'to, Corſica. C, before other vowels “ ts “ mits : Ci'cero, Cercs. 3.G, ...........“ g“. go: Goʻtha, gelyen. “ at the end of a syllable. ..... (see Less. II., 2). 4. 3, ..........like y “ yoke : Johann' Ju’li. S, before a vorrel " " zone: Sohn, Eliſſa. “ before port, andat the beginning of a radical syllable, like sh“ ship: Spree, Stein. 56 otherwise ..... " S « less: Stubens, das. 6. V (in native words), “ f“ fine: Da’ter, Ha'vel. vine : Wien, Wolfga. 8. &,............ « Wax : Mar, Fe’lir. 9.3,........... 6 ts “ mits : Mainz, Zi'on. tra hã ã 14 ni II PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). Exercise 2. Sarl Braun iſt in Ber-lin', Charles Brown is in Berlin. Eli'sſa Braun iſt in Go'-tha, Eliza Brown is in Gotha. Ma-rie' Rit'-ter iſt in Wien, Mary Ritter is in Vienna. Wil-helm war in Ba'zben, William was in Baden. Er iſt jetzt in Frank'-furt, He is now in Frankfort. Wir wa'-ren in Mann'-leim, We were in Mannheim. Mein Vater und mein Bru'- My father and my brother der ſind in Hal-le, are in Halle. A-le-ran'-der von Hum'-boldt, Alexander von Humboldt. Wil-helm von Hum'-boldt, William von Humboldt. Pester Paul Nu'-bens, Peter Paul Rubens. Ja'-kob und Wil-helm Grimm, Jacob and William Grimm. Herr A. D. lin'-de-mann, Mr. A. D. Lindemann. Frau von Wol'=fen-ſtein, Mrs. von Wolfenstein. Mainz, Sto'-blenz, Bre'-men, Mayence, Coblentz,Bremen. A-me'-ri-ka, Eu-ro'-pa, America, Europe. A'-ſi-en, A-fri-ka, In-di-en, Asia, Africa, India. I-ta'-It-ent, Spa'-ni-en, . Italy, Spain. Hol-land, Un'-garn, Po'-len, Holland, Hungary, Poland. LESSON II. PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). 1. The Um'-lauts äi, ö, ü, äu are pronounced thus : · 1. Ae, ä, called ah-umlaut, like e (see Less. I., 2, 2). 2. De, ö, called oh-umlaut, has no equivalent in English. It is like the French eu. Its pro- nunciation may be approximated by producing a sound between that of oo in boon, and that of ur in burn: Börſe, Ecchange, ſchönt, beautiful. 3. Ue, ii, called oo-umlaut, has no equivalent in English. It is like the French U. The pronun- ciation of Süd (south) may be approximated by PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). 15 placing the lips as if to whistle, and then trying to pronounce the word seed: Düffel-dorf. 4. Aeu, äu, has the same sound as eu (Less. I., 3, 3) 2. e., that of oi in moist: Mäu'=fe, mice. 2. There are two Guttural Sounds in the German that do not exist in the English language: 1. Ch, dh (and g, when ending a syllable) after a, o, u, or au, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of h in hope : hoch (hohh) high ; Tucy (toohh), cloth; Tag (tahh), day; madjen (ma'-hhen), to make. 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla- ble dien), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh in shall: idi (ihsh), I; redyt (rehsht), right; Kind'-djen (kind'- hshen), a child; Mün'-dyen (min-shen), Munich. Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, di sounds like l: Chor, choir. Rem. 2. Also before s in the same radical syllable, like k: Wadys, was. 3. The Consonantal Combinations (dy, th, ng: 1. Sth, like sh in shall: Schau, sound; Fiſch, fish. 2. th, " t " tone : Thon, clay; Tho'-mas, Thomas. 3. ng, " ng“ sing : fing'-en to sing; Fing'-er, finger. 4. The Compound Consonants, or those joined together in printing, are d (ch), & (ck), ſt (st), ß (sz), 1 (tz). 1. & is pronounced like k in bale : der Bäst'-er, baker. 2. f“ $ " less: Ge-fäß', a vessel. 3. B" " .“ ts " mits : Nütz'-licy, useful. N 66 5. Doubled Letters are named separately in spelling : aa, aa ... ah-ah. ff, ff. .... eff-ef'. ce, ee ... ay-ay. ll SS. . . . ess-css. 00, 00 ... oh-oh. | tt, tt . . . . tay-tay. Rem. The vowels i and it cle never doubled. . 16 PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). 1 6. There are no silent letters in German, except: 1. h, when used to indicate the long sound of a vowel ; 2. c. 66 66 66 666 66 66 66 i: 3. w, after 0 (occuring in a few proper names). 7. The Accent may be understood to be on the first syllable, when not otherwise marked in the vocabularies. 8. Capital Letters are used as initials to all nouns, and to the pronouns Sie (you) and Ihr (your). Dritte Aufgabe. Herr Werber iſt in Ber-lin', Mr. Weber is in Berlin. Wo iſt Herr Mey'-er-heim? Where is Mr. Meyerheim? Er iſt jezt in Deutſdy-land, He is now in Germany. Wil-helm und Karl Rit'-ter ſind William and Charles Ritter nicht in Mag'-de-burg, are not in Magdeburg. Sie ſind jetzt in Dres'-den, They are now in Dresden. Ber-lin' iſt in Preu'-ben, Berlin is in Prussia. Wien iſt in De'=ſter-reid), Vienna is in Austria. Dres'-den iſt in Sady-ſen, Dresden is in Saxony. Leip'-zig iſt in Sachſen, Leipsic is in Saxony. War'-(dau iſt in Po'-len, Warsaw is in Poland. Prag iſt in Böb-men, Prague is in Bohemia. · Vierte Aufgabe. Er'-ſte, zwei'-te, drit'-te, vier'-te, First, second, third, fourth, fünf-te, Techg-te lef-ti-on', fifth, sixth lesson. Drit-te, vier'-te Auf-ga-be, Third, fourth exercise. Mün'-chen, Augs'-burg und Munich, Augsburg, and Nu- Nürn'-berg ſind in Bai'-ern, remberg are in Bavaria. Prag, Wien, Tri-eſt' und Inng's Prague, Trieste, and Inns- brud find in De'-ſter-reidy, pruck are in Austria. Hei'-del-berg iſt in Ba'-den, Heidelberg is in Baden. Düf-rel-dorf iſt in Preu'-ßen, Dusseldorf is in Prussia. Deutſd'-land, I-ta'-lisen und Germany, Italy and Russia Ruf'-land find in Eu-ro'=pa, are in Europe. . PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF ſein, TO BE. 17 LESSON III. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF THE VERB ſcint, TO BE. Iſt Herr Men'-zel in Ber-lin'? Is Mr. Menzel in Berlin? Nein, er iſt in Köln, No, he is in Cologne. Wo wa'-ren Sie ge'=ſtern? Where were you yesterday? Wir wa'-ren in Hal-le, We were in Halle. Das Budy war nidyt tycu'-er, The book was not dear. Es iſt heu'-te ſehr warm, It is very warm to-day. Heu'-te iſt es ſehr warm, 06 66 Fünfte Aufgabe. 1. Wo find Herr Nein-hardt und Herr Men'-zel? 2. Herr Nein'-hardt iſt in Ber-lin', und Herr Men'-zel iſt in Pots'-dam. 3. Wa'-ren Sie ge'-ſtern in Köln? 4. Nein, ich war ge'-ſtern in Frant'-furt. 5. Iſt Frau Neu'-mann heu'-te in Ber-lin'? 6. Ja, fie iſt in Ber-lin'. 7. Iſt Fräu'-lein Neu'-mann and in Ber-lin'? 8. Nein, ſie iſt heu'-te in Dres'-ben. 9. Wo iſt daß Budy? 10. Hier iſt es. 11. Das Wet-ter iſt jetzt ſehr warm. 12. Vor'-ge-ſtern war es ſehr kalt. 13. Ge'-ſtern wa'-ren wir in Pots'-dam. 14. Potsé-dam und Mag'-oc-burg find in Preu'-ben. 15. Preu'-Ben, Bai'sern, Sady-fen, Ba': den, Ol-den-burg und Med-len-burg ſind in Deutſdy-land. Herr N., Mr. N. Frau N., Mrs. N. Fräu'-lein N., Miss N. Das Budy, the book. , Tudy, the cloth. Wet'-ter, the weather. Bil-lig, cheap. Theu'-er, dear. Warm, warm. Heiß, hot. Kalt, cold. Pots'-Dam (see page 419). Vocabulary Idh, I. Er, he. Sie, she. E8, it. Wir, we. Sie, you. Sie, they Ja, yes. Neint, 110. Nidit, not. und, and. Audy, also. Wann? when? Jetzt, now. Heu'-te, to-day. Geſtern, yesterday. Vor'-ge-ſteru, day before yesterday. Nodi, still, yet. Sehr, very. Wo? where? Hier, here. Da, there. In, in. I 18 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES or ſein, TO BE. Grammatical. 1. The Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Irregular Verb fein, to be, are conjugated thus: Present Tense.. Imperfect Tense. idy biit, I am. idy war, I was. Sie ſind, you are. Sie war'-en, you were. er iſt, he is. er war, he was. wir ſind, we are. wir war'-cit, we were. Sie ſind, you are. Sie war'-cli, you were. ſie ſind, they are. fie v ar'-cit, they were. Rem. A single consonant between two vowels is pronounced with the last vowel. The vowels are divided in the paradigms so as to show the termina- tions, not as the words are pronounced. 2. Adverbs of time usually precede those of place: Er war geſtern hier, He was here yesterday. Er iſt jetzt in Berlin, He is now in Berlin, 3. When the adverb, adverbial expressions, or adjective precedes the verb, the nominative follows the verb: Hier iſt es. Here it is. Hcute iſt es ſehr falt It is very cold to-day. Stalt iſt es heute, It is cold to-day. In Berlin war er nidit, He was not in Berlin. Rem. This inversion is much more common in German than in English. It is especially appropriate where emphasis is placed on the adverb or adjective. . Exercise 6. 1. Where is Mr. Hoffmann to-day? 2. He is in Magde- burg to-day. 3. When was he in Berlin? 4. He was in Berlin day before yesterday. 5. Mrs. Weber and Miss We- ber are now in Frankfort. 6. Yesterday they were in Cologne. 7. The weather is cold to-day. 8. Yesterday it was very warm. 9. Where is the cloth? 10. There it is. 11. Is the cloth cheap? 12. Yes, it is very cheap. 13. Is Mr. Meyerheim yet in Cologne? 14. Yes, he is there yet. 15. Is Breslau in Prussia? 16. Yes, Breslau, and also Magdeburg, Berlin, and Göttingen, are now in Prussia. 17. Mr. Dietz is now in Halle. 18. Mr.Weber is in Frank- fort. 19. Yesterday I was in Leipsic and in Halle. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. 19 LESSON IV. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. Was kaufen Sie? What are you buying? Ich kaufe Papier, I am buying paper. Der Sdyneider kauft Tudy, The tailor is buying cloth. Wo wohnen Sie jetzt? Where do you reside now? Wir wohnen jeßt in Berlin', We reside now in Berlin. Hören Sie was er ſagt? Do you hear what he is saying? Ich höre was er ſagt, I hear what he is saying. Was fauften Sie? What were you buying? Ich kaufte Papier', I was buying paper. Er wohnte in Magdeburg, He resided in Magdeburg. Hewas residing in Magdeburg. He did reside in Magdeburg. Siebente Aufgabe. 1. Wo wohnt Herr Sdumann? 2. Er wohnt jetzt in Frank: furt. 3. Er wohnte früher in Heidelberg. 4. Wohnen Sie in Halld? 5. Nein, wir wohnen nicht in Halle, wir wohnen in Leipzig. 6. Kauften Sie das Tudj? 7. Nein, ich kaufte cs nicht; es war ſehr theuer und nicht ſehr gut. 8. Hört der Schü- ler, was der Lehrer ſagt? 9. Ja, der Schüler Gört was der Lehrer ſagt. 10. Der Kaufmann hörte was der Schneider ſagte. 11. Hörten Sie was Heinrich und Wilhelm ſagten? 12. Ja, ich hörte was ſie ſagten. 13. Der Vater und die Mutter lieben das Kind. 14. Das Stind liebt den Vater und die Mutter. 15. Wo kauften Sie das Buch? 16. Ich kaufte c$ vorgeſtern in Leipzig. 17. Der Sdüler kaufte das Budy und das Papier. 18. Wann waren Sie in Augsburg ? 19. Ich war vorgeſtern in Augsburg. 20. Herr Meyerheim, Herr Roſenthal und Herr Ehrlich wohnen in Köln, Herr Screierınacher und Herr Auerbads wohnen in Magdeburg, Frau Förſter und Fräulein Eggers woh- nien in Gotha, und Herr Bindemann wohnt in München. 20 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. Vocabulary. Der Manii, the man. Hör-en, to hear. 1 Bater, the father. Sauf-en, to buy. 1 Saufmann, the merchant. Lieb-en, to love. 1 Lehrer, the teacher. Lob-en, to praise. 1 Sdyneider, the tailor. Sag-en, to say. , Schüler, the scholar. Wohn-en, to reside. Die Frau, the woman. Wer? who? , Mutter, the mother. Was ? what? Das Kind, the child. Aber, but. Papier', the paper. Gut, good. Heinrid), Henry. Früher, formerly. Wilhelm, William. Neulid), lately. 1 Grammatical. 1. The regular Verb lieben, to love, is conjugated thus: INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id lieb'-e, I love. idi licb'-te, I loved. Sie lieb'sen, you love. Sie lieb'-tent, you loved. er liebt, he loves. er lieb'-te, he loved. wir lieb'-eli, we love. wir lieb'-tcit, we loved. Sie lieb'-en, you love. Y sie lieb-tent, you loved. ſie lieb'-en, they love. ſie liebstent, they loved. D ci ; 2. That part of the simple verb which precedes the ter- mination of the infinitive (en) is called the stem, as: lieb-en, kauf-en, ſag-en, wohit-en. Rem. 1. In regular verbs the stem remains unchanged in conjugation. 3. For the three forms of conjugating the verb in Eng- lish, the German has but one—the simple form : Idy kaufe, I buy, I am buying, or I do buy. Wir kauften, We bought, We were buying, "We did buy. Kaufen Sie ? Buy you? Are you buying? " Do you buy? Kauften Sie ? Bought you? Were you buying? 6 Did you buy ? Id, kaufte nicht, I bought not, I was not buying, “ I did not buy. 4. The German language has four Cases: the Nomina- tive, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. 21 1. The Nominative corresponds to our Nominative. 2. The Accusative is rendered by our Objective. 5. The form of the Definite Article varies according to the gender of the noun which it limits. The form of the accusative of the masculine only of the article differs from that of the nominative: Nominative: Der Mann, die Frau und das ſind ſind hier. 66 The man, the woman, and the child are here. Accusative: Fidy ſehe den Maini, die Frau und das Kind. Objective: I see the man, the woman, and the child. Exercise 8. 1. The teacher praises the scholar. 2. The father praised the child. 3. Did you hear what Henry was saying? 4. No, I did not hear what he said. 5. We heard what he said. 6. Did he not hear what the teacher said? 7. Yes, he heard what the teacher was saying. 8. The merchant was buying the cloth. 9. The woman did praise the child. 10. The child loves the woman. 11. Where did you buy the book? 12. I bought it in Berlin. 13. When did you buy it? 14. I bought it day before yesterday. 15. Do you hear what Miss Steffens is saying? 16. I hear what she is saying. 17. Where does Miss Steffens reside? 18. She is now residing here in Berlin. 19. Formerly she resided in Hamburg LESSON V. PRESENT AND IMPERTECT TENSES or haben, TO HAVE. ACCUSATIVE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Haben Sie das Budh? Have you the book ? Ja, id habe es, Yes, I have it. Heinrids hat das Meſſer, Henry has the knife. Wilhelm hatte das Budy, William had the book. Beſudsten Sic Herrn Straft, als Did you visit Mr. Kraft when Sie in Berlin waren? you were in Berlin? Ja, wir beſudyten ihn ſehr oft, Yes, we visited him very often. 22 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. Neunte Aufgabe. 1. Wer hat das Buch? 2. Ich habe es nicht; Johann hatte es, als er hier war. 3. Was haben Sie da? 4. Wir haben das Buch und das Papier. 5. Herr Schade beſuchte uns ſehr oft, als wir in Gotha waren. . 6. Herr Hoffmann beſucht Herrn Nitter. 7. Was ſuchen Sie? 8. Ich ſuche das Meſſer. 9. Hier iſt es. Ich habe es. 10. Was kaufte der Stoch? 11. Er kaufte Brod, Fleiſch und Obſt. 12. Das Zimmer iſt viel zu klein. 13. Der Zimmermann verkaufte das Haus. 14. Der Kaufs. mann kaufte das Haus. . 15. Wo ſtudirte Heinrich Neumann, als er in Deutſchland war? 16. Er ſtudirte in Leipzig und Berlin. 17. Wohnt Herr Niedner in Gotha ? 18. Nein, er wohnt in Dresden, aber er wohnte früher in Gotha. Vocabulary. Der Bäder, the baker. Groß, large, great. ! Stody, the cook. Klein, small, little. 1 Zimmermann, the carpenter. Schön, beautiful, fine. Das Brod, the bread. Sdiledit, bad. Fleiſdy, the meat. Fleißig, industrious, diligent. 1 Mehl, the flour. Faul, indolent, lazy. 1 Meſjer, the knife. Als (conj.), when, as. 1 Obſt, the fruit. Viel (adv.), much. 1 Zimmer, the room. zu (adv.), too. Beſudy-en, to visit. Oft (adv.), often, frequently. Sudy-en, to seek, look for. Nody (adv.), yet, still. Studir'-en, to study. Selten (adv.), seldom. Verkauf'-en, to sell. Zuwei'-lent (adv.), sometimes. Grammatical. 1. The Irregular Verb Yaben, to have, is conjugated thus: INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id, hab'- e, I have. idi hat'-te, I had. Sie hab'- en. You have. Sie hat'-ten, You had. er hat, He has. er hat'-te, He had. wir bab'-er, We have. wir Yat'- ten, We had. Sie hab'-en, You have. Sie hat'-ten, You liad. ſie hab'-en, They have. 1 ſie hat'-ten, They had. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT or haven, TO HAVE. 23 he. 2. Nominative and Accusative cases of the Personal Pronouns : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. Nom. Acc. Obj. Nom. Nom. Aco. Obj. id, I. mid, me. wir, wenns, us. Sie, you. Sie, you. Sie, you. Sic, you. cr ihni, him. fic, they. ſię, them. fie, she fie, her. they. them. ca it. CB, it. they. them. 3. The word Herr takes - it in all cases of the singular except the Nominative: Herr Kraft beſudyte Herr-n Nyein, Mr. Kraft visited Mr. Klein. 4. The conjunction alo, when (called in English Gram- mar a conjunctive adverb), refers only to past time. It requires the verb following it to be placed at the end of the (subordinate) sentence: Heinrid; kaufte das Bud), als er in Henry bought the book when he was Heidelberg war, in Heidelberg. 5. The adverb nicht (not) is generally placed after the object of the verb: Er beſudte uns nidit, .. Ile did not visit us. Exercise 10. 1. Did the merchant sell the cloth ? " 2. Yes, and the tailor bought it. 3. The baker buys flour and sells bread. - 4. Where did William Diez study when he was in Ger- many ? 5. He studied in Heidelberg and Berlin. 6. Did you call upon (visit) Mrs. Hoffmann when you were in Magdeburg? 7. Yes, we called upon her. 8. What are Henry and William looking for? 9. They are looking for the book. 10. There it is. 11. The scholar is very indus- trious to-day. Sometimes he is not very industrious, and he does not study very much. 12. Is the weather very hot in Germany? 13. No, the weather is rarely very hot in Germany, but in Italy it is often very hot. 14. Berlin is very large and beautiful. 15. Who lias the book and the paper? 16. The scholar has them. 24 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. LESSON VI. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. Wer hat das Buds gekauft? Who has bought the book ? Id habe es gekauft', . I have bought it. Haben Sie gehört, was Herr Have you heard what Mr.We- Weber geſagt hat? ber said ? Er hat geſagt, daß Herr Meyer He said that Mr. Meyer has Ons Haus gekauft hat, bought the liouse. Er hatte den Schüler gelobt. He had praised the scholar. Es hatte lange geregʻnet, It had been raining long. wach that the insig get 4.6% Elfte Aufgabe. 1. Herr Blumenbady hatte das Haus filhon gekauft. 2. Starl ſagt; daß er das Buch in Leipzig gekauft hat. 3. Heute bat es ſehr ſtark gedon'nert und geregʻnet. 4. Es hat geſtern ſehr ſtark geregʻnet, als wir in Potsdam waren. 5. Herr Beder hatte das Gemäl de ſchon vorgeſtern volen'det. 6. Er malte cs, als wir ihn beſudy'ten. 7. Was macht das Kind ? 8. Es ſpielt. 9. Schnei'et es jetzt? 10. Nein, es hat heute viel geſchnei'et, aber jezt ſchneiet es nicht mehr. 11. Haben Sie das Muſe’um oft beſucht, als Sie in Berlin waren? 12. Ja, wir beſuchten es ſehr oft. 13. Es iſt wirklich ſehr groß und ſehr ſchön. 14. Das Muſeum in Dresden iſt auch ſehr ſchön. 15. Der Zimmermann hatte das Haus ſchon gebaut. 16. Das Haus iſt wirklich ſehr groß, aber febr ſchön iſt es nicht. Vocabulary. Bau'-ent, to build. Audy (adv.), also, too. Mad'-cu, to make, to do. Daß (conj.), that. Mal'-en, to paint. Lang'-e (adr.), for a long time. Spiel'-e11, to play. Mehr (adv.), more. Vollend'-eri, to complete. Sdıon (adv.), already. Blitz'-en, to lighten. Starf (adv.), harul, severely. Don'ner-it, to thinder. Wirt'-lid) (adv.), really. Ha'gel-11, to lail. Der Ma'-ler, the painter. Neg'-11eit, to rain. Das Gemäl'-be, the picture. Schnei'-eii, to show. o Muje'-um, the inuseum. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. 25 Grammatical. 1. The Perfect Participle of Regular Verbs is formed by ll prefixing ge-, and adding -t to the root: lieb'-en, to love ; ge-lieb=ť', loved. bau'-en, to build ; ge-bau-ť, built. 2. Verbs with inseparable prefixes (as be, ent, er, ge, ver, zer), and those ending in siren, do not take ge- : Be-ſud'-en, to visit. Be-f u du =ť, visited. ſt 11-dir'-en, to study. ſtu-sir-t', studied. 3. The Verb has three principal parts, as in English: Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. lieb'- en, to love. Tie b'- te, loved. ge-lieu'-t, loved. hag'el - n, to hail. bag'el-te, hailed. ge-hag'el-t, hailed. be-u dy'-en, to visit. We-judi' - te, visited. Ve-ſudy'-t, visited. ver-kauf'-en, to sell. ver-fa il f'-te, sold. Ver-kauf'-t, sold. ſtu-Sir'- cn, to study. ft u-dir'-te, studied. ftu-dir'-t, studied. 4. The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Transitive and Impersonal Verbs are formed by the use of the auxiliary haben, to have, and the perfect participle. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. idh habe geliebt, I have loved. id hat-te geliebt, I had loved. Sie hab'-en you have loved. | Sie ſjat'-ten you had loved. er hat he has loved. er hat-tel he had loved. wir hab'-en , we have loved. wir hat'-ten we had loved. Sie hab'-en ✓ you have loved. | Sie Hat' -ten you had loved. fie hab'-en they have loved. / fie Hat-ten 1 they had loved. 5. The Participle is placed at the end of main sentences: Id habe das Budy gekauft, : I have bought the book. Rem. In subordinate sentences, the auxiliary of compound tenses is placed after the participle: Er ſagte, daß er das Budy ſdon gekauft hat. He said that he has already bought the book. 6. The Perfect Tense is often employed where in English the Imperfect Tense would be used : Er hat das Bud; geſtern gekauft, He bought the book yesterday. 7. When the root ends in -el or -er, usually only -it (in- stead of -en) is added for the termination of the Infinitive: Haʼgel-n, to hail. Don'ner-ti, to thunder. Berbeſ' fer-n, to improve. B PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. Exercise 12. 1. It rained very hard when we were in Düsseldorf. 2. Mr. Ruprecht says that it snowed yesterday in Bran- denburg. 3. It has not snowed here yet. 4. The cook has already bought the bread, the flour, and the meat. 5. The finished the painting when we were in Magdeburg. 7. Yesterday John had not yet bought the book. 8. It has already been raining a very long time. 9. What is William doing? 10. He is not here. 11. Where is he? 12. He is visiting Mr. Lindeinann. 13. The child has already been playing too long. 14. When did you buy the painting? 15. We bought it when we were in Berlin. 16. It is really very beautiful. 17. Have you heard what Mr. Niedner said ? 18. No, I have not heard what he said. 7 LESSON VII. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. GENDER OR NOUNS. Iſt das Buch für den Maler? Is the book for the painter ? Nein, es iſt für den Kaufmann, No, it is for the merchant. Der Wald iſt ſehr groß, The forest is very large. Der Jäger führte den Maler The hunter conducted the durch den Wald, painter through the forest. Der Berg iſt ſehr hods, The mountain is very high. Er iſt auch ſehr ſteil, It is also very steep. Die Stadt iſt ſehr groß, The city is very large. Sie iſt audi ſehr ſchön, It is also very beautiful. Dreizehnte Aufgabe.. 1. Hat Albredyt den Hut gekauft? 2. Nein, er iſt für ihn zu groß. 3. Haben Sie das Band? 4. Nein, es iſt um den Hut. 5. Haben Sie den Bleiſtift? 6. Id habe ihn gehabt, aber idy habe ihn jezt nid)t. 7. Ady (oh), da iſt er! 8. Die Nadyt iſt ſehr warm und ſchön, aber audi ſebr dunkel. 9. Die Kirche iſt ſehr PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 27 groß, doch ſehr ſchön iſt ſie nidit. 10. Hat der Koch die Butter [don geholt? 11. Ja, er hat ſie geſtern ſchon geholt. 12. Hat der Schüler das Buch und das Papier? 13. Ja, er hat ſie. 14. Hat Marie den Hut gekauft? 15. Ja, ſie hat ihn gekauft. 16. Für wen haben Sie das Buch gekauft? 17. Ich habe es für das Kind gekauft. 18. Geſtern war es bis gegen Abend ſehr warm, aber die Nacht war ziemlich kalt. 19. Heute Morgen (this morning) bat Herr Neumann uns durch das Muſeum ge- führt. 20. Der Rock iſt nicht für mich. Dhne Zweifel iſt er für Herrn Becker. Der Abend, the evening. Morgen, the morning. I Berg, the mountain. , Hilger, the hill. 1 Wald, forest, woods. Jäger, the hunter. II Bleiſtift, the lead-pencil. I jut, the hat, bonnet. 1. Nock, the coat. 1 Zweifel, the doubt. Die Stadt, the city. . , Kirdie, the church. ! Radyt, the night. . 1 Butter, the butter. Das Band, the band, ribbon. Vocabulary. Albredyt, Albert. Sathari'na, Catharine. Dunkel, dark. : Hod), high. Steil, steep. Ziemlid), quite, somewhat. Fillren, to conduct, to guide. Holen, to procure, go and get. Bis, until, till. Durdy, through. Für, for. Gegen, towards. Ohne, without. Um, around. Wider, against. .: Grammatical. 1. The seven - prepositions bis, durch, für, gegen, ohne, um, and wider govern the Accusative Case. 2. Many nouns, which in English would be in the neuter gender, in German are in the masculine or in the feminine gender. Der Hut, the hat. Die Stadt, the city. Das Budy, the book. 1 Rod, the coat. ll Kirde, the church.' 1 1 Tudy, the cloth. 11 Tiſch, the table. l . Nadyt, the night. l , Brod, the bread. Rem. The gender of nouns is one of the most difficult features in the study of the German language. At the same time it is one of the most important, since the foron of the article is determined by the gender of the noun. 28 THE GENITIVE CASE. 3. Personal Pronouns must have the grammatical gender of the nouns for which they stand: Haben Sie den Bleiſtift? Have you the lead-pencil ? Nein, id) habe ihn nicyt, No, I have not it (him. 4. The Accusative of the Interrogative Pronoun wer is weit. The Accusative of was is like the Nominative: Für wen iſt der Nock ? . For whom is the coat? Was haben Sie da? What have you there? Exercise 14. 1. For whom is the coat? 2. It is for me. 3. Is it not too large for you? 4. It is rather large. 5. When did Catharine buy the book? 6. She bought it when she was in Dresden. 7. Without doubt Mr. Ehrlich has already bought the painting. 8. Yes, Albert says, that he bought it yesterday. 9. Has the cook been to get (holen) the butter and the fruit? 10. Yes, he got them this morning. 11. The hunter conducted us through the forest. 12. Have you the lead-pencil ? 13. Yes, I have it. 14. The hill is very steep, but it is not very high. 15. Did Mary buy the bonnet? 16. Yes, she bought it. It was very beautiful, and not very dear. 17. Miss Neuman says that it was very warm in Potsdam towards evening, but she says that it did not rain. LESSON VIII. THE GENITIVE CASE. Anſtatt des Budjes hat der Instead of the book, the schol- Schüler das Papier gekauft, ar has bought the paper. Das Haus des Kaufmannes iſt The house of the merchant is Tehr groß und impoſant, very large and imposing. Hier iſt des Schülers Budy. Here is the scholar's book. Er iſt des Schwaßens müde, He is tired of the chattering. Hier iſt Heinrichs Budy, Here is Henry's book. Wo iſt das Haus des Herrn Where is the house of Profess- Profeſſor von Wolfenſtein? or von Wolfenstein? THE GENITIVE CASE. 29 . Fünfzehnte Aufgabe. 1. Wo waren Sie während des Strieges in Deutſchland ? 2. Wir waren in Leipzig. 3. Während des Sturmes waren Herr Weber und Herr Straft in Potsdam. 4. Warum hat Herr Schultz das Haus nicht gekauft? 5. Wegen des Preiſes. 6. Das Haus iſt ſehr ſchön und ſehr bequem, aber der Preis iſt viel zu hoch. 7. Das Haus des Herrn Profeſſor Meyerheim iſt außerhalb der Stadt. 8. Das Herz der Mutter iſt voll Angſt, weil das Kind ſo krant iſt. 9. Das Dach des Hauſes iſt ſehr ſteil. 10. Die Geſchichte der Stadt iſt ſehr intereſſant. 11. Der Thurm des Domes in Magdeburg iſt ſehr hoch und ſehr im- poſant. 12. Der Thurm des Domes in Wien iſt audi ſehr hoch und ſehr ſchön. 13. Weſſen Buch hat Georg? 14. Er hat Heinridis Budy. 15. Katharina bat Mariens Budy. 16. Der Lehrer hat des Schülers Budi (or das Buch des Schülers). Vocabulary. Der Doktor, -8, the Doctor. Xuſtatt, instead of. 1 Profeſ'jor, —8, the Professor. Außerhalb, outside of, without. Doin, -es, the cathedral. Innerhalb, inside of, within. ! Srieg, -e8, the war. Während, during 1 Preis, -e8, the price. Wegen, on account of. 1 Sturin, -es; the storm. Gewalyz', aware. , Thurm, -es, the tower, spire. Boll, full.. Die Angſt, -, the anxiety.. Bequem', convenient. Freude, -, the joy. Impoſant', imposing. Gefahr', -, the danger. Intereſſant, interesting. 1 Gediid'te, ---, the history. Krank, sick 1 Spitze, —, the point. Warum'? why? Das Dady, -08, the roof. Weil, because. , Herz; -—(ens), the heart. Dod), still, however. Grammatical. 1. The Genitive Case is used with the prepositions anſtatt, außerhalb, innerhalb, während, wegen, etc. Anſtatt des Kaufmannes, Instead of the merchant. 2. The Genitive Case is used without a preposition : 1. Instead of the English Possessive : Das Bild des Lehrers, The book of the teacher. THE GENITIVE CASE. 2. After some adjectives, as : gewahi, voll, mide, etc. : Er iſt des Sdwatens müde, He is tired of the chattering. 3. In most cases where the relation is expressed in English by the prep- osition of, the Genitive is used in German without a preposition, especially where limitation is indicated: Die Geſchidyte des Krieges, The history of the war. 3. As to the form of the Genitive Case: 1. With feminine nouns it is the same as that of the nominative. 2. With masculine or neuter nouns, usually cố, 8, cn, or it is added to the nominative. 3. Thc Genitive of the definite article (der, die, bas) is des, der, des. DIASCULINE. : I FEMININE. NEUTER. Nom. Gen. 1 Nom. Gen. 1 Nom. Gen. Der Mann, Des Mann-cs. Die Frau, Der Frau. Das Budy, Des Buch-es. Krieg, Strieg-cs. ,, Stadt, Stadt. , Haus, , Hauſ-cs. , Maler, , Maler-s. , Angſt, Angſt. , Dady, Dadh-c8. Herr, Herr-11. 1 , Mirdie, 1 Mirdie. 1. Kind, 1 Kind-es. Rem. The Genitive of nouns is given hereafter in the Vocabularies. 4. As in English, the noun possessed may be placed without its article after the name of the possessor: . Der Bruder des Lehrers, or des Lehrers Bruder. The brother of the teacher, or the teacher's brother. 5. The Genitive of Proper Names of Persons are usual- ly formed by adding . But masculine names in s, id), , 3, and feminine names in e, have the genitive in -ens : Nom. Heinrid), Wilhelm, Herr Neumann, Franz, Marie', Gen. Heinridys. Wilhelms. Herrn Neumanns. Franzens. Mari-cns. 6. To titles of office or dignity, the word Herr or frau is usually prefixed (especially in direct address): Herr Profeſſor Beder, (Mr.) Professor Becker. Herr Graf von Bismarck, (Mr.) Count von Bismarck. Frau Gräfin von Bismard, (Mrs.) Countess von Bismarck. Rem. Especially in the oblique cases, the definite article also may be pre- fixed (the 8 being in this case omitted in the Genitive): Das Haus des Herrn Doktor Neumann, or Herrn Doktor Neumanns Haus. 7. Most Geographical Proper Names form the Genitive by adding 8: Die Geſchidíte Berlins, The history of Berlin. 8. The Genitive of wer (who) is weſſen (whose). THE DATIVE CASE. Exercise 16. 1. Doctor Friedrich resides outside of the city (as of the city walls). 2. Professor Lindener's house is outside of the city. 3. Whose book have I? . 4. You have Henry's book. 5. The history of the war in Germany is very interesting. 6. The tower of the Cathedral in Freiburg is very imposing. 7. The price of the book is too high. I did not buy it. 8. Were you in Germany during the war? 9. Yes, we were in Prussia. - 10. The roof of the church is too steep. 11. The spire of the church is very beautiful. 12. Why did you not buy the coat? 13. On account of the price; it was much too dear. 14. It rained quite hard during the night. · 15. The father is full of anxiety, because the child is very sick. 16. Where is Mary's pencil? 17. Catharine has it. 18. Mary has Catharine's book. PRO * LESSON IX. THE DATIVE CASE. Herr Weber iſt nid)t zu Hauſe, Mr.Weber is not at home. Die Nadriditen von dem Kriege The news from the war is ſind heute ſehr intereſſant, very interesting to-day. Der Hund folgt dem Jäger nad The dog follows the hunter dem Walde, Die Nadhricht iſt dem Kaufmann The news is very disagreeable ſelr unangenehm, to the merchant. Sicbenzehnte Aufgabe. 1. Wem gehört der Bleiſtift? 2. Er gehört dem Maler. 3. Herr Nupredyt hat den Koch nadi der Stadt geſchickt. 4. Der Vater hat das Buds dem Kinde geſchenkt. 5. Herr Bergmann hat dem Maler das Gemälde gezeigt.. 6. Herr Bernhard wohnt außerhalb der Stadt. 7. Die Bibliothek iſt gegenüber dem Mu- ſeum (or dem Muſeum gegenüber). 8. Das Haus des Herrn Pro- 22 CASE. THE DATIVE TYY feſſor Eberhard iſt dem Hauſe des Herrn Leutner ſehr ähnlids. 9. Wem gehört die Zeitung? 10. Sie gehört Herrn Klein. 11. Wo iſt Heinricly? 12. Er iſt zu Hauſe. 13. Wir haben das Buch nach Hauſe geſchickt. 14. Das Bud war ilm febr nützlid). 15. Herr Viebahn iſt aus Dresden. 16. Das Kino ſpielt mit dem Hunde. 17. Georg führte uns von dem Muſeum Vocabulary. Der Hund, -es, the dog. Folgen, to follow. , Snave, 11, the boy. Gehö’ren, to belong. , Soldat, -en, the soldier. Sdienker, to present, to give. Die Bibliotheť, -, the library. Zeigent, to show. , Nachridit, ---, the news. Xus, out of, from. " Zeitung, —, the newspaper. Äußerhalb, outside of, besides. e dezlidy, similar, like. Gegenü'ber, opposite. Uirähnlii), dissimilar, unlike. Mit, with. Ingeneſ:n, agreeable. Nady, towards, to. Unangeneln, disagreeable. Nützlidy, useful. Z11, to, at. Schädlid), injurious. Gera'de (adv.), directly, just. Grammatical. 1. The Dative Case is governed: 1. By some Prepositions, as: aus, außer, gegenüber, mit, nady, von, zu, etc. 2. By some Adjectives, as: ähnlics, angenehm, etc. 3. By many Verbs, as: folgen, gehören, ſchicken, etc. Rem. The Dative Case frequently corresponds with the English objective, preceded by to, either expressed or understood, especially when it is the indi- rect object of a verb. Er ſdicte dem Schiffer das Bild), He sent (to) the scholar the book. 2. Examples of the declension of the definite article and of nouns in the singular number : Masculine. I Feminine. Neuter. Nom. der Man 11. die Frau. das sind. Gen. des Ma n 11 - C8. der Frau. des Sin -e8. Dat. dci Mann-l. der Fra u. dent i ind- C. Acc. dent Ma 11 11. die Frau. das stins. THE DATIVE CASE. 33 TI Rem. 1. Some masculine and neuter nouns are declined as follows : Nom. der Bater, Herr, Soldat'. das Wetter. Gen. Dcs Vater-ø, Herr = 11, Sol.dat'-ell. des Wetter - 8. Dat. dent Bater, Herr-11, Soldat'- ell. den Wetter. Acc. den Bater, Herr = n, Soldat'-cn. das Wetter. Rem. 2. Feminine nouns are unchanged in the singular. Rem. 3. The e is often dropped from the termination of many nouns that have $8 and e in the genitive and dative. 3. The English Cases are rendered in German thus: 1. The Nominative by the Nominative in German. 2. The Possessive by the Genitive in German. 3. The Objective by the Gen., Dat., and Acc. in Germ. 4. Among the idiomatic uses of the Dative Case, the fol- lowing may be noticed: 1. Adjectives follow the noun they govern in the dative : Das Bud) iſt dem Sdüler nütlid, The book is useful to the scholar. 2. Gegenüber may precede or follow the noun: Der Lirdye gegenüber, or gegenüber der Firdye, Opposite the church. 3. With two personal nouns the accusative precedes the dative case; a personal noun precedes one referring to a thing, whatever the case of either may be: Er hat den Knabeit dein Marer geſdict, He sent the boy to the painter. Er dicte dent Maler das Budi, He sent the book to the painter. 4. Nach Hauſe means towards home; zu Vauſe means at home. 5. „Herr Weber iſt aus Berlin“, means that Berlin is or was Mr. We- ber's permanent residence or his native place. 6. Nad indicates motion to a place; zu, motion to a person. Er führte uns nady benı Muſeum, He conducted us to the museum. Er führte uns zu dem Maler, He conducted us to the painter. 5. The Dative of wer (who) is went (to whom, etc.). Exercise 18. 1. To whom does the house belong? 2. It belongs to Mr. Schumann. 3. Did the boy hear what the soldier said ? 4. What did the merchant send to the tailor? 5. He sent pencil. 7. The coat belongs to the soldier. 8. The book is B2 34 PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. very injurious to the child. 9. The child is following his father to the city. 10. Mr. Riegel has sent the book to Professor Kraus. 11. The book belongs to Mr. Riegel. 12. The news was very agreeable to the soldier. 13. Mr. Auerbach is from Magdeburg. 14. The church is just opposite to the house of Mr. Dietrich. 15. The painter showed Mr. Krumm the painting. 16. The child is very unlike the father. 17. To-day the newspaper is very inter- esting. 18. The teacher presented the book to the scholar. 19. The boy' was playing with the dog. LESSON X. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE CASES. Das Buch iſt auf dem Tiſche, The book is on the table. Heinrich legte es auf den Tiſch, Henry laid it on the table. Der Stuhl iſt vor dem Ofen, The chair is before the stove. Er ſtellte ihn vor den Ofen, He put it before the stove. Das Budy iſt neben dem Pa- The book is close by the pier', paper. Er legte es neben das Papier', He laid it close by the paper. Der Brief iſt in dem Buche, The letter is in the book. Ich legte ihn in das Budy, I laid it in the book. Neunzehnte Aufgabe. 1. Er hängte das Gemälde über den Tiſch. 2. Id Idhidite den Brief über Hamburg nadı Ameʼrika. 3. Das Dorf iſt zwi- (dhen dem Walde und dem Berge. 4. Der Bleiſtift iſt zwiſden dem Budje und dem Papier. 5.. Heinrich legte den Bleiſtift zwis ſchen das Buch und das Papier. 6. Der Hund iſt in dem Gar- ten. 7. Das Boot iſt unter der Brücke. 8. Der Bleiſtift ift unter dem Budje. 9. Wer hat ihn unter das Buch gelegt? 10. Herr Meyer hat dem Maler geſagt, daß er den Brief über Bres men geſchickt hat. 11. Wir haben das Gemälde an die Wand gehängt. Es war auf dem Boden. 12. Herr Meyer hat uns von PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 35 der Kirche nach der Bibliothek geführt. 13. Karl lat das Buds lange geſucht. 14. Heute Morgen habe ich den Brief und das Buch dem Herrn Profeſſor Burdhart geſchickt. 15. Wo wohnt er? 16. Er wohnt in Leipzig. '17. Das Boot iſt an dem Ufer. 18. Id habe das Gemälde noch nicht an die Wand gehängt. 19. Die Lampe iſt auf dem Tiſche. Der Brief, -es, the letter. Boden, -8, the floor. Garten, -3, the garden. Ofen, —8, the stove. Tiſd), -e8, the table. Die Brücke, -; the bridge. Wand, —, the wall. 1 Lampe, —, the lamp. Das Boot, -28, the boat. Ufer, -8, the shore. le lidt,8, the candle. Vocabulary An, on, to, at. Auf, upon, on. Hinter, behind. In, in, into. Neben, near, close by. Ueber, above, by way of. Unter, under, below. Vor, before. Zwiſdien, between. Hängen, to hang (active). Legen, to lay. Stellen, to place, to put. Grammatical. 1. The nine prepositions an, auf, hinter, in, neben, über, unter, vor, zwiſchen, govern the Accusative Case when motion towards the object they govern is expressed. They govern the Dative Case when rest within or motion inside of the object they govern is expressed. Er legte das Budy auf den Tiſdy, *He laid the book on the table. Das Budy iſt auf dem Tiſdie, The book is on the table. 2. The correct use of prepositions is one of the most difficult things to be acquired in learning any foreign language. This is owing largely to the fact that there are so many idiomatic expressions connected with their use which can not be literally translated from one language to another. Er geht nady Hauſe, He is going home. Er iſt zu Hauſe, He is at home. He goes by way of Cologne. Das Boot iſt an Dein Ufer, The boat is by the shore. He is sitting at the table. Er iſt aus Berlin', He is from Berlin. 36 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Xn. Auf. lim. 3. This difficulty is also increased to the English-speaking person in learn- ing German by the fact that, in German, prepositions govern three cases, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative; and by the fact that circumstances deter- mine whether certain prepositions shall govern the Accusative or the Dative. Genitive. Dative, : Accusative. Acc. or Dat. Anſtatt. Xus. Außerhalb. Außer. Durdy. Funerhalb. Gegenitber. Für. Hinter. Während. Mit. Gegen. In. Wegen Nad). Dhne. Neben. and many Von. Ueber. others). Wider. Unter. (and some Bor. others). Zwiſdien. Exercise 20. 1. Mr. Bauer has not yet sent the book to the teacher. 2. We hung the painting on (an) the wall yesterday evening. 3. The candle is on (auf) the table. 4. William placed the chair between the table and the wall. : 5. The Cathedral is between the Museum and the Library. 6. The book is Zu table. 8. Where is the letter? 9. It is in the book; I laid it in the book. 10. The boy took (führte) us from the Cathe- dral to the Museum. 11. The garden is behind the house. 12. The bridge is between the village and the mountain. 13. The book, the pencil, and the paper are on the table. LESSON XI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FORMS or ADDRESS. CONTRACTIONS OF PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. Der Brief iſt nicht von ihm, The letter is not from him. Herr Franzier hatte Ihnen die Mr. Kranzler had already Zeitung ſchon geſchickt, sent you the newspaper. Heinrich war nicht mit ihnen, Henry was not with them. Haſt du die Zeitung gehabt? Have you had the newspaper? Wilhelm iſt im Muſeum, William is in the Museum. Frankfurt am Main, Frankfort-on-the-Maine. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1 Einundzwanzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Haſt du den Bleiſtift? 2. Nein, ich habe ihn nid)t. 3. Haſt du die Aufgabe ſchon vollendet? 4. Ja, ich habe ſie voll- endet. 5. Heinrich, haſt du gehört, was der Lehrer geſagt hat? 6. Ja, ich habe es gehört. 7. Habt ihr gehört was der Lehrer ſagte? 8. Ja, wir haben es gehört. 9. Haſt du das Buch auf den Stuhl gelegt? 10. Nein, ich habe es auf den Tiſd gelegt. 11. Wohnt Herr Weber weit (far) von Herrn Kraft? 12. Nein, er wohnt ihm gerade gegenüber. 13. Der Maler zeigte mir daß Gemälde. 14. Das Gemälde gehört Herrn Meyer; der Mas Yer hat es ihm heute Morgen verkauft. 15. Die Bibliothek iſt nid)t weit vom Muſeum. 16. Er legte den Brief ins Budy. 17. Herr Schuhmacher hat uns heute durchs Muſeum geführt. 18. Frau Auerbach und Fräulein Auerbach waren geſtern und vorgeſtern in Frankfurt am Main. 19. Heinrich Niemenhofer wohnte früher in Frankfurt an der Oder. Blind IFRSON. Grammatical. 1. The Personal Pronouns are declined thus: SECOND PERSON. - Sinuir Singular. Nom. idi, dit, thou. (Sie, . you.) rinn. 1 '1 16., etc.* deiner, of thee, etc. (Shrer, of you, etc.) Dat. mir, wale, etc.* dir, to thee, etc. (Ihnell, to you, etc.) Acc. midi, mne. did), thee. (Sie, you.) Plural. Plural. . Nom. wir, we. ihr, you. (Sie, you.) Gen. unſer, of us, etc.* cuer, of you, etc. (Threr, of you, etc.)|| Dat. 1118, to us, etc. cudy, to you, etc. (Ihnen, to you, etc.) Acc. inis, us. cild), you. (Sie, you.) THIRD PERSON. Singular. Plural. Nom. cr, he. fie, she. e$, it. I ſie, they. Gen. ſciner, of him.* ihrer, of her. ſeiner, of it. 1 ihrer, of them. Dat. ihm, to him. ihr, to her. ihnt, to it. í ihnet, to them. | Acc. ihi, him. ſie, her. CB, it. I ſie, them. * For the use of the cases, see Lessons VII., VIII., and IX. W 4 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 2. The forms of address in German differ from those in the English: · 1. In ordinary discourse the form of the third per- son plural is used instead of the regular forms of the second person of both numbers. When thus used the pronoun begins with a capital letter. 2. Besides using du in addressing Deity, the regu- ·lar forms dut and ihr are employed in speaking to near relatives or very dear friends, and also in speaking to servants and often to children. Rem. This use of the form of the third person plural for the second person of both numbers has been constantly increasing since its first introduction at the beginning of the eighteenth century. 3. In the Pres. and Imperf. Tenses of Regular Verbs : 1. The second pers. sing. adds to the root -ft or -eſt. 2. The 66 6 6 plur. 66 666 66 -t or.-ct. Sing. du lief '=ſt, thou lovest; du lieb'-teſt, thou didst love. Plur. iljr lieb'-t, you love; ihr liel'-tet, you did love. Rem. 1. When the root ends in 0, 1 (or gn), -eſt and -et must be added : Sing. Du wart-eſt, thou waitest; du wart-cteſt, thou didst wait. Plur. ihr wart-ct, you wait; ifr wart-ctet, you did wait. Rem. 2. The present indicative of ſeint has di viſt, and ihr ſeid. The present indicative of haben has dit haſt, and ihr habt. 4. The following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable and are sometimes necessary: 1. With Dat. Sing. dcnt: 1 2. With Dat. Sing. | 3. With. Acc. Neut. das : ant for an dem. · Feminine der: 1 ans for an das. vcint " bei deni. zur for zu der. | aufs " auf das. hintcrnt “ hinter dem. dirdis - burd) Das. into in bem. fiirs « für das. unterntunter deni. ins " in das. “ von dem. um3 6 ilin bas. zum " zu dem. Frankfurt am Main (an dem Main), Frankfort-on-the-Maine. Er iſt im Hauſe (in dem Hauſe), He is in the house. Er kommt vom Muſeum (von dem Muſ.), He comes from the Museum Das Bud; iſt fürs Rind (fitr das Kind), The book is for the child. Er geht ins Haus (in das Haus), He goes into the house. vojit THE IRREGULAR VERB werdell, TO BECOME. Exercise 22. 1. Charles, hast thou not had the lead-pencil? 2. I put it into the book. 3. What art thou looking for? 4. I am look- ing for the pencil. 5. What are you looking for? 6. We are looking for the book. 7. Hast thou been to get (holen) the bread? 8. I got it this morning. 9. Where wast thou? 10. I was in the garden. 11. Did you (Sie) buy the paint- ing? 12. No, I did not buy it. 13. When did you (Sie) send the letter to Professor Hoffmann? 14. I sent the let- ter to him yesterday. 15. The letter is in the book. 16. The church is not far (weit) from the Museum. ung: 9. Whe ing? 12 N the garden. 11 LESSON XII. THE IRREGULAR VERB werden, TO BECOME. FUTURE TENSES. Das Wetter wird kalt, The weather becomes cold. Sie werden reich, They are becoming rich. Es wurde ſehr heiß, It became very hot. Es wird bald regnen, It will soon rain. Sie werden in Berlin' wohnen, They will reside in Berlin. Der Maler wird das Gemälde The painter will probably wahrſchein'lich übermorgen have finished the paint- vollen'det haben, ing day after to-morrow. Dreiundzwanzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Heute wird es gewiß' ſehr heiß ſein. 2. Das Buch wird langweilig. 3. Gegen Vbend wurde das Wetter kalt, nafs- und ſehr unangenehm. 4. Der Staufmann wurde ſehr reids. 5. ES wird ſchwül. 6. Es wird wahrſdeinlich vor Abend regnen. 7. Morgeit wird der Maler das Gemälde ganz gewiß vollendet Ha- ben. 8. Der Tiſdiler wird dic Kommo'de morgen repari'ren. 9. Der Bauer wird das Korn verfau'fen. 10. Der Vater wird das Kind loben, weil es fleißig iſt und weil es die Äufgabe ſo ſchnell vollendet bat. 11. Heute Abend (this evening) wird Wilhelm Schröder den Direktor 068 Muſeums beſuchen. 12. Morgen Abend (to-morrow evening) werden wir den Herrn THE IRREGULAR VERB werdent, TO BECOME. Profeſſor Siebert aus Wien beſudjen. 13. Wälrend der Nacht wurde es ziemlid, kalt, aber jetzt iſt das Wetter warm und anges nehm. 14. Der Snabe wird die Leftion' bald gelernt haben. 15. Wir werden das Haus nicht kaufen. 16. Es hat gebon'nert; es wird bald regnen. Vocabulary. Der Arzt, -23, the physician. Arni, poor. " Baucx, -3, the peasant. Neid), rich. , Bibliothekar, -8, the librarian. | Freundlid), kind, friendly. 11 Direktor, -B, the Director. Koſtbar, costly. , Tiſdier, --$, the cabinet-maker. Langweilig, tedious. 11 Weizen, --$, the wheat. Naß, wet. , Roggen, —, the rye. Sdywvül, sultry. Die Stommo'de, —, the bureau. Bald, soon. Das Horn, -28, the grain. Soe'beni, just now. Bebauen, to cultivate, to till. Morgen, to-morrow. Lernen, to learn. llebermorgen, day after to-morrow. Sduell, fast, quick. Tadcru, to blame. Gewiß', certainly. Niepari'ren, to mend. Walırſdein'lid), probably. Grammatical. 1. The Irregular Verb werden, to become, is conjugated thus: INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. Id werd'-C, I become. Idy wurd'-e, I became. Du wirſt, thou becomest. Du wurd'-cſt, thou becamest. Er wird, he becomes. Er wurd'-c, he became. Wir werd'-cit, we become. Wir wurd'-en, we became. Ihr wero'-ct, you become. Jhr wurd'-ct, you became. Sie werd'-en, they become. Sie w u 18'-cit, they became. 1 forming the Future Tenses of all verbs: . First Future : Es wird regnen, It will rain. Second Future : Es wird geregnet haben, It will have rained. Rem. The Future Tenses in German express simple futurity, and not in- clination or desire, as is often the case in English. FUTURE TENSES. 41 3. The Indicative Mood of lieben, to love. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. idy lico-C, I love. id) lieb'- te, I loved. du lieb'-ſt, thou lovest. du lieb'- tcſt, thou lovedst. er lieb-ť, he loves. er lieb'-te, he loved. wir lieb'- eit, we love. wir lieb'- teit, we loved. ilyr lieb'-t, you love. ihr liel'-tet, you loved. ſie liels'-ent, they love. fie lieb'- ten, they loved. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. I have loved, etc. I had loved, etc. id) hab'-e geliebt'. id) hat'- te gclicbt'. du haſt geliebt'. bit hat'- teſt geliebt'. er hat geliebt'. er lat'-te geliebt'. wir hab'-en geliebt'. wir hat'- ten geliebt'. ihr hab' geliebt'. ihr Vat'- tet geliebt'. fie lab'-ci geliebt'. ſie hat'-ten geliebt'. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. I shall love, etc. I shall have loved, etc. id werd'-e lieben. idy werd' =€ clicbt habent. du wirſt lieben. bu wirſt geliebt' qabell. er wird lieben. er wird geliebt' haben. wir wero'-en lieben. wir wero'-en geliebt' have it. ihr werd'-ct liebent. ihr werd'-ct geliebt' habent. fie wers'-en lieben. | ſie werd'-en geliet' ly aben. 0 16 Exercise 24. 1. The physician will visit Mr. Meyer to-day. 2. The carpenter is building the house. 3. The peasant is till- ing the field. 4. The merchant is becoming very rich. 5. The tailor became very poor. 6. The history became very tedious. 7. It is becoming sultry. 8. It will soon rain. 9. It is thundering now (Toeben). 10. The peasant will sell the wheat and the rye. 11. The director of the Museum was very kind towards (gegen) us. 12. He took (führen) us through the Museum. 13. The librarian took us through the Library. 14. The Library is very large and costly. 15. The teacher blamed the child because it did not learn the lesson. 16. We have rent- ed the house. GERMAN CURRENT HAND. LESSON XIII. GERMAN CURRENT HAND. 1. Capital Letters. A L. LOL of GGG A B C D E F G H I J RL WW ( ♡ CR7% K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y v v w x 7 2 2. Small Letters. the * b. In a . . d e f fijblm - h i j k l m 2 g - У Р " un no tag or q r s t u v w x y z 3. Umlaut Vowels and Combined Consonants. te te na terre it te P4 ä ö ü äuch schst sz tz GERMAN CURRENT HAND. : Fünfundzwanzigſte Aufgabe. olensselitt L-Lexxsey, си.2 . Berlin, Hamburg, Lulus, Barcelona, a Minnehmen, Wiren, Dresden, lo loco, Ricl.. Frankfurt. Köln. -getxxxtZzxzet. Münden, Wien, Frankfurt. We boy tock NI Livortezrzety Lesener-tress. Potsdam, Augsburg, Bremen. LLLLLTY Cezarri Deutſchland, Almerita, Amerika, Preußen. Belf-I, Bunten, Polonia Get Los TALLLL CX telezetts Heinrid), Johann, Gcorg, Albredyt. CKMUL Sophic, Maric, Anna, Auguſte. Herr Schmidt, Frau Dietrich 26zcze setgelz. Herr Sdặmidt, Frau Dietriç, . 22 at ,ue 2 ОД 1- с и . Clerxst. Fräulein Mühlbadi. 44 GERMAN CURRENT HAND. Scdsundzwanzigſte Aufgabe. سرد مارس (1.) S. Magyaror seafood is. Lauline Punft in fronteine Rilm (2.) 8 (3.) E. Watcm ift in Golf ا ا ا cy. سر سید محمدا مسدس -ها - 7 م وسسه لام ایران 2 % (8) . م مار مارا سے اس سلاح مرا وه ام اس یاد سسر مس ما من صعد مع مه يه (6) عمیر تر از 22 | ماده و س ارس .محسوسعه بیاید مل کر دیا۔ اس نے سی (1) جسے الاح ماسا عرسهم .سلام سامسة اسرع CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 45 LILL LESSON XIV. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. Sprechen Sie Deutſch? Do you speak German ? Nein, ich ſpreche nur Englifdy, No, I speak only English. Herr Meyer ſpricht Deutſch, Mr. Meyer speaks German. Herr Klein ſprach mit uns, Mr. Klein spoke to us. Er hat mit uns geſprochyen, He has spoken to us. Marie ſingt ſehr ſchön, Mary sings very finely. Siebenundzwanzigſte Anfgabe. 1. Sprechen Sie Deutſch? 2. Wir ſprechen nur Engliſd). 3. Frau Dietrich ſpricht Deutſd und Franzöſiſd). 4. Fräulein Haſenclever ſpricht Franzöſiſch, Italia'niſch und Spaniſch. 5. Der Budbinder hat das Budi ganz gut gebunden. 6. Wo haben Sie den Brief gefunden? 7. Id fand ihn im Buche. 8. Fräu- Tein Hildebrand hat das lied ſehr ſchön geſungʻen. 9. Ja, fie Tang es wirklich ſehr ſchön. 10. Der Dieb hat das Geld geſtoly“- len. 11. Das Kind hat mit dem Stode geſpielt. 12. Ja, und es hat ihn audy gebrod-en. 13. Ich habe heute Morgen mit Herrn Braun geſprochen. 14. Ich habe das Buch lange geſucht, aber idy Habe es noch nicht gefunden. 15. Johann hat es. Vocabulary. Der Buchbinder, —8, the bookbinder. Deutſd), German. 1 Dieb, -es, the thief. Holländiſd), Dutch. , Stock, -e8, the cane. Engliſd), English. Das Geld, -es, the money. Franzö'fiſd), French. I lied, -es, the song. Stali-ä'-niſd), Italian, Nur (adv.), only, but. Spaniſd), Spanish. Wenig (adv.), a little. Latei'niſch, Latin. Ganz (adv.), entirely, very. Griechiſd), Greek. Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. bind'-en, to bind, vand, bound, ge-bund'-en, bound. find'-en, to find, fand, found, ge= fund'se 11, found. fing'-en, to sing, f a 11 g, sung, ge=ju 11 g'z e , sung. ſpred'- en, to speak, prad), spoke, ge-ſprodi'-en, spoken. bredy'-ent, to break, Bracy, broke, ge-brodi'-en, broken. fte h l'-ent, to steal, ſtahl, stole, ge-ft o y l'=en, stolen. Voghat 46 CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. Grammatical. 1. Irregular Verbs have the following peculiarities : 1. They have the ending -en instead of -t in the Perfect Participle. 2. The radical vowel of most Irregular Verbs is changed in forming the Imperfect Indicative and the Perfect Participle. 3. The Imperfect Indicative is usually al monosyllable (having the first and third persons singulur alike, and rarely take the ending -te). 4. Most verbs with e in the radical syllable change it to i or ie in the second and third person of the present singular. 2. The Indicative Mood of ſpredien, to speak: Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. idy predh'- e, I speak. idy ſprad), I spoke. du ſpridh-ſt, thou speakest. duſpra d)-ſt, thou spokest. er ſpridht, he speaks. er ſprad), he spoke. wir ſpredy'-en, we speak. wir ſprach'- cn, we spoke. ihriſøredy'- et, you speak. ihr ſpra dh'-et, you spoke. fie ſpredy'-en, they speak. ſie ſpradh'-en, they spoke. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. I have spoken, etc. I had spoken, etc. id hab'- € geſprodh'en. ich hat'- te. geſprod'en. du haſt geſprody'e it. bii bat'-teſt geſpro dy'e 11. er hat geſpro dh'en. er hat'-te geſprodi'c 11. wir hab'- eit geſprodi'en. wir hat'-teit geſpro dy'e 11, ilir hab'-et geſprodi'e n. ihr hat'- tet geſpro dy'e 11. fie Bab'-en geſprodh' e 11. ſie hat'-ten geſ prody'e 11. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. I shall speak, etc. i I shall have spoken, etc. id) werd'se ſpred, eit. idy werd'-e . geſprodj'en haberi. du wirſt ſpre dy' e n. Du wirſt . geſprody'en haben. er wird ſpre d'en. er wird geſprodyen haben. wir werd'-en ſpredy'e 11. wir werd'-en geſprody'en Haven. ihr werd'-et ſpredj'e11. ihr wero'-et geſprochen haben. ſie wer$'-en ſ predi'e it. I ſie werd'-en geſprody'en haben. 3. The Indicative Mood of ſtehlen, to steal : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. . id ſtehl'-t, I steal. idy ſtahl, I stole. du ſtiehl-ſt, thou stealest. du ſt a h l - ſt, thou stolest. er ſtichl-t, he steals. er ſtahl, he stole. wir ft en l'-en, we steal. wir ft a h!'-eit, we stole. ihr ſteh I'-ct, you steal. ihr ſt a b l'-et, you stole. ſie ſtely I'-c1, they steal. I fie ft a l'- cit, they stole. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 47 Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. ich habe geſtohl'en, etc., id hatte, geſtohl'en, etc., I have stolen, etc. I had stolen, etc.. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. ich werde ſtehl'en, etc., id werde geſtohl'eit haben, etc., I shall steal, etc. | I shall have stolen, etc. 4. The Indicative Mood of binden, to bind : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. tdi bind'-C, I bind. idy band, I bound. du bind'- eſt, thou bindest. | du bano'-eſt, thou boundest. er bind'-ct, he binds. er band, he bound. wir bind'-en, we bind. wir band'-en, we bound. ihr Wind'-et, you bind. ihr band'-et, you bound. fie bind' en, they bind. Pie Band - en, they bound. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. ich habe gebund'en, etc., idy hatte gebund'ent, etc., I have bound, etc. I had bound, etc. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. id) werde bind'en, etc., id, werde gebund'en haben, etc., I shall bind, etc. | I shall have bound, etc. 5. Adjectives are used as adverbs without change of form. Er ſpridyt gut, He speaks well. Sie ſingt ſchön, She sings beautifully. Exercise 28. 1. Do you speak French? 2. No, I do not speak French. 3. Mr. Kreutzner speaks German, Dutch, Italian, and Spanish. 4. Prof. Schmidt speaks Latin and Greek. 5. You have broken the cane. 6. The thief has stolen the hat and the coat. 7. Where did you find the pencil? 8. I found it under the book. 9. George had tied (bin- den) the band on (um) the hat. 10. Mary sung the song very well. 11. Mr. Neidner is speaking; do you hear what he is saying? 12. I was looking for the news- paper. 13. Henry will sing the song. 14. The child had broken the cane. 15. John will find the book. 16. Mr. Krause will buy the house. 48 PLURAL OF NOUNS. LESSON XV. Die Lehrer loben die Schüler, The teachers praise the scholars. Die Gärten ſind ſehr groß, The gardens are very large. Die Berge ſind ſteil, The mountains are steep. Die Hunde folgen den Jägern, The dogs follow the hunt- Die Nächte ſind kalt, The nights are cold. [ers. Albrecht hat die Bücher, Albert has the books. Die Kirchen ſind ſchön, The churches are beautiful. Wer hat die Zeitungen? Who has the newspapers ? Neunundzwanzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Die Schüler haben die Aufgaben vollendet. 2. Die Hü- gel ſind nicht ſehr hoch. 3. Die Zimmer ſind zu klein. 4. Die Gemälde ſind ſchön, aber ſehr theuer. 5. Johann hat die Blets ſtifte auf den Tiſch gelegt. 6. Die Bleiſtifte find neben den Büchern. 7. Die Tiſche ſind in den Zimmern. 8. Die Diebe baben das Geld geſtohlen. 9. Die Dächer der Häuſer in den Dörfern ſind ſehr ſteil. 10. Die Thürme der Kirdjen in den Städten ſind hody und impoſant. 11. Die Maler haben die Ges mälde an die Wände der Zimmer gehängt. 12. Der Maler hat das Gemälde an die Wand des Zimmers gehängt. 13. Herr Dietrich hat die Briefe über Bremen nach Amerika geſchidt. 14. A geſungen. Grammatical. 1. The Definite Article is declined as follows: SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. (The man.) (The woman.) (The child.) Nom. der Man 11. die Frau. das Slind. Gen. des Ma 11 1 -e 8. / der Frau. des Sti 110-es. Dat. deint Man 11 - C. der Frau. bent fpino-. Acc. der M a 11 11. die Frau. das Kino. PLURAL OF NOUNS. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Ncuter. (The men.) (The women.) (The children.) Nom. die Mä 11 n-er. l die Frau - e 11. Die still $ - Cr. Gen. der Män n-er. der Fra u - e 11. der find- e r. Dat. der Mann - er n. deit Frau-en. dei Nino - e r 11. Acc. die Männ-er. die Fra u - e n. die Sind-er. Rem. The Definite Article has the same form in the plural for all genders. 2. The Plurals of Nouns are formed in several ways: 1. With a few nouns the nom. plural is like the nom. singular. 2. Some nouns take merely an umlaut on the radical vowel, when the vowel is capable of it. 3. Some nouns merely add -e to the singular. 4. Some nouns add -e and also take the umlaut. 5. Some nouns add -er (some with and some without the umlaut). . 6. Some nouns merely add -ut to the singular. 7. Some nouns merely add -ent to the singular. 3. Nouns that add =1t or -en in the plural (and also in the gen., dat., and acc. sing., if the nouns are masculine) are said to be of the New Declension. Those that take -r or -en in the plural, and -8 or -e8 in the gen. sing., are said to be of the Mixed Declension. All other nouns are said to be of the Old Declension. Rem. 1. The Old Declension includes by far the greater portion of nouns. Rem. 2. No neuter nouns belong to the New Declension Rem. 3. No feminine nouns belong to the Mixed Declension. 4. Tabular view of the singular and plural of nouns: (Singular.) (Plural.) | (Singular.) (Plural.) | (Singular.) (Plural.) 2. Tiſd), Tiſdie. Maler, Maler. Vater, Väter. 4. Lehrer, Lehrer. Garten, Gärten. Sodi, Köche. Schüler, Sdüler. Ofen,. Defen. Aerzte. Bäcker, Bäder. Mutter, Mütter. Hut, Hüte. Fäger, föger. 3. Rod, Nöde. Meſſer, Meſſer. Abend, Abende. Stuhr, Stühle. Zimmer, Zimmer. Berg, Berge. Nacht, Nädyte. Morgen, Morgen. Bleiſtift, Bleiſtiftc. Stadt, Stübte. Hügel, Hüger. Brief, Briefe. Wände. Arzt, 50 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. (Singular.) (Plural.) 1 (Singulur.) (Plural.) | (Singular.) *(Plural.) 6. Manii, Männer. Bauer,* Bauern.* Doktor,* Doktor'en.* Wald, Wälder. Atnabe, Inaben. Herr, Herren. Budi, Aufgabe, Aufgaben. Profeſſor, * Profeſſor'en.* Dorf, Dörfer. Brüde, Brüden. Soldat, Soldat'en. Gerd, Gelder. Freude, Freuden. Direk’tor,* Direktor'en. Haus, Häuſer. Geſchid)'te, Geldid)t'en. | Bibliotheť Bibliothef'en. Dadi, Däder. Kirche, Nirdjeni. Frau, Frauen. Siind, Finder. Kommod'e, Stommo'ben. Gefalr', Gefahr'en. Lidit, Lidster. 5. Examples of the Declension of Nouns: 1. Old Declension. SINGULAR. 1. Painter. 2. Father. 3. Mountain. ' 4. City. 5. Man. N.'der Maler, der Vater, der Berg, die Stadt, der Mann, G. Des Maler-8, des Vater-8, deß Berg=c8, der Stadt, des Mann-ca, D. Dem Maler, dem Vater, dem Berg-e, der Stadt, Dem Mann-e, A. ben Maler. den Vater. Den Berg. Joie Stadt. Den Mann. PLURAL. N. die Maler, die Väter, die Verg-e, die Städt-e, die Männ-cr, G. Der Maler, der Väter, der Berg-€, der Städt-e, der Männ-cr, D. den Maler-it. den Väter-11, den Berg-cit, den Städt-en, der Männ-crn, 1. die Malcr. die Väter. die Berg-e. die Städt-e. die Männ-cr. 2. New Declension. 3. Mixed Declension. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 6. Boy. 7. Woman. 8. Peasant. I 9. Doctor. N. der foabe, | die Frau, der Baucr, dcr Doftor. G. Des Arabe-il, 1 der Frau, Des Bauer-B, 1 Des Doktor-8, D. dem Knabe-it, | Der Frali, Dein Bauer, bem Doktor, A. den Knabe-it, die Frau. den Bauer. den Doktor. l’LURAL. N. die finale-it, die Frau-en, die Bauer-it, die Doktor'- en, G. der Stnabe-it, I der Frau-cit, der Bauer-11, der Doktor"- ell, D. Dert Knabe-it, | Den Frau-en, beit Bauer-11, I den Doktor' - c11, A. die Nnabe-it. 1 die Frau-cli. lll die Bauer-11. | Die Vorto Rem. 1. The genitive and accusative of the plural number have the same form as the nominative plural. Rem. 2. An -it is always added in the dative plurul if the nominative plural does not already end in that letter. In the Mixed Declension. PLURAL. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 51 Exercise 30. 1. The scholars have bought the books. 2. The books of the painters are on the tables. 3. The cabinet-makers have mended the tables. 4. The stoves, the chairs, and the tables are in the rooms. 5. Miss Neumann sang the songs very beautifully. 6. The nights are now very cold. 7. The towers of the churches in the city are very high. 8. The news (pl.) in the newspaper is to-day very interesting. 9. The gardens are not very large. 10. The soldiers are in the city. 11. Where did you find the pencils ? 12. The pencils were under the books. 13. The tailors have mended the coats. 14. The children are playing with the dogs. • 15. We sent the letters by way of Hamburg. LESSON XVI. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Er hat ein Haus gekauft, He has bought a house. Ich ſuche einen Bleiſtift, I am looking for a pencil. Haben Sie eine Zeitung ? Have you a newspaper ? Er kaufte ein Pfund Thee, He bought a pound of tea. Er kaufte ein Paar Stiefel Das Tucy koſtet einen Thaler The cloth cost a dollar a die Ele, yard. . Das Tuch iſt eine Ele breit, The cloth is a yard wide. Einunddreißigſte Aufgabe. 1. Herr Auerbach hat Beute ein Gemälde gekauft. 2. Hein- ridi hat Beute einen Nock, einen Hut, ein paar Stiefel und ein Paar Schule gefauft. 3. Der Kudy hat ein Pfund Zucker, ein Pfund ſtaffee und ein Pfund Thee geholt. 4. Wünſden Sie eine Taſſe Kaffee oder eine Taſſe Thee? 5. Id wünſdie nur ein Glas Waſſer. 6. Das Kind wünſcht ein Glas Mild) und ein Stück Butterbrod (bread and butter). 7. Die Taſſen 52 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. ſind ſehr ſchön. Papier kaufen? 8. Werden Sie ein Buch Papier oder ein Nies 9. Id werde ein Ries Papier kaufen. 10. Ele. 12. Der Thee koſtet einen Thaler das Pfund. 13. Die Eier koſten zehn (ten) Groſchen das Dutzend. 14. Heinrich hat einen Thaler und zehn Groſchen für das Buch bezahlt. 15. Das Band iſt einen Zou breit; es koſtet zwei (two) Groſchen und redje (six) Pfennige die Elle. 16. Vor einem Jahre (a year ago) waren wir in Deutſchland. 17. Id wünſche ein Quart Milds, ein Pfund Thee und ein Dutzend Eier. Vocabulary. Der Thaler, —,pl. —-, dollar. . Dic Elle, —, pl. -1, yard, ell. 1 Groſdien, -8,pl. —, groschen. | 1 Taffe, -, pl. 11-, cup, cup and 1 Pfennig, --S, pl. —, pfennig. saucer. Fuß, -es, pl. Füße, foot. Zol, -es, pl. —, inch. Das šalır, -es, pl. --e, year. Bogen, -, pl. —, sheet. Dutzend, -28, pl. ~e, dozen. Sduly, -es, pl. -e, shoe. Ei, -es, pl. -er, egg. Handídul, -es, pl. ~e, glove. Paar, -es, pl. -e, pair. Stiefel, -3, pl. ~, boot. 1 Nics, -28, ream. Pantof'fel, -, pl. —11, slipper. Bud), --es, quire. . 11 Staffee, -S, pl. ---, coffee. , Pfund, -es, pl. ~e, pound. I! Thee, -8, pl. ~, tea. Stid, -es, pl. ~e, piece. 1 Zuđer, -B, sugar. Glas, -es, pl. Gläſer, glass. ! Reis, -es, rice. 1 Waſſer, —B, pl. ~, water. Ober, or. 1 Quart, -es, pl. --e, quart. Bezahl'en, to pay. | Breit, broad, wide. Wünſdien, to wish, desire. Lang, long. Groß, large, tall. Tief, deep. Grammatical. 1. The Indefinite Article cin, a or an, is declined thus: MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. (A man.) (A woman.) (A child.) Nom. cin Mann. I. cilt' = Frau. cin . Sting. Gen. ein'-C8 Mannes. I ein'-er Frau. ein'-c3 stindes. Dat. cin'-ent Manne. ein'-er Frau. ein'-em Kinde. Acc. ein'-en Mann. ein'-€ Frau. ein Sind. Rem. The Indefinite Article takes the gender and case of the noun with which it is employed. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 53 2. The following Idioms are used with nouns of weight, measure, quantity, and price: 1. Nouns of weight, measure, and quantity are in apposition with the nouns they limit. Those in the feminine gender alone take the pl. form, the masculine and neuter nouns retaining the singular form in the plural. Er kaufte ein Pfund Zucker und zwei He bought a pound of sugar and Pfund Thee, two pounds of tea. Sie kaufte nur eine Ele Tudy und She bought only one yard of cloth, nidit zwei Ellen Tudy, and not two yards of cloth. 2. Verbs and adjectives indicating weight, measure, quantity, and price require the noun expressing the weight, etc., to be in the accusative case: Es wiegt ein Pfund, It weighs a pound. Es koſtet einen Thaler, It costs a dollar. Das Waſſer iſt einen Fuß tief, The water is a foot deep. 3. Nouns expressing the quantity, following nouns expressing price, are preceded by the definite article : Es koſtet einen Thaler das Pfund, It costs a dollar a pound. Es koſtet einen Thaler die Elle, It costs a dollar a yard. 3. Prussian Money is the standard in North and Central Germany. 1 Thaler=30 Groſden= 360 Pfennige=73 cents in gold. 1 Groſchen= 12 Pfennige= 21 cents in gold. 1 Pfennig = { of a cent. Rem. Foreign Exchange to all Germany is usually made in Prussian thlrs. . Exercise 32. 1. Have you a pencil ? 2. There is a pencil on the table. 3. William bought a pair of shoes and a pair of slippers. 4. The cook will go and get (holen) a dozen eggs, a pound of sugar, and a quart of milk, and a pound of rice. 5. The book will cost a dollar and twenty (zwanzig) groschens. 6. William wishes a glass of wa- ter. 7. Do you wish a cup of tea or a cup of coffee ? 8. I wish a cup of coffee. 9. The cloth is a yard wide. 10. It costs a dollar a yard. 11. I paid a dollar and ten (zehn) groschens for the book. 12. The ribbon is a yard long and an inch wide. 13. It cost ten groschens a yard. 14. The tea cost a dollar a pound. 15. Have you a sheet of paper ? 16. He has a ream of paper. 4 CARDINAL NUMBERS. holt, LESSON XVII. CARDINAL NUMBERS. Die Kirche hat zwei Thürme, The church has two towers. Der Jäger hat vier Hunde, The hunter has four dogs. Der Koch hat ſedis Pfund Reis The cook got six pounds of und acht Pfund Zucker ges rice and eight pounds of sugar. Karl iſt vierzehn Jahre alt, Charles is fourteen years . old.. Herr Dietrid iſt heute vierund- Mr. Dietrich is to-day sixty- redzig Jahre alt, four years old. Im Jahre adytzehnhundert vier- In the year eighteen hun- undſechzig war Herr Profeſſor dred and sixty-four Pro- Behr in Deutſchland, fessor Behr was in Ger- many. Dreiunddreißigſte Aufgabe. 1. Herr Meyer Wat drei Häuſer in Gotha gekauft. 2. Das Tuch iſt eine Elle breit und neun Ellen lang. 3. Der Kod Hat zivei Dugend Eier, fünf Pfund Zucker und ſieben Pfund Reis ges holt. 4. Das Buch koſtet acht Thaler und fünfundzwanzig Groſden. 5. Ich habe für das Band fünfundzwanzig Groſden und ſechs Pfennige bezahlt. 6. Heinrid iſt vier Fuß und elf Zoll groß. 7. Die Brüfe iſt vierundachtzig Fuß lang. 8. Der Thurm des Domes zu (at) Magdeburg iſt dreihundert und dreißig Fuß hods. 9. Der Thurm des Domes zu Wien iſt vierhundert ſechsunddreißig. Fuß hod. 10. Die Bibliothek zit - Berlin hat fedhshundert und fünfzig tauſend Bücher. 11. Berlin hat über fie- benhundert tauſend Einwohner (inhabitants). 12. Dresden lat hundert und vierzig tauſend Einwohner. 13. Magdeburg hat neun- zigtauſend Einwohner. 14. Im Jahre achtzehnlundert (or im Jabre eintauſend adythundert) dreiundſechzig wohnten Herr Fried- land und Herr Wolf in Heidelberg. 15. Herr Braun war geſtern adjtundfünfzig Jahre alt (old). CARDINAL NUMBERS. 55 Grammatical. 1. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows: 1. Eins. 40. Vierzig. 2. Zwei. 50. Fünfzig. 3. Drei. 60. Sedizig. 4. Vier. 70. Siebenzig or Siebzig. 5. Fitnf. 80. Adytzig. 6. Sedis. 90. Neunzig. 7. Sieben. 100. Hundert. 8. Adit. 101. Hundert und eins. 9. Neun. 110. Hundert und zehn. 10. Zehnt. 120. Hundert und zwanzig. 11. Elf. 121. Hundert einundzwanzig. 12. Zwölf. 125. Hundert fünfundzwanzig. 13. Dreizehnt. 136. Hundert ſedjsunddreißig. 14. Vierzehu. 150. Hundert und fünfzig. 15. Fünfzehn. 200. Zweihundert. 16. Sechszehn. 225. Zweiſjundert fünfundzwanzig 17. Siebenzeln or Siebzehn. 500. Fünfhundert. 18. Aditzehit. 1,000. Eintauſend. 19. Neunzehn. 1,005. Eintauſend und fünf. 20. Zwanzig. 1,025. Eintauſend fünfundzwanzig. 21. Einundzwanzig. 1,500. Eintauſend fünfhundert. 22. Zweiundzwanzig, etc. 2,000. Zweitauſend. 30. Dreißig. 20,000. Zwanzigtauſend. 31. Einunddreißig, etc. 200,000. Zweilundert tauſend. 1869. Aditzelnhundert und neunundfedizig, (or) Eintauſend adthundert neunundfedizig. 2. When used without a noun, and not preceded by a definite article, Ein, one is declined like the indefinite article (see Less. XVI.). Rem. 1. The numeral cin takes a stronger emphasis than is given to the in- definite article. Rem. 2. The indefinite article is in fact only a modification in signification and use of the numeral cint. Rem. 3. The form cins is used in counting and in multiplying: Eins, zwei, drei, vier, etc., One, two, three, four, etc. Einmal Eins iſt Eins, Once one is one. 3. The Cardinal Numbers are usually undeclined. Rem. This is especially the case when they are joined to nouns and are preceded by prepositions. Er hat zehn Bogen Papier, He has ten sheets of paper. Mit zehn Bogen Papier, With ten sheets of paper. 10 56 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 4. Single words are usually formed of units and tens, of multiples of a hundred, and of multiples of a thousand up to a hundred thousand.' Vierundzwanzig, Twenty-four. Adityundert, Eight hundred, Adytzehnhundert, Eighteen hundred. Adytzigtauſend, Eighty thousand. Hunderttauſend, A hundred thousand. Vierhundert tauſend, Four hundred thousand. Rem. 1. Some writers put no divisions between numbers : Eintauſendachthündertundſedysundzwanzig (1826). Das Budy hat Hundcit Seiten, The book has a hundred pages. 5. Im Jahre is inserted before the number of the year. Im Jahre 1868 war er in Köln, In 1868 he was in Cologne. 6. The ie is short in vierzchn and vierzig. à and that Mumludge o Exercise 34. 1. The cook has bought two pounds of sugar and six pounds of rice. 2. Mr. Friedland paid fifteen dollars for the books. 3. William is five feet and seven inches high. 4. The tower of the Cathedral at Strasburg is four hundred and thirty-six feet high. 5. The two tow- ers of the Cathedral at Munich are three hundred and thirty-six feet high. 6. The bridge on the Elbe, in Dres- den, is one thousand six hundred and fifty feet long and fifty feet wide. 7. The castle (Sdloß) in Berlin is six hundred and twenty-six feet long, three hundred and seventy-three feet wide, and a hundred and one feet high. 8. It has six hundred rooms. 9. Bremen has sev- enty-eight thousand inhabitants (Einwohner). 10. Ham- burg has a hundred and ninety-six thousand inhabit- ants. 11. The Library at Munich is two hundred and fifty feet long and eighty-five feet high. 12. It has eight hundred and fifteen thousand books. 13. In 1865 (im Jahre, etc.) Mr. Kohner was in Germany, OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. LESSON XVIII. ADJECTIVES USED PREDICATIVELY AND ATTRIBUTIVELY. OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Das Tudy iſt ſehr fein, The cloth is very fine. Wünſden Sie feines Tudj ? Do you wish fine cloth ? Ich habe zwei neue Bücher, I have two new books. Der Tiſdiler hat den Tiſdy mit The cabinet-maker has coy- grünem leder bedcdit, ered the table with green leather. Haben Sie deutſche Bücher ? Have you (any) German books? Ja, wir haben deutſde, engliſde, Yes, we have German, En- franzöfiſdje, italiäniſdie, lateis glish, French, Italian, Lat- niſde und griechiſche Bücher, in, and Greek books. Fünfunddreißigſte Aufgabe. - 1. Das Waſſer iſt kalt. 2. Wünſchen Sie faltes Waſſer ? 3. Idy wünſche warmes Waſſer. 4. Der Soch hat einen Krug voll heißen Waſſers (gen.). 5. Der Buchbinder hat das Buch mit rothem Leder gebunden. 6. Der Schneider hat den Rock mit ſchwarzem Tuche gefuttert. 7. Katharina hat im Garten zwei weiße und drei rothe Noſen gepflückt. 8. Fräulein Hildebrandt hat geſtern Abend zwei ſchöne deutſche Lieder geſungen. 9. Bers lin und Wien ſind große und ſchöne Städte. 10. Herr Profers for Eberhard hat heute zwei italieniſche und vier ſpaniſche Bücher gekauft. 11. Wünſchen Sie graues oder grünes Tuch? 12. Ich wünſche brauncs. 13. Lehrreiche Büder ſind zuweilen ſehr langweilig. 14. Der Dom zu Münden hat zwei hohe Thürme. 15. Berlin hat breite Straßen. 16. Braunſdweig (Brunswick) hat enge, krumme Straßen. 17. Die Häuſer in Braunſchweig haben ſteile Dädjer. 18. Das Haus iſt groß und bequem, aber c8 iſt zu theuer. 19. Der Sattler bat (dwarzcs, gelbes ind braunes Leder gekauft. C 2 58 OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES, Vocabulary. Deutſ() (-er, -6, -es), German. Weiß (-er, -e, e8), white. Engliſd) (-er, -e, -es), English. i Sdwarz (-er, -2, -48), black. Franzö'ſijd) (-er, -e, -es), French. Noty (-er, -2, -es), red. Holländiſdy (-er, -e, -18), Dutch. | Blau (-er, -, -es), blue. Ftalie'niſdy (-er, -e, -e8), Italian, Gelb (-er, -6, -es), yellow. Spaniſd) (-er, -e-, -es), Spanish. Grün (-er, -6, -18), green. Lehrreid) (-er, -6, -18), instructive. Braun (-er, -6, -28), brown. Fleißig (-er, -6, -18), industrious. Der Krug,-es, pl. Strüge, the pitcher. Bequem' (-er, -6, -18), convenient. , Sattler, —8, pl. —, the saddler. Koſtbar (-er, -6, -es), costly. Die Noſe, -, pl. -11, the rose. Gut (-er, -6, -18), good. 1 Straße, -, pl.–11, the street. Grau (-er, -6, -18), gray. Das Futter, —$, pl. —, the lining. Hoh (-er, -6, -es), high ($ 89, Rem. 9). / , leder, —8. pl. --, the leather. Eng (-er, -6, -es), narrow. | Waſſer, —8, pl. —, the water. Strumm (-er, -e, -48), crooked. Scocct'en, to cover. Fein (-er, -6, -es), fine. Futtern, to line. Grob (-er, -C, -es), coarse. Pflücken, to pluck, pick. Y Grammatical. 1. Adjectives, when used to complete the statement or predication of intransitive verbs, are said to be used predicatively: . Das Wetter iſt veiß, The weather is hot. Das Wetter wird heiß, The weather is becoming hot. Rem. 1. When thus used, they are frequently termed predicative adjectives. Rem. 2. Adjectives used predicatively are indeclinable. 2. Adjectives, when used before nouns to directly modify them, are said to be used attributively. Rem. When thus used, they are frequently termed attributive adjectives. 3. Adjectives used attributively, and not preceded by other qualifying words, are declined as follows: SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter (Good man.) (Good woman.) (Good child.) Nom. gut - er Mann. gut-e Frau. gut - eß Kind. Gen. gut-en Mannes. gut-en Frau. § 1 t-cit Kindes. Dat. gut-ent Manne. gut-er Frau. gut- ei Rinde. Acc. guts en Mann. gut-e Frül. gut-C8 Stind. . YmT -59 I PLURAL. Nom. gut-C Männer. I gut-e Frauen. Gen. gut-er Männer. gut-er Frauen. Dat. gut- en Männern. gut-eit Frauen. gute Kinder. gut-er Kinder. gut-en Kindern. Rem. The plural of the adjective is the same for all genders. 4. Adjectives declined as above are said to be of the old Declension. 5. The same termination is given to the adjective when the noun is understood as when it is expressed : Er hat blaues Papier und He bas blue paper and idy Jabe weißes (Papier), I have white (paper). 6. In German, proper adjectives formed from names of countries do not begin with capital letters: Haben Sie deutſche Bidjer ? Have you German books ? Rem. 1. Titular epithets, however, usually begin with capitals: Der Norddeutſche Bund, The North German Confederation. Rem, 2. Proper adjectives formed from names of cities or of persons begin with capital letters: Die Kölniſche Zeitung, The Cologne Gazette. Die Santiche Philoſophie', Kant's Philosophy. Exercise 36. 1. Professor Lindemann has two Italian and three French newspapers. 2. Have you (any) Dutch books ? 3. No, but we have German, French, and Spanish books. 4. Mr. Meyerheim has laid two beautiful and expensive books on the table. 5. The saddler has been buying yellow and black leather. 6. The bookbinder has not bound the books with green leather. 7. He has bound the books with red leather. 8. The tailor will line the coat with brown cloth. 9. The child has picked three white roses. 10. Costly books are sometimes not very instructive. 11. The Cathedral at Cologne will have two very high towers. 12. They will be four hun- dred and seventy-six feet high. 13. Mr. Rieger bought two large and beautiful paintings. 14. He paid for the paintings eight hundred and ninety dollars. 60- POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XIX. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Mein Bruder hat mein Buch, My brother has my book. Wer hat meinen Bleiſtift? Who has my pencil ? Johann hat Ihren Bleiſtift, John has your pencil. Mein Bruder hat ſeine Bücher, My brother has his books. Wo find deine Bücher ? Where are your books ? Wo find eure Büdjer ? Wo ſind Ihre Büdjer ? 2 2 2 2 Sie haben ihre Bücher, They have their books. Sie hat ihre Bücher, She has her books. Er hat ſeine Büder, He has his books. Wir haben unſere Bücher, We have our books. ܕܕ ܂ ܕܕ ܕܕ ܕܕ Siebenunddreißigſte Aufgabe. 1. Was ſuchen Sie? 2. Idh ſuche meine Bücher. 3. Mein Vater iſt nicht zu Hauſe. 4. Mein Großvater hat meinem Bru- der ein Buch gedenkt. 5. Herr Diez, ſeine Frau und ſeine Tochter Katharina ſind heute in Potsdam. 6. Mein Vetter hat vorgeſtern ſeine Eltern in Jena Beſudst. 7. Karl, haſt du deis nen Bleiſtift gefunden? 8. Kinder, habt ihr eure Aufgaben vol- endet? 9. Die Schüler haben ihre Lektionen ſehr gut gelernt. 10. Marie hat geſagt, daß ſie ihre Tante heute wahrſcheinlidj bez ſuchen wird. 11. Haben Sie meinen Bruder heute geſehen? 12. Ja, ich ſah Ihren Bruder heute Morgen im Muſeum. 13. Sehen Sie nicht den Thurm des Domes ? 14. Ad ja, id ſche ihn! 15. Haben Sie die Nadjrichten heute Morgen geleſen? 16. Ja, id) las ſie in Ihrer Zeitung. 17. Was leſen Sie ? 18. Idh leſe die Geſchidyte Deutſchlands. 19. Mein Dheim-Hat meis ner Schweſter das Buds gegeben. 20. Herr Nicmeyer hat mir geſtern Abend geſagt, daß er vorgeſtern meinen Großvater und meine Großmutter in Magdeburg geſehen hat. 21. Meine Els tern ſind heute in Magdeburg. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 61 Vocabulary. Der Mann,-es, pl. Männer, the man, Die Frau, -, pl. -—en, the woman, the husband. wife. :, Bater, —8,21. Väter, the father. ' 1 Mutter,--, pl. Mütter, mother. 1 Sohn, -08, pl. Söhne, the son. 1 , Tochter, -, pl. Tödyter, daughter. , Bruder, —, pl. Brüder, brother. | 1 S&weſter, --; pl. -11, the sister. Dheim, 48, pl. ~e, the uncle. Tante, -, pl. --11, the aunt. . , Vetter, —8,pl. --11, the cousin. Couſi'ne, —, pl. --1, the cousin. , Neffe, —11, pl. -n, the nephew. 1, Niđite, -, pl. —1, the niece. Großvater, the grandfather.. !! Großmutter, the grandmother. ,,Urgroßvater, the great-grandfa- 1 Urgroßmutter, the great-grand- ther. mother. , Enkel, —B, pl. —, the grandson. 1 Enkelin –, pl. —rien, the grand- Die Eltern, the parents (has no sing.). daughter. Der Sdwiegervater, father-in-law. Sdwiegermutter, mother-in-law. , Sdywiegerſohn, son-in-law. 1 Sdywiegertođiter, daughter-in-law Sdywager, -8, pl. Sdwäger, 11 Sdwägerin, -, pl. —rien, sister- brother-in-law. in-law. , Stiefvater, stepfather. ✓ Stiefmutter, stepmother. . Stiefſolin, stepson. I or Stieftodhter, stepdaughter. Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. geb'- en, to give, gab, gave, ge-geb's eit, given. les'-en, to read, Tas, read, ge-res'-en, read. ſel'-en, to see, ſal), saw, ge-feh'-en, seen. Soire his. Grammatical. 1. The following are the Possessive Pronouns : Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. F'em. Neut. mein, mein-e, mein, my. iinſer, unſer-e, unſer, our. dein, Dein-e, dein, thy. euer, eur-e, euer, your. ſein, ſein-e, ſein, ihr, ihr-e, ilyr, their. iſr, ilyr-e, ihr, her. (Ihr, Shr-e, Shr, your.) ſein, fein-e, ſein, its. . . I 2. The Possessive Pronoun mein, my, is declined as follows: SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. (My brother.) (My sister.) (My book.) Nom. mein Bruder, mein-e Sdweſter. mein. Budy. Gen. nicin-es Bruders. mein-cr S(weſter. mein-ca Budies. Dat. iein-ent Bruder. mein-er Schweſter. micin-clit Bude. Acc. mcin-en Bruder. | mein-e Sdiweſter. I incin Bud). 62 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. PLURAL. Nom. micin-e Britber. I micin-c Sdweſtern. I mein-e Bücher. Gen. mein-er Brüder. I mein-er Sdjweſtern. meii-cr Büder. Dat. ieiit-en Brüdern. | mein-cn Sdweſterni. mcin-eit Büdyern. Acc. incin-e Brüder. | mein-c Sdyweſtern. mein-t Büder. Rem. The plural is the same for all genders. 3. Possessive Pronouns are declined like mein. Rem. 1. In declining unſer, c is sometimes dropped from the terminations -C8, -en, -en. Rem. 2. In declining euer, the e after cut is usually dropped. SINGULAR. PLURAL. I SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. unſer, unſere, unſer ; unſere. euer, cure, cuer; eure. Gen. unſers, unſeren, unſers ; unſerer. | eures, eurer, eures ; eurer. Dat. unſerm, unſerer, unſerm ; unſern. eurem, eurer, curem; euren. Acc. unfern, unſere, unſer ; unſere. I euren, eure, euer ; eure. Rem. The same laws that govern the use of du and ihr (see Lesson XI.) govern the use of their derivatives dein and cuer. 4. The Indicative Mode of geben, to give : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. idy geb'- €, I give. idy gab, I gave. du gibſt, thou givest. du gabſt, thou gavest. er gibt, he gives. er gab, he gave. wir geb'-en, we give. wir gab'-en, we gave. ihr geb'-et, you give. ilje gab'-ct, you gave. fie geb's eit, they give. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. id) have gegeb'ent, etc., I have given, etc. I had given, etc. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. id werde geb'en, etc., id, werde gegeb'en haben, etc., I shall give, etc. | I shall have given, etc. 5. The Present Tenses of leſen, to read, and of ſehen, to see: ' idy lef'-e, I read. | ich ſel'-e, I see. dil lieſeſt, thou readest. du fichſt, thou seest. er lieſt, he reads. er ſieht, he sees. wir rea-cit, we read. wir ſeh'- en, we see. . ihr rep'-et, you read. ihr ſeh'-et, you see. fie leſ'-en, they read. | fie ſel'-cit, they see. Rem. The compound tenses of Icſen and fehen are formed in the same manner as those of gebeit. Idy habe geleſen, etc. Šďy labe geſehent, etc. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 63 Exercise 38. 1. Have you seen my gloves ? 2. Yes, your gloves. are on the table. 3. The child sees its father and its mother. 4. Have you read the letter from your uncle in Bonn ? 5. I have not read it yet. 6. Our teacher says that we have learned our lessons very well. 7. John, hast thou finished thy exercise ? 8. Children, have you found your books? 9. The news (pl.) from America in your newspaper is very interesting. 10. William Meyer says that his parents are now in Dres- den. 11. Henry Rauh says that his aunt is very sick. 12. John Meyer says that his uncle has sold his house and his garden. 13. My sister has not yet read the book. 14. My father gave me (dat.) the book. 15. The tailor has mended my coat. 16. William is visiting his great-grandfather. 17. Miss Weigand is my cousin. 18. Mr. Richter is my brother-in-law. 12 LESSON XX. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Der große Tiſch iſt in dem gro- The large table is in the Ben Zimmer, large room. Die deutſdhe Sprache iſt wirklich The German language is ſehr ſchwierig, really very difficult. Ich legte das große Buds auf I laid the large book on den großen Tiſdi, the large table. Die deutſchen Bücher ſind auf The German books are on . den großen Tijden, Fuent, . the large tables. Neununddreißigſte Aufgabe. 1. Die Ausſprache der deutſchen Sprache iſt ſehr kraftvoll, aber ſie iſt nicht ſehr weid). 2. Wem gehören dieſe neuen Bü- cher ? 3. Sie gehören jenem reichen Kaufmanne. 4. Nicht alle 04 NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. lehrreichen Bücher find intereſſant. 5. Nicht jedes Budy iſt lehr- reichs. 6. Herr Schauer wohnt in jenem großen Hauſe gegen- ago) habe ich einige deutſche und franzöſiſche Büder in Leipzig gekauft. 8. Herr Profeſſor Schauer hat viele italieniſde Bücher in ſeiner Bibliothef. 9. Jener ſchwarze Ueberrod iſt zu groß für midy. 10. Dieſe amerikaniſden Gummiſduhe koſteten drei Thaler. 11. Die Farben der preußiſchen Fahne ſind dwarz und weiß. 12. Die Farben der amerikaniſchen Fahne ſind roth, weiß und blau. 13. Die Armee des Norddeutſchen Bundes hat jetzt adthundert tauſend Soldaten. 14. In welchen Städten Deutſdlands waren Sie ? 15. Wir waren in mehreren großen Städten, beſonders in Berlin, Dresden, Wien, Münden, Stutt- gart und Köln. 16. Köln iſt auf der linken Seite und Düſſels dorf iſt auf der rechten Seite des Rheins. 17. Herr Lüdemann wohnt auf der rechten Seite der Straße, der neuen Stirde gegen- über. 18. Sachſen gehört jckt zum Norddeutſchen Bund. 19. Dieſer Ueberrock gehört Herrn Dr. Meſſerſchmidt. Vocabulary. Aler, —, -28, all. Der Bund, --C8, Confederation. Anderer, -, -es, other. 1 Ueberrod, -es, pl. Ueberröde, Dieſer, -6, -28, this. overcoat. Einiger, —,—€3, some, any. 1 Gummiſduly,—8, pl. -e, India- Etlidier, -6, -es, some, any. Lees. some, any. red.) [ed. rubber over-shoe. Erwälı'ter, -, -es, before mention-Die Armee', -, pl. Arme'en, army. Folgender, -, -es, following. 11 Fahne, -, pl. --11, flag. Jeder, -e, -es, cach, every. 1 Farbe, -, pl. —-11, color. Fener, -e, -es, that. , 1 Seite, —, pl. -en, side, page. Mandjer, - , --es, many (a). Melrere (only in pl.), several. I u Ausſpradje, pronunciation. Soldier, -, -18, such. Alt, old. Verſdjie'bener, —,-€8, various. Neu, new. Vieler, -, --es, much, many. Straftvoll, full of power, energetic. Welcher, -, -es, which ? what? Weidy, weak, soft. Weniger, -,-es, little, few. Niedyt, right (right hand, adj.). Norddeutſch), North-German. Link, left (left hand, adj.). Preußiſd), Prussian. beſon'ders, especially. Bairiſch, Bavarian. Amerika'nijd), American. Sädyfiſd), Saxon. Engliſd), English. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 65 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined in the New Declension as follows: SINGULÁR. Masculine, Feminine. i . Neuter. (The good man.) (The good woman.) | (The good child.) Nom. der gut - € Mann. die gut-e Frau. | das gut- e Sind. Gen. Des gut-en Mannes. Der gut- en Frau. | des gut-cn findes. Dat. dem gut-en Manne. Der gut- en Frau. dem gut-cut Kinde. Acc. den gut-en Mann. Die gut-e Frau. I das gut-e Sind. PLURAL. Nom. Die gut- eit Männer. Die gut en Frauen. Die gut-en Rinder. Gen. der gut- en Männer. Der gut-eit Frauert. Der gut- eit Kinder. Dat. Den gut- en Männern. ben gut-en Frauen. den gut-eit Kindern. = 2. Adjectives are declined according to the New De- clension when preceded by: 1. The definite article der, die, das. 2. Any adjective pronoun that is déclined accord- ing to the Old Declension, as dieſer, jeder, jener, mander, ſolcher, welcher (including all adjective pronouns except the possessive pronouns). Rem. After the plurals alle, andere, cinige, etlidje, keine, mandje, fordie, weldie, mehrere, viele, wenige, the adjective usually drops -il in the nom, and acc. PLURAL. Nom. alle gut-e Büdjer. , einige gut-e Büder. | viele gut-e Büder. Gen. aller gut-en Büder, einiger gut-en Büdyer. | vieler gut-en Büder. Dat. allen gut-en Büdyern. einigen gut-eu Büdern. vielen gut-eit Büderii. Acc. alle gute Büder. einige gut-e Bitdier. I viele gut-e Bilder. 4. If several adjectives succeed the words aller, der, dieſer, etc., they all follow the New Declension: Er hat dieſe neu-en deutſdh-cnt He has bought these new German books. Büdyer gekauft, 5. The preposition zil is used after gehören when this verb signifies tò belong to, in the sense of to be a part of : Sadiſen gehört zum Nordbeut- Saxony belongs to is a part of) the den Bund, North German Confederation. 66 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. WA 1 LLD Exercise 40. 1. The pronunciation of the Italian language is soft, but still (body) energetic. 2. To whom does this new hat belong? 3. It belongs to Mr. Behr. 4. Frankfort belongs now to Prussia. 5. The New Museum in Berlin is very large and imposing. 6. It is 340 feet long. 7. The Old Museum is not so large. 8. It is 276 feet long, 170 feet deep, and 83 feet high. 9. The New Museum is behind the Old Museum. 10. The colors of the Austrian flag are black and yellow. 11. The col- ors of the Italian flag are red, white, and green. 12. On which side of the street do you live (reside)? 13. We live on the right side of the street, just opposite the new house of (the) Mr. Kranzler. 14. What does this cloth cost a yard? 15. The blue cloth costs five dollars a yard. 16. The black cloth costs four dollars and twenty groschens a yard. 17. The Austrian army has eight hundred thousand soldiers. 18. The tower of the new church is a hundred and forty feet high. 19. I bought a few (einige) German books this morning. 20. I have not many (viele) German books. 21. I have read many (manche or viele) German books. 22. I have only a few (nur wenige) German books. I LESSON XXI. MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Mein neuer Rod iſt zu groß, My new coat is too large. Karl hat meinen neuen Rock, Charles has my new coat. Das Kind hat ein neues Budy, The child has a new book. Berlin iſt eine große und eine Berlin is a large and very ſehr ſchöne Stadt, beautiful city. Haben Sie unſer neues Haus Have you seen our new geſehen? house? Wo iſt Ihr neuer Bleiſtift? Where is your new pencil ? y LULU MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 67 Einundvicrzigſte Aufgabc. 1. Haben Sie meine deutſche Gramma'til heute geſeben? 2. Jür deutſches Lefebudy iſt auf meinem Tiſche, neben meiner Frans zöſiſden Grammatik, aber Ihre deutſche Grammatik habe idy heute nicht geſehen. 3. Marie hat ihre italieniſche Grammatik verlegt; haben Sie ſie geſehen? 4. Id Babe ſie heute nicht geſehen. 5. Die Vermel Thres neuen Frades ſind zu lang. 6. Nein, der Sdyneider hat ihn ganz (exactly) nady der neuen Mode gemacht. 7. Heinrich Dietridy hat einen [dywarzen Uebers rod beſtelt. 8. Der Kragen meiner weißen Weſte iſt zu breit. 9. Aber die Weſte paßt Ihnen ganz gut. 10. Der Vater hat dem Stinde ein ſchönes neues Bud verſprochen, weil es ſeine deutſchen Aufgaben ſo gut und idynell gelernt hat. 11. Herr Beyerlein behauptet, daß Herr Gellert für ſeine neuen Gemälde zweitauſend achthundert und vierzig Thaler bezahlt hat. 12. Ein Diel hat mir heute das Taſdientud aus der Talde geſtohlen. 13. Wilhelm hat den neuen Krug zerbrochen.. 14. Das Muſter Ihres neuen Kleides iſt ſehr ſchön. 15. Anna hat heute ein ſchwarzes Kleid, cinen Regenſdirm, einen Sonnenſchirm und ei- nen blauen Sdpleier gekauft. 16. Das Formať dieſer franzöſis (dhen Grammatik iſt zu groß. Vocabulary. Der Xermcl, , pl. —, sleere. | Das Formať, -es, pl. —e, the form » Kragen,-8, pl. -, collar. and size (as of a book). Frad, -28, pl. Fräde, dress coat. I Muſter,--8, pi. —, the pattern. 9 Schleier, —$, pl. -, veil. | Sleid, -28, pl. —er, dress. , Regenſdirm, -es, pl. ~e, um- (pl. Kleider, dresses, clothes.) brella. 9 Leſebud, reading-book, reader. 1 Sonnenſchirm, -e8,pl. —e para- , Taſdyentud),pocket-handkerchief. sol. Nad), according to, after. Die Mode, -,pl. —n, fashion. Behaupten assert. Mittze, -, pl. -11, cap. Bemer'keit, observe, notice. , Taſdie, ~, pl. -11, pocket. Beſtellen, order, engage. 1. Weſte, -, pl. --1, vest. Verle'gen, to misplace. 1 Gramma'tik, —, pl. -en, gram-Paſfen (with dat.), to fit, become. mar. Berbrechen (irreg.), to break in (or Verſprechen (irreg.), to promise. into) pieces. = 68 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined according to the Mixed Declension when preceded by a possessive pronoun, by cin (one, ai, an), or by keilt (no, not any) : SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. (My new coat.) (My new vest.) (The new book.) Nom. mein neu-er Rock.meine neu-C Weſte. mein neu-es Budy. Gen. meine8 neu-en Nodes. meiner neu-en Weſte. meines neu-en Budes. Dat. meinein neu-eit Node. meiner neu-eit Weſte. meinen neu-en Budje. Acc. meinen neu-en Nod. meine beu-e Weſte. meint neu-es Budy. PLURAL. Nom, meine nieu-eit Nöde. ineine lieu-en Weſten. meine nieu-en Bidjer. Gen. meiner neu-ent. Nödfe. meiner neu-eit Weſten. meiner neu-en Büder. Dat. meinen neu-eu Nödfén. nieinen neu-en Weſten. meinen neu-en Büdern. Acc. meine neu-en Nödfe. (meine neu-en Weſten. meine nieu-en Büder. 2. Table of the terminations of the three Declensions cf adjectives : 1. The Old Declension : Adjective alone before the substantive. cell, ser, Singular. eit, -cit, selt, C11. 3. The Mixed Declension: Adjective preceded by ein, mein, etc. 1. Old Declen- l 2. New Declen- 3. Mixed Declen- sion. sion. sion. Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. -er, -e, ses. -, -l, f. -er, -, -18. -eit. =C11. Feli. sem, -er, -em. -en, -en, -en. seli, -e11. | -en, sl, -28. -en, -, -l. ren, =e8. El. -en (e), -en (e), -en (e). -en, -en, -en. ser. -en, -en -en. -en, -eit. |-e11, -en -en. Fent, sen, -en. se, e, -l. |-en (e), -en (e), -en (e). -en -en -e11. Rem. 1. In the seventy-two endings of these three declensions, -en occurs forty-four times, -e fifteen, -er seven-, cs four times, and -em twice. Rem. 2. The mixed declension is like the old in the nominative and accusa- tive singular ; in the other cases it is like the new declension. Rem. 3. The similarity between the new declension of nouns and the new declension of adjectives is very striking. Rem. 4. The dative plural of all articles, nouns, adjectives, and pronouns (except ins and cud), ends in -11. -21, sell, Plural. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 69 . Exercise 42. 1. I have mislaid my German Reader; I have been looking for it a long time, but I have not found it yet. 2. There it is on the table under my German Grammar. 3. Have you read your German newspaper? 4. No, I have not yet read it; do you wish it? 5. Have you noticed the new cap of the child ? 6. Yes, it fits him very well. 7. Have you found your umbrella ? 8. Have you seen my German Reader? 9. Have you ordered à pair of boots ? 10. No, I ordered a pair of shoes. 11. The collar of his overcoat is too wide. 12. The child has broken the cup and the saucer. 13. Charles bought this morning a dozen pocket-handkerchiefs, a new vest, an umbrella, and a pair of India-rubber over-shoes. 14. Breslau has a hundred and fifty thousand inhabitants. 15. The Cathedral at Freiburg is three hundred and twenty feet long and a hundred feet wide. 16. The tower is three hundred and ninety-six feet high. LESSON XXII. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Dieſe Kirdye iſt ſchön, jene iſt This church is beautiful, ſchöner, und jene dort iſt die that (one) is more beauti- Tahönſte von allen, ful, and that (one) yon- der is the most beauti- ful of all. Fräulein Braun ſingt ſchön, Miss Brown sings beauti- Fräulein Stein ſingt ſchöner, fully, Miss Stein sings aber Fräulein Lange ſingt am more beautifully, but ſchönſten, Miss Lange sings most beautifully. Heute werden wir beſſeres Wet- We shall have better weath- ter Baben, er to-day. Er wünſcht das beſte Tiids, He wishes the best cloth. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Dreiundvierzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Dieſes Gemälde iſt viel ſchöner als jenes. 2. Heute iſt das Wetter milder als es geſtern war. 3. Haben Sie die neues ſten Nadhridten gehört? 4. Haben Sie die letzten Nadsridten geleſen ? 5. Der Thurm des Domes zu Wien iſt der Vöchſte in der Welt. 6. Die Sdineekoppe, der hödyſte Berg in Nord- und Mittel-Deutſchland, iſt 4960 Fuß hoch. 7. Die Donau iſt der längſte Fluß in Deutſdland. 8. Der kürzeſte Weg von Berlin nady Paris iſt über Magdeburg und Köln. 9. Heute iſt der kürzeſte Tag des Jahres. 10. Baron von Rothſdild war der reichiſte Mann in der Welt. 11. Albrecht Dürer war der berühm- teſte deutſche Maler des Mittelalters. 12. In Nürnberg beſon- bers hat er viele ſchöne Gemälde gemalt. 13. Der kleine Fritz (Freddy) iſt ein allerliebſtes Kind. 14. Heinrich iſt nicht ſo alt wie Jobann, aber er iſt zwei Jahre älter als Wilhelm. 15. Herr General von Frankenſtein war in der Schlacht mehr tapfer als vorſichtig. 16. Die Geſchichte des Dreißigjährigen Krieges iſt höchſt intereſſant. 17. Mein jüngſter Bruder iſt redio Jahre alt. 18. München iſt die größte Stadt in Baiern. 19. Sie iſt viel größer als Nürnberg oder Augsburg. 20. Baden iſt ein wes nig größer als Sachſen. 21. Baiern iſt viel größer als Baden. 12 • Vocabulary. Der Baron',-8, pl. -e, baron. Berühmť, famous, renowned. 1 General, -$, pl. Generale, gen-Lieb, dear, cherished. eral. Dreißigjährig, thirty years' (war). 1 Dberſt, —en, pl. -en, colonel. Siebenjährig, seven years' (war). 11 Fluſ, -es, pl. Flüſſe, river. Mild, mild.” II Weg, -68, pl. ~, way, road. Stürmiſdy, stormy, tempestuous. Die Sdladit, ---,pl. -en, battle. Tapfer, valiant, brave. 1 Welt, -, pl. -en, world. Vorſidytig, prudent. Das Alter, —8, pl. —, age. Fung, young Mittelalter, Middle Ages. .. Sturz, short. Mittel-Deutſchland, Central Germany. Treu, true, faithful. Wenig (adj. and adv.), little. Ganz (adj.), entire, whole. Als, as, than. Letzt, last, latest. Wie, as, than. Vorig, last, preceding. Vielleicht, perhaps. Dort, there, yonder, COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, 71 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are compared by adding to the positive degree -er for the comparative degree, and-ſt or seſt for the superlative degree. Rem. When the positive ends in =), -, -, -, -3, -fdh, -1), -i, or -1t, the superlative is formed by adding -eſt. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. fein, fine, fein-er, finer, fein-ſt, finest. reid), rich, reid)-cr, richer, reidi-ſt, richest. djön, beautiful, dön-cr, more beautiful, djön-ſt, most beautiful. inild, mild, mild-er, milder, mild-eſt, mildest. laut, loud, Taut-er, louder, laut-cſt, loudest. Heiß, hot, heiß-er, hotter, heiß-eſt, hottest. falīdy, false, falſ()-er, falser, falſ()-cſt, falsest. froh, happy, frol-er, happier, froh-eſt, happiest. frei, free, frei-cr, freer, frei-eſt, freest. treu, true, treu-er, truer, treu-eſt, truest. 2. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if a, 0, or u, usually takes the umlaut in the com- parative and superlative degrees : alt, old, ält-cr, older, ält-eſt, oldest. ivarnt, warm, svärm-er, warmer, wärm-ſt, warmest. Yang, long, läng-er, longer, Yäng-ſt, longest. grob, coarse, gröb-cr, coarser, gröb-ſt, coarsest. kurz, short, kürz-er, shorter, fürz-eſt, shortest. jung, young, ſing-er, younger, jing-ſt, youngest. 3. Adjectives ending in cel or -en reject the e of this syllable in the comparative degree: eder, noble, edi-er, nobler, edel-ſt, noblest. trocen, dry, trodn-cr, dryer, trođen-ſt, dryest. 4. The following adjectives are compared irregularly: gut, good, beſſer, better, Veſt, best. hody, high, höher, higher, Hödiſt, highest. nahe, near, näher, nearer, nädiſt, nearest. vier, much, mehr, meiſt, most. groß, great, größer, greater, größt, greatest. 5. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative de- grees are subject to the same laws of declension as ad- jectives in the positive degree. more, 72 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 6. The regular superlative form (as der beſte) is only used attributively, i. e., with a noun expressed or under- stood : Dieſes iſt das beſte Tudi, This is the best cloth. Dieſes Tudy iſt das beſte (Tud)), This cloth is the best (cloth). 7. To express the superlative predicatively, the dative preceded by an (an dem) may be employed: Dieſes Tud, iſt am beſten, This cloth is the best. Dieſe Blume iſt am ſdönſten, This flower is the most beautiful. Rem. This predicative form of the superlative is also used adverbially: Marie fingt am beſten, Mary sings the best. 8. By way of emphasis, the genitive plural of aller is frequently prefixed to the superlative : LL Dieſe Blume iſt am allerſdjönſten, of all. „Er iſt ein allerliebſtes Kind," "He is a dear little child." 9. The absolute superlative is expressed by prefixing to the positive degree such adverbs as ſehr, hödſt, äußerſt: Die Nadıridyt iſt hödyſt intereſſant, The news is extremely interesting. 1 1 1 äußerſten 66 comparative degree, the adverb mchr is used instead of the ending -er: Er iſt mehr tapfer als vorſidytig, He is more brave than prudent. Exercise 44. 1. My oldest brother is twelve years, and my young- est brother is six years old. 2. Do you wish finer cloth? 3. No, this cloth is fine enough. 4. Today is the long- est day in the year. 5. Charles is five years older than his brother. 6. Mr. Krause sings very well (ganz gut), but Mr. English sings much better, and Mr. Eberhard sings the best of all (von allen). 7. The weather is very disagreeable to-day, but it is more stormy than cold. 8. The Colonel was not less prudent than courageous 73 in the battle. 9. Mary Kranzler sang the German songs extremely beautifully. 10. William Friedländer is just (gera'de) as (o) old as (wie or als) Frederick Schnaase. 11. This paper is not so good as that. 12. That book is larger than this. 13. The Oder is the longest river in North Germany. 14. It is longer than the Elbe. 15. Have you read the last news ? 16. Albert Dürer was among (unter) the most distinguished painters of Germany. 17. The shortest road from Berlin to Trieste is by way of Dresden, Prague, and Vienna. LESSON XXIII. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Der erſte Tag des Monats, The first day of the month. Der zweite Tag des Monats, The second day of the . month. Die dritte Seite des Buches, The third page of the book. Der vierte Juli 1776, The fourth of July, 1776. Am neunzehnten Auguſt, On the nineteenth of Au- gust. Die dreiundzwanzigſte Lektion, The twenty-third lesson. Die fünfundvierzigſte Aufgabe, The forty-fifth exercise. Er ſtarb am dritten Mai, He died on the third of (or) Er ſtarb den dritten Mai, May. Fünfundvierzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Ich habe heute vom Herrn Profeſſor Steinmeyer den er: ften Band der Geſchichte der deutſchen Literatur von Heinrichy Kurz geborgt. 2. Herr Schönberg wohnt im zweiten Stock des fünften Hauſes auf der rechten Seite der Friedrichs-Straße. 3. Die Anzeigen ſind auf der ſiebenten und achten Seite der Zei- tung. 4. Die telegraphiſde Depe'ſche von Amerika iſt ungefähr in der Mitte der vierten Spalte auf der dritten Seite der hieſigen D 74 ORDINAL NUMBERS. heutigen Zeitung; die Depeſche iſt von ſehr großem Intereſſe. 5. Den Urſprung des Wortes , Meſſer“ werden Sie im zwei- ten Bande der dritten Auflage des deutſden Wörterbuches von ,,Schmitthenner", auf der hundert achtundvierzigſten Seite, in der neunundzwanzigſten Zeile von unten, finden. 6. Chriſtoph Columbus hat Amerika am 11ten Oktober 1492 entdeckt. 7. Friedrich der Zweite, gewöhnlich der Große genannt, ſtarb am 17ten Auguſt 1786. 8. Er war der dritte König von Preußen, 9. Friedrich Wilhelm der Vierte, der ſediſte König von Preußen, ſtarb am 2ten Januar 1861. 10. Göthe ſtarb in Weimar am 22ſten März 1832. 11. Schiller ſtarb in Weimar am 9ten Mai 1805. 12. Albrecht Dürer war der größte deutſche Maler des 16ten und 17ten Jahrhunderts. 13. Montag war der erſte Ianuar. 14. Dienſtag war ein ſehr heißer Tag. Vocabulary. Der Band, -3, pl. Bände, volume. | Das Ende, —8,pl. -11, end. König, -8, pl. ~e, king. 1 Intereſſe, —8, interest. 1. Staiſer, --8, pl. —, emperor. | Wort, -28, pl. Wörter, word. 0 Streuzzug,-es, pl. Kreuzzüge, cru-l 1 Wörterbudy, dictionary. sade. Borgen, to borrow. 1 Stod, -18, story (of a house). Dauern, to last, endure. „ Philoſophy', -en, pl. --en, philos- | Entded'en, to discover. opher. Sterben (irreg.), to die. Urſprung, -3, origin. Genannt, named, called. Die Anzeige, -, pl.—11, advertisement Gewöhn'lich, usual. Auflage, -, pl. —n, edition. Ungefähr (adv.), about, nearly. Depe'ſdie, -, pl. -11, dispatch. Von oben, from above, from the top. Literatur', -, pl. -en, literature Con unten, from below, from the bot- Mitte, -, pl. —N, pl. middle. | tom. Spalte, ---, pl. -11, column. Heutig (adj.), of to-day, to-day's. Zeile-, pl. —n, line. Hieſig (adj.), of this place. Grammatical. 1. The Ordinal Numbers are formed from the Cardinal Numbers : 1. By suffixing -te, from zwei to neunzehn. 2." " -ſte,“ zwanzig upward. Rem. In compound numbers only the last one takes the suffix. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 6th 7th 1st Der erſte. 40th Der vierzig-ſte. 2d zwei-te. 50th fünfzig-ſte. 3d drit-te. 60th 'ſechzig-ſte. 4th vier-te. 70th ſiebenzig-ſte, or ſieb- 5th « fünf-te. zig-ſte. ſedljø-te. 80th 1 achtzig-ſte. II fieben-te. 90th neunzig-ſte. 8th racht-e. 100th hundert-ſte. 9th I neun-te. 101st 1 hundert und erſte. 10th 1 zehn-te. 11th elf-te. zig-ſte. 12th o zwölf-te. 200th zweihundert-ſte. 13th r dreizehn-te. 500th fünfhundert-ſte. 14th 1 vierzehn-te. 1,000th tauſend-ſte. 15th o fünfzehn-te. 1,001st tauſend und erſte. 16th , ſedízehn-te. 1,026th 1 tauſend ſedisundzwan- 17th r fiebenzehn-te, or ſiebzehn-te. zig-ſte. 18th adytzehn-te. 1,626th 1 tauſend ſechshundert 19th neunzehn-te. und ſedisündzwart- 20th zwanzig-ſte. zig-ſte. 21st einundzivanzig-ſte. 2,000th , zweitauſend-ſte. 25th o fünfundzwanzig-ſte. 20,000th zwanzigtauſend-ſte. 30th o freißig-ſte. 100,000th o hunderttauſend-ſte. 35th fünfunddreißig-ſte. 500,000th fünffunderttauſend-ſte. Rem. 1. The forms drit-te and adht-e are euphonic variations from the rule for forming ordinal numbers. Rem. 2. Ordinal numbers are subject to all the laws of declension of adjec- tives (see Lessons XX., XXI., and XXII.). 2. Names of the seasons, of months, and of the days of the week, are masculine : . 1. The Seasons (die Jahreszeiten): Der Winter,-8, pl. ---, winter. Der Sommer, —8, pl. ---, summer. » Frühling, —8, pl. ~e, Herbſt, -—es, pl. ~e, autumn. spring. (Exc. Das Frühjahr, —es, pl. ~e, spring.) 2. The Months (die Monate): Der Januar', 8, January. Der Juli, — 8, July. Februar', —8, February. / Auguſt", es, August. März, -28, March. 1 Septem'ber, -8, September. 1 April', -e8, April. Okto'ber, -8, October. 11 Mai, --e8, May. ! Dezem'ber, -8, December. 76 ORDINAL NUMBERS. day. day. 3. The Days of the Week (die Tage der Woche) : Der Sonntag, —, pl. --e, Sun- Der Mittwody, -,pl.-e, Wednesday day. , Donnerſtag, —8, pl. -e, Thurs- , Montag, -8, pl. ~e, Mon- day. 1 Freitag, -8, pl. —e, Friday. · , Dienſtag,-8, pl. —e, Tues-Samſtag, 48, pl. -e, Saturday. I (Sonnabend, —8, pl.-e, " 3. Present and imperfect tenses of ſterben, to die : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. ich ſterb'-e, I die. ich ſtarb, I died. bu ſtirbſt, thou diest. du ſtarbſt, thou diedst. er ſtirbt, he dies. er ſtarb, he died. wir ſier G'-ent, we die. wir ſtarV'- eit, we died. ihr ſter b'-ct, you die. ifr ſtar b'-et, you died. fie ſterb'- ent, they die. fie ſtar b'-en, they died. 4. In German the verb is often removed to the end of very long sentences (see sentence 5 in Exercise 45). 5. When the adverbial expression of time is very long, it may follow that of place (see Less. III., 2). Schiller ſtarb in Weimar am 9ten Mai Schiller died in Weimar on the ninth of May, 1805. Exercise 46. 1. I am now reading the third volume of the history of Germany by K. A. Menzel. 2. On what page are you reading ? 3. I am reading on the hundred and -fifty-third page, seventeen lines (in the seventeenth line) from the top (von oben). 4. The advertisement of the page of to-day's paper. 5. Francis the Second, em- peror of (von) Austria, and the last emperor of Ger- many, died in Vienna on the second of March, 1835. 6. Charlemagne (Karl der Große), the first emperor of Ger- mạny, died in Aix-la-Chapelle January 28th, 814. 7. The Crusades lasted from the end of the eleventh till towards the end of the thirteenth century. 8. Friday will be the first of January. 9. Saturday was the cold- est day of this month. 10. Wednesday will be the IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 77 shortest day of the year. 11. Immanuel Kant, tlfe greatest philosopher of the eighteenth century, died in Königsberg on the twelfth of February, 1804. 12. He was eighty years old when (als) he died. IU LESSON XXIV. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLÁSS. Siebenundvierzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Der Soldat bindet ſein Taſchentuch um ſeinen Arm. 2. Berlin und Hamburg find durdy eine Eiſenbahn verbunden. 3. Der Wundarzt hat die Wunden des Soldaten verbunden (dressed). 4. Der Buchbinder hat das Buch verbunden. 5. Ich habe die vorletzte, aber nidit die leßte Auflage des Wörter- buches in der Buchhandlung von Herrn Meyer gefunden. 6. Chriſtoph Gottlieb Schröter, (an). Organiſt in Nordhauſen, hät im Jahre 1717 daß Klavier erfunden. 7. Trinken Sie lieber (do you prefer) Thee oder Kaffee? 8. Ich trinke lieber Thee. 9. Die Schüler haben ihre deutſchen Aufgaben ſchon begonnen. 10. Herr Strad hat das Haus im vorigen Jahre für 8500 Thlr. gekauft; er hat es vorgeſtern für 9100 Thlr. verkauft. 11. Er hat dabei 600 Thlr. gewonnen. 12. Die Bäuerin hat das Garn ganz gut geſponnen. 13. Der Verbreder hat die Geſebe des Landes gebrochen. 14. Ach, lieber Friedrich ! Du haſt dieſe Tchöne neue Vaſe ganz zerbrochen. 15. Herr Niedner ſpridit zu Ihnen. 16. Die Ausgaben der Regierung waren viel zu groß; ſie entſprachen gar nicht der Armuth des Landes. 17. Der Bauer driſcht den Weizen. 18. Das Kind hat das deutſde Wörterbuch von dem Tiſde genommen. 19. Wir haben Herrn Kirdihoff heute Morgen auf der Straße getroffen. 20. Wir treffen ihn ſehr oft im Muſeum. 21. Der Jäger hat den Haſen nicht getroffen. 22. Das Kind hat den Ball über das Haus ge- das neue Rathhaus entworfen. 24. So? Haben Sie ihn geres hen? 25. Nein, aber Herr Voß hat geſagt, daß er ſehr ſchön iſt. 78 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. Vocabulary Der Arin, -es, pl. —e, arm. Die Eiſenbahn, -, pl. -—en, railroad. , Ball, —es, pl. Bälle, ball. Į " Vaſe, ---, pl. -n, vase. , Baumeiſter, —$, pl. --, architect 1 Wunde, -, pl. --1, wound. 1. Organiſt”, —en, pl. -en, organ- Das Einkommen, —8, income. ist. Garn, -es, pl. --e, yarn. Plan, -es, pl. Pläne, plan. 1 Geſetz', -es, pl. ~e, law. 1 Telegraph”, -en, pl. -en, tele- | 1 Korn, -08, pl. Körner, grain. graph. 1 land, -18,pl. Länder, land, coun- Verbre’der, —8, pl. -, criminal. try. 1. Weizen, -%, wheat. ! Rathhaus, —es, pl. Rathhäuſer, 1 Wundarzt, -e8, surgeon. city hall. Die Armuth, -, poverty. Dabei', thereby. . Lusgabe, —, pl. -1, expense. Gar (adv.), at all. !! Bäuerin, —, pl. -nen, peasant Gleidy, immediately. woman, peasant's wife. Lieber, rather. 1 Regie'rung, ---, pl. -en, govern- Elektriſdy, electric. ment. | Vorletzt, next to the last. Rein. It will have been noticed that most masculine and neuter nouns be- long to the Old Declension, and that most feminine nouns belong to the New Declension Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs are divided into seven classes, ac- cording to the changes which the radical vowel under- goes in forming the principal parts : 2. In the irregular verbs Pres. Inf. | Imp. Ind. Perf. Part. of the first class each princi- pal part has a different rad- ical vowel. Thus : ||or) e, 3. Irregular verbs of the first class : Present Indicative, | Imperf. 1 Perfect Present Infinitive. 2d and 3d Persons. Indicat. Participle. Hind-en, to bind. (formed regularly.) vand, gebunden. verbind'-en, to unite, to tie up, verband, verbunden. find-en, to find. [to bind wrong. fand, gefunden. erfind'-en, to invent. erfand, erfunden. ſing-en, to sing. lang, geſungen. trink-en, to drink. trank, getrunken. beginn' -en, to begin. . | (formed regularly.) (begann, begonnen. gewinn'-en, to gain. gewann, gewonnen. ſpinn-en, to spin. ſpann, gefponnen. 66 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 79 bredi-en, to break. du brichſt, er bridit, bradı, gebrochen. zerbredy-ent, to break to pieces. ,, zerbridiſt, , -bridst, zerbrad), zerbrochen. predi-en, to speak. l, ſpridiſt, , ſpridst, ſpradı, geſprodjen. entſpredy' -en, to correspond to,,, entſpridiſt, 11-ſpridyt, entſprach, entſprochen. or with (governs the dative). verſpredy-en, to promise. ,, verſpridiſt, 11-ſpridst, verſprad), verſprochen Dreſdh-en, to thresh. briſdiſt, ,, Driſcht, Draſdi, gedroſchen. nehm-en, to take. . ! nimmſt ,, nimmt nahm, genommen. ſterb-en, to die. 1 ſtirbſt, , ſtirbt, ſtarb, geſtorben. treff-en, to meet, hit, shoot. 1. triffft, , trifft, traf, getroffen. werf-en, to throw. Try · wirfſt, ,, wirft, warf, geworfen. entwerf-en, to project. 1,, entwirfſt, 1-tvirft, lentwarf, entworfen. Rem. 1. The first class contains forty-five verbs. Rem. 2. The inseparable prefixes be, ge, ent, ver, zer, etc., give modifica- tions to the significations of verbs analogous to those given in English by the syllables be and for : To have, hold, speak, come, give, get. To behave, behold, bespeak, become, forgive, forget. Exercise 48. 1. The child is tying the ribbon on (um) his hat. 2. The surgeon has been dressing the wounds of the sol- diers. 3. The bookbinder has bound this German Dic- tionary wrong. 4. Professor Morse invented the Elec- tric Telegraph in 1838. 5. Do you prefer tea or coffee ? 6. I prefer (trinke lieber) coffee. 7. The peasant's wife is spinning the yarn. 8. That old criminal has often broken the laws of his land. 9. His expenses did not at all correspond to his income. 10. The peasant is threshing the grain. 11. Have you taken my umbrel- la ? 12. William says that Henry took it. 13. I met your uncle, Mr. Rahn, yesterday in Leipsic. 14. The hunter has shot the hare. 15. The child has thrown his ball into the water. 16. The architect has designed (entwerfen) a very fine plan for the new church. 17. Karl Friedrich Schinkel, the most distinguished architect of the nineteenth century, drew (entwerfen) the plan for the Old Museum in Berlin. 18. Potsdam and Berlin are connected by (verbunden durdi) a railroad. 80 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). LESSON XXV. IREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CLASSES. 1. Haben Sie die heutige Zeituug geleſen? 2. Nein, ich habe fie noch nicht geſehen. 3. Der Kaufmann hat das Tuch gemer: Ten. 4. Der Meſſer mißt das Feld. 5. Eſſen Sie gern (do you like) Obft? 6. Oh, ich effe es ſehr gern. 7. Das Kind ißt einen Apfel. 8. Es hat das Butterbrod gegeſſen und die Mild getrunken. 9. Das Pferd frißt das Heu. 10. Karl hat Tein Buch vergeſſen. 11. Adh, Fritz, du trittſt auf die ſchönen Nelken und Tulpen. 12. Graf von Bernsdorf hat den König von Preußen im Europäiſchen Kongreß zu Paris' vertreten. 13. Der Bauer gräbt einen neuen Brunnen. 14. Der Jäger (dlägt ſeinen Hund, weil er den Mann gebiſſen (bitten) bat. 15. Mein Diener wird die Repfel und die Birnen nadi Hauſe tra- gen. 16. Fräulein Franz hat geſtern Abend ein (dywarzes ſeides nes Kleid getragen. 17. Eine Hand wäſcht die andere (one good turn deserves another). 18. Heute Morgen haben wir dreizehn Forellen gefangen. 19. Herr Steinbacher hat uns Tehr freundlich empfangen. 20. Ich halte ihn für (I consider him) einen ehrlichen Mann. 21. Der Kommis' bat fein Ges halt erhalten. 22. Die Bibliothek zu Dresden enthält 300,000 Bände und 2800 Handſdriften. 23. Wo iſt Heinrich ? 24. Er ſchläft noch. 25. Er hat ſchon zu lange geſchlafen. 26. Wo iſt Wilhelm ? 27. Er iſt im Garten; ich werde ihn rufen. Vocabulary Der Apfel, -6, pl. Xepfel, apple. Die Sdrift, -, pl. --en, writing. Brunnen,-8, pl. ---, well. 1 Handſdrift, manuscript. 1 Diener, -8,pl. —, servant. Das Feld, -8, pl. ~er, field. , Kommis', 48, pl. —, clerk. ! Gehart', -es, pl. -e, salary. Kongreß', -es, Congress. 1 Heu, —es, hay. 1 Meſſer, —8, pl. —, surveyor. , Pferd, -es, pl. -e, horse. Birne, —, pl. -1, pear. Gern (adv.), gladly, willingly. , Forel'le, -, pl. —11, trout. Ander (adj.), other. ' Neffe, —, pl. --11, pink. | Ehrlidy (adj.), honest, honorable. , Tulpe, —, pl. —11, tulip. Seiben, silken, silk. ! Hand, -, pl. Hände, hand. Europä'iſd), European. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 81 Grammatical. 1. In irregular verbs of the second, third, and fourth classes, the radical vowel of the imperfect only varies from that of the present: Pres. Inf. | Imp. Ind. Perf.Part. No. of Verbs. l, . 14. Second Class, Third Class, la, Fourth Class, a (u, o), 10. 14. ie (i), a (u, o), 2. Irregular verbs of the second class : 1 Present Indicative, Imperfect! Perfect Present Infinitive. 2d and 3d Persons. Indicat. Participle. geb-ent, to give. du gibſt, er gibt, gab, gegeben. vergeb'-en, to forgive. I overgibſt, gibt, | vergab, | vergeben, ſeh-en, to see. Lo ſiehſt, fieht, faly, I geſehen. leſ-en, to read. 10 lieſeſt, lieſt, las, geleſen. meſſ-en, to measure. miſfeft, , mißt, maß, gemeſſen. eff-en, to eat. [mals). iffeſt, ißt, aß, gegeſſen. freſf-en, to eat (said of ani friſfeſt, frißt, i fraß, gefreſſen. vergeff'-en, to forget. vergiſfeſt, , gißt, vergaß, | vergeſſen. tret-en, to tread, step. 1 trittſt, 1 tritt, trat, getreten. vertret'-en, to represent. vertrittſt, 1 stritt, | vertrat, | vertreten. zertret'-en, to tread.. 1 , zertrittſt, 1 stritt, / zertrat, 1 zertreten. 3. Nearly all irregular verbs with a, o, or au, as the radical vowel, take the umlaut in the second and third persons singular of the present indicative. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. idy (hlag'-e, I strike. idy ſchlug, I struck. du fdhläg=lt, thou strikest. bu ſchlug-ſt, thou struckest. er idyläg-t, he strikes. I er ſdlig, he struck. wir ſchlag'-en, we strike. wir í dlug'-en, we struck. ihr ſchlag'-et, you strike. ihr dy lug'-et, you struck. fie ſ dlag'-en, they strike. ſie dj Tug'- en, they struck. 4. Irregular verbs of the third class : Present Indicative, Present Infinitive. Imperfect' Perfect 2d and 3d Persons. Indicat. Participle. grav-en, to dig du gräbſt, er gräbt, grub, gegraben. dlag-eil, to strike. ſchlägſt, , fdlägt, ſchlug, geſdılagen. trag-en, to carry, wear. 1 trägſt, trägt, truss, getragen. waſdı-en, to wash. Il wäidiſt, u wäldyt, wuſdy, I gewaſdien. D 2 82 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). VL 5. Irregular verbs of the fourth class : fang-en, to catch. bu fängſt, er fängt, , fing, gefangen. empfangen, to receive. I, empfängſt, rempfängt, empfing, empfangen. halt-en, to hold. 1 hältſt, hält, hielt, gehalten. enthalt-en, to contain. , enthältſt, . -hält, enthielt, enthalten. erhalt-en, to receive. , erhältſt, ! -hält, erhielt, erhalten. behalten, to retain, keep. , behältſt, 1 -hält, l behielt, behalten. fdlaf-en, to sleep. , (dläfft, ſchläft, fdlief, geſdilafen. ruf-en, to call. 1 (formed regularly.) / rief, gerufen. ſtoß-en, to hit, bump. 1, ſtößeft, 1 ſtößt, ſtieß, geſtoßen. 6. Many foreign words retain their original pronunci- ation. Thus the final & is silent in Kommis'. Exercise 50. 1. Have you read the history of the German litera- ture by Heinrich Kurz? 2. I bought it a few months ago (vor einigen Monaten), but I have not yet read it. 3. Have you measured the cloth ? 4. Yes, it is thirty yards long. 5. What are the boys eating? 6. John is eating an apple, and William is eating a pear. 7. The horse has eaten the hay. 8. The scholars have forgot- ten their lessons. 9. You have stepped on the tulip. 10. The peasant has dug a deep well. 11. The boy has struck the dog. 12. The servant has carried the apples and the pears home. 13. William wore yesterday even- ing a black coat and a white vest. 14. I caught five trout yesterday. 15. Professor Bauer received (empfans gen) them very kindly. 16. The library at Vienna con- tains over 300,000 volumes and 16,000 manuscripts. 17. Have you received (erhalten) your to-day's paper ? 18. Mr. Kraus received a letter this morning from his brother-in-law, Mr. Blumenthal. 19. Mr. Friedländer says that he will sell his new house. 20. Why will he not keep the new house ? 21. The old house is more convenient, and warmer than the new house. 22. Is the child sick ? 23. Yes, but the doctor says that it has slept long enough. IRREGULAR VERBS 83 NTINI LESSON XXVI. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CLASSES. Einundfünfzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Des Jägers Hund hat die Kuh des Bauers gebiſfen. 2. Eine Klapperſchlange hat den Sohn des Bauers vorgeſtern ge- biſſen, als er auf dem Berge Heidelbeeren pflückte. 3. Das Kind greift nadh ſeinem Bilde im Spiegel. 4. Der Polizei'die- ner hat den Taſchendieb ergriffen, gleich nadidem er das Geld ges ſtohlen hatte. 5. Ich begreife nidyt, warum Friedrich noch nicht an uns geſchrieben hat? 6. Wer hat gepfiffen? 7. Wer hat in das Bud geſchnitten? 8. Der Schneider ſchneidet das Tuc. 9. Herr Karfunkel hat dem Kaufmann 800 Thlr. geliehen. 10. Herr Raumer hat in ſeinem Briefe ſeine Reiſe nach dem Rieſen- gebirge ganz Yebhaft beſchrieben. 11. Der Bauer treibt das Vieh auf (to) die Weide. 12. Sie gießen Del ins Feuer (“you add fuel to the flame”). 13. Der Relner hat den Wein in die Gläſer gegoſſen. 14. Sie haben das Ziel nicht getroffen, Sie haben zu hoch geſchoſſen. 15. Heute iſt das Muſeum geſchlos- ſen. · 16. Herr Burchardt hat geſtern ſein Portemonnaie verlo- ren. 17. Vier Pferde ziehen den Wagen. 18. Herr Braun hat heute einen Wechſel von 600 Thlr. auf Herrn Dietridy gezogen. 19. Die Wolken ziehen (move) nad Süden. 20. Die Solda- ten haben ſehr tapfer gefodyten. 21. Der Korbmacher flicht ei- nen Korb. 22. Marie hat einen ſehr ſchönen Kranz geflochten. 23. Er hob den Korb auf ſeine Schulter. 24. Er erhob die Stimme und (drie um (for) Hülfe. 25. Der Dieb hat gelogen und den Kaufmann betrogen. Vocabulary. Der Korb, —es, pl. Körbe, basket. Der Tajdendieb, -e8, pickpocket. 1 Korbmadjer, -8, basket-maker. I 1 Süden, -8, south. garland, wreath. 11 Wagen, -S, pl. ~, wagon. II Polizei'diener, --S, pl. —, police-l 10 Wechſel, —8, pl. -, bill of ex- man. change, draft. 9Spiegel, —8,pl. ---, mirror. 1. Wein, --8, pl. --e, wine. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). Die Beere, pl. -1, berry. i Das Bild, -—es, pl.—er, image. 4 Heidelbeere, -, whortleberry. ! Feuer, -8, pl. —, fire. o Salange, —, pl. n, snake. Del,—es, pl. ---, oil. 11 Klapperſdılange, rattlesnake. 1 Portemonnaie',-8,pl. —$(pro- Nuh, -, pl. Kühe, cow. nounced põrt-mo-nay'), purse, Neiſe, —, pl. —en, journey, trip. pocket-book. 12 Schulter, -, pl. —n, shoulder. I 1 Vieh, —es, pl. —, cattle. 1 Stimme, -, pl. ~11, voice. [ure. 1 Ziel, -28, pl. ~e, mark. Weide, -, pl. -1, meadow,past- Lebhaſt (adj. and adv.), lively, spirited. Wolke, —, pl. —n, cloud. Nadidem (conj.), after. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the fifth and sixth classes have the same vowel in the imperfect tense as in the per- fect participle. 2. The radical vowel in verbs of the fifth class is al- ways ei; in those of the sixth class it is usually ie or c. 3. The following table shows the vowel changes : | Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. No. of Verbs. Fifth Class. 40. Sixth Class. m.doll li, etc. griff, 4. Irregular Verbs in the fifth class : Present Infinitive. 2d and 3d Persons. Indicat. Participle. beiß-en, to bite. (formed regularly.) viſ, greif-en, to grasp, seize (after). gegriffen. begreif-en, to comprehend. begriffen. ergreifen, to seize, lay hold of. ergriffen. pfeif-en, to whistle. gepfiffen. ſchneid-ent, to cut. ſchnitt, geſdynitten. ſpleiß-en, to split. lipliß, geſpliſſen. leih-en, to lend, loan. ed regu ularly.) lieh, geliehen. ſchreib-en, to write. lſdrieb, geſchrieben. beſchreib'-en, to describe. Beſdırieb, beſdhrieben. ſchrei-en, to cry (out). (dyrie, geſchrieen. treib-en, to drive. Itrieb, getrieben. pfiff, IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 85 SC 5. Irregular verbs of the sixth class : Present Indicative, Imperfect! Perfect Present Infinitive. 2d and 3d Persons. Indicat. Participle. gieß-en, to pour. (formed regularly.) goße l gegoſſen. (dießen, to shoot. dhoß, geldofſen. ſdließ-en, to close, shut. ſaloß, geldloffen. verlier'-en, to lose. 66 66 - verlor, verloren. zieh-en, to draw. gog, gezogen. fecht-en, to fight. du fidhtſt er fidht, | focht, gefochtent. fledit-en, to braid. o flichtſt. flicht, flodit, geflodyten. Veb-en, to lift, raise. (formed regularly.) | hob, gehoben. liig-en, to lie. log, gelogen. . betrüg-en, to deceive. 66 66 l betrog, I betrogen. 6. The definite article is omitted before names of the points of the compass (see § 55,2,2): Die Wolken ziehen gegen Norden, The clouds are moving towards the north. 7. Some foreign words retain much or all of their original declension : Singular. Plural. Das Portemonnaie. Die Portemonnaie-8. Des Portemonnaie-8. Der Portemonnaie-8. Dem Portemonnaie.. Den Portemonnaie-8. Das Portemonnaie. Die Porteinonnaie-6. Exercise 52. 1. The dog has bitten the child. 2. A rattlesnake bit the peasant-woman this morning. 3. The policeman seized (ergreifen) the pickpocket immediately after he had stolen the pocket-book from Mr.Wieland. 4. There goes the whistle! (es pfeift!) 5. The cook is cutting the bread. 6. Professor Häusser, in his History of Germany, has described the battle of Leipsic in a very spirited manner (lebhaſt). 7. The peasant has driven the cattle to the pasture. 8.“ He has only added fuel to the flame." 9. The hunter has shot four hares this morning. 10. The Library and the Museum are closed to-day. 11. John lost his German Grammar yesterday. 12. Yes, but he found it this morning on his brother's table. 13. 86 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). Only one horse is drawing the wagon. 14. I shall make a draft (einen Wechſel ziehen) on Mr. Niedner to-day for five hundred and seventy-five dollars. 15. The bas- ket-maker has made (flechten) two baskets this morning. 16. Mary has made (flechten) a beautiful garland. 17. They are crying for help! 18. The pickpocket has sto- len three thousand and five hundred dollars from the merchant. 19. The German soldiers have fought very bravely in the battle. LESSON XXVII. IRREGULAR VERBS OF SEVENTH CLASS. RECAPITULATION OF IRREG. VERBS. · Dreiundfünfzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Wiſſen Sie, wo Herr Brinfenhofer wolnt? 2. Nein, ich weiß nicht, wo er wohnt. 3. Ich wußte nicht, daß Herr Schönes berg in Berlin iſt. 4. Kennen Sie Herrn Profeſſor Trautmann? 5. Ach ja, wir kannten ihn ſchon, als wir in Deutſdland waren. 6. Wie nennen Sie dieſe Blumen? 7. Dieſe iſt eine Hyacinthe, * und jene iſt ein Vergißmeinnicht.* 8: Was brennt? 9. Das Haus gegenüber uns brennt (is on fire). 10. Der Rody hat den Kaffee gebrannt (roasted). 11. Herr Weißmandel hat Ihnen einen Brief von Herrn Kramer in Wien gebracht. 12. Herr Heidel brachte Nadzricht von unſerm Dheim in Magdeburg. 13. Karl, weißt du, wo mein Bleiſtift iſt? 14. Nein, ich habe ihn heute nicht geſehen. 15. Haben Sie die Nadiricht von Amerika in der heutigen hieſigen Zeitung geleſen? 16. Nein, ich habe die heutige Zeitung noch nicht geſehen. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the seventh class follow, in con- jugation, partly the laws of regular, and partly those of irregular verbs. 2. Present and imperfect tenses of wiſſen, to know : * See page 436. IRREGULAR 1 87 YTTT VERBS (CONTINUED). Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. ich weiß, I know. idy wuß-te, I knew. bu wcißt, thou knowest. du wuß - teſt, thou knewest. er weiß, he knows. er wuſ - te, he knew. wir wiſſ-en, we know. wir wuß- ten, we knew. ihr wiſſ-et, you know. ihr wuß-tet, you knew. ſie wiſſ- en, they know. fie w u B- ten, they knew. 3. Irregular verbs of the seventh class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative, l Imperfect Perfect 2d and 3d Persons. Indicative. Participle. bring-en, to bring. (formed regularly.) bradi=te, ge-brady-t. denk-en, to think. Dach-te, ge-bach-t. Brenn-en, to burn. brann-te, ge-brann-t. kenn-en, to know. kann-te, ge-kann-t. nenn-en, to name. itann-te, ge-nann-t. wiſſ-en, to know. du weißt, er weiß. I wuß-te, I ge-wuß-t. 4. To know, meaning to be acquainted with, is rendered by kennen. 5. General view of the changes the irregular verbs in all seven classes undergo in forming the principal parts: TI No. 14. Class. Present. Imperf. Partic. Examples. | 1st \i (or e), a, it (or D). bind-en, band, ge-bund-en. | 45. 2d geh-en, gab, ge-gebzen. 3d a, i, a. chlag-en, ſchlug, ge-ſchlag-en. 10. 4th ie (or i), a. Halt-en, hielt, ge-halt-en. 14. 5th lei, i (or ie), i or (ie). beiſ-en, biß, ge-biff-en. ie(e, etc.), 0, 0. gieß-en, goß, ge-goſſ-en. 7th anomalous. bring-en, brach-te, ge-brach-t. Total number of irregular verbs . ........ 1191. 40. 6th 52. 16. 6. Examples of the seven classes of irregular verbs: 1. First Class. bredh-en, bradi, ge-broch-en. vind-en, band, ge-bund-en. ſpredh-en, ſpracy, ge-ſprodh-en. find-en, fand, ge-fund-en. Dreſdh-en, braſch, ge-broſdh-en. fing-en, ſang, ge-ſung-en. nehm-en, nahm, ge-nomm-en. be-ninn-en, be-gann, be-gonn-en. ſterb-en, ſtaró, ge-ſtorb-en. ge-winn-en, ge-ivann, ge-wonn-en. treff-en, traf, ge-troff-en. ſpinn-en, ſpann, ge-ſponn-en. I werf-en, warf, ge-worf-en, 88 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 2. Second Class. 5. Fifth Class. geb-en, gab, ge-geb-en. beiß-en, biß, ge-biſſ-eur. Lef-en, las, ge-leſ-en. ſeh-en, ſah, ge-feb-ent. ſchneid-en, ſdinitt, ge-ſdynitt-en. eff-en, aß, geg-eff-en. ſdyreib-en, ſdyrieb, ge-idycieb-en. ge-freſſ-en. treib-en, trieb, ge-trieb-en. mejj-en, maß, ge-meſ-en. vergeſſ-en, vergaß, vergeſſ-en. 6. Sixth Class. tret-en, ºtrat, getret-en. gieß-eit, goß, ge-goſſ-en. dießen, doß, ge-ſdyoff-en. 3. Third Class. ziel)-en, 309, ge-30g-en. grab-en, grub, ge-grab-en. fedit-en, fodit, ge-fodit-en. ſdylag-eit, dilug, ge-idylag-en. heb-en, hob, ge-hob-en. trag-en, trug, ge-trag-en. waſdı-en, wujd, ge-waſdy-en. 7. Seventh Class. bring-en, brad-te, ge-bradh-t. 4. Fourth Class. denf-en, dadı-te, ge-bad)-t. fang-en, fing, ge-fang-en. brenn-en, brann-te, ge-brann-t. halt-en, hielt, ge-halt-en. kenn-en, fann-te, ge-kann-t. (dilaf-en, fdlief, ge-ſchlaf-en. nenn-en, nann-te, ge-nann-t. ruf-en, rief, ge-ruf-en. I wiſſ-en, wuß-te, ge-wußt. Rem. 1. With most irregular verbs, the original length of the radical vowel is preserved in all the principal parts : 1. Vowel long. 2. Vowel short. ſtehl-en, ſtahl, ge-ſtohl-en. ſpinit-en, ſpann, ge-fponit-en. leſ-ent, las, ge-leſ-en. freſf-en, fraß, ge-freſſ-en. trag-en, trug, ge-trag-en. | brenn-en, brann-te, ge-brann-t. Rem. 2. With some verbs the length of the radical vowel is changed in one or more of the derived principal parts. The change is more frequently from long to short, than it is from short to long : Veiß-en, biß, ge-biſſ-en. 1 nehm-en, nahm, ge-nomm-en. fdyneid-en, ſchnitt, ge-fdynitt-en. treff-ent, traf, ge-troff-en. Rem. 3. In the sixteenth century the participle of eſſen was formed regu- larly geeſſen. This was then contracted into gcſſen. In the seventeenth cen- tury another ge- was added, by false analogy, and hence the double prefix in gegeſſen. . Exercise 54. 1. Are you acquainted with General von Lichten- stein? 2. No, I do not know him. 3. What do you call (wie nennen Sie) this fish? 4. That fish is a trout. 5. The fire does not burn. 6. The cook has not yet rồasted (brennen) the coffee. 7. The house of Mr. Kraft VERBS WITH ſein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 89 is on fire (brennen). 8. Do you know where Mr. Ruprecht is ? 9. He is now in Munich. 10. Charles, dost thou know when Alexander von Humboldt died ? 11. Alex- ander von Humboldt died in Berlin on the sixth of May, 1859. 12. Children, do you know how old Schil- ler was when he died ? 13. He was forty-five years and six months old. 14. When did you meet Mr. Rosen- berg ? 15. We met him this morning in (auf) the street. 16. Where didst thou find the German grammar? 17. I found it on my brother's table. LESSON XXVIII. VERBS WITH ſein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. Er iſt ſehr reidy geweſen, He has been very rich. Er iſt arm geworden, He has become poor. Er iſt nach Hauſe gegangen, He has gone home. Er war nad Hauſe gegangen, He had gone home. Er wird wahrſcheinlich nach der He will probably have gone Stadt gegangen ſein, to the city. Fünfundfünfzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Er iſt zu Hauſe. 2. Er war zu Hauſe. 3. Er iſt zil Hauſe geweſen. 4. Er war zu Hauſe geweſen. 5. Er wird zu Hauſe geweſen ſein. 6. Das Wetter iſt jetzt ſehr beiß geworden. 7. Herr Klein iſt Kaufmann (8 55,3) geworden. 8. Das Wet- · ter war ſchon ſehr heiß geworden, als wir nach Italien gingen. 9. Wie ſind Sie von der Stadt gekommen? 10. Wir ſind ge- fahren. 11. Friedrich iſt zu Fuß (on foot) nach der Stadt ge- gangen, aber Wilhelm iſt geritten. 12. Das Pferd iſt über den Graben (ditch) geſprungen. 13. Der Bleiſtift lag auf dem Tiſd. 14. Die Büder liegen auf den Tiſden. 15. Das Kind war ſchon geſtorben, als der Vater nach Hauſe kam. 16. Dem Jäger iſt ſein Hund nach dem Walde gefolgt. 17. Idi werde nach dem Muſeum geben, aber Herr Kranzler wird wahrſchein- lich ſdon nach Hauſe gegangen ſein. 90 ſein, TO BE. YTI VERBS WITH Grammatical. 1. Most intransitive verbs take ſeiu, to be, instead of haben, to have, as their auxiliary. Rem. 1. The greater part of intransitive verbs are primitive or derivative irregular verbs. Rem. 2. Nearly all regular verbs and many irregular verbs are transitive, and, as such, take haven for their auxiliary. Rem. 3. All impersonal verbs take haven as their auxiliary. Rem. 4. It will be indicated in the vocabularies hereafter when the verbs take ſein as their auxiliary. 2. Indicative mood of ſein, to be: Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id bin, I am. id war, I was. du biſt, thou art. bu war-ft, thou wast. er iſt, he is. er war, he was. wir ſind, we are. wir war - en, we were. ihr ſeid, you are. ihr w a r - et, you were. Tie find, they are. ſie wa r- en, they were. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. I have been, etc. I had been, etc. id bin geweſen. id war geweſen. du biſt geweſen. du warſt geweſen. er iſt geweſen. er war geweſen. wir ſind geweſen. wir w a r - en geweſen. ihr ſeid geweſen. ihr wa r - et geweſen. fie ſind geweſen. fie w a r - en geweſen.. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. I shall be, etc. I shall have been, etc. ich werde fein. id werde geweſen ſein. du wirſt ſeint. du wirſt geweſen ſein. er wird ſein. er wird geweſen ſein. wir werd-en ſein. wir wer D- en geweſen ſein. ihr werb - et ſein. ihr wer$- et geweſen ſein. fie werd - eit ſein. ſie werd - en geweſen ſein. 3. Indicative mood of werden, to become : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id) werd-e, I become. ich wurd-e, I became. du wirſt, thou becomest. bu wurd-eſt, thou becamest. er wird, he becomes. er wurd-e, he became. wir werd-ent, we become. wir w u ro-en, we became. ihr werd-et, you become. ihr wurd-et, you became. fie werd - en, they become. ſie w u r$- ent, they became. VERBS WITH ſein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 91 Perfect Tense. I have become, etc. ich bin geworden. du biſt geworden. er iſt, geworden. wir ſind geworden. ihr ſeid geworden. fie ſind geworden. First Future Tense. I shall become, etc. ich werd-e werden. du wirſt werden. er wird werden. wir werd- en werdeit. ihr werd - et werden. ſie werd- eit werd e 11. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. idy war geworden. du warſt geworden. er war geworden. wir war - eit geworden. ihr wa r- et geworden. ſie w a r- en geworden. Second Future Tense. I shall have become, etc. ich werd-e geworden ſein. du wirſt geworden ſein. er wird geworden ſein. wir wer D- en geworden ſein. ilr wer D- et geworden ſein. fie wer D- en geworden ſeint. 4. The indicative mood of kommen, to come: . Present Tense. idy komm-e, I come. du komm - ſt, thou comest. er komm-t, he comes. wir komin - en, we come. ihr komm-et, you come. fie komm - en, they come... Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. id) biit gekommen. du biſt gekommen. er iſt gekoin me n. wir ſind gekommen. ihr ſeid gekommen. ſie ſind gekom me n. First Future Tense. I shall come, etc. id werd-e fommen. du wirſt komin e n. er wird komment. wir wero- en kommen. ihr werd - et kommen. ſie werd - en kommen. Imperfect Tense. idy kam, I came. du kam - ſt, thou camest. er fam, he came. wvir kam - en, we came. ihr ka m- et, you came. fie kam- en, they came. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. id war gefoinnen. du wa r - ſt gekommen. er war gekommen. wir wa r - eit gekommen. ihr war- et gekommen. ſie war - en gekommen. Second Future Tense. I shall have come, etc. ich werd-e gekommen ſein. bu wirſt gekommen ſein. er wird gekommen ſein. wir wer - en gekommen ſein. ihr wer D-et gekommen ſein. ſie werd- en gekommen ſein. 92 VERBS WITH ſein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. fuhr, # cj iniai rag, ſprang, Reg. !! 5. Some intransitive verbs (having ſein as auxiliary): Class. ' Present Infinitive. Imperf. Indic. Perf. Part. ſein, to be. war, geweſen. werd-en, to become. wurde, geworden. fall-en, to fall. fiel, gefallen. fahr-en, to ride. gefahren. geh-en, to go. ging, gegangen. komm-eil, to come. kam, gekommen. lieg-ent, to lie. gelegen. ſpring-en, to leap, spring. geſprungen. ſterb-en, to die. ſtarb, geſtorben. folg-en, to follow. folgte, 1 gefolgt. Rem. 1. Falent and fahren take the umlaut in the 2d and 3d persons of the present singular. Rem. 2. Fahren means to ride in a carriage or other means of conveyance. Reiter means to ride on a horse. Exercise 56. 1. Has Mr. Franz been here? 2. No, he has not been here. 3. The weather has become very cold. 4. Where is Mr. Stromberg ? 5. He has gone to Magdeburg to- day. 6. Did Mr. Meyerheim go to Potsdam in his car- riage (fahren)? 7. No, he went on horseback (reiten). 8. We went to Charlottenburg on foot this morning. 9. Mr. Wiedner has not come home yet. 10. Cologne lies on the left bank of the Rhine. 11. Your German newspaper is lying on the table. 12. The daughter of Mr. Friedländer had already died before (ehe) he came home. 13. Whom do you wish? 14. I am looking for Mr. Wiegand. 15. He has gone to Dresden to-day ; he will be here to-morrow. 3 LESSON XXIX. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. Der Brief iſt ſchwer zu leſen, The letter is hard to read Er wünſcht das Buch zu ſehen, He wishes to see the book. Was iſt zu thun? What is to be done? Das Haus iſt zu verkaufen, The house is for sale. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 93 Ich hörte ſie ſingen, Sie machen mich lachen, Wir gehen ſpazie’ren, Er iſt ſpazieren gefahren, I heard them sing. You make me laugh. We are going to take a walk., He has gone to take a ride. Siebenundfünfzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Der Schneider hat verſprochen, mir den Rock Heute More gen zu ſchicken. 2. Es iſt meine Abſicht, übermorgen nach Er- langen zu gehen. 3. Ich wünſdhe mit Herrn Sdnorr zu ſpres chen. 4. Er iſt augenbliqlidi nicht zu Hauſe. 5. Es wird ſpät; es iſt die höchſte Zeit (high time), nach Hauſe zu gehen. 6. Dieſes Haus iſt ſogleich zu verkaufen. 7. Hier ſind vier mö- blirte Zimmer zu vermiethen. 8. Eine Herrſchaftliche Wohnung nebſt Gað und Waſſerleitung iſt in der Leipziger Straße zu vers miethen. 9. Wir haben keine Zeit zu verlieren. 10. Anſtatt das Haus zu behalten, hat Herr Sigel es verkauft. 11. Fried- rich Kraft iſt nad Wien gegangen, um ſeinen Großvater zu bes ſuchen. 12. Guſtav Mühlheimer iſt nach Berlin gegangen, um auf (at) der dortigen Univerſität zu ſtudiren. 13. Das Raus chen iſt eine ſchlechte Gewohnheit. 14. Was iſt zu thun ? Meine deutſche Grammatik iſt nicht zu finden. 15. Marie und Katharine lernen jeßt das Klavier ſpielen. 16. Sind Sie heute Morgen ſpazieren gegangen? 17. Nein, ich bin geritten. 18. Heute werden wir ſpazieren fahren. 19. Warum bleibſt du ſizen? 20. Er lobt das Budy, ohne es geleſen zu haben. Vocabulary. Die Abſicht, -, pl. —en, intention. Xugenblidlid), for the moment. 1 Bewe'gung, -,pl.-en, motion, Dortig, of that place. [noblemen). exercise.. Herrſdjaftlid), fine and spacious (fit for. , Gewohn'heit, —, pl. —en, habit. Möblirť, furnished. Univerſität, -, pl. —en, univer Selig, blessed. sity. [ter-works. Sdiledit, bad. " Waſſerleitung, -, pl. —en, wa Sogleidy (adv.), immediately. [with. 1 Wohnung,--, pl.-en, residence, Nebſt (prep. with dat.), with, together suite of rooms, apartments. Nauchen (reg.), to smoke. 1 Zeit, -, pl. --en, time. Spazie’ren (see 6, 2, p. 95). Das Gns, -es, pl.-, gas. | Vermie'then (reg.), to rent, let. 94 THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 5. | Bleiben (ſein aux.), to remain. blieb, / geblieben. 2. Sitzen (ſein aux.), to sit. faß, | geſeſſen. 6. / Thun, to do. that, I gethan. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the Infinitive Mood has two tenses, the Present and the Perfect : Present Tense. Perfect Tense. lieb-ent, to love. geliebt haben, to have loved. bau-en, to build. gebaut haben, to have built. find-en, to find. gefunden haben, to have found. geh-en, to go. gegangen ſein, to have gone. werd-en, to become. geworden ſein, to have become. fein, to be. geweſen ſein, to have been. 2. The Infinitive is usually preceded by zu, to : Id winſdje mit ihm zit ſprechen, I wish to speak with him. Der Brief iſt ſchwer zu leſen, The letter is hard to read. Wir hatten genug zu thun, We had enough to do. 3. While in English both the present participle and the infinitive mood are used as verbal nouns, in German only the Infinitive is thus used : Das Reiten iſt eine angenehme Riding is an agreeable exercise. Bewegung, Geben iſt ſeliger als nehmen, It is more blessed to give than to re- ceive. Rem. The Infinitive, used as a noun, takes the neuter gender : Das Reiter. 4. The Infinitive may be preceded by the preposi- tions anſtatt, ohne, um: Anſtatt zu gehen, bleibt er, Instead of going, he remains. Er lobt das Budy, ohne es geleſen He praises the book, without having zu haben, read it. Rem. The preposition um is used before the Infinitive: (1), to express purpose or desire; (2), after adjectives which are preceded by zu (too), or which are followed by genug (enough): Er iſt nach der Stadt gegangen, He has gone to the city to buy a um ein Budy zu kaufent, book. Das Kind iſt zu jung, um allein in The child is too young to go into the den Wald zu gehen, woods alone. Er iſt nidt alt genitg, um allein He is not old enough to go into the in den Wald zu gehen, woods alone. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 95 5. The Infinitive is sometimes used in a passive sense : Was iſt zu thun? What is to be done? Das. Budy iſt nicht zu haben, The book is not to be had. 6. Zu may be omitted when the Infinitive is preceded : : 1. By the verbs machen, helfen, hören, fühlen, ſehen, heißen, nennen, lehren, lernen : Sie machen midh laden, You make me laugh. Wir hörten ihn ſingen, We heard him sing. Er Yehrte midy das Klavier ſpielen, He taught me to play the piano. Sie Yernen das Klavier ſpielen, They are learning to play the piano. 2. By the verbs bleiben, gehen, ſtehen, liegen, reiten, fahren, haben, ſein, in certain idiomatic expres- sions : Er bleibt ſiken, He keeps his seat. Er geht ſpazieren, He is taking a walk. Er fährt ſpazieren, He is taking a ride (in a carriage). Er reitet ſpazieren, He is taking a ride (on horseback). Rem. 1. Zu is also omitted after other verbs, as will be hereafter explained. Rem. 2. Spazieren (used with gehen, reiten, fahren) means to go (to walk or ride) for pleasure. Exercise 58. 1. The merchant promised to send us the cloth yes- terday. 2. It is his intention to go to Augsburg to- morrow. 3. I wish to buy a German Dictionary. 4... The large house opposite us is for sale. 5. Here is a large and elegant suite of rooms (eine Herrſchaftliche Woh- nung) to let. 6. The large house in Wilhelms Street, with gas and water (nebſt Gas und Waſſerleitung), is for sale immediately. 7. Instead of coming by way of Co- logne, he came by way of Frankfort. 8. I have no time to lose ; I am going to Leipsic this evening. 9.“ It is more blessed to give than to receive." 10. Why does Charles keep his seat? (6,2, above.) 11. What is to be done? 12. It is high time to go, and the tailor has not yet sent me my overcoat. 13. Mr. Dietrich has gone to take a walk. 14. I am going to take a ride (on horse- back). 15. They have gone to ride (in a carriage). PARTICIPLES. LESSON XXX. PARTICIPLES. Der folgende Tag war ſehr heiß The following day was very und ſchwül, hot and sultry. Das Bild iſt reizend, . The picture is charming. Der von allen ſeinen Freunden Professor Behr, who was Tehr geliebte und geehrte Herr greatly beloved and re- Profeſſor Behr iſt geſtern spected by all his friends, Åbend an der Schwindſucht died suddenly yesterday plötzlidy geſtorben, evening of consumption. Die Vereinigten Staaten, The United States. Neunundfünfzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Am folgenden Tage gingen wir nach Wien. 2. Von un- Term Hauſe haben wir eine ganz reizende Ausſicht. 3. Wien iſt die größte und die bedeutendſte Stadt in Deſterreich. 4. Nürn- berg hat im Mittelalter eine glänzende Geſchic;te gehabt. 5. In induſtriellen Beziehungen iſt Nürnberg jetzt die bedeutendſte Stadt in Baiern. 6. Die dreizehnte, vermehrte, und völlig neu bears Weitete Ausgabe der Geſchichte der deutſchen Literatur iſt jetzt in allen Buchhandlungen zu haben. 7. Neue und gebraudste Bü- cher in alten und modernen Sprachen ſind in der Buchhandlung von Streiſdner und Rodenberg billigſt zu verkaufen. 8. Der Vertrag zwiſchen den Vereinigten Staaten ind dem Norddeuts [chen Bunde iſt jetzt abgeſchloſſen (concluded). 9. Die im Jahre 1809 geſtiftete Univerſität in Berlin iſt jeßt die beſudy teſte und die beſte in Deutſchland. 10. Die Zahl der Profer ſoren iſt hundert und vierundneunzig; die Zahl der Studiren- den iſt über 3000. 11. Die im Jahre 1818 geſtiftete Univer- ſität zu Bonn iſt die jüngſte in Deutſchland. 12. Die Zahl der Studirenden iſt über 1000; die Zahl der Profeſſoren iſt hundert und ſeche. 13. Herr Profeſſor Schmidt iſt Profeſſor der moder- nen Sprachen an der hieſigen Univerſität. 14. Albrecht Dürer . war der berühmteſte deutſche Maler des Mittelalters. TIL PARTICIPLES. 97 Vocabulary Der Freund, -es, pl. ~e, friend. Staat, -es, pl. -en, state. Modern', modern. , Vertrag', -e8, pl. Verträge, treaty Induſtriel', industrial. Die Ausfidit,-. pl.-en, prospect. Plötzlid), sudden. 11 Bezieh'ung,-, pl. -en, relation. | Völlig, full, complete. 1 Budyhandlung, , pl. -en, book- Berühmt, famous, distinguished. store. Ehren, to honor, respect. » Sdywindſudit, --, consumption. Gründen, to found. 1 Zahr, -, pl. —en, number. Stiften, to endow, found. Das Bild, -es, pl. --er, picture. Verein’igen, to unite. Bear'beiten, to revise, work over. Vermeh'ren, to increase, enlarge. Neizen, to charm. Reizend (adj.), charming. Bedeut'en, to signify. Bedeut'end (adj.), important. Glänzen, to shine. Glänzend (adj.), brilliant. Braucien, to use. Gebraudiť (adj.), second-hand. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the verb has two Parti- ciples: the Present and the Perfect. 1. The Present Participle is formed by adding -end to the root of the verb. 2. The Perfect Participle is formed (1), by adding -t to the root of all regular verbs, and -en to the root of all irregular verbs; and (2), by prefixing -ge to the root of all verbs, except the insepara- ble compounds -be, -ent, emp, etc., and to verbs ending in -iren -ieren). Rem. The radical vowel of many irregular verbs is changed. Present Infinitive. / Present Participle. . Perfect Participle. lieb-en, to love. lieb-end, loving. I ge-lieb-t, loved. baut-en, to build. | bau - end, building. | ge-bau-t, built. 1 erfind'-en, to invent. erfind'-end, inventing. 1 erfund'-cu, invented. 2. Participles are often used adjectively. They are then subject to all the laws of declension, and compar- ison that apply to adjectives: Am folgenden Tage, On the following day. Die Vereinigten Staaten, The United States. PARTICIPLES. Das reizende Bild, The charming picture. Gebraudte Büder, Second-hand books. Der berühmteſte Maler, The most famous painter. 3. The present participle is used much less in German 'than in English. It is rarely used after ſein, to be, ex- cept when it has an adjective signification Das Bild iſt reizend, The picture is charming. 4. The perfect participle, on the other hand, is used 5. Participles are frequently translated into English by the verb, with a relative pronoun for its subject: Die im fahre 1809 gegründete The University of Berlin, which was Univerſität zu Berlin, founded in 1809. Exercise 60. 1. On the following day they went by way of Frank- fort to Cologne. 2. (The in 1520 completed cathedral in Magdeburg is among the most beautiful churches in Germany.) 3. From the tower of the cathedral we have a most (ganz) charming prospect. 4. Breslau, the largest and the most important city in Silesia (Sdiles. ſien), has 160,000 inhabitants. 5. The university in Prague, founded in 1348, was the first university in Ger- many. 6. The university in Leipsic, which was (en- dowed) in 1409, was the second university in Germany. 7. (The twenty-second enlarged and fully revised edi- tion of the German Grammar of Mr. Dr. Heyse is now to have.) 8. Second-hand books in all languages are for sale here cheap. 9. (The on the twenty-fourth March on the consumption suddenly died Mr. Prof. Behr was the oldest professor on the here [hieſige] univer- sity.) 10. The treaty between the United States and Austria is not yet concluded. 11. Peter von Cornelius, who died in the year 1867, was the most distinguished painter of the nineteenth century. THE POTENTIAL VERB 99 LESSON XXXI.. THE POTENTIAL VERBS fönnen AND miiſſen. Id kann es nicht leſen, I can not read it. Kannſt du es leſen? Canst thou read it? Er kann es leſen, He can read it. Wir fönnen es nicht leſen, We can not read it. Sie können es leſen, They can read it. Sie konnten es leſen, They could read it. : Er hat es leſen können, He has been able to read it. Er wird es leſen können, He will be able to read it. Er hat es nicht gekonnt, He has not been able to do it. Herr Braun kann Deutſch, Mr. Braun knows German. Einundſedzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Ich kann ſeinen Brief gar nicht leſen. 2. Karl ſagt, daß er ſeine deutſche Grammatik nicht finden kann. 3. Können Sie mit uns ſpazieren gehen? 4. Nein, heute können wir nicht ſpas zieren gehen. 5. Herr Kramer ſagt, daß er den Brief nicht leſen konnte (or daß er den Brief nicht hat leſen können). 6. Herr Karl Hartmann kann Deutſch und Spaniſch. 7. Warum hat Marie das deutſche Lied nicht geſungen? 8. Sie hat es nicht gekonnt (or ſie hat es nicht ſingen können). 9. Er wird den Brief nid)t leſen können. 10. Ich muß heute einen Brief an Herrn Maßmann ſchreiben. 11. Herr Dietrich hat mir geſagt, daß er heute nach Hamburg gehen muß, um einige Freunde auß Amerifa zu treffen. 12. Wir konnten nicht länger bleiben; wir mußten nach Hauſe gehen. 13. Heute Morgen habe ich ſo viele Briefe (direiben müſſen, daß ich nicht nach dem Muſeum habe ges Ben fönnen. 14. Morgen werden wir nach Dresden und übers morgen nach Prag gehen. 15. Herr Schnorr wünſcht einen Leh- rer für ſeine zwei Kinder ; der Lehrer muß Engliſch, Deutſch und Franzöſiſch geläu'fig (fluently) ſprechen können. 16. Ich habe die dritte Ausgabe der Geſchichte von Deutſchland in der ganzen Stadt nicht finden können. U 100 VERBS fönnen AND müſſen. TO THE POTENTIAL - Grammatical. 1. The German verb has no potential mood. The po- tential mood of the English verb is in most cases trans- lated into German by the use of the verbs fönnen, can ; müſſen, must; etc. 2. The Potential Verbs (können, müſſen, etc.) have a com- plete conjugation. They take haben as their auxiliary. They belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs : Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. | Perfect Participle. fönnt - e 11, to be able. f onn-te, I ge- fonn -t. miji - en, to be obliged. muß-te, Rem. The use of the Potential Verbs is much more extensive than that of the auxiliaries of the potential mood in English (may, can, must, etc.). They are often translated by circumlocutory phrases, as fönnen, to be able; miſ- ſen, to be compelled, to be obliged (to have to). 3. The Potential Verbs (called in German the aud- iliaries of mode) are never used as independent verbs. They are only used to limit or qualify the infinitives of other verbs (though the limited verb is frequently understood): ".. Id, kann es nidjt, I can not (do) it. Id habe es-nid)t gefonnt, I was not able (to do) it. Er hat es gemuſt, He was compelled (to do) it. 4. Können (to be able, can) indicates : 1. Moral or physicial possibility: Er kann leſen und ſdreiben, He can read and write. 2. A possibility or contingency: Sie fönnen midy erwarten, You may expect me. 3. Können is frequently used with the verbs leſen, ſagen, ſpredjen, verſtehen (to understand), and thun (to do), understood: Herr Noth kann Deutſch, Mr. Roth knows German. 5. Indicative mood of fönnen, to be able, can: • Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. idy fani I can. id; fonn-te, 'I could. du fann-ſt, thou canst. du konn - teſt, thou couldst. er fann, he can. er konn -te, he could. wir kö n 11 - cn, we can. wir konn- ten, we could. ihr könn-et, you can. | ihr foil 11 - tet, you could. ſie könn-en, they can. | fie fonit - ten, they could. THE POTENTIAL VERBS fönnen AND müſlen. 101 + Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. I have been able, etc. I had been able, etc. id hab-e gekonnt. id) hatt-e gekonnt. du haſt gekonnt. bu hat-teſt gekonnt. er hat gefonnt. er hat-te gekonnt. wir hab-en gekonnt. wir hat-ten gefonnt. ihr hab-et gekonnt. ihr hat-tet gekonnt. ſie hab- en gekonnt. ſie hat- ten gekonnt. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. I shall be able, etc. I shall have been able, etc. idy werd-e fönnen. ich werd-e gekonnt haben. du wirſt könne 11. du wirſt gekonnt habent. er wird köitnen. er wird gekonnt haben. wir werdeen können. wir werd-en gekonnt haben. ihr werD-et köin e it. ihr werd-et gekonnt haben. fie werd-en könnte n. ſie werd- en gekonnt haben. Rem. Können, to be able, is derived from kennen, to know. The English can is from the same root. 6. Müſſen (must) is frequently rendered into English by such expressions as to be obliged, to be compelled. 7. Indicative mood of müſſen, to be obliged, must : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id muß, I must. id) muß-te, I was obliged. du mußt, thou must. bu muß-teſt, thou wast obliged. er muß, he must. er muß-te, he was obliged. wir mit ſi-en, we must. wir muß-ten, we were obliged. ihr mit ſq-et, you must. iljrin u ſ- tet, you were obliged. ſie mit ſf-en, they must. fie muß- ten, they were obliged. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. idy have geniuſzt, etc., ich hatte gemußt, etc., I have been obliged, etc. I had been obliged, etc. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. id) werde miiſſent, etc., id) werde gemuſt havent, etc., I shall be obliged, etc. I shall have been obliged, etc. 8. The participial form is only used when the principal verb is understood. The infinitive form is used for the participle when the principal verb is expressed : Ich habe nidyt hören könnent, I could not hear. dy hatte geben müſſen, I had been obliged to go. (but) Fd habe es nicht gekonnt, I could not (do) it. Er hat es gemußt, He has been compelled (to do) it. 102 THE POTENTIAL VERBS wollen And mögen. 9. The Potential Verbs follow the same laws of posi- tion in the present and imperfect tenses as the auxilia- ries haben, ſein, and werden. In the compound tenses the infinitive form of the potential verb is placed after the infinitive of the modified verb: Er wird es leſen fönnen, He will be able to read it. Er hat es leſen föunen, He has been able to read it. Exercise 62. 1. I can not find my pencil. 2: Freddy, canst thou bring me my German Dictionary? 3. The teacher can not hear what we are saying. 4. We could not hear what he said. 5. They will not be able to read this letter. 6. (Charles, thy father says that thou imme- diately [gleich] home go must.) 7. We must send this letter to America by way of Liverpool. 8. I could not go to walk with them; I had to remain at home and write my German exercise. 9. Mr. Kraft will have (müſſen) to sell his new house. 10. We will not be able to go to Augsburg to-morrow; we will go to Nuremberg to-morrow, and day after to-morrow we must (1st Fut.) go to Augsburg. 11. Mr. Krahn wishes a clerk; he must be able to write and speak German with fluency (geläufig). 12. Why did you not read the letter? 13. We could not (it). LESSON XXXII. THE POTENTIAL VERBS wollen AND mögen. Id will gleich gehen, I will go immediately. Ich werde gleich gehen, I shall go immediately. Wollen Sie mit uns geben? Do you wish to go with us? Wir wollten das Buch kaufen, We wished to buy the book. Wir haben das Buch kaufen wollen, " " 66 66 Du magſt mit uns geben, Thou mayst go with us. Id mag dieſes Tud nicyt, I do not like this cloth. Er mag ſagen was er will, He may say what he will. THE POTENTIAL VERBS wollen AND mögen. 103 Dreiundſechzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Wollen Sie mit uns nach der Stadt fahren? 2. Heute Morgen habe ich keine Zeit, nad der Stadt zu fahren, id) muß einen Brief an (to) meine Eltern ſchreiben. 3. Ich will hier in Leipzig nicht länger bleiben, das Wetter iſt jetzt ſo falt, naß und unangenehm ; id, werde übermorgen nady Heidelberg gehen. 4. Wir wollten geſtern nach Potsdam gehen, um die große Para'de zu ſehen, aber es hat den ganzen Tag geregnet, und wir ſind den ganzen Tag zu Hauſe geblieben. 5. Warum haben Sie geſtern Abend das Lied nicht ſingen wollen? 6. Ich habe es gewollt, aber ich habe es nicht gekonnt ; ich habe das Lied nod; nid)t ge- lernt. 7. Herr Kraft wird das Haus gewiß nid)t kaufen wollen. 8. Mutter, ich möchte ſehr gern (would like very much) mit Heinrich Kurz nach dem Muſeum gehen. 8. O ja, du magſt mit ihm gehen, wenn (if) du willſt, aber du mußt nicht zu lange blei- ben; du haſt deine deutſche Aufgabe heute noch nicht geſchrieben. 9. Dieſes Tudy iſt viel zu theuer ; wir werden es nicht kaufen. 10. Er mag ſpazieren gehen; menn (if) er will, aber wir werden zu Hauſe bleiben. 11. Wünſchen Sie dieſes Buch? 12. Nein, ich will jenes nehmen. 13. Ich werde es Ihnen (diden, wenn Sie wollen. 14. Wo wohnen Sie? 15. Wir wohnen in der. Zimmer-Straße, gegenüber dem neuen Hauſe des Herrn Kief- ſtahl. 16. Sie können thun was Sie wollen (you may do what you like). Grammatical. 1. The Potential Verb wollen usually indicates willing- ness, inclination, desire, intention, or determination: Id will gleid) gehen, I will go immediately. Wollen ſie den Brief leſen? Do you wish to read the letter ? 2. The indicative mood of wollen, to be willing, to wish: Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id will, I am willing. id woll-te, I was willing.. bu wil-ſt, thou art willing. du woll-teſt, thou wast willing. er will, he is willing. er woll-te, he was willing. wir woll-en, we are willing. wir woll-ten, we were willing. ihr wollzet, you are willing. ihr woll- tet, you were willing. fie wollen, they are willing. | fie woll- ten, they were willing. 104 THE POTENTIAL VERBS wollen AND mögen. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. id habe gewollt, etc., ich hatte gewollt, etc., I have been willing, etc. I had been willing, etc. First Future Tense. . Second Futurše Tense. ich werde wollen, etc., I shall be willing, etc. | I shall have been willing, etc. 3. The Potential verb mögen (may) indicates permis- sion, concession, and sometimes desire or liking : Er mag gehen, He may go. [soldier. Er mag ein tapferer Soldat fein, (I concede that) he may be a brave Ich mag dieſes Tuch nicht, I do not like this cloth. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. ich mag, I may. ich mod-te, I might. du mag-ſt, thou mayst. du moch- teſt, thou mightst. er mag, he may. er modi -te, he might. wir mög-en, we may. ihr mög-et, you may. ihr mody - tet, you might. fie mög-en, they may. fie moch - ten, they might. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. ich habe gemodhyt, etc., idy hatte gemocht, etc., I have been permitted, etc. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. ich werde mögen, etc., id werde gemodit haben, etc., I shall be permitted, etc. I shall have been permitted, etc. 5. Time how long is put in the accusative case: Er blieb den ganzen Tag, He remained the whole day. Exercise 64. 1. Shall you go to Potsdam to-day? 2. Do you wish to go to Potsdam to-day? 3. Would you like (wollen Sie) to read this letter? 4. From whom is it? 5. It is from our friend Mr. Diez; he is now in Rome. 6. Why will (wollen) you not go with us to the Museum? 7. I must stay at home and write a letter to my brother. 8. Can you not write it this evening? 9. No, this evening I must call upon (beſuchen) Mr. Behr. 10. Did you go to the Museum this morning ? 11. Yes, THE POTENTIAL VERBS ſollen and dürfeit. 105 but we could not see the paintings (because [weil] the museum closed was). 12. What paintings did you wish (wollen) to see? 13. I wished to see the famous paint- ing by (pon) Holbein. 14. I have often wished to see it, but I have never been able to see it yet. . 15. Charles, thou mayst go with us to walk, if thou wishest. 16. I do not like this book; it is not at all interesting. 17. Mr. Beyerlein says that from his house he can see the spire of the Cathedral of Freiburg. LESSON XXXIII. THE POTENTIAL VERB ſollen and diirfen. Wer ſoll gehen? Who shall go (is to go)? Du ſollſt Gott, deinen Herrn Thou shalt love the Lord lieben von ganzem Herzen, thy God with all thy heart. Wir ſollten nads Hauſe gehen, We ought to go home. Er ſoll ſehr krank ſein, They say he is very sick. Herr Kuhn ſoll im Jahre 1842 Mr. Kuhn is supposed to nadı Amerika gegangen ſein, have gone to America in 1842. Fünfundſechzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Was ſollen wir thun? 2. Wer ſoli nad der Stadt geben, um das Buch zu holen, Heinrids oder ich? 3. Heinrich ſoll ges hen, du haſt deine deutſche Aufgabe noch nicht geſdhrieben. 4. Ich ſollte einen Brief an Herrn Putkammer ſchon geſtern ges ſchrieben haben. 5. Herr Rahn iſt im Jahre 1845 nach Ames rifa gegangen; er ſoll dort vor ungefähr vier Jahren geſtorben ſein. 6. Herr Prenzler ſoll ſehr reich ſein. 7. Wie iſt Ihr ge- ehrter Name (name) wenn ich fragen (ask) darf? 8. Mein Name iſt Guſtav Bendler. '9. Meine Herren (gentlemen), hier dürfen Sie nicht rauchen. 10. Er darf nicht kommen ohne die Erlaubniß (permission) ſeines Vaters. 11. liebe Mutter, darf ich mit Wilhelm Adermann und Heinrich Kühner ſpazieren E 2 106 THE POTENTIAL VERBS ſollen AND dürfen. geben? 12. Haft du alle deine Aufgaben geſchrieben? 13. Aufgabe habe ich nod; nid)t ganz vollendet ; ich kann ſie doch heute u nd vollenden. 14. Ja, du magſt gehen, aber du mußt zeitig (early) nach Hauſe kommen. 15, Das Wetter war in Alerandrien ſo heiß geworden, daß wir dort nicht länger bleiben durften. 16. Von Alerandrien gingen wir direkt' (directly) nad Smyrna. Grammatical. 1. The Potential Verb ſollen indicates : 1. Moral obligation or duty : Er ſollte gehen, He should (ought to) go. 2. Obligation or duty dependent upon the will of another: Wer ſoll gehen? Who shall go? -- is to go? Du ſouſt Gott, Deinen Herrn, Thou shalt love the Lord thy God lieben von ganzem Herzen, with all thy heart. 3. A report, rumor, or general impression : Er ſoll ſehr krank ſein, They say he is very sick. Herr Suhn ſol nad) Amerika Mr. Kuhn is supposed to have gone gegangen fein. to America. 2. Indicative mood of ſollen, shall, should, ought : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id ſoll, I ought. id ſoll-te, I should. du ſol-ſt, thou oughtest. du foll-teſt, thou shouldest. er ſoll, he ought. · er foll- te, he should. wir ſoll - en, we ought. wir ſoll - teit, we should. ihr foll-et, you ought. ihr ſoll - tet, you should. ſie foll-en, they ought. fie foll- ten, they should. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. idy have geſout, etc., ich hatte geſollt, etc., I have been obliged, etc. I had been obliged, etc. First Future Tense. . Second Future. ich werde ſollen, etc., id) werde gcſollt haben, etc. I shall be obliged, etc. * I shall have been obliged, etc. 3. The Potential Verb dürfen indicates: 1. Permission (by law, or by the will of another): Jetzt diirft ihr ſpielen, You may play now. THE POTENTIAL VERBS ſollen AND dürfen. 107 2. With a negative, dürfen is usually translated by " must not:” Hier diirfen Sie nidyt rauden, You must not smoke here. 3. It sometimes has the signification of " to dare:” Er darf nidyt kommen, ohne die He dares not come without his fir- Erlaubniß ſeines Vaters, ther's permission. 4. Indicative mood of dürfen, to be permitted : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. id darf, I am permitted. |idy dürf-te, I was permitted. Du darf-ſt, thou art permitted. bu durf-teſt, thou wast permitted. er darf, he is permitted. er durf-te, he was permitted. wir di rf-en, we are permitted. wir durf- ten, we were permitted. ihr dit rf- et, you are permitted. ihr durf-tet, you were permitted. ſie dürf-en, they are permitted. 1 ſie durf- ten, they were permitted. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. . ich habe gedurft, etc., ich hatte gcdurft, etc., I have been permitted, etc. I had been permitted, etc. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. ich werde diirfen, etc., id) werde gedurft haben, etc., I shall be permitted, etc. I shall have been permitted, etc. 5. Principal parts of all the Potential Verbs: Present Imperfect Perfect Infinitive. Indicative. Participle. fod-en (ought), foll-te, ge-foll-t. woll-en (will), woll-te, ge-woU-t. könii-en (can), konn-te, ge-konn-t. mög-en (may), modi-te, ge-mod-t. dürf-en (dare), durf-te, ge-durf-t. miiſſ-en (must), 1 muß-te, ge-muß-t. 6. The explanation of the many uses of the potential verbs in the subjunctive and conditional moods must be reserved until these moods are given. Exercise 66. 1. What shall (ſolen) I say to him? 2. I shall (werde) say that I can not go to-day. 3. I ought (ſollte) to write a letter to my brother this evening. 4. Mr. Kelle is said (rod) to be the richest man in the city. 5. Mr. Berghaus went to Texas in 1858 ; he is supposed to have died during the war. 6. May (dürfen) I ask what 108 SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. this book cost? 7. The price of this book was seven thalers and twenty groschens. 8. He may (mögen) say what he likes (wollen), I shall not buy the painting ; I do not like (mögen) it at all. 9. What is your (honored) name, if I may take the liberty to ask ? 10. Children, you must (dürfen) not play here; you may (können) go into the garden, and there play as much as you like. 11. He can not haye the book to-day; it is not yet bound. 12. Will (wollen) you go with us to Potsdam to- day? 13. The doctor says that I must stay in the house (zu Hauſe) to-day. LESSON XXXIV. SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. Er wird es nicht annehmen, He will not accept it. He accepts it. Er nahm es an, He accepted it. Er hat es angenommen, He has accepted it. Er hatte es angenommen, He had accepted it. Er wird es angenommen haben, He will have accepted it. Siebenundjedhzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Id muß den Brief abſchreiben. 2. Karl hat ſeine deutſdhe Aufgabe abgeſchrieben. 3. Du mußt deine Aufgabe abſchreiben, ehe du ausgeheſt. 4. Er ſchrieb ſeine Aufgabe ab, ehe er aus- ging. 5. Er ſagt, daß er ſeine Aufgabe nicht abgeſchrieben hat. 6. Ich hatte keine Zeit, den Brief geſtern abzuſchreiben. 7. Dies ſes Wort iſt ſehr ſchwer auszuſprechen. 8. Herr Klein hat ſeine Meinung (opinion) ganz deutlich (plainly) ausgeſprochen. 9. Der Maler Hat ſeine Gemälde ausgeſtellt ; er wil ſie verkaufen. 10. Wer hat meine Grammatik weggenommen? 11. Wir ges ben jest nach dem Muſeum; wollen Sie mitgehen (or wollen Sie mit)? 12. Wollen Sie das Bud mitnehmen? 13. Der berühmte Baumeiſter und Maler, Schinkel, hat die großen Ge- SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. 109 mäide in der Vorhalle (vestibule) des Muſeums in Berlin ents worfen, aber ſein Schüler, Cornelius, hat ſie ausgeführt. 14. Es fing an zu regnen. 15. Es hatte angefangen zu regnen, ehe wir ausgingen. 16. Sie gingen auß, ehe es zu regnen ans gefangen hatte. 17. Ich wußte nicht, daß er den Brief ab dret- ben wollte. 18. Wann iſt Herr Braun angekommen? 19. Er kam geſtern Abend an. 20. Wann kommen Sie wieder ? 21. Wir werden übermorgen wiederfommen. 22. Die Wahl (elec- tion) hat geſtern ſtattgefunden. 23. Sie haben ihn freigeſpro- chen. Grammatical. 1. Separable Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing cer- tain prepositions, adverbs, nouns, or adjectives to simple verbs : Er wird den Brief abſdireiben, He will copy the letter. Sie werden morgen wiederkommen, They will return to-morrow. Die Wahl wird ſtattfinden, The election will take place. Sie werden ihn freiſprechen, They will acquit him. Rem. By far the greater number of prefixes of compound verbs are prep- ositions. 2. Principal parts of some separable compound verbs: Present Infinitive. I (With zu). Imp. Ind. Perf. Participle. aus'- führen, to execute. laus'zuführen, laus' führte, aus geführt. aus'- ſtellen, to exhibit. Jauszuſtellen, aus' ſtellte, aus'geſtellt. ab'- ſdreiben, to copy. labʻzuſdyreiben, ab'ſdrieb, Jab'geſdyrieben. an'=fangen, to commence. an'zufangen, an'fing, an'gefangen. ant' = niehmen, to accept. Jan'zunehmen, Jan'nahm, Jan'genommen. mit- nehmen, to take with. mitzunehmen, mitnahm, mitgenommen. wegʻ- nehmen, to take away. wegʻzunehmen, wegʻnalım, weg'genommen. aus'-gehen, to go out. aus'zugehen, aus'ging, aus' gegangen. mit-gehen, to accompany mitzugehen, miłging, mit gegangen. weg'-gehen, to go away. wegʻzugeljen, wegʻging, weg'gegangen. an'- kommen, to arrive. Jan'zukommen, an'kam, an'gekommen. wie’der-kommen, to return wie derzukommen, wie derfam wiedergekommen aus'- ſpredjen, to pronounce. aus’zuſpredjen, aus'ſprad), aus' geſprodjen, ſtatt- finden, to take place. ſtatt zufinden, ſtattfand, ſtattgefundeni. frei'-ſpredjen, to acquit. |frei zuſpredjen, frei' ſpradı, 'frei geſprodjen. Rem. It will be noticed that the prefix of separable compound verbs takes the primary accent. 110 COMPOUND VERBS. Rem. 2. When zu is used with the infinitive mood, it adheres to the simple verb: aus' zuſpredjen, weg'zugehen. Rem. 3. In the perfect participle the syllable ge- is retained, and is placed between the prefix and the verb: ausgeſprochen, weg'gegangen. Rem. 4. It will be noticed that many verbs, which are compound in German, are translated into English by simple verbs: ab'ſdireiben, to copy. 3. Indicative Mood of annehmen, to accept : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. ich nehme-an,' I accept. idy nahm-an, I accepted. du nimmſt-an, thou acceptest. du nahmſt-an, thou acceptedst. er nimmt-an, he accepts. er nahm-an, he accepted. wir nehmenman, we accept. wir nahmen-an, we accepted. ihr nehmet-an, you accept. ihr nahmet-an, you accepted. ſie nehmen-an, they accept. fie nahmen-an, they accepted. Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. I have accepted it, etc. I had accepted, etc. id habe an'genommen. id hatte an'genommen. du haft ali'geito mmen. du ljatteſt an'genommen. er hat an'genommen. er hatte an'genommen. wir haben an'genommen. wir hatten an'genommen. ihr habet an'ge 11 om men. ihr hattet an'genommen. fie haben an'genomme it. ſie hatten an'genommen. First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. I shall accept, etc. I shall have accepted, etc. ich werde an'nehmen. id) werde an'genoinment habent. du wirſt an'nehmen. du wirſt an'genommen haben. er wird an'n ehmen. er wird an'genommen haben. wir werden an'n ehmen. wir werden an'genommen haben. ihr werdet an'nehmen. ihr werdet an'genommen haben. fie werden an'nehment. ſie werden an'genommen haben. Rem. The prefix adheres to the verb except in the simple tenses when used in direct or leading sentences. In such cases it is separated from the verb and placed after it (and also after the object of the verb, if the verb is transi- tive): Nahm er es an ? Did he accept it? Ja, er nahm es an. Yes, he accepted it. (but) Wer ſagt, daß er es annahm ? Who says that he accepted it ? 4. The indirect object may be omitted after mitgehen, mitnehmen: Wollen Sie mitgehen? Will you go with (us) ? Wollen Sie es mitnehmen? Will you take it with (you)? INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. 111 Exercise 68. 1. Have you copied your exercise ? 2. (No, I have it yet not copied, but I shall it this evening copy.) 3. These words are hard to pronounce. 4. When will you return? 5. We will return to-morrow or day after to- morrow. 6. We can not go out. It is beginning to rain. 7. Mr. Kranzler says that the architect will ex- hibit the plan of the new city hall. 8. We are going to Potsdam to-day; can you go with us? 9. I can not go to-day; the physician says that I must not go out to-day. 10. When will the election (die Wahl) take place ? 11. It will take place day after to-morrow. 12. Who has taken my German Dictionary away? 13. He was not willing to accept the book. 14. If you go to walk now, you will have (müſſen) to copy your exercise this evening. 15. I have already copied it. LESSON XXXV. INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. Ich verſteh'e eß nicht, I do not understand it. Id verſtand' es nicht, I did not understand it. Id habe es nicht verſtanden, I have not understood it. Ich hatte es nicht verſtand'en, I had not understood it. Ich werde es verſtel’en, I shall understand it. Ich werde es verſtand'en haben, I shall have understood it. Es iſt ſchwer zu verſteh'en. It is hard to understand. Wir haben den Berg umgang'én, We have avoided the moun- tain. Wir werden den Berg umgeb'en, We shall avoid the moun- tain. Wir umgin'gen den Berg, We avoided the mountain. Er holte das Buch wieder, He got the book again. Er wiederhol'te heute, was er He repeated to-day what he vorgeſtern ſagte, said day before yester- day. 112 OUND VERBS. INSEPARABLE ( Neunundſechzigſte Aufgabe. Ich habe das Buch nicht geleſen, ich habe es nur ſehr flüchtig durch'geſehen. 3. Drei Soldaten ſind zum Feinde übergegangen. 4. Die Sonne wird bald un'tergehen; wir müſſen gleidy nad Hauſe (gehen). 5. Sie iſt ſchon un'tergegangen. 6. Sie haben die Rechnungen des Kaufmannes ganz genau unterſucht, aber ſie haben gar keinen Fehler gefunden. 7. Der Wundarzt hat die Wunde des Soldaten unterſucht (probed). 8. Herr Kraus hat ſeinen Garten mit einem ſehr ſchönen Zaune umgeben. 9. Herr General von Bernſtein hat den Befehl widerru' fen. 10. Er hat alle ſeine Aufgaben durchgeſehen. 11. Sie wollen mors gen wiederkommen. 12. Er wiederholt was er uns geſtern ges ſagt hat. 13. Sind Sie über Hanno'ver und Braunſchweig gekom'men? 14. Ja, aber ich bin nur direkt' durdy'gereiſt, weil ich meinen Vater morgen in Heidelberg treffen muß. 15. Wir haben Deutſchland Durchreiſt'. 16. Der Fiſder hat uns ü’berges ſetzt. 17. Herr Dietrich hat die Geſchichte von Deutſchland übers ſeßt'. 18. Herr Profeſſor Diefenbach hat uns den ganzen Abend mit einer höchſt intereſſanten Beſchreibung ſeiner letzten Reiſe in Spanien unterhalten. 19. Ich muß das Buch wie’derholen. 20. Wie gefällt Ihnen die neue Kirche ? 21. Sie hat mir ganz gut gefal'len. 22. Sie ſind ſehr um'gegangen. 23. Wir wolls ten den Berg umgeh'en. 24. Ich habe verſucht, den Brief zu leſen, aber ich habe es nidyt gekonnt. 25. Herr Finkenſtein hat uns vorgeſtern Abend beſucht. 26. Haben Sie Ihre deutſchen Aufgaben überſetzt ? 27. Der Baum war um'gefallen. Vocabulary. Der Befehr', -e8, pl. -e, command. Die Beſdreib'ung,-,pl.-en, descrip- 11. Feind, —es, pl. --e, enemy. tion. , Fehler, -, pl. --, fault, mistake. ,, Nechnung, -, pl. -en, account. " Fiſdier, —%, pl.-, fisherman. , Reiſe, -, pl. —11, journey, trip. u Zaun, -es, pl. Zäune, hedge. , Nidytung, --, pl. —en, direction. , Mond, -es, pl. ~e, moon. , Sonne, -, pl. —, sun. Flüdytig, hasty, fleeting. Neiſen, to travel, journey. Direft', direct. Genau', exact, careful. INSEPARABLE 113 COMPOUND VERBS. Grammatical. 1. Compound verbs, having as prefixes the Inseparable Particles be-, ent-, er-, ge-, ver-, zer-, are Inseparable in all their tenses: Present. Id ver - ſteh'e es nicht, I do not understand it. Imperf. Id ver - ſtand' es nidit, I did not understand it. Perfect. Ich habe es nid)t ver - ſt and'en, I have not understood it. Pluperf. Idy hatte es nidyt ver - ft an d'en, I had not understood it. 1st Fut. Id) werde es ver - ſtehen, I shall understand it. 2d Fut. Id werde es ver - ſt anden haben, I shall have understood it. Infinit. Es iſt (wer zu ver - ſt en'en, It is hard to understand. Rem. The principal parts of the irregular verb ſtehen, to stand, are ſtehen, ſtand, geſtanden. 2. Of compound verbs having the prefixes durdh, über, unter, um, wieder, wider, some are Separable and others are Inseparable: Separable. Inseparable. Durch ſehen, to look through. Durch- rei'ſen, to traverse. Ue'ber-gehen,* to go over, desert. Ueber - tref'len, to stupass. Un'ter - gehen,* to go down, set. Unter-ſudh'en, to examine. Um'=fallen,* to fall down. Um-ge'ben, to surround. Wie’der -bringen, to bring back. Wider-ſpre'den, to contradict. Wie’der - kommen,* to return. Wieder-ho'lent, to repeat. Wie’der - rufen, to call again. Wider-ru'fen, to revoke. 3. Many of these compound verbs having the prefixes durdi, über, um, unter, wieder, are used both as Separable or Inseparable, according to the signification they re- ceive: Separable. Inseparable. . Durd'-reiſen, to travel through. Durdy - reiſ'ent, to traverse. We'ber - Teten, to put over. Ueber-ſek'en, to translate. Um'-gehen,* to go out of one's way. Um-gch'en, to avoid. Un'ter - halten, to hold under. Unter-halten, to entertain. Wie’der - holen, to bring back again. Wieder-hol'en, to repeat. 4. Inseparable compound verbs, having the particles be, ent, er, durd), über, etc., as prefixes, do not take ges in the perfect participle. * With fein as auxiliary. 114 INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. Present Infinitive. Imperfect | Perfect Indicative. Participle. ve-fudi'eii, to visit. beſudy'te, beſudit'. ent-deđen, to discover. entbed'te, entdedt'. enip -faig'ell, to receive. empfing', empfang'en. er - fin d'en, to invent. erfand', erfund'en. ge-fall'en, to please. gefiel', gefaU'en. ver - ſteh'en, to understand. verſtand, verſtand'en. zer - bredj'en1, to shatter. zerbradı', zerbrodi'en. durdi - reiſeul, to traverse. burdireiſ'te, Durdyreiſt'. ilber-treff'eit, to surpass. übertraf' . übertroff'en. um-geb'e 11, to avoid. umging', umgang'en. wider - predi'en, to contradict. widerſprady, widerſprody'en. wieder - hol'ent, to repeat. l wiederhol'te, / widerholt. : 5. Some verbs, as reitur, reiſen, laufen, ſpringen, etc. ($ 135, 2, Rem. 1), take ſein as the auxiliary, when indi- cating & motion towards a particular place; otherwise they have haben for the auxiliary: Er iſt nad Berlin gereiſt', He has gone to Berlin. (but) Er hat viel gereiſt', He has traveled much. 6. Verbs that are intransitive when simple often form transitive compounds : Er iſt nad) der Stadt gegang'en, He has gone to the city. Sie haben den Feind umgang'en, They have. outflanked the enemy. 7. The inseparable particles be, ent, er, ge, ver, zer, durch, über, etc., are unaccented. Rem. The dissyllables iiber, unter, wieder, wider, however, take a light or secondary accent. 8. The verb gefallen governs the dative case : Wie gefällt es Ihnen? How does it please you? Exercise 70. 1. I have only glanced through durch ſe'hen) the letter very hastily. 2. The soldiers are deserting to the en- emy. 3. Has the moon gone down? 4. The sun had already set when they arrived. 5. The merchant has examined the accounts of the tailor. 6. Mr. Kranz and Mr. Meyerheim have traveled through (durchreiſen) many COMPOUND NOUNS. 115 lands. 7. The fisherman took us over. 8. Mr. König has translated the history of the German literature. 9. Mrs. Friedländer entertained us with a description of her trip from Hamburg to Heidelberg. 10. How do you like (i. e. how pleases you) the new cathedral ? 11. The garden is surrounded with a beautiful hedge. 12. Why did you go so much (rehr) out of your way (um'ge- · hen)? 13. We wished to avoid the high mountain be- tween Schönfeld and Liebeneck. 14. He attempted to translate the book, but he was not able to do it (es nidit können). LESSON XXXVI. COMPOUND NOUNS. Hier ſind Ihre Handſdjuhe, Here are your gloves. Haben Sie ein Federmeſſer ? Have you a penknife ? Das Dampfſchiff iſt angekom- The steamer has arrived. men, [mühle, Herr Roth hat eine Dampf- Mr. Roth has a steam-mill. Das Pferd iſt ein Laſtthier, The horse is a beast of bur- Ich habe das Fahrgeld bezahlt, I have paid the toll. [den. Einundſiebzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Haben Sie das neue Schulhaus geſehen? 2. Während der letzten zwanzig Jahre hat das Land außerordentliche (extraordi- nary) Fortſchritte gemad)t. 3. Hier iſt der Ausgang (way out). 4. Ich kann keinen Augenblick länger bleiben; id muß gleicly nach Hauſe. 5. Der vierte Band der Gefdjidite der Baukunſt von Dr. Franz Kugler iſt jetzt in allen Buchhandlungen zu ha- ben. 6. Haben Sie die berühmte Windmühle in Potsdam ge- reben? 7. Marie, haſt du meinen Fingerhut geſehen? 8. Herr Dr. Schmidt iſt Profeſſor der Deutſden Spracje an (in) einer Töchterſchule in Pittsburg. 9. Daß Dampfſchiff „Germania" iſt geſtern Abend angekommen. 10. Das Kameel iſt ein laſt- thier, und der Tiger iſt ein Naubthier. 11. Das Wort „Gram- 116 COMPOUND NOUNS. matik“ iſt ein Fremdwort. 12. Iſt das Frühſtü& fertig (ready)? 13. Ja, das Frühſtück iſt (djon fertig. 14. Die goldene Hody- zeit wird heute Morgen ſtattfinden. 15. Der Schnellzug son Leipzig ift ſoeben angekommen. 16. Können Sie mir eine Steånadel geben? 17. Heute Morgen haben wir einen ſehr ſchönen Spazier gang gemacht. 18. Der Säulengang des Muſe- ums in Berlin iſt ein Hauptwerk der modernen Baukunſt. 19. Die Hauptfeder meiner Taldenuhr iſt gebrochen. 20. Berlin iſt die Hauptſtadt von Preußent. 21. Mein Großvater wohnte früher in Magdeburg; er wohnt jezt in Köln. 22. Id habe mein Federmeſſer geſtern Morgen verloren. 23. „Zwanzig“ iſt ein Zahlwort. Grammatical. 1. While compound verbs are mostly formed by pre- fixing prepositions to simple verbs, Compound Nouns are mostly formed by prefixing to nouns other nouns. Rem. 1. The prefix noun has an adjective signification, as it modifies or limits the signification of the noun to which it is prefixed. Rem. 2. Adjectives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions (including thus all parts of speech except the article and inter- jection) may also serve as prefixes of compound nouns. Das Sdul-haus, school-house (die Sdjure, school; Das Haus, house). Das Fremd-wort, foreign word (fremd, foreign; das Wort, word). Der Zwei'-kampf, duel (zwei, two; der Kampf, battle). Der Selbſt'-mord, suicide (ſelbſt, self; ber Mord, murder). Das Fahr'-gelb, toll · (fahren, to ride; Das Geld, money). Der Fort-ſdyritt, progress (fort, forward; der Schritt, step). Der Aus'-gang, exit (aus, out; der Gang, passage). Der U'ber-glaube, superstition (aber, but; • Der Glaube, belief,. 2. The primary accent falls upon the prefix. 3. With but very few exceptions, Compound Nouns take the gender of the last noun (S 67). Der Nu'genblic, moment (das Auge, eye; der Blid, glance). 1 Bau'meiſter, architect (ber Bau, building; der Meiſter, master). 1 Blut'menkohl, cauliflower (die Blume, flower; der Kohl, cabbage). 1 Bür'gerkrieg, civil war (die Bürger, citizens; der Krieg, war). 1 Dampf'feffel, boiler (ber Dampf, steam; der Reffel, kettle). COMPOUND NOUNS. Der Eis’bär, polar bear (das Eis, ice; der Bär, bear). 1 Fin'gerhut, thimble (der Finger, finger; der Hut, hat). Hand'ídyul), glove (die Hand, hand; der Sdyul), shoe). , Ne'genſchirm, umbrella (der Regent, rain; der Sdiri, screen) 1 Son'nenſchirm, parasol (die Sonne, sun; 66 66 1 Ta'ſdiendieb, pickpocket (die Tadje, pocket;. der Dieb, thief). Die. Bau'kunſt, architecture (Der Bau, building; die Kunſt, art). Baum'wolle, cotton (ber Baum, tree; die Wolle, wool). Berg’fette, mountain range (ber Berg, mountain; die Rette, chain). Dampf mühle, steam mill (der Dampf, steam; die Mühle, mill). Ei'ſenbahn, railroad (Das Eiſen, iron; die Bahn, road). 1 Flü’gerthür, folding door (der Flügel, wing; die Thür, door). 1 Tödy'terſdule, girls' school (die Tödyter, daugh- die Sdule, school). Volf8'dule, common school (das Volf, people; [ters; 66 66 ) 1 Ta'ſdenuhr, watch (die Taſdie, pocket; die Uhr, clock). 1 Wanduhr, clock (die Wand, wall; . " " ) ✓ Wind'mühle, windmill (der Wind, wind; die Mühle, mill). Das Butterbrob, bread and butter (Die Butter, butter; das Brod, bread). 1 Dampfboot, steam-boat (der Dampf, steam; das Boot, boat). !! Dampf'idiiff, steamer ( 66 66 das Sdriff, ship). 9 Fe'bermeſſer, penknife (die Feder, pen; das Meſfer, knife). Ham'melfleiſd), mutton (Der Hammel, sheep; das Fleiſdy, meat). Sall'fleiſd), veal (Das Kalb, calf; 6 ) Rind'fleiſd), beef (das Nind, cattle. 66 66 ) Sdwei'nefleiſd), pork (das Sdywein, hog; 66 66 ) Laſt’thier, beast of burden (die Laſt, burden; das Thier, animal). Naub'thier, beast of prey (ber Raub, prey ; . “ ) Zugʻthier, draught animal (Der Zug, draught; , SculHaus, school-house (die Sdjule, school; das Haus, house). 11 Wür'terbuđı, dictionary (die Wörter, words; das Budy, book). 1. Zail' wort, numeral (Die Zall, number ; das Wort, word). 4. Examples of Compound Nouns with adjectives as prefixes : Der E’delſtein, jewel e del, noble; der Stein, stone). Der Frei' maurer, freemason (frei, free; der Maurer, mason). Das Fremd'wort, foreign word (fremd, foreign; das Wort, word). Das Frülʻſtück, breakfast (früh, early; das Stiid, piece). Der Gleicty' muty, equanimity (gleid), like; der Muth, mood). Der Groß'vater, grandfather (groß, great ; der Vater, father). Die Großmutter, grandmother [ 56 66 die Mutter, mother). Der Hodymutl}, haughtiness (hody, high; der Mutſy, mood). Die Hodi' zeit, wedding cus" die Zeit, time). Der Sdnell zug, express train (idnell, fast; Der Zug, train). Der Vol'mond, full moon (voll, full ; der Mond, moon). (6 COMPOUND NOUNS. 66 5. Examples of Compound Nouns with verbal prefices : 118 Brenn'boſz, firewood . (brennen, to burn; das Holz, wood). pas Fahr'geld, toll das Geld, money). Das Fehl’jabr,year with bad crops (fehlen, to mistake; das Fahr, year). Das Le’ſebud), reader (leſen, to read ; Das Budy, book). Das Leſezimmer, reading-room (u so Das Zimmer, room). Die Näl'maſdine, sewing-ma- (nähen, to sow; Die Mafdjine, ma- chine chine). Die Nälı'nader, needle (nähen, to sow; die Nadel, pin). Die Sted'nader, pin (ſtecken, to stick; 66 ) Die Strid'nader, knitting-needle (ſtriden, to knit ; Das Sdyreib'papier, writing paper (ſdireiben, to write; Das Papier, paper). Der Zei'gefinger, index finger (zeigen, to point; der Finger, finger). 6. Examples of Compound Nouns with prepositions as prefixes : Die Ab'reiſe, departure (ab, away; Der Aufgang, rising, ascent (auf, up; der Gang, passage). Die Aus’gabe, edition (aus, out; die Gabe, gift). Der Durdy'ſdinitt, average (burdy, through ; der Schnitt, cutting). Das Fürwort, pronoun das Wort, word). Das Ge'gengift, antidote (gegen, against ; das Gift, poison). Der In' hait, contents (in, in; der Halt; holding). Der Mitbürger, fellow-citizen (mit, with ; der Bürger, citizen). Die Mitgift, dowry die Gift, gift). Die Nady' frage, demand (nach), after; die Frage, question). Der Ue’berrod, overcoat (über, over; der Noc, coat). Der Ue'berbau, superstructure ( 6 6 Der Bau, building). Die Bor'ſtadt, suburb (vor, before; die Stadt, city). Der Zu'fall, accident (zu, to; Der Fall, falling). Der Zuſam'menhang, connection (zuſammen, together; der Hang, hanging).. Der Zwi'ſdienraum, interstice (zwiſdiert, between; der Raum, space). 7. Compound Nouns are formed much more exten- sively in German than in English, as is shown by the following examples: 1. Compound Nouns formed by adding prefixes to der Gang, à noun derived from gehen (to go), and meaning a going, a passage. (ab, away). Aufgang, rising (auf, up). Aus'gang, exit (aus, out). Baum'gang, shady avenue (Baum, tree). coo' COMPOUND NOUNS. 119 UL Bo'gengang, arcade (Bogen, arch). Durchgang, thoroughfare (burch, through). Eingang, entrance (ein, in). Erz'gang, vein of ore (Erz, ore). Fort'gang, progression (fort, forth). Her'gang, event (her, hither). Hingang, death (hin, thither). Miß gang, failure (miſſen, to miss). Mor'gengang, morning walk (morgen, morning). Nüdgang, retreat (rück, back). Säu'lengang, colonnade (Säule, column). Spazier'gang, walk for pleasure (ſpazie’ren, to walk for pleasure). Sdyat'tengang, shady walk (Sdatten, shadow). Ue'bergang, transition (über, over). Um'gang, intercourse (um, around). Un'tergang, destruction (unter, under). Vor'gang, precedence (vor, before). 2. Compound Nouns with das Haupt, the head, as prefix: Der Hauptaltar, high altar (ber Altar', altar). Der Haupt'anfer, sheet anchor (der Anfer, anchor). Die Haupt'armee, maiu army (die Armee', army). Der Haupt'artifel, leading editorial (ber Årti'fel, article). Der Hauptbalken, architrave (der Balken, beam). Der Hauptbaß, thorough-base (ber Baß, base). Der Haupt'begriff, leading idea Die Hauptfeber, main-spring (die Feder, feather). Der Hauptfehler, chief fault (der Fehler, fault). Die Haupt'frage, main question (die Frage, question). Das Hauptfiffen, pillow (das Haupt, head). Der Hauptmann, captain (der Mann, man). Der Haupt'maſt, mainmast (der Maſt, mast). Die Hauptrolle, principal part (die Nolle, part). Die Hauptſadje, principal thing (die Sadie, thing). Die Hauptſängerin, prima donna (die Sängerin, singer). Der Haupt' ſdymerz, headache (ber Sdimerz, pain). Die Hauptſtadt, capital (die Stadt, city). Die Hauptſtraße, main street (die Straße, street). Die Haupt'tugend, cardinal virtue Das Hauptwerk, masterpiece Das Hauptwort, noun Die Haupt'zeile, head-line (of a page) Die Hauptzierde, head-dress (die Tugend, virtue). (Das Werf, work). (das Wort, word). (die Zeile, line). (die Zierte, ornament) 120 COMPOUND NOUNS. Exercise 72. 1. Have you ever (le) seen a polar bear? 2. The pickpocket has stolen my gloves. 3. Mr. Grein is teacher in the common school in Elberfeld. 4. I can not find my penknife. 5. The school-house is opposite the church. 6. Mr. Kirchhoff has bought a clock and a sewing machine. 7. Can you give me a needle ? 8. Here is the entrance, and there is the exit (way out). 9. The contents of the book are (iſt) very interesting and instructive. 10. The word , Haus" is a noun, and „wir“ is a pronoun. 11. Charlottenburg is a suburb of Berlin. 12. The main army arrived in Leipzig yester- day evening; it will arrive in Berlin to-morrow. 3. The express train from Hamburg has not yet arrived. 14. Mr. Auerbach is in the reading-room. He is read- ing the newspapers. 15. I wish a quire of writing-pa- per. 16. Did you read the leading editorial in to-day's paper? 17. Vienna is the capital of Austria. LESSON XXXVII. DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 1. Sind Sie aus Gotha ? 2. Nein, ich bin ein Berliner (or ich bin aus Berlin). 3. Iſt Herr Dietrich aus Frankfurt (or iſt Herr Dietrid ein Frankfurter)? 4. Nein, er iſt ein Hams burger, aber Herr Diefenbad iſt ein Frankfurter, Herr Krauſe iſt ein Mecklenburger* und Herr Sdinorr iſt ein Oldenburger. 5. Geſtern Abend habe ich einen Engländer, einen Holländer und einen Schweizer Bet (at the house of) Herrn Stein getroffen. 6. Unſere Lehrerin in der deutſchen Sprache iſt eine Medlenburs gerin, aus Schwerin'. 7. Frau Bernhoff iſt aus Berlin (or iſt eine Berlinerin), Fräulein Sdymidt iſt eine Hamburgerin, und Frau van Dorn iſt eine Holländerin. 8. Das Mädden hat ein * For words not found explained in the lessons hereafter, see the Diction- ary in Part Fourth. DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 121 Tehr ſchönes deutſches Liedchen geſungen. 9. Ich habe ein ſchönes Blümchen im Garten gepflückt. 10. Die Güte eines Gedidites hängt nicht bloß von der Reinheit der Reime ab (abhangen). 11. Die Sonne erreicht ihre größte Höhe und die Tage erreichen ihre größte Länge am 22. Juni. 12. Der Fluß hat hier eine Tiefe von 60 Fuß und eine Breite von 800 Fuß. 13. Der Gute liebt das Gute, der Weiſe ſucht das Wahre, der Künſtler ſudyt das Schöne, und der wahre Philoſoph ſudyt das Gute, das Wahre und das Schöne. 14. Während ſeiner langen Krankheit hat Wilhelm gar nidyt aus dem Hauſe gehen können. 15. Die Schönheit der Landſchaft iu der Nähe von Dresden hat uns ſo ſebr entzückt, daß wir in Dresden den ganzen Sommer geblieben ſind. 16. Der General hat die Tapferkeit der Soldaten gelobt. Grammatical.. 1. Derivative Nouns are formed by adding prefixes or suffixes to verbs, adjectives, or other nouns. Rein. In some cases the umlaut is also added to the radical vowel. 2. Some suffixes form concrete nouns, as -es, -in (or -inn), -dhen (or -lein). 1. The suffix -er usually denotes male persons, as : Der Bauer, peasant (from bauen, to cultivate). 1 Diener, servant ( 66 dienen, to serve). ! Jäger, hunter (o jagen, to hunt). 1 Lehrer, teacher ( 6 lehren, to teach). , Maler, painter ( 6 malen, to paint). 1 Sdyneider, tailor (o dineiden, to cut). 1 Fleiſder, butcher (u das Fleiſch, meat). 1 Gärtner, gardener ( “ Der Garten, garden). , Sattler, saddler ( " der Sattel, saddle). Rem. 1. Nouns in -er are formed from both nouns and verbs. Rem. 2. The suffix -er (or Ener) is added to the names of many countries and cities in forming masculine national and civic nouns; with some nouns the umlaut is added, with others it is omitted ; as: Der Berli'ner, citizen of Berlin (from Berlin, Berlin). 1 Hamburger, citizen of Hamburg ( " Hamburg, Hamburg). 11 Amerika'ner, the American Ć W Amerika, America). , Engländer, the Englishman ( 5 England, England). 1 Holländer, the Dutchman ( 16 Holland, Holland). 1 Sdyweizer, the Swiss (u die Schweiz, Switzerland). 122 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 2. The suffix -in forms feminine from many máscu- line personal nouns, as : Die Bäuerin, peasantess, 1. (from der Bauer, peasant's wifes W peasant). Dienerin, female seryant (66 Der Diener, servant). 1 Freundin, female friend ( o der Freund, friend). 1 Kaiſerin, empress 56. Der Kaiſer, emperor). Königin, queen 66 der König, king). Köchin, female cook der Roch, cook). Lehrerin, female teacher " Der Lehrer, teacher). Sdülerin, female scholar is der Schüler, scholar). Berli'nerin, the Berlin lady , Hamburgerin, the Hamburg lady ( 66 der Hamburger, Hamburg). Afrika'nerin, the Africaness (6. der Afrikaner, African). : Amerika'nerin, the American lady ( 66 der Amerikaner, American). Engländerin, the English lady (6 Der Engländer, Englishman). , Holänderin, the Dutch lady (66 Der Holländer, Dutchman). 1 Schweizerin, the Swiss lady (66 Der Schweizer, the Swiss). Rem. 1. Formerly the termination -inn was much used; the plural ending of nouns in -in is -innen, as : Die Königin (Königinn), queen; pl. die Königinnen, queens. 3. Diminutive nouns are formed by adding the suf- fix -djen or -lein to many nouns; the umlaut is added when the.radical vowel is capable of it: Das Bäumdien, the small tree (from der Baum, tree). 1 Knäblein, the small boy (6 , Knabe, boy). Blitmchen, the little flower “6 die Blume, flower). Städtdien, the small city 66 Stadt, city). Mädchen, the girl “ , Magd, maid). Fräulein, the young miss Frau, woman). !! Brötchen, the small loaf of bread ( 6 das Brod, bread). II Liedden, the sonnet (669, Lieb, song). 1p Pferdchen the little horse ( " , Pferd, horse). Rem. 2. These diminutive nouns all take the neuter gender, whatever may be the gender of the nouns from which they are derived. Rem. 2. These diminutive terminations often express affectionate feeling or regard : Das Väterden, "father dear” (from der Vater, father). Mütterdien, “mother dear" ( 66. die Mutter, mother). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 123 4. The suffixes -e, -heit (or -keit), -niß, -ſchajt, -thum, -ung form mostly. abstract nouns. 1. The suffix -e (with umlaut to the radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives: ' Die Güte, goodness (from gut, good). , Höhe, height ( " hoch, high). Länge, length ( 5 lang, long). , Tiefe, depth (6 tief, deep). , Breite, breadth (" breit, broad). Rem. Nouns thus formed are not to be confounded with adjectives used substantively, and referring to persons, as : Der Gute, the good man; Die Gute, the good woman. , Weiſe, the wise man; y Weiſe, the wise woman. , Deutſche, the German (man); „ Deutſde, the German (woman). Nor with the neuter of adjectives when used to indicate the quality of the adjective regarded as a concrete thing, as : Das Gute, the good (from gut, good). 1. Wahre, the true (66 wahr, true). 1 Schöne, the beautiful ( 4 (djön, beautiful). ! Erha’bene, the sublime ( " erha’ben, sublime). 2. The suffix -heit or (-keit) forms both abstract and concrete nouns from adjectives: Die Krankheit, sickness (from frank, sick). 1 Schönheit, beauty ( 56 ſchön, beautiful). , Wahrheit, truth ( 6 wahr, true). Reinheit, purity (6 rein, pure). Dunkelheit, darkness ( 66 bunkel, dark:). ,Aehnlichkeit, similarity ( 1 ähnlidi, similar). , Freundlid; keit, friendliness ( " freundlid, friendly). Billigkeit, cheapness ( 6 billig, cheap). Stoſtbarkeit, dearness (« koſtbar, dear). Furdytſamkeit, fearfulness ( furditſam, fearful). Tapferkeit, bravery (o tapfer, brave). " Eitelkeit, vanity (6 eiter, , vain). Rem. 1. The suffix -keit is added to adjectives ending in -ig, -lid, -ſam, -er, and -el. Rem. 2. The suffix -heit is also added to some personal nouns, as: Die Kindheit, childhood (from das Kind, child). ✓ Menſchheit, humanity (6 der Menſch, human being). 1 Chriſtenheit, Christendom ( 6 der Chriſt, Christian). 124 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 3. Derivatives. ending in -niß are usually formed from verbs, but they are sometimes from nouns and adjectives, as: Die Kenntniß, knowledge (from kennen, to know). Das Hinderniß, impediment ( o hindern, to hinder). Das Verſtänd'niß, understanding ( " der Verſtand', reason). Die Finſterniß, darkness ( " finſter, dark). 4. Derivatives ending in fchaft are formed from nouns and adjectives, as: Die Freundſchaft, friendship (from der Freund, friend). , Landſchaft, landscape (o das Land, land). » Bauernſd)aft, peasantry cu die Bauern (pl.), peasants). 1 Drtſdaft, neighborhood ( o der Ort, place). , Bereit' daft, readiness ( 6 bereit, ready). 5. Derivatives ending in -thum are formed from nouns, adjectives, and verbs, as: Das Heiligthum, sanctuary (from heilig, holy). Kaiſerthum, empire (o der Staiſer, emperor). 1 Prieſterthum, priesthood ( 66 die Prieſter (pl.), priests). Der Neid)thum, richness ( " reidi, rich). 6. Nouns formed from verbs, by adding the suffix -ung, usually denote a condition, what produces a condition,or a thing put into a certain condition: Die Achtung, respect (from achten, to respect). ,Bildung, formation, culture ( " bilden, to form). 1 Beding'ung, condition (6 bedin'gen, to stipulate). Entfaltung, unfolding i 66 entfalten, to unfold). 1 Erfah'rung, experience “ erfahren, to experience). 11 Eroberung, conquest ( 66 ero'bern, to conquer). Forſchung, investigation 66 forſden, to investigate). Handlung, trading-house handeln, to handle). Landung, landing to land). Meinung, opinion 66 meinen, to think). Prüfung, examination (66 prüfen, to examine). Nidjtung, direction ridten, to direct). Sammlung, collection " ſammeln, to collect). Sigung: session o ſitzen, to sit). Verſamm’lung, assembly ( 6 verſam'meln, to collect). Verthei' digung, defense į « verthei' digen, to defend) 1 Warnung, warning ( 6 warnen, to warn). 1 Zeichnung, drawing ( " zeichnen, to draw). II Zerſtö’rung, destruction (:6.zerſtö'rent, to destroy). lent, 66 landen, viruuuuuuuuuuuuuu 125 Rem. 1. Nouns ending in rung may be formed from nearly all verbs, both simple and compound. Rem. 2. A few collective nouns in -ung are formed from nouns : Die Holzung, forest (from das Holz, wood). Kleidung, clothing (" Das Kleid, garment). , Stallung, stabling ( 66 der Stall, stable). 9 Waldung, woodland ( 5 der Wald, forest). 5. (1), Personal nouns ending in -er are masculine. (2), Nouns ending in -ilt, -ei (=rei), -heit (-keit), -ldhaft, -ung are feminine. (3), Nouns ending in -chen- (lein), -thum are neuter. Exc. The nouns der frrthum (error) and der Reichthum (richness, riches) are masculine. Rem. Some of thie nouns ending in -niſ are feminine and some are neuter. 6. The most important prefixes in forming derivative nouns are ge-, miß-, un-, ur-, erz= . 1. The prefix ge-, to nouns formed from verbs or from other nouns, denotes collectiveness, union, completion, or repetition: Der Gefähr'te, companion (from bie Fahrt, journey). 1 Gehül'fe, assistant cu die Hülfe, help). 1. Geſpie'le, play-mate (u das Spiel, play). Die Gebrüder (pl.), brothers, brethren ( 66 der Bruder, brother). 1. Geſdywi'ſter or brothers and sisters ( " die Sdjweſter, sister). , Geduld', patience (o die cult, patience). 1. Gefahr', danger 56 die fahr, fear). in Geldiidy'te, history geldjehen, to happen). Das Gebäu'de, edifice bauen, to build). Gedicht', poem 5 Sidhten, to write poetry). 11. Gefdick, į u diiden, to send). Geridiť, court of law 51 riditen, to direct). Geridyť, dish, plate to order). law to establish). sight, face ſehen, to see). , Gebir'ge, . Inountain range (" Der Berg, mountain). Gefie’der, plumage (6 Sie Feder, feather). 1 Getränk, potation (66 Der Tranf, .drink). , Gewitter, thunder-storm (“ das Wetter, weather). Rem. Most nouns with the prefix ge- are of the neuter gender. Nearly all nouns with the prefix ge- also take the umlaut. fate Geſetz', reizeit, 126 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. mis 2. The prefix miß: denotes negation, perversion or incompleteness, or negation of quality : Der Miſbegriff misconception (from der Begriff', conception). 1 Mißbrauch, misuse, abuse (6 der Braudi, use). Mißton, discord ( 6 Der Ton, sound). Die Mißernte, bad harvest die Ernte, harvest)., , Mißgeſtalt, deformity ſo die Geſtalt, form). , Mißgunſt, disfavor ( 66 die Gunſt, favor). , Mißhandlung, ill treatment (o die Handlung, treatment). Das Mißverhältniß, disproportion ( " das Verhältniß, proportion). 3. The prefix un- denotes negation or perversion of quality : Der Undanf, ingratitude (from der Dank, thankfulness). , Unfall, misfortune, disaster (6 der Fall, chance, fall). , Ungehorſam, disobedience ( 66 der Gehorſam, obedience). , Unmenſd), inhuman being 66 Der Menſdı, human being). 1 Unſinn, nonsense 56 der Sinn, sense). Die Unehrlichkeit, dishonesty die Ehrlichkeit, honesty). ,, Unendlichkeit, infinity i u die Endlichkeit, finiteness). , Unfähigkeit, incapacity die Fähigkeit, capacity). , Ungeduld, impatience die Geduld', patience). 1 Unordnung, disorder die Drdnung, order). 1 Unruhe, disquietude 6 die Ruhe, rest). u Untreue, faithlessness (6 Die Treue, faithfulness). Das Unglüd, misfortune, calamity (" Das Glück, fortune). , Unkraut, noxious weeds (“ das Kraut, herb). Rem. The prefix ur- can be used especially to the nouns in -heit and -keit. 2. The prefix ur- denotes sources, origin or cause, or a thing in its original condition: Der Urbewohner, aboriginal inhabitant (from der Bewoh'ner, inhabitant). 1 lirquell, primary source ( " der Quell, source). ,, Urſprung, ohigin, source (u der Sprung, spring). 1 Urwald, primeval forest ( 6 Der Wald, forest). Die Urkunde, document, record (." die Kunde, knowledge). , Urſadje, origin, cause (or die Sache, thing). I! Urſprache, primitive language ( die Sprache, language). Das Urbild, prototype (u das Bild, form). , Urvolk, aboriginal people ( “ das Volk, people). 5. The prefix erz- denotes the first or greatest: Der Erzbiſdhof, archbishop (from Der Biſchof, bishop). , Erzdiel, arrant thief ( Der Dieb, thief). , Erzmarſdall, lord high-marshal ( " der Marſdall', marshal). . Die Erztugend, cardinal virtue (u die Tugend, virtue). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 127 6. Many words in the German, as in the English lan- guage, have undergone great changes in form during the known history of the language. Some derivatives have also been formed from words that are no longer used. Thus: the word Geduld (from an old word die dult=patience) has un- dergone the following changes of form : kidult, yidult, gedult, Geduld. The word Gefahr is from an old word die fahr=fear. Exercise 74. 1. The first session of the Assembly will take place to-morrow, at ten o'clock. 2. Have you seen the new drawings of the artist? 3. The collection of antiquities from Egypt in the Museum of Berlin is very large. 4. Mr. Breitkopf has just bought the first five volumes of the German dictionary of the brothers Grimm. 5. How many brothers and sisters have you? 6. I have two brothers (Brüder), and one sister. 7. It is very sultry, we will probably have a thunder-storm before night. 8. This book contains the best poems of Goethe, 'Schiller, and Heine. 9. Did you notice the disproportion between the height and the breadth of the building ? 10. I have never heard such nonsense. 11. The papers on this table are lying in the greatest disorder. 12. His dishonesty was a much greater misfortune than his incapacity for the work. 13. The aborigines of America were the In- dians. 14. Have you ever seen a primeval forest? 15. Do you know the origin of the word ;, Unendlichkeit“? 16. Do you know the cause of his disquietude ? 17. The arch- bishop of Mayence has gone to Cologne to-day. 18. The beauty of these drawings is very extraordinary. 19. Miss Kreutzer is from Germany, but Miss Robelli is an Italian. 20. Mr. Fländer is a Swiss, but his wife is a German. 21. The teacher(fem.) has in her school twenty-two scholars (fem.). 22. Maria Theresa, Empress of Austria, died on the thirteenth of April, 1807. 23.Louise Auguste, Queen of Prussia, died on the nineteenth of July, 1810. 128 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXXVIII. DERIVATIVE AND COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. Fünfundſiebzigſte Aufgabe. 1. In dieſer Hinſicht iſt er gegen ſeine Vorgänger nicht dank- bar. 2. Der Boden um Berlin iſt ſandig und nicht ſehr frucht- bar. 3. Ich weiß nicht ob die Brüde ſchon gangbar iſt. 4. Der Plan iſt ganz unausführbar. 5. Wir haben den ganzen Tag kein trinkbares Waſſer gefunden. 6. Herr Dorn leidet an einer unheilbaren Krankheit. 7. Herr Kieſewetter hat ſeine neue gols dene Uhr heute Morgen verloren. 8. „Nur in dem Feenlande der Lieder lebt noch deine fabelhafte Spur.“ 9. Der Maler hat eine außerordentlich lebhafte Einbildungskraft. 10. Dieſe Felfige Gegend iſt voll von Klapperſchlangen. 11. Heute haben wir ſehr ſchönes, ſonniges Wetter. 12. Warum ſind Sie ſo traurig? 13. Haben Sie die maleriſche Landſchaft in der ſädyſiſchen Schweiz, zwiſchen Dresden und Prag geſehen? 14. Die ſtädtiſchen Behörden haben beſchloſſen, eine neue Anleihe von 500,000 Thlr. zu machen, um eine neue Straße vom Friedrichs- Plaß bis zum Sadowa-Platz durchzuführen. 15. Von dem Grimm (dhen Wörterbud find bis jeßt nur erſt ſedje Bände er: Tchienen. 16. Die „Augsburger Allgemeine Zeitung" iſt die größte und beſte politiſche Zeitung in Süddeutſchland. Grammatical. 1. Derivative Adjectives are formed from nouns, adjec- tives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, and preposi- tions; by adding the suffixes -bar, -er (-ern), -haft, -ig, =iſch (-er), -lidh, and -fam, according to the following rules: 1. The suffix -bar, added to a noun or to a verbal stem, indicates ability or possibility of a quality or of an action: Dankbar, thankful (from der Dank, thank). dienſtbar, serviceable (o der Dienſt, service). frudjtbar, fruitful (6 die Frucht, fruit). FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 129 (66 furchtbar, fearful (from die Fürdyt, fear). gangbar, passable (" Der Gang, passage). koſtbar, costly (" die Koſten (pl.), expenses). ſcheinbar, apparent ( 5 der Sdjein, appearance). ſtreitbar, contestable " der Streit, contest). 5 das Wunder, miracle). brennbar, combustible į or brennen, to burn). denkbar, conceivable (" denken, to think). eßbar, edible, fit to eat eſſen, to eat). ausführbar, practicable ausführen, to execute). haltbar, tenable 66 halten, to hold). heilbar, curable įu heilen, to heal). hörbar, audible 66 hören, to hear). erklär'bar, explainable erflä'ren, to explain). lesbar, legible (5 leſeni, to read). vermeid'bar, avoidable vermei den, to avoid). nennbar, that may be named (06 nennen, to name). genießz'bar, enjoyable genießen, to enjoy). erreidybar, attainable erreiden, to attain). trennbar, divisible 66 trennen, to divide). trinkbar, fit to drink ( “ trinken, to drink). 2. The suffix -en -ern) is added only to nouns de- noting material: (from bas Gold, gold). ſilbern, of silver (- das Silber, silver). fupfern, of copper (u das Kupfer, copper). bleiern, leaden (" das Blei, lead). ledern, of leather (u das Leber, leather). hölzern, wooden (das Holz, wood). gläſern, of glass į " Das Glas, glass). Rem. When the noun (as Supfer) ends in =1, only =is added. : 3. The suffix -haft denotes possession of or inclina- tion toward the quality of the noun to which it is suffixed : Dauerhaft, durable : (from die Dauer, duration). ernſthaft, earnest ( Der Ernſt, fabelhaft, fabulous cu die Fabel, fable). fehlerhaft, faulty ( der Fehler, fault). lebhaft, lively " Das Leben, life). mangelhaft, defective 66 Der Manger, lack). rieſenhaft, gigantic so der Rieſe, giant). zweifelhaft, dubious (" der Zweifel, doubt). ſchmeichelhaft, flattering. (" die Schmeichelei', filattery). 130 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. Artig, bärtig, blood). blutig, eifrig, < nöthig, 4. The suffix -ig denotes the possession of the qual- ity or relation that is expressed by the noun, adjective, numeral pronoun, verb, preposition, or adverb, to which it is suffixed : polite, well-behaved (from die Art, way). bearded (66 der Bart, beard). bergig, mountainous ( der Berg, mountain). bloody ( 06 Das Blut, zealous 66 Der Eifer, zeal). eiſig, icy so das Eis, ice). felſig, rocky o der Fels, rock). fleißig, industrious (o der Fleiß, industry). flüdytig, fleeting 66 die Flucht, flight). geiſtig, referring to the spirit Der Geiſt, spirit). geizig, avaricious Der Geiz, avarice). giftig, poisonous das Gift, poison). günſtig, favorable 66 die Gunſt, favor). holzig, woody 66 das Holz, wood). kräftig, powerful die Kraft, power). mädytig, mighty 66 die Madit, might). mäßig, moderate, temperate 66 das Maß, measure). necessary 56 Die Noth, want). ruhig, quiet 66 Die Ruhe, rest). rieſig, gigantic ber Rieſe, giant). ſalzig, salty 66 Das Salz, salto). ſandig, sandy der Sand, sand). iduldig, guilty die Sduld, guilt). ſonnig, sunny die Sonne, sun). traurig, sad, sorrowful 66 die Trauer, sorrow). verdächtig, suspicious " der Verdadiť suspicion). würdig, worthy die Würde, worth). dumpfig, damp bumpf, damp). leben' dig, lively, active lebend, living). gütig, good “ gut, fully ( 6 voll, full). einig, einzig, sole, single one). beißig, biting 66 beißen, to bite). ergiebig, productive (oba ergeben, to yield). of that place bort, there). hieſig, of this place (66 hier, here). heutig, of to-day heute, to-day). niedrig, (u nieder, down). former (6 vor, good). völlig, 66 ein, Dortig, ( 66 her low before). remaining ( 56 über, over). vorig, übrig, FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 131 5. The suffix -iſd), attached to personal common nouns (and to a few verbs), denotes similarity or inclination to a quality; and often conveys also the idea of contempt or unworthiness: Bäuriſch, referring to the peasantry (from der Bauer, peasant). dichteriſch, poetical (6 der Dichter, poet). diebiſdi, thievish (- Der Dieb, thief). himmliſd, heavenly ( 6 Der Himmel, heaven). irðiſdy, earthly die Erde, earth). kaufmänniſd), mercantile 66 der Saufmann, merchant). findiſd), childish " Das Kind, child). maleriſch, picturesque (" der Maler, painter). ſtädtiſdy, civil ( die Stadt, city).* neidiſd), suspicious (6. neiðen; to envy). Rem. 1. The umlaut is usually added when the vowel is capable of it.. Rem. 2. In many adjectives derived from the Latin and Greek languages, the ending -iſd in German corresponds to the English ending -ic or -ical. Philoſo’phiſch, philosophic (al). drama'tiſdı, dramatic (al). theolo'giſch, theological. epijd), epic (al). pſydyolo'giſdy, psychological. Κυνίδα, lyric (al). geolo'giſdy, geologic (al). Poe'tiſdi, poetic (al). phyfiſdy, physical. kritiſch, critical. dhemiſdy, chemical. Hiſto’riſch, historic (al). Rem. 3. The suffix -iſd (= ſch) is added to personal proper names : Die Lutheʼriſche Kirdje, The Lutheran church. Die Newto'niſdie Theorie, The Newtonian theory. Das Srimmſche Wörterbudy, Grimm's dictionary. Die Kant'ſdie Philoſophie, Kant's philosophy. Rem. 4. National and civic adjectives usually take the ending -iſd): Amerika'niſd), American. Berli'niſd), of Berlin. afrika'niſd), African. hamburgiſdy, of Hamburg. Italiä'niſdy, Italian.. fölniſch, of Cologne. portugieſiſch, Portuguese. magdeburgiſch, of Magdeburg. ruſſiſdy, Russian. haliſdı, of Halle. Bairiſd), Bavarian.. phleſiſch, Silesian. Obs. Many adjectives are formed from names of cities by adding the suffix -er; this ending has the remarkable quality of not being capable of inflexion : The Magdeburg Cathedral. The Augsburg Journal. Nom., der Magdeburger Dom. Nom., die Augsburger Zeitung, Gen., des Magdeburger Domes. Gen., der Augsburger Zeitung. Dat., dem Magdeburger Dom. Dat., der Augsburger Zeitung. Acc., Den Magdeburger Dom. Acc., die Augsburger Zeitung. 132 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 6. Adjectives with the suffix -lich are formed from nouns, other adjectives, and verbs: Abendlich, evening (from der Abend, evening). morgenlidy, morning (o ber Morgen, morning). täglich, daily in der Tag, day). wödjentlid), weekly 56 die Woche, week). monatlich, monthly der Monat, month). jährlid), yearly das Fahr, year). bildlichy, figurative das Bild,. figure). brieflid), by letter der Brief, letter). brüderlich, brotherly .66 der Bruder, brother). bürgerlich, pertaining to a citizen ( “ der Bürger, citizen). ehrlich, honest (.66 die Ehre, honor). endlich, final Das Ende, end). freundlich, friendly der Freund, friend). glüdlid), fortunate, happy Das Glüd, fortune). Häuslidi, domestic das Haus, house). Höflid), courteous Der Hof, : court). kaiſerlich, imperial der Kaiſer, emperor). findlidy, childlike Das find, child). königlich, royal der Königi king). menſdlid), human der Menſch, man). ſchmerzlich, painful der Sdimerz, pain). . ſchredlich, terrible der Sdređen, terror). wunderlich, wonderful das Wunder, wonder). weißlidy, whitish weiß, white). röthlidy, reddish roth, red). ältlid), . oldish old). fröhlidy, happy, cheerful happy). fränklich, sickly sick). öffentlid), public open). reichlich, rich reich, rich). treulidy, true . treu, true). ausfülr'lidy, comprehensive ausführen, to execute). begreiflich, comprehensible begrei' feit, to comprehend). bewegʻlidi, movable bewe’gen, to move). empfindlich, sensitive empfin'den, to feel). erklär'lidy, explicable erklä'ren, to explain). ſterblich, mortal ( ſterben, to die). vermeid'lid), avoidable ( vermeiden, to avoid). zerbredy Vidy, fragile ( “ zerbrechen, to break in pieces). Rem. Some adjectives ending in -lidare closely allied in signification, and are almost interchangeable in use with adjectives derived from the same word and ending in-bar : compare erklärbar and erklärlid, vermeidbar and vermeidlid). alt, froh, frank, offen, FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 133 co 7. Adjectives with the suffix -jam (formed from verbs or verbal nouns) indicate the possession of or inclination to the quality: Xufmerkſam, attentive (from auf'merken, to pay attention). biegſam, pliable ( 6 biegen, to bend). duldfain, patient ( " dulden, to tolerate). genüg'ſam, sufficient ( 66 genit'gen, to suffice). wirkſam, efficient (56 wirken, to have effect). arbeitsſam, laborious co die Arbeit, work). bebadítſam, mindful Der Bebadiť', considerateness). betrieb'ſam, diligent der Betrieb', driving). furditſam, fearful ( 66 Sie Furcht, fear). gewaltſam, violent (56 Die Gewalt, violence). grauſam, ferocious ( 66 Das Grauen, borror). heilſam, wholesome ( u das Heil, healing). mühſam, toilsome ( die Mühe, toil, pains). forgſain, solicitous ( u die Sorge, care). wunderſam, wonderfu! ( das Wunder, wonder). Rem. 1. Two adjectives ending in -fam are formed from other adjectives : Gemein'ſam, mutual (o gemein', common). langſam, slow (" lang, long). Rem. 2. The adjective feltfam (rare) was formerly spelled seltsan. Rem. 3. The adjectives ending in -fam are few in number compared to those ending in -ig, -iſd, and -lich. A few are similar in signification to those of the same derivation ending in -bar, as : un berſam, wunderbar. The adjectives ending in bar have usually a passive, those in -ſam usually an active signification: A disease that can be cured. Eine heilſame Arznei', A healing remedy. 2. Nearly all derivative adjectives can receive the negative prefix -un, as: Undankbar, ungrateful. unneidiſch, unenvious. unlesbar, illegible. unendlich, infinite. unfehlerhaft, faultless. unmenſ(ilidy, inhuman. unſdyuldig, innocent. unaufmerkſam, inattentive. 3. Compound Adjectives are formed by prefixing to an adjective a noun, a preposition, or another adjective, as: Bettelarm, beggarly poor (der Better, begging; arm, poor). fingerdid, thick as one's finger (der Finger, finger; did, thick). Feuerfeſt, fireproof (das Feuer, fire; feſt, fast). himmelhody, high as heaven (der Himmer, heaven ; hoc), high). 134 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 66 66 rieſengroß, gigantic (der Nieſe, giant; groß, large). ſteinhart, hard as rock (der Stein, stone; hart, hard). eiskalt, cold as ice (das Eis, ice; kalt, cold). baumleer, destitute of trees (ber Baum, tree; leer, empty). bartios, beardless (der Bart, beard; los, destitute of). djaraťterlos, without character (der Charakter, character; 66 66. [to). regelmäßig, regular (die Regel, rule; mäßig, confoi miny zwedmäßig, practical (der Zweck, purpose ; lehrreid, instructive (die Lehre, learning; reich, rich). zahlreich, numerous (die Zahl, number; blitz dinell, quick as lightning (der Blit, lightning; dynell, quick). wunderſdjön,extremely beautiful(das Wunder, wonder; dönt, beautiful). liebevoll, affectionate (die Liebe, love; voll, full). pradſtvoll, magnificent (die Pradit, splendor; 66 66 meilenweit, miles distant (die Meiſe, mile; weit, distant). lie'benswürdig, amiable (das Lieben, loving;. würdig, worthy). allgemein, general (allen, all; gemein', common). allmädytig, almighty ( 66 .6.6 mächtig, mighty). Dunkelblau, dark blue (dunkel, dark ;. blau, blue). hellblau, light blue (hell, light; 66 66 gelbroth, orange (gelb, yellow; roth, red). taubſtumm, deaf and dumb (taub, deaf; ſtuinm, dumb). mitſchuldig, accessory to a crime (mit, with; . duldig, guilty). 4. It is becoming customary in Germany to print books and journals of a.. high scientific and critical character in the Roman instead of in the German type. It is greatly to be desired that this custom may become general, and that thus an unnecessary barrier to the beginning of the study of the German language may be removed. We give below a German exercise in Roman type. Sechsundsiebzigste Aufgabe. 1. Das Literaʼrische Central'blatt, die beste kritische Zeitung in Deutschland, erscheint wöchentlich. 2. Die Leipziger Illustrir'te Zeitung erscheint auch wöchent- lich. 3. Herr Hagemeyer ist ein ehrlicher Mann. ' 4. Ich wünsche Ihnen eine glückliche Reise! 5. Bei dem schrecklichen Unfall in den Bergwerken zu Freiberg sind vierzig Menschen um's Leben gekommen (have lost their lives). 6. Das Grimm'sche Wörterbuch wird das ausführlichste und vollkommenste Wörterbuch der deut- schen Sprache sein. 7. Alle öffentlichen Schulen sind während der Ferien geschlossen. 8. Die königliche CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 135 Bibliothek in Berlin ist in einem Theile des könig- lichen Palastes. 9. Die Lehrerin sagt, dass die Schüler sehr aufmerksam sind. 10. Dieser Brief von Herrn Tiedemann ist fast unlesbar. 11. Das Museum ist ein feuerfestes Gebäude. 12. Ich finde diese neue Ma- schine sehr zweckmässig. 13. Der prachtvolle Kölner Dom ist das Meisterstück der deutschen Baukunst. 14. Frau Bernsdorf ist eine sehr liebenswürdige Dame. 15. Ich werde drei Ellen von diesem dunkelblauen Bande und sechs Ellen von jenem breiten, gelbrothen Band nehmen. LESSON XXXIX. CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. Siebenundſiebzigſte Aufgabe. . 1. Es iſt unbeſchreiblich, welche Sehnſucht id empfand, nur eines Menſchen anſichtig zu werden (Sch.). 2. Graf Eulenfels war reich an Gut, doch arm an Lebensfreuden. 3. Sie ſind alle ihres Verſprechens eingedenk geweſen (T.). 4. Er iſt jeder Auf- opferung fähig (or er iſt zu jeder Aufopferung fähig). 5. Er iſt ſchon des Sieges gewiß. 6. Sie ſind aller Sorgen frei (or fie ſind frei von allen Sorgen). 7. Herr Thompſon iſt nicht der deutſchen Sprache kundig. 8. Ohne Herz iſt die Welt der Freus den leer. 9. Die Bäume ſind jetzt von Früchten leer. 10. Das Gedicht iſt voll hocytrabender Phraſen, aber leer an tiefen Gedanken. 11. Dieſes Wirthshaus iſt nie leer pon Gäſten. 12. Herr Williams hat den Brief ganz geläufig geleſen; er iſt der deutſchen Sprache vollkommen mächtig. 13. Ich bin des Schwatzenß müde. 14. Ich bin müde von ſo vielen vergeblichen Anſtrengungen. 15. Er iſt ſatt der Welt und ihres vergängliden Ruhmes. 16. Er iſt ſeines Eides quitt. 17. Audy du hältſt midy der ſchweren Sünde ſchuldig (Sch.)? 18. Dort find fie ihres Lebens nicht ſicher. 19. Die Erde iſt voll der Güte des Herrn (Pſalm 33,5). 20. Das Büchlein iſt voll allerliebſter Bemerkungen (G.). 21. Da iſt ein Korb poll reifer Xepfel. 136 CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. 1. Many adjectives govern substantives in the oblique cases (i. e., the genitive, dative, and accusative cases) without the use of a preposition between the adjective and the substantive. 2. The following adjectives govern the genitive case : Anſichtig (werden), to get a view gewohnt, accustomed (to). arm, poor. [Cof). habhaft, in possession (of). bar, bare, destitute (of). kund (or kundig), acquainted (with). bedürftig, destitute, in need (of). ledig, free (from). begie'rig, desirous, anxious (for). leer, empty (of). benö'thigt, in need (of). los, free (from). Bewußt', conscious (of). mädytig, in command (of). bloß, free (from). müde, tired (of). ein'gedenk, mindful (of). müßig, free (from). einig, agreed (concerning). quitt, free (from). eins, 66 66 ſatt, satiated (with). erit'brigt, dispensing (with). ſchul'dig, guilty (of). erfah'ren, experienced (in). ſicher, sure (of). fähig, capable (of). theilhaft' (or -ig), participating (in). frei, free (from). überbrüſſig, weary (of). froh, happy (about). verdäch'tig, suspicious (of). gedenk', conscious (of). verluſtig, deprived (of). geſtän'dig, confessing (to). voll, full (of). gewahr', conscious (of). werth, worth. gewär'tig, awaiting. würdig, worthy (of). gewiſ', certain (of). zufrie'den, contented (with). Rem. 1. Some of these adjectives can take the negative prefix -un, as: Unbegie'rig, undesirous (of). I unſduldig, innocent (of). unbewußt, unconscious (of). unſicher, not sure (of). unerfahren, inexperienced (in). unwürdig, unworthy (of). Rem. 2. Of the above adjectives, the following are frequently employed, in ordinary discourse, with the accusative case, viz: Anſichtig, bewußt, fähig, ge- ſtändig, gewahr, gewohnt, habhaft, los, müde, ſatt, ſchuldig, überbrüſſig, wertſ, zuf.ieden: Id bin ihm einen Thaler ſchuldig, I owe him a thaler. Es iſt keinen Pfennig werth, It is not worth a penny. Rem. 3. Many of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions, which prepositions govern their own cases ($ 81, § 82, § 83), as: (1) Begierig, by nadh or auf. (5) frei, ledig, los, leer, voll, etc., by (2) bereit, fähig, by zu. von. (3) arm, gewohnt, leer, by an. (6) einig, erfahren, froh, hy iu. (4) froh, gewiß, einig, by iiber. (7) zufrieden, by mit,or von or über. CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 137 Obs. Only a few (as benöthigt, gewärtig, theilhaft, überdrüf- ſig, verluſtig) must be used as governing the genitive case. 3. Many of the adjectives that govern the genitive case frequently can not be translated into English by adjectives, but must be rendered in the English idiom by verbs or nouns, as: Einer Sadie anſiditig zu werden, To get a view of a thing. Einer Sadje eingedenk zu ſein, To bear a thing in mind. Er iſt der deutſden Spradje mädı. He is master of the German lan- tig, guage. Einer Sadie geſtändig zu ſein, To confess to a thing. Er iſt des Weges kundig, IIe knows the road. Er iſt ſeines Eides quitt, He is free from the obligation im- posed by his oath. Wir waren dieſes Ausganges Der We did not anticipate this termina- Sache nicht gewärtig, tion to the affair. Der Angeflagte geſteht, daß er des The accused admits that he was an Diebſtahls theilhaftig war, accomplice in the theft. 4. A large number of adjectives govern the dative case, as : Abtrünnig, faithless (to). greid), like, similar (to). ähnlid), similar (to). gnädig, gracious, merciful (to). angeboren, hereditary (to). gram, averse (to). angelegen, adjacent (to). gut, good, kindly (to). nahe, near, close (to). anſtößig, offensive (to). neu, new (to). bekannt, known (to). nöthig, necessary (to). bange, apprehensive (of). offen, open (to). bequem, convenient (to). offenbar, plain, open (to). Bewußt, known (to). dankbar, thankful (to). peinlid), painful (to). dienlid), serviceable (to). redit, right (to). dienſtbar, 66 66 . ſchädrid), injurious (to). eigen, peculiar (to). [dımeid)elhaft, flattering (to). eigenthüm'lidy, peculiar (to). ſchinerzlid), painful (to). erge’ben, addicted (to). duldig, in debt (to). feind, hostile (to). (dywer, difficult (for). fern, distant (from). füß, sweet (for). gemein', common (to). theuer, dear (to). gemein' ſam, mutual (with). treu, true (to). geneigt', inclined (to). über, offensive (to). gewiß', certain. überle'gen, superior (to). gewo'gen, well disposed (toward). unterthan, subject (to). 138 CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. verderb'lidy, destructive (to). ' wichtig, important (to). , verwandt', related (to). widerlidy, offensive (to). vortheilhaft, advantageous (to). willkommen, welcome (to). weh, painful (to). wohl, fortunate (to). werth, worth (to). zweifelhaft, doubtful (to.) 5. The idiomatic spirit of the English language often requires that a verb or a noun shall take the place of an adjective which in German governs the dative case : Einer Partei' abtrünnig werden, To desert a party. Er iſt ſeinem Vater ſehr ähnlich, He resembles his father very much. Kann ich Ihnen behülflich ſein? Can I be of any service to you? Es iſt mir nicht erinnerlid), It has escaped my memory. Wie viel biſt Du ihm (duldig? How much do you owe him? 6. Adjectives expressive of value, weight, measure, or age govern the accusative case : Es war keinen Pfennig werth, It was not worth a penny. Es iſt nur einen Zoll breit, It is only an inch wide. Es iſt ein Pfund idywer, It weighs a pound. Er iſt zehn Jahre alt, He is ten years old. Achtundsiebzigste Aufgabe. 1. Herr Eitelberg ist seiner Partei' abtrünnig gewor- den. 2. Diese Kinder sind ihren Eltern sehr ähnlich. 3. Es ist mir unbegreiflich, wie er solchen Unsinn ver- tragen kann. 4. Kann ich Ihnen auf irgend eine Weise behülflich sein ? 5. Der Zustand des Kranken ist dem Arzte heute sehr bedenklich. 6. Die Umstände des Verlustes des Dampfers sind uns bis jetzt noch nicht bekannt. 7. An welchem Tage die Schlacht bei Jena stattgefunden hat, ist mir augenblicklich nicht erinner- lich. 8. Unter solchen Umständen war seine Gegen- wart natürlich der Gesellschaft sehr unwillkommen. 9. Der Kaufmann ist dem Banquier 800 Thlr. schuldig. 10. Seine Mitwirkung war ihnen mehr hinderlich als förderlich. 11. Er ist seinem Eide treu geblieben. 12. Die deutsche Sprache richtig auszusprechen ist den Amerikanern im Anfang sehr schwer. 13. Wir fahren sehr langsam, weil der Wind und die Fluth uns widrig USE OF THE ARTICLE. 139 sind. 14. Dieser Rock ist mir zu gross. 15. Mir ist es sehr kalt hier. 16. Das Tuch ist eine Elle breit und dreissig Ellen lang. 17. Diese Kugel ist nur 68 Pfund schwer, aber jene Kugeln sind 120 Pfund schwer. 18. Er ist fast einen Kopf grösser als ich. 19. Wilhelm ist zwölf Jahre, einen Monat und einen Tag alt. fleßgeber der zums heute ges pirt das herdet LESSON XL. USE OF THE ARTICL E. Neunundſiebzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Der Menſch iſt ſterblic. 2. Das Leben iſt kurz. 3. Das . Gold iſt das koſtbarſte Metal. 4. Das Feuer und das Waſſer find gute Diener, aber böſe Meiſter. 5. Herr Braumüüer hat den zweiten Band von Kugler's Geſchichte der Malerei, und den vierten Band von Dunder's Geſchichte des Alterthums heute ges kauft. 6. Der Gebrauch iſt der Geſebgeber der Sprachen. 7. Friedrich Kahn ſtudirt das Redt, und Wilhelm Weidmann ſtu- dirt die Medicin. 8. Profeſſor Friedrichs iſt Profeſſor der klass fiſchen Archäologie an der Univerſität zu Berlin. 9. Herr Braun wird heute Abend eine Vorleſung über den Urſprung der gothis Tihen Baukunſt halten. 10. Der Friede der Seele gilt mehr als Reichthum. 11. Das Frühſtück iſt noch nid)t fertig. 12. Nady dem Abendeſſen werden wir ins Concert geben. 13. Das Feſte Magdeburg hat Tidy am 10ten Mai 1631 mit Sturm genom- men ; außer zwei Kirchen und 130 Häuſern hat er die ganze Stadt niedergebrannt und 30,000 von den Einwohnern ermor- det; dieſe Gräuer hat er die ,, Magdeburger Hochzeit“ genannt. 14. Der vorige April war ſehr kalt und unangenehm. 15. Herr Giesler und ſeine Familie ſind jetzt in der Schweiz ; wir werden auch nach adyt Tagen nad der Schweiz geben. 16. Konſtanti- nopel iſt die Hauptſtadt der Türkei. 17. Dieſes Tuch koſtet zwei Thaler die Ele. 18. Er ſtand mit dem Hut auf dem Kopf. 19. Er war des Gefühls nicht mädytig. 20. Die Reichsverſamm- lung zu Prag erwählte Friedrich den Fünften zum Könige. 21. v 140 USE OF THE ARTICLE. Wir ſegelten gegen Süden, und dann gegen Weſten. 22. Herr Maurer hat einen Artikel über die Rechte der Frauen geſchrieben. 23. Der Vater und die Söhne ſind ſpazieren gegangen. Grammatical. 1. One of the most marked differences between the English and the German languages is in the use of the Article. This difference arises in many cases from the fact that the German idiom ofter requires the noun to be conceived as concrete, where the English idiom re- quires it to be conceived in a general or abstract sense. Thus, in the sentence Der Menſdy iſt ſterbliďy (Man is mortal), if we translate der Menſch by " the human being," we will have the spirit of the German idiom. 2. The most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article are given on page 254. - Rem. The variations to the rules there given (especially those to the first rule, $ 55, 1, 1), must be learned by practice. Their exposition here would only cause confusion. Exercise 80. 1. Platinum is the heaviest metal, and lead is the softest metal. 2. William Pressnitz is studying philos- ophy, and John Pressnitz is studying astronomy. 3. What are you reading ? 4. I am reading Jahn's History of Astronomy. 5. Mr. Preu is studying theology at (an) the University of Halle. 6. Prof. Hoffmann is professor of chemistry in the University of Berlin. 7. The good fear not (the) death. 8. (The) virtue leads to (the) hap- piness. 9. (The) pride is contemptible. 10. (The) last summer was very hot. 11. (In the) next winter we will probably go to Italy. 12. After breakfast we will go to (auf) the market. 13. Dinner is not yet ready. 14. The ruins of old Greece are among the most interesting in the world. 15. Switzerland lies between Germany and Italy. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE NOUNS. 141 16. Smyrna is the largest city in Turkey in Asia (in the Asiatic Turkey). 17. Bucharest is the capital of Wal- lachia. 18. We take lessons (haben Stunden) in music four times a week (S 105). 19. He stands there with his hat in his hand. 20. They elected him president unan- imously. 21. The defendant admits that he was an ac- complice in the crime. 22. The ship will sail toward the North, and then it will sail toward the East. LESSON XLI. Einundachtzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Er hat es meinethalben gethan. 2. Es waren unſer zwans zig in der Geſellſchaft; vier von uns find um zehn Uhr nads Hauſe gegangen; die übrigen blieben bis Mitternacht. 3. Es war einmal eine große Hungersnoth im Lande. 4. Wer iſt da? 5. Ich bin da. 6. Wer war mit Ihnen? 7. Es war mein Bruder und meine Schweſter. 8. Ich lobe mids (or id lobe mich ſelbſt). 9. Warum lobſt du did ſelbſt? 10. Haben wir uns gelobt? 11. Ja, ihr habt euch gelobt. 12. Er lobt fich ſelbſt. 13. Sie Yobt ſich nicht. 14. Sie loben ſich. 15. Er ſelbſt hat es gethan. 16. Ich ſelber kann es thun. 17. Selbſt Teine Feinde achten ihn. 18. Wir verſtehen einander (or uns einander) ganz gut. 19. Er hat das Haus für 2,000 Thaler verkauft; er hatte dafür 1,500 Thaler gegeben. 20. Es waren 125 Stimmen dafür und 87 Stimmen dage’gen. 21. Dieſe neue Feder habe ich heute gekauft; id habe den Brief damit geſchrieben. 22. Ich habe den Tiſch ins Zimmer gebracht und die Bücher darauf gelegt. 23. Das Tuch hat ihm ſehr gefallen; er bat davon' einen Rock und eine Weſte machen laſſen. 24. Geben Sie morgen mit uns nach Dresden? 25. Ich werde mit Ihnen heute Abend darüber ſprechen. 26. Ihr Bruder iſt mit dem Meinigen (pazieren gegangen. 27. Er hat ſeine Büder ein- gepakt und nach Amerika geſchickt, ich werde die Meinigen auch 142 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE NOUNS. nach Amerika ſchicken ; was werden Sie mit den Ihrigen machen? 28. Id werde die Meinigen hier in Berlin laſſen, bis ich von Italien zurückkomme. 29. Du haſt das Deinige gethan ; die Undern müſſen jeßt das Ihrige thun. Grammatical. 1. The most important rules with reference to the use of Personal Pronouns are given on pages 282 and 283. Rem. 1. The reflexive use of the personal pronoun is illustrated in the fol- lowing pronoun paradigm : Id lobe mich, I praise myself. du lobſt did), thou praisest thyself. er lobt ſich, he praises himself. ſie Yobt · fich, she praises herself. es lobt jid, it praises itself. wir loben uns, we praise ourselves. ihr lobet euch, you praise yourselves. fie loben ſich, they praise themselves. (Sie loben ſid), you praise yourselves.) Rem. 2. The reciprocal use of the personal pronoun is necessarily confined to the plural number : Wir loben uns, We praise each other. ihr ovt eud), you praise each other. ſie roben ſich they praise each other. (Sie loben ſich, you praise each other.) 2. The dative and accusative cases of personal pro- nouns, when not referring to persons, are rarely used with prepositions. In their stead are usually employed compound adverbs, formed by uniting the adverb da (there) with the preposition, as : Dabei' (for bei ihm, ihr, ihm; ihnen), by or through it or them. Dadurdy' (“ durch ihn, ſie, es; ſie), by or with it or them. Dafür' (“ für ihn, fie, es ; ſie), for it or them. dage'gen (" gegen ihn, ſie, es; ſie), against it or them. Damiť (“ mit ihm, ihr, ihm; ihnen), with it or them. darin' (66 in M, L, M, L, ļ in it or in them. " l ihn, fie, es; ſie, s Rem. 1. When the preposition begins with a vowel, the original r of da (formerly written dar) is retained, as: Daran', darauf, darin', barü'ber, etc. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE NOUNS. 143 Rei. 2. Similar compound adverbs formed with hier (here) and a preposi- tion are sometimes employed : Hierbei' (for bei ihm, ihr, iym; ihnen), with it or them. hiermit (“ mit ihm, ihr, ihm ; ihnen), with it or them. Rem. 3. These compound adverbs are frequently used instead of the de- monstrative pronouns also (see § 188, Rem. 1 and Rem. 2). 3. When the absolute possessive pronoun is used pred- icatively (not being the emphatic word in the sen- tence), like other predicate adjectives, it is undeclined : Der Hut iſt mein, The hat is mine. Denn Dein iſt die Ehre, For Thine is the Glory. Rem. 1. When the stress of voice falls upon the noun, the absolute posses- sive pronoun takes the termination, as shown in the first column in § 110:,: Dieſer Hut iſt meiner, nidit ſeiner, This hat is mine, not his. Rem. 2. Frequently the definite article precedes the posessive pronoun: Dieſer Hut iſt der meine, jener This hat is mine, that one is his. iſt der ſeine, Rem. 3. More usually, in modern German, the form ending in -ig is em- ployed : Dieſer Hut iſt der Meinige, jener This hat is mine, that one is his. iſt der Seinige, Rem. 4. The form der Meinige (mine) is declined thus: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. Der Meinige, Das Meinige, Die Meinigen, des Meinigen, der Meinigen, des Meinigen, der Meinigen, dem Meinigen, | Der Meinigen, dem Meinigen, | den Meinigen, den Meinigen. die Meinige. Das Meinige. ll die Meinigen. Rem. 5. The neuter singular of the absolute possessive pronoun is frequently employed as meaning the property of, the duty of, etc. : Er hat das Seinige verloren, He has lost his property. Er hat das Seinige gethan, He has done his duty. Rem. 6. The plural frequently refers to the family, friends, followers, dependents, etc. : Die Meinigen wiſſen nicht, wann My relatives do not know when I idy zurüdtommen werde, will return. Der General zog mit den Seinigen The general retreated with his forces. zurüđ, 144 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Exercise 82. 1. I did it on his account. 2. They did it on our account. 3. There were ten of them; four of them came with us; the rest remained at Leipzic. 4. There was once a very rich man 5. Who was in the room ? 6. It was I. 7. There are many large trees in this forest. 8. I understand myself. 9. He injures him- self. 10. We understand ourselves. 11. They under- stand themselves. 12. They understand each other." 13. Even his enemies acknowledge his worth. 14. Mr. Dietrich has sold his horse for 360 Thlr.; he paid 400 Thlr. for it last year. 15. The Government will im- mediately make a new loan of 150,000,000 Thlr.; there were 250 votes in favor (for) it in Congress, and only 36 votes against it. 16. Will Mr. Eitelberg go with us to Gotha ? 17. He will come here and speak with you about it this evening. 18. Why did you not tell William that he must not go out in (bei) this bad weather ? 19. I did tell him so twice. LESSON XLII. INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Dreiundachtzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Einige von den Büchern ſind wohl gut gebunden, aber die meiſten (most of them) ſind ſehr ſchlecht gebunden. 2. Der Eine hat ſeine Aufgabe ganz ohne Fehler geſchrieben, der Andere hat viele Fehler darin gemacht. 3. Einige wenige Gedichte der Sammlung ſind gut, manche ſind ſchlecht, viele oder die meiſten ſind mittelmäßig. 4. Von Roland ſang er und manchem from- men Held (Sd.). 5. Es iſt von manchem hohen Baum die Wurzel faul. 6. Herr Diefenbady hat mehrere Jahre ($ 83, 4) in Deutſdland gelebt. 7. Er hat mir kein Buch geſchict. 8. Sein Ehrgeiz kennt keine Grenzen. 9. Mir gefällt keines von alen dieſen Büchern. 10. Es kann keiner darüber entſchieden INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 145 urtheilen. 11. Es war viel Lärm um Nichts ; viel Geſchrei und wenig Wolle. 12. Er hat es nur durch viel (or viele) Arbeit gethan. 13. Ich habe es mit viel (or vielem) Vergnügen gethan. 14. Man kann bei vielem Gelde unglücklicy, und ohne viel Geld ſchr glüdlich ſein. 15. Du haſt viel geleſen, aber wenig gelernt. 16. Er hat viel gereiſt niid Vieles geſehen. 17. Viele Ködje verſalzen den Brei. 18. Studiren jegt viel (or viele) Amerika- ner in Berlin? 19. Nur wenig Menſchen ſind ſo ungemein glücklidy. 20. Id muß ein wenig Ruhe ſuchen. 21. Ich habe das Buch für nur wenige Groſchen gekauft. 22. Es ſind weni- ger Ausnahmen als du denkſt. 23. Wenige haben es verſucht, und noch Wenigern iſt es gelungen. 24. Mit Vielem hält man Haus, mit Wenigem kommt man aus. 25. Er hat weniger (comp.) Vorſichtigkeit als Tapferkeit. 26. Das Geheimniß iſt im Beſitze nur weniger (gen. pl.) Perſonen. 27. Er hat das wenigſte Geld und die wenigſten Sorgen. 28. Nur bei den wes nigſten Thieren findet man ſoldie Gewohnheiten. 29. Mit adyt Elen werden ſie Tuch genug für einen Rod und eine Weſte ba- ben. 30. Ich habe genug von ſeiner Tapferkeit gehört. 31. Womit haben Sie den Brief geſchrieben ? 32. Ich habe ihn init einem Bleiſtift geſchrieben, weil ich keine Feder bei mir hatte. 33. Worüber hat Herr Schnorr geſprochen? 34. Er ſprady über ſeine Reiſe nad Italien. Grammatical. 1. For the genera rulesl governing the use of the Indefinite Pronouns, see page 286. Rem. 1. When mancher is used before an adjective without its termination ($ 112, 2, Rem. 3), the adjective follows the old declension: Mand, tapfræer Held, ormandier tapfre Held. Mandi lieb-es Kind, 66 manches liebe Kind. Mit mand, tapfr-ent Helden, 66 mit mandjem tapfren Helden. Mandy tapſr-e Helden, " mandhe tapfren Helden. Rem. 2. Viel and wenig can be used with or without inflection, according as the idea of collectiveness or individuality is made more prominent: Es hat viel Mühe gekoſtet, or es hat viele Mühe gekoſtet. Wie viel neue Feinde ! (Sd.) “ wie viele neue Feinde ! Es ſind wenig Menſchen, - es ſind wenige Mendjen. <3 146 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Obs.:The comparative of wenig (weniger) is more usually uninflected : Er hat weniger Vorfidtigkeit als He has less prudence than valor. Tapferkeit, Rem. 3. The indefinite pronoun man (112, 6) is used in most general ex- pressions; it is translated by one, people, etc. : Man ſagt, one says, they say, people say, it is said. Man glaubt, one believes, they believe, people believe, it is believed. Obs. Man is indeclinable. When oblique cases are required, they are formed from einer. When a possessive pronoun referring to mau is required, ſein is employed (see Sentences 5 and 6 in Exercise 84). Rem. 4. Etwas ($ 112, 8) and Nidts ($ 112, 9) are frequently used in ap- position with the neuter of adjectives used substantively (Sent. 19 and 20). Obs. The first syllable (et-) of etwas is frequently dropped in common conversation. Rem. 2. In asking questions, the indefinite pronoun some or any is in many cases not translated : Haben Sie Butter gekauft? Did you buy any butter? Haben Sie Wepfel gekauft? Did you buy any apples ? Obs. In some cases some is translated by etwas (see $ 112, 8, Rem. 1). 2. For the chief rules with reference to the use of Relative Pronouns, see page 289. Rem. For the compound adverbs womit, wovon, etc., see $ 188, Rem. 3. LU Vierundachtzigste Aufgabe. 1. Man reist von Berlin nach Köln mit der Eisenbahn in einem Tage. 2. Bei uns spricht man auch von Ge- spenstern ; aber in der Regel haben nur die Leute" und das selber unsichtbare und spukhafte “man" sie gesehen. 3. Was sagt man in der Stadt iiber die neue Anleihe? 4. Man ist darüber sehr unzufrieden. 5. Man lacht ge- wöhnlich, wenn einem etwas Lächerliches begegnet. 6. Man ist froh, wenn man eine Arbeit geendet hat. 7. Jemand klopft. 8. Es ist Herr Wedel. 9. Kennen Sie Jemand (or Jemanden) aus der Gesellschaft? 10. Ich kenne Niemand (or Niemanden) ausser Herrn Ruprecht und seiner Frau. 11. Hat Jemand es Ihnen gesagt? 12. Nein, Niemand hat es mir gesagt, ich habe es selbst heute Morgen in der Zeitung gelesen. 13. Seine Hand wird M DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 147 wider Jederman, und Jedermanns Hand wird wider ihn sein (1. Mos. 12, 16). 14. Man soll sein Herz nicht Jeder- mann offenbaren. 15. Haben Sie etwas von dem neuen Unfall in den Bergwerken gehört? 16. Nein, ich habe Nichts davon gehört. 17. Wiinschen Sie noch etwas? 18. ist etwas ganz Neues. 20. Er hat etwas ganz Anderes ge- meint. (21. Hier ist ganz was Neues). 22. Haben Sie noch Gold? 23. Ja, ich habe noch welches. 24. Haben Sie heute Morgen Aepfel auf (in) dem Markt gesehen? 25. Ja, ich habe welche gesehen, aber sie waren schlecht und sehr theuer. 26. Ich weiss nicht, wovon Sie sprechen. 27. Können Sie mir sagen, woriiber Professor Schmidt heute Abend sprechen wird? 28. Er wird über die Geschichte der Stadt Berlin vor dem vierzehnten Jahrhundert sprechen. ' LESSON XLIII. DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Fiinfundachtzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Ich habe heute Morgen dieſe zwei Bücher gekauft; dieſes war ſehr billig, jenes war ſehr theuer. 2. Das (jenes) Budy habe ich ſchon geleſen. 3. Dieſen Herrn kenne ich ſehr gut, aber jenen Herrn dort habe ich nie vorher geſehen. 4. Die Ruinen von Pompejt ſind größer und intereſſanter als die von Hercula- neum. 5. Der iſt ein ſehr gelehrter Mann. 6. Wann wird Herr. Roth wiederfommen? 7. Das weiß ich nidit. 8. Das iſt des Kaiſers Hand und Siegel (Sch.). 9. Das ſind Alles neue Häuſer in dieſer Straße. 10. Er malte ſeinen Vetter und deſſen Sohn. 11. Der Ruhm deſſen, der lügt, dauert nicht lange. Dics(-es) find reife Aepfel. 14. Dasjenige Budy, welches du wünſcheſt, bat der Buchbinder noch nicht zurückgebracht. 15. Derjenige Herr, den (or welchen) wir geſtern im Muſeum ſaben, 148 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. iſt der Bruder des Herrn Liebredt. 16. Da iſt derſelbe Herr, den (or weldien) wir geſtern Abend bei Herrn Brünow trafen. 17. Wer nicht hören will, muß fühlen (or der muß fühlen). 18. Was du heute thun kannſt, ſolſt du nicht auf morgen verſdieben (or das ſollſt ..... 19. Alles, was wir heute in Potsdam geſehen haben, hat uns ſehr gefallen. 20. Hier habe ich etwas in dieſem Buche gefunden, was ich gar nicht verſtehen kann. 21. Die Geſchichte iſt im Ganzen ridytig, doch habe idy Mandjes gefunden, was ich nicht billigen kann. 22. Weſſen Brod du infeſt, deſſen Los du ſingeſt (Spridhwort). 23. Es war eine ſoldie Hiße in der Stadt, daß wir faſt alle krank davon wurden. 24. Bei ſoldi einer Hiße (or einer ſoldien Hitze) kann man leicht krank werden. 25. Sold einen Menſchen (or einen ſolden Menſchen) hatte ich nie geſehen. 26. ,,Das wiſſen wir, die wir die Gemſen jagen“ (Sch.). 27. Das weiß ich, der ich ſelbſt es geſehen habe. 28. Das ſind die Häuſer, wovon ich geſprodjen habe. 29. Hier iſt die Feder, womit ich den Brief geſchrieben habe. Grammatical. 1. The chief rules governing the use of Demonstrative and Relative pronouns are given in § 111, and § 114. 2. The demonstrative pronoun derjenige (that) is de- clined thus : SINGULAR. PLURAL. All Genders. diejenigen, Masculinr. Nom. Derjenige, Gen. Desjenigen, Dat. demjenigen, Acc. denjenigen. Feminine. diejenige, Derjenigen, derjenigen, diejenige. Neuter. basjenige, desjenigen, Demjenigen, dasjenige. derjenigen, denjenigen, diejenigen. Rem. 1. Derjenige is employed only when a relative follows the demon- strative pronoun. Derjenige Herr, den wir ſahen, The gentleman, whom we saw. Rem. 2. Derjenige has usually a more indefinite signification than jener, dicſer, der. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 149 3. The pronoun derſelbe (the same) is declined thus: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Musculine. Nom. Derſelbe, Gen. desſelben, Dat. demiſelben, Acc. denſelben. Feminine. dieſelbe, derſelben, derſelben, dieſelbe. Neuter. dasſelbe, desſelben, demſelben, dasſelbe. All Genders. dieſelben, derſelben, denſelben, dieſelben. 4. The singular of the neuter gender .of the demon- strative pronouns dieſes (dies), ienes, alles, is used in an indefinite way, without distinction of gender or number, like the neuter of the third person of the personal pro- noun -es; thus used, these pronouns do not control number and person of the verb: . Das ſind Aucs neue Häuſer, Those are all new houses. Dies ſind reife Erdbeeren, Those are ripe strawberries. 5. Instead of relative pronouns (not referring to per- sons) preceded by prepositions, compound adverbs are usually employed (see also g 188, Rem. 3): Hier iſt das Bud, wovon (or von Here is the book of which I spoke. weldjem) id) geſprodhen habe, Hier iſt der Bleiſtift (or die Feder) Here is the pencil (or the pen) with womit ich den Brief geſdyrieben which I wrote the letter. Траве, Exercise 86. 1. This cloth which you bought to-day was much too dear. 2. The cloth, from which the tailor made these coats, was. very good, but it was very dear. 3. Here is the book of which I spoke. 4. There are the books of which I spoke. 5. The Cathedral of Cologne is much larger than the one (die) at Ulm. 6. These books are new, but those (iene) books are not new. 7. These are all new books. 8. How much did this house cost? 9. (That) I do not know. 10. (That) I can not say. 11. There is the same carriage that we saw this morning. 12. Did you find any thing that you do not understand? 150 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 13. No, I have so far (bis jeßt) found nothing that is not very easy to understand. 14. What he said about the battle is indeed (wohl) possible, but it is not probable. 15. I can not write with such a pen as (wie) this. 16. There is the man in whose (deſſen) house we reside. 17. There is the physician with whom I made the trip through the Riesengebirge (mit welchem or mit wem id) eine Neiſe durd das Rieſengebirge gemacht habe). 18. That man is the one whom we saw at the (im) concert yesterday evening. LESSON XLIV. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 1. Wie lange haben Sie ſich in München aufgehalten? 2. Im vorigen Jahre haben wir uns nur drei Wochen in München aufgehalten; aber por vier Jahren ſind wir über vier Monate in München geblieben. 3. Wie befinden ſie ſich (how do you do)? 4. Id befinde mich ganz wohl, ich danke. 5. Herr Dies fenbad und ſeine ganze Familie haben ſich nach Helgoland beges ben, um dort Seebäder zu nehmen. 6. Warum bekümmern Sie ſich ſo ſehr um ſeine Angelegenheiten? 7. Ich habe mich endlicy entſchloſſen, nach Italien zu gehen. . 8. Aus dem Samen ents wickelt ſich die Pflanze. 9. Von der Zeit an entwickelte ſidy die Empörung ſehr raſch. 10. Am 1. November 1755 ereignete ſich das Erdbeben in Liſſabon. 11. Er hat ſich über ſeine Ents deckung ſehr gefreut. 12. Nach einer langen Belagerung hat die Feſtung ſich auf Gnade und Ungnade ergeben müſſen. 13. Er hat ſich durch Stundengeben ernähren müſſen. 14. Man er: kundigte ſich unter der Hand ſehr ſcharf, wo ſie ſich während der Mordthat befanden. 15. Ich fürchte mich vor ſeiner Rache nicht (or ich fürchte ſeine Radje nicht). 16. Es iſt ſehr dywer, ſidy an eine ganz neue Lebensart zu gewöhnen. 17. Irren Sic fidi nidst, mein Herr, haben Sie nidyt meinen Hut genommen? REFLEXIVE VERBS. 151 Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules that govern the use of Reflexive Verbs, and for the paradigm of these verbs, see $ 158, and $ 159. 2. Most reflexive verbs are intransitive. Those that have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case govern an object in the accusative case. Some govern an in- direct object in the dative case. Some are followed by a substantive in the genitive case. Some are fol- lowed by a preposition. . 3. The following are among the most commonly em- ployed of the reflexive verbs. Rem. 1. See also those verbs below which require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case. Sidi ärgern (über), to be offended (at). ſidy anſchiden (zu), to prepare (for). ſidy aufhalten, to remain, stay. ſich auffdwingen, to mount, to soar. fid) äußern, to express one's self. ſidy bedanken (für), to give thanks (for). fich befinden, to find one's self (to be, to do). ſidy bedenken (gen.), to deliberate about, to devise. fidj befleißeit ? fid) Befleißigens (gen.), to apply one's self (to). ſidy begeben, to resort to, to repair to, to betake one's self to. fid behelfen (init), to resort to, to help one's self by means of. fich beklagen (über), to complain (of). ſich befiimmern (um), to trouble one's self (about); (über), to grieve for. fid; bemächtigen) fid; bemeiſtern (gen.), to take possession (of), to seize. ſidy beſinnen (gen., or auf or über), to recollect, to try to remember. ſidy entäußern (gen.), to dispose of, to part with. ficky enthalten (gen.), to restrain one's self (from). ſid, entſdiließen, to resolve, to determine, to decide. ſid, entſinnen (gen.), to recollect. ſich entwickeln, to expand, develop. ſid, erbarmen (gen., an or ütber), to have mercy (upon). ſidy ereignen, to happen, to take place. ſidy erfreuen (gen. or itber), to rejoice, to be glad (at). fid; ergeben (dat.), to surrender, to addict one's self (to). 152 REFLEXIVE VERBS. ſidy ernähren, to gain one's livelihood. ſich erinnern (gen. or an), to remember. fid) erkälten, to take a cold. ſich erkundigen (gen., nady or an or über), to make inquiries, to inform fich freuen (über), to rejoice (at). [one's self. ſich fürdyten (vor), to be in dread (of). ſich getröſten (gen.), to hope (for). ſidy gewöhnen (an), to accustom one's self (to). ſich grämen (über or um), to grieve (over or at). ſidy irren, to make a mistake. ſidy nähern (dat.), to approach. fid, rihmen (gen.), to boast (of). fidy djämen (gen., über or wegen), to be ashamed (of). ſid) in die Umſtände [djicken, to adapt one's self to circumstances. ſidy (deuen (vor), to stand in fear (of). fidy ſehnen (nad)), to long for. ſidy ſeßen, to take a seat. ſidy tröſten (gen, or mit), to console one's self with. ſid) iinterhalten, to converse, to amuse one's self. fid, vergehen, to go astray, to lose one's way. fidy verirren, ou 66 66 66 fid, verlaſſen (auf), to rely (upon). ſich verſpredjen, to misspeak one's self. ſid) verſehen (gen.), to expect; (an), to be frightened at. ſid) verſichern (gen. or vor), to make sure (of). ſid) verſpäten, to come too late. ſid, verſtellen, to disguise one's self. ſidy vorbereiten (auf or zu), to prepare one's self. fid, weigerii, to object, to refuse. ſidy widerſeben (dat.), to oppose, to withstand. ſich wundern (über), to wonder (at). Rem. 2. Many other transitive verbs besides those that are included in the above list are often used reflexively, as: Ich verſtehe das nidit, I do not understand that. Id verſtehe mich, I understand myself. Das verſteht ſid), That is a matter of course. Rem. 3. Reflexive verbs take haben for the auxiliary. 4. The following reflexive verbs require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case : Sich anmaßen, to presume, to arrogate to one's self. ſid) ausbedingen, to reserve to one's self. fid) ausbitten, to ask for. ſich denken, to imagine. ſich einbilden, to imagine, to fancy. T7 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 153 fidy getrauen, to dare, to venture. fid) erlauben, to indulge one's self (in). ſidy ſdmeidjeln, to flatter one's self. fidy. verſdaffen, to provide. ſidy vernehmen, to propose to one's self. --[id) vorſtellen, to imagine, to place before one's self. Rem. 1. These verbs govern an object in the accusative case : Das haſt du dir eingebildet, Thou hast imagined that. Renn. 2. Reflexive verbs that have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case are conjugated thus: Infinitive: Sidi einbilden, to imagine. Present Indicative. id bilde es mir ein, I imagine it. du bildeſt es dir ein, thou imaginest it. er bildet es ſidein, he imagines it. wir wilden es uns ein, we imagine it. ihr bildet es euch ein, you imagine it. fie bilden es ſid, ein, they imagine it. (Sie bilden es ſich ein, you imagine it). Imperfect Indic.: idbildete es mir ein, etc., I imagined it, etc. Perfect Indic. : icy habe es mir eingebildet, etc., I have imagined it, etc. Pluperfect Indic. : ich hatte es mir eingebildet etc., I had imagined it, etc. First Fut. Indic.: id, werde es mir einbilden, etc., I shall imagine it, etc. Sec. Fut. Indic. : id) werde es mir eingebildet haben, I shall have imagined it. 5. For the use of reflexive verbs governing the geni- tive and dative cases, see the following lessons. Exercise 88. 1. How long shall you remain in Berlin ? 2. We will probably remain there two months. 3. Good morning! How do you do? 4. I am very well, I thank (you). 5. During the hot weather we usually betake ourselves to Stettin or Danzig, for the purpose of taking sea-baths, and of escaping the bad air of this large city. 6. We have concluded to return to Berlin in October. 7. The conspiracy developed itself with astonishing rapidity. 8. A great freshet (overflowing) of the Rhine took place last spring. 9. He rejoiced over the arrival of his broth- er. 10. The entire army was forced to surrender at: discretion. . 11. He had to earn his livelihood by work- G 2 154 AGREEMENT OF VEBB. ing with his hands (Handarbeit) until he could get a better situation. 12. It is not easy to accustom one's self to the usages and customs of other lands. 13. We are mistaken (or we have made a mistake); that is Mr. Rahn's house. 14. We can not rely upon his help. 15. I long to see my native land (Vaterland) once more. 16. May I rely upon your standing by me in this affair? 17. Of couse you can. 18. It is often necessary for us to adapt ourselves to circumstances. LESSON XLV. AGREEMENT OF VERB WITH NOMINATIVE. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCU- SATIVE CASE. APPOSITION. Neunundachtzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Johann geht nach der Stadt. 2. Johann und Wilhelm gehen nach der Stadt. 3. Es ſind viele ſchöne Stahlſtiche in dieſem Buch. 4. Wir waren es nicht, die auf die Blumen ges' treten haben. 5. Dies ſind Alles neue Bücher auf dieſem Tiſche, aber das ſind Alles Bücher aus der zweiten Hand. 6. Seine Majeſtät Wilhelm der Vierte, König von Preußen, haben allers gnädigſt geruht, zu befehlen, daß, etc. 7. Sie, Ihr Bruder, mein Vater und icy können (d. h. wir können) in dieſem Coupé fahren. 8. Du, Dein Bruder und Deine Schweſter werdet (8. b. ihr werdet) Plat in dem nächſten Wagen finden. 9. Du und Dein Bruder ſind von Herrn Röbel eingeladen, mit ihm und ſeis ner Frau nach Tegel zu fahren, um das Grab der Gebrü- der Humboldt und die Kunſtſchäße im Palaſt zu ſehen. 10. Das kalte Wetter, welches wir jetzt haben, hat ſchon länger als einen Monat gedauert. 11. Wie viel wiegen Sie (or was iſt Ihr Gewicht)? 12. Id wiege hundert und dreißig Pfund; mein Bruder Johann wiegt hundert vierundvierzig Pfund. 13. Dieſes Tuch koſtet einen und einen halben Thaler (or anderthalb Thaler) die Elle. 14. Hamburg liegt ungefähr dreißig deutſche (0.h. hundert und zwanzig engliſdye) Meilen nordweſtlich von AGREEMENT OF VERB. 155 Berlin. 15. Herr Roth wird mit ſeiner Familie wahrſdeinlich dieſen Abend (or heute Abend) von Düſſeldorf ankommen. 16. Herr Dietrich kam früher um 10 Uhr Vormittags, um uns deut- ſchen Unterricht zu ertheilen; ießt kommt er um drei Uhr Nady- mittags. 17. Wir ſind nur gegen Abend den Veſuv hinauf ge- gangen, weil wir den herrlichen Sonnenuntergang von der Spiße des Vulkans ſehen wollten. 18. Bald nadidem die Sonne unter- ging, kam der Vollmond herauf; aber der Himmel hat ſich gleich darauf mit Wolken bededt, ſo daß es ſehr dunkel war, als wir den Berg herunterkamen. 19. Finden Sie es kalt hier? 20. Ja, mich friert es. 21. Es freut mich, zu hören, daß Ihre Geſunds heit wiederhergeſtellt ift. 22. Es geht ihn gar nichts an, ob wir das Haus kaufen oder nicht. 23. Es giebt viele ungebildete Leute in Deutſchland, beſonders auf dem Lande, die an Spuken und Geſpenſter glauben. 24. Ohne Weiteres zu ſagen, ging er ſeinen Weg. 25. Herr Bernſtein lehrt midi die Muſik und das Zeidynen. 26. Wiſſen Sie wann Herr Behr von Weimar wie- derkommen wird? 27. Nein, ich habe ihn zwar barnad; gefragt, aber er konnte es mir nicht genau ſagen. 28. Er nennt ihn ſeinen Freund, und doch hat er ihn in dieſer unfreundlichen Weiſe behandelt. 29. Die Einwohnerzahl des Königreiches Preußen be- läuft ſich auf etwa 24,000,000. 30. Nach der Verbannung des Kaiſers Napoleon hat Preußen, einen mehr als fünfzig Jahre dauernden Frieden genoſſen. 31. Durch den Friedensvertrag 311 Paris, im Jahre 1815, hat Preußen die Rhein-Provinzen befom- men. 32. Vom Anfang des Monats Auguſt bis zum Ende des Monats September (or von Anfang Auguſt bis Ende Septem- ber) haben wir ſehr trockenes Wetter gehabt. 33. Der Schuh- madhergeſell iſt mit zwei Paar Schuhen und drei Paar Stiefeln nach der Stadt gegangen.' 34. Mit dem Beſten Willen konnten die Schüler ſo lange Lektionen nicht lernen. 35. Der Name der Stadt Potsdam iſt ſlaviſden Urſprungs und bedeutet ,,unter den Eichen.“ 36. Die Werra und Fulda erhalten nach ihrer Vereinis gung den Namen Weſer. V 156 AGREEMENT OF VERB. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the agree ment of the subject with the verb in number and per- son, see § 117. Rem, 1. The use of a plural verb with courtly titles in the singular number is customary in official documents and in direct address; but in speaking of the persons having these titles, it is common to put the verb in the singular number : Sſt Seine Excellenz zu Hauſe? Is his Excellency at home? 2. The third person singular of the verb geben (to give) is frequently employed impersonally in the signification of there is, there was, etc. : E8 giebt Leute, die an Geſpenſter There are people that believe in glauben, ghosts. 4. For the chief rules of Apposition, see $ 85. Rem. 1. If one of two nouns in apposition is a proper name, the proper name is not inflected : Die Grenzen des Königreichs The boundaries of the kingdom of Preußen, Prussia. Die Verbannung des Kaiſers Na- The banishment of the Emperor Na- poleon, poleon. Nadı dem Tode Haris des Großen, After the death of Charlemagne. Nadh Wilhelm dem Vierten, After William the Fourth. Rem. 2. The name of the month is not inflected when the word Monat (month) precedes the name of the month : Am Anfang des Monats April At the beginning of the month of (or am Anfang Aprils), April (or at the beginning of April). Rem. 3. The non-inflection of nouns indicating weight, measure, and num- ber (see Lesson XVI., 2), when they are of the masculine or neuter gender is explained by some German grammarians by considering them as cardinal numbers; the case is sometimes indicated by the limited noun: Mit (zwei Dugend) Eiern, With two dozen eggs. With three pairs of shoes. Obs. The limited noun is itself, however, also more usually not inflected: Mit zwei Dutzend Eiei, With two dozen eggs. Mit zwei Paar Stiefel, With two pairs of boots. Außer einem Brug Waſſer wünſcht He wishes nothing except a pitcher er niđits, of water. AGREEMENT OF VERB. 157 5. The article is usually used before names of moun- tains (see $ 61,7):. Der Harz ; der Veſuv; der Hecla, The Hartz ; Vesuvius ; Hecla. 6. The following nouns formerly ended in -en; the -n of the nominative is now usually dropped : Der Friede, peace. der Haufe, heap. der Same, seed. Funke, spark. Sarpfe, carp. Sdade, damage. Gedanke, thought. .Name, name. Wille, will. 1 Glaube, belief, faith. Während des Friedens, During the peace. Exercise 90. 1. William and his father will soon go to Stuttgart. 2. There are in this album many beautiful photographs of the most important cathedrals and other public buildings in Germany. 3. Those are all photographs of paintings in the museums (877) of Berlin and Dresden. 4. My brother and I went to Potsdam yesterday. 5. You and your brother are invited by (von) Mr. Niemëyer to go with him to-morrow to (um-zu) see the collection of German and Scandinavian antiquities which Count von Eitelberg has just brought from Pomerania to Ber- lin. 6. The hot weather which we had last year lasted almost a month. 7. Weber's History of the World (Weltgeſchichte) costs two thalers and a half a volume, unbound ; such binding as this will cost a thaler and a half a volume; that binding is very strong and good ; it costs only half a thaler a volume. 8. The express- train from Frankfort-on-the-Oder arrives at eight o'clock in the morning; the freight-train leaves at four in the afternoon. 9. The concert will take place at eight o'clock this evening ($ 284, Rem.4). 10. We went up the mountain very slowly, but we came down the mountain very fast. 11. We are very glad ($ 177,3) to hear that his health has almost entirely been restored (that his health itself almost entirely restored has). 12. It surprises me to hear that he has not yet arrived. 158 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. hany beau 14. It is whether 13. There are many beautiful houses in the neighbor- hood of the Thiergarten. 14. It is none of his business (it does not concern him at all) whether we sell the house or not. 15. Mr. Kuhn taught my sister music, when we were in Berlin. 16. Soon after the death of Alexander the Great, the Greek empire fell into pieces (zu Grunde geben). 17. We will remain in Munich from the beginning of the month of November till toward the end of the month of March (or from the beginning of November till toward the end of March). 18. The name of the city of Cologne is of Latin origin ; it sig- nified originally" Colony.” 19. Do you know the name of that river (wiſſen Sie den Namen jenes Fluſſes, or wiſſen Sie wie jener Fluß beißt) ? 20. That is the Havel. . LESSON XLVI. VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. Einundneunzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Das Weib Bedarf in Kriegesnöthen des Beſdịützers (Sc.). 2. Er be- durfte jetzt mehr als jemals des guten Willens der Staaten (Sd.). 3. Ein Charlatan bedarf nur Nuhm zu haben. 4. Wer der Gefahr ſpottet, gedenkt ihrer; der wahre Held aber denkt gar nid)t an die Gefalır. 5. Shrer Dienſte kann id; entrathen (Sd.). 6. Auch das glüdlicyſte Talent kann der Einwir- kung einer guten Sdule nicht entrathen (G.). 7. Als wir auf das Schiff kamen, fanden wir, daß die Sdriffsleute aud) der nöthigſten Lebensmittel erman- gelten. 8. Id ſpotte ſeiner Drohung ; ſie ſdredt mich gar nicht, weil id) mich im Nothfall zu vertheidigen weiß. 9. Sie ſpotten meiner, Prinz (Sd.). 10. Es ſind nidit alle frei, die ihrer Ketten ſpotten. 11. Ein ſchwankendes Gebäude braudit des Erdbebens nicht, um über den Haufen zu fallen (Sc.). 12. Sie können das Bud) mitnehmen ; id) Brauche es jetzt nid)t. 13. Der Habſichtige aditet jedes Vortheils (d. 1., der Habfüğytige hat Açt auf jeden Vortheil). 14. Einen Lügner kann man nid)t aditen (d. h., nidht ehren). 15. Herr Schnorr iſt To großmüthig, daß er dieſer Beleidigung vergeſſen wird (6. ., daß er dieſe Bes leidigung mit Abſicht aus dem Gebädytniß entfernen wird). 16. Id) habe die Fahreszahl ganz vergeſſen (D. h., ohne Abſicht aus dem Gedächtniſ verloren). 17. Alle lachen über ſeine Thorheit. 18. Des Guten, was man hat, ſollte man genießen ; und man ſollte deſſen entbehren lernen, weſſen man nicht bedarf VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 159 (more usually with accusative cases, thus: Das Gute, was man hat, ſollte man genießen; Dody man ſollte das entbehren (eriten, was man nicht bedarf). 19. Ich bin der Meinung, daß wir vor zehn Uhr des Abends nicht ankommen werden (or meiner Meinung nadı werden wir vor zehn Uhr des Abends nidit ankommen). 20. Bei allen dieſen Unfällen iſt er ganz gutes Muthe8 (or guten Muthes, see $ 89, Rem. 1). 21. Id war Willens (or id) hatte eben die Abfid)t) einen Brief an ihn zu ſdreiben, als er ganz unerwartet in mein Zimmer herein- fam. 22. Selig, die reines Herzens ($ 78, Rem. 1) ſind, denn ſie werden Gott ſchauen (Matt. 5, 8). 23. Frau Wiedemann iſt eines plötzlidjen Todes geſtor- ben. 24. Fſt ſie eines natürlidhjen Todes geſtorben ? 25. Nein, ſie iſt am ge- brochenen Herzen geſtorben, weil ihre zwei Söhne eine Mordthat verübt haben und dafür zum Tode verurtheilt ſind. 26. Der arme Bettler iſt des Hungers (or vor Hunger [$ 252, Rem. 2], or am Hunger) geſtorben. 27. Der Hody- altar ſtand an der Stelle, wo Albert von Deſtreid, des Todes verblic). 28. Was für landsleute ſind die Kaufleute ? 29. Einer iſt ein Dentſdier, der Andere iſt ein Holländer. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules relating to the government of the Genitive Case of substantives by verbs, see $ 178. Rem. 1. Some of the reflexive verbs given in $ 178, 3, may also have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case, and be followed by the complementary object in the accusative instead of in the genitive case : Idy maße mid deſſen nid)t an, 1 (or) idmaße mir Šas nidst an, Š I do not presume to that. Rem. 2. The preposition that is to follow the verb (see $ 178, 3, Rem.) will often depend upon the shade of meaning given to the verb: Idy freue mich auf ſeinen Beſudy, I am glad of his visit. Er freut ſid) über den Sdaden He rejoices over the misfortune of Anderer, others. 2. Many compound nouns, having -mann for the last component, have two forms in the plural (=männer and -leute): Der Staufmann, merchant; pl. die Kaufmänner, or die Kaufleute. Neidie Kauf- und Handelsmänner Rich merchants and traders. (see $ 50, 2). Zwei Nürnberger Kaufleute, Two Nuremberg merchants. Renn. 1. Sometimes the plural ending -leute refers to a class of persons, the prefix having an adjective signification (see Lesson XXXVI., 1, Rem. 1): Der Ehemann, husband, married man; pl. die Ehemänner, married men. Die Ehefrau, wife, married woman; pl. die Ehefrauen, married women. Die Eheleute (pl.), married people. 160 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. Rem. 2. With some nouns the ending -männer is rarely or never used, but the ending -leute is the usual plural termination, as : Der Edelmann, nobleman; pl. die Edelleute, the nobility. 1. Hauptmann, captain; . “ die Hauptleute, captains. !! Kaufniann, merchant; “ die Raufleute, merchants. 11 Landmalin, countryman, farmer; - die Landleute, country people. I Landsmann, (fellow) countryman; “ die Landsleute, (fellow)countrymen 1 Zimmermann, carpenter ; 6 die Zimmerleute, carpenters. Zweiundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Man hat den General von Fischel des Hochverraths angeklagt. 2. In der letzten Nacht ist ein Dieb durch das Fenster in Herrn Roths Zimmer ge- drungen und hat ihn seiner goldenen Uhr und seines Portemonnaies (mit 460 Thalern und werthvollen Papieren darin) beraubt. 3. Herr Klein hat seinen Kutscher des Diebstahls beschuldigt. 4. Man hat den Polizeidiener wegen oft wiederholter Betrunkenheit seines Amtes entlassen. 5. Nichts kann ihn seines Eides entbinden (or nichts kann ihn von seinem Eide ent- binden). 6. Ich versichere Sie meiner Hochachtung und Freundschaft (or ich versichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung und Freundschaft). 7. Ich bin sei- ner Unschuld überzeugt (more usual at present-ich bin von seiner Unschuld überzeugt). 8. Man hat den Angeklagten der Theilnahme am Morde frei- gesprochen (or von der Theilnahme, etc.). 9. Welcher Sünde zeiht dich dein Gewissen? (Sch.) 10. Die Richter haben den Verbrecher des Landes ver- wiesen. 11. Der Bischof hat den Priester seines Amtes entsetzt. 12. Der Gerechte erbarmt sich seines Viehes. 13. Wir konnten uns kaum des La- chens enthalten. 14. Was ist der Mensch, dass Du sein gedenkest und das Menschenkind, dass Du Dich sein ($ 107, Rem. 2) so annimmst (Psalm viii, 5). 15. Ich bediente mich der Gelegenheit, die zwei neuen Gemälde von Kaulbach zu sehen. 16. Deiner heiligen Zeichen, o Wahrheit, hat der Betrug sich an- gemasst (Sch.). 17. Während der letzten zwei Jahre hat Wilhelm Zahn sich der Rechtswissenschaft beflissen (d. h. das Recht studirt). 18. Ich bin nicht der Archäologie beſlissen (d. h. ich studire sie nicht). 19. Die Armee hat sich nach einem langen blutigen Kampfe der Festung bemächtigt. :20. Ein tiefer Schmerz hemächtigte sich meines Herzens. 21. Ich kann mich seines Namens nicht entsinnen (or ich kann mich nicht auf seinen Namen besinnen). 22. Ihre Majestät besinnen sich vielleicht noch des Vorfalls (Sch.). 23. Ich hoffe mich lange seiner Bekanntschaft zu erfreuen. 24. Wir erinnern uns seiner recht gut (or wir erinnern uns an ihn recht gut). 25. Jetzt erinnere ich mich ganz genau der Umstände. 26. Ich erinnere mich, dass ich ilin dort gesehen habe (or ihn dort gesehen zu haben). 27. Du darfst dich deiner Wahl (or über deine Wahl) nicht schämen. 28. Er tröstet sich des Verlustes VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 161 seiner Mutter (or über den Verlust seiner Mutter). 29. Wie kann ein Mensch sich einer solchen Schandthat rühmen (or über eine solche Schandthat rüh- men)? 30. Ich rühme mich, ihn meinen Freund nennen zu dürfen. 31. Ich freue mich auf seinen Besuch. 32. Man soll sich nicht über den Schaden Anderer freuen. 33. Ich schäme mich wegen meiner Nachlässigkeit (or dass ich so nachlässig gewesen bin, or so nachlässig gewesen zu sein). LESSON XLVII. VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Dreiundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Ich danke Ihnen herzlichst für das Buch, welches Sie mir vorgestern geschickt haben. 2. Man kann nicht zweien (§ 101, Rem. 1) Herren dienen. 3. Ich habe der hispanischen Monarchie gedient, und der Republik Venedig, und dem Königreich Napoli (Sch.). 4. Diese Zeitwörter folgen in ihrer An- wendung dem Paradigma. 5. Diese Medizin hat ihm in seiner Krankheit nicht viel geholfen. 6. Der Knabe hat mir über den Strom geholfen. 7. Es mangelte ihm nicht an Ausdauer, sondern es mangelte ihm an Gesundheit und Kraft. 8. Als wir der Stadt naheten (or als wir uns der Stadt näherten), fing es plötzlich an zu regnen. 9. Dieser Rock passt Ihnen sehr gut. 10. Wie schmeckt Ihnen dieser Schweizer Käse ? 11. Die Suppe schmeckt nach Rauch. 12. Seine Art und Weise den Gegenstand zu behandeln scheint mir ganz meisterhaft. 13. Man kann ihm trauen ; er ist treuherzig. 14. Man sucht vergebens diesem Uebelstande abzuhelfen, so lange die Quelle des Uebels nicht verstopft ist. 15. Seine Aehnlichkeit mit seinem Bruder fiel mir sehr auf. 16. Das ist ein sehr auffallendes Gleichniss. 17. Ich bin Ihrem Bruder heute Morgen auf der Strasse begegnet. 18. Wir stimmten ihnen bei. 19. Der Dieb ist dem Polizeidiener entflohen, ehe man ihn ins Gefängniss brin- gen konnte. 20. Dem Tode kann man nicht entgehen. 21. Diese Insekten sind so klein, dass sie dem blossen Auge entgehen. 22. Die Unsrigen gingen dem Feinde muthig entgegen. 23. Oesterreich schien seinem Zerfall entge- genzugehen. 24. Er wird Ihnen auf dem halben Wege entgegenkommen. 25. Falsch ist der Inhalt, wenn er der Wirklichkeit widerspricht; wahr, wenn er ihr entspricht.. 26. Das erste Haus hat uns sehr gefallen, aber das zweite Haus gefällt uns gar nicht. 27. Man soll Gott mehr als dem Men- schen gehorchen. 28. Es ist ihm endlich gelungen, seinen vortrefflichen Plan durchzuführen. 29. Es gelang ihnen nur einen kleinen Theil der Häuser in dieser Strasse vor den Flammen zu retten. 30. Der Affe ahmt dem Men- schen nach. 31. Der Landschaftsmaler ahmt die Natur nach. 32. Dieser Maler eifert vergebens den grossen Künstlern des Mittelalters nach; aber er steht wirklich auch den Künstlern zweiten Ranges unseres Zeitalters bei weitern nach. 33. Dieses Wort kommt schon in der gothischen Sprache vor. 34. Das ist dir gewiss im Traume vorgekommen. 35. Das kommt mir sehr komisch vor (d. h. das scheint mir sehr komisch). 162 VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the govern- ment of the Dative Case by verbs, see § 179. Rem. In some cases, verbs that are transitive in English are rendered into German by intransitive verbs; by reason of this, the direct object of some En- glish verbs is made the indirect object of corresponding German verbs, as : Ich danke Ihnen, I thank you (or I am thankful to you). Kann id Ihnen dienen? Can I serve you (or be serviceable to you)? Er folgt ſeinem Bruder, He follows (or is a follower to his brother. Er half mir, He helped me (or was of help to me). Es (djadet ihm, It injures him (or is injurious to him). 2. Some personal verbs in English are rendered into Es wird ihm nidit gelingen, Es mangelt ihm an Nidits, Sámedt es Ihnen? He will not succeed in it. He lacks for nothing. Do you like (the taste of) it? 3. Upon a more intimate knowledge of the German language, it will be found that some verbs are used in of meaning that may be given to the same verb. Rem. 1. Various constructions with the same verb from the different dia- lects of Germany (23) have from time to time risen up into the language of literature ($ 86). Many constructions, that were formerly in common use, have now become antiquated ($ 11 and § 14). Rem. 2. The various constructions of some verbs may be illustrated by the examples of the use of the verb lohnen, to reward, that are given in senten- ces 7, 8, 9, and 10, in Exercise 94. 3. There are several examples in the German lan- guage of two nouns of analogous significations being followed by a verb in the singular number, as: Der Hander und Verkehr zwiſdien The traffic between Berlin and Ham- Berlin und Hamburg iſt ſehr burg is very active. Yebhaft, Seine Art und Weiſe den Gegen- His manner of treating the subject ſtand zu hehandeln, iſt zu loben, is to be praised. (fd habe es an Ort und Steule I have seen it in the place itself.) geſehen, VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 163 Vierundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Wilhelm hat mir den Brief gebracht. 2. Frau Reichenbach hat ihrer Nichte Schillers Gedichte als Weihnachts-Geschenk gegeben: 3. Unser lan- ger Aufenthalt in der Schweiz hat uns keine Zeit gelassen, um nach Italien zu gehen. 4. Die Handwerker liefern selten die Arbeit zur versprochenen Zeit. 5. Die russische Armee hat dem Feinde eine Schlacht geliefert. 6. Das Werk erscheint in monatlichen Lieferungen von je zehn Bogen. 7. Der Acker lohnt dem Landmann seinen Fleiss mit reichem Segen. 8. In Amerika lohnt (bezahlt) man die Arbeit besser als in Deutschland. 9. Das lohnt sich nicht für meine Mühe. 10. Es lohnt sich der Mühe nicht, dass man davon redet. 11. Mein Freund meldet mir in seinem Brief die Anlcunft meines Bruders in Wien. 12. Dieser Unfall hat ihin alle Hoffnung genommen. 13. Der Ta- schendieb hat mir das Portemonnaie genommen. 14. Der Arzt nahm ihm die Binde von den Augen. 15. Der Hauslcnecht hat Herrn Lippard eine goldene Uhr und 300 Thaler gestohlen. 16. Herr Siegel hat sein letztes Werk über die Geschichte der Insel Beroland seinem Grossvater gewidmet. 17. Der · Briefträger hat mir den Brief um 10 Uhr abgegeben. 18. Die Schrift lehrt uns, dem, der uns auf die rechte Wange einen Streich giebt, auch die andere darzubieten; während wir gewöhnlich ihm Gegenschläge anbieten, und, wenn wir starkc yenug dazu sind, auch verabreichen. 19. Man hat ihm den Dolch entrissen. 20. Ich fühle mich sehr krank; mir schwindelt. 21. Es ahnt mir, dass wir uns nie wieder sehen werden. 22. Es ist mir heute nicht wohl ; ich habe ein heftiges Kopfweh. 23. Wie geht es Ihnen hier in Berlin ? 24. Wie sitzt inir dieser Rockc ? 25. Es thut mir sehr leid, dass sie nicht länger in Berlin bleiben können. 26. Herr Prell hat seinen Bruder in der Germania Lebens-Versicherungs-Gesellschaft ($ 50, Rem. 3) versichert. 27. Ich ver- sichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung. LESSON XLVIII. THE PASSIVE VOICE. Fünfundneunzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Das Wetter wird ſehr heiß. 2. Das Wetter wurde ſehr heiß. 3. Das Wetter iſt ſehr heiß geworden. 4. Das Wetter wird heiß werden. 5. Das Haus wird jest gebaut. 6. Die Bücher werden gedrudt. 7. Die Büder wurden gedruckt, als wir in der Buchdruðerei waren. 8. Jetzt find die Bücher alle gedrudt. 9. Hier wird deutſch geſprochen. 10. Eine pradit- volle neue Kirde wird jeßt in Elmersdorf gebaut. 11. Das Neue Muſeum in Berlin wurde im Jahre 1853 vollendet. 12. 164 THE PASSIVE VOICE. Die Univerſität in Berlin wurde im Jahre 1809 gegründet. 13. 14. Alle kaiſerlidhjen Soldaten, welche dem pommerſchen landvolk in die Hände fielen, wurden ohne Barmherzigkeit ermordet. 15. 16. Die Feſtung iſt mit Sturm genommen worden. 17. Der Ges neral von Riegel iſt deß Hochverraths angeklagt, aber er iſt von der Anklage freigeſprochen worden. 18. Die Nachricht von dem Tode des Herrn Bindemann iſt ſeiner Frau noch nicht mitges theilt worden. 19. Wann wird das Werk vollendet werden? 20. Das Werk wird erſt riad; drei Jahren vollendet werden. 21. Johann Wolfgang von Göthe wurde am 28. Auguſt 1749 gebo- ren. 22. Joh. Chriſtoph Fried. v. Schiller wurde am 10. Novem- ber 1759 geboren. 23. Es wird jetzt ſehr viel geredet von einem neuen Handelsvertrage zwiſden dem Norddeutſden Bund und den Vereinigten Staaten. 24. Hier wird nicht geraucht. 25. Das Raudjen iſt hier nicht geſtattet. 26. Es wird jeßt im Saale ges ſungen. 27. Es wird ſchon gegeſſen. 28. Es wurde ihm vom Arzte nicht erlaubt, ins Zimmer, wo ſein Vater am Typhus dar- niederlag, hinein zu geben. 29. Man erlaubte ihm nidit, ins Zimmer hinein zu gehen. 30. Dieſes Räthſel löſt ſich ſehr leidyt (or iſt ſehr leicht zu löſen). 31. Das verſteht ſich. 32. Was iſt zu thun? 33. Das iſt nidit leicht zu ſagen. 34. Herr Prez- ler ſagt, daß dieſes Spital im vorigen Jahrhundert gegründet wurde. 35. Das Haus war ganz und gar abgebrannt. 1. For the chief rules concerning the use of the Pas- sive Voice, see 134; for the paradigm of the Passive Voice, see $ 161. Rem. As is indicated by the auxiliary werden (to become), the action is considered as becoming accomplished, that is, as taking place at the time al- luded to: Das Haus wird gebaut, 3; webout SThe house is becoming built, i. e. is being built. ***? (or) The house becomes built (or) is built. The house was becoming built, i.e. was being built. Das Haus wurde gebaut, utoe gevall, (or) The house became built (or) was built. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 165 2. The passive voice is much less employed in Ger- man than it ist in English: Rem. 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice of the verb (with mar as the nominative) is frequently employed : Man-fagt; man glaubt, [t is said; it is believed. Rem. 2. When the active agent is not specified, the reflexive form of the verb is frequently employed instead of the passive voice: Das erklärt ſid) ſehr leidyt, That is very easily explained. Das verſteht ſidy, That is a matter of course. Rem. 3. The infinitive of the passive voice in English is often translated into German by the infinitive of the active voice ($ 129, 3, Rem. 2): Was iſt zu thun? What is to be done? Das iſt leidyt zu verſtehen, That is easy to be understood. 3. The verbs that govern the dative case (8 179, 1), though intransitive in their nature, may still be used impersonally in the passive voice: Es wurde ihm erlaubt, He was permitted (it was permitted Gs wird ihm nidit geglaubt, He is not believed. [to him). Exercise 96. 1. The book is now being printed. 2. The houses of which he spoke are not yet finished; they are now being built. 3. The books which I bought are not bound; they are now being bound. 4. The University of Prague was founded in 1348. 5. The corner stone of the Cathedral of Cologne was laid in the year 1248. 6. These poems have never been translated into ins) English. 7. French and German are spoken here. 8. The fortification will probably be taken by storm. 9. America was discovered by Columbus in the year 1492. 10. Mr. Eberhard's design of the new bridge will prob- ably be accepted by the city authorities. 11. There is no smoking here (or smoking is not allowed here). 12. They are singing in the church. 13. We will not be permitted to see the engravings without permission from the Director of the Museum. 14. This question is very easy to solve. 15. The key has been found (reflex.). 166 CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. LESSON XLIX. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. Siebenundneuuzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Düſſeldorf liegt dies ſeit und Köln jenſeit des Rheing. 2. Herr Stolberg iſt Geſundheits halber nach Gaſtein gegangen. 3. Nürnberg hat innerhalb und außerhalb der Mauern viele ſtatt- liche Gebäude. 4. Worms liegt oberhalb und Bingen liegt unters halb der Bundesfeftung Mainz. 5. Längs des Mittelrheins ſtehen viele alte Burgen. 6. Wir hatten den ganzen Tag gejagt entlang des Waldgebirges (Sd.). 7. Laut früherer Verträge machte Friedrich der Große ſeine Anſprüche auf Schleſien geltend. 8. Dampfſchiffe werden jegt mittelſt (or vermittels) einer Schraube bewegt. 9. Anſtatt der Gänſekiele bedienen wir uns gegenwärtig meiſt der Stahlfedern. 10. Trotz des feindlichen Geſchüßes wußten ſich die Proviantſchiffe Bahn zu der Stadt zu machen. 11. Um des Friedens Willen hat er es nicht gethan. 12. Das Sternbild der Leier ſteht unfern (or unweit) der Milchſtraße. 13. Alle Körper ſtreben vermöge ihrer Schwere nadi dem Mittel- punkt der Erde. 14. Durch das Scherbengeridyt konnte Jemand auß Athen verbannt werden, unbeſchadet ſeines Vermögens und ſeiner Ehre. 15. Während meiner Krankheit hat Herr Kung mich öfters beſucht. 16. Die gepanzerten Schiffe ſind, ihrer Schwere wegen, nicht recht ſeetüchtig. 17. Zufolge gewagter Spekulationen iſt ſchon Mandher an den Bettelſtab gekommen. Onftatt der 10. Trotz DT der Stad angekommen. 19. Angeſichts der Gefahr wollte der Kapitän bei dem heftigen Sturm nicht abſegeln. 20. Das weiß ich ſelbſt aus Erfahrung. 21. Er war außer ſich vor Freude (he was besides himself for joy). 22. Binnen zwei Jahren wird das lieue Rathhaus vollendet werden. 23. Wir fuhren ſehr langſam, weil der Wind uns entgegen war. 24. Wir ſtanden mit Tages- anbruch auf. 25. Es geht nicht immer nach unſeren Wünſchen. ſub den Hunger nebſt ſeinem ganzen Gefolge fich nähern (Sc.). CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 167 28. Daß Schiff fammt ſeiner ganzen Mannſchaft und ladung wurde ein Raub der Wellen. 29. Wie lange ſind ($ 132, 2) Sie in Deutſchland ? 30. Wir ſind ſeit dem erſten April in Deutſchland. 31. Wilhelm Roth iſt klein von Geſtalt. 32. Heute habe ich das Muſeum zum erſten Mal beſucht. 33. Was er ſagt iſt der geſunden Vernunft zuwider. Grammatical. 1. The chief rules governing the use of Prepositions are given in $ 197–8 258. Achtundneunzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Von Ostern bis Pfingsten sind sieben Wochen. 2. Wir werden heute bis Prag reisen. 3. Ich halte Herrni Roth für einen Mann von Ehre. 4. Es waren gegen fünfhundert Personen in der Versammlung. 5. Es wa- ren sechszig Personen an Bord, ohne die Kinder. 6. Die Sonne geht jetzt um sechs Uhr auf. 7. Hier ist ein Gedicht an den Mond. 8. Herr Gellert, arbeitet jetzt an einer Geschichte seiner Vaterstadt. 9. Es waren an fünfhundert Menschen versammelt. 10. Ich erkannte ihn an der Stimme. 11. Ist Herr Cohn zu Hause? 12. Nein, er ist heute auf die Jagd gegangen. 13. Marie sitzt neben ihrer Schwester. 14. Hedwig hatte sich neben ihre Cousine gesetzt. 15. Heute über vierzehn Tage werden wir nach Dresden abreisen. 16. Der Brief ist über Triest und Wien gekommen. 17. Unter solchen Bedingungen kann ich natürlich das Amt nicht annehmen. 18. Sie weinte vor Freude. 19. Das Dampf- schiff wird wahrscheinlich heute Abend zwischen acht und neun Uhr ankommen. (Here may be translated the verses of poetry found under $ 197, Rem. 2; $ 199, Rem.; $ 200, Rem.; $ 235, Obs.; $ 243, Obs.; and $ 203, Obs.) 168 ADVERBS. —CONJUNCTIONS. LESSON L. ADVERBS.-CONJUNCTIONS.—ORDER OF WORDS. Neunundneunzigſte Aufgabe. 1. Die lerdye ſingt (djön ($ 181, 1). 2. Der Verfaſſer jenes Werkes hat den Gegenſtand ſehr wiſſenſchaftlich behandelt. 3. Der Kanarienvogel ſingt vier ſdönter ($ 190) als die Lerche. 4. In dieſem Wörterbuch iſt die Etymologic wiſſenſchaftlider behandelt als in jenem. 5. Unter ($ 257, Rem. 3) allen Sing- vögeln ſingt die Nadſtigall am ſchönſten. 6. „Mit Hodjadtung bin id; erge- benſt (or gehorſamſt) der Thrige.... Wilhelm Roth.“ 7. Dieſes Wörterbudy iſt vom Verfaffer völlig und aufs gewiſſenhafteſte umgearbeitet. 8. Idy weiß nidit, ob wir heute ins Muſeum gehen können, aber wir werden wenigſtens den Verſudy madjen. 9. Die Stadt hat jetzt mindeſtens 60,000 Einwohner. 10. Wann iſt Herr Lindemann zu ſpredjen? 11. Seine Sprechſtunde iſt von neun bis zehn Uhr des Morgens. 12. Wir wollten heute Vormittag ($ 177, Rem. 2) abreiſen, aber unglüdliderweiſe giebt es keinen Sdinellzug nac, Stuttgart vor drei Uhr des Nadımittags. 13. Vor zwölf Jahren waren wir in Berlin; das mals war die Ningmauer um die Stadt nod nidit niedergeriffen. 14. Sie wurde erſt im Jahre 1867 niedergeriſſen. 15. Die Palmen haben geringelte, bisweilen (or zuweilen) ſtachelidyte Schäfte ($ 188, 5). 16. Wir werden bei- ſpielsweiſe (or zum Beiſpiel) den Urſprung des Zeitwortes „ſein“ nadiſehen ($ 137). 17. Es fängt bereits (or ſdon) an zu regnen. 18. Iſt Herr Klein zurüdgefommen? 19. Ja, er iſt ſchon vorgeſtern zurückgekommen ($ 155,5). 20. Wo iſt Wilhelm? 21. Er iſt oben ($ 187, 1) in ſeinem Zimmer. 22. Er ſtürzte häuptlings die Treppe hinunter ($ 188,8). 23. Id glaube (dwerlid), daß wir die Zeit dazu haben werden. 24. Der Boden erhebt ſich hier ſtufen- weiſe ($ 188), bis daß er eine Höhe von 2500 Fuß über der Meeresfläche er- reidit. 25. Dies ſind größtentheils deutſdye Büdyer. 26. Herr J. F. Schmidt, hierſelbſt wohnhaft, von evangeliſder (or katholiſdier, or jüdiſder) Konfeſſion, - iſt wegen eines am 20. Juli verübten Diebſtahls ſtedbrieflid, verfolgt worden. 27. Er iſt durdjaus ($ 188, 9) Dafür ($ 189, 3, Rem. 1), daß wir vor Tagesan- brudy abreiſen ſollen. 28. Juskünftige (or ins Künftige, or von nun an) werden die Muſeen vier Tage der Wodie unentgeltlidy geöffnet ſein. 29. Von da an ging die Republik Venedig nad) und nach dem Verfall entgegen. 30. Vorwärts ($ 189, 2) mußt du (gehen), denn rücwärts kannſt du nidyt (Sd.). 31. Wer hat Ihnen geſagt, daß es vorgeſtern in Leipzig ſo ſtark geregnet hat? ($ 154, 2). 32. Das Dampffdiiff von Hamburg iſt erſt heute Morgen ($ 195, 2) angefoni- men. 33. Sie werden ja mit uns ins Concert gehen. 34. Sei er nodi jo ge- lehrt, dod, weiß er nicht Alles. 35. Sie haben wohl die Depeſden von Amerika in der heutigen Zeitung geleſen ? ORDER OF WORDS. 169 Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the use of Adverbs, see § 181-195. For the rules governing the use of Conjunctions, see $ 259–274. For the order of words in sentences, see $ 276-284.. • Hundertste Aufgabe. 1. Da ($ 260) er gestern nicht zu Hause war, habe ich es ihm erst heute Morgen sagen können. 2. Während Sie den Brief schreiben, werde ich ein- packen (or die Sachen in die Reisekoffer einpacken). 3. Da noch alles lag in weiter Ferne, Da hattest Du Entschluss und Muth; Und jetzt, da der Erfolg gesichert ist, Da ($ 195, 1, Rem.) fängst Du an zu zagen (Sch.). 4. Wie kann Herr Flint nach Italien gehen, ohne seine Frau mitzunehmen? 1, Rem.). 6. Von zwei bis sieben Uhr wurde der Sturm immer heftiger (§ 263, Rem.). 7. Wir hofften, dass mit Sonnenuntergang die See ruhiger werden würde (§ 263, 2), allein wir fanden uns getäuscht (§ 263, 2). 8. Da- gegen um 10 Uhr wurde die Gefahr so gross, dass der Hauptmann die Ret- çüngsboote mit Nahrungsmitteln versehen liess. 9. Er ist zu klug, als dass er an Gespenster glauben sollte ($ 266). 10. Wer soust ist Schuld, als Ihr in Wien? (Sch.) 11. Sei klug wie die Schlangen und ohne Falsch wie die Tauben. 12. Wir fahren zu Berg, Wir kommen wieder, Wenn der Kukuk 'ruft, Wenn erwachen die Lieder (Sch.). 13. Du sollst deinen Vater und deine Mutter ehren, auf dass du lange auf Erden lebest. 14. Er ist zu edelmüthig, um sich zu rächen. 15. Obgleich der Lehrer mit den Aufgaben der Schüler im Ganzen sehr zufrieden war, so war doch in einigen Aufgaben Manches zu tadeln. 16. Wenn Herr Stolberg auch sehr alt ist, so hat sein Geist dennoch die Frische der Jugend. 17. Der Schnee auf dem Gebirge fängt an zu schmelzen, daher werden die Flüsse im Thale wahrscheinlich bald anschwellen. 18. Es gefiel ihm nicht mehr unter den Menschen, daher (or deshalb, or deswegen) hat er sich in die Ein- samkeit zurückgezogen. 19. Er hat es selbst gethan, daher kann er Nie- mand als sich selbst tadeln. 20. Wilhelm ist wirklich für sein Alter sehr klug, übrigens ist er älter als man glauben würde. 21. Ich besuche ihn jetzt mehr als Freund, denn als Arzt. H 170 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. LESSON LI. IMPERATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND CONDITIONAL NOODS. Hundertunderſte Aufgabe. 1. Kellner, bringen Sie mir, ich bitte, noch eine Taſſe Kaffee. 2. Jemand klopft. 3. (Kommen Sie) herein! 4. (Idi) bitte, nehmen Sie Plaß! 5. Suchen Sie ein Buch aus, das Ihnen gefält. 6. Schweige (du) ſtill! 7. (Gieb) Ehre, dem Ehre ges bührt. 8. Vater Unſer! der du biſt im Himmel! 9. Geheiliget werde Dein Name! 10. Dein Reich komme! 11. Unſer täg- liches Brod gieb uns heute! 12. Und führe uns nicht in Ver- ſuchung! 13. Sondern erlöſe uns von dem Uebel! 14. Karl, bleibe du hier, bis ich wiederkomme. 15. Freue Dich nicht über Anderer Schaden. . 16. Mache die Thüre auf. 17. Kinder, (dyweigt (ihr) ſtill. 18. Jetzt gehe Jeder ſeines Weges (Sd.)! . 19. Bleiben wir hier, bis Heinridy die Bilets holt. 20. Du übernimmſt die ſpaniſden Regimenter, madiſt immer Anſtalt und biſt niemals fertig, und treiben ſie didy, gegen mich zu ziehn, To fagſt du Ja, und bleibſt gefeſſelt ſtehn (Sch.). 21. Die Trommel gerührt! 22. Sieh ins Budi binein ; nur nicht leſen, immer ſingen (G.). 23. Herr Lüdemann ſagt, daß die Armee idon in Bewegung. ſet. 24. Ich fragte Herrn Eberlein, wann er nad München abreiſen werde; er ſagte mir, daß er Morgen früh abreiſen wird. 25. Idy bezweifelte, daß ſie ſchon in Wien angekommen ſei. 26. Du ſollſt Deinen Vater und Deine Muts ter ehren, auf daß (§ 267, Rem. 4) du lange lebeft auf Erden. 27. Ich rathe dir, daß du fleißiger werdeſt. 28. Ach! wäre mein Bruder doch wieder geſund! 29. Mödyte er bald geneſen! 30. Was die heulende Tiefe da unten verhehle, das erzählt keine lebende, menſchliche Seele (Sd.). 31. Der Menſd erfährt, er ſei audy, wer er mag, ein legtes Glück und einen lezten Tag (G.). Grammatical. 1. For the general rules governing the use of the Imperative, the Conditional, and the Subjunctive Moods, see pages 294 and 295. CONDITIONAL MOODS. 171 · 2. One of the greatest difficulties which the English- speaking student encounters in learning the German language is in the use of the Moods of the verb. Rem. 1. The chief difficulty is in the use of the Subjunctive Mood. To the general principles laid down in § 124 there are many modifications and ex- ceptions that can not be introduced into an elementary grammar, as they would require too much space, and they would also only cause confusion in the mind of the student. Rem. 2. It will be noticed that the SubjunctiveMood is often used when the Indicative Mood would be employed in English. Rem. 3. It will be seen that the Potential Mood of the English verb is ren- dered into German partly by the Potential Verbs ($ 162), partly by the Con- ditional Mood ($ 125), and in some cases by the Subjunctive Mood ($ 124, 3, and Rem.). 3. The chief rules governing the position of words in sentences are given in § 276-284, $ 194, and $ 255. Rem. 1. In poetry and other dignified styles of composition, some varia- tions from these rules are allowable. Rem. 2. As the syntax of the High-German Language ($ 6) has only been established during the last one or two centuries, many variations from the laws at present prevailing in the arrangement of words are to be met with in Lu- ther's translation of the Bible and other works that date from the earlier pe- riods of the language. Hundertzweite Aufgabe. 1. Melde ihm die Nachricht, ehe er sie durch Andere erfahre. 2. Thut, als wenn Ihr zu Hause wäret. 3. Darum eben leiht er keinem, damit ($ 267) er stets zu geben habe (Less.). 4. Ziele gut, dass du den Apfel treffest (Sch.). 5. Bleibt nicht in England, dass der Britte nicht sein stolzes Herz an Eurem Unglück weide (Sch.). 6. Nimm dich in Acht, dass dich die Rache nicht verderbe (Sch.). 7. Willst du, dass alle Chefs zugegen seien ? (Sch.) 8. So willst du, dass es gleich vollzogen werde ? (Sch.) 9. Ich gebe nicht mein Ja dass es geschehe (G.). 10. Befiehl, dass man von Neuem untersuche. 11. Es war nicht zu erwarten, dass er so bald nach Hause kommen werde. 12, Darauf schrie er in die Gassen hinab, er sei der Bösewicht, der Maria fälsch. lich angeklagt habe, er sei ein falscher Zeuge (Sch.). 13. Auf die Versiche. rung der Regentin, dass die Provinzen einer vollkommenen Ruhe genössen, und von keiner Seite Widersetzung zu fürchten sei, liess der Herzog einige deutsche Regimenter auseinander gehen (Sch.). 14. Der Prinz von Oranien hatte die Vorsicht gebraucht, die Brücke abbrechen zu lassen, damit, wie er 172 CONDITIONAL MOODS. vorgab, die Calvinisten der Stadt nicht versucht werden möchten, sich zu dem Heere des Toulouse zu schlagen ; wahrscheinlich aber, damit die Katholiken den Niederländern nicht in den Rücken fielen, oder auch Lannoy, wenn er siegen würde, nicht in die Stadt eindränge (Sch.). 15. Herr Weber sieht aus, als ob er gar nicht wohl sei (274, Rem. 5). 16. Ich kann dir den Apfel nicht geben, indem ich ihn deinem Bruder versprochen habe ($ 274, Rem. 8). 17. Alle Nachrichten von der Sprache der Chinesen sagen, dass sie zur Ge- staltung dieses Volkes viel beigetragen habe. 18. Der Habsüchtige wird nie sagen, er habe genug. 19. Za spät wird er einsehen, er habe Unrecht gethan. 20. Manche Menschen handeln so, als ob sie nie sterben müssten. 21. Bei solchen Umständen würde ich es nicht thun (or thäte ich es nicht). 22. Das würde ich nicht gethan haben (or das hätte ich nicht gethan). 23. Wenn du fleissig wärest, würdest du Etwas lernen (or lerntest du Etwas). 24. Wenn du fleissiger gewesen wärest, würdest du mehr gelernt haben (or hättest du mehr gelernt). 25. Wenn mancher Mann wüsste, wer mancher Mann wär', thät' mancher Mann manchem Mann manchmal mehr Ehr'! 26. Hättest du von Menschen stets besser gedacht, du hättest auch besser gehandelt (or wenn du stets besser von Menschen gedacht hättest, so würdest du auch besser ge- handelt haben). 27. In seiner Lage hätte ich das Haus nicht gekauft. 28. Wenn mein Grossvater noch am Leben wäre, so würde er jetzt 90 Jahre alt sein. 29. Ich habe Herrn Gerold um Rath gefragt ($ 279, Rem. 1). 30. Ich frug Herrn Gerold um Rath. 31. Man hat den Kaufmann des Diebstahls angeklagt ($ 279, Rem. 2). 32. Um zehn Uhr des Abends kommt der Schnellzug von München ($ 280, 3). 33. Ich war zu sehr gewohnt, mich mit mir selbst zu beschäftigen, als dass ich mit Aufmerksamkeit hätte ein Kunst- werk betrachten können (282, Rem. 1). Part Second; CONTAINING FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS IN GERMAN AND ENGLISH; IDIOMS AND SYNONYMS; LETTERS AND FORMS OF BUSINESS; AND SELECTIONS FROM GERMAN LITERATURE. I. CONVERSATIONS. (Geſpräche.) Rem. These Conversations are arranged for the purpose of presenting the most familiar expressions and idioms of ordinary discourse. This neces- sitates, of course, frequent and abrupt interruptions in the connection of the sentences with each other. 1. Salutation, a visit. (Das Grüßen, ein Beſud.) Guten Morgen, Herr N. Good morning, Mr. N.! fd wünſdie Ihnen einenäguten’ Mor- I wish you a good morning, day, gen, Tag, Abend, eine gute Nadit, evening, a good night. Wie befinden Sie ſich ? 4 How do you do? Id befinde mich ſehr wohl, id) dankes I am very well, I thank you. Ihnen, Wie ſteht es mit? Threr Geſundheit? How is your health ? Sehr gut; ſo ziemlid); nid)t ſehr gut, Very well; pretty well; not very well. Sie ſehen wohl ans,8 You are looking well. Wie geht es fhrer Frau Gemahlin ? How is your wife? Seit einigen Tagen iſt ſie nidyt redit For some days she has not been very wohl, well. Das thut inirs ſehr leid, I am very sorry to hear that. Was fehlt ihr ? What is the matter with her ? Sie hat ſidyt ſtark erfältet, She has taken a heavy cold. Id hoffe, daß ſie bald wieder herges I hope that she will soon recover. ſtellt ſein wird, Ich danke Ihnen redit ſehr, I thank you very much. Wie befindet ſich Ihre Frau Mutter? How is your mother? Wie gewöhnlicy; fie muſio immer das As usual; she is still confined to her Zimmer hüten, room. Es (or man??) klingelt, klopft, Somebody is ringing, knocking. Gehe und Tiely, iver es iſt, Go and see who it is. Deffnen Sie die Thür, Open the door. Guten Morgen, Herr, Frau, Fräulein Good morning, Mr., Mrs., Miss Blankenhoff, Blankenhoff. Kommen Sie herein (treten Sie näher), Come in. Bitte, viehmen Sie Platz, Take a seat. Seßen Sie ſich gefälligſt auf das Please take a seat on the sofa. õopic, Sie laſſen ſich ſelten ſehen,12 You are quite a stranger. Idy bin lange verreiſt geweſen, I have been away a long time. 1 Lesson XI., $ 107. 4 L. $ 108. ? L. IX., $ $2. 10 L. XXXI. 2 L. XVI., $ 53. 5 L. IX., $ 32, 3, 2. 8 L. XXXIV. 11 $ 112, 6. 3 L. XXII., $ 88, 3. 6$ 144, 6. 9 L. XII. 12 L. XXIX. 176 CONVERSATIONS. Ich bin geſtern hier geweſen, um Ih I was here yesterday to call upon nen einen Beſudy abzuſtatten, or you. (um meine Aufwartung zu madjen), Ja, es thut mir leid, daß id) eben aus- Yes, I am sorry that I had just gone gegangen war, out. Nönnen Sie nicht heute bei uns zu Can you not stay and dine with us Mittag ſpeiſen ? to-day? Idy danke Ihnen herzlid), I thank you very much. Es iſt mir heute unmöglich, It is impossible for me to do so to-day. Meine Tante aus Breslau iſt jetzt bei My aunt from Breslau is visiting us uns zum Beſuch, now. . Kommen Sie bald wieder, Come again soon. Adieu ! Leben Sie wohl ! Good-by! (May you live well ! Kommen Sie glüdlich nach Hauſe, 6 May you get home safely. Auf Wiederſelen! Au revoir !) 2. At Breakfast in a Hotel. (Beim Früb ſt ü& in einem Gaſthof.) Guten Morgen, Herr Sranzler! Good morning, Mr. Kranzler! Haben Sie ſchon gefrülyſtüdt? Have you had breakfast ? Nod) nid)t ;8 id) komme, um mit Ihnen Not yet; I am coming to breakfast zu frühſtiden, with you. Haben Sie gut geſdılafen ? Did you sleep well last night ? Ganz gut, id) banke, Very well, I thank you. Der Stellner fommt gleid), The waiter will come soon. Er holt mir eine Taſſe Kaffee, He has gone to bring me a cup of coffee. WollenSie Staffee, Thee oderChocolade, Do you wish coffee, tea, or chocolate. Bitte, bringen Sie mir Staffee, Bring me some coffee, if you please. Was wünſden Sie nody !! What do you wish besides ? Bringen Sie mir zwei weid,20 gekodite You may bring me two soft-boiled eggs Eier und ein Falls-Cotelette, and a veal cutlet. Wie ſdymeckt Shuen der Kaffee? How do you find the coffee? Er11 iſt vortrefflid), It is excellent. Sellner, bringen Sie mir einen Eier- Waiter, bring me an omelet. fudien, Hier iſt die Mild) (der Zucker, die Sem- Here is the milk, sugar, rolls, biscuit, mel, der Zwieback, das Weißbrod, wheat bread, butter, and cheese. die Butter und der Käſe), Wünſden Sie nod) etwas? [Staffee, Do you wish any thing else? Bringen Sie mir noch eine Taſſe12 Bring me another cup of coffee. IL. III., $ 137. 4. L. XXXI. 78 157, 2, Rem. 3. 10 $ 184, 1. 28 150, 3. 5 L. IX., 1. 8. $ 194, 2, Renn. 31 L. VIII., 3. 3 L. VI., 5, Rem. L. IX., 4, 4. 9 $ 195, 4. 12 g 80, 1. CONVERSATIONS. 177 3. Dinner. (Das Mittageſſen.) Sie werden? Hoffentlich mit uns zu Will you not stay and dine with us? Mittag ſpeiſen? Um wie viel Uhr ſpeiſen Sie? In einer kleinen halben Stunde, In a little less than half an hour. Dinner is ready. Der Tiſdy iſt gebedt, The table is set. Das Eſſen iſt aufgetragen, The dinner is on the table. Gehen wir in? den Speiſe-Saal, We will go into the dining-room. Setzen Sie ſich gefälligſt dahin, Take a seat there if you please. Iſt Ihnend etwas Reisſuppe gefällig, Will you take some rice soup, or ober ziehen Sie Nudelſuppe vor? would you prefer some vermicelli soup? Ein wenig Nudelſuppe, wenn ich bitten A little vermicelli soup, if you please. darf, Darf id) Fhnen ein Stück von dieſem May I offer you a piece of this roast Rindfleiſch anbieten ? beef? Idy fürdyte, daß es fhnen nicht gar I fear that it is not done enough to genug iſt, suit you. Idi mags es nidit zu ſtark gekocht, I do not like it overdone. Bringen Sie mir ein Meſſer, das gut Bring me a knife that will cut. ſdyneidet, Give (Mr. N.) some bread. Wediſele die Teller, Change the plates. Nimm' dich in Adyt, du haſt Sauce Take care; ġou have spilt some gravy auf das Tiſdjtudy gegoſſen, on the table-cloth. Bringe mir eine Serviette, Bring me a napkin. [you? Was für Gemüſe iſt Ihnen gefällig? What kind of vegetables shall I give Befehlen Sie Kartoffeln (Erbſen, Bohu Shall I give you some potatoes (peas, nen, Zwiebeln, Nüben, Rohr, Rettig, beans, onions, turnips, beets, rad- Spinat)? ishes, spinage)? Darf id, um deit Senf (Pfeffer, Meer- I would thank you for the mustard rettig, Eſſig, das Salz, Del) bitten? (pepper, horseradish, vinegar, salt, oil). Sie haben nod; keinen Fiſdi gekoſtet, You have not tried any fish yet. Was ziehen Sie vor, 10 Lachs oder Hecht? Which do you prefer, some salmon or some trout? Nehmen Sie etwas Nehbraten (Ham- Will you have some venison (mutton, merfleiſd),12 Sdinken, Kalbsbraten, ham, roast veal, roast beef, par- Rinderbraten, Rebhühner - Paſtete, tridge pie, chicken pie) ? Hühner-Paſtete)? 1 L. XII. 1 L. XXXIII. 7 $ 145. 10 L. XXXIV. 2 L. VII., $ $3. 8 $144. 11 LI. : 38 96, 1. 9 L. VI. 5 L. XXXII. 6 $ 145, 178 CONVERSATIONS. Darf ich Ihnen etwas Reis-Pudding May I offer you some rice pudding, (Charlotte-Nuſſe, Kudjen) anbieten? Charlotte russe, cake? Wollen Sie dieſe Aepfel (Birnen) Will you try some of these apples, verfudien? pears? Bitte, bedienen Sie fidy Help yourself, if you please. Wollen Sie nod) etwas Brod? Will you take some more bread ? fd banke, No, I thank you. 4. In a Confectionery Shop. (In einer Konditorei.) Was iſt Ihnen gefällig, meine Herren? What will you have, gentlemen ? Haben Sie friſdie Erdbeeren? Have you fresh strawberries? fa, ſie ſind heute Morgen erſt gepflückt Yes, they were only picked this morn- worben, 3 ing. Bringen Sie uns brei PortionenErd- Bring us strawberries and cream for Beeren mit Sahne und drei Portio- three, and ice-cream for three. nien Gefrornes, Sellner, bringen Sie uns anſtatt drei Waiter, instead of three dishes of ice- Portionen Gefrornes, ein Gefrornes, cream, bring us one ice-cream, one ein Glast linionate und eine Taffet glass of lemonade, and one cup of Thee, tea. Sellner, haben Sie deutſche Zeitungen? Waiter, have you any German papers ? Ja, wir haben die National-Zeitung, Yes, we have the National Zeitung, die Nölniſdie Zeitung und die Augs- the Cologne Gazette, and the All- burger Allgemeine Zeitung, gemeine Zeitung of Augsburg. Haben Sie die Güte, mein Herr, mir Please be so kind, sir, as to give me dies Zeitung zu geben, nadidem Sie the paper, when you have finished ſie geleſen haben (werden), . reading it. 5. The Hotel (Der Gaſthof.) Können Sie uns einen guten Gaſthof Can you recommend to us a good ho- in Wien empfehlen? tel in Vienna ? Das Hotel zum Sdwarzen Adler" The hotel of the Black Eagle and und der „Bairiſde: Hofu ſind beide the Bairischer Hof are both very * ſehr gut und nid)t ſehr theuer, good, and are not very dear. .. Sie ſind nur fünf Minuten vom? They are only five minutes from the Bahnhof, railroad station. Die „Goldene Kronie" iſt etwas weiter The Golden Crown is somewhat far- entfernt, ther off. Wieviel koſtet es täglid, in der Golde- How much does it cost a day in the nen Krone ? Golden Crown? IL. XLVII., 1. 3 L. XLVIII., $ 161, 5L. IX., 1,.3, $ 82, 3. 7L.XVII. 2 $ 75, 4, Rem. 1. 4 L. XVI., 2, 1, $ 85. 6L. IX., 1, 2, Rem. 8 $ 112,8, Rem. 2. CONVERSATIONS. 179 Ungefähr drei Thaler, About three dollars. Was für? Zimmer wünſchen Sie ? What kind of rooms do you wish ? Wir wünſdien einen Saal mit zwei We wish a parlor with two bedrooms anſtoßenden Sdilafzimmern und opening into it, and two bedrooms zwei Schlafzimmer ohne Saal, without any parlor. Wir haben jetzt nur zwei Säle frei, je- We have now unoccupied only two der mit zwei Kabinetten, parlors, each with two small sleep- ing-rooms. In werdent Stock ? In which story? Einer iſt eine und der anderes iſt zwei One is in the second, the other is in reppet hod), the third story. Kellner, bringen Sie unſere Rechnung, Waiter, bring our account. Hier iſt ſie :* Here it is : Redynung für Herrn Erlanger. Zwei Zimmer nebſt Sabinetten, 4 Tage .................. Frühſtüc fitr 5 Perſonen....... Table d'hôte für 5 Perſonen.. 3 .......... Abendeſſen für 5 Perſonen..... 4 ........... 1 1 ... ... ... ... ... ... .. Bedienung ........... .. ......... Equipage (9 Stunden, 1 Thaler pro Stunde)... Fiafer (vom Bahnhof und nadh dem Bahnhof). Lidit............... Summa Thlr. 63 15 Hotel zur „Goldenen Krone“, Wien, den 14. September 1869. Bezahlung dankend empfangen. P. Schneider. 6. The Railroad. (Die Eiſenbahn.) Haben Sie einen Eiſenbahnfalhrplan ? Have you a railroad time-table ? Nein, aber hier iſt Hendſchell's Cours- No, but here is Hendschell's Railroad budy, woraus Sie Alles erſehen Guide, which tells all about the können, trains. Wiſſen? Sie, um wie viel Uhr der erſte Do you know at what hour the first Zug abgeht? train leaves ? Der erſte 311g geht um Halb ſieben The first train leaves at half past seven des Morgens,8 in the morning. Der nädyſte Zug iſt ein Schnell-Zug, The next train is an express train. Steigen wir ein, Let us get into the carriage. Es iſt keine Zeit zu verlieren, There is no time to lose. 1 $ 83, 2. 3$ 112, 1. 5 L. XXXVI. 7 L. XXVII. 2 $ 83,2. 4 L. VII., 3. 6 $ 107, Rem. 5. 8 $ 81, 2, 4. 180 CONVERSATIONS. Hier ſind wir ſdion am Bahnhofe, Here we are at the station. Holen Sie die Billets, id) werde für Get the tickets, I will look out for das Gepäck ſorgen, the baggage. Was koſtet ein Billet von Wien nady What is the price of a ticket from Prag? Vienna to Prague? Erſtel Klaffe. . . Thlr. 10 10 Sgt. First Class. . . . Thlr. 10 10 Sgr. zweite Plaſſe... 1 7 25 Second Class. ... 66 7 25 66 Dritte Klaſſe... 5 20 Third Class. ... 66 5 20 6 Laſſen wir geſdywind unſere Koffer Let us hurry and get our trunks reg- einſdyreiben, istered. Hier ſind die Gepäcſdjeine, Here are tickets for your baggage. Es wirda zum zweiten Mal geläutet, The second bell is ringing. Alles eingeſtiegen ? All aboard ? Dieſer Waggon hat fünf Coupés, This car has five coupés. In dieſem Coupé wirdnid)t geraudit, This is not a smoking coupé. Es wird? zur Abfahrt gepfiffen! There is the whistle for starting ! Wir fahren ſehr jdnell, We are going very fast. Wir haben ſchon drei Meilen zurüd- We have already gone twelve (En- gelegt, glish) miles. Um wie viel Uhr hält man an, uns 311 At what hour do we stop for break- frühſtücken? fast? Hier iſt die Frühſtü&ftation, Here we stop for breakfast. Wie lange hält der-Zug? How long does the train stop ? Zwanzig Minuten ; denn wir warten Twenty minutes ; for we wait here hier auf einen Zug von der Zweig for a train on the branch road. Bahn, [coming. Ich höre die Lokomotive pfeifen, I hear the whistle of the train that is Die Lokomotive ſteht auf einer Weidie, The locomotive is standing on a side Es ſind ſedis Geleiſe, There are six tracks. [track. Die Sdienen ſind mit Stahl belegt, The rails are covered with steel. Gehört dieſe Eiſenbahn dem Staate? Does this railroad belong to the state? Nein, ſie gehört einer Aktien-Geſell- No, it belongs to a stock company. ſchaft, Herr Braun iſt Aktionär? dieſer Ge- Mr. Brown is a shareholder in this felijdaft, company. 19. The Steamer. (Das Dampfſdy iff.) Wann geht das Dampfſdiiff von New- When does the steamer leave New York nad) Hamburg ab 28 York for IIamburg ? Jeden Sonnabend um 12 Uhr geht ein A steamer leaves every Saturday at Dampfſchiff ab,8 noon. • L. XXIII. 2 L. XLVIII. 3 $ 150, 3. 1 L. XXVIII. 5 L. XXIX. 6 L. XXIX. 7$ 55,3 8 L. XXXIV. CONVERSATIONS. 181 Wie lange dauert die Ueberfahrt? How long does the passage last? In der Regel jedizehn Tage, Usually sixteen days. Die Preiſe ſind : The prices are : Für die erſte Kajüte. . . Thlr. 150 · In the first cabin .... Thlr. 150 Für die zweite Kajüte. . Thlr. 90 In the second cabin . . Thlr. 90. zwiſchended ...... Thlr. 40 For deck-passage. . . . Thlr. 40 . Wie viel Gepäd kann man frei mit- How much baggage can one take free nehmen ?1 of charge? Drei Koffer, Three trunks. Die Beföſtigung iſt inbegriffen, You do not pay extra for your meals. Haben Sie viele? Paſſagiere? Have you many passengers ? Ein Theil der Fradyt iſt nody nid)t The freight is not yet all on board. geladen, Wann fahren Sie ab ? When do you start ? Mit der nädyſten? Fluth, At the next high tide... Um wie viel Uhr tritt die Flutly ein ?? At what time is high tide ? Mit Tagesanbruch. At daybreak. Die Ebbe iſt ſtarf, The tide is going out very strong. Wir fahren (dinell, We are going very fast. Wir werden4 nid)t ſo ſdynell fahren, We will not go so fast when we are wenn wir auf hoher See ſind, on the open ocean. Das Meer iſt ſehr ruhig, The ocean is very quiet. Das Meer iſt ſtirmiſdi, The ocean is stormy. Gehen wir auf das Verbeck, Let us go upon deck. Fďy werde die Seekrankheit bekommen, I shall be seasick if I stay any longer wenn ich längers in der Kajüte bleibe, in the cabin. Was inid, betrifft, id) vin nie ſeekrank, As for me, I am never seasick. Sie ſind ſehr glüdlich, You are very fortunate. Wie haben Sie die Nadit zugebrad)t? How did you pass the night ? Sdrecht genug, Badly enough. Die Maſdine hat mich gar nicht dila- I could not sleep at all on account of fen laſſen, the engine. Wie viele Knoten ſegeln wir in einer How many knots do we make an Stunde? hour? Frågen mir den Mann am Ruder, Let us ask the man at the helm. Man darf? mit ihm nidit ſpredjen, It is not permitted to speak with him. Id glaube die Küſte zu ſehen, I think I see the coast. Sie haben Nedit, You are right. Es ſind die Scilly-Inſeln, It is the Scilly Islands. Wir werden heute Abends den leudit- We shall see Land's End light-house thurm von Landsend ſehen, this evening. Morgen Abend kommen wir in South- To-morrow evening we shall arrive at ampton an, Southampton. i L. XXIV., 4. 2 $ 112,4. 9892. 4 L. VII. 5 $ 91. 6 Page 193. 7 L. XXXIII. 8 L. VII. · 182. CONVERSATIONS. 8. The Custom-house. (Das Zollamt.) Haben Sie etwas' Steuerpflichtiges ?? Have you any thing that is liable to duty ? Ich werde die Koffer aufmadjen, I will open the trunks. Adi, bitte, werfen Sie mir nicht Alles: Pray, do not turn every thing upside unter einander, down. Dieſe Bücher ſind ganz neu,“ nidyt These books are new, are they not? wahr ?5 Id) habe ſie für meinen Sohn gekauft, I bought them for my son. Das iſt einerlei,. das Geſetz iſt bes That makes no difference; the law is ſtimmt, explicit. Dieſen Tabak werde ich in Beſdrag I shall have to seize (attach) this to- nehmen müſſen, bacco. Bitte, Ihre Päſſe, meine Herren, Your passports, if you please, gentle- men. Hier ſind Empfangsſdeine dafür, Here are receipts for them. Der Polizeidiener wird ſie Ihnen Bal- The policeman will deliver them to bigſt nach Shrem Gaſthof bringen, you very soon at your hotel. 9. The Post-office. (Das Pofta mt.) iſt das Poſtamt weit von hier ? Is the Post-office far from here? Es iſt ganz in der Nähe, It is right near by. Sind Briefe für mid, angekommen ? Have any letters come for me? Wie iſt Ihr werther Name ? What name, if you please. Fdy erwartelo einige Briefel? poste I am expecting some letters poste restante,* restante.” d) winſdie einige Briefmarken, I wish some postage-stamps. Wann geht die Poſt nach Breslau ab ? When does the mail leave for Bres- | lau ? Der Brief iſt nocy nid)t geſiegelt, The letter is not sealed yet. Wo iſt der Siegellad ? Where is the sealing-wax? Hier iſt das Petſdjaft, Here is the seal. Ich habe die Adreſſe geſdrieben1,12 I have addressed the letter. Der Brief muß franfirt werden, The letter must be prepaid. Die Poſt iſt angekommen, aber die The mail has arrived, but the letters Briefe ſind noch nicht vertheilt, are not yet distributed * Letters addressed "poste restante”. are to remain in the post-office till called for. 1$ 112, Rem. 1. 4 L. XVIII., 1. 7 $ 188, 10, Rein. 1. 10 $ 155, 3. 2 § 89, Rem. 10. 5 Lit., not true?. 8 L. X., 1. 11 $74, 3, 4. 3 $ 111. 6 $ 103, 3. 9 $ 49, 3. .. 12 L. XX. Siccert. CONVERSATIONS. 183 10. At a Banker's. (Bei einem Banquier.) Wohnt hier Herr Neumann, der Ban- Does Mr. Neumann, the banker, re- quier ? side here? [room. Sie werden ihn im? Comptoir finden, You will find him in the counting- Darf id) fragen, mit wema id) die Ehre May I ask with whom I have the hon- habe zu ſpredjen ?3 or to speak ? Mein Name iſt Hildebrandt, My name is Hildebrandt. Idy binaus Wien, I am from Vienna. Id habe einen Empfehlungsbrief an I have a letter of introduction to you Sie von Herrns Kranzler, from Mr. Kranzler. Ich freue mich ſehr, Ihre Bekanntſdaft I am very glad to make your ac- zu madjen, quaintance. Herr Kranzler hat mir einen Wechſel Mr. Kranzler gave me a letter of credit auf Ihr Haus gegeben. 6 on your house. Der Wedſel iſt zahlbar nady Sidit,? The bill is payable at sight. Id werde ihn Ihnen ſofort in Banf-. I will pay it to you immediately in noten auszahlen, wenn es Ihnen8 paper money, if you desire it. redit iſt, Könnten Sie mir einen Theil davon' Could you give me a part of it in in Gold geben ? gold ? Sie könnten das Agio diskontiren, You could discount the premium (on the gold). Das iſt mir einerſei, 10 It is all the same to me. Iſt das Indoffement darauf ? Is it indorsed ? fa, er iſt auf meine. Ordre indoſfirt, Yes, it is indorsed to my order. Schön, hier ſind zwei Banknoten, jebell Very well; here are two bank-notes, von fünfhundert 2 Thalern, preußi- each of five hundred Prussian tha- des Courant, eine von tauſend, 12 lers, one of a thousand, a hundred einhundert12 Friedridjed’or, und der. Friedrichs d'ors, and the odd mon- Reſt in Silber und Kupfer, ey in silver and copper. . 11. In a Bookstore. (In einer Buchhandlung.) Haben Sie ein Verzeidiniß von Ihren Have you a catalogue of your books ? Büchern ?. Hier iſt eins, weldjes erſt vor einigen Here is one that was published only Tagen erſdienen iſt, a few days ago... Sie werden darin meine Verlagswerke You will find in it the books I pub- und eine Auswahl in- und auslän- lish, and a selection of German and diſder Werke finden, foreign books. 1 L. XI., 4. 2 $ 113, 1. 3 8 136. 4 $ 137. 5 $ 75, Rem. 1. 6 L. XXV., 2. 7$ 65, 2. 8 $ 107. 9 $ 189, 10, Rem. 1. 10 § 103, 3. 11 § 111. 12 $ 99. . FI 184 CONVERSATIONS. Wollen Sie mir gefälligſt die neueſten Will you please show me the latest Deutſchen Werke zeigen ? German books ? Hier iſt Mommſen's Römiſde Ge- Here is Mommsen's Roman History, dhidite, die zweite Auflage der the second edition of Schnaase's Stunſtgeſdichte von Sdnaaſe, die History of Art, the last edition of Letzte Ausgabe der Schiller’ſchen Schiller's poems. Gedidite, Haben Sie keine philoſophiſchen Werke? Have you no philosophical works? Sie ſtehen am Ende des Katalogs, They are at the end of the catalogue. Ich habe hier auf dieſem Tiſdie einige I have here on this table some very ſehr ſeltene Bücher aus zweiter rare second-hand books. Hand (or gebraudyte Bücher), Was koſtet dieſes Budy? What is the price of this book ? Das iſt ſehr theuer, That is very dear. Die Auflage iſt längſt ausverkauft, It has been out of print a long time. Haben Sie ein Antiquar - Eremplar Have you a second-hand copy of Des Grimm'den* Wörterbudes ?3 Grimm's Dictionary? Nein, aber ich habe Sander'8 deutſdjes No, but I have Sanders's German Dic- Wörterbudy, Lucas'4 Deutſch-engli- tionary, Lucas's German-English des und engliſch-Deutſches Wörters and English - German Dictionary, bud in vier Bänden, 8vo, und Mo in four volumes 8vo, and Mozin's zin's Deutſch-franzöſiſches Wörter- German-French Dictionary, also in buch, auch in vier Bänden, four volumes. Haben Sie eine Eiſenbahn-ſtarte von Have you a railroad map of Europe ? Europa? Hier iſt Hendſdell'8 Cours-Budh; es Here is Hendschell's Railroad Guide; enthält eine Reiſekarte von Europa, it contains a traveling Map of Eu- und Notizen über? ale Eiſenbahn- rope, and information about all the und Dampfſdriff-Linien, lines of railroads and steam-boats. Haben Sie Neiſehandbücher ? Have you guide-books ? Wir haben Bädeker'8 Führer durch We have Bädeker's Guide for Ger- Deutſchland, Frankreid), Italien und many, France, Italy, and England; England; ſie ſind wohl die beſten, they are the best. 12. At a Tailor's. (Bei einem Sdneider.) Was' iſt Ihnen gefällig, mein Herr ? What can I serve you with, sir ? Idy wünſde einen10 Rock, einen Frad, I wish a coat, a dress-coat, one silk einel. ſeidene Weſte, zweila Paar vest, two pair of pantaloons, and a Beinfleider, und einen Sommer- summer overcoat. Ueberrod, 1 L. XVIII. 4 L. XXXVII., 5. 7 $ 83, 1. 10 $ 54. 2 L. XXXVI. 58 74, 3, 3. 8 $ 92. 11 $ 98. 3 L. XXXVI. 6 $ 69, $ 80, 2. 9 $ 113. 12 $ 101. CONVERSATIONS. 185 Wollen? Sie einen vollſtändigen Anzug Do you wish a complete suit from this von dieſem Zeug? piece of cloth? Dieſes (dywarze Tuch (djeint kurz ge- This black cloth seems to be fine and doren und fein zu ſein, of a short nap. Es iſt auch ſehr Dauerhaft, 3 It is very durable also. Nehmen Sie mir das Maß zu Rod, Take my measure for a coat, panta- Hoſe, Weſte und Ueberrod, - loons, vest, and overcoat. Wünſden Sie ſie nach der neueſten Do you wish them in the latest fash- Mode? ion ? Mans madit die Taille ziemlich lang, The waist is made rather long, the die Sdjöße reiden faſt bis an die skirts reach almost to the knees, Kniee, die Xermel ſind ziemlich weit, the sleeves are made rather wide. Sammet-ftragen ſind jetzt ganz aug6 Velvet collars are now all out of der Mode, fashion. Probiren Sie den Rod an, Try the coat on. Er iſt zu eng unter? Den Armen, It is too tight under the arms. Das läßt' fidy leidyt ändern, That can be easily changed. Ich werde den Ueberrod auch anziehen, I will try on the overcoat also. Hann er zugeknöpft werden? Can it be buttoned ? Ziehen Sie façonirte oder glatte Muſter Do you prefer figured or plain pat- für die Weſte vor ? terns for the vest? Die ſeidene Beſte foli façonirt, die The silk vest may be figured, the Sammet-Weſte ſolº einfach ſein, velvet vest may be plain. Verbleidit dieſe Farbe nidyt ſehr ſdnell? Does not this color fade very easily? Ich kann fie als ädyt garantiren, I can warrant it not to fade. Wann wünſden Sie die Kleider ? When do you wish the clothes ? Mittwochio Morgen um zehn Uhr, denn Wednesday forenoon at ten o'clock, ich reiſe um zwörf Uhrı nach Wien for I leave for Vienna at noon. ab, Sie können ſich darauf verlaſſen, daß You may rely upon their all being Alles fertig ſein12 wird, ready. 13. In a Dry Goods Store. (In einem Iudladen.) Was für Seibenzeuge haben Sie? What kind of silks have you ? Wir haben Seide in allen Scattirun- We have silks of all colors. gen, Braudjen Sie Seide zu einem Kleide Do you wish silk for a dress or for a oder zu einem Mantel ? cloak ? Dieſe Farben find jetzt Mode, These colors are now in fashion. Das Muſter gefällt mir nicht, es iſt 311 I do not like that pattern; it is too punt, gaudy. i L. XXXII. 4 $ 107, Rem. 5. 7$ 82, 1. 10 L. XXIII., 3. ? L. IX., 1. 5 $ 112, 6. 8 144, 4. 11 Twelve o'clock. 3 $ 86, 2, 3. 68 82, 2. 9 L. XXXIII. 12 L. XXVIII. 186 CONVERSATIONS. Wie finden? Sie dieſe punktirte Seide? How do you like this spotted silk ? Idy ziehe dieſe geſtreifte vor, I prefer this striped piece. Wie breit iſt dieſer Atlas ? How wide is this satin ? Er iſt eine Elle breit, It is an ell wide. Sie werden mit aditzehn Ellen aus- Eighteen ells will be all you will need. reichen, Haben Sie aud) Futterſeide ? Have you also silk for lining? Wollen Sie cinen ſeidenen: Hut oder Do you wish a silk hat, or a straw einen Strohhut ? hat? Dieſes iſt die neueſte Mode, This is the latest fashion. Der Boden dieſes Hutes iſt zu klein, The crown of this bonnet is too small. Die Garnirung gefällt mir nidit, I do not like this trimming. Soll ich vielleicht anderes Band Shall I put another kind of ribbon on Darauft ſetzen ?5 it? Haben Sie Spitzenſchleier ? : Have you lace veils ? Ich habe weldje von Brüffeler Spißen, I have some of Brussels Lace that are die ausgezeidynet ſind, extremely fine. Hier ſind aud) Schleier von geſtidtem Here are also veils of embroidered Muſſelin, muslin. Ich wünſche ein Paar Glacéhand- I wish also a pair of kid gloves of the chuhe von der beſten Qualität, ein best quality, a paper of needles, Brief6 Nähnadeln, ein Brief Steck- a paper of pins, a dozen pocket- nadeln, ein Dubendo Taſdientider, handkerchiefs, a cravat, six pairs eine Kravatte, ſedye Paaro Strümpfe, of stockings, soap, a tooth-brush, Seife, eine Zahnbürſte, einen Negen- an umbrella, cloth for sheets, calico, ſchirm, Zeug zu Betttüdyern, Kat- a shawl. tun, einen Shawl, 14. At a Shoemaker's. (Bei einem Schub ma dher.) Haben Sie fertige Stiefeln? Have you ready-made boots ? Hier iſt ein Paar das Ihnen wohl Here is a pair that I think will fit paſſen wird,? you. Hier iſt der Stiefelknecht, Here is the boot-jack. Nehmen Sie lieber das Maß für ein I would rather have you take my neues Paar, measure for a new pair. Sie dürfen nicht zu eng ſein und die Do not make them too tight, nor the Abfäße nidht zu hod), heels too high. Wünſdyen Sie dicke Sohlen? Do you wish the soles thick ? Ja, und das Oberleber ziemlich ſtark, Yes, and the upper-leather rather heavy. i L. XXIV. 2 L. XXVII. 38 S6, 2, 2. 4 $ 158, 10, Rem. 1. 5 163. 6L. XVI., 2. 7 L. XII. 88 92. CONVERSATIONS. 187 Bis? wann können Sie mir ein Paar When can you make me a pair of Sdjuhe machen ? shoes? Sie können die Sdjuhe bis Morgen You can have the shoes by to-morrow Abend haben, evening. Die Schuhe briden mira die Zehen, These shoes pinch my toes. Machen Sie mir ein Paar Pantoffeln Make me also a pair of morocco slip- von Saffian, pers. 15. With a Physician. (Bei einem Arzte.) Haben Sie den Arzt rufen laſſen? Have you sent for the doctor ? Er wird ſogleid) kommen, He will come immediately. Worand leiden Sie? What is the matter with you? Idy jabe heftiges Kopfweh, I have a great headache. Mir iſt ganz ſdwindlid), I am very dizzy. Idy kann midi kaum aufe den Füßen I can hardly stand up. halten, Führen Sie Sdimerzen im Nücken? Do you feel pain in your back ? Laſſen Sie mid; die Zunge ſehen-ſie iſt Let me see your tongue—it is some- etwas belegt, what coated. Laſſen Sie mid) den Puls fühlen, Let me feel your pulse-it is quite Er iſt ziemlich ſtark und geldwind strong and rapidmis very flurried geht ſehr unruhig-Sie haben Fic- --you have a fever. ber, Halten Sie meine Krankheit für ge- Do you consider my sickness danger- fährlidi ? ous ? Nein, aber nehmen Sie ſicy in Adyt, No; but be very careful, lest it become daß ſie es nidyt werde, 6 so. Iď werde Funen Arznei verſdyreiben, I will write out a prescription for you. Bleiben Sie ruhig im Bett bis idy Keep quietly in bed till I come again. wiederkomme,? Wie haben Sie die Radit zugefradit? How have you passed the night? Idy habe etwas geſchlafen-(idy Habe I have slept some-(I did not close my fein Auge geſdroſſen), eyes). Haben Sie einen bitteren Gefdımac im Have you a bitter taste in your mouth? Munde? Idy habe ſtets einen bitteren Geſchmack My mouth is always bitter when I im Munde, wenn idy aufwadie, wake up. Das Fieber hat ſtark nadigelaſſen.-hat The fever has subsided a good deal- faſt aufgehört, has almost ceased. Idy Habe mid) ſehr erkältet, I have taken a bad cold. 1$ 237. 3 $ 188, 10, Rem.3. 5 L. XI., 4. 7 L. XXXIV., s. 2855, 1, Rem. 1. 4 § 246. 6 § 138. 8 L. XXVI. 188 CONVERSATIONS. Id habe Sdnupfen-id) habe Hals- I have a cold—I have a sore throat ſdmerzen—idy habe Augenleiden, -my eyes pain me. Es wäre gut ein Fußbad zu nehmen,' It would do you good to take a foot- bath. Er leidet? an Rheumatismus-an der He has the rheumatism—the gout. Gidit, Herr N. iſt an der Schwindſudyt ge- Mr. N. died of consumption-of ty- ſtorben, 3-am Typhus geſtorben, phus-fever. Herr M. iſt vom Sdilag gerithrt wor- Mr. M. has had a stroke of apo- - plexy. den, 16. At a Watchmaker's. (Bei einem uhrmader.) Hier iſt der Uhrmadjer8 Laden-gehen Here is the watchmaker's shop-let wir hinein, * us go in. Idy mödytes eine gute Uhr kaufen, I wish to buy a good watch. Wollen Sie eine Spindeluhr-eine Do you wish a lever watch, an an- Ankerulr-eine Cylinderuhr, mit chor watch, a cylinder watch, with compenſirter Bewegung? a compensation balance ? Ich wünſdie eine Nepitiruhr, I wish a repeating watch. Hier iſt eine aus einer der beſten Genfer Here is one from one of the best Ge- Fabriken, neva manufactories. Sie iſt zuº krein It is too small. Entiduldigen Sie, es iſt jetzt Mode, Excuse me, it is now the fashion to ſehr kleine Uhren zu tragen, wear very small watches. Das iſt mir gleidīgültig, id) wünſdje I do not care for that; I wish a larger eine größere,? one. Id werde dieſe neljmen, unter der I will take this one under the con- Bedingung, daß Sie für zwei Jahre dition that you will warrant it for garantiren, 8 two years. Meine Uhr geht nidt ridtig-gelt My watch does not go right-gains jeden Tag eine halbe Stunde vor half an hour every day—loses half eine Viertelſtunde nady, Id werde nachſehen,-e8 iſt etwas zer- I will look at it--something is broken Grodjen-id glaube die Kette iſt zer= —the chain is broken--the main- ſprengt-die Feder iſt gebrodjen, spring is broken. Sie muß reparirt (or ausgebeſſert) It must be repaired—be cleaned. werden—gereinigt werden, Bis wann können Sie die Uhr fertig When can you have the watch haben? ready? Bis morgen um neun Uhr Vormit- By nine o'clock to-morrow forenoon. tags, 1 L. XXIV. 3 L. XXVI. 5 L. XXXII. 7 $ 92. 2 144, 5. 4 $ 157, 1. Adverb. 8 $ 139, 3. an hour II. GERMAN AND ENGLISH IDIOMS. Rem. For the purpose of showing the difference between the idiomatic structure of the German and English languages more at length than was pos- sible in the lessons of part first, there are given below a few classified lists of such idioms as are in most common use in both languages. To correctly apprehend the idiomatic spirit of a language, it is necessary, in the first place, to have an accurate idea of the primary and fundamental signification of the words of the language ; secondly, to know the modifications of meaning to which the words have been subjected, and the figurative signi- fications in which they are employed; and, thirdly, to know how far expres- sions, phrases, and sentences (especially set phrases and proverbs) are ellip- tical. 1. Idioms with haben and to have. Id habe die Aufidit, morgen nadi I intend to start for Munich to-mor- Münden abzureiſen, row. Haben Sie Acht l or habe (du) Acht! Take care! look out! Das hat unſern Beifall, That meets our approval. Wir haben Nicht82 dagegen,3. We have no objection to that. Es hat große Eile, It admits of no delay. Es hat keinet Eile, There is no haste about it. Wir haben ihn ſehr gern, We like him very much. Sie haben gut ladjen, You may well laugh. Ich habe Durſt; ich habe Hunger, I am thirsty ; I am hungry. Haben Sie Langeweile ? Have you ennuie ? Er hat keine Luſt es zus thun, He has no desire to do that. Ich hätte Luſt es ihm zu ſagen, I should like to tell it to him. Morgenſtunde hat Gold im Munde Early to bed and early to rise, makes · (Spridywort), a man healthy, wealthy, and wise. Er hat Geld ſehr nöthig, He is hard pushed for money. Ich werde es thun, obwohl ich es nicht I will do it, although I am in no way nöthig habe, obliged to. Er hat keinen Nußen davon, He derives no advantage from it. Sie haben Recht, er hat Unredit, You are right; he is wrong. Das hat Nichts zu ſagen, That is of no consequence. Wer den Schaden hat, braucht für den He who loses may be sure of being Spott nid)t zu ſorgen (Spr.), laughed at in the bargain. Wer hat Sdyuld daran, daß der Brief Whose fault is it that the letter was nicht nadi der Poſt geſchickt wurde?8 not sent to the post-office ? Er hat keine Sduld daran, It is not his fault. 1$ 150, 3. 3$ 188, Rein. 1. 5 $ 127, Exc. 4. 2 $ 112, 9. 4 $ 112, 3. 6 $ 125. 8 $ 134. 104 Thund 78 268. 190 IDIOMS. * Wir haben keinen Umgang mit ihnen, We do not associate with them. . Sie haben die Wall, You may take your choice. Wir haben nidit weit nady Hauſe. We have not far to go home. Id muß heute viele Befüche niadjen, I have many visits to make to day. Ich werde Morgen nad) Dresden gehen I have to go to Dresden to morrow. müſſen, Ich habe fünf Briefe (dyreiben müſſen, I had to write five letters before I bevor id gehen konnte, could go. Id erhielt von meinem Bruder einen I had a letter from my brother this Wir werden vor Abend ein Gewitter We shall have a thunder-storm before bekommen, evening. Iďy habe es von ihm ſelbſt' gehört, I have this from his own mouth. Id Denket daran, mir einen Rock I am thinking of having a coat made. madien zu laſſen, Glaube mir, daß dein Wohl deinem Believe me, your father has your wel- Vater am Herzen liegt, fare at heart. Er weiß ſeine Aufgabe auswendig, He has his lesson by heart. An Freunden fehlt es ihm nicht, He has friends enough. 2. Idioms with ſein and to be. So viel an mir iſt, As far as is in my power. Der Mond war nocy nid)t auf, The moon had not yet risen. Das Fenſter iſt auf, The window is open. Mir iſt falt; mir iſt warm, I am cold; I am warm. Miro iſt nicht wohl, I do not feel well. Das Haus iſt mir nicht feil Cor Mein My house is not for sale. Haus iſt nicht zu verkaufen), Ich bin ihm Herzlid) gut, I love (or like) him very much. Ich bin der Meinung," I am of the opinion (or I think). Seien Sic (or Sei) gutes Muthes 18 Be of good courage (or cheer)! Ein Geduldiger iſt beſſer denn ein He that is slow to anger is better than Starker; und der ſeines Muthes the mighty; and he that ruleth his Herr iſt, denn der Städte gewinnet spirit, than he that taketh a city (Sprüdie 16, 32), (Proverbs XVI., 32). Mir war dabei nid)t wohl zu Muthe, My feelings upon that occasion were Wer iſt Schuld daran? Whose fault is it? [not agreeable. Er iſt nidit Sduld daran, It is not his fault. Wie viel ſind Sie ihm (duldig? How much do you owe him ? Ich bin ihm 500 Thaler (dyuldig, I owe him five hundred thalers. Sind Sie im Stande es ihin zu bezahlen? Are you able to pay him ? : Vorläufig bin id; es nidyt im Stande, At present I am not able to do it. Er iſt Willens etwas zu geben, He intends giving something. 1$ 58, 1. 3$ 108, Rem. 3. 5 $ 151, 1. 7$ 175, 1, Rem. 2. 28 162, Rc772. 2. 6 $ 179, 2, Rem.4. 8 $ 89, Rem. 1. IDIOMS. 191 Er iſt? (don angekommen, He has already arrived. Er war idyon angekommen, He had already arrived. Wenn er nur länger geblieben? wäre, If he only had remained longer. I was at the meeting, but I did not fd) wohnte der Verſammyung bei, see you, ſaly ſie aber nid)t. He is beside himself, Er iſt verrüdt.4 He is in love with her, Er iſt mit ihr verliebt.5 He is engaged to (be married to) her, Er iſt mit ihr verlovt. He is of a robust constitution Er iſt von ſtarkem Körperbau. I am out of that book at present, Idy habe das Buch augenblicklich nicht I have not that book at present, s vorräthig. He is not yet of age, Er iſt noch nicht mündig. To be sure, Das verſteht ſid). Let that be! Rühre das nidit an 16 3. Idioms with werden and to become. Wilhelm Nuhn iſt Arzt geworden, William Kuhn has become a physi- Sie wurde plötzlidy ſehr blaß, She suddenly turned very pale. [cian. Es wird bald Friede werden, We shall soon have peace. Das Gedränge? wurde zu groß, The crowd (press) became too great. Durdy Sdaben wird man klug, By experiencing evil one becomes wise. Die Tage werden länger, The days are becoming longer. Die Zeit wird mir lang, Time hangs heavy on my hands. Gott (prad) : 18 werde Licht ! und 18 God said, Let there be light, and thete ward Licht! was light. Sie wurde roth (or erröthete), She blushed. Der Nabe wird ſehr alt, The raven lives to a great age. Alſo ward der Menſd eine lebendige And man became a living soul (Gen. Seele (das Erſte Budy Moſe, 2, 7), II., 7). Fdh werde dwindlid; (idy dwindle, I am getting dizzy (I am dizzy). es fdwindelt mir, mir dwinbeit), Idy bin ſeines Schwabens überbrüſſig, I am tired of his chattering. Das iſt bei uns zum Spridjwort ge- That has become a proverb with us. worden, Der Baum iſt zu Stein geworden, The tree has become petrified. Das ſoll Dir zur Strafe werden, That shall be your punishment. Der Stranke wird wieder geſund, ' The patient is recovering. Was ſoll damit werden ? What shall be done with it? Wir werden morgen abreiſen, We shall leave to-morrow. Der Grundſtein der Kirche wird über- The corner-stone of the church will inorgen gelegt werden, be laid day after to-morrow. Eine neue Brüde wird iet gebaut, A new bridge is now being built. 1$ 135, 2. 2 $ 125, 2, Rem. 2. 38 150, 2. . +$ 154, Rem. 1. 5 $ 155. 6 $ 150, 2. 7 $ 66, 3. 8 $ 134. 192 IDIOMS. 4. The Potential Mood and Future Indicative of the English verb. We can go to-day, Wir können heute gehen. We can not go to-day, Heute können wir nidit gehen. We can go to-morrow, Wir werden morgen gehen fönnen." We could not go yesterday, Geſtern konnten wir nidyt gehen. We could have gone yesterday, Wir hättengeſtern gehen können. He may say what he will, Er mag ſagen, was er will.3 He may go, if he likes, Er kann gehen, wenn er will. He says that he can go to-day, Er ſagt, daß er heute gehen kann. He might go, if he would, Er könnte gehen, wenn er gehen wollte. (It) may be it will rain, Es könnte regnen (vielleicht wird es regnen). We must go early, that we may get Wir müſſen früh hingehen, damit wir a good place (or so as to get a good einen guten Platz bekommen. As fast as may be, [place), So geſchwind (or ſchnell) als möglich. If I may ask, Wenn ich fragen darf. We must go to-day, Wir müſſen heute gehen. We would have been obliged to go Wir hätten geſtern gehen müſſen. yesterday, We shall leave to-morrow, Wir werden morgen abreiſen. Shall you leave to-morrow? Yes. Werden Sie morgen abreiſen? Ja. Shall you be able to visit us to Wird es Ihnen möglidy ſein, uns mor- morrow? gen zu beſuchen? I hope I shall, Ich hoffe es, ja. Shall I bring the book ? Solls id das Buch holen? Shall he be rewarded ? Soll er belohnt werden? He should go immediately, Er ſollte gleid, gehen. Should he go immediately (or if he Sollte er gleich gehen (or wenn er gleich should go immediately), gehen ſollte). I should like to know, Id mödyte gern wiffen. I should not have done that, 3dwürde das nid)t gethan haben (or ich hätte das nid)t gethan). I will bring the book, Id werde das Buďy holen. I will try it, Idy will es verſudjen. I would go with you, if I had time, Ich würde mitgehen? (or ich ginge mit, wenn ich die Zeit dazu hätte (or hätte ich die Zeit dazu). I would not have given it to him, Idy würde es ihm nicht gegeben haben, (or ich hätte es ihm nicht gegeben), I would rather not go, Idy mödyte lieber nidit geben. Would that I had not done it! Wenn ich es nur nid)t gethan hätte! i $ 162, Rem. 2. 2 $ 124, 3. 3 $165. 4 $124. 5 $ 163. 6 $ 124, 3. 7 $125. 8 $ 125. IDIOMS. 193 5. Idioms with the verb laſſen, to leave, to let. Wer hat die Thüre offen gelaſſen? Who has left the door open ? Laß mich in Ruh'! Leave me alone! (leave me in peace!) Wo hat er das Budy gelaſſen ? Where did he put the book ? Er hat die Gelegenheit aus den Hän- He has let the opportunity slip. ben gelaſſen, Er ließt ſeinen Gefühlen freien Lauf, He gave free vent to his feelings. Er hat ſie gehen laſſen, He let them go. Idy werde es ihm wiſſen laſſen, I shall let him know it. Er wird ſich nidit davon abſdrecen He will not let himself be frightened laſſen, from it. Ich werde mir bei dem Schneider ei- I shall have the tailor make me a nen Rock machen laſſen, coat. Ich habe meinen Ueberroda ausbeſſern I have had my overcoat mended. laſſen, Er wird ein Haus bauen laſſen, He will have a house built. Der Hauptmann ließ die Fahne auf- The captain ordered the flag to be ziehen, raised. Er ließ die Anführer erſchießen,3 He ordered the leaders to be shot. Mein Bruder läßt Didy grüßen, My brother wishes to be remembered to you. Er ließ die alten Geſebet wieder in He had the old laws put in force Kraft treten, again. [that. Id laſſe mich nidit damittäuſchen. I do not let myself be deceived by Wir müſſen ihn nid)t warten laſſen, We must not keep him waiting. Das läßt ſich leicht begreifen, That can be easily imagined. Das läßt ſich denken, That can be imagined. Hieraus läßt ſid) folgern, From this may be deduced. Er mußte ſich die Beleidigung gefalen He had to put up with the offense. laffen, [hören, Es läßt ſidy hier Niemand ſehen und Nobody is to be seen or heard here. Es läßt fid; hier angenehm? leben, It is agreeable living here. 6. Idioms with the verb to get. I must get (procure) the book, Ich muß das Buch anſdjaffen. He could get (find) no employment Er konnte keine Beſchäftigunge in der in the city, Stadt finden. The cook has gone to the bakery to Der Mody iſt nach der Bäckerei gegan- get some bread, gen, um Brod zu holen. I shall get a new suit of clothes made, Id werde mir einen neuen Anzug ma- den laſſen. I must get my photograph taken, dy'muß midy photographiren laffen. 1$ 144, 4. 38 155, 3. 5$ 188, 10, Rem. 1. 78 174, 1. 4$ 57, 3, 1; $ 66, 3. 6 $ 120; $ 134, 2 8 8 57,2, 8; $ 65, 3. 2 8 58. 194 IDIOMS. I must get my hair cut, Ich muß mir das Haar ſchneiden laſſen. I must get my boots mended, Ich muß meine Stiefel repariren laſſen. He must get his lesson by heart, Er muß ſeine Aufgabe auswendig lernen. The cook is getting dinner (ready), Der Hoch bereitet das Mittageſſen. I must get ready for my journey, Ich muß mich für die Reiſe vorbereiten,' He has not got back yet, Er iſt noch nicht zurücgekommen, We shall get home before evening, Wir werden vor Abend nach Hauſe kom- Why don't you get married ? Warum heirathen Sie nicht? [men. They have not got (moved) into their Sie ſind noch nicht in ihr neues Haus new house yet, gezogen.2 He has got possession of the house, Er iſt in den Beſitz des Hauſes gelangt. They could not get the ship off, Man konnte das Schiff nicht wieder flott madjen. He got all the money out of him he Er erpreßte ihm ſo viel Geld als er nur could, and then he left him, konnte, und dann verließ er ihit. William is getting along well in his Wilhelm macht gute Fortſdritte in der studies, Sdule. Mr. Schmidt is getting along well in Herr Schmidt macht gute Geſchäfte. business, I could not get free from him, Ich konnte mich von ihm nicht losma- He has got out of debt, Er hat ſeine Schulden bezahlt. [chen. We can not get through here, Hier iſt kein Durdigang (or hier können wir nicht durchkommen). We did not get to the top of the Wir haben die Spiße des Berges nidit mountain, erreid)t. We did not get quite to the top of Wir ſind nicht ganz bis an die Spitze the mountain, des Berges hinaufgekommen.4 They got together at seven o'clock, Sie verſammelten ſich um ſieben Uhr. It is high time to get up, Es iſt die höchſtes Zeit aufzuſtehen. I can not get up there, Ich kann da nicht hinaufkommen. Get down from there immediately, Madh', daß du gleich herunteró kommſt. It is getting late, Es wird ſchon ſpät. The days are getting longer, Die Tage werden länger. 7. Idioms with prepositions. 1. Aus ($ 220), außer ($ 221). · Ich verlor? ihn aus den Augen, I lost sight of him. Aus ſeinem Briefe erſehe ich I perceive from his letter- Herr Braun iſt aus Berlin, Mr. Braun is from Berlin.' Er ſtammt aus einer alten Familie, 8 He comes from an old family. Sind dieſe Büder aus der zweiten Are these second-hand books ? Hand? 1$ 157, 2, Rem. 3. 2 g 144, 6. 3$ 165,5. 4 $ 157; $ 150, 3. 58 90. 68188, 7$ 144, 6. 8 $ 37. IDIOMS. 195 Aus welchem Grunde beweiſen Sie How do you prove that ? das? Er lebt aus der Hand in den Mund, He lives from hand to mouth. Das kann man natürlich nicht aus dem Of course one can not hold all the Mopfe ſagen, particulars of that in one's head. Man hat ihn aus bloßem Verdacht vers They arrested him upon mere sus- haftet, picion. Er hat es aus Vorſatz gethan, He did it intentionally. Das weiß ich aus Erfahrung, That I know by experience. Was wird aus ihm werden ? What will become of him? Ich bin begierig zu wiſſen, was aus I am curious to know how the matter der Sadie wird, will turn out. Da ward aus Morgen und Abend der And the evening and the morning erſte Tag (1. Moj. 1,5), were the first day (Gen. I., 5). Die Zeit iſt aus ($ 181, 1), The time is up. Trinke du es ganz aus, Drink it all up (down). Es iſt aus mit ihm, It is all over with him. [servative. Von Hauſe aus iſt era conſervativ, He is originally (and naturally) con- Er iſt außer ſid, vor Freude, He is beside himself from joy. Dieſes Wort iſt jetzt außer Gebrauch, This word is now obsolete. Er wird es nicht thun, außer (§ 260) He will not do it unless you speak to wenn Sie mit ihm darüber ſprechen, him about it. 2. Bis (§ 232). Bei Alle dem, iſt er ein Mann von For all that, he is a man of honor. Ehre, Beim erſten Anblic hätte ich nicht ge- At first sight, I would not have be- glaubt, lieved Es iſt nicht mehr Sitte bei uns, It is not the custom with us. [mans. Bei den Römern wurde es Sitte, It was custom with (among) the Ro- Herr Rahn iſt beim Effen (bei Tiſche), Mr. Rahn is at the table. Sie ſißt beim offenen Fenſter, She is sitting at an open window. Bei dieſer Gelegenheit, Upon this occasion. Bei Lebenszeit meines Vaters, During my father's life-time. 3. Mit ($ 227). Ich habe es mit eigenen Augen geſehen, I saw it with my own eyes. Er hat das Haus mit Baarem Gelde He paid for the house in cash. bezahlt, Er hat es mit Gewalt genommen, He took it by force. Mit einem Male ging es 108,7 All of a sudden it exploded. Ein Herr, mit Namen Foh. Schmidt, A man by the name of John Smith. Ich habe mit Rüđkehr der Poſt einen I received a letter from him by return Brief von ihm bekommen, mail. 1$ 92. 3854, 1, Rem. 2,3 58 68. 7152, 3. 2 $ 40,2 ; 840, 8, Rem. 4 8 125. 8 $ 155,1. 6$ 144, 2. 196 IDIOMS. Er hat es mit Vorſatz gethan, He did it designedly. Er hat es mit Leiſer Stimme geleſen, He read it in a low, soft voice. [about. Mit der Zeit pflüđt man Noſen, Time and patience bring every thing Die Nota wurde mit Proteſt zurück- The note was returned under protest. geſchickt, 8 Die fnſdrift iſt mit goldenen Buch: The inscription is written in golden ſtaben geſchrieben, letters. Wir gehen nach dem Muſeum; wollen We are going to the Museum ; will Sie mit? you go along ? Wollen Sie das Budy mit (fid)) neh- Will you take the book with you? men ? 4. Nad, (§ 228). Naďy gethaner Arbeit iſt gut ruhen, Sleep is sound when the work is [idjehen, done. Es ſoll ganz nach ihrem Belieben ge- It shall be done exactly as you desire. Es hat jetzt ſedhs Tage nad, einander It has now been raining six days in geregnet, succession. Im Jahre 18203 nach Chriſti Geburt, In the year of our Lord 1820. Das Kleid iſt nidyt nad meinem Ge- The dress is not to my taste. dimack, Das Obft wird in Deutſchland nady In Germany the fruit is sold by weight. dem Gewidyt verkauft, Nach meiner Uhr iſt es jetzt drei Vierteľ* By my watch it is now a quarter to auf Sedye, six. Das Dampfſchiff iſt nach Hamburg The steamer is bound for Hamburg. beſtimmt, Der Maler hat dieſes Landſchaft nach The painter drew this landscape from der Natur gezeichnet, nature. 5. Bon ($ 234). Herr Klein iſt ein Deutſcherº von Ge- Mr. Klein is a German by birth. burt, Was verlangen Sie von uns ? What do you ask (wish) of us ? Herr Roth iſt ein Arzt von Profeſſion, Mr. Roth is a physician by profession. Er iſt ein Mann von etwa fünfzig He is a man about fifty years old. Jahren, Von Herzens Grunde, From the bottom of my heart. Er wurde von ehrlichen Eltern ge- He was born of honest parents. boren, Er wurde von Allen geliebt, He was beloved by all. Er lebt von ſeinen Einkünften, He lives upon his income. Das war ſehr freundlich? von ihm, That was very kind in him. Es war ſehr Unredit von ihm daß, etc., It was very wrong in him that, etc. Wir wohnen zehn Meilen von hier, 8 We reside ten miles from here. 18 134; $ 161. 3899. 5 $ 111, 1. 7886, 2, 6. 28 118, 3: $166. 4$104, 2. 6$ 89, Rem. 10. 8 $256. IDIOMS. 197 6. Zu (§ 235). Wir werden, zum Beiſpiel We will, for example Heute wird in der Kirche eine Samm- A collection will be taken in the lung zum Beſten der Armen in der church to-day for the benefit of the Stadt gehalten, poor in the city. Es wird ihm nicht zur Ehre gereichen, It will not redound to his honor. Der Krieg wird bald zu Ende ſein, The war will soon be at an end. Zum erſten, zum andern,4 zum brit- Going, going, gone! (at an auction). ten (Mal)! Er ſah zum Fenſter hinaus, He was loking out of the window. Id habe das Tuch zu drei Thaler die I paid three thalers a yard for the Elle gekauft, cloth. [to ruins). Das Reich iſt zu Grunde gegangen, The empire has fallen to pieces (gone Hier iſt ein Muſikſtück zu vier Händen Here is a piece of music arranged for (or für vier Hände), four hands. Der Baumeiſter hat dieſes Haus zum The architect has taken this house Mobell genommen, for his model. Zurs felben Zeit, At the same tine. Eriſtzuni Hauptmann ernannt worden, 6 He has been appointed captain. Zu welchem Zwecke hat er bas gethan? For what purpose has he done that ? 7. Un (S 245). Wenn ich an Ihrer Stelle wäre, If I were in your place. An wem iſt es zu leſen? Whose turn is it to read ? Die Reihe iſt an mir, zu Veſen, It is my turn to read. Es iſt an Frieprid), It is Frederick's turn. Der Mann geht an Früđen, The man goes on crutches. Er ſikt am Fenſter,? He is sitting at the window. Es iſt nichts an der Sadie, There is nothing true in it. Eine Rede an den König, An address to the king. An und für ſid}, [weſend. In and of itself (per se). [sons present. Es waren an fünfhundert Perſonen an- There were toward five hundred per- Ich habe mich an ihn gewendet, . I applied to him. 8. Uuf ($ 246). Mein Bruder iſt auf der Fagd, My brother has gone hunting. Eine Antwort auf einen Brief, An answer to a letter. Sie war böfes auf ihn, She was angry at him. Er hat viel Geld auf Bücher gewandt, He has spent much money in books. Wilhelm geht auf den Markt, William is.going to market. Bis auf weiteren Befehr, (kent, Until further orders. Auf die Geſundheit einer Perſon trin- To drink to a person's health. Wir haben lange auf ihn gewartet, We have waited for him a long time. is 58. 38104. 5 $ 54, Rem. 2. 7$ 68, Exc. 2857, 29.8. 4 $ 192, Rem. 5. 6 $ 131, Rem. 3. 8 $ 258. 2 III. EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS.. 1. Ader, Feld, Land. Land bezeichnet einen Theil der Erde im Allgemeinen, im Gegenſatz gegen ſolche, die mit Waſſer bedeckt ſind, und ohne Rückſidit auf ſeinen wirthfdjaft- lichen Nußen (Feſtland, Grenzland, Sumpfland, Tiefland). Feld iſt Land, es mag gebaut ſein, Fridjteż tragen oder nid)t (Bradyfeld, Winterfeld, Weizen- feld). Ader Heiſt nur wirklich gebautes Feld (Haferacer, Aleeader, Kohl- ader, Kartoffelacer). 2. Atersmann, Landwirth, Bauer. Ein X&ersmann iſt derjenige, deffen Hauptgeſdhäft der Aderbau iſt, er mag itbrigens in der Stadt oder auf dem Lande wohnen. Landwirth und Bauer ſchließen nody das Merkmal ein, daß ein folder nicht in der Stadt, ſondern auf dem Lande wohne. Unter ſich ſind Landwirthe und Bauer darin verſchieden, daß, nach dem jetzigen Gebraud), das letztere Wort nicht bloß das Geſchäft, ſondern auch den Stand (in der bürgerlichen Geſellſchaft), das erſtere hingegen bloß das Gefdjäft anzeigt und den Stand gar nicht andeutet. Ein Edelmann, der ein freies Rittergut beſißt, auf demſelbeno lebt und es ſelbſt be- wirthſchaftet, iſt ein Landwirth; aber er iſt kein Bauer, denn er gehört nid)t zum Bauernſtande. (Maas.) 3. Aufſtehen, erſtehen, auferſtehen... Dieſe Wörter Heißen eigentlid): aus der liegenden oder ſigenden in die ſtehende falle aufſtehen, erſtehen, auferſtehen). Die Bewegung in die Höhe wird in a ufſtehen durch das Auf beſtimmt und unzweideutig bezeichnet. Er in er ſtehen früdt dieſelbe zwar auch aus, aber nad, einer unbeſtimmten Weiſe, denn Er kann auch Aus bedeuten (er wählen heißt auswählen). Hier- in liegt der Grund, warum man zu erſtehen, welches die frühere Form war, noch auf hinzuſetzte, um die Zweideutigkeit zu vermeiden, und auf dieſe Weiſe auferſtehen Hildete. Der nadifolgende Spradygebraud, beſtimmte dann dies ſen Ausbrud, vermuthlich weil er durch die größere Fülle mehr Feierliches 311 haben ſchien, inſonderheit fitr das Auferſtehen aus dem Grabe, und noch mehr das Hauptwort Auferſtehung, dergleidjen in dieſer Form von er- ſtehen wenig, und von A uffte hung gar nid)t gebraucht wird. (Er iſt von feinem Krankenlager gar nidt aufgeſtanden [or erſtanden). Seine Ajdje ruhet ſchon in der Erde und harret der Auferſtehung.) (Maas.) 1$ 54, Rem. 2. 38 151, 1. 5$ 86, 2. 7$ 57,2, 3. 2 $ 74, 3, 4. 4 $ 124, 6 L. XLIII, 3. 8852, 2, 8. EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. 199 4. Ausführen, vollbringen, vollführen, vollziehen, vollstrecken. Vollbringen bezieht sich' bloss auf die Handlung selbst, und heisst eigent- lich: etwas so weit bringen, bis es voll, vollständig, vollendet ist. (Die Erde vollbringt ihren Lauf um die Sonne in 365 Tagen und einigen Stunden.) Vollziehen ist von ausführen bloss dadurch? verschieden, dass es sich mehr auf das Ende der Handlung, ausführen mehr auf die ganze Handlụng, nach ihrem Anfange und Ende bezieht. Die Ausführung giebt dem Vorsatze seine Voll- durch die völlige Beendigung derselben. (Man ist schon seit langer Zeit mit der Ausführung des Entwurfs der Austrocknung der · pontinischen Sümpfe beschäftigt, aber noch immer von der Vollführung desselben weit entfernt.) Durch eine Handlung, welche einem Beschlusse, der auf einer Verabredung beruhet, seine Vollendung giebt, wird der Beschluss vollzogen. Dieser Be- schluss mag übrigens* ein Gesetz, oder eine Verordnung, oder ein Befehl, oder ein Urtheilsspruch sein. (Man vollzieht das Urtheil an einem Missethäter. Man klagt, dass die vielen Gesetze, Verordnungen und Befehle, die man in manchen Ländern giebt, nicht gehörig vollzogen werden.) Der Gebrauch von vollstreckcen ist so eingeschränkt, dass er eine unmittelbare Vollziehung bedeutet; so sagt man: einen Befehl, ein Urtheils vollstrecken; nicht aber: ein Gesetz, einen Vertrag, eine Eheverbindung vollstrecken. (Entwürfe werden ausgeführt. Gesetze, Beschlüsse und Urtheilssprüche werden voll- zogen, und diese letzteren nun, sofern es sogleich und unmittelbar geschieht, vollstreckt. Die vollziehende Gewalt thut also das, was die gesetzgebende und richterliche beschlossen? hat.) (Eberhard.) . 5. Meer, See. Die Wörter See und Meer werden zuförderſt beide dem ganzen Ocean, hiernädiſt aber audy bald das Eine oder das Andere, Bald beide zágreich ge- wiſſen beſonderen Theilent Deſſelben beigelegt. Der Grund von dieſer Ver- (diedenheit in der Benennung der Theile des Océans ſcheint offenbar keine an- bere zu ſein, als daß die Völkerſtämme, welche beide Wörter, See und Meer, hatten, die Gewäſſer, die ſie durch die lateiniſdjes oder daraus entſtandene Spra- chen kennen lernten, Meere, die anderen Völkerſtämme aber, weldie das Wort See hatten, ſowohl den Ocean als ſeine Theile See nannten. Ungeachtet jene alſo das Wort See hatten, ſo gebraudſten ſie dody das Wort Meer Bei Den Theilen des Oceans, deren Benennung ſie von den Römern entlehnten. Das wird dadurdy ganz augenſdyeinlich, daß einige Gewäſſer eine doppelte Bes nennung haben, eine römiſdhe und eine urſprünglidy Deutſdie. Die Nordſee 1 $ 159. 38 86,2, 4. 5$ 57, 3, 4. 78 114, 6. 2 $189, 1, Rem. 1. 48273.' 6 $ 111, 2, Rem. 3. 8848, Rem. 200 EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. heißt aud das Deutſche? Meer (mare Germanicum), und die Oſtſee bas Baltijdje? Meer (mare Balticum). Auch die Theile des Oceans, mit denen wir in der neueren Zeit durch die Engländer bekannt geworden ſind, werden See und nidit Meer genannt (wie die Südſee, die wir am beſten durd, Cook82 und Forſter8 Seereiſen kennen). Wenn der ganze Ocean beides, See und Meer genannt wird, ſo geſchieht das nach verſchiedenen Anſichten. See wird es nach ſeiner Materie, Meer nach ſeiner Form genannt. Die See iſt der Ocean, oder der Theil der Oberflädje der Erde, der nicht feſtes land iſt; das Meer, ſo fern es von dieſem feſten Lande eingeſchloſſen iſt. (Man ſagt:fee- wärts, entgegengeſegt von landwärts ; Seewind, entgegengeſetzt dem Landwind ; See madıt, Seefoldaten, See reiſen, Seeräuber, 2c., entgegengeſetzt der Landmacht, Landſoldaten, landreiſen, Räuber auf dem feſten lande, 2c. Eben ſo ſagt man Seewaſſer, See bäder,r 2C. ; hingegen ſagt man Meer buſen., Meer enge). (Eberhard.) 6. Naseweis, neugierig, vorwitzig. Der Naseweise verlangt etwas zu wissen, und fragt, um zu zeigen, dass er Verstand und Erfahrung genug4 besitzt, von einer Sache, die noch über seiner Sphäre ist, mitzusprechen. Man nennt Personen naseweis, und besonders kleine Knaben und Mädchen, wenn sie über viele Dinge urtheilen, die sie nicht verstehen, um ihren Witz und Verstand zu zeigen, insonderheit5 wenn sie durch ihre voreiligen Urtheile Personen, denen sie Achtung schuldige sind, beleidigen, oder sie durch ihre unbescheidenen Fragen in Verlegenheit setzen. Die Neugierde ist die leidenschaftliche Begierde eines Menschen, das Neue zu wissen, bloss weil es ihm neu ist; der Vorwitz ist die Begierde, das zu wissen und zu erfahren, was? er nicht wissen kann, und nicht zu erfahren suchen soll. Zu dem, was uns zu wissen vorenthalten ist, gehört besonders die entfernte und ungewisse Zukunft. Diese ist es gerade am meisten, welche den Vorwitz unwissender und schwacher Menschen reizt. (Eberhard.) 17. Mögen, wollen. Was wir thun, das müssen wir wollen, selbst alsdann, wenn wir es ungern thun. Sollen wir es so wollen, dass wir es gern thun, so muss es entweder gar nicht missfallen, oder doch in beträchtlichem Grade mehr wohlgefallen, als missfallen. So fern nun das, was wir wollen gefällt, so fern es uns Lust und Vergnügen macht, mögen wir es. So wie wir Manches wollen, was wir nicht möchten, wenn wir müssten, so mögen wir auch Manches, was wir nicht wollen. (Eberhard.) 1 L. XVIII, 3, Rem. 3 $ 114, 2. 5 $ 118, 12. 7 $ 114, 4, Rem. 2877. 48112, 5, Rem. 1. 6896, 1. . 8$ 124. , IV. LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 1. Ein Neffe meldet seinem Onkel den Todesfall seiner Schwester. Berlin, den 9. April 1869. Lieber Onkel. Eine ausserordentlich schmerzliche Begebenheit zwingt mich heute Dir zu schreiben. Nach neuntägigem schweren Leiden ist gestern meine liebe Schwester Adelheid am Typhus gestorben. Wie gross der Schmerz im Hause und die Theilnahme aller Bekannten ist, kannst Du Dir denken, da Du ja wohl weisst, wie sehr sie der Liebling aller derer war, mit denen sie in Berührung kam. Wenn ich mich auf diese kurze traurige Mittheilung beschränke, ohne irgend welche Nebenumstände zu erwähnen, so schreibe* das dem tiefen Schmerze zu, der mich bewegt. Alles Andere, so mittheilenswerth es auch sonst sein mag, erscheint mir diesem Ereignisse gegenüber bedeutungslos und unwesentlich. Mit herzlichem Gruss Dein treuer Neffe Gottfried Förster. 2. Glüdwunſdh zum Geburtstage eines Vaters. Hamburg, den 7. Juni 1869. Mein lieber Vater. Wie gerne wäre ich heute in der Mitte unſerer Familie, um Dir perſönlich meinen Glüdwunſdy barbringen zu können. Zum erſten Male iſt es mir ver- ſagt, den Feſttag mit Euch zu feiern, und es wird mir ganz weh zu Muthe, wenn ich daran denke. Möchte der ſchöne Tag noch recht oft wiederkehren und uns Ale um Dich vereinigt ſehen. Damit ich aber nicht ganz in dem heimiſden Kreiſe um den geſchutüdten Frühſtüdstiſdy mit der großen Geburtstagstorte fehle, º lo ſchicke ich Dir mein Bild, denn ich weiß ja dodi, daß Du midy ſelbſt -wenn es auch nur mein Bild iſt-lieber nimmſt, ars Alles, was ich Dir ſonſt (diden könnte. Vielleidht ſollte id; das nicht ſo grade herausſagen, aber warum benn am Ende nicht ehrlich ausſprechen, was man benft und fühlt. Der Tag iſt nodi kaum angebrochen. Allein ich wollte nicht ſchon geſtern dreiben, weil ich dann gar nicht ſo recht in Feſtſtimmung geweſen wäre. Jegt trage id den Brief gleich ſelbſt auf die Poſt, dann geht er mit dem Frühzug ab 1$ 127. 3$ 144,7. 58 107, Rem. 4. 2 8 135, 2. 78 157, 1. 88 282. 4 $ 151, 1. 6 $ 124. 202 LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. und kommt gerade an,' wenn Ihr Euch an den Frühſtücstiſdy ſetzt und Nachbar Schmidt nady gewohnter Weiſe zum Gratuliren berüberkommt. Wenn ich von der Poſt zurüc bin, dann werde ich mir ſelbſt in meinem Stitbden das alte Lied vorſingen, mit dem wir Gefdywiſter Dich jedes Jahr an Deinem Ehrentage aufgeweckt haben. Der Gedanke mag etwas zu kindiſdi3 für einen ſo großen Jungen ſein; aber es iſt gar ſo ſchön ſich in die Kinderjahre zurüđzudenken, namentlich an ſolchen heiteren Familiengedenktagen. Grüße Mutter und die Geldwiſter redt ſehr und ſeit ſelbſt herzlidy umarmt und geküßt von Deinem Sohne Dito. 3. Ceremonielle Form der Einladung. Herr und Madame Eberhard versichern Herrn und Madame Prenzler ihrer woch um 5 Uhr bei ihnen speisen zu wollen.5 4. Antwort auf dieselbe. Herr und Madame Pretzler beeilen sich, der ihnen so freundlich geworde- nen Einladung Folge zu leisten, und empfehlen sich Herrn und Madame Eberhard auf das Ergebenste. 5. Vertrauliche Form der Einladung. Lieber Herr Reichert. Wenn Sie nicht für Morgen Mittag bereits versagt sind, so sind Sie freund- lichst eingeladen, mit uns um 4 Uhr zu speisen. Herr Professor Bernhard und Dr. Runge haben uns versprochen zu kommen. Dr. Runge freut sich besonders darauf, Ihre Bekanntschaft zu machen. Sie sollten die Gelegen- heit nicht vorübergehen lassen, da er schon in drei Tagen nach Berlin zu- rückzukehren gedenkt. Mit freundschaftlichem Gruss Michaels Strasse No. 126. Ihr Mittwoch, den 6. October 1869. Joh. Wilh. Engelmann. 6. Antwort auf dieselbe. Lieber Herr Engelmann. Leider bin ich schon seit mehreren Tagen für morgen Mittag versagt, und kann daher Ihrer freundlichen Einladung nicht nachkommen, so sehr ich be- dauere, Dr. Runge nicht sehen zu können.8 Brandenburger Strasse No. 89. Mittwoch, den 6. October 1869. Fried. Wilh. Reichert. 1$ 150, 2. 3 $ 86, 2, 5. 78 179, 1. 2 $ 114, 2. 4 $161. 6875, Rem. 1. 8 $ 167. Thr LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 203 7. Höfliche Form der Einladung. Herr und Madame Dietrid, bitten Herrn und Madame Kieſewetter, gefälligſt nädyſten- Dienſtag um 6 Uhr bei ihnen ſpeiſen zu wollen, und empfehlen fidy Ihnen bei dieſer Gelegenheit auf& Freundlidyſte.? 8. Antwort auf dieſelbe. Herr und Madame Kieſewetter werden das Vergnügen haben, der Einladung: von Herrn und Madame Dietrid) Forge zu leiſten, und empfehlen ſich Ihnen freundſchaftlichft. 9. Wechselbrief. Gut für 1500 Thlr. Pr. Cour. An die Disconto-Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Nach Sicht, belieben Sie, auf diesen Prima-Wechsel, an Herrn Fr. Wilh. Lindemann die Summe von fünfzehnhundert Thaler, Preusisch Courant, auszuzahlen. Werth empfangen, den Sie in Rechnung stellen wollen laut Bericht. Joh. W. EITELBERG, Wien, den 12. August 1869. Banquier in Wien. 10. Anweiſung. Gut für 800 Thlr. In vier Monaten (oder auf Verlangen) verpflichte ich mid), an Herrn Karl Klein oder deffene Ordre, die Summe von achthundert Thaler, Preußiſcy Courant, auszuzahlen. Werth in Waaren (oder baar) empfangen. Friedrich Auguſt Stranic). Stuttgart, den 7. Dezember 1869. 11. Quittung. . 500 Thir. Empfangen? von Herrn L. Kraus, fünfhundert Thaler, Preußiſdi Courant, als Bezahlung in vol.8 Wilhelm Kraus. Gotha, den 4. Oktober 1869. 1$ 92. 3 $ 179, 2. 5$ 83, 4. 7$ 144, 4. 2 8 190, 2, 2. 48 179, 1. 68 111, 2. 8 $ 189, 12, Reno III. READING LESSONS. Die deutſdie Sprache. Die deutſche Spradhe iſt eine der älteſten, reinſten und gebildetſten unter den lebenden Sprachen. Ihre Bildungsgeſchichte umfaßt ungefähr zweitauſend Fahre.3 Sie iſt die urſprüngliche eines alten, in verſdjiedene Stämme* getheil- ten, großen Volkes, weldjes ſdjon ſehr früh auss ſeinen alten Wohnſigen in Hoch- aſien nach Europa wanderte, und beſonders beffen nördlichen und mittleren Theil bevölkerte. Der Name ,, Deutſdy" ſtammt nid)t von dem angeblidjen Gotte und Stammvater dieſes Volkes, Thuisko, ab, ſondern von dem gothiſchen Worte thiudu-altdeutſdy diot, diet—as heißt Volk, und bedeutet eigentlid): 13 u m Volke gehören du, dem Volke eigen". Unter dem Namen Germanen wurden? die Deutſchen zuerſt ben Nömern bekannt. Großen Einfluß auf die Deutſchentünd ihre Spradie hatte die Völkerwan- berung (375—500) und die Ausbreitung der dyriſtlidhen Religion. Der Biſchof Ulfilas (360—380) war der Erfinder oder Dody der Vervollkommner einer deutſden Budyſtabenſdrift, und Ueberſeper? der Bibel ins Gothiſche. Karl der Große (768–814) war ein thätiger Beförderer der deutſden Sprach- bildung. Unter den Hohenſtaufen erhob ſtd; die Alemaniſche oder Sdwäbiſdie Mundart (Mittelhochdeutſche Sprache), derens fich die Minneſänger Bedienten. Die proſaiſdje Spradie gewann an Ausdehnung, Neidythum und Regel- mäßigkeit durch den vergrößerten Wohlſtand der Städte und die erhöhte allges die Erridjtung der Univerſität zu Prag (1348), Wien, Heidelberg, Köln, 2c.; die Erfindung des Lumpenpapiers und der Bud)druckerkunſt (1446); die Er- oberung Konſtantinopels (1453); die Entſtehung der Zeitungen ; die Entdeckung von Amerika (1492); borzitglid, aber die Reformation (1500). Luther (1483-1546) Begründete durdy ſeine Bibelüberſetzung und durch ſeine übrigen Schriften, beſonders Predigten und Lieder, die heutige allgemeine Sdhriftſpraše unter dem Namen des Hoddeutſden (genauer Neuh o dh- Es ſind in dem langen Lebenslaufe unſerer Spradie vier Haupt-Epochen zu unterſd)eiden, in denen der Strom iſrer fortwährenden Veränderung füc eine Zeitlang gehemmt und ſie als Sdriftſprache zu mehr oder weniger feſter Geſtalt gediehen zu ſein (dyeint. Dieſe vier Epochen ſind : 1$ 100, 38 74, 3, 4, 1. 7 L. XXXVI., 6. 2 $ 91. 48 74, 3, 4, 1. 6 $ 151, 1. 8114, 2. 5 $ 220. READING LESSONS. 205 1. das Gothifde, bis zum 4. Jahrhundert unſerer Zeitrechnung; 2. Das Althochdeutſche, vom 7. bis zum 11. Jahrhundert; 3. das Mittelhochdeutſ dje, vom 12. bis zum 14. Jahrhundert ; 4. das Neuhoddeutſdye, ſeit dem Anfang des 16. Jahrhunderts ; be- ſonders vurdy Luther begründet, aber erſt mit dem Aufblühen unſerer neueren claſſiſchen Literatur, ſeit der Mitte des 18. Jahrhundert, allmälig zu ſeiner heutigen Geſtalt gediehen. (K. W. L. Heyſe, 1797–1855.) Der Straßenjunge. Ein Straßenjunge, der von einem andern eine Maulſdelle erhalten hatte, wurde gefragt, warumº er dieſelbe nicht zurückgegeben hätte. „Darum“, ant- wortete er, „weil ich dachte, wir wären unſer nur zwei, und dann würde die Neihe doc) gleich wieder an midja kommen." (Jul. Wilh. Zinkgref, 1591-1635.). Des Deutſchen Vaterland. Was iſt des Deutſchens Vaterland ? Iſt's Preußenland, iſt's Sdywabenland? 3ft's wo am Rhein die Rebe blüht? Iſt's wo am Belt die Möbe zieht ?? O neinnein ! nein! Sein Vaterland muß größer ſein. Was iſt des Deutſden Vaterland ? Iſt's Baierland, ift's Steierland ? Iſt's wo der Marſen Nind ſidy ſtredt ? Ift's wo der Märker Eiſen redt? nein l nein 1 nein! Sein Vaterland muß größere ſein. Was iſt des Deutſdien Vaterland ? ſt'8 Pommernland, Weſtfalenland? Iſt's wo der Sand der Dünen weht? 3ſt's wo die Donau brauſend geht? O neinl nein ! nein! Sein Vaterland muß größer ſein. 1$ 134; 161. 3 $ 125. 5 $ 89, Rem. 10. 79 144, 6. 28 113, 1, Rem. 2, 2. 1$ 107. 68 54, 1, Rem. 2, 1. 8891. on . 206 READING LESSONS. Was iſt des Deutſden Vaterland ? So nenne mir das große Land, Iſt's Land der Sdyweizer, iſt'8 Tyrol ? Das Land und Volk gefiel' mir wohl ; neinl nein ' nein ! Sein Vaterland muß größer ſein. Was iſt des Deutſden Vaterland ? So nennea mir das große Land I Gewiß iſt es das Deſterreich, Anu Ehren und an Siegen reich ? O nein ! nein I nein! Sein Vaterland muß größer ſein. Was iſt des Deutſchen Vaterland ? So nenne endlich mir das Land ! So weit die deutſde Zunge flingt, Und Goltz im Himmel Lieder ſingt, Das fous es ſein! Das, wacrer Deutſcher, nenne dein! Das iſt des Deutſchen Vaterland : Wo Eide idwört der Druck der Hand, Wo Treue hell vom Auge blitt, Und Liebe warm im Herzen ſitzt, Das ſoll es ſein! Das, wadrer Deutſcher, nenne dein! - Das ganze Deutſchland ſoll es ſein! O Gott I vom Himmel ſiehe darein! Und gieb uns rechten Deutſchen Muth, Daß wir es lieben treu und gut! Das ſoll es fein! Das ganze Deutſchland ſoll es ſein. (Ernſt Moritz Arndt, 1769—1860.) Der junge Muſiker. Eine Geſellſchaft von Spöttern wollte ſich über einen jungen Muſiker, der ihnen? vorſpielte, luſtig madjen und rief: „Er ſpielt ſo lieblid wie Orpheus \" „Fa", antwortete der Künſtler, „Darumo habe ich auch einen Haufen Bären und Panther um mich her." (I. W. Zintgref.) 1$ 144, 4. 38 245. 78 107. 2 144, 7. 4$ 74, 2, 4. 6$ 144, 2. 8 $ 188, 10, Rem. 1. 5 $ 163. READING LESSONS. 207 Der Bettler und Kaiſer Friedrich.. Als eines Tagesz zu Nürnberg ein Bettler zu Kaiſer Friedrid, kam und ihn um ein Almoſen anſprad); mit dem Zuſak, er wärekaiſerlicher MajeſtätBru- der, weil alle Menſden von einem Vater — dem Adam - abſtammten, alſo un- ter einander Brüder wären, ließ ihm der Kaiſer nid)t mehr als einen Kreuzer geben. Der Bettler wolltet ſidy beſdyweren, daß es für einen Saiſer zu wenig wäre. Alleins Friedridy wies ilyn mit den Worten ab :: „Wenn dir ein jeder Bruder ſo viel gibt, wirſt du reider ſein als id) ſelbſt." (I. W. Zinkgref.) „Beſfer etwas Sprach der Wolf, „denn nichts." Als er nad) einem Schafe fdnappte, Und dafür eine Müdt' ertappte. Mandyer könnt die Kappe ſparen: Man erkennt ihn ſo ſchon für einen Narren. . Ein Abenteuer. Wir belagerten, ich weiß nicht mehr, weldie Stadt. Dem Feldmarſdall war ganz erſtaunlich viel an genauer Kundſchaft gelegen, wie die Sachen in der Feſtung ſtünden. Es ſchien äußerſt ſdywer, ja faſt unmöglich, durd, alle Vor- Poſten, Wadien und Feſtungswerke hinein zu? gelangen. Vor Muth und Dienſteifer faſt ein wenig allzu raſd), ſtelle ich mich neben eine der größten Kanonen, die ſoeben nach der Feſtung abgefeuert ward,s und ſprang im Hui auf die Suger, in der Abſicht, mid) in die Feſtung hineintragen zu laſſen. Als ich aber halbwegs Surdy die Luft geritten war, ſtiegen mir allerlei nidt unerhebs liche Bedenklichkeiten zu Topfe. Hm! dachte idy, hineinkommen kannſt du nun wohl, allein wie hernach ſogleid) wieder heraus? Und wie kann dir’s in der Feſtung ergehen? Man wird sich ſogleich als Spion erkennen und an den nächſten Galgen hängen! • Ein ſolches Bette der Ehre wollte ich mir denn doch wohl verbitten. Rady dieſen und ähnlichen Betrachtungen entſdyloß icy mid; kurz, nahm die glüdlidje Gelegenheit wahr, als eine Kanonenkugel aus der Feſtung einige Schritt von mir vorüber nach unſerem Lager flog, 10 ſprang?? von der meinigen auf dieſe hinüber, und kam 2 zwar unverriditeter Sache, jedoch wohlbehalten bei den lie- ben Unſrigen wieder an.. (Baron von Mündyhauſen, 1720—97.) · L. III., $137. 4 L. XXXI. 7$ 127, Exc. 4. 10 L. XXX. 2 $ 124. 6 L. IX., 1. 11 $ 157, 1. 3 L.VI., 5. Rem. 6L. IX., 4, 4. 9$ 144, 4. 12 8 80, 1. 8 $ 138. 208 READING LESSONS. Die Hunnen. Der Geschichtschreiber Ammianus Marcellinus (A.D. 410) macht von den Hunnen folgende Beschreibung: “Sie sind bartlos und hässlich von An- gesicht, scheusslich von Gestalt und krummbeinig. Sie bedürfen keines Feuers noch schmackhafter Speisen ; ihre Nahrung besteht aus Wurzeln von Kräutern des Feldes und halbrohem Fleische von jedwedem Vieh. Häuser haben sie nicht und meiden sie wie die Gräber, selbst Hütten von Rohr findet man bei ihnen nicht. Unstät durch Gebirg und Wald umberstreifend, lernen sie von Kindheit an, Hunger und Durst und den Wechsel der Wit- terung ertragen. Ihre Kleider sind von Leinwand, oder aus Fellen von kleinem Wild zusammengenähet.2 Mit gebogenen Mützen decken sie den Kopf, mit Bocksfellen den Körper, ihre unförmlichen Schuhe hindern sie an freiem Gang, desshalb sind sie zu Fussmärschen untüchtig. Aber auf ihren Pferden, die zwar hässlich, jedoch dauerhaft sind, hangen' sie wie angewach- sen und verrichten auf denselben ihre gewöhnlichen Geschäfte. Bei Tag und Nacht ist jeder zu Pferde, kauft und verkauft, isst und trinkt und schläft auf den Nacken des Thieres gelehnt. Zu Pferde halten sie die Versamm- lungen und Berathungen. Kein strenges Herrscherthum fesselt sie; sie folgen ihren Häuptlingen ohne festes Band. In den Kampf gehen sie keil- förmig geordnet und mit grässlich lautem Geschrei. Gewandt und behende wie sie sind, sprengen sie dann absichtlich mit einem Male auseinander und zerstreuen sich zu wüstem Morden. Aus der Ferne kämpfen sie mit Wurfspeeren, deren Spitzen künstlich aus scharfen Knochen gefertigt sind, in der Nähe mit dem Schwert. Pflüge haben sie nicht. Ohne Hof und Herd, ohne festen Sitz und Gesetz schwei- fen sie unstät gleich Flüchtlingen mit ihren Wagen umher; dies sind ihre Wohnungen, wo sich ihre Weiber und Kinder befinden, bis sie erwachsen sind. Anderswo geboren, in fernen Landen aufgezogen, weiss keiner anzu- geben, woher er stammt. Treulos, wankelmüthig, jeder neuen Hoffnung? hingegeben, folgen sie ganz dem Drang des Triebes. Wie das unvernünftige Vieh kennen sie keinen Unterschied zwischen Tugend und Laster. Von Glauben und Religion haben sie keinen Begriff. Nach Geld sind sie so aus- nehmend lüstern und so leicht gereizt, dass sie wohl mehrmals an demselben Tage sich entzweien und wieder versöhnen. (Weber's Weltgeschichte.) Wenn's nicht geht, wie man will, Muß man thun wie man kann. 3 L. XXXIII. 5 $ 157, 1. 4 L. XXXII. 6$ 112, 8. IL. XII. 2 L. VII., $ 83. 7 L. XXXIV. 8 $ 158 READING LESSONS. 209 Eintritt in die deutſche Schweiz. Freiert athmet (djon die Bruſt, Höher ſchlägt einſame Luſt, Friede iſt es, was hier weht, Sanft zu innerm Herzen geht, Daß kein Schmerz da nimmer ſtürmt. Wie fid Berg auf Berg anthürmt, Hohes Schweigen uns ergreiſt, 3 Wildes Streben nid)t mehr (djweift. Hier auf ſtiller Alpenhöh',4 Wo der fernen Gipfel Schnee, So die Wolken golden malt, Ernſt zu uns hernieder ſtrahlt. Selig, 5 wer da Hütten baut, Einfam der Natur vertraut, Der Erinnerung nur lebt, Ganz ſich ſelbſt in fie vergräbt; Einzig auf das Lied nur denkt, Das ihm Gott ins Herz geſenkt; Der den Dichter auserkor, Daß er bricht an'& Licht hervore Alten Heldengeiſtes? Spur ! Stiller Schönheit Blumenflor, Fern von jener wüſten Welt, Die uns Al' in Feffeln hält. Möchte ich einſt ſo glüdlich ſein, Solchen Friedens mid) zu freu'n ; Dieſer ſchönen Berge Höh'n Noch als Heimath wiederſehn. (Friedrich von Schlegel, 1772–1829.) Johann Wolfgang von Goethe. Joh. Wolf. von Göthe wurde geboren den 28. August 1749 zu Frankfurt am Main, woselbst sein Vater kaiserlicher Rath war. Im Jahre 1765 ging er nach Leipzig, wo er die Rechte studiren sollte, sich aber am meisten mit Dichtkunst beschäftigte, und auch Versuche im Kupferstechen machte. Von 1768 lebte er wieder in Frankfurt und studirte chemische Werke. Im 19 184, 1. 28 92. 3 $ 155, 3. 4 $ 57, 2, 1. 5 L. XVIII. 6 157, 1. 758, 1. 8 124, 3. 210 READING LESSONS. Jahre 1770 bezog er die Universität Strassburg, dort lernte er Herder ken- nen' und ward Doktor der Rechte. In das väterliche Haus zurückgekehrt, waren Shakspeare's—des grossen englischen Dramatikers-Werke Gegen- stand seiner eifrigsten Studien. Im Jahre 1773 schrieb er das Schauspiel “Götz von Berlichingen," und 1774 den Roman: “Leiden des jungen Werther." Beide Werke begründeten des Dichters? Ruf. Im Jahre 1776 ernannte ihn der Herzog Karl August von Weimar, mit dem er persönlich bekannt geworden, zum Legations-Rath. Der Aufenthalt in Weimar, dem Mittelpunkt der deutschen Dichtkunst, hatte auf sein Leben und dichterisches Wirken den entschiedensten Einfluss. Im Jahre 1786 reiste er nach Italien, wo er zwei Jahre verweilte und sich meistens in Rom aufhielt. Während dieser Zeit schrieb er seine vollendetsten dramatischen Werke: “Iphigenie in Tauris”—“Egmont"-"Torquato Tasso.” Im Jahre 1792 machte er mit dem Herzoge von Weimar im preussischen Heere den Feldzug gegen die Franzosen mit. Um sich ganz der Poesie und Wissenschaft widmen zu können, liess er sich seines Staatsdienstes entheben, doch wurde er später zum ersten Minister (Minister-Präsident) in Weimar ernannt. Nach dem Tode des Herzogs im Jahre 1826 zog er sich zurück. Göthe gilt als Haupt-Representant unserer zweiten classischen Periode. Er ist einer der grössten deutschen Dichter, wenn nicht der grösste. In fast allen Zweigen der Dichtkunst hat er das ausgezeichnetste geleistet. Er ist gross in jeder Gattung, am grössten aber in Drama und Roman. Seine Tragödien: “Götz von Berlichingen," "Egmont," “ Iphigenie in Tauris," “Tasso," etc., werden allgemein bewundert. Seine Tragödie "Faust" aber ist als sein höchstes Werk in der Poesie, als die Krone seiner Dichtungen betrachtet. Seine Lieder, Elegien, Balladen, gelten als Muster. Grosses? leistete er im Epos durch eine Bearbeitung des "Reineke Fuchs' und durch “Hermann und Dorothea," im Roman durch“Werthers Leiden," " Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre,” und “Wilhelm Meisters Wanderjahre."? Bis zu seinem Tode hatte er sich einer8 ungewöhnlichen geistigen Frische, der vollkommensten Gesundheit und der heitersten Gemüthsstimmung zu erfreuen. Er starb nach kurzem und schmerzlosem Krankenlager am 22. März 1833, fast vom ganzen Volke als der " deutsche Dichterfürst” verehrt, von etlichen angefeindet, von mehreren zum Gott gemacht. (Davin.) Hans ohne Fleiß Wird nimmer weiß'. Ein Worf im Schlaf Fängt nie ein Sdyaf. 18144, 7. 3 $ 75, 1, 1. 2874, 1, 1, 1. 4 $ 267, Rem. 6. 5$ 144, 6. 6 $ 93, Rem. 2. 78 89, Rem. 10. 88 88, 3. , READING LESSONS. : 211 Des Königs Grab. Die Weſtgothen wollten durch Italien nach Afrika wandern, unterwegse ſtar) plötzlich Alarich, ihr König, den ſie über die Maße liebten. Da huben ſie an,” und leiteten den Fluß Barent, der neben der Stadt Coſentia vom Fuße des Berges fließt, aus ſeinem Bette ab.3 Mitten in dem Bett ließen ſie nun durdy einen Haufen Gefangener ein Grab graben, und in den Sdioß der Grube be- ſtatteten ſie, nebſt* vielen Koſtbarkeiten, ihren König Alarid). Wie das geſdielyen war, leiteten ſie das Waſſer wieder ins alte Bette zurück, und tödteten, damit die Stätte von niemand verrathen würde, alle die, weldhe das Grab gegraben hatten. (Sage, von den Brüdern Grimm.) Aufruf des Königs von Preussen. An mein Volk. . So wenig für mein treues Volk als für Deutsche bedarf es einer Rechen- schaft über die Ursachen des Kriegs, welcher jetzt beginnt: klar liegen sie dem unverblendeten Europa vor Augen. Wir erlagens unter der Uebermacht Frankreichs. Der Friede, der die Hälfte meiner Unterthanen mir entriss, gab uns seine Segnungen nicht, denn er schlug uns tiefere Wunden, als selbst der Krieg. Das Mark des Landes ward ausgesogen. Die Hauptfestungen blieben vom Feinde besetzt, der Ackerbau ward geläbmt, sowie der sonst so hochgebrachte Kunstfleiss unserer Städte. Die Freiheit des Handels ward gehemmt und dadurch die Quelle des Erwerbes und des Wohlstandes ver- stopft. Das Land ward ein Raub der Verarmung. Durch die strengste Er- füllung eingegangener Verbindlichkeiten hoffte ich meinem Volke Erleichte- rung zu verschaffen, und den französischen Kaiser endlich zu überzeugen, dass es sein eigener Vortheil sei, Preussen seine Unabhängigkeit zu lassen. Aber meine reinsten Absichten wurden durch Uebermuth und Treulosigkeit vereitelt, und nur zu deutlich sahen wir, dass des Kaisers Verträge mehr noch wie seine Kriege uns langsam verderben mussten. Jetzt ist der Augen- blick gekommen, wo alle Täuschung über unsern Zustand schwindet. Bran- denburger, Preussen, Schlesier, Pommern, Litthauer! Ihr wisst, was ihr seit sieben Jahren erduldet habt; ihr wisst, was euer trauriges Loos ist, wenn wir den beginnenden Kampf nicht ehrenvoll enden. Erinnert euch an die Vorzeit, an den grossen Kurfürsten, an den grossen Friedrich. Bleibet ein- gedenk der Güter, die unter ihnen unsere Vorfahren blutig erkämpften : Ge- wissensfreiheit, Ehre, Unabhängigkeit, Handel, Kunstfleiss und Wissenschaft. Gedenkt des grossen Beispiels unserer mächtigen Verbündeten, gedenkt der Spanier und Portugiesen ; selbst kleine Völker sind für gleiche Güter gegen 1 $ 185, 5. 3 $ 151, 1. 5$ 144, 2. 7$ 75, 4. 2 anveben. $ 230. 6 $ 143, 8 $ 95, 1. 212 .READING LESSONS. mächtigere Feinde in den Kampf gezogen und haben den Sieg errungen ;' erinnert euch an die heldenmüthigen Schweizer und Niederländer. Grosse Opfer werden von allen Ständen gefordert werden, denn unser Beginnen ist gross, und nicht gering die Zahl und die Mittel unserer Feinde. Ihr werdet jene lieber bringen für das Vaterland, für euren 'angeborenen König, als für einen fremden Herrscher, der, wie so viele Beispiele lehren, eure Söhne und eure letzten Kräfte Zwecken widmen würde, die euch ganz fremd sind. Ver- trauen" auf Gott, Ausdauer, Muth und der mächtige Beistand unserer Bun- desgenossen werden unserm redlichen Anstrengen siegreichen Lohn gewähren. Aber welche Opfer auch von einzelnen gefordert werden mögen, sie wiegen die heiligen Güter nicht auf, für die wir sie hingeben, für die wir streiten und siegen müssen, wenn wir nicht aufhören wollen, Preussen und Deutsche zu sein. Es ist der letzte entscheidende Kampf, den wir bestehen für unsere Existenz, unsere Unabhängigkeit, unsern Wohlstand. Keinen andern Aus- weg gibt* es, als einen ehrenvollen Frieden oder einen ruhmvollen Untergig. Auch diesem würdet ihr getrost entgegengehen, weil ehrlos der Deutsche nicht zu leben vermag. Allein wir dürfen mit Zuversicht vertrauen, Gott und un- ser fester Wille werden unserer gerechten Sache den Sieg verleihen, mit ihm einen sichern glorreichen Frieden und die Wiederkehr einer glücklichen Zeit. Breslau, den 17. März 1813. Friedrich Wilhelm. C . Ein Mühlſtein und ein Menſchenherz Wird ſtets herumgetrieben ;5 Wo beides nichts zu reiben hat, Wird beides ſelbſt zerrieben.“ Kurzweilige Fragen. 1. Was iſt nicht recht und doch keine Sünde ? 2. Wenn fünf Gäſte ſind und fünf Eier aufgetragen werden, wie kann jeder ein Ei nehmen und doch zuletzt nod; eines in der Sdüſſel bleiben ? 3. Welche ſind die Härteſten? Nüſſe ? 4. Wie kann man aus einem Sack voll Korn zwei ſoldier Säcke zugleich voll madjen? 5. Warum iſt in Ulm ein Groſdenbrod größer denn in Sdjaffhauſen ? 6. Was ſteht zwiſchen Berg und Thal ? 7. Wann thun dem Haſen die Zähne weh 28 8. Welche Menſden gehen auf Rüpfen ? 9. Ein Blinder ſah einen Haſen laufen, ein Lahmer (prang ihm nad), und ein Nadter ſteckt ihn in die Taſche ; was iſt das ? 10. Weldier iſt der dywerſte Stab? . 1$ 144, 1. 38 259. 5 $ 157, 1. 78 91. 2 $ 161. * L. XLV, 2. 6$ 144, 5. .. 8 $ 149, READING LESSONS. 213 Antworten. 1. Den linken Handſbuh auf die rechte Hand ziehen. 2. Der Leßte nimmt eines ſammt der Sdüſſel. 3. Betrübniſſe und Gefängniſſe. 4. Man muß zwei Säcke über einanderziehen und den innerſten füllen. 5. Weil man es größer bäckt. . 6. Das Wörtlein „und." 7. Wenn die Hunde ihn beißen. 8. Die Nägela in den Stiefeln haben. 9. Eine Lüge. 10. Der Bettelſtab. Meeresſtille. Tiefe Stille herrſdit im Waſſer, Ohne Regung ruht das Meer, Und befümmert ſieht der Sdiffer Glatte Flädhe rings umher. Keine Luft, von keiner Seite ! Todesſtille, fürdyterlid) ! In der ungeheuren Weite Reget keine Welle ſid). 3 (Göthe.) Der Cirknitzer See. An den julischen Alpen liegt in Krain der berühmte Cirknitzer See, von jeher das Wunder und Räthsel der Gegend.. Oestlich von Adelsberg, da wo die Geheimnisse der Unterwelt' in hundert Gewölben und Kalkfelsen ver- schlossen sind, breitet sich der wunderschöne See von Cirknitz aus, wie ein Spiegel von drei Quadratmeilen. Aus ihm ragen hervor6 fünf Inseln und eine derselben trägt selbst das Dörfchen Ottok. Mehrere Flüsschen’ fallen hinein. Er ist sehr reich an Fischen und Wasservögeln, und die ganze Thalgegend umher ist romantisch schön. Nördlich erhebt sich das Silvi- nitza-Gebirge, westlich und südlich der grosse Javornik. Neun Dörfer, zwanzig Kirchen und zwei Schlösser reihen sich um den See. Bei vielem Regen gewinnt er an Umfang, aber bei sehr trockenem Wetter verschwindet sein Gewässer und zieht in den geheimen Schooss der Unterwelt, begleitet vom Wassergeflügel und allen Fischen. Tritt diese wunderbare Erscheinung ein, dann läuten die Dorfglocken umher, um noch zu fischen so viel als mög- lich. Von Stunde zu Stunde sinkt tiefer der Spiegel, denn eine Menge von Löchern im Grunde des Sees verschluckt sein Gewässer. Unterirdische Höhlen von unermesslichem Umfang, die nie ein menschliches Auge geschaut, nehmen es auf. Jetzt schaut der Grund des Sees zum heiteren Himmel 1$ 74, 3, Rem. 3 $ 158. 5 $ 55, 1. 7$ 57, 1, 1. 2874, 1, 1, 1. 4986, 2, 5, Rem. 2. 6 $ 157, 1. 8 8 S6, 2, 6. 214 READING LESSONS. hinauf, er trocknet ab; und der rührige Mensch erntet Gras, wo er sonst fischte, er wagt zu säen und erndtet Hirse und Buchweizen, er nimmt statt des Netzes das Feuerrohr und erlegt Wildpret. So ist der wunderbare See mit Recht in dem Rufe, dass man in ihm fischen, jagen und erndten kann; bis die Zeit sich wendet, häufige Regengüsse und starke Gewitter sich ein- stellen. Dann tritt das Gewässer aus den Grundlöchern gewaltsam herauf. Es speiet die Unterwelt Gewässer und Fische und Seevögel herauf, so dass binnen vierundzwanzig Stunden der See gleichsam wieder neu geschaffen ist. Der Zusammenhang dieses Sees mit unterirdischen Wasserhöhlen, die theils unter ihm, theils höher als er liegen, giebt die Erklärung des Wunders. Man hat selbst Modelle erfunden, welche den Vorgang versinnlichen. (J.C. F. Guts Muths.) Der vorſichtige Träumer. In dem Städtchen Witlisbach im Canton Bern war einmal ein Fremder über Nacht, und als er ins Bett gehen wollte, zog er nod; ein Paar Pantoffeln aus dem Bündel, legte ſie an, band ſie mit den Strumpfbändern an den Füßen feſt, und legte ſich alſo ins Bette. Da ſagte zu ihm ein anderer Wandersmann, der. in der nämlichen Kammer übernachtet war: „Guter Freund, warum thut ihr Das ?" Darauf erwiderte der Erſte: „Wegen der Vorſicht. Denn ich bin ein- mal im Traum in eine Glasſdyerbe getreten. So habe id im Scylaf ſolche Schmerzen davon empfunden, daß ich um keinen Preis mehr Barfuß pdhlafen möchte. (I. P. Hebel, 1760-1826.) Was der Mond erzählt. Höre, was der Mond mir erzählt ! fd habe den Kadettenoffizier werden und fich zum erſten Male in ſeine prädytige Uniform fleiben lehen; ich habe das junge Mädden in ihrem Brautſtaat geſehen und des Fürſten junge Braut glücklich in ihrem Prachtanzuge; aber nie habe ich eine Seligkeit erblidt, ähn- lich der eines kleinen vierjährigen Mäddiens, welches ich heute Abend beob- achtete. Sie hatte ein neues blaues Kleid erhalten und einen neuen Noja-Hut: Der Staat war eben angelegt und Alle riefen nach licht, denn des Mondes Strahlen, die durddas Fenſter drangen, waren nicht hell genug, ganz andere Lichter mußten angebrannt werden. Da ſtand das kleine Mäddjen, ſteif wie eine Puppe, die Arme ängſtlich von dem Rleide ab ausſtreckend, die Finger weit auseinander geſpreizt. O welche Seligkeit ſtrahlte aus ihren Augen, aus ihrem ganzen Gefidyt! Morgen ſoUſt Du in dem Kleibe ausgehen " ſagte die Mut- ter, und die Kleine bliďte auf zu ihrem Hut und wieder nieder zu ihrem Kleide und lädhelte felig. „Mutter 1" rief ſie, „was werden wohl die kleinen Hünd- dhen denken, wenn ſie mich in dieſem Staate erblicken ? (Hans Chr. Anderſen.) Part Third: A COMPEND OF GERMAN GRAMMAR; WITH AN INTRODUCTION UPON THE HISTORY, CHARACTERISTICS, EXTENT OF USE, AND DIALECTS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. INTRODUCTION. 1. History of the German Language. § 1. Indo-European Historians are united in the opin- Languages. ion that the greater portion of the present inhabitants of Europe and Hindostan are descend ed from one common stock, which had its early home ir the western part of the Himalaya Mountains. From this mountain region, one portion of this original stock moved down to the rich plains of India, and developed the San scrit language and literature, and the Buddhist religion. Another part went to Persia, and there developed the Bac- trian language and the Parsee religion. Successive migra tions passed also to the west or northwest, and settled in th different parts of Europe. From these western migratio have sprung the chief groups of European nationalit: and languages. The most important of these are the G! cian, Italic, Keltic, Teutonic, and Slavic. When classed together, the inhabitants of Europe ar India are called the Indo-European branch of the huma family. Their languages, termed the Indo-European la guages, are more perfectly developed, and are richer in lit erary treasures, than any other languages in the world Upon the study of them has been based essentially the very important modern science of Philology. groups of the western mi cian, Ito ages. The - § 2. Teutonic The Teutonic was one of the largest of Languages. these migrations. Moving through cen- tral Europe, it divided into three branches. One portion K - INTRODUCTION. assed over to the Scandinavian peninsulas of Norway and weden, and of Denmark. Another part moved westerly nd settled in Germany. The third division, composed of me Gothic tribes, passed through Poland and Russia down to the Black Sea, and then moved up the Danube. Urged by their restless spirit of conquest, the Goths pushed for- ward into Western and Southern Europe, and established two brilliant, but short-lived kingdoms upon the ruins of the Roman empire. That of the East Goths covered Italy, Switzerland, and parts of Bavaria, Austria, and European Turkey. That of the West Goths covered most of France ind Spain. In the eighth century the Goths disappeared ompletely and finally from history. Of their language and literature, the only monuments extant are parts of the ranslation of the Bible, made by Bishop Ulfilas in the fourth century, a fragment of an almanac, and two 'short bills of sale. These meagre remains of the Gothic lan- guage furnished the starting-point for the comparative study of the Teutonic languages. The same principles of linguistic science that were ap- 'ied by the brothers Grimm and others to the Teutonic ignages, were applied by Bopp and his colaborers to the der field of the Indo-European languages. And thus has isen, within the last fifty years, the new and interesting ience of Comparative Language. By the ninth century after Christ, the great majority of e Scandinavian and German tribes had settled down ithin their present dominions, and they have there devel- bped their separate nationalities, languages, and literatures. The Germans pressed back to the west of the River Rhine he Kelts, whom they found extending their dominion as far east as the present cities of Berlin and Vienna. The Germans were in turn pushed forward to the west by the Slavic tribes as far as to the River Elbe and the city of Coburg. A reflex movement afterward set in. The Ger- man language, which has already spread to the eastward § 3.] 219 HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. as far as the Baltic provinces of Russia, to the city of Bres- lau in the Prussian province of Silesia, and to Vienna in Austria, is still gaining ground over the Slavic dialects in the Prussian provinces of East and West Prussia, Posen, and Silesia, and in the Austrian provinces of Bohemia, Mo- ravia, and Galicia. On the other hand, the French lan- guage is gaining on the German in the regions bordering on the Rhine, and especially in the French provinces of Alsace and Flanders, and in Belgium. The Teutonic languages have thus three chief divisions: 1. The GOTHIC, which in the ninth century entirely disappeared from history. 2. The SCANDINAVIAN, covering Sweden, Norway, Denmark, Iceland, and Greenland. 3. The GERMANIC, covering Germany, Holland, parts of Switzerland and Belgium, England, the United States, British America, and Australia. § 3. Germanic Differences in the dialects of the Ger- Languages. man tribes are noticeable as early as when the Romans first came in contact with them. As these tribes, still in the rudeness and ignorance of barbar- ism, became permanently settled in their present localities, and thus ceased to have much intercommunication, the dia- lectic differences in language were rapidly increased? And now almost every province, city, village, valley, and moun- tain district has its distinctive dialect. The difference be- tween the dialects has become so great, that a peasant from Bavaria or Wirtemberg, in passing through Hamburg or Bremen on his way to America, can only with the greatest difficulty converse with his fellow-emigrant from Bremen, Hamburg, Holstein, Mecklenburg, or Pomerania. From this multitude of dialects have arisen several of the most cultivated languages of modern times, as the Ger- man, Dutch, and English languages. The German dialects 220 [$ 4-6. INTRODUCTION. are divided, by a line running from Aix-la-Chapelle to Berlin, into Upper-German and Lower-German dialects. § 4. Lower-German The Lower - German dialects (and Dialects. the languages that have sprung from them) occupy, or originally occupied, the low sandy plain which lies between the German Ocean, Denmark, and the Baltic Sea on the north, and the line above indicated on the south. They extend also from the French province of Flanders on the west, to the Russian confines on the Baltic on the east. From Lower-German dialects have sprung the Dutch and the English languages. During the early Middle Ages the Friesan language, spo- ken on the coasts and in the islands off the shores of Hol- land and Hanover, rose to a perfection nearly equal to that of any contemporaneous Teutonic language. But it has long since sunk back into mere local dialects. § 5. Upper-German The Upper-German dialects occupy Dialects. the high mountainous region ex- tending from the line above indicated on the north, to the Alps on the south, and from the French province of Al- sace on the west, to Hungary and Poland on the east. § 6. The High-German In the fifteenth century com- Language. menced a chain of circumstances beginning with the translation of the Bible by Luther, which has resulted in the formation of a national German Lan- guage. This High-German Language, more commonly called in English simply the German Language, was based primarily on one of the dialects of Saxony, in Central Germany, which was intermediate both in character and in geographical position between the Upper and the Lower German dialects. Both the Upper and the Lower German dialects have contributed to the grammatical features as well as to the vocabulary of the national language. § 7-9.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 221 § 7. History of the German The history of the German Language. language is divided into four chief periods; the Pre-Historic, the Old-German, the Mid- dle-German, and the New-German. § 8. Pre-Historic Period, The Pre-Historic period is so till 7th Century. named because no remains of the German literature, and but a few proper names in the language. of that time, have been preserved. From this period, which ends with the seventh century after Christ, there are extant literary works in several of the other Teu- tonic languages, as, the translation of the Bible into the Gothic language, made by Bishop Ulfilas (A.D. 360–388); the Anglo-Saxon poem, Beovulf, the earliest Teutonic epic, evidently of heathen origin and composed at a very early date, though the earliest manuscript of it extant is from the eighth century; and the Scandinavian Eddas, also of very early and unknown đate, and of heathen origin. $ 9. Old-German Period, The earliest literary remains in 7th to 11th Centuries. the German language that are extant consist almost entirely of translations of ecclesiasti- cal documents from the Latin and the Greek. The oldest of these date from the seventh century. They are of but little literary merit, but they are of great importance in studying the literary development of the German lan- guage. The oldest preserved German poem is the Song of Hildebrandt (Hildebrandts-lied), dating from about the eighth century. It is written in a Lower-German dialect, but it contains many Upper-German words. The next im- portant poem is the Heliand, a religious poem of about the ninth century, written in the Old-Saxon dialect. The Welt- Beſdireibung, composed in the eleventh century, is the old- est preserved German poem that does not treat of a relig- ious subject. Like all new languages, the German dialects were orig- 222 . INTRODUCTION. [8 10. inally very poor in words. They were, however, much richer than the modern German in grammatical forms. During the Old-German period, the dialects were enriched from the Latin and Greek by many words, whose use was made necessary by the introduction of Christianity and of a higher civilization. From this period date many such words, as Engel (Gr. ayyɛlos), Kirche (Gr. Kvplakń), Schreiben (Lat. scribere), dichten (Low-Lat. dictare), Kloſter (Lat. claus- trum), Prieſter (Trpeoßútepos). § 10. Middle-German Period, Before the Middle-Ger- 12th to 16th Centuries. man period, no dialect had acquired any great predominance over the others. In the twelfth century, German commerce, manufactures, chival- ry, and poetry flourished most luxuriantly on the Lower Rhine, and especially in and around Flanders. At this time the Lower-German dialect of Flanders became the most cultivated in Germany. Soon, however, the Flemish poetry was eclipsed by the songs of the Minnesingers (Minneſänger) of Allemania and Suabia, on the Upper Rhine (A.D. 1150-1250). These were sung so widely through the courts of Germany that they almost made a national language from the dialects of Allemania and Suabia. With the last of the Crusades (A.D. 1250) the spirit of chivalry died out of Europe, and with it perished the poetry it had nourished. During this period of the Minnesingers arose the Rolands-lied : the great German epic—the Niebelungen- Lied: and many other popular legends and romances. In the latter part of the thirteenth century, clubs of lyr- ic poets, called Master-singers (Meiſterſänger), were organ- ized in many parts of Germany. These had their terms and rules of membership, like the many trades-unions of the Middle Ages. The spirit of their poetry spread to the people. From this period date the great mass of the beau- tiful popular songs (Volks-lieder) of Germany. Under the influence of these Master-singers, the vocabularies of many § 11, 12.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 223 dialects were greatly enriched, but still no one dialect gain- ed any great supremacy over the others. The universities that were established in Germany, on the model of those in Italy (the first in Prague, A.D. 1348); the commercial prosperity of the free cities, and the conse- quent flourishing condition of the fine and useful arts; the conquest of Constantinople by the Turks (A.D. 1453), and the consequent dispersion of Greek scholars over all Eu- rope; the invention of printing (A.D. 1450); the estab- lishing of newspapers (A.D. 1488); and, finally, the Refor- mation in the sixteenth century, were all additional influ- ences that greatly enriched the more cultivated dialects during the latter part of the Middle-German period, and prepared the way for the last, the New-German period. 1 § 11. Changes in the Language During the fifteenth cen- during the 15th Century. tury the poetic side of the language lost much in purity, beauty, pathos, and power. On the other hand, the dialects were greatly enriched by the addition of technical, scientific, metaphysical, and theo- logical terms, as was required by the advance of science, invention, commerce, and pulpit eloquence, of prose in pre- dominance over poetic literature, and by the increase in the general intelligence of the people. § 12. New-German Period, The extensive circulation 16th Century till present time. throughout Germany of the translation of the Bible made by Luther (1522), and of the sermons and hymns published by Luther, Jonas, Speng- ler, and others, soon made the new High-German Lan- guage (§ 6) in which they were written very widely known in all the German states. Additional impetus was given to the High-German language by the publication in it of humorous and satirical poems and fables, collections of proverbs, works of history and of natural history, transla- tions of works of classical writers, and other books that 224 [8 13. INTRODUCTION. were read largely by the people. Above all, a foundation was laid, by the publication of grammars and dictionaries, for a critical and scientific knowledge of the language. The High-German has added to its vocabulary from the local dialects (8-6) and from ancient and modern foreign languages, and has become the sole language of literature, of official intercourse, and of polite society throughout all Germany. It has not, however, displaced any of the local dialects. These retain their vitality with great tenacity, especially among the peasantry. § 13. Foreign The use of Latin in scientific writings, in Influences. lectures at the universities, an.d as the lan- guage of intercourse among literary men of different na- tions during the Middle Ages, greatly retarded the develop- ment of the German as a cultivated language. The polit- ical predominance of France during the reign of Louis XIV., the spread of the French as the language of the court throughout all Europe, and the immigration from France of the banished Huguenots after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, 1685, caused the introduction of many French words and idioms into the German language. At the beginning of the eighteenth century, some bold German scholars, as Gessner and Leibnitz, ventured upon the great innovation of lecturing in the universities, and publishing their scientific writings in the German language. A general movement soon set in to rescue the language from the corruptions that had crept in during the preceding century. This movement, so ably begun by Gessner, Leib- nitz, Opitz, and others, and afterwards so greatly strength- ened by the pure style in German prose and poetry of such writers as Klopstock, Wieland, and Lessing, received a great check by the second invasion into Germany of French man- ners, morals, literature, and philosophy, which was led on by Frederick the Great during the latter part of the eight- eenth century. $ 14.1 225 HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. The brilliant and numerous constellation of writers in every branch of literature, science, philosophy, and criti- cism, which arose in Germany during the first half of the present century, including such names as Goethe, Schiller, Schlegel, Humboldt, Fichte, Hegel, Ranke, Heyne, Grimm, etc., have made this the second classic period of the Ger- man language and literature. The present purity, richness, and elegance of the language are also owing in no small de- gree to the fact that the German has displaced the French as the language of court, and the Latin as the language of scientific and philosophical literature. § 14. Grammatical Changes in the During its develop- Language during its History. ment from the sev- enth century after Christ till the present time, the German language has undergone many and very radical changes. In the Old-German there was a much more complete and complex system of grammatical forms in the inflection of the verb, noun, pronoun, and adjective than there is in the New-German. The Old-German had twenty-five, and the Gothic forty endings in the inflection of the noun, while the New-Ger- man has but seven (e, 18, 8, en, n, er, ern). There was an in- strumental case; three forms for the three genders of the plural of the pronoun ſie, they (m. siê, f. şiô, n. siu); and three forms for the plural of the adjective (as, for blinde, blind; m. plintê, f. plintô, n. plintu). The very extended conjugation of the verb gave the Old-German more musical beauty and more adaptation to poetry, while on the other hand the Old-German is infe- rior to the New-German in its capacity to express thought and scientific truth. While some radical words disap- peared during the Old and Middle-German periods, the vocabulary of the New-German has been enriched by many new derivatives and compounds of native words, and by the addition of many foreign words. K2 226 INTRODUCTION. [$ 15. $ 15. History of the No critical work on the German Critical Study of the language appeared until several German Language centuries after grammars had been written upon some of the other languages of Europe, as the Italian, Spanish, French, and Anglo-Saxon. The first Ger- man grammar was written (1540) by Ickelsamer, a contem- porary of Luther. The first treatise on German prosody was by Opitz (1624); the first German dictionary was by Ge- nisch (1616); and the first work on German synonyms was by Gottschedd (1758). The wrong principles of grammatical analysis, which had crept into the German grammars during the seven- teenth and eighteenth centuries, were checked and correct- ed by Adelung, whose great German grammar and diction- ary (1793–1801) marked an epoch in the critical study of the German language. It was reserved to the present cen- tury, however, to develop the true principles of compara- tive and historic study of language. And within the last fifty years have appeared the great comparative and histor- ical grammars of Grimm, Heyse, Becker, Kehrein, Kelle, and others; and the dictionaries of Heyse, Weigand, Meyer, Sanders, Schmitthenner, and Grimm. That of the broth- ers Grimm, when complete, will fill about twenty octavo volumes, and will be the most complete dictionary ever yet produced of any language. Many noted philologists in Ger- many and many learned societies are constantly adding, by their researches, to the knowledge of the German language and its dialects. . During the history of the language, letters have been ex- changed, added, and dropped; nouns have passed from one gender to another, and from one declension to another. Within the last fifty years uniformity has been introduced into the spelling, and the complicated construction of sen- tences, which formerly prevailed, has to a degree been re- placed by the original simplicity of German syntax. $ 16.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 227 § 16. Résumé. We thus find the history of the German language to be divided into four chief periods, with subdi- visions as follows: 1. The PRE-HISTORIC PERIOD, ending with the Sev- enth Century; with no remains of the language extant except a few proper names. 2. The OLD-GERMAN PERIOD, from the Seventh to the Eleventh Century; translations from Latin of legal and ecclesiastical documents, Hildebrandts- lied, Heliand, Welt-Beſdreibung. 3. The MIDDLE-GERMAN PERIOD, from the Twelfth to the Sixteenth Century: 1. Flemish poetry, in the Twelfth Century. 2. Minnesingers, Rolands -lied, Niebelungen-Lied, legends and romances; the First Classical Pe- riod of the German language (1150-1250). 3. Master-singers, popular songs; decadence of poetry and prose (1250–1500). 4. The NEW-GERMAN PERIOD, from Luther's translation of the Bible (1522) to the present time : 1. Sixteenth Century; religious hymns, sermons, universities, public schools, printing; introduc- tion of many technical terms in science, art, and philosophy. 2. Seventeenth Century; decadence of the lan- guage through French influence. 3. Eighteenth Century; purifying of the lan- guage from foreign elements, and foundation of the language as it now exists; German dis- places Latin in the universities. 4. Middle of the Eighteenth Century; second de- cadence of the language under French influ- ence. 5. Nineteenth Century: Adelung, Lessing, Goethe, Schiller, Grimm, Bopp, Humboldt, etc. ; Second Classical Period of the German language. 228 E917–19. INTRODUCTION. 2. Characteristics of the German Language. $ 17. First Impression. To most foreigners who go to Germany without an acquaintance with the language, and especially to those speaking English, French, Italian, or Spanish, the German language has an energetic but harsh sound. This is owing mostly to the great predominance of consonants over vowels, and to the frequent recurrence of the sharp diphthong ei, of the idh, of gutturals, and of double consonants. The energy of the language is greatly increased by the accent falling so frequently upon the first syllable, as is the case even in very long words. The ca- dence and intonation of the sentences in the German are very different from the same in the English language. § 18. Fullness of A nearer acquaintance shows that the the Vocabulary. German language is extremely rich in words; that, though full of energy and force, the language has also an abundance of words expressive of the most del- icate sentiments and emotions; that it successfully express- es the deep feeling, the warm friendship and hospitality, the humor, wit, and pathos, and the brilliant and highly poetic imagination of the German people; and that its vocabula- ry is sufficiently extensive to meet all the requirements of modern civilization. There is in the language an unlimited power of multi- plying words, by forming compounds from simple words. Indeed, the very great majority of German words can be traced back to a very small number of primitive roots, na- tive to the language itself. $ 19. Purity from In the German language there are Foreign Elements. about forty thousand words of foreign origin, which are not so fully naturalized but that their for- eignness is still felt. Many of these are but rarely used, and most of them may be replaced by words of German origin. § 20.] CHARACTERISTICS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 229 Some thousands of words, however, which have been intro- duced since the seventh century (as (dreiben, Pferd, Engel, Kirche), are so completely incorporated into the language that their foreign origin is now “no longer felt." Still there are but few languages in which foreign words are so little used as in the German. The rigidness with reference to the exclusion of foreign words, which the so-called “pur- ists” introduced into the language in the early part of the present century, has of late very greatly relaxed. $ 20. Comparison of The German.grammar is far more German and English complicated than the English. The Grammar. definite article, and every adjective, or adjective pronoun, have six forms, while in English each has but oñe form. In the declension of the noun, seven terminations may be used (besides the umlaut on the radi- cal vowel), while in English there are but two terminations, and no modification of the radical vowel. Adjectives and adjective pronouns may be declined in three ways, or may be used without declension, while in English they are al- ways without declension. The gender of nouns is arbi- trary and not natural, many nouns that are neuter in En- glish being masculine, and others being feminine in Ger- man. In the conjugation of the verb, the radical vowel oft- en takes the umlaut. The past participle generally adds a prefix syllable, and always has a participial termination. In compound verbs, the prefix to the verb, which in En- glish can not be removed farther than to immediately after the object of the verb, in German may be placed at the close of even a long sentence. One or more long quali- fying clauses may intervene between the article and its noun. The order of sequence of auxiliary verbs is entire- ly reversed in conjunctive sentences. Prepositions and verbs govern three cases of the substantive instead of a single one, as in English. The object precedes the verb more frequently than in English. 230 [8 21. INTRODUCTION. The German has the advantage over the English lan- guage in several respects. The infinitive of verbs is always indicated by a termination (-en). The past participle is marked by a termination (-+ or -en), and generally also by * a prefix syllable (ge-). The termination of the article, ad- jective, or adjective pronoun often indicates the gender, case, or number of the qualified noun. The additional cases (the Genitive and Dative) diminish the use of prepo- sitions. Somewhat more inversion in the position of words is allowed, giving rather more freedom of style in express- ing emphasis or shades of meaning. The freedom with which compound words are formed gives great terseness of expression. Owing to the method of forming compound words and the comparatively rare use of foreign words, there are but few, even of the longest words, that can not be immediately understood by persons of comparatively limited education. 3. Extent of Use of the German Language. § 21. Extent of Use. The German language is the ver- nacular of the entire population of the smaller German states; of all the inhabitants of Prussia, except the small Slavic-speaking population of Prussian Poland; of about one fourth the inhabitants of Austria (being spoken mostly in the western part of that empire); of two thirds the inhab- itants of Switzerland; of the province of Alsace in France; of the German colonists of Courland, and other provinces and cities in Russia; and of the German immigrants in the United States, Brazil, and some other countries of the Old and New World. It is thus spoken by about seventy mil- lions of people. This is nearly equal to the English-speak- ing population of the entire world, and is greater than the number that speak any other language of European origin. These two, the German-speaking and the English-speaking branches of the Teutonic division of the Indo-European 8 22, 23.] GERMAN DIALECTS. 231 portion of the human race, represent to-day more of the active, intellectual, political, religious, artistic, commercial, and industrial forces of the world than any other family of the nations of Europe or of the world. § 22. Literary Treasures. The number and value of the works in every branch of human learning in the German exceed by far those in any other language. The German belles-lettres literature rivals that of any other nation. Ger- many is the home of modern music and art-criticism. The German language is therefore studied, both as a means of education, of culture, and of enjoyment by the scholars, art- ists, educators, and travelers from all civilized lands. A knowledge of the language is also essential to success in many branches of domestic and foreign industry and com- merce. 4. German Dialects. $ 23. Formation of Dialects. When the tribes of the Ger- man branch of the Teutonic family first settled in Ger- many, there were probably but few differences in their lail- guage. As these ignorant and almost barbarous tribes became permanently settled, intercommunication between them soon almost entirely ceased. In every province, city, secluded valley, or mountainous region, dialectic changes immediately began to be developed. Words rapidly be- came modified in pronunciation and in meaning. New words grew out of old roots. With some tribes words passed out of use. Different vowel and consonant sounds gained a predominance in certain regions. Grammatical forms were dropped, modified, or added. New words froin foreign sources were added to one dialect without being adopted by its neighbors. Thus within a short time were formed a great number of dialects in all parts of Germany. Other influences, on the other hand, soon set in to retard the growth of dialects and to permanently fix their forins. nunciat kelopedon, die 232 [$ 24. INTRODUCTION. There has, indeed, been less change in the character of the local dialects of Germany since the seventh century, than there has been in that of the cultivated High-German lan- guage since the sixteenth century. As we have seen above (12), one of the Upper-German dialects in Saxony became the grammatical basis of the present German language (§ 6), which is spoken by the edu- cated classes in all parts of Germany. But the great mass of the people, and more especially of the peasantry, still speak their own local and provincial dialects. Even the educated classes are but rarely entirely free from provincial- isms, both in pronunciation, in the intonation of sentences, and in the use of words. The dialectic differences between the languages of the tribes of North and those of South Germany (which were indistinctly marked in the proper names handed down to us by Roman writers) have, in the course of time, been suf- ficiently developed to give a basis for a classification of the dialects of Germany. They are divided by a line running nearly from Aix-la- Chapelle to Berlin (§ 3) into two chief groups, the Upper- German and the Lower-German dialects. UL $ 24. Upper-German The dialects of Upper or South Dialects. Germany, extending south as far as the Alps, are, like all languages of mountainous districts, full of terse and short words and expressions. The words are apparently clipped off or contracted, and are strength- ened by doubling the consonants. The Upper-German dia- lects are fuller of consonants and of harsh guttural sounds than is the cultivated national language, and much more so than are the dialects of North Germany, or than are any other of the Teutonic languages. They are thus both harsh to the ear and difficult of pronunciation. They are subdivided into four groups: the Bavaro- Austrian, the Suabian, the Allemanian, and the Frankish. VIU $ 25–27.] GERMAN DIALECTS. 233 $ 25. Lower-German The Lower-German or North-Ger- Dialects. man (called also the Platt-Deutsch) dialects, like all Hanguages in low and plain countries, are softer to the ear, freer from consonants and gutturals, and fuller of vowels and liquids, than those of South Germany. The Lower-German dialects are in many respects inter- mediate in character, as they are in geographical position, between those of South Germany and those of Scandinavia. They are also subdivided into four chief groups: the Lower-Saxon, the Westphalian, those of the Lower-Rhine, and the Friesan (8 4). UU § 26. Characteristic In a large number of words where Differences. the Upper-German dialects have î, f, ch or g, ſd, b, ei or e, the same words in the Lower- German dialects have t, p, k, , v, and 0. From the fre- quent rccurrence of the t for the ſ, some writers call the Lower-German the ,,dat“ dialects, and the Upper-German : the dagó dialects. $ 27. Tables in For the purpose of presenting to Comparative Language. the eye at a glance a few of the verbal analogies upon which the theory of the relation- ship, and of the history of the development of languages is to a large degree based, we give the three following tables, presenting : 1. Comparison of words in the Indo-European languages. 2. 56 66 Teutonic 3. Illustrations of the historic development of words in the German language. The intricate and subtle laws of vocal changes, a knowl- edge of which is necessary for the complete understand- ing of these atables, must be reserved for explanation in more advanced works. In these tables the vowels are pro- nounced as in German. 234 INTRODUCTION. § 28. Comparison of Words in Bactrian. (New-Persian.) Greek. padai, mathp, mata, mâder, unrp, dâtár, bratar, Sister, doktarah, oùyarnp, brâder, ppárnp, hhâher, Nuoc, sitárah, di-ruz, XOés, vúĘ (VUKTÓs), (uńun), English. Sanscrit. Father, pitar, Mother, mâtár, Son, sûnis, Daughter, duhitar, Brother, bhratar, swasar, Sun, syôna, Star, stri, Day, dyu, Yesterday, hyas, Night, nakta, Month, mas, akshi, Knee, jano, Salt, Name, nâman, Red, rôbita, bhri, ásmi, ási, asti, aham, mâm, tvam, trâm, Eye, ain, ŐKOS, yóvu, als, nam, surkh, Amy Arta i, Is, est, ahmi, as-si, açta, azem, mam, tum, thwam, όνομα, épvOpós, pépelv, . Elul, ɛt (els), Ěoti (v), łyó, ué, Tú, Té, Els, év, man, mará, tu, tará, e, yak, du, Thorg Thel, One, Troo, Three, Six, Тель, Over, Evo, TPĒLS, dwi, tri, shash, daçan, upari, sih, shesh, dah, déka, bala, Útép, COMPARATIVE TABLE. 235 decra, brati, frater, the Indo-European Languages. Latin. Keltic. Slavic. pater, aithar, patr, mater, mathair, matka, - - sin, dear, brathair, soror, piuthar, sestra, slun, stella, hwezda, dies, dia, den, hesternus, wcërá, nox (noctis), nochd, noc, mensis, mios, mêsje, oculus, genu, koleno, sal, salann, soly, nomen, ainm, gmeno, (rutilus), ruadh, cerwenij, ferre, beir, (brati), sum, gsem, gsi, gest, mi, azu, me, mi, (Lithuanian.) Gothic. - "fadar. mota, môdar. sunus, sunus. dukte, dauhtar. brolis, brotliar. svistar. sauil. stiarno. dags. (gestren). nahts. akis, menoths. augo. sol, oko, kniu. salt. nomy. rauds. bairan. im. es, is. est, esmi, esi, esti, az, mane, ego, me, tily thill, ty, tul, thul, ti, te, unus, duo, mik. thu. thuk. ains. tvai. threis. un, gedno, dwa, do, tave, venas, dwi, trys, szessi, deszimt, tres, tri, tri, saihs. sex, decem, super, shestj, deset, deich, os, taihun. · ufar pres, 236 INTRODUCTION. sol, sol, Moon, (1.) Gothic. English. Gothic. Father, fadar. Mother, modar. Son, sunus. Daughter, dauhtar. Brother, brothar. Sister, svistar. Man, man. Sun, sauil. mêna. Star, stairno. Day, dags. Night, nahts. Good, gods. Better, batiza. High, hauhs. Bitter, baitrs. Sweet, sutis. ains. tvai. Three, threis. Ten; taihun. To have, haban. To come, quiman. dag. dag, nótt, 29. Comparison of Words (2.) Scandinavian. Icelandic. Swedish Danish. fadir, fader, fader. môdhir, moder, moder. sonr, son, sön. dattir, datter, dotter. brodhir, broder, broder. systir, syster, söster. madhr, man, mana. soel. mani, mäne, moane. stirna, stjerna, stierne. dag, natt, nat. godr, god, god. bättra, bedre. höi. bitter, bitter. söt, söd. een. tvein, tö. tre, tio, hafa, hafva, have. koma, komma, komme. ga, i, ût, ut, ud. yfir, over. nei, nej, ja, betra, bag hög, bitr, sötr, einn, One, Two, en, tvä, thrir, tre. tiu, ti. To go, gahan. sia, goa. in. Ing Out, ut. ufar. öfver, Over, No. Yes, ise nei. nê. ja. jag COMPARATIVE TABLE. 237 Anglo-Saxon. fäder. moder. sunu. dohter. brodher. swyster. man. dei, gut, god, in the Teutonic Languages. (3.) Germanic. German. Lower-German. Friesan. Dutch. Vater, fadder, fader, vader, Mutter, mudder, moder, möder, Sohn, sẵn, son, zoon, Tocyter, dochter,' dochter, dochter, Bruder, broder, broder, broeder, Schweſter, swester, “swester, zuster, Mann, man, man, man, Sonne, sunne, sunne, zoen, Mond, moand, mond, maan, Stern, steern, stera, ster, Tag, dag, dag, Nacht, nacht, nacht, nacht, god, goed, beſſer, bäter, beter, beteren, hoch, hoch, hoog, bitter, ſüß, söt, swet, een, een, zwei, twee, twêne, twee, drei, drie, zehn, tein, tian, haben, hebben, hebba, hebben, kommen, koamen, kuma, komen, gehen, goaen, gan, gaan, in, in, in, in, uut, utt, over, over, over, nein, ne, nâ, ne, ja, joa, ie, ja, hag, bitter, bitter, bitter, zoet, sunna. mona. steorra. daeg. niht. god. beterian. heah. biter. swete. ain. twa. thri. tên. habban. cuman. gangan. in. ût. ein, an, dree, thre, tien, ût, aus, über, over. nâ. gese. 238 INTRODUCTION. sun, Sister, Man, House, English. (Gothic.) Father, fadar, Mother, môdar, Son, sunus, Daughter, dauhtar, Brother, brothar, svistar, man, Friend, hûs, Sun, sunnô, Moon, menoths, stairno, dags, nahts, Good, gods, Better, batiza, Best, batists, High, hauhs, Bitter, baitrs, Sweet, sutis, To hear, hausjan, To come, quiman, To go, (gahan), To see, saihvan, To eat, îtan, I, mik, Star, Day, Night, § 30. Illustration of the Words in the Old-German. Middle-German. New-German. fatar, vater, Vater. muotar, muoter, Mutter. sunu, Sohn. tohter, tohter, Tochter. bruodar, bruoder, Bruder. suëstar, swëster, Schweſter. man, *man, Mann. friunt, vriunt, Freund. hûs, hûs, Haus. sunne, Sonne. mânoth, mânôt, Mond. sterno, stern, Stern. tach, Tag. naht, naht, Nacht. guot, guot, gut. beziro, bezzer, bеffеr. bezist, bezzist, beft. | hôn, hods. bittar, bitter. suazi, ſüß. hộran, hören, hören. chuman, komen, kommen. gên, gên, gehen. sehan, sëhen, ſehen. ezzan, ezzen, eſſen. ich, idi. mich, mich. dû, du. dih, dich, dich. hồch, bitter, sûze, ik, mih, Me, Thou, Thee, thu, dû, thuk, HISTORICAL TABLE. 239 er. Fle, Shen ir, siu, si, It, wir. . We, You, They, jus, ir, ihr. ſte. Who, Historical Development of German Language. English. (Gothic.) Old-German Middle-German. New-German. is, ër, siu (sie), fie it, iz, si, es. veis, wir, wir, ir, eis, eis, sië. hvas, hvo, hwer, wer, wer. Which, hveleiks, hwiolihher, wëlher, welcher. eines, eines, eins. tvai, zwêne, zwêne, zwei. threis, driê, driê, fidvoreis, fiori, vier. fimf, fimfi, fünf. Sever, sibun, sibun, ſieben. Eight, ahtau, . altô, aht, acht. Nine, niun, niun, neun. taihun, zehan, zehen, zehn. No, ne, në-ein, nein, nein. Yes, ja, ains, One, Two, Three, Four, Five, dret. viere, vünve, siben, niun, Ten, , jâ, ja. To write, (L. scribere), scripan, schriben, ſchreiben. Boundary, (Pol.graniça),grenitz, grenitz, Grenze. Cabbage, (Ital. cavolo), cholo, kol, Kohl. Nation, (L. natio, Fr. nation), nation,, Nation. Excepted, - — ûzgenommen, ausgenommen. Muscle, (L. musculus), — Muskel. Museum, (L. museum), — Muſeum. Coke, (English), Coaks. Coffee, (Arab. Tahwah, Fr.café), Kaffee. GERMAN GRAMMAR. · (Deutfdhe Grammatik.) $ 31. GERMAN GRAMMAR, like that of all cultiva- ted languages, is divided into four parts: Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. Rem. In this work prosody is omitted entirely. Syntax is not treated sep- arately, but the etymology and syntax of each part of speech are given in the same chapter. Many portions of the German grammar are omitted where the same laws prevail as in the English language. 'n ORTHOGRAPHY. (Orthographie.) § 32. The German Alphabet has twenty-six letters: X, a ...... Ah. I, 1...... Yote. 5,1 (8). . Ess. B,B...... Bay. I, k...... Kah. T, t. ....Tay. C, ....... Tsay. fir...... Ell. 1, u..... 00. D,D......Day. | M, m.... Emm. l. V, ..... Fow. ,E.......Ay. N, n..... Enn. W, w.... Vay. f........ Ef 0,0..... Oh. X, *. ... .Iks. g..... P, Þ.....Pay. | Y, \ ..... Ipseelon. H,H...... Hah. 2,9..... Koo. 1 3,2 ..... T'set. I, t....... Ee. | R, r...... Err. 1 (See Lesson I., 1.) Rem. The German Alphabet, like those of all other European nations, was developed from the Latin. Under the influence of the artistic spirit of the times, during the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, when in architecture the pointed arch took the place of the round arch, pointed letters took the place in manuscripts of the round Latin letters. The pointed letters were adopted also in the first books that were printed both in English, French, and Lat- in, as well as in the German language. With the revival of classical taste there was a return to the use of the Latin alphabet, first in Italy, then in France, England, Holland, Poland, and other European countries. The Latin letters are now also used in many German books and periodicals. Gay. S@ $ 33–37.] 241 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. (Vokale und Diphthongc.) § 33. 1. There are seven simple Vowel Sounds: a,c(ö), i, o, it, ö, ii. 2. And three Diphthongal Sounds: ci, au, cu. Rem. 1. All the seven vowels have both long and short sounds. Rem. 2. The three umlaut vowels ä, ö, ii (also written ae, oe, ite) represent distinct vowel sounds, not modifications of the vowels a, 0, 11. Rem. 3. The and iſ first appeared in the eleventh and twelfth centuries; the ö and än (also ent) first appeared during the Middle-German period. § 34. The Vowel is long: 1. When doubled in the same syllable: Paar, Spree. 2. With silent h in the same syllable: Sohn, Roth. 3. When it closes a syllable (especially if it is accented): Va'-ter, E-Ii'sſa, Ju'-li, Bru'-der, le'=fen, da, ſo, du, zu. 4. In radical syllables and monosyllables which end with a single consonant: Hab'-ſudyt, legé-bar, trag=bar; er, wen, der, dem, den, dar, vor, für. Exc. The vowel is short in ab, an, bis, in, mit, um, von: 06, hilt, weg; es, man, was ; das, des, im, vom, zum ; bin, hat. § 35. The Vowel is short: 1. When followed by a double consonant: fal'-len, beſ-fer, Mit-te, Mann, Bett, ſoll, Nul. 2. Or by two or more consonants : Band, bil-dend, iſt. Exc. 1. The vowel is long: in the contracted words, Miago, Mond, Mon- tag, Obſt, Oſterni, Papſt, Noſt, Troſt, gröſt, Hödiſt, nädıſt, tröſten, and wüſt (from Mid.-Ger. mâget, mânôt, obez, ôstarûn, bâbest, græezest, hæhest, etc.). Exc. 2. Also in some contractions of verbs, as : Jabt (habet), lebſt (Tebet). Exc. 3. And before r in Art, Arzt, Bars, Bart, Quartz, zart; Erde, Herde, Herd, Pferd, Schwert ; Bord; Geburt. § 36. Diphthongs are always long: Fauſt, leiſten, feudit. § 37. Vowels belonging to different syllables must be pro- nounced separately: geendet (ge-en'-det), Armeen (Är-me'zen), linie (li'-ni-e), Sanaan (Ka'-na-an), Zoologie (30-0-1o-gie'). 242 [$ 38. ORTHOGRAPHY. § 38. Vowels and Diphthongs are sounded thus: 1. A, a. 1. The long sound, like c in futher : Vater, las. 2. The short sound is shorter and sharper, but not as flat as in hat: hat, das, laſſen, Mann. 2. E, c, has three sounds: · 1. Long, like a in mate : Schnee, mehr, den, dem. 2. Short, like e in belt, bet : belt, Bett, beſſer, beſt, Wen- dung, Trennung. 3. It is almost suppressed in terminations and pre- fixes : haben, meine, Schneider, gelobt, Gebäude. 3. I, i. 1. The long sound, like ee in meet : Mine, ihm. 2. The short sound, like i in bit: bitter, milde, in, iſt. Rem. } is never doubled; when followed by silent e, it has a long sound: die, Diener, vier. But ie is short in vierzehn, vierzig, viertel. 4. 0,0. 1. The long sound, like o in note : Noth, Boot. 2. The short sound is intermediate between that of o in zone and that of u in sun: Sonne, Volk, doppel. 5. U, 11. 1. The long sound, like oo in moot : Muth, thun. 2. The short sound is intermediate between that of oo in pool, and that of u in pall: Pult, Bund, kurz. 6. Y, y, sounds like ü ($ 38,9): Aegypten, Syntar, Syſtem. Rem. In all words of German origin, where y) was formerly used, as well as in foreign words that are fully naturalized, it is now replaced by i (38, 10). 7. Ae, ä, sounds like e (s 38, 2). Rem. Strictly speaking, a somewhat more open sound than that of a in mate, one intermediate between that of a in vary and that of e in very, is given to ž, and also to e in some words (as wer, der, Erde; lcbcn, geben, beten, gegeit, Schnce, Meer, etc.). 8. O, ö (oh-umlaut), has no equivalent in English. Rem. It is like the French eu. Its sound may be approximated by pro- ducing a sound intermediate between that of a in bane and that of ur in burn: Börſe, Böhmen, Sdjön, Löffel, gelöſdit. 9. Ute, ii (00-umlaut), has 110 equivalent in Englishı. Rem. It is like the French U. Thus Süd may be approximately pro- nounced by placing the lips as if about to whistle, and then trying to say seed: Süb, milde, Mütter, Sălüſſel. $ 38–40.] 243 CONSONANTS. 10. Ai, ai (or Ei, ei), like i in might: mein, Rhein, Zeit. Rem. Of the four forms ai, an, ci, ci), which have contested for supremacy in the German language sirice the fourteenth century, the form ci has come off the victor. At present ay is dropped entirely; ey is used only in some proper names (Heyne, Meyer, etc.); anã ai is used in but few words (as Mainz, Mailand, Kaiſer, Mai). 11. Au, aut, like ou in mound : Mauer, laut, Haus. 12. Eu, en (or Aeu, äu), like oi in moist : leute, Mäuſe. Rem. di, used only in a few proper names, has the same sound: Broihan. $ 39. In the development of all languages, vowels (and also the liquids, 1, m, , r) are more subject to change than are consonants. 2. CONSONANTS. (Konſonanten.) § 40. The Consonants are sounded as follows: 1. B, v. 1. Beginning a syllable, like b: Bild, Brett. 2. Ending a syllable, nearly like p: Dieb, halb, ab, ob. Exc. It has the sound of b before b or 0: Elbe, Gclübde. 2. C, c. 1. Before a, 0, or it (or before a consonant) is pronounced like k in king : Cato, activ. 3. D, d. 1. Beginning a syllable, like d : Dom, drei, da. 2. Ending a syllable, nearly like t: Hand, Bad, Nad. Exc. The sound of d is given in dd: Adder, Widder. 4. F, f(V, V, or Ph, ph), like f in fine : fein, Freundſdaft; vier, davon; Philoſophie. Rem. 1. In foreign words v sounds like v in ever: Sklave, Frevel, brav. Rem. 2. For a long time f and v were used interchangeably. Their use has finally become settled, but in a purely arbitrary way; the f largely pre- dominates. Rem. 3. The ph only occurs in words of Greek origin, as in Philoſophie, and in a few German proper names, as : Adolph (or Adolf), Rudolph (f), Weſtpha- .len. 5. G, g. 1. Before a vowel, like g in gay: gehen, Grund. 2. After a vowel (and not before it), see $ 40,17. 244 ORTHOGRAPHY. 6. H, H. Like h in house : Haus, hoc), erheben, Johann. Exc. The letter h is silent: (1) in the combination th, as in Thon, Noth; (2) after a vowel, as in Sohn, Lohn ; (3) after r in Niede, Rheint, Rhabarber; (+) after f in some proper names, as Bödly. 7. I, İ. Like y in yoke : Johann, Juli, Jahr, Januar. 8. K, k. Like k in king : König, kommen, Punkt, Köln. Rem. In those foreign words that have become fully naturalized, f has al- most entirely displaced c: Punkt, Kongreß, Köln. 9. L,1, M, in, N, n, º, p, 2, 1, have the same sound as l, m, 10, P, q in English: Lamm, Leimpinſel, Qual. Rem. Before k, li takes the sound of ng ($ 40,16); Dank, denken, links. 10. R, 1. 1. At the beginning of a syllable, r has a sound somewhat rougher and deeper in the throat than in English : Roth, rund, Rhein. 2. In other positions it is trilled : Brod, Bart, der, wer. 11. S, (11 or $). 1. Like s in less : das Meſſer, iſt, daß. 2. But a single ſ before a vowel sounds like a in zone : Sohn, fie, Eliſa, geleſen. 3. When before p.or t and at the beginning of a radi- cal syllable, ſ sounds like sh in shall: Spree, Stein, verſtehen, ausgeſprochen. Rem. 1. In former periods of the language, ſ, ii, and ſ were very largely interchanged. Even yet authorities vary in the use of ſſ and B. Rem. 2. The short is used at the end of syllables: Dresden, Potsdam, Ins, auseinander, Donnerstag. 2. Like ts in mits, in final -tion, -tial, -tient, not pre- ceded by i; Lektion, Quotient. Rem. 1. The sound of t is preserved when the accent is on the ti, as in Demokratie, Partie, Miltiades. Rem. 2. Also when ti is preceded by ſ: Queſtion', Baſlion'. Rem. 3. In the history of the language there have been many interchanges between t, d, and th. Some modern writers, called "purists,” reject the the entirely, and write teil (Theil), tun (Thun), Rem. W, after 0, occurring in a few proper names, is silent: Pankow. $ 40-43.] 245 CONSONANTS. 14. X, X* Like x in box : Borar, Erempel, Xerres, Here, fir. Rem. The letter r is used mostly in words of foreign origin. 15. 3, 3 (1 and 33). Like ts in fits : Zeit, pußen, Skizze. Rem. The use of 3, *, 33 has varied greatly in the different periods of the language. 16. Ng, ng. Like ng in sing : fingen, Finger, drängen. Rem. A slight k sound is given after ng when it follows a vowel: Rang (rang), Angſt (anglist). 17. Ch, dh, and g have two guttural sounds : 1. Ch, dh (and g, when ending a syllable), after a, 0, it, or au, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of h in hope : hody (hohh) high ; Tuch (toohh), cloth; Tag (tahh), day, machen (ma'-khen), to make. 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla- ble dien), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh in shall: idi (ihs), I; recht (rehsht), right; Kind'-den (kind'- Ishen), a child; Mün'-dyen (miin-1 shen), Munich ; bil-lig (billihs), Zeug (tsoyhs), Berg (berhsh). Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, dh sounds like k: Chor, choir. Rem. 2. Also before 8 in the same radical syllable, like k: Wadys, wax. § 41. Many foreign words retain their original pro- nunciation, as : Bureau, Palais, Façon, Major, Gouverneur, adieu, Adverk, from the French; Roaſtbeef, Club, from the English ; Solo, Trio, from the Italian. Rem. In a few words the foreign pronunciation is retained in only a part of the word: Penſion (ponng-si-one). $ 42. The pronunciation of the educated classes and in polite circles in the city of Berlin is at present the standard of good pronunciation throughout Germany. The above rules are given in accordance with the usages now prevailing in Berlin. 3. DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. (Sylbentrennung.) § 43. In Pronouncing, the following laws prevail: 246 [8 43–45. ORTHOGRAPHY. 1. In simple words : (1.) A single consonant, between two vowels, is pronounced with the last vowel, as in: Va'-ter, Bru'-der, le'-ben, ba'zben, mei'-ner, gu'-ten. (2.) Of two or more consonants, the first is pronounced with the preceding, and the remainder with the following vowel: Mit-te, ſchim'-pfen, Deut-ide. 2. In derivative words, prefixes, and suffixes not begin- ning with a vowel, are pronounced in separate sylla- bles: Ge-ſtalt', ängſt-lidy, duld'-ſam; Stand'-haft-ig-keit, but Fürſ-tin, Klei'-dung, Färbe-rei, Gü'-te. 3. The parts of compound words are pronounced sepa- rately: aus-ein-an'der, Don'ners-tag, fort'-Heben, her-um'. Rem. Some writers mark the division of syllables according to the pro- nunciation, others according to the roots of words. The latter method is more convenient in paradigms: lieb'-en, mein'-er, gut'-er, gut'-e, breit'-eſt. 4. ACCENT. (Accent.) § 44. The Primary Accent is on the radical syllable of simple words, whether primitive or derivative; inflectional - endings, and most prefixes and suffixes ($ 45, 3, Rem.), are unaccented: lieb'-en, mein'-en, lieb'-licheren, Va'-ter, Ge-ſtalt, ge-liebt'-eſten, ge-fälr'-licyſten. Exc. The accent is not on the radical syllable in leben'-dig. § 45. In Compound Words, the radical syllable of the most emphatic component takes the primary accent: 1. The first or modifying word of compound nouns and adjectives, and of separable compound verbs, takes the primary accent: Kauf-mann, Vor-ſchrift, gelb'-roth, auß'- gehen, ein' -führen, umher'-geben, miß'-trauen. Exc. 1. The nouns Fahrhun'-bert, Jalrtau'=fend, Nordweſt", Südoſt', etc. Exc. 2. The adjectives vollkom'-men, 110thwen'-dig, wahrhaf-tig, leiblaf'-tig, Barmher'-zig, glückſe'-lig, ſeibei'-gen; allwei'-ſe, allmädy'-tig, großmädh'-tig, hodyad'-elig (and some other titular epithets). $ 45–48.] 247 ACCENTS. 2. The accent is on the last syllable of adverbs com- pounded with prepositions, and of those compounded with hin, her, all, and viel: wovon', womit', davon'; ber- ein', heraus', vollauf, wohlan', allein', vielleicht, vielmehr'. 3. Inseparable prefixes are not accented: bewei'sſen, ver- ſtel-en, mißfallen, Unterhal'-tung. Exc. 1. Ant-litz, and Ant-wort (and its compounds). Exc. 2. All words compounded with crz- and iirs, and many of those com- pounded with miſ- and un-: Erz'-biſchof, Ur'-ſadje, miß-handeln, un'-gyeid) (but mißfal-len, unend'-lid), etc.). Rem. 1. Some long words, however, have several subordinate accents: Freund'ſdjaftlichkeit'en, Feu'cr-verſidy'erungs-geſell'ſdiaft, Staats'-ſchul’den-til'gungs-kaſſen-budh'halter ($ 51, Rem. 1). Rem. 2. Such very long words as the last are only tolerated in official lan- guage, and even there they had better be avoided. § 46. Most Foreign Words retain their original accent. This is generally on the last syllable in words from 1. The French: Offizier, Couvert', Muſik', Majeſtät. 2. The Latin and Greek: Natur', Student', Theologie'. Rem. 1. The foreign terminations -ei, -ier, -iſt, -iren (ieren), -ur, -aſt, etc., take the primary accent, whether in words of German or in those of for- eign origin; Färberei', Barbier', Blumiſt', poli’ren, Glaſur', Moraft'. Rem. 2. The accent is changed in the inflection, and in the derivatives of some foreign words: Dot-tor (Doktoʻ-ren), Charak-ter (Charakte'-re), Mufit' muſika'-liſd)), Gramma'-tik (grammatika'-liſ()). $ 47. Differences in the position of the accent upon words, and in the position of emphatic words in sentences, are among the chief causes of the great difference existing be- tween the intonation and the cadence of the English and of the German languages. 5. CAPITAL LETTERS. (Große Anfangsbudiſtaben.) § 48. Capital Letters are used as initials to: 1. All Nouns, other parts of speech used as nouns, and nouns used adverbially: der Mann, die Stadt, das Haus; der Gute, das Leſen; Morgens, Abends, Vormittags. 248 [$ 48–49. ORTHOGRAPHY. 0 2. The Indefinite Pronouns : Jemand, Niemand, Jeder- mann; also Etwas and Nichts, when not before nouns or adjectives; and Ale, Alles, Einige, Mancher, Viele, when used substantively. 3. The Numeral Ein, when used in contrast to ander. 4. The Absolute Possessives : der Meinige, das Ihrige, die Meinigen, die Seinigen, etc. 5. Adjectives, derived from proper names of persons or cities : die Kanti de Philoſophie, der Kölner Dom. Rem. Other proper adjectives do not begin with capital letters: die deutſdie Spradie, der deutſdie Bund, eine amerikaniſdie Zeitung. 6. COMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. $ 49. Great changes have taken place in the words of the German and English languages during the fourteen centuries especially that have passed since their separa- tion. 1. A few words only have the same radical form, or, with different spelling, are pronounced alike, as: Mann, man. fal-en, to fall. Hand, hand. Maus, mouse. feint, fine. hang-en, to hang. Gras, grass. braun, brown. mein, mine. bind-en, to bind. Glas, glass. ſauer, sour. in, in. find-en, to find. Ring, ring. warm, warm. Vei, by. Dring-e11, to bring. Finger, finger. bitter, bitter. ſing-en, to sing. Hunger, hunger. Blind, blind. fier, here. | fint-ent, to sink. Huf, hoof. mild, mild. |fdjier, sheer. lſpinn-en, to spin. 2. The following examples illustrate the most striking variations in the development of letters and of sounds: (1.) a. Haar, hair. Schaaf, sheep. alt, old. Grab, grave. Paar, pair. Sdilaf, sleep. Falte, fola. Nabe, raven. adit, eight. Nader, needle. Halt, hold. Sklave, slave. Fradit, freight. klar, clear. falt, cold. Knabe (knave). Xal, eel. Hanf, hemp. Hace, hoe Platz, place. Mall, meal. Gaſt, guest. Naſe, nose. Krahn, crane. Stall, steel. ivareit, were. war, was. Saat, seed. Stainm, comb. Gans, goase. COMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 249 (2.) e, ä. 1 (3.) i, ie. (5.) u, i. 1 (6.) au. Nedjen, rake. Biene, bee. und, and. grau, gray. bredient, break. wir, we. Hut, hat. Laub, leaf. Weg, way. Filz, felt. Budje, beech. taub, deaf. Lenz, lance. Sinne, sense. Furdit, fear. Haufe, heap. Merf, mark. Siríde, cherry. Ruß, kiss. Saum, seam. Herz, heart. Pinſel, pencil. Bruſt, breast. laudy, leek. Sdimerz (smart). ſieben, seven. Sdulter, shoulder Haupt, head. ſterben (starve). Jirren, err. Fuchs, fox. Auge, eye. ſdymeden (smack). ich, I. Stupfer, copper. Braut, bride. feſt, fast. liegen, lie. Sturın, storm. (dlau, sly. fett, fat. lieben, love. Wurm, worm. Fauſt, fist. ſehen, see. dieben, shove. | Blume, bloom. Tau, tow. ſtellen, steal. ſieben, sift. tuit, Co. Taube, dove. effent, eat. fdjießen, to shoot. Budy, book. Nauni, room. meſſen, mete. ſprießeni, sprout. | Bruder, brother. blau, blue. Feld, field. ſpielen, play. Mutter, mother. Sait, de. zehnt, ten. Stirdie, church. Stuly, cow. (jauert, hew. Epheu, ivy. Siſſent, cushion. Ulr, hour. gebent, give. Grund, ground. (17.) ei. leben, live. (4) j, j. Mund, mouth. Meiſter, master. denken, think. Flocke, flake. Pfund, pound. heil ! bail! ſenken, sink. groß, great. rund, round. preiſen, praise. Ped), pitch.. roly, raw. Sund, sound. | brei, three. fedis, six. Stroh, straw. Wunde, wound. | frei, free. melfeni, milk. Tochter, daughter. genug, enough. Gleidien, bleach. leden, lick. Dhr, ear. füllen, to feel. weid), weak. geheni, go. Bohne, bean. grün, green. Geileir, heal. (ne), no. Noth, need. ſüß, sweet. Weizen, wheat. Sdynee, snow. rotly, red. Füße, feet. Ziveig, twig. Seele, soul. Brod, bread. über, evil. ein, one. Sdwert, sword. lody, high. Hülfe, help. allein, alone. fdielten, scold. Noggen, rye. fünf; five. beide, both. Stree, clover. Sommer, summer. |ligent, lie. eigen, own. Werth), worth. Donner, thunder. Hügel, hill. Eide, oak. Wer, who. Sonne, sun. Mühle, miil. Speide, spoke. Negel, rule. Sohn, son. Sünde, sin. Kleider, clothes. Strähe, crow. voů, full. glühen, glow. Geiſt, ghost.. mälen, mow. Sporn, spur. Küſte, coast. ! (ghastly). ſäljen, sow. hörent, hear. i Fürſt (first). II (gas). ſpähent, spy. (dwören, swear. | brüten, brood. leihen, loan. wäre, were. zwölf, twelve. hüpfen, hop. meiſt, most. läßt, lets. Mönig, king. Büdiſe, box. Neile, row. Väter, fathers. Mörter, mortar. Sit, south. Seife, soap. ſägen, saw. Del, oil. Kühe, cows. reiben, rub. Wäſſer, waters. Mörder, murderer: Brühe, broth. | zwei, two. L2 250 COMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. (8.) eu, äu. | Feder, feather. dlagen (slay). Juno, Juno. Hei, hay. Leber, leather. Hagel, hail. Juli, July. Feuer, fire. fieben, seethe. Nagel, nail. Juwel, jewel. nieun, nine. Daumen, thumb. Segel, sail. | Major, major. Freund, friend. Denken, think. Flegel, flail. neu, new. | Ding, thing. Negen, rain. (15.) k, d, 9. ſtreuen, strew. Dorn, thorn. Siegel, seal. fauen, chew. treu, truc. | Dreſden, thresh. Reger, rule. Käſe, cheese. Preußen, Prussia. drei, three. Hügel, hill. Minn, chin. Kreuz, cross. durd), through. fägen, to saw. Kind, child. Eule, owl. beide, both. gleidy, like. Kiſte, chest. heulen, howl. Süd, south. genug, enough. | Kirche, church. Mäuſe, mice. Erbe, earth. geivalır, aware. Kirſdie, cherry. Würde, worth. Teig, dough. Stärke, starch. (9.) 6. Pflug, plough. Sklave, slave. haben, to have. (11.) f, v, ph. Bogen, bow. Mark, marrow. heben, to heave. Sdhaaf, sheep. borgen, borrow. Ede (edye). leben, to live. Sdilaf, sleep morgen, morrow. Hede, hedge. eben, even. Sdriff, ship. ſorgen, sorrow. Brüde, bridge. Nabe, raven. Hanf, hemp. folgen, follow. Zuder, sugar. Taube, dove. reif, ripe. Balg, bellows. Quelle (well). Biber, beaver. 1 helfen, help. Galgen, gallows. kliebeni, cleave. Saft, sap. Glode, clock. (16.) fieben, seven. fdarf, sharp nagen, guaw. als, as. Sieb, sieve. auf, up. foldy, such. oben, over. offent, open. (13.) H. weld), which. Grab, grave. |fünf, five. wann, wlien. Mörter, mortar. Dieb, thief. Ofen, oven. wer, who. Feſſel, fetter. Leben, life. vier, four. weldie, which. Säber, sabre. ſieben, sift. bevor, before. wic, how. | Zwilling, twin. Weib (wife). vergeſſen, forget. wo, where. Eider, acorn. Schwalbe, swallow Epheu, ivy. weil (while). idyleiđịcnt, sneak. Birne, pear. weiß, white. Klippe, cliff. (12.) g. Weizen, wheat. 1 (17.) m. Nippe, rib. Tag, day. weder (whether). Lamni, lamb. Stopper, stubble. mag, may. flimmen, climb. Haupt, head. lag, lay. (14.) i. Stamm, comb. ſageni, say. ia, yes. Daumen, thumb. (10.) d. Uuge, eye. Fahr, year. Sdirm, screen. der, die, bas, the. Roggen, rye. Fody, yoke. dieſe, these. Fliege, fly. Fakob, Jacob. (18.) n. dui, thou. Honig, honey. jung, young. Beſen, broom. bein, thine. Pfennig (penny). Face, jacket. Alaun, alum. bann, then. Gari, garn. Fohann, John. felten, seldom. denn, than. gelb, yellow. Fude, Jew. Orden, order. Bruder, brother. Tgeſtern, yesterday. I Juni, June. Degen, dagger. UW. COMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 251 Stern, star. Eiſen, iron. (23.) 3. 13. Lerdie, lark. fern, far. Haſe, hare. zahm, tame. ſedys, six. Sporn, spur. nieſen, sneeze. Zalın, tooth. Fudis, fox. Thräne, tear. fratzen, scratch. zehn, ten. Odys, ox. Biene, bee. Zinn, tin. Gans, goose. Flachs, flax. (21)t, thị. Zol, toll. Wadjs, wax. Zahnı, tooth. zu, to, too. Teid), ditch. fünf, five. Traum, dream. | zwei, two. ander, other. Todjter, daughter. durd), through. zwanzig, twenty. Sind, child. todt, dead. ladjen, laugh. Filz, felt. Thaler, dollar. mandy, many. Herz, heart. (19.) r. Sat, dev. Salz, salt. kuren (choose). thuat, do. (25.) ſds. Kate, cat. frierent, freeze. Sdymied, smith. Nit, kid. verlieren, lose. theuer, dear. īdymal, small. Dutzend, dozen. wir, we. Bett, bed. Stein, stone. Kreux, cross. wer, who. Blut, blood. Sdywert, sword. Platz, place. warten, wait. : Bart, beard. Frojdy, frog. war, was. Mutſy, mood. klatſdien, clap. {predjen, speak. Flutly, flood. (24.) dh. (26.) pf. Leiſer, hoarse. Sdjuſter, shoulder Nadít, night. leiten, lead. Madhit, might. (20.) 1, 11, B. reiten, ride. leidyt, light. Hüpfen, hop. aus, out. gleiten, glide. Lidyt, light. Kupfer, copper. effen, eat. Vater, father. fedyten, fight. Opfer, offering. meſſen, mete. Mutter, mother. Stredyt (knight). Pfeffer, pepper. Taſſen, hate. tauen, thaw. Fradyt, freight. Pfeife, pipe. Taſſen, let. tauſend, thousand. I maden, make. groß, great. Antwort, answer. bredjen, brake. Pflanze, plant. Loos, lot. ſudjen, seek. Pflaume, plum. Fuß, foot. Budy, book. Pflaſter, plaster. Nuß, nut. Gewinn, gain. gleidy, like. pflücken, pluck. ſüß, sweet. Sdweſter, sister. Kudheit, cake. | Pflug, plow. 3. In a few cases, foreign words retain their original forms, or have developed, in both languages, into the same modification of form: Lat. natio, Nation', nation. Gr. ueréwpov, Meteor, meteor. Low L. parcus, Park, park. Lat. studens, Student', student. Ital. solo, Solo, solo. 4. More usually the forms vary: Gr. äyyellos, Engel, angel. Arab. masjid, Moſdyee', mosque. Lat. Johannes, Johann, John. oo laimun, Limo'ne, lemon. o Colonia, Köln, Cologne. Pers. mûmijâ, Mu'mie, mummy. Low L. missa, Meffe, Ind. tabaco, Ta'bak, tobacco. (22.) w. Inass, 7 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. (Etymologie und Syntax.) § 48. Etymology treats, (1.) Of the origin, development, changes, decay, and death of words and grammatical forms. (2.) Of the classification of words into parts of speech, and of the changes words undergo by inflection. § 49. As to their origin, words are primitive or derivative. As to composition, words are simple or compound. 1. Primitive or radical words are either: 1. Original root-words, as: ich, du, ein, in, gut, groß, Holz, Budje. 2. Or they have added the verbal ending an: Jab'-en, bind'-en, ſeh'-en. Rem. By far the greater number of primitive words are verbs. 2. Derivative words are formed from primitive words: 1. By modifying the original root: (bind-en), Band, Bind. 2. By adding prefixes and suffixes: 6 „), Binder, Binde, Binder, Gebinde, Bande, Bänddien, Vändig, bändigen, Bändiger, Bändigung, bündelni, vündig, Bindigkeit, Bündniß. Rem. Many derivative words, the derivation of which is no longer felt," are usually called primitive words, as : Manni, from Old-German mënan (or Gothic minan), to thinks; roth, from Sanscrit rudhira, blood ; Del, from Latin oleum, oil; Koll, from Italian cavolo, cabbage. $ 50. Compound words are formed by joining two or more simple (or single) words into one word. Federmneſfer, Penknife. Himmelblau, Blue as the sky. Baumwolle, Cotton. Gelbroth, Orange-colored. Ausgehen, To go out. Womit ? . Wherewith ? Stattfinden, To take place. Vielleicht, Perhaps. Rem. 1. Sometimes very long compound words are formed : Staatsſduldentilgungskaſſenbudyhalter, The keeper of account of the fund devoted to the payment of the national debt ($ 42,3,1). Rem. 2. Two or more compound words of the same kind may be united by a hyphen : Feld-, Garten- und Aderbau, Drainage, horticulture, and agriculture. Rem. 3. Parts. of long words are often united by hyphens : Feuer-Verſidierungs-Geſellſchaft, Fire Insurance Company. Rem. 4. Compound words are much more largely used in German than in English. New combinations may be formed indefinitely. § 51–54.] THE ARTICLE. 253 § 51. There are ten parts of speech in German : 1. Flexible : the Article, Noun, Adjective, Numeral, . Pronoun, Verb. 2. Inflexible: the Abverb, Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. $ 52. Syntax treats of the power certain words or parts of speech have in determining the forms and position of other words, or parts of speech. THE ARTICLE. (Der Urtikel.) $ 53. In all languages where the Article exists, the Def- inite Article is derived from a Demonstrative Pronoun; the Indefinite Article is derived from the Numeral One. In German there is no difference between the forms: 1. Of the Def. Article der, and the Dem. Pron. der. 2. Or of the Indef. Article eint, and the Numeral eini. Rem. The Article is distinguished from the Pronoun or Numeral: (1.) By never receiving a strong emphasis. (2.) By never being used without a noun. $ 54. Declension of the Article: 1. Definite, der, the. 12. Indefinite, ein, a, an. SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. Neut. All Gen. | Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. der, die, das die. I cin, cin-e, cin. Gen, deß, der, del. der. cintec. eitt-er, ein-cs. Dat, den, der, dent. den. . ein-em, cist-cr, cin-ent. Acc. dert, die, das die. I cin-ent, ein-e, ciit. Rem. 1. The vowel is short in das, des, and long in der, Deni, ben. Rem. 2. When no obscurity of meaning or harshness of sounds is thereby produced, the following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable (Lesson X., 2): 1. With Dat. sing. (m. and 1.) dem: am, beim, hinterm, im, vom, zım, unterm (an dem, bei dem, hinter dem, in dem, von dem, zu deni, unter dem). 2. With Dat. sing. (fem.) der: zur (zu Der). 3. With Acc.“ (neut.) das: ans, aufs, durdys, fürs, ins, ums (an das auf das, durd, Das, für das, in das, um das), 254 [$ 55. SXNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. $ 55. Syntax of the Article. The following are some of the most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article. 1. The Definite Article is employed: 1. Before nouns used in a general or abstract sense: Der Menſdy iſt ſterblidh, Man is mortal. Die Geſchichte der Kunſt, The history of art. Das Gold iſt koſtbar, Gold is costly. 2. Before some individual concrete nouns: Das Frühſtüd iſt fertig, Breakfast is ready. Nadh dem Abendeſſen, After supper. 3. When a proper name, or the name of a division of time, is preceded by an adjective: Das feſte Magdeburg, Strong Magdeburg. Der vorige Mai war kart, Last May was cold. 4. Before feminine geographical names: Die Sdyweiz iſt ſehr ſchön, Switzerland is very beautiful. Waren Sie in der Türkei? Have you been in Turkey? 5. Before nonins of number, weight, and measure (while in English the Indefinite Article would be used): Zwei Thaler das Pfund, Two dollais a pound. Viermal die Wodie, Four times a week. Rem. 1. The Definite Article is often used where in English the Personal Pronoun would be employed : Mit dem Hut in der Hand, With his hat in his hand. Rem. 2. The dative of the definite article, contracted with the proposition 31, is used to express promotion or election to office or rank: Er war zum Präſidenten gewählt, He was elected President. 2. The Definite Article is omitted : 1. Before many legal terms and some words in ordinary life: Appellant, Beklagter ſagt- The plaintiff, the defendant says- Ueberbringer dieſes,. The bearer of this. 2. Before names of the points of the compass: . Sie ſegelten gegen Norden, They sailed towards the north. 3. The Article must be added if the case of the noun cannot be deter- mined without it: Die Nedyte der Frauen, The rights of women. 4. With two or more nouns of different genders or numbers, the Article must be repeated: Der Bruder und die Sdyweſter, The brother and sister. $ 56, 57.] 255 THE NOUN. THE NOUN. (Das Hauptwort.) $ 56. Nearly all Nouns may be traced back to verbal roots ($ 49,1, Rem.). With the exception of the very small number that are radical words, German nouns are formed: 1. By the modification of a verbál root ($ 48,2,1). 2. By adding prefixes or suffixes to other words (8 57-58). 3. By compounding nouns with other words ($ 58). Rem. The formation, inflection, and syntax of the German are far more complicated than those of the English noun. On the other hand, as the German nouns are mostly formed from native roots, they are more easily understood than English nouns, which are so largely imported from foreign languages. $ 57. In forming Derivative Nouns, the chief suffixes are: 1. Those that form concrete nouns, dien, el, er, in, ling: 1. -dyert and -leilt-with umlaut to the radical vowel, where possible -form diminutive nouns : Häusdien, a little house. Bädſein, a small brook. Mütterdjen, dear mother. Sdjweſterdyen, dear sister. 2. -el usually denotes material instruments : Heber, a lever (from Beben; to heave, lift). Deder, a cover (from beden, to cover). · 3. -er denotes (1) male persons: Lehrer, a teacher, Sänger, a singer, Wittwer, a widower, Sdyweizer, a Swiss. (2) animals: Sperber, a sparrow-hawk, Sdyröter, a beetle. (3) instruments : Bolrer, an auger, Weder, an alarm clock. 4. -in (or -inn) forms feminine from masculine nouns: König, a king. Königin, a queen. Lehrer, a male teacher. Lehrerin, a female teacher. Schweizer, a Swiss. Sdyweizerin, a Swiss lady. 5. -ling modifies the meaning of nouns, often indicating dependence, contempt, or low valuation : Füngling, a youngster. Miethling, a hireling. . Lehrling, an apprentice. Dichterling, a poetaster. -256 [8 57: THE NOUN. 2. Suffixes forming mostly abstract nouns, e, ei (rei), heit (keit), niß, ſal, ſdhaft, thum, ung: 1. -e (with umlaut to radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives : Güte, goodness, Höhe, height, Länge, length, Tiefe, depth. 2. -ci (or -rci), in nouns formed from verbs, denotes a repeated or con- tinued action, often with the idea of contempt: Sdyneidjelei, flattery, Spielerei, foolish sport. 3. -heit (or -feit) forms (1) abstract nouns, from adjectives or participles : Sdjönheit, beauty, Gewandheit, dexterity, Dankbarkeit, thankfulness; (2) concrete nouns, from adjectives : Kleinigkeit, trifle ; (3) nouns, from personal nouns: Gottheit, Godhead, Stindheit, childhood. 4. -uiß denotes (1) condition or completion of a quality or action: Fin- ſterniß, darkness, Kenntniß, knowledge, Verhältniß, relation ; (2) in concrete nouns, the accomplishing agent or the accomplished object: Gefängniß, prison, Verzeidiniſ, catalogue. 5. =fal denotes (1)a condition : Trübſal, sadness, Sdridſal, fate; (2) the cause of a condition: Sdeuſal, a monster (causing horror). 6. -fdjaft denotes (1) relationship or condition of persons : Freundſchaft, friendship, Bereitſdhaft, readiness ; (2) a collection of persons of a certain grade or calling: Nitterſdaft, knighthood, Bauernſchaft, peasantry; (3) a collection of things of the same kind: Geräthidhaft, tools; (4) collective appellations of places: Drtſdaft, neighborhood. 7. -thum, (1) to adjective or verbal roots, denotes quality or condition, or that to which this quality adheres : Reid)thum, richness or șiches, Wadjsthum, growth, Heiligtlum, sanctuary; (2): to personal nouns, it denotes condition, office, or dominion: Saiſerthun, empire. 8. Fing, (1) denotes condition, what produces a condition, or a thing put into a certain condition: Trennung, division, Miſdung, mixt- ure; (2) forms collective, nouns: Waldung,forest, Kleidung, clothing. 3. The most important prefixes are ge, miß, in, ur, erz: 1. ge- denotes collectiveness, union, completion, or repetition: Gebirge, mountain range, Gefälrte, companion, Gebäude, edifice, Geräuſd), a continued noise (as of rivers, arms, machinery, etc.). 2. miſ- denotes negation, incompletness, or negation of quality: Miſ- ton, discord, Mißbegriff, misconception, Mißgunſt, disfavor. 3. un- denotes negation or perversion of quality: Ungliid, misfortune, Inmenſd), inhuman person, Unſcurd, innocency. 4. uir- denotes source, origin, or cause, or a thing in its original con- dition: Urſprung, origin, Urſadje, cause, Urwald, primeval forest. 5. erz- (arch) denotes the first or greatest : Erzbiſdyof, archbishop, Erzdiel, arrant thief, Erzmarſchall, lord high marshal. $ 58, 59.] 257 ATTRIBUTES OF THE NOUN. § 58. Compound Nouns are formed: 1. By prefixing to nouns modifying words, which may be of any part of speech, except an article or interjec. tion: Das Sdulhaus, schoolhouse. Der Kaufmann, merchant. 11 Fremdwort, foreign word. Die Herkunſt, origin. Der Zweikampf, duel. Der Eingang, entrance. . Selbſtmord, suicide. Der Aberglaube, superstition. 2. By uniting the words of some familiar expressions : Das Vergißmeinnidit, the forget-me-not. Der Taugenidits, the good for nothing fellow. Das Felängerjelieber, the honeysuckle. Der Springinsfeld, the romp. Rem. 1. In a few cases the first word is in the gen. sing. or the gen. pl.: Das Tageslidyt, the daylight. Das Wörterbudy, the dictionary. Rem. 2. By a false analogy, some nouns take on the gen. ending, 8 (Cs): Der Religionsfrieg, war having its origin in religions feuds.. Die Feuer-Verſicherungs-Geſellſdiaft, Fire Insurance Company. Rem. 3. In a few compound nouns the adjective also is declined: Nom. sing., Der Hoheprieſter: Nom. pl.; die Hohenprieſter. Dat. 6 Acc. « Dem Hohenprieſter. Den Hohenprieſter. Dat. 66 den Hohenprieſtern. Acc. 6 die Hohenprieſter. 1. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. (Attribuite des Hauptwortes.) flexible parts of speech ($ 50), except the verb, are: 1. Two Numbers : Singular and Plural. 2. Three Genders: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 3. Four Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. Rem. Substantives, whether nouns or pronouns, control the gender, number, person, and case of all other flexible parts of speech. Hence a knowledge of the attributes of the noun, while one of the most difficult, is at the same time one of the most important things in the study of the German language. 258 · [8-60, 61. GENDER OF NOUNS. III 2. GENDER OF NOUNS. . (Das Geſchlecht der Hauptwörter.) $ 60. 1. Only in nouns referring to persons, and in the names of some animals, is the natural gender observed: Der Mann, the man. Die Frau, the woman. Der Löwe, the lion. 2. Of names of animals, some are masculine, others are feminine, and a few are neuter: Der Adler, the eagle. Die Fliege, the fly. Das Pferd, the horse. 3. Of names of inanimate objects and abstract nouns, all of which are neuter in English, some are masculine, some feminine, and some neuter: Der Tiſdy, the table. Die Thüre, the door. Das Haus, the house. Muth, courage. "Güte, goodness. I Ende, the end. Rem. The Gender of German nouns can only be learned by long practice. During the history of the language, many nouns have passed from one gender to another. Of a few nouns the gender is not yet settled. 4. The following will serve as general rules in fixing the gender of nouns: § 61. Nouns Masculine by meaning are the names of: 1. Male Beings: der Mann, König, Löwe; the man, king, lion. 2. Deity and Angels: der Gott, Enger, Cherub, Seraph, Teufel; God, angel, cherub, seraph, devil. 3. Seasons: der Winter, Frühling (but das Frühjahr), Sommer, Herbſt; Winter, Spring (Spring), Summer, Fall. 4. Months: der Januar, Februar, März, April, Mai, Suni, Juli, etc. January, February, March, April, May, June, July, etc. 5. Days of the Week: der Montag, Dienſtag, Mittwod), Donnerſtag, etc. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, etc. 6. Points of the Compass: der Nord, Süd, Oſt, Weſt; North, South, etc. 7. Mountains: der Harz, Veſuv, Aetna, the Harz, Vesuvius, Etna. 8. Large Birds: der Adler, Habidit, Geier ; the eagle, hawk, vulture. 9. Fishes: der Aal, Hedit, Lady8; the eel, pike, salmon. 10. Bugs and Worms: der Maikäfer, Bluteger; the May-bug, leech. 11. Fruit-trees, Grains, Shrubs, and wild Plants: der Apfelbaum, Weizen, Holunder, Laudy; the apple-tree, wheat, elder, leek. 13. Mineral Substances (except metals, $ 64): der Diamant, Sdiwefel, Stein, Marmor; diamond, sulphur, stone, marble. § 62–66.] 259 GENDER OF NOUNS. § 62. Nouns feminine by meaning are the names of: 1. Female Beings: die Frau, Königin, Löwin, woman, queen, lioness. 2. Smaller Birds and Insects: die Nachtigall, Droſſel, Fliege, Wanze, the nightingale, thrush, fly, bug. 3. Forest-trees, Fruits and Flowers, especially if ending in e: die Eide, * Birne, Nole, the oak, pear, rose. 4. Most Rivers: die Donau, Elbe, Spree, the Danube, Elbe, Spree. Exc. der Nhein, Main, etc., the Rhine, Maine, etc. § 63. Nouns neuter by meaning are the names of: 1. Most Countries and Places: dus heiße Italien, hot Italy, das ſchöne Berlin, beautiful Berlin, das feſte Magdeburg, strong Magdeburg. 2. Collective Nouns: das Vorf, Heer, the people, army, das Gras, Sdrilf, ' Rohr, grass, sedge, reeds. 3. Metals: das Silber, Gold, Blei, Eiſen, silver, gold, lead, iron. Exc. der Stahl, Zink, sobalt, steel, zinc, cobalt. § 64. Nouns masculine by form are: 1. Most monosyllabic nouns not ending in t ($ 65): der Brud, Dank, Fall, Haß, Quell, the breach, thanks, fall, hatred, source. 2. All nouns ending in idy, ig, ing, ling, m: der Stid), Honig, Häring, Lehrling, Helm, the sting, honey, herring, apprentice, helmet. Exc. Sas Meſſing, brass, das Ding, the thing. $ 65. Nouns feminine by form are: 1. All dissyllabic nouns ending in c, and not denoting male beings: die Sirdye, Kirſdie, Sonne, Erde, the church, cherry, sun, earth. Exc. 1. das Auge, Ende, Erbe, the eye, end, inheritance. Exc. 2. der Name, Wille, the name, will. 2. Most nouns ending in adht, udt, uld, nunft: die Nadit, Fludit, Ge- duld, Vernunft, night, flight, patience, reason. 3. All derivatives ending in heit, keit, ſchaft, ci, in (inn), ung, ath, uth: die Freiheit, Dankbarkeit, Freundſdaft, Bäckerei, Königinn, Hoffnung, . Heimath, Armutſ, freedom, thankfulness, friendship, bakery, queen, hope, home, poverty. Exc. der (or das) Zierrat), the ornament, daß Þetfdjaft, Geſdırei, the seal, the cry. $ 66. Nouns neuter by form are: 1. Diminutives (in dhen, Teint, see § 57, 1, 1), whatever may be the natural gender : das Pferdden, Bidlein, the little horse, little book; das Fräulein, Mädden, Kindlein, the young lady, girl, child. 260 [867–69. THE NOUNS. 2. Derivatives ending in ſal, jel, thunt: das Sdjidjal, Räthſel, Staiſer- thum, Chriſtentium, fate, riddle, empire, Christendom. Exc. 1. der Wedſel, Frrthum, Neidythum, the change, error, riches. Exc. 2. die Adiſel, Amſel, Deidiſel, the shoulder, blackbird, adze. Exc. 3. dic (or das) Mühſal, Trůbſal, the distress, sorrow: 3. Nouns with the prefix ge: das Gebäude, Geſetz, the building, law. Exc. 1. der Gebraud), Gedanke, Gehorſam, Genuß, Geſang, Geldmaď, Gewinn; the use, thought, obedience, enjoyment, song, taste, gain. Exc. 2. die Gebühr, Geburt, Geduld, Gefalır, Gemeinde, Genige, Geſdridite, Geſtalt, the duty, birth, patience, danger, community, satisfaction, history, form. $ 67. Compound Nouns take the gender of the last noun: der Schullehrer, the school teacher (die Sdule, der Lehrer). die Hofkirde, the court church' (der Hof, die Sirdie). das Sdhulhaus, the school-house (die Sáule, das Haus). Exc. 1. Der Abſdyeu (die Sdeu), der Mittwody (die Wodye). . Exc. 2. Die Anmuth, Demuth, Großmutt), Langmuth, Sanftmuth, Sdiwermuth, Wehmuth (der Muth, Hodmuth, etc.); die Ants wort (das Wort). Exc. 3. Das Gegentheil, das (or der) Bordertheil, etc. (der Theil). Exc. 4. Names of cities are neuter, whatever the compound may be: Das feſte Magdeburg (die Burg), strong Magdeburg. $ 68. Foreign Nouns usually retain their original gender: Die Theologie, theology (from Gr. o Geoloyia, theology). E.cc. But some foreign words have been drawn out of their original gender: der Körper, die Nummer, das Fenſter; from Lat. (neut.) corpus, (masc.) numerus, (fem.) fenestra. $ 69. A number of nouns have two genders, with a dif- ferent signification for each gender, as: Der Band, the volume. Das Band, the ribbon. 1 Bauer, the peasant. , Bauer, the cage. ✓ Bund, the alliance. 1 Bund, the bundle. 1 Chor, the chorus. 1 Chor, the choir. , Erbe, the heir. Erbe, the inheritance. Die Erkenntniß, knowledge. 1 Erkenntniß, the sentence. Der Harz, the Harz Mountains. 11 Harz, the resin. ! Heide, the heathen. Die Heide, the heath. . Stiefer, the jaw. 1 Kiefer, the pine. Il tunde, the costumer. ..! Kunde, the knowledge. 11 Leiter, the leader. 1. Leiter, the ladder. 1 Mangel, the want. ✓ Mangel, the mangles. $ 70-72.] .. 261 DECLENSION DE NOUNS. Die Mark, the markgraviate. Das Mark, the marrow. Der Meſſer, the measurer. , Meſſer, the knife. I Sdild, the shield. i Sdyild, the sign. , Sdwulſt, the bombast. Die Sdwulſt, the swelling. See, the lake. 1. See, the ocean. , Sproſſe, the sprout. Il Sproſſe, round of a ladder. Die Steuer, the tax, Das Steuer, the rudder. Der Stift, the handle. Stift, the endowment. 1 Thor, the fool. 1 Thor, the gate. 1 Verdienſt, the reward. Cerdienſt, the merit. Die Wehr, the bulwark. Wehr, the wier. $ 70. During the history of the language some nouns have passed from one gender to another: Gothic, der luftus, der sidus, das leik, , Old Ger., dër luft, der situ, die lêch, das saf, die ribba, Mid. Ger., dër luft, der site, die lîch, das saf, das rippe, New Ger., die Luft, die Sitte, die leidie, der Saft, die Nippe, the air. the custom, the corpse. the sap. the rib. 3. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. (Deflination der Hauptwörter.) § 71. The influences which have produced the great variety now existing in the declension of German nouns are still at work. The most important of these are: 1. The increasing use of the umlaut. 2. The tendency of terminations to lengthen root vowels. 3. The passing of nouns from one gender to another. 4. The increasing number of masculine nouns with -er in the plural. $ 72. The many different ways in which common nouns are declined may be most conveniently grouped into three classes or Declensions: 1. The Old Declension, containing masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns, and having three forms in the plural. 2. The New Declension, containing masculine and feminine nouns, and having one form -11 (-en) in the plural. 3. The Mixed Declension, containing masculine and neuter nouns, and having one form -nl (-ent) in the plural. Rem. The following table illustrates these three declensions: TABLE OF THE DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS. Singular. . Plural. 1. Old Declension. I. FORM (M. and N.). II. FORM (M. and N.). III. FORM (M., F., N.). Nom. der Maler. Der Vater. Der Mann. das Bud. Der Tag der Bad. die Stadt. Gen. Des Maler-8. Des Bater-5. des Mann-C8. Des Budy-cô. des Tag-e8. des Badh-cs. der Stadt. Dat. Dem Maler. Dem Vater. [ Dem Mann-C. dem Buch-c. | Dem Tag-c. dem Badh-e. Der Stadt. Acc. den Maler. Den Bater. Den Mann. Das Bud). I den Tag. den Badı. die Stadt.. Nom. die Maler. Die Väter. die Männ-er. Die Bidh-er. die Tag-c. die Bädh-c. die Städt-e. Gen. Der Maler. Der Väter, Der Männ-er. Der Büdi-cr. 1 Der Tag-e. Der Bädı-e. Der Städt-e. Dat. den Maler-11. den Väter-11. / Den Männ-ern. den Büdi-ern. Den Tag-cit. Den Bädi-cit. den Städt-cn. Acc. die Maler. Die Väter. die Männ-er. Die Büch-cr. | Die Tag-e. die Bäd)-e. die Städt-e. 2. New Declension. (M. and F.) 3. Mixed Declension. (M. and N.) Nom. der Menſd. Der Löwe: die Frau. der Doktor. das Ohr. Gen. des Menſd)-en. Des Löwe-n. Des Doktor-8. Des Dhr-c8. Dat. Dem Menſch-en. dem Löwe-n. der Frau. bem Doktor. dem Dhr-e. Acc. den Menſdh-en. Den Löwe-it. die Frau. Den Doktor. Das Dhr. Nom. die Menſd-en. die Löwe-11. die Frau-en. die Doftor'-en. Die Dhr-en. Gen. der Menſdy-c11. Der Löwe-11. der Frau-en. der Doktor'-en. Der Dhr-en. Dat. den Menſch-en. Den Löwe-ii. den Frau-cn. den Doktor'-en. den Dhr-en. Acc. die Menſd-en. die Löwe-n. die Frau-en. die Doktor'-en. die Ohr-en. Singular. Plural. $ 73, 74.] 263 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Rem. 1. All feminine nouns remain unchanged in the singular. Rem. 2. All nouns have en in the dative plural--as do also all articles, ad- jectives, and pronouns (except uns, eudi, ſidi).. Rem. 3. The umlaut is used only in the Old Declension. $ 73. The Old Declension includes by far the greater part of all German nouns, especially of those of the masculine and neuter gender. 'Rem. 1. It includes the greater part of: (1) masculine and netter primi- tive nouns; (2) derivatives in cr, dhen, leil, id, idhit, ig, ing, ling, niſ, ſal, thun. Rem. 2. Where no harshness of sound is thereby produced, the c may be dropped from the ending of the genitive and dative (especially of the dative): (1) of nouns not ending in 8, ßid or ng; (2) of nouns preceded by prepositions: von Ort zu Ort (but zu Hauſe); (3) of the word Gott (in dat., but not in gen.); mit Gott (but um Gottes Willen). $ 74. Nouns of the Old Declension are divided into three classes, according to the way in which their plurals are formed: First class : plural like singular (but sometimes takes the umlaut). Second class : plural adds -er (and always " 66 60 ). Third class: plural adds - € (and generally " " " ). 1. To the first class belong: 1. Masculine and neuter nouns in el, ert, er: 1. The masc., mostly with umlaut in plural: der Bater, pl. Väter. 2. The neut., 66 without " " " : das Waſſer,"s Waſſer. 2. Neuter diminutives in dien, lein: das Mädden, Fräulein, Blümden. 3. Neuter derivatives with the prefix gc, and the suffix e: das Gebäude. 4. The two feminine nouns, die Mutter, Tochter (pl. Mütter, Tödyter). 2. To the second class belong mostly neuter nouns, as: 1. Das Amt, Bad, Blatt, Bud, Dady, Dorf, Ei, Fad), Faß, Ferd, Geld, Glas, Glied, Grab, Gras, Gut, Haupt, Haus, Huhn, Salb, Kind, Kleid, Korn, Kraut, Lamm, lod), Maul, Neſt, Pfand, Nad, Neim, Rind, Sdloß, Sdiwert, Bolk, Weib; das Gemütſ, Geſdiredyt. 2. All words in thum: das Chriſtenthum, Kaiſerthum, der Neid/thum, etc. 3. A few foreign words: das Hoſpital, Negiment, etc. 4. Also a few masculine nouns, as: der Geiſt, Gott, Leib, Mann, Wald. 3. To the third class, which includes nouns of all gen- ders, belong : 1. All derivatives in uiß, ſal: die Kenntniß, das Bildniß, Sdridſal; II. 264 [8 75. THE NOUN. : 2. Masc. and neut. derivatives in and, at, id)t, ig, ing, ling, rich: der Heiland, Monat, König, Jüngling, Fähnrid); das Gewidyt, Ding. 3. Some foreign nouns: der Abt, Altar, General; das Concert, Concil. 4. Many other words of all genders : (1), der Aar, Arzt, Baum, Blitz, Eid, Fiſdy, Halm, Hirſdy, Hund, kniedyt, Naum, Satz, Theil, Tiſdi. (2), die Art, Braut, Bruſt, Frudt, Hand, Mraft, lidht, Madyt, Nadit; (3), das Beil, Bein, Loos, Moos, Pult, Sdriff, Thor, Werf, Gelenk. Rem. The umlaut is added to the plural of all feminine nouns that are capable of it, to most masculine nouns, but only to three neuter nouns (bas Chor, Floß, Nolir). $ 75. No neuter nouns belong to the New Declension. This declension includes: 1. Most feminine nouns: (1), monosyllables; sie Art, Bahn, Flur, Flutly, Sagd, Koſt, laſt, Pflidit, Qual, Saat, Sdjaar, Schlacyt, Sdrift, Sduld, Speer, That, Thür, Uhr, Welt, Zahl, etc. (2), derivatives in e, el, er (except Mutter, Todter, $ 74, 1, 4), ath, ci, end, heit, keit, in (1), fdjaft, ung: die Nede, Schüſſel, Sdyweſter, Heimath, Färberei, fugend, Walrheit, Dankbarkeit, Königin, Freund- (daft, Ordnung. 2. Many masculine nouns: (1), monosyllables : der Bär, Chriſt, Fink, Fürſt, Graf, Held, Herr, Hirt, Menſdy, Mohr, Narr, Ods, Thor. (2), polysyllables ending in -e: der Affe, Bote, Bube, Erbe, Satte, Haſe, Junge, Anabe, Neffe, Nabe, Nieſe, Franke, Griecie, Nuſſe. (3), personal nouns, with prefix ge-: der Gefährte, Gehülfe, Geſelle. 3. Many masc. and fem. foreign nouns: der Advokat, Candidat, Monard, Präſident; dic Facultät, Melodie, Oper, Perſon, Neger. 4. Names of nationality, as: der Baier, Seaffer, lingar, Tatar, Koſak. Rem. 1. The termination =1t is added to nouns ending in e, or in unaccented -cl, -er, -ar: to other nouns -en is added: N. Sing., der Löwe, Ungar, Menids (exc. Herr); die Nede, Frau. G. Sing., des Löwent, Ungarn, Menſdien ( “ Herrn); der Rebe, Fraue. N. Plur., die Löwen, Ungarn. Menſchen ( “ Herren); die Neden, Frauen. Rem. 2. Relics of the former declension of feminine nouns in the singular are retained in some familiar expressions, and in some compound words: auf Erden, zu Gunſten, von Gottes Gnaden, das Sonnenlicht. Rem. 3. The monosyllabic masculine nouns of this declension ($ 75, 2). are contracted from longer original forms, as: Old German: dër bëro, cristâni, fúristo, grârëe, (helid), hêrro, hirti, Mid. German : dër bër, kristen, vürste, grâve, helt, hërre, birte, New German: der Bär. Chriſt. Fürſt. Graf. Held. Herr. Hirt. § 76-78.] 265 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. e sind in MuſeumOriginal moj Some mot yet ; $ 76. The Mixed Declension contains a few masculine and neuter nouns which follow the old declension in the singular, and the new declension in the plural, as: 1. Masculine: Der Ahn, Bauer, Dorn, Forſt, Gaul, Gevatter, Halm, Lorbeer, Maſt, Nadybar, Pſalm, Sdimerz, See, Sporn, Staat, Sta- dher, Strahl, Thron, Vetter, Unterthan, Zieraty. 2. Many foreign nouns in or: Der Doktor, Nektor, Profeſſor, Paſtor. 3. Neuter: Das Auge, Bett, Ende, Hemd, Herz, Leig, Phr, Infekt. Rem. 1. Das Herz is? S. Das Herz, des Herzens, dem Herzen, das Herz ; irregular. S P. die Herzen, der Herzen, den Herzen, die Herzen. Rem. 2. Der Nachbar, der Unterthan, usually follow the new declension in the singular, as sometimes does der Gevatter. $ 77. Some Foreign Nouns which have not yet been fully naturalized are irregular. Some of them retain very much of their original modes of declension, as: Nom. Sing., Muſeum, Gymnaſium, rhythmus, Spondeus, Foſſil, Gen. Sing., Muſeums, Gymnaſiums, Rhythmus, Spondeus, Foſſils, Nom. Plur., Muſeen, Gymnaſien, Rhythmen, Spondeen, Foſſilien, Dat. Plur., Muſeen.' Gymnaſien. Rhythmen. Spondeen. Foſſilien. Nom. Sing., Lord, lady, Genie, Akteur, Parda, Solo, Saſino, Gen. Sing., lords, Lady, Genies, Akteurs, Paídas, Solos, Saſinos, Nom. Plur., lords, Ladies, Genies, Afteurs, Paidas, Solos, faſinos, Dat. Plur., Lords. Ladies. Genies. Akteurs. Paſdas. Solos. Kaſinos. Nom. Sing., Adjectiv, Kapital, Berbum, Muſikus, Thema, Gen. Sing., Adjectivs, Kapitals, Berbums, Muſikus, Themas, Nom. Plur., | Adjectiva, Kapitäler, Verba, Muſici, Themata, 56 6 S Adjectiven. Kapitalien. Verben. Muſiker. Themen. $ 78. The Declension of Proper Nouns differs greatly from that of common nouns (§ 72). 1. With names of persons : 1. The genitive is usually formed by adding -8. 2. But masc. names in 8, ſ, id, x, 7, and fem. names in e, take -ens. 3. The plural of all names is formed according to the old declension except feminine names in e, which follow the new. declension: Nom. Sing., Heinrid), Ludwig, Schiller, Göthe, Franz, Gen. Sing., Heinrid)s, Ludwigs, Schillers, Göthes, Franzens, Nom. Plur., Heinridie, Ludwige, Schiller, Göthe, Franze, Dat. Plur., Heinrichen. Ludwigen. Schillern. Göthen. Franzen. M 266 [$ 79, 80. · THE NOUN. Nom. Siny., Bertha, Emma, Adelheid, Hedwig, Marie', Gen. Sing., Bertlas, Emmas, Adelheids, Hedwigs, Mari-ens, Nom. Plur., Berthas. Emmas. Adelheids. Hedwigs. Mari-en. Rem. Proper nouns are not inflected when preceded by the article or an adjective pronoun: die Bildfäule des York; die Werke des folann Sebaſtian Bady (or Johann Sebaſtian Bach: Werke). 2. Names of cities or countries, not ending in 8, 7, or f, take s in the genitive: Berlins Umgebungen; die Städte Deutſchlands.be Rem. Those in 8, , and must be (and others may be) preceded by von, dcs, or a qualifying noun : die Einwohner von Mainz (or der Stadt Mainz). $ 79. The chief irregularities in the plural are these : 1. Nouns indicating weight, ineasure, and number retain their singular form, even when used in the plural. Drei Pfund Zuder; ſechs Fuß lyod); vierzig Mann Neiterei. Exc. But feminine nouns in e, and nouns indicating divisions of time, take the plural form; vier Mteilen entfernt ; zwei Tage lang. 2. Some nouns have two forms in the plural, as : Der Dorn; pl. Dornen, or Dörner. Das Lidit ; pl. Lichte, or lichter. Das Land; pl. Lande, or länder. Das Thal; pl. Thale, or Thäler. Rem. 1. With some nouns one form (as lande, Thale) is poetical. Rem. 2. Sometimes the different forms have different meanings, as : Der Band, volume, pl. Bände. Das Geſicht, eyesight, pl. (wanting). Das Band, ribbon, pl. Bänder. face, pl. Seſidter. (no sing.) fetters, pl. Bande.. I vision, pl. Gefid)te. 3. Some nouns have no singular number, as : Die Alnen, Eltern, Gebrüder, Geſdywiſter, Leute, Maſern, Arpen. 4. Some nouns have no plural number, as : Der Beginn, Druck, Sammer, Sand, Streit, Unterridit. Die Afde, Ehre, Fludít, Furdít, Gnade, Liebe, Pradit, Sanftmutſ). Das Anſeln, Einkommen, Entzüđen, Elend, Glüd, Leben, Lob. 4. SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. (Syntar des Hauptwortes.) $ 80. The Nominative Case in English corresponds in use to the same case in German. The Possessive is $ 81, 82.] 267 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. usually translated by the Genitive in German, and the Objective by the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. Rem. 1. The original idea of the three oblique cases, which exist in all the Teutonic languages ($ 2), including the Anglo-Saxon, appears to have been : 1. Of the Genitive: whence, from what place-origin; . 2. Of the Dative : where, in or at what place--position; 3. Of the Accusative: whither, to what place-direction. Rem. 2. In the development of the different Teutonic languages, the uses of the cases have undergone so many modifications that their correct appli- cation in passing from one language to another has become very difficult. $ 81. The Genitive Case is used: 1. After the derivative prepositions anſtatt, außerhalb, während, wegen, jenſeit, längſt, trok, zufolge, etc. (S 202): Anſtatt des Bruders, Instead of the brother. Während des Trieges, During the war. 2. Without a preposition : 1. After nouns of limitation, possession, etc. (for the English possessive): Die Gefdhidite Deutſchlands, The history of Germany. Des Sdüler3 Budy, The scholar's book. 2. After the adjectives anſichtig, begierig, miide, voll, etc. ($91): Voll der Freude, Full of joy. Müde bes Lebens, Weary of life. 3. After the verbs achteit, eutbehren, lachen, ſterben, etc. ($ 178): Ale ladjen ſeiner Eitelkeit, All laugh at his vanity. 4. In many adverbial expressions : Des Morgens, des Abends, In the morning, in the evening. Glüdlidierweiſe, Happily. Rem. 1. By false analogy, the form des Nachts (fem.) is used. Rem. 2. The genitive case was formerly used much more than it is at pres- ent. § 82. The Dative Case is used: 1. After the prepositions an, auf, hinter, int, etc. (§ 244), when signifying rest, or motion within certain limits : Das Kind iſt im Garten, The child is in the garden. [den. Das ſind läuft im Garten, The child is running about in the gar- 2. Always after the prepositions aus, außer, etc. (8 220): Er kommt aus dem Garten, He is coming out of the garden. 3. Without a preposition : 1. After the adjectives ähulid), angenehnt, widrig, etc. (95): Er iſt ſeinem Bruder ähnlid), He is like (or resembles) his brother. 268 [$ 83–85. THE NOUN. 2. After the verbs ahnen, antworten, danken, folgen, etc. ($ 179): Er folgt fcinem Bruder, He follows his brother. 3. As the indirect object of many verbs ($ 179, 2): Er gab mir das Bild), He gave me the book. $ 83. The Accusative Case is used: 1. After the prepositions an, auf, bis, in, vor, etc. (8 82, 1), when signifying motion towards an object: Er ging in den Garten, He went into the garden. 2. Always after the prepositions durd), für, etc. (237): Er ging durch den Garten, He went through the garden. 3. To express the direct object of transitive verbs: Er kaufte den Bleiſtift, He bought the pencil. Er gab mir das Budi, He gave me that book. 4. After verbs and adjectives, expressing price, weight, measure, definite time, age, etc. ($ 177, 2; $ 96): Es koſtet einen Thaler, It cost one dollar. Es wiegt eiit Pfund, It weighs a pound. Er blieb einen ganzen Tag, He remained an entire day. Es iſt nur einen Zou breit, It is only an inch wide. $ 84. Some verbs are followed by two nouns in the same case; others by two nouns in different cases; and some by a substantive whose case is deter- mined by the signification of the verb, while the practice of good writers varies as to the case that should follow some verbs (see syntax of the verb, § 175). $ 85. In addition to the rules of Apposition which pre- vail in the English language, the German has the fol- lowing: 1. Nouns expressing weight, measuit; and number (when not used parti- tively) are in apposition with the nouns they limit: Ein Pfund Zuder, A pound of sugar. (but) Ein Pfund dieſes Zuders, A pound of this sugar. Ein Glas Waſſer, A glass of water. 2. Proper names of countries, cities, etc., and of months are in apposio tion with the specifying common noun: Das Königreich Preußen, The kingdom of Prussia Die Stadt Berlin, The city of Berlin. Im Monat Auguſt, In the month of August. $ 86.] 263 THE ADJECTIVE. THE ADJECTIVE.. (Das Eigenſdaftswort.) $ 86. Adjectives are primitive, derivative, or compound. 1. With primitive adjectives are also reckoned many, of which the verbal origin is “no longer felt”: gut, alt. 2. Derivative adjectives are formed by adding the suf- fixes -bar, -er (-ern), -haft, -ig, -iſdi (=er), -lid), -or -fam, to words of any part of speech, except the article, con- junction, or interjection: 1. -bar (Old German: beran, to bear), added to the noun or a verbal root, indicates ability or possibility of a quality or action : frudytbar, fruit-bearing, dienſtbar, serviceable, eſbar, eatable. 2. -en (-ern) is added only to nouns denoting material : golden, ſilbern, ledernt, hölzern, gläſern. 3. -haſt (Old Ger.: haft, holding) denotes possession of the quality of the noun, or inclination towards it: tugendhaft, virtuous, ſdymeidjelljaft, flattering. 4. -ig denotes possession of the quality or relation, expressed by the which it is suffixed : mädytig, mighty, lebendig, lively, der meinige, mine, einig, sole, einzig, single, biſſig, biting, jetzig, present, vorig, pre- ceding, niedrig, lowly. 5. -iſd (-er) denotes origin, similarity, or inclination: Preußiſd), Prus- sian, irðiſdy, earthly, nieidiſd), envious. Rem. 1. The -iſdh takes the place of ic or ical in many English adjectives : dramatiſd), poetiſd), logiſd), Hiſtoriſd). Rem. 2. In proper adjectives frequently the termination -cr is preferred to Fiſch); the fer takes no inflection: Der Magdeburger Dom, die Leipziger Zei- tung, das Brandenburger Thor (gen. Des Magdeburger Doms). 6. -lid (compare English like, ly) forms adjectives from nouns, and di- minutive adjectives from adjectives: findlidy, childlike, täglidy, daily, röthlich, reddish. 7. -fam (related to zuſanımen, Lat. semper, Greek ápa, Eng. some), add- ed to verbs and verbal nouns, indicates possession of or inclination to the quality: arbeitſam, laborious, mühſam, wearisome. 270 [8 87,88. THE ADJECTIVE. . acl 3. Compound adjectives are formed by prefixing to ad jectives a noun, preposition, or other adjective: Dunkelblaut, dark blue. Liebendivürdig, amiable. Taubſtumni, deaf and dumb. Mitſ()uldig, accessory to a crime. $ 87. Adjectives are called predicative when they are used to complete the predications of the verbs ſein, werden, bleiben, deinen (ausſehen), dünfen, heißen : Das Leben iſt kurz, Life is short. Das Wetter wird heiß, The weather is becoming hot. Rem. 1. Adjectives used predicatively are not declined. Rem. 2. Some adjectives are used only predicatively, as: angſt, Vereit, feind, gram, heil, irre, kund, quer, quit, fdyuld, abwendig, anſichtig, eingedenk, getroſt, gewahr, habhaft, theilhaftig, verluſtig. Rem. 3. The following are rarely or never used predicatively: (1), the simple form of superlatives ($ 93, Rem. 2); (2), adjectives in -ci, gorden, fil- bern, etc. ; (3), some other adjectives, as: dortig, hieſig, ſpaniſd), vergeben. · .LU Out Www 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. (Deklination der Eigenſchaftswörter.) $ 88. Adjectives used attributively, that is, when placed before the noun to express some of its well-known at- tributes, are subject to three modes of declension, termed the Old, New, and Mixed Declensions. 1. The Old Declension is employed when no article or adjective pronoun precedes the adjective ($ 89, Rem. 2): Gut-er Mann, gut-es stind, Good man. good woman. good child." 2. The New Declension is employed when the adjec- tive is preceded by: 1. The definite article der. 2. All adjective pronouns that are declined according to the Old De- clension, as dieſer, icder, jener, ſoldier, weldier, thus including all adjective pronouns except the possessives ($ 88,3): Der gut-e Mann, die gut-e Frau, das gut-e Slind, The good man. the good woman, the good child. Rem. 1. The compound adjective pronouns derjenige, derfelbe, cause an adjective following them to be in the New Declension, by the force of the der. Rem. 2. Many writers give the New Declension to adjectives following certain participles that have a determinative signification, as : folgender, er- wähnter, verſchicdener. $ 89.] 271 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. *. 3. The Mixed Declension is used when the adjective is preceded by a possessive pronoun, by ein, or by kein: Ein gut-er Mann, eine gut-e Frau, ein gut-cs Slind, A good man, a good woman, a good child. $ 89. Table of the three Declensions of Adjectives. Old Declension. New | Declension. Declension.! Mixed SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. N. gut-cư, gut-l, gut-cs. gut- C. G. gut-en (cs), gut-er, gut-en (CB). gut-er. D. gut-ci, gut-cr, gut- ciii. gut-ell. A. gut-01, gut-e, gut-cs. jut-e. N. der gut-e, die gut-e, das gut-t. die gut-en(e). G. des gut-cn, der gut-en, bes gut-cnt. der gut-cit. D. dem gut-en, der gilt-clt, den gut-en. Den gut-cit. 1. den gut-en, die gut-c, das gut-t. Die gut-c1(c). N. mein gut-er, meine gut-e, meint gut-cs. meine gut-eit. G. nieines gut-ent, meiner gut-en, meenes gut-cit. meines gut-en. D. meinem gut-cit, meiner gut-eil, meinem gut-en. meinen gut-en. A. meinen gut-en, meine gut-e, meint gut-e8. meine gut-eii. Rem. 1. The former termination -C8 of the genitive singular in the mascu- line and neuter genders of the Old Declension is now generally rejected by most writers, but it is yet retained in many fixed expressions: Seien Sie gutes Muthjes, Be of good courage. Seineswegs, By no means. Rem. 2. Adjectives take the Old Declension when preceded by the following undeclined words: etwas, nidts, vicl, wenig; fold), weld), inand; car- • dinal numbers; dritthalb, cinerlei, dergleichen, etc. : Drei edre Grafen folgen (UI).), Three noble counts follow. Sold) große Schätze, Such great treasures. Mit etivas weißem Papier, With some white paper. Allerlei gutes Tud), All kinds of good cloth. Rem. 3. After the plurals alle, andere, einige, etlide, feine, mandye, ſoldje, weldje, mehrere, vicle, wenige, the adjective usually drops -ti in the nom. and acc. PLURAL. Nom. alle gut-e, 1 einige gut-e, viele gut-e, Gen. aller gut-cit, 1 einiger gut-en, vicler gut-en, Dat. allen gut-cit, einiger gut-ci, vielen gut-en, Acc. alle gut-C. cinige gut-C. I viele gut-e. · Rem. 4. The similarity between the new declension of nouns and the new declension of adjectives is very striking. 272 [$ 89,90. THE ADJECTIVE. Rem. 5. The Mixed Declension is like the Old in the nominative and ac- cusative singular; in the other cases it is like the New Declension Rem. 6. After the personal pronouns id), du, wir, ihr, the adjective takes the Old Declension in the Nom. Sing. ; in the other cases it takes the New Declension : Du, gutes Kind ! Thou, good child ! Shr, armen Leute! You, poor people! Rem. 7. In poetic language the termination may be dropped from the nom. and acc. sing. neuter of adjectives of the Old and Mixed Declensions : Kalt Waſſer ; alt Eiſen, Cold water ; old iron. Ein gut Wort, A good word. Rem. 8. When, in poetic composition, two or more adjectives are joined to the same noun, only the last one is declined: Der falſd), verrätheriſdie Nath, The false, treasonable counsel. Rem. 9. An attributive adjective, following the noun, is not declined : 6 Ein Rieſe, groß und wild, A giant, large and fierce. Rem. 10. Adjectives used substantively retain their adjective terminations: Ein Deutſder, die Deutſden, A German, the Germans. Rem. 11. Participles used adjectively are declined like adjectives : Am folgenden Tage, On the following day. Rem. 12. Adjectives ending in -cl, -en, or -er, when declined, usually drop an e either before or after 1, 11, r: Er iſt ein edler Menſdy, He is a noble man. Wir haben troducs Wetter, We are having dry weather. Rem. 13. The adjective hodh drops c when it is declined: Ein ſehr hoher Berg, A very high mountain. Rem. 14. If two adjectives stand in equal logical relation to the noun, they both follow the Old Declension; if the second adjective stands in more inti- mate relation to the noun than the first, it follows the Mixed Declension: Nad, guter (und) alter Sitte, According to good old custom. Von altem (brauen Papier], From old [blue paper]. 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. (Steigerung der Eigenſdiaftswörter.) $ 90. In the German, as in all Teutonic languages, the comparative degree is formed by adding -er, and the superlative by adding -ſt (or -eſt) to the positive degree. Rem. 1. When the positive degree ends in -d, -t, -6, -, -3, -id), -H, -i, ar -U, the superlative usually takes -eſt; otherwise it takes -ſt. $ 91.] : COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 273 Rem. 2. The few adjectives ending in -e, take only =r in the comparative. Positive. Compar. Superl. fein, fine, fein-er, fein-ſt. faul, lazy, faul-er, faul-ſt. reid), rich, reidh-er, reid)-ſt. (djön, fine, ſchön-er, ſchön-ſt. mild, mild, mild-er, mild-cſt. laut, loud, Taut-er, laut-eſt. Positive. Compar. Superl. Heiß, hot, heiſ-er, heißß-eſt. falſdy, false, falſch-er, falſdh-eft. froh, happy, frol-er, froh-eſt. frei, free, frei-er, frei-eſt. treu, true, treu-er, treu-cſt. l müde, weary, müde-r, müde-ſt. Rem. 3. Adjectives ending in -el, -en, or -er, reject the e of this syllable in the comparative degree: Eder, noble, edi-er, nobler, edel-ſt, noblest. $ 91. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if a, 0, or it, usually takes the umlaut in the com- parative and superlative degrees : Positive. Compar. Superl. || Positive. Compar. Superl. alt, old, ült-er, ült-eſt. grob, coarse, gröb-er, gröb-ft. warm, warm, wärm-er, wärm-eſt. kurz, short, fiirz-er, fiirz-eſt. lang, long, läng=er, läng-ſt. jung, young, jiing=er, jiing-ſt. Rem. 1. The umlaut is not used in the comparison of: 1. Adjectives with the diphthong art in the radical syllable: faut, loud, laut-er, laut-eft. 2. Derivative adjectives (ending in -bar, -c1, -Haft, -fant, etc.); dankbar, thankful, dankbar-er, dankbar-ſt. 3. Adjectives having the participial prefix ge-: gewandt, dexterous, gewandt-er, gervandt-eſt. 4. Some adjectives of foreign origin: brav, falſd), matt, platt, zart, nobel, ſtolz, etc. 5. The following monosyllabic adjectives of German origin: 1. With a: barſd), blank, fall, falb, flad), karg, knapp, lahm, laß, nackt, rajdy, ſadyt, ſanft, ſtatt, ſchlaff, ſdilank, ſtarr, ſtarf, walır. 2. With o: froly, hohl, hord, los, morſd), roly, ſdıroff, toll, voll. 3. With u: bunt, dumpf, plump rund, ſtumm, ſtumpf, wund. Rem. 2. The use of the umlaut continues to extend more and more, both in the language of the common people and in the works of good writers. Thus, Goethe uses flädjer, klärer; Klopstock uses zärter: Kinkel uses glät- teften. The use also varies with bang, blaß, fromm, naß, geſund, etc. M 2 274 [92, 93. THE ADJECTIVE. $ 92. A few adjectives are irregular and a few are defective in comparison: Positive. gut, good, viel, much, hody, high, nale, near, (außen (adv.], without), (innen [adv.], within), (vor [prep.), before), (hinten (adv.), behind), (oben (adv.), above), (unten (adv.), below, (min [adj., udv.], little), (er [Old German for the adverb ebe], early), (laz [Old Ger.], lazy), (erſt, first), (letzt, last), Comparative. Beffer, better, mehr, more, Höher, higher, näljer, nearer, äußer, exterior, inner, interior, vorder, anterior, hinter, hinder, ober, upper, unter, lower, minder, less, (erer [Old Ger. for the adv. eljer], earlier), Superlative. beſt, best. meiſt, most. Hödyſt, highest. nädiſt, nearest. äußerſt, extreme. innerſt, innermost. vorderſt, foremost. hinterſt, hindmost. oberſt, uppermost. unterſt, lowermost. mindeſt, least. erſte, letzte, first. last. erſter, Letzter, former, latter, $ 93. Adjectives, especially if they are polysyllables, are sometimes compared by placing before the positive the adverbs mehr, more, and am meiſten, most: Gewandt, dexterous, mehr gewandt, am meiſten gewandt. Rem. 1. In comparing two adjectives with each other, inehr must be used: Er iſt mehr tapfer als vorſidytig, He is more brave than prudent. Rem. 2. To express the superlative predicatively, the dative, preceded by am (an dem), may be employed : Dieſe Blume iſt am ſchönſtent, This flower is most beautiful. Rem. 3. By way of emphasis, the genitive plural of aller is frequently pre- fixed to the superlative: Dieſe Blume iſt die allerſdjönſte, This flower is far the most beautiful. Rem. 4. The absolute superlative is expressed by prefixing to the positive such adverbs as ſehr, hödift, äußerſt, etc. : Die Nadrid)t iſt hödyft intereſſant, The news is extremely interesting. Rem. 5. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees are subject to the same laws of declension ($ 90) as though in the positive degree: Der beſte Freund, The best friend. Mein beſter Freund, My best (in Engl. my good) friend. $ 94-96.] 275 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 3. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. . (Syntar des Eigenſchaftswortes.) 94. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, when used attributively, take the gender, number, and case of the substantive which they qualify (L. XVIII). $ 95. The following adjectives govern the genitive case without the use of a preposition (81, 2, 2): 1. Anfidtig, arın, bar, Bedürftig, begierig, benöthigt, Bewußt, bloß, ein- gedenk, einig, eins, erübrigt, erfahren, fähig, frei, froh, gedenk, geſtänt- dig, gewahr, gewärtig, gewiß, gewohnt, habhaft, inne, kund, fündig, ledig, leer, los, mädytig, müde, müſſig, quitt, ſatt, dyuldig, ſiedien, theilljaft (-ig), überdrüffig, verdäditig, verluſtig, voll, werth, würdig. 2. Such of these adjectives as take the negative prefix itit-, as: Unbegierig, unerfahren, unmädytig, unſdjuldig, unſider, unwürdig. Er iſt aller Sorgen frei, He is.free from all cares. Er iſt des Weges fundig, He is acquainted with the road. Es iſt nicht der Mühe wert"), It is not worth the trouble. Er iſt der Adytung unwürdig, He is unworthy of respect. Rem. 1. Some of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions (which govern their own cases), as: (1) begierig, by nadı or auf. (5) frei, redig, leer, los, voll, etc., (2) bereit, Fähig, by 311. by von. 3) arm, gewohnt, leer, by all. (6) einig, erfahren, fron), by in. (4) frol, gewiß, einig, by über. (7) zufrieden, by mit. Er iſt frei von allen Sorgeni, He is free from all cares. Er iſt arm an Gelb, He is poor in money. Rem. 2. Some of these adjectives are used, though rarely, as governing the accusative case, as: anfictig, Veivuſt, fähig, geſtändig, gewalr, gewolnt, ſav- haft, Yos, müte, ſatt, (duldig, ilberbrüſſig, werth, zufrieden. Es iſt nicht die Mühe werth, It is not worth the trouble. $ 96. Many adjectives govern the dative case without the use of a preposition ($ 82,3,1), as: 1. Abtrünnig, ähnlid), angeboren, angeregen, angenelm, anſtößig, be- kannt, bange, bequein, Bewußt, böſe, dankbar, dienlich, dienſtbar, eigen, eigenthümlid), ergeben, feil, feind, fern, folgſam, freind, gehorſanı, ge- mein, gemeinſam, geneigt, gewiß, gewogen, gleid), gnädig, gram, gut, nalje, nieu, nöthig, offen, offenbar, paſſend, peinlicy, redit, fdjädrid), fdmeidjelhaft, ſdmerzlid), duldig, (dywer, ſüß, theuer, treii, über, überlegen, unterthan, verdächtig, verderblid), verwandt, vortheilhaft, wely, wertly, widtig, widerlid), willkommen, wohl, zweifelhaft. 276 [S 97, 98. NUMERALS. 2. The negatives of these, formed by adding the prefix in- or ab-: 1. With in: unälynlid), unangenehm, unbekannt, unnöthig, unſduls 2. With ab: abgeneigt. [dig, unzweifelhaft, etc. dy bin Ihnen ſehr dankbar. I am very grateful to you. Es iſt ihm dhädlidy, It is injurious to him. Es iſt mir unbekannt, He is a stranger to me. Rem. 1. It is usually a personal noun that takes the dative after these ad- jectives, and which may be treated as the “indirect object” of the adjective: Es war ihn nidyt der Mühe werth, It was not worth to him the trouble. Er iſt mir zehn Thaler (duldig, He is ten dollars in debt to me. Rem. 2. Many of these adjectives may be followed by prepositions : Idy bin mit ihm verwandt, I am related to him. Der König war ihm (or gegen ihn) The king was not merciful to him nidit gnädig, (or towards him). § 97. The Accusative is governed by adjectives express- ing value, weight, measure, or age (see $ 94, Rem. 2): Es war keinen Pfennig werty, It was not worth a penny. Es iſt nur einen Zoll breit, It is only an inch wide. Er iſt zehn Jahre alt, He is ten years old. NUMERALS. (Zahlwörter.) $ 98. The primitive Numerals are ein, zwei, drei, vier, fünf, ſedis, fieben, acht, neun, zehn. All other numerals are derivatives or compounds of these primitive words. Rem. 1. The apparently primitive numbers elf, zwölf, hundert, and tau- ſend have been thus developed : Gothic. Old-German, / Mid.-Ger. N.-Ger.|| | einlif, one over (ten), einlif, eilf, elf, Telf. tvalif, two over (ten), zwelif, zwelef, zwelf,l zwölf. 100, taihuntaihund) ten times huntarot hundert, hundert. or hunt S ten, l or hunt,) (1000, thusundi, ten hundred, dûsunt, | tûsent, tauſend. 11, Rem. 2. The high numbers Milion, Billion, etc., are from the French. Rem. 3. Numerals are either adjectives, nouns, or adverbs. It is more con- venient, however, to treat them as forming a separate part of speech. Rem. 4. There are three classes of Numeral Adjectives: (1), Cardinal Num. bers; (2), Ordinal Numbers; (3), Compound Numeral Adjectives. $ 99.] 277 CARDINAL NUMBERS. pin. . § 99. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows: 1. Eins. 60. Sechzig. 2. Zwei. 70. Siebenzig or Siebzig. 3. Drei. 80. Adytzig. 4. Vier. 90. Neunzig. 5. Fünf. 100. Hundert. 6. Sedis. 101. Hundert und eins. 7. Sieben. 110. Hundert und zehn. 8. Adit. 120. Hundert und zwanzig. 9. Neun. 121. Hundert einundzwanzig. 10. Zeln. 125. Hundert fünfundzwanzig. 11. Elf. 136. Hundert ſedisunddreißig. 12. Zwölf. 150. Hundert und fünfzig. 13. Dreizelin. 151. Hundert einundfünfzig. 14. Bierzehn. 200. Zweihundert. 15. Fünfzehn. 225. Zweihundert fünfundzwanzig. 16. Sedizehn. 500. Fünfhundert. 17. Siebenzehn or Siebzehn. 1,000. Eintauſend or Tauſend. 18. Aditzehn. 1,005. Eintauſend und fünf. 19. Neunzeln. 1,025. Eintauſend fünfundzwanzig. 20. Zwanzig. 1,500. Eintauſend fünfhundert. 21. Einundzwanzig. 2,000. Zweitauſend. 22. Zweiundzwanzig, etc. 10,000. Zehntauſend. 30. Dreißig. 20,000. Zwanzigtauſend. 31. Einunddreißig, etc. 100,000. Hundert tauſend. 40. Vierzig. 200,000. Zweihundert tauſend. 50. Fünfzig. 1,000,000. Eine Million. 55. Fünfundfünfzig. 2,000,000. Zwei Millionen. 1869. Achtzelynhundert und neunundſechzig, or Eintauſend adythundert neunundſechzig. Rem. 1. Single words are usually formed of units and tens, of multiples of a hundred, and of multiples of a thousand up to a hundred thousand. But writers vary greatly as to the method of dividing compound numbers. Rem. 2. All the other numerals, whether numeral nouns, adjectives, or ad- verbs, are formed from cardinal numbers. Rem. 3. From their constant and universal use, cardinal numbers retain a fixedness of form not surpassed by that of any other words in a language. They are therefore of great value in tracing the relationship of allied lan- guages (see § 28-30, and $ 106, Rem. 3). Rem. 4. When used as abstract nouns, cardinal numbers take the feminine gender, being in apposition with die Zahl understood : Die Sieben iſt bei den Juden eine Seven is a sacred number with the heilige Zahl, Jews. 278 [$ 100-102. NUMERALS. UL g 100. The numeral cin usually receives a strong emphasis in pronunciation (see § 53, Rem.). 1. Uşed with a noun, cin is declined like the indefinite article ($ 54). 2. In the expression cilt und derſelbe, ein may be undeclined. 3. When used without a noun, it begins with a capital letter(Einer, etc.). 1. Not preceded by der, it follows the old declension of the adjective. 2. Preceded by der, it follows the new declension of the adjective, and is used both in the singular and plural numbers (der Eine, Die Eine, das Eine; die Einlcit). Rem. It is thus used (as the one, the ones) in opposition to der Andere, die Andern (the other, the others). 4. The form Eins is used: (1), in counting, eins, zwei, drei, vier, etc.; (2), in multiplying, etc., einmal eins iſt eins ; (3), in giving the time of day, when the word Ulr is omitted : Es hat Eins geſchlagen, It has struck one. $ 101. The other Cardinal Numbers are declined like the plural of adjectives of the new declension. But zwei and drei take no termination in the nominative and accusative: Nom. zwei, I brei, I vier-e, I fedja-e, / zehn-€, 1 zwölf-e, Gen. zwei-er, 1 Drei-er, | vier-er, 1 ſedys-cr, 1 zehn-cr, 1 zwölf-er, Dat. zwei-eit, | Drei-eii, | vier-eit, fedjs-ent, | zehn-cit, | zwölf-cit, Acc. zwei. | drei. | vier-e.' I fedis-E. | zelin-e. / zwölf-e. Rem. 1. Zwei and Drei are only declined when not preceded by an ar- ticle, adjective, or adjective pronoun: Nus zweier oder breier Zeugen Out of the mouth of two or three Mund, witnesses. Rem. 2. The other numbers are rarely declined, except when, in the dative case, they are used without a noun: Auf allen Vieren kriechen, To creep on all fours. Mit Scdiſen fahren, To ride in a “coach and six." Rem. 3. Hunorrt and Tauſend are sometimes used as collective nouns, and as such are declined after the third form of the old declension. Rem. 4. The foreign words die Million', Billion', etc., are declined like feminine nouns of the new declension. § 102. The Ordinal Numbers are formed from the Car- dinals: 1. By suffixing -te, from zwei to neunzehn. 2. By suffixing -fte, from zwanzig upwards. $ 102.] .279 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 1 1st Der erſte. 50th Der fünfzig-ſte. 2d 1 Zwei-te. 55th , fünfundfünfzig-ſte. 3d drit-te. G0th 1 fedhzig-ſte. 4th 1 vier-te. 70th ſiebenzig-lte or fieb- 5th fitnf-te. zig-ſte. 6th 1 fedjs-te. 80th aditzig-ſte. 7th ſieben-te. 90th 1 neunzig-ſte. 8th 1 adit-e. 100th Hundert-ſte. Ith 11 jeun-te. 101st Hundert und erſte. 10th u zehn-te. 125th r hundertfünfundzwan- 11th elf-te. zig-ſte. 12th 1 zwölf-te. 200th rzweihundert-ſte. 13th 1 Dreizehn-te. 500th 1 fünfhundert-ſte. 14th 1 vierzehn-te. 1,000th 1 tauſend-ſte. 15th fünfzehn-te. 1,001st tauſend und erſte. 16th 1 fedizehn-te. 1,025th , tauſendfünfundzwan- 17th , fiebenzelin-te, or ſiebzehu-te. zig-fte. 18th aditzehn-te. 1,626th ,, tauſend ſechshundert 19th 1 neunzehn-te. und ſechsund- 20th 1 zwanzig-ite. zwanzig-ſte. 21str einundzwanzig-ſte. 2,000th 1 zweitauſend-ſte. 25th , fünfundzwanzig-fte. 20,000th 1 zwanzigtauſend-ſte. 30th Dreißig-ſte. 100,000th llunderttauſend-ſte. 35th , fünfunddreißig-ſte. 500,000th 1 fünfhunderttauſendſte. 40th vierzig-ſte. 1,000,000th 1 million-ſte. 45th, fünfundvierzig-ſte. | 2,000,000th 11 zweimillion-ſte. Rem."1. The forms drit-te and adht-e are euphonic variations from the rule for forming ordinal numbers. · Rem. 2. Ordinal numbers are subject to all the laws of declension of de jectives. Rem. 3. Erſte is the superlative of the obsolete adverb er ($92). Rem. 4. All the ordinals were probably originally superlatives, formed after the analogy of erſte. •Rem. 5. Zweite was first used in the sixteenth century. Before that time der andere meant the second of any number, as it now meåns the second of but two. Rein. 6. Since the Old-German period, the termination -te or =ſte is added only to the last one of compound numbers. Rem. 7. Examples of the historic development of ordinal numbers : Gothic: , | anthar, | thridja, | saihsta, | taillunda, | tvalfta, Old-German: êristo, | andar, | dritto, dritto, sëhsto, zëhanto, zwelifto, Mid.-German : êrste, ander, | dritte, sëhste, zehende, zwelfte, New-German : erſte. I ander. | Dritte. I fediste. I zehnte. l zwölfte. 280 [$ 103, 104. NUMERALS. Gothic: tvaigjósta, | thusundgôsta, Old-German: zweinzicosto, | drīzegeste, fëorzugosto, dûsuntôsto, Middle-German: zweinzegôste, | drîzugôsto, | vierzegeste, tûsentste, New-German: zwanzigſte. dreißigſte. / vierzigſte. I tauſendſte. § 103. There are three classes of Compound Numeral Adjectives: 1. Distributives, indicating how many at a time: Zwei und zwei, je zwei, zu zweien, Two at a time, by twos. Zehn und zehn, je zehu, zu zehnen, Ten at a time, by tens. 2. Dimidiatives, indicating the whole of all-up to the number mentioned, with a half of that number : Anderthalb, One and a half (one and a half of the second). Drittehall, Two and a half (two and a half of the third). Viertehalb, Three and a half (three and a half of the fourth). Fünfteharb, Four and a half (four and a half of the fifth). Rem. 1. The e is often dropped: dritthalb, vierthalb. Rem. 2. Dimidiatives higher than dritthalb are rarely used. Rem. 3. The fuller forms ein und eilt halv, etc., are also used. Das Tuch koſtet einen und einer The cloth costs a dollar and a half halben Thaler die Elle, a yard. 3. Variatives, indicating of how many kinds : Einer-lei, zweier-lei, . Of one kind, of two kinds. Rem. 1. Since the Mid.-Germ. period the syllable lei has been attached to the numeral. It is from Lat. lex, Provençal ley, Middle-German leige, leie. Thus, Einerlei was in the Middle-German einer leige, einer leie. Rem. 2. Distributives, Dimidiatives, and Variatives are indeclinable. Rem. 3. Many compound adjectives have cardinal or ordinal numbers for the first or modifying component, as : Einfady or einfältig, simple. Zweideutig, of double meaning.. Zweifady or zweifältig, twofold. Dreipfündig, weighing three pounds. Einſtimmig, unanimous. Eingeboren, only begotten. Einjährig, one year old. Erſtgeboren, first born. $ 104. Numeral Nouns are of two kinds : 1. Those with the suffix -er or sling ( masculine nouns): Ein Dreißiger, Aman from thirty to forty years old. Ein Dreier, A three-pfennig coin (worth about a Fünfundſediziger, Wine made in 1865. [cent). Ein Zwilling, ein Drilling, A twin, a triplet. * $ 105, 106.] 281 THE PRONOUN. 2. Those with the suffix -tel (neuter nouns), as : Ein Drittel Pfund, A third of a pound. Ein Adytel Thaler, An eighth of a dollar. Drei Aditel Zoll, Three eighths of an inch.. Rem. 1. The syllable ster is an abbreviation of Theil, a part. Thus Drit- tel is abbreviated from Drittheil (for Dritttheil), Middle-German dritteil. Rem. 2. "A half” is rendered by the noun die Hälfte, usually followed by von; or by the adjective halb (ein halber, eine halbe, ein halbes): Die Hälfte von der Stadt, A half of the city. Es koſtet einen halben Thaler, It costs half a dollar. Rem. When before neuter names of cities and countries, and not preceded by an article or a pronoun, halb (and ganz) are undeclined: Halb Berlin, halb (ganz) Deutſdland, Half Berlin, half (all) Germany. (but) das Halbe Deutſchland, Half Germany. $ 105. Numeral Adverbs are of two kinds : 1. Reiteratives, formed by compounding Cardinal Num- bers with Mal, a time : Einmal, once. Zweimal, twice. Zehnmar, ten times. 2. Ordinal Adverbs, indicating in what place or order: Erſtens, erſtlid), or zuerſt, In the first place, firstly. Zweitens, drittens, etc. In the second, third place, etc. Rem. The form erſt- ens (Middle-German ersten), etc., has been devel- oped in the New-German period by adding -B to the genitive singular, after the analogy of such nouns as Namens, by name of. THE PRONOUN. (Das Firwort.) § 106. Pronouns are divided into six classes: Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Indefinite, Interrogative, and Relative. Rem. 1. All the Personal Pronouns, the Demonstratives der, dieſer, jener, the Indefinite Pronouns aller, viel, and the Interrogatives wer, was, are primitive words. All other pronouns are derivatives or compounds. Rem. 2. The pronouns are much simpler in declension as well as fewer in number in the New-German than they were in the Old and Middle-German. Rem. 3. Pronouns, from their constant and universal use, have great fixed- ness of form, and therefore they are of great value in tracing the relationship of allied languages ($ 28-30, and $ 99, Rem. 3). 282 $ 107. THE PRONOUN. 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (Perſönlidie Fürwörter.) $ 107. The Personal Pronouns are declined as follows: SECOND PERSON FIRST PERSON. Singular. · Singular. Nom. ich, 1. du, thou. (Sie, you.) Gen. meiner, of me, etc.* deiner, of thee, etc. (Slnen, of you, etc.) Dat. mir, to me, etc.* dir, to thee, etc. (Ihnen, to you, etc.) Acc. midi me. did), thee. (Sie, you.) Plural. Plural. Nom. wir, we. ihr, you. (Sie, you.) Gen, inſer, of us, etc.* cuer, of you, etc. (Syrer, of you, etc.) Dat. iino, to us, etc. cuid), to you, etc. (Ihnen, to you, etc.) Acc. ing, us. end), you. (Sie, you.) . THIRD PERSON. Singular. Plural. Nom. er, he. fie, she. eß, it. fie, they. Gen. ſeiner, of him.* ihrer, of her. ſeiner, of it. ihrer, of them. Dat. ihm, to him. ihr, to her. ihm, to it. l ihnent, to them. Acc. ihn, him. ſie, her. c$, it. fie, them. Rem. 1. The old genitive forms mein, dein, ſein, are now obsolete, except in poetry and in some expressions : Vergiß meint nidit, Forget me not. Rem. 2. The genitive of the personal pronoun and the prepositions Halbeit, wegen, willen, are often united into one word, for et being added as letters of union: Meinetwegen or meinethalben, On my account. Rem. 3. The genitive plural of the personal pronoun is only used when all of the persons alluded to are included; the partitive genitive is expressed by von with the dative: Es waren unſer zwölf, There were twelve of us. (Zwölf von 118 gingen), (Twelve of us went). Rem. 4. Besides using out in addressing Deity, the Germans employ di and ihr in speaking to near relatives or very dear friends, and also to servants or children. Rem. 5. The use of the form of the third person plural, Gie (beginning with a capital letter), for the second person of both numbers, was introduced into the German language in the eighteenth century. The use of this, as the form of address, has been constantly increasing since that time. * For the use of the cases, see § 81–83. $ 108, 109.] 283 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Rem. 5. The nominative neuter c is used for the expletives it, there, and for so. Thus used, cs does not control the number or person of the verb : Es war ein Mann, There was a man. Es ſind viele Leute, die There are many people who- Wer iſt es ? Idy bin's, Who is it? It is I. Seid aufridytig ! Wir ſind es, Be honest! We are (s0). Rem. 6. To prevent unpleasantness of sound or ambiguity of meaning, er, fie, cs are often replaced by derſelbe, dieſelbe, daſſclúe: Sobald die Mutter ihre Todyter As soon as the mother saw her fal, fragte ſie dieſelbc, daughter, she asked her. $ 108. When the personal pronouns are used reflex- ively or reciprocally, the regular forms are employed in the first and second persons. But in the third person fid is employed in the dative and accusative of all gen- ders and in both numbers : Idy erinnere midy daran, I remember it. Das verſteht ſidi, That is a matter of course. (They understand themselves, or Sie verſtehen fid, They understand each other. Erinnern Sie ſicky? Do you remember? Rem. 1. To avoid ambiguity, einander may be used in reciprocal expres- sions, either with or without the reflexive pronoun : Wir verſtehen einander, or, We understand ourselves. Wir verſtehen uns einander, S Rem. 2. When myself, himself, etc., are only emphatic repetitions of the nominative, they are translated by ſclbſt or ſelber : Er that es felbſt, He did it himself. Er ſelber kann es thun, He can do it himself. Rem. 3. Selbſt (or ſelber) is often translated by the adverb even : Selbſt ſeine Feinde adyten ihn, Even his enemies respect him. 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (Beſikanzeigende Fürwörter.) $ 109. The following are the Possessive Pronouns: Masc. F'em. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. mein, mein-e, mein, my. unſer, unſer-e, unſer, our. Dein, Dein, thy. euer, cur-e, eucr, your. fein, ſein-e, fein, ilir, ilr-e, ilir, their. ihr-e, her. Sír-e, Shk, your). ſein, cin-l, fein, its. bein-l, his. ihr, ilje, 284 [$ 110, 111. THE PRONOUN. The Possessive Pronouns are declined in the singular like the indefinite article ein ($ 54), and in the plural like adjectives of the Old Declension (S 88. See also Lesson XIX., 2). Rem. 1. In declining unſer, e is sometimes dropped from the terminations -C8, -emt, -en. In declining ener, the e after en is usually dropped (see Less. XIX., 3). Rem. 2. As they are used only adjectively, possessive pronouns agree, like all other adjectives, with the noun to which they belong (i. e., the noun pos- sessed), in gender, case, and number. Rem. 3. In the German, as well as in all other Teutonic (and also in the Latin and Greek) languages, the Possessive Pronouns are formed from the genitive case of Personal Pronouns. $ 110. There are three ways of rendering into Ger- man the Absolute Possessive Pronouns (as mine, thine, ours, yours, etc.): meiner, meine, meines, i der, die, das Meinige, i Meine, , mine. deiner, Deine, deines, I 1 Deinige, ' Deine, thine. ſeiner, ſeine feines, Lul o Seinige, l 1 Seine, ihrer, ihre, ihres, 1 , Jhrige, ſeiner, feine, feines, L r Seinige, . Seine, unſerer, unſere, unſeres, 1 l 1 Unſrige, I . Unſere, eurer eure, eures, T Eurige, 1 Eure, Ihrer, Ihre, Shres, I l Fhrige, | Shre, yours. ihrer, ihre, ilres, Jlrige, I 1 Iljre, theirs. Rem. 1. Meiner, Deiner, etc. (in the first form), are declined like adjectives of the Old Declension. Rem. 2. Der Meinige, der Meine, etc. (of the second and third forms), are declined like adjectives of the New Declension. Rem. 3. Der Meinige, Deinige, etc. (of the second form), are frequently used, not as referring to nouns already spoken of, but having certain conven- tional meanings: Die Meinigen laſſen ſid, Ihnen und My family send their compliments den Strigen empfehlen, to yourself and your family. Er hat das Seinige gethait, He has done his part. Flyre, his. hers. its. Ours, your's. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (Hinweiſende Fürwörter.) $ 111. There are nine Demonstrative Pronouns. They may all be used either substantively or adjectively. § 111.] 285 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. this. der, Das, SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. dieſer, dieſes, dieſe, these. jener, jene, jenes, that. jene, those. die, that. die, 'those. berjenige, diejenige, dasjenige, that. diejenigen, those. derſelbe, dieſelbe, daſſelbe, the same. dieſelben, the same. ſämmtlidher, ſämmtlidye, ſämmtliches, entire. fämmtliche, all. jeder, jede, jedes, every. folcher, ſoldie, ſoldies, such. ſoldie, such. aller, alles, all. all. alle, alle, 1. Dieſer, jener, fämmtlicher, jeder, ſoldher, and aller fol- low the old declension of adjectives. 2. Der is usually translated by that, though it some- times is rendered by this: Rem. 1. The relative der and the definite article der are but the demon- strative pronoun der, with modified meanings: Der iſt's dem idi's verſpodien habe, It is this one to whom I have prom- und der will es haben, ised it, and that one wishes to have it. Rem. 2. Used as a demonstrative pronoun, der receives a full, strong em- phasis; as a relative, a medium emphasis; as a definite article, no emphasis. Rem. 3. Der, used adjectively, is declined like the definite article (8 54); used substantively, it is declined as follows: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Feminine. All Genders. Masculine. Nom. der, Gen. deſſert, Dat. dcm, Acc. dent. die, Neuter. das, deſleit, die, deren, der, derer, deneit, deni, die. das. dic. 3. Both parts of derjenige (compounded from der and jener) are declined, the latter part following the new declension of adjectives. 4. Both parts also of derſelbe (der and ſelbe) are de- clined. Rem. Der Nämlidhe (the same) is more emphatic than derſelbe, and ebenderſelbe (just the same) is still more emphatic than either. 286 [8 112. THE PRONOUN. 5. For Jeder, the forms jeglicher and jedweder are sometimes used. All three are employed in the sin- 6. Solder usually follows the article. When it pre- cedes the article, it drops its termination: Ein ſoldier Menſdy, Such a man. Solch ein Menſd), $ 7. Before the definite article or a pronoun, all drops its termination, especially if it does not receive an emphasis : Was ſoll all der Sájmerz ? What means all this sorrow? Er weiß von all dem Nidits, He knows nothing of it all. Rem. 1. The demonstrative pronouns have been developed thus: Gothic: sa, sû, thata.|(Gen.) thizuh, — , thizuh. \jains, jaina, jainata. Old-Ger.i dër, diu, daz. dëser, deisu, ditzi. Ijënêr, gënu, genaz. Mid.-Ger. : dër, die, daz. | diser, - Gothic: Old-Ger.: - Mid.-Ger. : (der jener). der selpo, . | iowëdar, der selbe, | ieder, svaleiks, | alls, solihher, allêr, solicher, aller, folder. I aller. . 4. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (Unbeſtimmte Fiirwörter.) § 112. Some Indefinite Pronouns can be used both sub- stantively and adjectively; others can be used only ad- jectively. As substantives or adjectives. Only as substantives. Ander-er, other. .. Man (they, people, etc.). Einig-er, some, any, a few. Jemand, somebody, any body. Etlich-er, " Niemand, nobody, not any body. Manch-er, many a (pl. many). Federmann, every body. Melrer-e, pl. several. Etwas, something, any thing. Kein-er, no, not any, not any one. Was, Viel-er, much (pl. many). Nichts, nothing, not any thing. Wenig-er, little (pl. few). Welche (pl.), some. Genig, enough. 16 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 287 1. Andere, -6, -es (contracted andrer, -e, -es), may be used in all the three declensions of adjectives. Rem. 1. Ander and ein may be joined into one indeclinable word, einan- der, each other (see § ). Rem. 2.. The German ander (Gothic anthar, Old-Ger, andar, Mid.-Ger. ander), the English other, and the Latin alter, are all comparatives, from a positive which is now found only in Sanscrit (anya, not the same). 2. Einiger, etlider, mehrere, and welche, follow the old declension of adjectives. Rem. 1. Einig-er (Old-Ger., einîe; compare English any; formed from cin, one) disappeared during the Mid.-Ger., but reappeared in the New-Gcr. Rem. 2. Etlich-er (Old-Ger.ëtalih; Mid.-Ger. ëtelih) is compounded from the obscure root ëta, and lih, like. Rem. 3. Mandh-er (Goth., manags ; 0.-G., manag; M.-G., maneg; Eng., many; allied to Old Slavic mnog, much, but of obscure origin, and probably derived from Mann), when not emphasized, or when used before ein, does not take the termination : Mandy tapfrer Held! Many a brave hero! * Rem. 4. Mehrere (plur.), a double comparative (from mehr), is used by some writers also in the singular.. 3. Kein, used as an adjective, is declined like mein (Less. XIX., 2); used substantively, it is declined like an adjective of the Old Declension (kein-er, -e, -es). Rem. Kein (0.-G., nih-ein ; M.-G., nechein, nekein, enkein, chein, kein) meant originally nidt cin. 4. Viel and wenig are not declined when they refer to individuals collectively; referring to individuals taken separately, and especially if, used substantively, they refer to persons, they are declined like adjectives of the Old Declension. Rem. 1. Viel and wenig are also used adverbially. Rem. 2. Viel (Goth., filu; 0.-G., filu, vil; M.-G., vil, viel) is allied to the Greek zolús and the Latin plus. Rem.3. Wenig (0.-G., wenag; M.-G., wênec) is from weineit, to weep, and meant originally what causes sorrow, unfortunate, small. 288 [$ 112. THE PRONOUN. 5. Genug is used as a substantive, an adjective, or an adverb. Ich habe genug geſehen, I have seen enough. Er hat nidit Tud) genug, He has not enough cloth. Das Tuđı iſt breit genug, The cloth is wide enough, Rem. 1. As an adjective or adverb, it follows the modified word. Rem. 2. Genug (Goth., ganôhs; 0.-G., kinuoc; M.-G., genuoc) is, like the English enough, from ga-nahan, to suffice. 6. Man is used only in the nominative singular (see Lesson XLII). Rem. Man is from Manit, man (compare with French on, from Lat. homo). 7. Jemand, Niemand, and Jedermann are used only in the singular. They are declined thus : Nom. Jemand, . 1 Niemand, Febermann, Gen. Jemand-s, or Jemand-es, | Niemand-8, or -cô, Jedermann-8, Dat. Gemand, or Jemand-em, Niemand, or -em, Jedermann, Acc. Jemand, or Jemand-eri. Niemand, or -en. Jedermann. Rem. 1. Jemand (0.-G., ĉoman, iaman, ieman ; M.-G. ieman, imande) is compounded of jc, ever, and Maiii. Rem. 2. Niemand (0.-G., nêoman, niamen, niemand; M.-G., nieman) is compounded of ni-êoman (not any man). Rem. 3. Jedermann first appeared in the M.-G. (ieder man, jeder Mann). 8. Etwas is indeclinable. Rem. 1. Etwas is often used in apposition with a noun: Wollen Sie etwas Brod? Do you wish some bread ? Rem. 2. Etwas is often used adverbially, meaning somewhat: Er war etwas aufgeregt, He was somewhat excited. Rem. 3. Etwas is formed from was and the root ëta ($ 112, 2, Rem. 2). 9. Nichts is indeclinable. Rem. Nidits, originally a genitive of nidit, first appeared in the 15th cent. 10. The nominative and accusative cases of welcher are sometimes used in familiar language, meaning some : Ich habe noch welches, I have some yet. Iďy habe weldie geſehen, I have seen some. Rem. Weldher, when thus used in a contraction of the antiquated pronoun etweldher. $ 113.] 289 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 5. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.. (Fragende Fiirwörter.) § 113. There are three Interrogative Pronouns: wer? who? was ? what? welder ? which? what? 1. Wer and was are used only substantively: wer re- fers only to persons; was only to things. They are thus declined: Nom. wer? who? was ? what? Gen. weſſen? whose? of whom? etc.* weſſen ?* (weß ? obs.) Acc. wen? whom?* I was ? what? Rem. 1. The antiquated genitive weß is still used in some compound words: Rem. 2. Was can not be used after prepositions (except ohne, wider, and sometimes um). `In its stead is used the adverb wo, where, compounded with the preposition into one word, as; womit, wovon, wozu, wodurd. war; New-Ger., wo) is yet retained when the preposition begins with a vowel, as: worin, worans, worani. 2. The original a also is retained in warum (Mid.-Ger., war umbe). · Rem. 3. Was is sometimes used for warum: Was zittern Sie denin? Why do you tremble? Rem. 4. Wer and was have been developed thus : Gothic, hvas, hvô, hva; Old-Ger., hwër, hwiu, hwaz; Mid.-Ger., wër, was; New-Ger., wer, was. 2. Welder, -e, -es, used both adjectively and substan- tively, is declined like an adjective of the old Declen- sion. It may refer to persons or things. Rem. 1. When welcher is followed by ein, the ending cr is dropped. Weld ein Rieſe! What a giant ! Rem. 2. Welder was originally a compound word : Gothic, hveleiks, “what like;" Old-Ger., hwiolihher; Mid.-Ger., wëlher ; New-Ger., weldier. 3. Was für ? (what kind of?) may be treated as an un- combined indeclinable pronoun, referring to both per- sons and things: Was fiir Dinte haben Sie ? What kind of ink have you? Mit was für Dinte ? With what kind of ink? * For the use of the cases, see $ 81–83. N 290 [$ 114. PRONOUNS. Rem. 1. When the particular individual is referred to, ein is added: Was fiir cin Mann iſt er? What kind of a man is he? Rem. 2. Eint, if used substantively, follows the Old Declension (einer): Was für einer ? What kind of a one? Rem. 3. The words was—fiir are sometimes separated : Was iſt bas fiir eine Thorheit! What a folly that is! 6. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (Beziigliche Fürwörter.) $ 114. There are no primitive Relative Pronouns ; but with the power of Relative Pronouns (i.e. as relat- ing to antecedent substantives) are employed: 1. The Interrogative Pronouns, wer, was, and weldier; 2. The Demonstrative Pronoun, der. 1. The same laws that govern the use of wer and was as Interrogatives, apply to them when they are employ- ed as Relative Pronouns. Rem. 1. Wer and was, as relatives, can be used only in general or indefi- nite expressions, never when a particular person or thing is referred to: Wer nidyt hören will, muß führen “Who will not hear, must feel.” (or der muß fühlen), Was du heute thun fannſt, ver- What you can do to-day, put not off diebe nidyt auf Morgen (or das till to-morrow. verſchiebe nidyt auf Morgen), Rem. 2. The antecedent of wer or was, when in the same case as the rel- ative, is thus often omitted. 2. Euphony alone determines whether weldher or der should be used, except in the three following cases : 1. When the relative is used adjectively, welder must be employed : Göthe, weldies großen Did)ters Göthe, with the works of which Werke id, fenne, great poet I am acquainted. 2. When the genitive of the relative is used substantively, the genitive of der (sing. deſſen, deren, dcſſen, plur. dercn) must be employed : Der Mann,deſſen Sohnfo frankiſt, The man, whose son is so sick. 3. After personal pronouns of the first and second person, der must be em- ployed ($ 115, 3, Rem. 3): sd), der (or fem. die) ilin ſaly, I who saw him. 3. The antiquated relative ſo is now used only in poetry or other dignified styles of composition. 8 115.] 291 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 4. Antecedent and relative pronouns are used cor- relatively as follows: Antecedent. Relative. der.......... welder. ber. ......... der. Derjenige ....... weldier. derjenige ....... der. jeder ......... der. every (one) who (or which). Relative. Antecedent. wer......... (der). whoever (or who). was ......... (Das). whatever (or what). Rem. The following neuter indefinite pronouns and demonstratives used indefinitely, etwas, nichts, vieles, weniges, mandjes, das, dasjenige, are followed by the relative was: Alles was idy labe, All that I have. Das iſt etwas, was id, nidyt ver- That is something that I do not un- derstand. ſtebe, 20 7. SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. (Syntar des Fürwortes.) $ 115. 1. Personal pronouns take the person, the number, and the grammatical gender of the nouns for which they stand. 2. Adjective pronouns follow the laws of syntax that govern adjectives (S 94). 3. Relative pronouns take the geniler and number of the antecedent. Rem. 1. The relative pronoun can never be omitted: Der Mann, den idy geſtern ſaly, The man I saw yesterday. Rem. 2. Es used expletively, and das used in a collective sense, do not control the number or person of the verb: Es ſind Lente, bie- There are people that, Das ſind Dinge, die Those are things that- Rem. 3. The personal pronoun, if in the first or second person, is usually repeated after the relative: Das wiſſen wir, die wir die Gems That know we, who the chamois ſen jagen (Sd.), hunt. Shr, die ihr Serieg fülret gegen You, who make war against my meinen Sohn (Sch.), : son. 292 [$ 116-118. THE VERB. . THE VERB. . (Das Zeitwort.) $ 116. Verbs may be classified in several ways: 1. By derivation into primitive, derivative, and compound. 2. By use independent, auxiliary, and potential. 3. By meaning 66 transitive and intransitive. 4. By inflection « regular, irregular, and defective. § 117. Classification of Verbs by their derivation:- 1. Primitive or radical Verbs are such as can be traced for their origin to no other radical words: Hab-en, to have. Trink-en, to drink Lad-en, to laugh. Rem. The constancy of their use gives many primitive verbs a fixedness of form that is of great value in tracing the relationship of languages ($ 28-30). 2. Derivative Verbs are formed from verbs, nouns, or adjectives, the radical vowel usually taking the um- laut, when capable of it: Lädjel-n, to smile (from ladi-en, to laugh). Wärnt-en, to warm (from warnt, warm). Pfliig-en, to plow (from Pflug, plow). 3. Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing to a verb a preposition (separable or inseparable), a noun, an ad- jective, or an adverb: Aus-gehent, to go out. / Haitd-habent, to handle. Fort-gelen, to Er-finden, to invent. / Frei-ſprechen, to acquit. l go forth. § 118. Classification of Verbs as to their use: 1. Independent Verbs can be used without other verbs: Er las das Bud), . He read the book. 2. Auxiliary Verbs include the three (ſcin, haben, wer- den) that are employed in forming the compound tenses of all verbs: Er hat das Budy geleſen, He has read the book. Wir werden das Buch leſen, We will read the book. Rem. They may also be used as independent verbs. Er hat das Budy, He has the book. $ 119–123.] 293 CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS. 3. Potential Verbs (ſollen, wollen, können, mögen, dürfen, müſſen) are employed to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs : Er muß das Budy leſeni, He must read the book. . Rem. Laſſen is also often used as a potential verb. $ 119. Classification of Verbs by their meaning: 1. Verbs which govern an object in the accusative case are called Transitive by German grammarians : Er lieſt das Buch, He is reading the book. 2. Other verbs are called Intransitive : 1. Some intransitive verbs govern no object : Er (dyläft, läuft, geht, He sleeps, runs, goes. 2. Others govern an object in the genitive or dative case : Sie ſpotten meiner, Prinz! You deride me, prince! Er folgt ſeinem Bruder, He follows his brother. $ 120. When the subject and object of the verb denote the same person of thing, the verb is termed reflexive : Ich befleißige mid- I apply myself, Rem. When the action is mutual between the individuals that form the subject of the verb, the verb is termed reciprocal : Sie ſdmeidzeln einander, They flatter each other. 1. CONJUGATION. (Konjugation.) § 121. The Accidents of the Verb are (as in English) Moods, T'enses, Persons, Numbers, Participles, and Voices. 1. Moods (Modi). $ 122. The German Verb has five Moods: the Indicci- tive, Subjunctive, Conditional, Imperative, and Infinitive. Rem. The Potential Mood in English is translated into German partly by the potential verbs, and partly by the subjunctive and conditional moods. § 123. The Indicative Mood is used in expressing or de- nying that which is conceived by the speaker to be certain : . Er hat das Haus verkauft, He has sold the house. Rem. The indicative may be used in some conditional sentences where in English the subjunctive would be employed : Iſt er reid), ſo kann er viel geben, If he be rich, he can give much. 294 [$ 124, 125. CONJUGATION. Rem. 2. The present indicative may be used for the imperative in express- ing a command which is conceived as already carried into execution: Du übernimmſt die ſpaniſden Ne- Take charge of the Spanish regi- . gimenter (Sd.), ments. § 124. The Subjunctive Mood is employed : 1. In repeating statements of other persons, without vouching for their accuracy, or about which there may be some doubt in the mind of the speaker : Er ſagte, daß die Armee ſdon in He said that the army is already Bewegung ſei, in motion. Man ſagt, er ſei geſtorben, It is said that he is dead. 2. In indirect questions, treated as quotations: Idy fragte ihn wann er nadı Ber: I asked him when he will go to lin gehen werde, Berlin. 3. In expressing what is problematical, hypothetical, desired, or what is conceived of as possible, without having really transpired: Wäre er dod) geſund! Oh! that he were well! Möchte er geneſen! Oh! that he might recover! Ich wünſchte, daß er käme, I wished that he might come. Rem. The subjunctive mood is thus often used in subordinate sentences, especially after verbs expressing doubt, uncertainty, fear, hope, purpose, sup- position, echortation, advice, etc.; Idj bezweifelte, daß er ſdion in Ber: I doubted that he had already ar- lin angekommen ſei, rived in Berlin. Du ſollſt Deinen Vater und Deine Thou shalt honor thy father and thy Mutter ehren, auf daß du lange mother, that thou mayest live auf Erden Icveſt, [werdcſt, long in the land. Idy rathe Dir daſ Du fleißiger I advise you to be more diligent. Rem. The imperf. and pluperf. tenses of the subj. mood are often used in- stead of the present and perfect tenses of the conditional mood (see § 1-25). $ 125. The Conditional Mood is used to express a result dependent upon certain conditions. It corresponds in general to the Potential Mood in English, when used with the auxiliary would or should: Wenn das Wetter dyöner wäre,) If the weather were finer, I would wiirde id) ausgehen (cond.),(or), "I go out. ginge id) aus (subj.), Das wiirde id) nid)t thun (cond.), I would not do that (or) das thäte id; nid)t (subj.), § 126-128.] 295 IMPERATIVE MOOD. § 126. The Imperative Mood is used as in English. But with an imperative signification may also be used : 1. The present indicative (123, Rem. 2). 2. The perfect participle, the action being regarded as already completed : Die Trommel geriihrt! Beat the drums ! 3. The infinitive present, in expressions of childish or of highly excited passion : Sieh ins Buch hinein : nur nid)t Keep looking into the book: only Icſen, immer ſingen (0.), do not read, keep singing. Nidit zanken, Mutter ! Do not scold, mother! $ 127. The Infinitive Mood is always dependent upon another verb (except in the cases given below): Sudie zu ſeint, was du zi1 ſcheinen Seek to be what thou wishest to ap- wünſdieſt, pear. Exc. 1. When there is a manifest ellipsis, as : (Sou) Ich meines Bruders Stin- (Should) I not recognize my broth- Der niat erteiinien ! . er's children! Exc. 2. When used for the imperative (120, 3). Exc. 3. When used as a verbal noun : Das Sdilafen erguidt, Sleep is refreshing. Rem. The infinitive of any verb may be used as a (neuter) verbal noun when there is no corresponding substantive already existing. The infinitive is often used substantively even when it does not take the article: Seinen Feinden verzeihen iſt edel, To forgive one's enemies is noble. Exc. 4. The infinitive is used after certain nouns and adjectives: Es iſt Zeit zu gehen, It is time to go. Er hat Muth zu kämpfen, He has courage to fight. Der Brief iſt ſdhwer zu leſen, The letter is hard to read. Id bin begierig zu wiſſen, I am curious to know. $ 128. The use of zit as a sign of the Infinitive Mood has been constantly increasing since the sixteenth century. It is now omitted only in the following cases: 1. After the potential verbs ſollen, wollen, können, mö- gen, dürfen, müſſen (and laſſen): Iďy fann es nicht leſen, I can not read it. 296 THE VERB. [$ 129. 2. After the verbs fühlen, heißen, helfen, hören, lehren, lernen, madjen, ſehen: Das madit mid) zittern, That makes me tremble. Wir hörten ſie ſingen, We heard them sing. 3. After the verbs bleiben, fahren, gehen, liegen, reiten, ſtehen, and haben and ſein, in certain expressions: Er bleibt ſiken, He keeps his seat. Wir gehen ſpazieren, We are going to take a walk. Rem. 1. The infinitive with zu is used after the prepositions anſtatt, ohne, um: Anſtatt zu gehen, blieb er, Instead of going, he remained. Ohne das zu wiſſen- Without knowing that- Rem. 2. The infinitive of the active voice is often translated into English by the infinitive of the passive voice : Was iſt zu thun ? What is to be done? Rem. 3. In the German only the infinitive can be used as a verbal noun (and not, as in English, the present participle also): Er iſt des Sdwakens müde, He is tired of the chattering. 2. Participles (Partizipien). $ 129. There are two l'articiples, the Present and the Perfect. Rem. 1. Participles are used attributively in German to a far greater ex- tent than in English. When thus used they are subject to all the laws of declension of attributive adjectives: Der am 5. September verſtorbene The mayor of Kronfeld, who died Bürgermeiſter von Stronfeld, on the fifth of September. Rem. 2. Participles are frequently preceded by the case they govern, by a modifying adverb, or a limiting clause : Die Honig ſammernde Biene, The honey-gathering bee. Das uns verfolgende Geſdick, The fate that is pursuing us. Der ſoeben von Leipzig angekom- The express train that has just ar- mene Schnellzug, rived from Leipsic. Der Schnellzug von Leipzig iſt ſo- The express train has just arrived eben angefointmen, from Leipsic. Rem. 3. The adverb and the direct object (if a noun) is often joined to the participle into a compound word: Die geſekgebende Verſanımſung, The legislative assembly. Die neugebundenen Büdier, The newly-bound books. Rem. 4. Participles, like adjectives, may be used as nouns or as adverbs : E8 giebt viele Gelehrten, die, There are many learned men, who Mit fietcnd Heißem Waffer, With boiling-hot water, $ 130, 131.] 297 PARTICIPLES. § 130. The Present Participle is formed by adding - to the present infinitive: Ha-ben, to have; hab-end, having. Geh-cit, to go; geh-end, going. Rem. 1. If preceded by 311, the present participle takes a passive significa- tion (compare the Latin passive participle in andus, or endus). Ein zu vermeidender-Feller, A fault that should be avoided. Rem. 2. The participle thus was not declined before the last century. Rem. 3. The present participles of many verbs are used mostly, and in some cases only, with adjective significations: Abſtimmend, discordant. Bedeutend, important. Abweſend, absent. Dringend, urgent. Anweſend, present. Neizend, charming. § 131. The Perfect Participle is formed (1) by adding - to the root of all regular verbs, and -en to the root of all irregular verbs; and (2) by prefixing -ge to the root of all verbs, except the inseparable compounds ( 154), and those with -iren (=ieren) in the infinitive: - Infinitive. Perfect Participle. licb-eil, to love, ge-lieb-t, loved. geb-en, to give, ge-gebzen, given. vergeb-ent, to forgive, vergeb-en, forgiven. veded-en, to cover, bebed-t, covered. ſtudir-en, to study, ſtudir-t, studied. Rem. 1. In separable compounds ge- adheres to the root of the verb: aus-føre dy = en, to pronounce, aus-ge-ſprod)-en, pronounced. Rem. 2. When the verbs ſollen, wollen, können, mögen, diirfent, milſſen, laſſen, heißen, ſehen, hören, helfen are preceded by the infinitive of another verb, they take the form of the present infinitive for that of the past participle. The participial form of the potential vekbs is only used when they are em- ployed as though independent verbs (the independent verb which they modify being understood): Fd) habe es nidyt Yeſen fönnci, I could not read it. Im Habe ihn ſingen hören, I have heard him sing. Id habe es nie gefonnt, I have never been able (to do) it. Rem. 3. In forming the passive voice, werdeii drops ge-: Er iſt beſtraft worden, He was fined. : (but) Er iſt reid, geworden, He has become rich. Rem. 4. Many perfect participles have almost lost their verbal signification, and are used as adjectives : N 2 298 [$ 132, 133. THE VERB. 1. From active verbs: bekannt, well-known; gelehrt, learned. 2. From reflexive verbs: beſdjeiden, modest; Vetrunken, drunken ;. Ve- trübt, sad; geldjickt, skillful; gebraucht, second-hand. 3. From obsolete verbs: angeſeſſen, resident; verſdjieden, different. 4. Participles from nouns, with no corresponding verbs: geſtiefelt, “in boots;" geſtirnt, starry; bejahrt, full of years. Rem. 5. The perfect participle of some verbs, as laufen, fahren, reiten, etc., is used after kommen (the present participle being used in English): Er kam gelaufen, . He came running. 3. Tenses (Zeitformen). $ 132. The Present Tense is used în German more fre- quently than in English instead of other tenses. 1. Instead of the future tense : Id komme bald wieder, I shall come back soon. · Rem. Until as late as the fourteenth century future time was always ex- pressed by the present tense. 2. Instead of the perfect tense in speaking of the length of a period of time not yet completed: Wie lange ſind Sie in Berlin ? How long have you been in Berlin ? Idy bin (djon adyt fahre lier, I have been here eight years. 3. For the imperfect tense, in lively narration: Ich gehe geſtern mit meinem Kinde I went yesterday with my child to um die Parade zu ſehen, verliere see the parade; I lost sight of es aus meinen Augen- it- $ 133. The Imperfect and Perfect Tenses are employed as ir English, under the following limitations: 1. The perfect is often employed, when in English the imperfect would be used: Jd; habe ihn geſtern geſehen, I saw him yesterday. 2. The progressive form of the imperfect in English must be rendered by the imperfect in German. fdy las die Zeitung als er herein- I was reading the newspaper when kam, he came in. Rem. The imperfect is always employed after the adverb als. $ 134.] 299 PASSIVE VOICE." 3. The imperfect is frequently used in general ex- pressions, in which the perfect would be employed in English: : Waren Sie ſdon in Wien? Have you been in Vienna? 4. When the speaker wishes to convey the idea that he was personally cognizant of an event, the imperfect is usually employed : Vorgeſtern ſtarb bei mir unſer ge- Day before yesterday our dear friend liebter Freund, Herr N.- Mr. N. died at my house. Rem. With the perfect (and also with the pluperfect) the auxiliary may be omitted in subordinate sentences: Das Haus, weldjes id) heute ge- The house which I saw to-day is ſehen, iſt ſehr bequem, aber es very convenient, but it is too iſt zu theuer, dear. 4. The Passive Voice (Die Paſſivform). $ 134. The Passive Voice is formed by joining the auxil- iary werden, to become, to the perfect participle (see para- digm, § 161): Hier wird Deutſdy geſprodheit, German is spoken here. Der Feind wurde geſchlagen, The enemy was defeated. Rem. 1. The action is considered as becoming accomplished, that is, as taking place at the time alluded to. When the action is considered as completed the verb ſein is used, and the participle is usually treated as a predicative ad- jective. Das Haus war (djon abgebrannt, The house was already burnt down als die Feuerwehr ankam, when the fire-company arrived. Rem. 2. In the Gothic ſeilt was always employed. In the Old-Ger., wer- den was frequently used for the future tenses. In the Mid.-Ger., werden was frequently used in the past tenses. In the New-Ger., ſcint was some- times used as auxiliary; in the imperative mood it is always employed. Die Sdyladit war verloren, The battle is lost. Gott ſei gelobt! God be praised! 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice, with maji as nominative, is employed: „Heut' nimmt man nicht gefangen,“ “No prisoners will be taken to-day.” 2. When an intransitive idea is expressed by a transi- tive verb, the reflexive form is employed: Das verſteht ſid), . .. That is a matter of course. 300 [8 135. THE VERB. 2. When the object of the action is made the subject of the verb, and the agent is not alluded to, the reflex- ive form is usually employed: Eine neue Ordnung der Dinge A new order of things is established. führt ſich ein, 2. AUXILIARY VERBS. (Hilffsverba.) $ 135. There are three Auxiliary Verbs, haben, ſein, and werden. They are employed as follows: 1. Transitive, Reflexive, Impersonal, and Potential Verbs take haben as the auxiliary: Id habe ilın geſeljen, I have seen him. Er hat ſid, gefreut, He has rejoiced. Es hat heute geregnet, It has rained to day. Er hat es gemuſt, He has been compelled (to do) it. 2. Intransitive Verbs denoting a change of condition, or a motion from one particular place to another, take ſein as the auxiliary: Er iſt angefommen, He has arrived. Er iſt nadı Berlin gereiſt, He has gone to Berlin. (but) Er hat viel gereiſt, He has traveled much. Rem. 1. The verbs cilen, fahren, fließen, hinken, jagen, klettern, friedhen, Tanden, laufen-quellen, reiſen, reiten, rinnen, ſegelii, idhiffen, (d)wimmen, ſpringen, ſtoßen, treiben, wandern, when not indicating a motion to or from a particular place, have haben as the auxiliary: Er hat viel gereiſt, He has traveled much. Rem. 2. Sein, werden, and blciben take ſcint as the auxiliary: Er iſt in Berlin geweſen, He has been in Berlin. Er iſt Kaufmann geworden. He has become a merchant. 3. Other Intransitive Verbs take haber as auxiliary: 1. Those governing an indirect object in the geni- tive or dative case: Wir hatten ihn gehorfen, We had helped him. Ale vatten ſeiner Eitelkeit geradít, All had laughed at his vanity. 2. Those expressing absolute rest: Er hat ſehr lange geſtanden, He has been standing very long. § 136.] 301 AUXILIARY VERBS. Rem. 3. Some verbs, with two or more significations, take haben or ſein, according to the signification with which they may be used : Er war von der Stadt fortgefahren, He had driven out of the city. Er hatte fortgefahren im Leſen, He had continued to read. 3. Werden is used in forming the future tenses of the active voice, and in forming the passive voice. $ 136. The verb haben, to have, is conjugated thus: Principal Parts: hab'-en, hat'-te, ge-habt'. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. * Present Tense. idy hab-e, I have. idi hab-e, I have. du haſt, thou hast. du lab-eſt, thou hast. er hat, he has. er lab-t, he has. wir hab - cit, we have.. wir hab- cit, we have. ir lab-(e)t, you have. fie ha - cn, they have. fie hab - cit, they have. Imperfect Tense. ich hat-te, I · had. ich hät-te, I had. du hat-teſt, thou hadst. but hät-teſt, thou hadst. · er hät-te, he had. wir hat-teit, we had. wir hät-teit, we had. ihr hat-tet, you had. ilir bät-tet, you had. ſie hat-ten, they had. ſie hät-ten, they had. Perfect Tense. I have had, etc. I have had, ete. ich hav-e gchabt. idh hab-e gehabt. du haſt gelabt. bit hab-eſt gehabt. er hat gehabt. er hab- 1 gehabt. wir hab-eit gehabt. wir hab-en gehabt. iljr Jab-et gehabt. ilir hab-ct gely abt. ſie ly av- en gehabt. fie hab-en gehabt. Pluperfect Tense... . I had had, etc. id) hat-te gehabt. id) hät-te gchabt. du hat-teſt gehabt. du hät-teſt gehabt. er hat-te gehabt. er hät-te gehabt. wir hat-ten gehabt. wir hät-ten gehabt. ihr hat-tet gehabt. ihr hät-tet gehabt. fie hat-teit gehabt. fie hät-teit gehabt. * See Subjunctive Mood, $ 124. 302 [$ 136. THE VERB. First Future Tense. I shall have, etc. I shall have, etc. id) werd-e habcnt. idy werd-e haven. dit wirſt haven. du wer D-cſt habeni. er wird aben. er werd-C habci. wir werd - en habent. wir werd- en haben. ihr werdet haben. ilr werd - ct labe 11. fie werd- en haben. fie wer D- en haben. Second Future Tense. I shall have had, etc. I have had, etc. idy werd-e gchabt haben. id) werd-e gehabt habeii. du wirſt gehabt habeii. du wirſt gehabt haben. er wird gehabt haben. er wird gehabt haben. wir werd- en gely abt haberi. wir wer-cnt gelyabt habcn. ihr werd - et gehabt haberi. ilyr wero- ct gehabt haben. ſie werd-en gehabt haben. fie werd- en gehabt haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should have, etc. id) wiird-€ haben, or ich hät-te (Imperf. Subjunc.) bu w ü r$- cſt haben, '" dit hät-teſt er wit r 0-haben, " er hät-te os 66 wir würd-cit habent, “ wir hät-tent " ihr wü r$- et haben, “ilyr hät-tet " ſie to ü r D-cit haben, "ſie jät-ten c Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have had, etc. idy wiird-e gehabt haben, or ich hät-te gehabt (Plup. Subj.) du w ü r0- cft gehabt habcu, " du hät-teſt gehabt 66 66 er w ü r D-t gehabt havci, " er Vät-te gehabt 66 wir würo- en gehabt haben, 66 wir hät-teit gehabt 66 66 ilr wit ro- et gehabt habcit, " ihr hät-tet gehabt u " ſie w it rD-en gehabt habeit, fie lät-teit gehabt " 66 IMPERATIVE MOOD. hab-e (du), have thou. hab-en wir, let us go. hab-c (er), let him havc. hav-et ilir, have (you). hab-eii fie, let them have. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. Hab-cit, to have. . Perf. gehabt habent, to have had. Participles. Pres. Hab-end, having. I Perf. gehabt, had. Rem. Haven, Gothic haban, is allied to the Latin habere (to have), from which are derived the Spanish haber, Port. haver, Ital. avere, French avoir. so $ 137.] 303 AUXILIARY VERBS. $137. The verb ſein, to be, is conjugated thus: Principal Parts: ſein, war, ge-weſ'en. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id, ſei, I am. dit biſt, thou art. du ſei-eſt, thou art. er iſt, he is. er ſci, he is. wir ſind, we are. wir ſei-en, we are. ilhr ſeid, you are. ihr fei-ct, you are. ſie ſind, they are. fie ſei-cit, they are. Imperfect Tense. id) war, I was. id wär-e, I was. but war-ft, thou wast. du wär-cſt, thou wast. er war, he was. er, w ä r-e, he was. wir war - cn, we were. wir w ä r- cit, we were. ihr wa r -(c)t, you were. ihr wä r-et, you were. fie w a r - eit, they were. ſie iv ä r - cit, they were. ! I have been, etc. I have been, etc. id) bit timeịct. id) ſci geweſen. bu biſt geweſe . du ſei-eſt geweſen. er iſt geweſen. er ſci geweſen. wir ſind igeweſe 11. * wir jei- en geweſeni. iljr ſeid geweſen. ihr fei-ct geweſen. ſie ſind gewefeni. fie ſei-cit geweſen. Pluperfect Tense. I had been, etc. I had been, etc. idy war geweſent. id wär-e gcwcſci. dit wär-cſt geweſeni. er war geweſe 11. er w är- C geweſeni. wir w a r - cit geweſen. wir w q r - cii geweſen. ihr war-ct geweſen. iljr wär- ct geweſe 11. ſie wa r- cu geweſe 11. fie v žr-cnt geweſelt. First Future Tense. " I shall be, etc. I shall be, etc. idi werd-e ſciii. idy wert-e ſcili. du wirſt ſein. du werd-eſt rein. er wird ſein. er werd-e ſeili. wir werd - en ſein. wir werd - cu ſein. ihr wer D- et ſein. ihr werd-ct ſein. ſie werd- en ſein. ſie werd- en ſein. 304 [$ 137. THE VERB. << 66 Second Future Tense. . I shall have been, etc. I shall have been, etc. ich werd-e geweſen ſein. id werd-e geweſert ſeint. du wirſt geweſen ſein. bu werd-eſt geweſen ſein. geweſen ſein. wir werd- en geweſen ſein. ihr werd - et geweſen ſein. ihr wer - et geweſen ſein. ſie werd - ent geweſen ſein. ſie werd - cit geweſen ſein. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should be, etc. id wiird-e ſein, or idi wär-e (Imperfect Subjunctive). du w it r -eſt ſein, 6 du wär - eſt er w ü rose ſeint, - er wär- e wir w i ro - en ſein, wir w ä r - en ihr wür$- ct ſein, 66 ihr w Ï r - ct ſie w ü r D-cu ſciit, “ ſie w ä r - en Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have been, etc. idy würd-e geweſen ſeiit, or id; wär-e geweſen (Plup. Sub.) du wür D-eſt geweſen ſein, “ du w r - eft geweſen 66 er würo-e geweſen ſein, 6 er wär-e geweſeit 66 6 wir würd- en geweſen ſein, “ wir wär- en geweſen 66 66 ihr w ü r ð- et geweſen ſein, .“ ihr wär- et geweſentos ſie würo- en geweſen ſein, “ ſie wär- en geweſent 66 " IMPERATIVE MOOD. ſei (du), be thou.. ſci-en wir, let us be. ſeier, let him be. jei-et ilir, be you. ſei-ent fie, let them be. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ſein, to be. | Perf. geweſen ſeint, to have been. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ſei-end, being. | Perf. geweſen, been. Rem. The different parts of ſein are to be traced to three roots : 1. Bin, biſt (and Engl. be, been), are probably related to pauent, to build. 2. Sein, ſei, ſeid, find, and iſt (with Engl. are, art, is) are from a verb- al root that is now only found in Sanscrit as and Latin esse (to be). 3. Geweſen, war, wäre (and Engl. was, were), are from an obsolete verb,.in Sanscrit was (to reside), in Gothic vivian (to remain, to be), Old-Ger. wësan, Mid.-Ger. wësen. The former present participle wësend is now only used in the adjectives anweſend, abweſend. $ 138.] 305 AUXILIARY VERBS. § 138. Conjugation of werden, to become : Principal Parts: werd'-en, wurd'-T (ward), ge-word'-en. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idy werd-e, I become. idy werd-e, I become. du wirſt, thou becomest. du werd-eſt, thou becomest. er werd, he becomes. er werd-e, he becomes. wir werd-en, we become. wir iver$- en, we become. ihr werd-et, you become. ihr wer$-et, you become. ſie werd - ent, they become. ſie werd-en, they become. Iinperfect Tense. id) wurd-e,* I became. idy wiird-e, I became. Du wurd-eſt, thou becamest. du würd-eſt, thou becamest. er wurd-C, he became. er würd-, he became. wir wurd- en, we became. wir wü r D-cut, we became. ihr wurd-ct, you became. ihr wii r D-et, you became. ſie wurd- en, they became. fie würd-en, they became. Perfect Tense. I have become, etc. I have become, etc. ich bin gewordent or worden. ich ſei geworden or worden. du biſt geworden" worden. du ſei-eſt geworden“ worden. er iſt geworden“ worden. er ſci gewordens worden. wir ſind geword en “worden. wir ſei-eit gewordent" worden. ihr ſcið geworden "worden. ilju ſei-et geworden" worden. ſie ſind geworden worden ſie ſei-ent geworden“ worden. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. I had become, etc. id war gcwerdeii or wordci. idy wär-e geworden or worden. du - warſt geworden“ worden. du wär-eſt geworden " worden. er war geworden - worden. er wär- € geworden 6 worden.- wir war- en geworden “ worden. wir w är- en geworden “ worden. ihr war-et geworden “ worden. ihr w ä r - et geworden “ worden. ſie war - en geworden " worden. ſie wär- en geworden “ worden. Pirst Future Tense. I shall become, etc. I shall become, etc. idy werd-e werden. idy werd-e werden. du wirſt werden. du werd-eſt werden. er wird werden. er werd - € werden. wir werd- en werden. wir werd - elt werden. ihr werd - et werden. ihr werd - et werden. ſie werdeen werden. ſie werd- en werden. * In the singular of the Imperfect Indicative the forms idi ward, du wardſt, cr ward are sometimes employed. 306 [$ 138. THE VERB. Second Future Tense. I shall have become, etc. I shall have become, etc. idy werd-e geworden ſcin. id) werd-e geworden ſcil. du wirſt geworden ſein. bu werd-eſt geworden ſein. er wird geworden ſein. er werd-e geworde it ſein. wir werd- en geworden ſein. wir werD- en geworden ſein. ihr wer - et geworden ſein. ihr werd - et geworden ſein. ſie werd-ent geworden ſein. ſie wer$- en geworden ſein. CONDITIONAL DOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should become, etc. id) wird-e werdent or idy wiird-e (Imperf. Subjunctive). dit würd-eſt werden du würd- cſt cr würde werden - er wit r 0-C wir würd- en werden - wir würd - en ilyr würd-et werden wihr würd-ct " fie w ü r 0 - eit werden - ſie wü rD - cl Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have had, etc. id würd-e geworden ſein or id) wär-e geworden (Pl. Sub.) bu würd-eſt geworden ſein - du wä r - et geworden 66 66 er wird-e geworden ſeint" er wär-e geworden 66 wir wit r - en geworden ſein - wir wä r- en geworden “ 66 ihr würd- et geworden ſeint“ ilir wär-ct geworden" ſie würd- en geworden ſeint “fie w är-cnt gewordens IMPERATIVE MOOD. werd-e (ou), become thou. werd-eit wir, let us become. wer0 - (er), let him become. werd- et ilir, become you. werd-en ſie, let them become. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. werd-en, to become. | Perf. geworden ſein, to have become. PARTICIPLES. Pres. werd-end, becoming. | Perf. ge-word'en, become. Rem. Werden (Middle-German worden, to take a direction) is allied to the Latin vertere (to turn). $ 139, 140.] 307 REGULAR VERBS. 3. REGULAR VERBS. (Zeitwörter der ſdhwachen Konjugation.) $ 139. Under Regular Verbs (termed by German gram- marians verbs of the Weak Conjugation) are included: 1. All derivative verbs, as: wärmen, hämmern, pflügen, legen, ſetzen, ſtellen, tränken. 2. A few primitive verbs, as: ſagen, retten, ſuchen. 3. Foreign verbs (except ſchreiben), as: ſtudiren, kaſteien.. Rem. 1. Most regular verbs are transitive. Rem. 2. Regular verbs never take the umlaut, nor do they change the radi- cal vowel in inflection. wärm-en, to warm (from warm). 1ſtell-en, to place (from ſtehen). hänimer-11, to hammer ("Hammer). tränk-en, to water ( 66 trinken). bab-en, to bathe (u Bad). fag-en, to say (primitive). pflitg-en, to plough (“ Pflug). rett-en, to save ( "..). Teg-ent, to lay (« liegen). ſtudir'-en, to study (from Latin). fetz-ent, to set (“ fitzen). I faſtei'-en, to chastise (" "). $ 140. Conjugation of the Regular Verb lieben, to love : Principal Parts: lieb'-en, lieb'-te, gc-liebt'. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idi liev-e, I love. id lieb-e, I love. du lie B-ſt, thou lovest. du lieb-eſt, thou lovest. er lieb-t, he loves. er lieb-e, he loves. wir lieb-ent, we love. wir lieb-en, we love. ihr lieb-(C)t, you love. ihr lieb-et, you love. ſie lieb-en, they love. ſie lieb - clt, they love. Imperfect Tense. id lieb-te, I loved. id) licb-te, I loved. ou lie - teſt, thou lovedst. du lieb- teſt, thou lovedst. er lieb-te, he loved. er lieb-te, he loved. wir lieb-teit, we loved. wir lieb-teni, we loved. ihr lieb - tet, you loved. ihr lieb - tet, you loved. fie liebsten, they loved. fie. Tied - ten, they loved. 308 T$ 140. THE VERB. Perfect Tense. I have loved, etc. I have loved, etc. id hab-e geliebt. idi hab-e geliebt. du haſt geliebt. du Yar-eſt geliebt. er hat geliet. er hale geliebt. wir hab-en geliebt. wir hab- en geliebt. ifr Hab-et geliebt. ihr hab-et geliebt. ſie hab-en geliebt. fie hab-cu geliebt. Pluperfect Tense. I had loved, etc. I had loved, etc. idy hat-te geliebt. ich hät-te geliebt. du hat-teſt geliebt. bu hät-teſt geliebt. er hat-te geliebt. er hät-te geliebt. wir y at-ten geliebt. wir hät-teil geliebt. ilyr hat-tet geliebt. ifr Hät-tet geliebt. ſie hat-ten gelievt. ſie lät-ten geliebt. First Future Tense. I shall love, etc. I shall love, etc. id werd-e lieben. idi werd-e lieben. du wirſt lieben. du werd-cſt lieben. er wird lieben. er werdre lieben. wir werd- en lieben. wir wer - eit lieben. ihr werd - et lieben. ilje iverdset lieben. ſie werd- en lieben. ſie werd - en lieben. Second Future Tense. I shall have loved, etc. I shall have loved, etc. id) werd-e geliebt haben. idy werd-e geliebt haben. du wirſt geliebt haben. du werd-eſt geliebt haben. er wird geliebt haben. er werd-e geliebt haben. wir werd- en geliebt haben. wir werd- en geliebt haben. ihr werd - et geliebt haben. ihr werd - et geliebt haben. ſie werd-en geliebt haben. ſie werd- en geliebt haben. (Imperf. Subjunc.) CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should love, etc. idi wiird-e lieben, or id; lieb-te du würd-eſt liebert, “ bu lie - teſt er würó-e lieben, " er lieb-te wir w Ï r D- en lieben, “ wir lieb-ten ihr wür) - ct ſieben, 66 ilye Yieb-tet ſie iv i r d - en lieben, " ſie lieb-teit " $ 141.] 309 REGULAR VERBS. 11 Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have loved, etc. id) wiird-e geliebt haben, or id) hät-te gclicbt (Pl. Subj.) du würd-eſt geliebt haben, “bu hät-teſt geliebt is er würd-e geliebt haben, 66 er hätzte geliebt - 5 wir wit rd- en geliebt haben, wir hät-ten geliebt - " ihr würo- ct geliebt haben, 66 ihr hät-tet geliebt 66 os. fie w it r -en geliebt haben, 6 ſie hät-ten geliebt - 16 IMPERATIVE MOOD. licb-e (du), love thou. lieb-en wir, let us love. licv-e er, let him love. lieb-et ihr, love you. licb-en ſie, let them love. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ſicv-cit, to love. | Perf. gelicht haben, to have loved. PARTICIPLES. Pres. licb-cnd, loving. | Perf. geliebt, loved. $ 141. Table of endings of Regular Verbs: -eſt, sſt, reſt Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. Indic. Subj. 1 Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Pers. Sing. se, , ste, -ete, / -te, rete, 2 Pers. Sing se, -teſt, -eteſt, 1. -teſt, -eteſt, 3 Pers. Sing. -te, rete, ste, -ete, 1 Pers. Plur. -en, -en, | -ten, -eten, -ten, -eten, 2 Pers. Plur. -et, -t, set, -t, stet, -etet, | -tet, -etet, 3 Pers. Plur. | -en. -en. -en. | -e11.-e11. || -ten. -eten. / -ten. seten. Infinit. -en, -11. | Pres. Part. -end, -nb. | Perf. Part. gemet, ge—t. elle For the sake of euphony, or of the metre in poetry, the first e of terminations is frequently dropped. Rem. 1. It can never be dropped, however, when the stem of the verb ends in =), -t, or -gn (contracted from Egen). Rem. 2. The contraction always takes place in -cul, -end, when the stem ends in -el or -er. (In the 1st Pers. Sing. of the Pres. Ind., and in the 2d Pers. Sing. of the Imperative, the e of the stem is dropped.) Rem. 3. When the stem ends with a vowel, -e from -en is frequently dropred. Rein. 4. In -eſt, the c is not dropped when the stem ends , t, 8, ſ, p, qdı. Rem. 5. The contraction rarely takes place in the subjunctive mood. 310 [$ 142, 143. THE VERB. ste, gelieb-t. geſud-t. gerei-ſt. lieb-en, to love, ſud-en, to seek, reiſ-en, to travel, fiſchen, to fish, bad-en, to bathe, leit-en, to lead, ſegn-en, to bless, tadel-n, to blame, wander-ni, to wander, i lieb-e, . aft, -t, I ſudhe, reif-e, fiſd)-e, bad-e, Feſt, -et, leite, suſt, -et, ſegn-e, -eſt, tacor)-e, -ſt, st, I wan(dr)-e, -ſt, t, 1 Fete, -ete, gebad-et. geleit-et. geſegn-et. getadel-t. gewander-t. ste, -te, 4. IRREGULAR VERBS. Beitwörter der ſtarken Konjugation.) § 142. The Irregular Verbs (called by German gram- marians verbs of the Strong or Ou Conjugation) are all native German verbs (except the verbs pfeifen, Preiſen, and idreiben, which are derived from the Latin; see § 145). Rem. There are one hundred and ninety-one Irregular Verbs. The classification is based upon the changes which the raclical vowel undergoes in forming the principal parts : 1. Verbs of the first class have a different radical vowel in each principal part. 2. With verbs of the second, third, and fourth classes, the radical vowel of the imperfect only varies from that of the present. 3. Verbs of the fifth and sixth classes have the same vowel in the imperfect tense as in the perfect participle. 4. Verbs of the seventh-class are anomalous. They follow in conjugation partly the laws of regular, and partly those of irregular verbs. Rem. The following table represents the changes the radical vowels under- go in forming the principal parts of the seven classes of irregnlar verbs. 2 9.144.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 2d 14. 10. 40. 52. 16. dringen, $ 144. Classified list of the Irregular Verbs: Class. Present. Imperf. Partic. Examples. No. 1st i (or e), a, u (or 0). vind-ent, band, ge-bund-en. 45. geb-en, gab, ge-geb-en. 3d a, . 1, a. dlag-en, drug, ge-idylág-en. | 4tha, ie (or i), a. halt-en, hielt, ge-halt-ent. 17. 5th Ici, i (or ie), i or (ic). beiſ-en, biß, ge-biſſ-en. 6th : lic(c, etc.), 0, 0. gieß-ent, goß, ge-goſſ-ent. 7th anomalous. bring-en, brady-te, ge-brady-t. Total number of irregular verbs ......... 1191. 1. Irregular verbs of the first class : bindent, band, gebunden. | brechen, brach, gebrochen. finden, fand, gefundcii. ſprechen, ſprady, Beſprochen. fdwinden, dywand, geſdywundeii. ſteden, . ſtad), geſtoden. winden, wand, gewunden. dreſden, draſd), gedroſdeni. drang, gedrungen. ſterben, ſtarb, geſtorben. gelingen, gelang, gelungen. verderben, veröarb, verdorben. klingen, klang, . geflungen. werben, warb, geworben. ringen, rang, gerungen. werden, ward, Scivorden (or ſchlingen, ſchlang, geſchlungen. werden, ivurde, geworden). ſchwingen, ſchwang, geſchwungen. Bergen, varg, geborgen. fingeit, geſungeni. berſten, geborſten. ſpringen, ſprang, geſprungen. gebäreit, gebar, geboren. zwingen, zwang, gezwungen. Half, geholfen. ſinfen, fant, geſunken. werfen, warf, geworfen. ſtinken, ſtanf, geſtunfen. treffen, traf, getroffen. trinfen, tranf, getrunken. ſtecken, ſtad, Deſtodien. beginnen, begann, begonnen. (direden, ſdyrart, gcſdyrocken. gewinnen, gelvanii, geivonnen. ſtchlen, ſtall, geſtohlen. rinnen, ranni, geronnen. befehleii, Befall, Befohlen. ſinnen, fann, gefonnen. empfehlen, empfahl, empfohlen. ſpinnen, fpanii, geſponnen. neljmen, italm, Senonimer. Tiwimmen, ſitwamm, geſchwommen. Selten, galt, gegolten. (kommen, fam, gekommen). ſiteiten, ſchalt geſcholten. 2. Irregular verbs of the second class : geben, gab, gegeben. treten, getreten. lefen, Inë, geleſen. ſehen, fals, geſehen. geneſen, genas, geweſen. geſchehen, geldjaſ nedichen. eſſen, aß, gegeſſen. (bitten, bat, gebeten.) freſſen, fraß, gefreſſen. (liegen, gelegen.) meſſen, maß, gemeſſen. (iben, gefcſjen.) vergeffent, vergaß, vergeſſen. (ſeini, geweſen.) fag, barſt, Vyclfen, trat, Tag, faß, war, THE VERB. ($ 144. bacfen, fahren, graben, laden, mahlen, fing, Hielt, fallen, Valten, braten, ratlien, ſdhlafen, blaſen, laſſen, rietly, lief, hics, lico, rict, rict, ſpliß, beifen, beflcißen, reißen, dicißen, ſdmcißen, fpleißen, bleichen, gleiden, ſchlcidien, ſtreichen, weichen, greifen, feifen, kneifen, pfeifen, Idilcifen, gleiten, reiten, (direiten, ſtreiten, 3. Irregular verbs of the third class : buf, gebacken. ſchlagen, · ſchlug, geſchlagen. fuhr, gefalren. tragen, frug, getragen. grub, gegraben. fdjaffen, fduf, geſchaffen. Lith, geladen. wadyſen, wudha, Sewachſen. (mull), gemahlci. waſdıen wujd, gewaſdeii. 4. Irregular verbs of the fourth class : fiel, gefallen. fangen, gefangen. Behalten. Hangen, hing, gehangen. briet, gebraten. (geben, ging, gegangen.) gerathen. laufen, gelaufen. ſchlief, geſdılafen. Vauen, gehauen. blics, geblaſen. ſtoßen, ſtieß, geſtoßen. gelaſſen. rufen, gerufen. 5. Irregular verbs of the fifth class : biſ, gebiſſen. Iciden, litt, gelitten. befliß, beftiſjen. ſdyneiden, dinitt, Boſdynitten. riß, geriſſen. kncipen, fnipp, geknippen. ſdliß. geſdyliſjen. blciben, blieb, geblieben. ſdymiß, gcfdymiffen. reiben, . gerieben. geſpliſſen. direibci, drick, geſchrieben. blic, geblidyen treiben, trieb, getrieben. glid), geglidien. leihen, liels, geliehen. qdslidy, geſchlichen. ſdyreien, ſdric, Beſdricen. ſtrid), geſiridyen. ſpcion, fpic, geſpieen. wić, gewidiem. zeilen, zichy, gezielen.' griff, gegriffen. godcihen, gedicly, gedichen. Tiff, gekiffen. meiden, mied, gemieden. kniff, gefniffen. ſdciden, foied, Befdicden. pfiff, gepfiffen. prciſeit, prica, gepricfen. cliff, geſdhliffen. weiſen, wico, gewieſen. glitt, geglitten. ſdyweigen, ſüywieg, geſchwiegen. geritten. ſteigen, ſticg, geſtiegen. dritt, geſdyrittert. ſcheinen, (dien, geſdyicnen ftritt, geſtritten. (heißen, geheißen.) 6. Irregular verbs of the sixth class : goſ, gegoſſcr. Yügen, Tog, gelogen. genoß, genoſſen. trügen, troi getrogen. floß, gefloſſen. pflegen, pflog, gepflogen. faroſ, geſchoſſen. Behoben. qohloß, geldiloſſen. weben, wob, gewoben. ſproß, geſproſſen. fdären, (chor, Beſchoren. verdroß, verdroſſen. gähren, pour, gegouren. flob, geflobeir. усреп, fdyivären, fdivor, geſchoren. ſchov, geſdoben. wägen, IVOJ, gewogen. ritt, .. hob, gicficn, genießen, Fließen, fdjießen, (dyließen, (pricßen, verdrießen, Flicben, idjichen, 8. 144.] 313 . IRREGULAR VERBS. vot, Vog, Flog, floh, fror, troff fönnen, dynieben, (dinob, geldynoben. bewegen, bewog, bewogen. ſtieben, ſtob, geſtoben. fedyten, fodit, gefodten. bieten, geboten. flediten, flodyt, geflodyten. ſicden, fott, geſotten. melfen, molf, gemolfen. biegen, gebogen. (dymelzen, ſdymolz, geſdymolzen. fliegen, geflogen. fdwellen fdjwolle: Deſdywollen. wicgeni, woy, gewogen. quellen, quoli, gequollen. friedhjen, Frody, gefrodjen. fdhallen, ſchou, gedollen. riechen, rody, gerochen. ſaufen, foff, geſoffen. fliehen, gefloyen. faugen, fog, gelogen. ziehen, · 303, Bezogeil. ſdhrauben, drob, Beſchroben. frieren, gefroren. ſdywören, fdywor, geſdhworen. verlieren, verlor, verloren. erlöſdien, crlords, crloſdien. triefen, getroffen. (dingen, 'bung, gedungen.) Flinimen, Fluniin, geklommen. (dinden, ſdjund, geſdunden.) flimnica, glomni, geglommen. (ſtehen, ſtand, geſtanden.) Beklemmen, beklomm, Beflommen. (thun, that, gethan.) 7. Irregular verbs of the seventh class : haben, hatte, gehabt. bringen, brachte, gebracht. ſollen, ſollte, gefolit. Denken, badytc, gedadyt. wollen, wollte, gewollt. brennen, brannte, gebrannt. konntc, gefonnt. kennen, Fannte, gekannt. mögen, modyte, gemodst. nennen, nannte, genannt. dürfen, durfte, gedurft. rennen, rannte, gerannt. müſſen, mußte, gemußt. ſenden, . fandte, geſandt. wiſſen, wußte, gewußt. wenden, wandte, gewandt. Rem. 1. To avoid the necessity of multiplying the classes, the verbs koni- men, bitten, liegen, ſitzen, ſein, gehen, heißen, dingen, ſchinden, gehen, thun, are placed under those of the above seven classes, where, by the analogy of vo- cal changes in forming the principal parts, they seem most appropriately to belong. Rem. 2. The simple verbs from which the compound verbs given in the above list (be-ginnen, be-fleiſjen, Be-klemmen, be-wegen, emp-fehlen, er-löſdien, ge-lingen, ge-winnen, ge-bärent, ge-neſen, ge-fdjehen, ge-deihen, ge-nießen, ver- Derben, ver-geſſen, ver-Drieſen, ber-lieren) are derived, are now either antiqua- ted, or provincial (as winnen), or are entirely obsolete (as 0.-G. nësan). Rem. 3. Some of the irregular verbs are also used as regular in the whole conjugation (as laden, braten) or in part of the conjugation (as braten, gäh- ren). Rem. 4. Many of the German verbs are allied to words in other branches of the Indo-European languages, as the Latin, Greek, and Sanscrit. Rem. 5. For these and other features of the individual verbs, see the notes to the following alphabetical list of irregular verbs: · THE VERB. [8 145. biſſe, * * barg, * * böger blieſe, blid), briete, Sünge, § 145. Alphabetical List No. of 2d and 3d Pers. Sing. Imperfect | Imperfect Present Infinitive. Class. of Present Indicat. Indicative. Subjunctive. Bacten, to bake. but, büke, Befehlen,a to command. -fiehlſt, -fiehlt, 1 befayl, beföhle, (not given when befliß, Befliſje, Beginnen,3 to begin. formec begann, begä(or ö)ne, Beißen, to bite. regularly.] biß, * Beilemmen, to press. beklenmete, * Bergen,4 to conceal. birgſt, birgt, bärge, * Berſten, to burst. birſteſt, birſt, balorſt, bä(o)rſte, * Bewegen, to induce. beivog, bewöge, Biegen, to bend. bog, Bieten, to bid. bot, büte, Bindeni, to bind. band, bände, Bitten, to beg. bat, päte, Blaſen,? to blow. Bläſeſt, bläf(e)t, blies, Bleiben,8 to remain. blieber Bleidsen,' to fade. blidic, Braten, to roast. * brätſt, brät, * briet, Bredien, 10 to break. brad), brädie, Brennen, to burn. brannte, brennete, Bringen, to bring. bradite, brädyte, * Denken, to think. dachte, dächte, Dingen, to hire. but Dreſden, 11 to thrash. drifdjeſt, drifdst dra(o)ſd), drälö)ſdje, Dringeni, to press. drang, drät ülnige, Dürfen, to be permitted. (ich darf), darfſt, darf, durfte, Empfehlen, to recommend ichift, richſt, empfahl, empfähle, Elien, 12 to eat. isfeſt, iſt a B, Fahren, to ride. fährſt, fährt, fuhr, führe, Fallen, to fall. füüſt, fält, fiele, Fangen, 14 to catch. fängſt, fängt, fing, | finge, Fedhyten, to fight. ficht(e)ſt, fidit, fudit, födyte, Finden, to find. fand, Flexsten, 15 to braid. flid)t(e)ſt, flid)t(et), fludit, flödyte, Fliegen, to fly. Fliehen, to flee. | Fließen, 16 to flow. flor, Freſjen, 17 to devour. frifieſt, frißt, Frieren, 18 to frecze. fröre, Gähren, to ferment. * gohr, göbre, Gebären, to bear. -biereſt, -biert, gebar, gebäre, gab, gäbe, Gedeihen, to thrive. gediely, gediche, Gehen, to go. ging, ginge, Gelingen, 19 to succeea gelang, gelänge, Gelten, to be worth. giltſt, gilt, galt, gälte, Geneſeri, to recover. genne, genäſe, Genießen, to enjoy. genoß, genöſie, Geſdielen, 19 to happen. geſdicht, geſday, geſchälc, Geivinnen, 20 to win. geivann, gevvänne, Gießen, 21 to.pour. göffe, Gleidien, 22 to resemble. slid), . glide, 5. Gleiten, 23 to glide. Blitt, Blitte, * The asterisk indicates that the whole verb (or the critooririovými aj * 220 Hirinimoririisiaj o ti i coriosos saisoriai Hiiriassarionowo äße, fiel, fände, Flog, flüge, flöle, flüsſe, fraß, fror, ABC, $ 145.] 315 IRREGULAR VERBS. birſt, brenne, dente, Ding! of the Irregular Verbs. Imperative Perfect Mood. Remarks. I Participle. backe, gebacken. befiehl, 1. Rorts. 1The following verbs in the sixth class, biegen, Þefleiße, beflijjen. mitent. bieteit, fliegen, flichen, fließen, genießen, gießen, kriecheni, lügen, beginne, Fdjließen, ſprießen, tiefen, verdrießen, ziehen, formerly had begonnen. parallel forms in cn in tho 2d and 3d pers. sing. of the beiß, gebiſſen. pres. ind., and in the imperative (as du veutſt, er beut; beklemme, betontinent. Beut); these forms are now only used in poetry. birg, geborgen. gevorſten. Rem. 2. Finale of the imperative of some verbs, as bic: bewege, bewogen. gen, bieten, blajen, is dropped by some writers. bieg(e), gebogen. Rem. 3. Some verbs (as berften, dreſcher, etc.) have two biet(e) geboten. for more forms in the imperfect indicative or subjunctive. binde, gebunden. · bitte, gebeten. Remarks on the Individual Verbs. blaſ(e), geblaſen. 11 Backen is also regular except in participle; it is allied bleib(e), geblieben. Ito Gr. púyelv, to roast, and Latin focus (a fireplace). Kleidje, gebliden. | ? First appeared in the 15th century; from Gothic filhan, bratce), gebraten. brid), 3 From 0.-G. kinan, to yawn, open. [0.-G. fëlaban. gebrodjen. gebrannt. | 4 From bergen are derived der Berg, die Burg. bring(e), ljebradit. | 5 Regular when meaning "to move from a place.” gedact. 6 Allied to Sans. Ohug, Gr. eúyelv, Lat. frugere; from it gedungen. I are derived Hogen, bow; Bucht, bight (and the French διδα), . gedroſden. I bouger, English budge). dring(e), 1 geðrungen. 1 7 Compare English blast, Blaze. (wanting), gedurft.. 1 8 Related to Gr. lɛittelv, Lat. linquere ; comp. Eng. leave. empfehle, empfohlen. | 9 The derivative bleiden, to bleach, is regular. gegeſſen.13 fahr(e), gefahren. |20 Allied to Lat. frangere, Gr. pńyvumi. fallce), Jefallen. 11 Sometimes used as regular, except in the participle. gefangen. 112 M.-G. özzen, 0.-G. itan, Ang.-Sax.ctan, Eng.cat (allied to gefochten. | Lat. edere, Gr. & DeLv, Sans.ad, Kelt. ith); comp.Eng.ctch. gefunden. 13 In the 16th cent., the participle was formed regularly, flicht, Beflochten. gceſſen (yet existing in somo dialects); this was con- geflogen. tracted gcſen; in the 17th cent, another ge: was added flier(e), geflohen. by false analogy, hence the double prefix in gegeſſen. fließle), gefloſſen. 14 Conap. Eng. fang (and the obsolete verb to fang). gefreſſen. 15 Allied to Lat. plectere (plicare), Gr. TNÉKEL; from the gefroren. gähr(e), gegohren. 1 root of fledyten comes also Flachs, flax. geboren. 116 From the same ultimate root (beginning with fl) as flie- gegeben. gen, fliehen, etc.; allied to Lat. frere (pluere), fluviuin gedeihi(e), geðiehen. i pluvirin), Gr. mlúvelv (to wash), Sans. płro (to flow). gegangen. From fließen comes Fluf (compare English floss). (wanting), gelungen. 17 Contracted from ver-eſſen. gilt, gegolten. 18 The original 8 (frieſen) is yet preserved in some dia- genere, geneſen. | lects ; it appears in Froſt. genieße), genollen. 19 Only used in the third person (es gelingt, etc.). (wanting), gedeben. 20 mm 20 The simple form (M.-G. winnen, 0.-G. winnan) is obso- gewinne, gewonnen. [lete. gieß(e), 21 Allied to Gr. Xúelv, to pour. segollen. gleid), geglichen. frib, 6 gehe, 22 From gleidh, a contraction of gleid, (from lih, like). gleite, Igelitten. 23 From the same root comes glatt (smooth); and En- part to which it is attached) is also conjuga gularly. 316 THE VERB. No. of Class. como Alphabetical List of the 20 and 3d Per's. Sing. In perfect " Imperfect of Present Indicat. Indicative. Subjunctive. glonim, glömme, gräbſt, gräbt, grub, grübe, gegriffen, haſt, hat, hatte, hätte, hältſt, vält, Vielt, yielte, bängſt, vängt, vieb, GIII ving, Present Infinitive. * Klinument,' to glimmer. Graben, 2 to dig. Greifen, to grasp. Haben, 3 to hayo. Halten, 4 to hold. Hangen, to. hang. * Hauen,s to hew. Heben, to heave, lift. Heißen, to command. Helfen,' to help. * Reifen, to chide. Rennen,8 to know. * Klieben,' to cleave. Klimmen, to climb. Stlingen, io to sound. Kneifen, ??? hicß, half Hilfſt, Hilft, hinge, liebe, höbe, vieße, hälſe, fiffe, fennete, Flobe, Flömme, Flänge, Eniffe,' fannte, klub, Fluni, Flang, kniff, knipp, kani, Incipen, 11 > to pinch. knippe, käme, könnte, Frödje, lud, * lüdc, ließe, liefe, litte, lielic, läje, läge, löjdje, Ing, Voſd), Yugi instinnsórczorito che i Hii ni aici öes con sairnrinniswo iw warsziri wscho Stonimen, to come. Können, 12 to be able (can). (id, fann), fannſt, kann, konnte, Kriechen, to creep. frody, Laden, 13 to load. lädſt, lädt,* Laſſen, to let. läßt, läßt, ließ, . Laufen, 14 to run. läufſt, läuft, licf, Leiden, to suffer. litt, Leilen, to loan. lieh, Lején, to read. liefeſt, lieſt, Ino, Liegen, 15 to lic. * Ridien. 16 to extinguish. liſcheſt, lifdit, Lügen, to lic. * Mahlen, 17 to grind. o mahlte, Meiden, to avoid. micd, * Melfen, 18 to milk. 1 milleſt, mileſt, molf, Meſſen, 19 to measure. miſſeſt, mißt, maß, Mögen, 20 to be pormitted. (id) mag), magſt, mag, modite, Müſſen, to be obliged. (id) niuß), mußt, muß, | mußte, Nchinent, 21 to take. niiniſt, nimmt, nahm, Nennen, 21 to, namo. nannte, Pfeifen, 22 to whistle. pfiff, * Pflegen, to cherish. pflog, Preiſen, 23 to praise. prico, Quellen, 34 to spring forth quillft, quillt, quoll, Nathen, to advise. räthft, räth, rieth, Neiben, to rub. ricb, Reißen, 25 to tear. riſi, Neiten,26 to ride. ritt, Rennent, to run. rannte, Rieden,27 to smell. rod), Ningen, 28 to wrestlo. rang, Ninnen, 29 to run. rann, Rufen, to call. Saufen,30 to soak. fäufft; fäuft, Forf, * Saugent, 31 to suck. * Schaffen, 32 to create. chuf, 1 * Schallen, 33 to resound. doll, löge, inahlete, miede, mölfe, mäße, mödyte, niüßte, nähine, nenncte, * pfiffe, pflüge, pricic, quölle, riethe, riebe, riſſe, ritte, rennete, - rödie, ränge, räloine, riefe, föffe, rict, ſöge, an .chüfe, ſchölle, IRREGULAR VERBS. 317 grabe, Écif(e), Klimny, IaB leidiel, Imperative Perfect Mood. I Participle, Reinarls. glimme, geglommen. glish glad (smooth, bright) and glace, opening in the gegraben. I woods. gegriffen. 1? The provincial glum, glumig, Eng. gloom, yloomy, glum habe, gehabt. I Halt(e), gehalten. root as glimmen, to glimmer. yang(e), gebangcii. 2 Allied to Gr. ypúciel, to write; from graben are de- 2 Alied to Gr nenechce Vauce), rived das Grab, grave; der Graben, ditch; dic Grube, pit. Web(e), gehoben. 3 Hence die Habe, possession; der Hafen, haven; handhaben Weiß(e), Seheißen. 4 From Valten is the interjection halt! halt! stop! [is reg. bilf, geholfen. 5 Hence die Hacke, hoc; das Heu, hay; der Hieb, blow. geliffen. 6 Hence der Hebel, lever; der Hobel, plane. fennie, gekonnt. | ? Hence Helfershelfer; die Hilfe, hilflos, beholfen, etc. flieb(e), gefloberi. 8 Allied to Lat. genui ; Gr. yavvãv. geflommen. klinge, 1 geklungen. 9 Mostly provincial. From flieben are derived der Klo: kucife, Sefuiffen. ben, pulley; die siluft, cleft; die Filuppe, pincers. 110 Allied to, if not der. from Lat. clangere (Gr. Klúyyelv). kneipe, gefnippen. komm(C), gekommen. | Koneifen has come into the High-German from the Up- (wanting), gefonnt. I per: per-German, Encipen from the Lower-German dialects. Friedy (e) gefrodjeni. 12 Allied to kennen. From the same root are fund, die lad(e), geladen. | Kunſt, das fiind, der König. gelaſſen. 13 Laden, to invite, is regular, is from a different root, and laufen, gelaufen. gelitten. 15 Hence legen, to lay; die Lage, site ; das Lager, the camp. Leihies, geliehen. 16 Now used mostly in compounds. lies, gelején. 17 Wahlen is regular except in the participle. The im- gelegen. perf. is reg. in the N.-G. The irreg. form muhl (from acluiden. I *M.-G. muol) is now only provincial. gelogen. 18 Now generally regular. From the same root are die mahle, 1 gemahlen. Mild), millc, and die Wolfe, whey. meid (e), milk, gemolfen. nå; Gr. Hétpov; Lat. metr'uin (172eter'), from retire (to miß, gemeljen. I measure); also to Lat. modus. Compare English metc. (wanting), gemocht. 20 From mönen are möglid), possible; die Macht, might. or gemußt. |2i Nehmen and neunen are from the same ultimate root niim, genommen. as der Name, name (allied to Lat. nomen; Gr. ovoja; 5 y Mome. nenne, genannt. I Slav. inja; Sans. rânzan). pfeif(e), gepfiffen, 22 Not found before Mid.-Ger. ; derived from Latin pi- pflege, gepflogen. | pare (to peep [said of birds), in Low Latin to whistle). preiſce), gepriejent. 23 From Low Latin preciare (from Latin pretium, price). quill, gequollen. (24 Cinqucllen is regular rathe, gerathen. 25 Hence der Neiz, charm; der Niſ, rent; die Nitze, rift. 25 am reibie), gericben. 26 26 Bereiteit, to ride over, is regular (not to be confounded cocitose reiß(e), Jeriſjen. reit(e), with bereiten, to preparl—from bercit, ready). geritten. renne, *gerannt. 127 From riechen como der Gerud), odor'; der Naud), sinoke. riech(e), gerochen. 28 From der Ning; it signifies also to wring (clothes). ring(e), 29 As of fluids. Hence rennen, to run; die Ninne, gutter. rinn(e), lieger Tijd), Yüge, geronnen. 30 Hence die Suppe, soup; compare English sop. . ruf(e), 13 Allied to Latin sugcrc (to sucl) and succus (juice). ſauf(e), gcioffen. 32 With other significations, daffcit is regular. From it fauale), laeſogen. 1 is derived fchöpfen, to create ; compare English shape. fchaff(e), gefdjaffen. 33 Hence die Schele, a small bell, and der Schilling, stil- (dialle, geſdoŲen. 1 ling (sounding metal). | gerufen. 318 THE VERB. dien, Souilt, diert, läft, dylidhe, NOI Present Infinitive. Sdeiden,' to separate. Sdieinen, to appear. Sdelten, to scold. Sdjerent, to shear. Schieben, 3 to shove. Scießen, to shoot. Scinden,' to flay. Sdilafen, to sleep. Solagen,s to strike. Sdleidsen, to sneak. * Sdsleifen, 6 to whet. * Sdpleißen," to slit. Sdlingen, to swallow. Sdmeißen, to smite. * Schmelzen,' to melt. Sdyneiden, to cut. Sdynieben, to snort. * Sdrauben, to screw. * Sdreden,)0 to frighten. | Schreiben1,11 to write. Sdreien, to cry. Sdyreiten, to stride. Schwären, to fester. Schweigen, to be silent. Soywelen, 12 to swell. Schwimmen, 13 to swim. Sdivinden, 14 to disappear Schwingen, 15 to swing. Sdwören, 26 to swear. Selen, 17 to see. Sein, 18 to be. * Senden, to send. Sieden, to seetho, boil. Singen, to sing. Sinken, to sink. Sinncı, to muse. Sißen, 19 to sit. Sollent, to be obliged. Speien, to spit. Spinnen, 20 to spin. Spleißen, 21 to split. Spredjen,22 to speak. Sprießen, 23 to sprout. Springen,24 to spring. Stedjen, 25 to stick. * Steden, 36 to stick. Stehen, 27 to stand. Stehlen, to steal. Steigen, to mount. Sterben, 28 to die. Stieben, 29 to fly (as dust). Stinken, to stink. Stoßen, to hit. | Streidjen, to stroke. dries, Alphabetical List of the 2d and 3d Pers. sing. l Imperfect | Imperfect of Present Indicat. Indicative. Subjunctive. (died, (dziede, diene, Biltit ſchalt, idjälölte, djor, ſdyöre, dob, döbe, ſchoß, ſchöſſe, dund, fdsünde, dläft, dhlief, dhliefe, idlägſt, failägt, ſchlug, idylüge, djlicy, dhliff, jdliffe, fdlig, diliſic, idilang, 8 jdslänge, dmiß, idmiſſe, ſdymilzeſt, ſchmilz(e)t, ſchmolz, idmölze, fanitt, dynitte, idynob, . fdynöber (drob, chröbe, fdridſt, fdrickt, (dhraf, fdräke, ſchriebe, fdirie, dyriee, chritt, dritte, fdwor, dwöre, idywies: fchwiege, juwillſt, ſựwilt, idwoù, dwölle, idiwamm, idhwämme, ſchwand, jdwände, dwang, jdwänge. [clywo(u)r, ſchwö(ülre, ſiehſt, ſielt, jale, (idy bin), biſt, iſt, war, wäre, fandte, fendete, fott, fötte, jänge, oriosos #clown rivi corso ricono i owocóririricaicinorisiriano ricrioriririririri na faly, fang, IANE. janke, niin, fänne, jäße, (ichy foll), folſt, fol, folite, follte, 1pice, vänne, fbliſſe, ſpridſt, ſpricht, fpic, ſpann, ſpliß, ſpracy, fproß, ſprang, ſtad), itaf, ſtand Stahl, ties, tarb, ſpräche, ſpröſſe ſpränge, ſtädje, ſtidiſt, ſtidit, ftäfe, ſtichiſt ſtirbſt, ſtiehlt, ſtirbt, ſtände, ſtähle. ſtieger türbe, ſtöbe, ſtänke, ſtieße, ſtrider ſtoßeſt, ſtoßet, ſtieß, ſtrich), IRREGULAR VERBS. 319 Irregular Verbs (continued). Imperative Perfect Mood. Participle. Remarks. fdheide, geſdieden. 1 1 Regular as an active verb; allied to Latin sci(n)do, fdjeine, leſdicnen. Gr. Oxitaly. From fdyeiben is derived der Scheitel, top fdilt, geſdolten. I of the head (where the hair is parted). , (dier, geſchoren. | ? From fdieren are die Schaar, division, troop; die Schar, (djieb(e), geſdoben. (plough) share; allied to fdarf, sharp. idjießle), sejdoſſen. 3 Hence die Schüppe (and die Schaufel), shovel. idsind(e), gejdhundeni. dilaf(e)gejdhlafen. 4 Compare English skin. jdslag(e), geſlagen. 5 Hence der Schlag, blow; die Schlacht, battle; compare (dleidi(e), geſdylichen. | English slay. fchleif(e), geldjliffen. 6 Reg. when meaning to drag along, demolish ; comp. Eng. fdleiß(e), gejdhliffen. slip; ſdhleifen is allied (in li) to ſdíleidyen, gleidsen, gleiten. ſdling(e), Igeſdylungen. ? Regular when in transitive. idhmeiß(e), gefdimiſſen. 8 Hence die Schlange, snake. idymilk, seſdymolzen. 19 Regular when active. janeið(e), gejdynitten. diniebie) gejdinoben. 110 Reg. when trans. ; irreg. when intransitive (to be alarmn- draub(é), gejdroben. | ec); more usually employed in compounds, as crſdređeni. drick, geſdrođen. 11 From Lat. scribere (to write); hence die Schrift, writing. (direib(e), gefdyrieben. 12 Hence der Schwall, swelling of the sec); die Schwelle, (dyret, gedricen. (door) sill; der Sdywulſt, bombast. fdreit(e), geſchritten.' 13 Honce der Sdwamin, sponge; der Sumpf, swamp. * (dwäre, gedworen. | 14 Hence die Schwindſucht, consumption. dyweige, seſdywiegen. 15 Hence Sie Schwinge, winnow. chwili, gefdwolen. 16 Hence der Schwur, oath. (dywimme, gefdywommen fdwind(e) gefdwunden. 117 Hence die Sicht, sight; das Gefidit, face. (dywinge, geſchwungen. 18 See $ 138 Rem. ſchwörle), geſchworen. 19 Hence jetzen, to set; der Seriel, chair ; der Sitz, seat; geſehen. | der Sax, sentence. Allied to Latin sedere ; Greek 'lYELV; geweſen. Russian sidjet ; Sanscrit sad. fende, geſandt. 20 Hence die Spindel, spindle, distaf'; das Geſpinnſt, yarn gefotten.. 1 (whatever is spun); die Spinne, spider; ſpannen, to span. geſungen. 21 Hence der Splitter, splinter; die Spalte, colunn. finice), geſunken. 22 Hence die Sprache, language; der Spruc), adage. geſonnen. jige, 23 Hence der Sprofie, sprout; die. Sproſſe, round of a geſellen. | ladder. (wanting), gefolt. fpeie, 24 Hence die Springquelle, spring; der Sprung, leap; der geſpieen. Urſprung, origin. ſpinne, geſponnen. ſpleiß(e), geſpliffen. 25 Hence der Stid), stab; der Stidiel, burin ; der Stachel, ſpridh, geſprochen. sting (die Stadielbeere, gooscberry); das Stück, piece ; fyrieb(e), geſproffen. der Stock, canc; die Stange, stake ; ſtechen is allied to ſpring(e), geſprungen. | ſtiden, to embroider. ſtidy, geſtochen. " 26 Regular when transitive; regular or irregular when ſtecke, seſtocken. in transitive. ſtche, leſtanden. 27 Hence der Stand, condition; die Stunde, hour: die ftieht, geſtohlen. Statt, stead; die Stadt, city; der Stadel (Stal), ſteig(e), geſtiegen. stable; der Stollen, support; der Stuhl, chair; ſtüßen, ſterbele), geſtorben. to support; ftellen, to place; ſtät, stcady; ſtets, continue- ſtieb (c), seſtoben. ally. Steben is allied to Latin stare; Greek iotúval; jiinkie), geſtunken. Slavic stati; Sanscrit sthi. ſtoßle), geſtoßen. | 28 Compare English to starve. ſtreid)(e), geſtriden. 29 Hence der Staub, dust. fieh, hebre), fing(e), finn(e), 320 THE VERB. Alphabetical List of the 20 and 3d Pers. Sing. I Imperfect Imperfect of Present Indicat. Indicative. Subjunctive. ſtritt, that, thuſt, ägſt, z, thut, trägt, trifft, trug, traf, trieb, ſtritte, thäte, trüge, träfe, triebe, träte, tröffe, No. ofl Present Infinitive. Class. Streiten, to contest. Thun,' to do. Tragen,to carry. Treffen, to hit. Treiben, to drive. Treten, to tread. Triefen, 3 to drop. Trinfen, 4 to drink. Trügen, to deceive. * Verderben,s to spoil. Verdrießen, to vex. Vergeſjén,ó to forget.. Verlieren,' to lose. Wachſen, to grow. Wägen, to weigh. Waſchen,' to wash. * Weben, to weave. Weichen, 10 to yield. Weiſen, il to show. * Wenden, 12 to turn. Werben, to sue for. Werden,13 to become.. rindasörivärivaio ci schowanriri riöinniori tệt, tritt, trat, troff, trank, tränke, trog, tröge, -dirbſt, -dirbt, verðarb, verdürbe, es verdroß es verdröſſe, =giſfeſt, -gißt, vergaß, vergäße, berlor, verlöre, wächſeſt, wädıſt, wuchs, wüchſe, wog, wöge, wäſdyeſt, wäſcht, wuſds, wüjdie, wob, wübe, widy, widje, wies, wieſe, wandte, wendete, wirbſt, wirbt, warb, würbe, wirſt, wird, wurde (or würde, ivard), wirfſt, wirft, warf, würfe, wog, mögc, wand, ໃputbc, (id) weiß), weißt, weiß, wußte, wüßte, (idy will), willſt, will, | woütc, wollte, ziely, ziche, 303, zöge, zivang, zivänge, Werfen, to throw. Wiegen, to weigh. Winden, to wind. Wiſſen, 14 to know. Woüen, to be willing. Zcihen, to accuse. Ziehen, 15. to draw. Zwingen, 16 to force. -, ste, că ste, § 146. Table of endings of Irregular Verbs. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. Indic. ' | Subj. Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Pers. Șing. se, se, =l, 2 Pers. Sing. -eſt, -ſt, -, l-ſt, teſt, -ft, -teſt, 3 Pers: Sing. =et, | -e, meste, -et, -te, 1 Pers. Plur. -en, -en, -en, -en, -en, -en, sten, -en, sten, 2 Pers. Plur. -et, -t, -et, set, at, llt, -tet, -et, stet, 3 Pers. Plur. -en, -en, | -ent, | -en, -en. | -ent, sten, 1 -en, sten. Infinit. -en, -11. Pres. Part, -end,-110. Perf. Part. gemen, ge—t. Rem. 1. The e is dropped from the terminations reſt, and -et of the second and third person singular of the present indicative, when the radical vowel is changed (e to i or ic; or a to 7): idſpredje, du ſpridiſt, er ſpridt. IRREGULAR VERBS. 321 triff, trüge, Irregular Verbs (continued). Imperative Perfect Reniorks. Mood. Participle. ſtreit(e), Laeſtritten. 1 Hence die That, deed; der Thäter, doer; thätig, active; tthue, gethan. 1 thunlidi, feasible. In many dialects thun is used as auxilia- trag(e), getragen. |ry, as in English: Er that nid)t koinmen, hie did not come. getroffen. ? Hence die Tracht, costume, and das Getreide, grain. The treib(e), getrieben. derivative verbs beantragen, and beauftragen (from der tritt, getreten. Antrag and der Auftrag) are regular. trief(e), getroffen. | 3 Hence die Iranfe, trough ; der Iropfen, drop. [drunlcen. trinfe), getrunken. 1 4 4 Hence der Tranf, drink ; ertrinken, to drown; betrunken, getrogen. verdirb, verdorben. 5 The simple verb derben is yet used in the Bavar. dialect. (obsolete), * verdroſieni Compare the English verb get. vergiß, | vergeſſen. ? The original $ of verlieren (Goth. fraliusan; 0.-G. far- verliere, verloren. liosan; M.-G. verliesen ; N.-G. verlieren) appears in tho wachſe, | gewadſen. / adjective los, loose; and the noun der Verluſt, loss. gewogen. | 8 Compare the English verb to wax (and wane). waſdie, gewaſden. | 9 Henco dic Wäſche, washing. webe, * gewoven. 110 Hence weich, wealc (whence weidien (reg.], to soften). weidi(e), gewvidjen. 11 From the adjective weiſe, wise. weiſe, gewieſen. 12 Hence die Wand, wall; das Gewand, raiment; gewandt, gewandt. dexterous; die Leinwand, linen; die Winde, windlass; wirb, geworben. I wenden, to turn ; wanderni, to wander; dic Wunde, wound. werde, geworden. 113 Allied to Latin vertere, and to -wärts (English -ward). wirf, geworfen. 14 Allied to Lat. videre; Gr. locīv; Sans. wid. From wiſſen wiege, gewogen. I are derived gewiſ, certain; das Gewiſſent, conscience; winde, gevinden. 1 die Wiſſenſchaft, science; der Wit, wit. gewußt. 115 Hence der Zug, draft, train; der Zügel, reins, bridle ; wolle, gewollt. I die Zucht, rearing ; zucken, to jerölc; zücken, to draw (as a zeihe, gezichen. I sword); entziden, to charm; der Herzog (der mit dem zień, gezogen. Heere auszieht = Heerführer), cuke. [nals). zwinge, laezivungen. |16 Hence der Zwang, violence; der Zwinger, cage (for ari- wäge, wende, wille, (ENDINGS OF IRREGULAR VERBS—continued). Exc. The e is usually retained in -eſt, when the radical syllable ends in -8, -B, -íſ, -fd), -8: as id) lefe, du liefeſt, er licſt. - Rem. 2. The e may be dropped from -eſt and -et in the indicative of verbs whose stem does not end'in d or t. Rem. 3. The e is dropped from the imperative of all verbs that in that mood change the radical vowel e to i or ci: inf. nehmen; imp. nimm. Rem. 4. Some of the best German grammarians prefer that the final -c should always be dropped from the imperative of many verbs that do not change the radical vowel. But the general usage is in favor of its retention, though it is often dropped in poetry.. Rem. 5. The e of -eit and -end can only be dropped when these endings follow a vowel or a silent : verſtehit, geſchni. 322 [§ 147. THE VERB. § 147. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb dlagen, to strike (having haben for its auxiliary): Principal Parts: ſchlag-en, fdlug, ge-ſchlag-en. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id, fdlan-e, I strike. I id idhlag-e, I strike. * dit ſdhläg-ſt, thou strikest. du dylag-eſt, thou strikest. er fdläg-t, he strikes. er í dylag-e, he strikes. wir í dylag - en, we strike. wir í drag-ent, we strike. ilir í dilag-ct, you strike. ilju í dyrag-ct, you strike. fie dlag-en, they strike. fie drag-en, they strike. Imperfect Tense. id folug, I struck. idy ſdhliig-e, I struck. du ſchlug-ſt, thou struckest. du ſ dy Yü g-eſt, thou struckest. er ſchlug, he struck. er dylitg-e, he struck. wir ſ dlug-cit, we struck. wir dylit g - cit, we struck. ihu ſ dy lug-ct, you struck. ihr ſ djlit g - ct, you struck. fie dlug-en, they struck. fie dyfit g-cn, they struck. Perfect Tense. I have struck, etc. I have struck, etc. idi.hab-e geſdlageit. id hab-e goſdilagcit. bu haſt gef dylagen. du bab-cſt gefdlagen. er hat gendlageni. er bab-e gef dylageni. wir hab-en gefchlagen. wir hab- en geſ dy lageir. ilir hav- et geſ dy Yagen. ilir y ab- et gedragen. ſie hab-eit gef dilageni. ſie hab-en gedragen. Pluperfect Tense. I had struck, etc. I had struck, etc. id) hat-te geldjlageit. id) hät-te geſdilagen. bulat-teſt gedlagen. dit hät-teſt gef dylagen. er hat-te geſchlagen. er rät-te geſd lagen. wir hat-teit ger dylagen. wir hät-teit gef dylage it. ile h at-tet gedragen. ilyx Vät-tet geſd lageii. ſie hat-ten gedragen. fie hät-ten gef dy I agent. First Future Tense. I shall strike, etc. I shall strike, etc. id werd-e ſchlagen. ich werd-e (dlageit. du wirſt dj lageit. du werd-eſt i dlagen. er wird ſ dragen. er wero- C dilagen. wir wer D-cu ſ dragen. wir werd- en ſchlagen.' ihr wer - ef ſchlagen. ihr werd- et dlagen. ſie wer0- en í dragen. ſie werd-en f dragen. * See Subjunctive Mood, $ 124. § 147.] 323 IRREGULAR VERBS. Second Future Tense. I shall have struck, etc. I shall have struck, etc. id werd-e geſchlagen habeit. | id werd-e geſdlagen habeni. du wirſt geldjlagert haben. du werd-eſt gedragen habeii. er wird geſchlagen haben. er werD-e gedragen haben. wir wer D- en gefdlagen haben. wir wer$- eit geſdfageit haben. ihr wer - et geſdhlagen haben. ihr werd - et geſdlagen haben. ſie werd- en geſdylagen haben. 1 ſie werd - en geſdjlagert haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should strike, etc. id) wiird-e fchlagen, or' idjdliig-e (Imperf. Subj.). du wit r D-eſt i dyragen, " ou dylüg-cſt 66 er wit rose ſdragen, er ſchlüg-e wir wit r D- en dragen, " wir í dy Yüg-en ihr würo- et dragen," ihr f dylüg- ct fie w ü r$- en fdhlagen, u fie ich Yü q-en 66 6 Perfect Tense. I would or should have struck, etc. id) wiird-e, geſdhlagen haben, or id; hät-te geſdlagen (Pl. Subj.)., bu würd-eſt gedragen haben, " du lät-teſt geſdılagen 66 66 er wür$-t gedragen haben, 66 er hät-te geldilagen " wir wür D-cu geſdragen haben, “ wir hät-ten geldilagent 66 " ihr würd- et gedragen habent, 6 ili hät-tet gedragent " " fie w it r d -en geſchlagen haben,“ ſie hät-ten geldjlagen IMPERATIVE MOOD. fdlague (bit), strike thou. ſchlag-cn wir, let us strike. dlag-e er, let him strike. fdlag-ct (ihr), strike you. fdlag-eit ſie, let them strike. v A < < INFINITIVE Pres. (dhlag-ent, to strike. Perf. geldlagen haben, to have struck. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ſchlag-end, striking. . | Perf. geſdlagen, struck. 324 IS 148. THE VERB. YT $ 148. Conjugation of the. Irregular Verb kommen, to come (having ſein for its auxiliary): Principal Parts: kommen, kam, gekommen. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id fomnt-e, I come. I id fomnt-e, I come.* du komm-ſt, thou comest. bil komm-eſt, thou comest. er komm-t, he comes. er komm-ct, he comes. wir komm- en, we come. wir ko ni m-en, we come. ihr kom in-t, you come. ilyr komm-ct, you come. ſie komm-en, they come. fie komm-en, they come. Imperfect Tense. idy fant, I came. id fänt-e, I came. du kam-ſt, thou camest. but kö m -eſt, thou camest. er fan, he came. er käm-t, he came. wir ka n - cit, we came. wir köni - cl, we came. ihr kam - et, you came. ihr köm-ct, you came. ſie fam-en, they came. fie käm = eit, they came. Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. I have come, etc. id bin gekonntent. id ſei gekommen. du biſt gekommen. bu ſei- cft gekommen. er iſt gefomni e 11. er fei gekomme it. wir ſind gekommen. wir ſei- eit geko in mi e 11. ihr ſeid gekommen. ihr ſei-ct gekom me 11. fie ſind gefomme n. ſie ſei-cit gekom in e 11. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. I had come, etc. idy war gekommen. id, wär-e gekommen. du war-ſt gekommen. bu wv är-eſt gekommen. er war gekommen. er wär-e gekommen. wir war- en geko ni m e n. wir wv ä r- en gekommen. ihr war- et gekommen. il)x iv ä r- et gefon m e n. fie war- en gekommen. ſie wär- eit gekommen. First Future Tense. I shall come, etc. I shall come, etc. idy werd-e kommen. idy werd-e fommeil. du wirſt kom me 11. du werd-eſt komme 11. er wird komme 11. er wer$- e komme 11. wir werd- en kommen. wir werd-eit komme it. ihr werd - et kommen. ihr werD-et komme 11. ſie werd- en kommen. ſie werd - eit kom m e 11. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. $ 148.] 325 IS IRREGULAR VERBS. 66 66 Second: Future Tense. I shall have come, etc. I shall have come, etc. id werd-e gefommen ſein. idy werd-e gekommen ſeilt. du wirſt gekommen ſein. du werd-eſt gekommen fcin. er wird gekomnien ſeili. erwerbst gefommen fcili. wir wer D-cnt gekommen ſeint. wir werd-en gekommen ſein. : ihr werd - et gekommen ſein. ihr wer D-ct gekommen fcin. ſie werd- en gekommen ſeint. 1. ſie werd-en gekommen ſein. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should come, etc. id wiird-e kommen, or id fäm-e (Imperf. Subi.). du wit ro-eſt kommen, " du käm - eſt er wit rose kommen, 6 er käm-e ! wir wit ro-cit kommen, 66 wir käm-en ihr wür D-et kommen, ihr käm- et ſie würd-en kommen, so ſie käm- en Perfect Tense. I would or should have come, etc. idi wiird-e gekommen ſein, or id) wär-e gekommen (Pl. Srb.). but wit r$- cſt gekommen ſein, " dul w ä r- eſt gekommen us er würo-t gekommen ſeint, 66 er wär'e gekommen 66 wir wit ro-ent gekommen ſein, so wir w är- en gefonimen 66 66 ilr wit r 8-et gekommen ſein, « ilir vär- et gefoniment 66 66 ſie w ü r D-cit gekommen ſein, “ ſie w ä r- en gekommen 66 66 IMPERATIVE MOOD. komi-e (du), come thon. komm-eit wir, let us come. komm-e er, let him come. fomm-t (ilv), come you. komi-en ſie, let them come. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. fonam-cit, to come. | Perf. gefommen ſein, to have come. PARTICIPLES. Pres. komm-end, coming. I Perf. gekommen, come. 326 17 THE VERB. 18 [–151. $ 1495. COMPOUND VERBS. (Zuſammengeſekte Zeitwörter.) $ 149. Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing prep- ositions, adverbs, nouns, or adjectives to simple verbs. They are either Separable or Inseparable. $ 150. With Separable Compound Verbs: 1. The prefix takes the primary accent : Xus'-gehen, to go out. Auf'-geben, to give up. 2. The prefix is separated from the verb, and is placed after the verb, and often at the end of the sentence, when the verb occurs in main sentences, and is in the present or imperfect tense of the indicative or subjunc- tive mood, or in the imperative mood: Er nimmt das Budy an, He accepts the book. Er nahm das Budy an, He accepted the book. Nimit das Budy an! Accept the book! Nahm er das Budy an ? Did he accept the book? Rem. In the compound tenses, and in the simple tenses when occurring in subordinate sentences, the prefix is not separated from the verb: Er wird das Budy an'nehnteit, He will accept the book. Ehe er das Buch an'nahn, Before he accepted the book. 3. The zit of the infinitive, and the prefix ge- of the perfect participle, adhere to the verb: Anſtatt das Budy an'zunehmen, Instead of accepting the book- Er Hat das Buch an'genommen, He has accepted the book. § 151. The Separable Prefixes are: 1. The particles ab, an, auf, bei, da (dar), cin, empor, fort, gegen (entgegen), heim, her, hin, mit, nady, wieder, ob, von, weg, zu, zurück, zuſammen (together with the com- pound separable prefixes herein, heraus, etc., § 157), which are always separable. 2. The particles durdı, über, um, unter, and wieder, when they receive the primary accent ($ 154). $ 152.] 327 COMPOUND VERBS. 3. Some nouns and adjectives used as prefixes are separable ($ 154, 5,3). $ 152. Sometimes compound verbs take, in addition to their literal meaning, also a modified or figurative meaning: Aufgeben, to give up, deliver, surrender, abandon. Aus'führen, to carry out, achieve, accomplish. Prefix. Simple verb. Compound verv. ſdyreiben, to write; ab'ſdreiben, to copy. an, on, to, at; kommen, to come; an’kommen, to arrive. auf, up; geleit, to go; aus, out, out of; ſudjen, to seek; aus'ſudjeni, to select. bei, by, with ; tragen, to carry ; Vei'tragen, to contribute. da, there; bleiben, to remain; Da'bleiben, to remain. (dar, there); ſtellen, to place; empor,' up; Heberi, to heave; empor'heben, to elevate. gegen, against; redent, to speak; ge'genreben, to rejoin. entgegen, against; wirken, to work; entgegenwirken, to counteract ſetzen, to set; fort' ſetzen, to continue. heim, home; diden, to send; Heim'ſdiđen, to send home.. her, hither; kommen, to come; hin, thither; gehen, to go ; Hin'gehen, to go thither. mit, with; nehmen, to take; init' nehmen, to take with (one) nadı, after; folgen, to follow; nadı' folgen, to follow after. nieder, down; legen, to lay; nie'berlegen, to deposit. ob, over; ſiegen, to conquer ; ob'ſiegen, to vanquish. vor, before; ſdylagen, to strike; vor'ídlagen, to propose. weg, away; itelmen, to take; wegʻnehmen, to take away. zu, to; madjen, to make; 31'madjen, to close. zurüd, back; rufen, to call; zuril('rufen, to recall. zuſaminen, together; ziehen, to draw; zilſam'menziehen, to contract. 2. Compound verbs with prefixes which are separable when accented: burdy, through; reiſen, to travel ; burd)ʻreiſen, to travel through, über, over; ſetzen, to place; it berſetzen, to place over. unt, around; geben, to go; um'gehen, to go around. unter, under ; halten, to hold; un'terhalten, to keep under. wieder, again; . Holent, to get; wie’derholen, to get again. . 3. Compound verbs with nouns or adjectives as separable prefixes : ſtatt, place; finden, to find; ſtattfindent, to take place. frei, free; ſprechen, to speak; frci'ſpredjen, to acquit. voll, full; gießen, to pour; voll’gießeu, to pour full. 328 [$ 153. THE VERB. $ 153. Conjugation of the Separable Compound Verb au'nehmen, to accept. Principal Parts: au’rchmen, anʼnahm, an'genommen. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I accept (it), etc. I accept (it), etc.* idy nehme (es) an. ich nehme (es) ant. du nimmſt ran. du nelimeſt 1 an. er nimmtu an. er nälyme ali. wir nehmen uan. wir nehmen 1 an. ihr nehmet ! an. ilr neljniet in fie nehmen 1 an. fie nehmen an. Imperfect Tense. I accepted (it), etc. I accepted (it), etc. id) nahnt (es) ait. id nähme (es) ani. du nahmſt 1 an. du nähmeſt an. er nahm an. er nähne 1 an. wir nahmen an. wir nähnient 1 an. ilr nalmet 1 an. ihr nähmet an. ſie nafnien an. ſie nälmeit 1 ani. First Future Tense. I shall accept (it), etc. I shall accept (it), etc. idy werde (es) annehmen. idy werde (es) annehmen. du wirſt 1 annelimen. du werdeſt i annehmen. er wird annehmen. er werde 1 annelmen. wir werden i annehmen. wir werden 1 annelinien. ilr werdet 1 annehmen. ihr werdet i annehmen. ſie werden annehmen. ſie werden annehmen. Second Future Tense. I shall have accepted (it), etc. I shall have accepted (it), etc. id) werde (es) angenommen haben. | id) werde (es) angenommen haben. du wirſt angenommen haben. but werdeft , angenommen habent. er wird angenommen haben. | er werde ii angenommen haben. wir werbeit angenoinmen habent. Wir werden i angenommen habeii. 'ilir werdet i angenommen haben. | ihr werdet i angenonimen habeni. ſie werden, angenommen haben. ſie werden, angenommen haben. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. $ 153, 154.] 329 COMPOUND VERBS. 1 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should accept (it), etc. id) wiirde (es) annehmen, or id nähme (es) an (Imperfect Subj.). du würdeſt , annehmen, du nähmeſt , an er würde 1 annehmen, " er näljme 1 an wir würden , annehmen, 66 wir nähmen, an ihr würdet 1 annehmen, 56 ilir nähnet ! an " ſie würden , annehmen, « fie nälmen , an Perfect Tense. I would or should have accepted (it), etc. idy wiirde (es) angenommen haben, or idy hätte (es) angenommen(Pl. S.) du würdeſt , angenommen Gaben, “ dir hätteſt , angenommen 666 er witrde 1 angenommen haben, 66 er hätter angenommen "" wir würden , angenommen haben, “ wir hätten , angenommen "" ihr würdet i angenommen haben, 66 ihr hättet , angenommen 666 ſie würden , angenommen haben, “ ſie hätten , angenommen 66 66 IMPERATIVE MOOD. ninint (du) (es) an, accept (it). nehmen wir (es) ani, let us accept (it). nehme err ant, let him accept nehmet ihr an, accept(it). [(it). (it). I nehmen ſie an, let them accept INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. (es) anzunchmen, to accept | Perf. (es) angenommen zu haben, to (it). I have accepted (it). PARTICIPLES. Pres. (68) annehmend, accepting | Perf. (68) angenommen, accepted (it). (it). § 154. With Inseparable Compound Verbs: 1. The primary accent falls upon the verb: Ver-ſtel'-en, to understand. · Heber-ſetz' -en, to translate. Exc. With some verbs the prefix miß ($ 155, 7) is accented, as are all prefix nouns and adjectives except voll. 2. The prefix is never separated from the verb. 3. The participial prefix ge- ($ 131) is not added. Exc. Compounds of nouns and adjectives (except voll) take ge-- 4. With the infinitive, zi precedes the verb, and is written separately. 330 [$ 154, 155. THE VERB. 5. The Inseparable Prefixes are: 1. The particles be-, ent- (emp-), er-, ge-, ver-, zer- (and miß-), which are always inseparable. 2. The particles durd, iiber, um, unter, and wieder, when the primary accent falls upon the verb ($ 151, 3). 3. Some nouns and adjectives used as prefixes are inseparable ($ 151, 3). $ 155. The Inseparable Particles ve, ent (emp), er, ge, ver, zer, are obsolete prepositions. They are used as follows: 1. Be- expresses a more intimate relation to the ob- ject than the preposition bei, from which it is derived: Bei'-fit-ent, to sit near. Be-fitz'-en, to possess. 1. Be- forms transitive from many intransitive verbs : Be-fit'-en, to possess (from ſißen, to sit). 2. Prefixed to transitive verbs, it changes the relation of the verb to its object : Bäume pflanzen : eine Stelle To plant trees: to plant a place with mit Bäumen bepflanzen, trees. 3. It is prefixed to some nouns and adjectives in forming verbs: Be-gab'-en, to endow. Be-frei'-en, to set free. negation, contradiction, deprivation, or separation : Ent-ded'en, to discover. Ent-gel'en, to escape. Ent-lad'en, to unload. Ent-reiſ'en, to snatch away. Rem. 1. It forms verbs by being attached to some nouns and adjectives : Ent-haupt'-en, to behead. * Ent-idul'dig-en, to excuse. Rem. 2. Ent- sometimes denotes origin: Ent-ſtel'en, to arise from. Ent-ſpring'-en, to spring from. Rem. 3. It sometimes has the meaning of in (ein): Ent-halt'-en (inhalten, einhalten), to contain. Rem. 4. Before f, ent is changed, for euphony, to emp in the three verbs empfangen, empfehlen, empfinden. 3. Er- usually denotes a motion outward or upward : , Er-gieß'en, to pour out. Er-heb'en, to lift up. in compounds formed from adjectives and verbs: Ér-röth'en, to blush. Er-íck'en, to replace. § 155.] 331 COMPOUND VERBS. 2. It frequently denotes acquisition by the subject: Er-bett'eln, to gain by begging. Er-rcidi'en, to attain to. 4. Ge- gives a modification of the meaning of most verbs to which it is prefixed; it frequently indicates the duration or consequence of an action: . Ge-brauchen, to apply (brauden, to need, use). Ge-ſteh'en, to admit (ſtehen, to stand). 5. Ver- indicates primarily motion away : Ver-treib'en, to drive away, Ver-fließ'en, to flow away. 1. It frequently denotes loss, error, spoiling, destruction, end: Ver-ſdywend'en, to waste, Ver-blüh'ent, to lose blossoms. Ver-leit'en, to mislead. Ver-zehr'en, to consume. 2. It sometimes denotes passing to, or being placed in a condition, espe- cially when prefixed to verbs from nouns and adjectives : Ver-gött'ern, to idolize, deify. Ver-änd'er-11, to change. Ver-waiſ'en, to make orphan. Ver-bef’ſer-11, to improve. 6. Zer- denotes separation, dissolution, or destruction : Zer-ſtreuſen, to disperse. Zer-fall'en, to fall into ruins. Zer-reißen, to tear in pieces. Zer-fdlag'en, to break in pieces. Rem. The Inseparable Particles have been developed as follows: Gothic; bi-, and-, us-, ga-, fair-, dis-, Old-Ger.; bi-, int-, ur-, gi-, far-, zir-, Mid.-Ger. ; be-, ent-, er-, ge-, ver-, zer-, New-Ger.; bes. ent-. er-. ges. vers. 3er-. 7. Miß= (related to miſlen, to miss), has the same meaning as the English prefixes mis-, ill- (or dis-, des-) : Miß-trau'en, to mistrust. Miſg=fal'en, to displease. Miß-hand'eľn, to ill-treat. Miß-ad)t'en, to despise. Rem. 1. Examples of compound verbs with durdi, iiber, unt, unter, and wider as inseparable prefixes ($ 150, $ 151, 2): durdy, through; reiſen, to travel; burdſreiſen, to trarerse. über, over ; ſiten, to place; überſetz'en, to translate. umi, around; gehen, to go; . ungel'en, to outflank. unter, under; halten, to hold; unterhalten, to entertain. wider, against; rufen, to call; widerrufen, to revoke. Rem. 2. Examples of inseparable compound verbs with nouns and adjec- tives as prefixes ($ 149, $ 154, 3): Muth, mind; maßen (obs.), to measure; mutl'maßen, to conjecture. voll, full; zielen, to draw; vollzieh'en, to execute. 332 [S 156. THE VERB. § 156. Conjugation of the Inseparable Compound Verb verſtehen, to understand : Principal Parts: verſteh'ent, verſtand', verſtand'en. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idy verſtehe, I understand. 1 idy verſtehe, I understand.* du verſtehſt, thou understandest. du verſteheſt, thou understandest. er verſteht, he understands. I er verſtehet, he understands. wir verſtehen, we understand. | wir verſtehen, we understand. ihr verſteht, you understand. I ihr verſteljet, you understand. fie verſtehen, they understand. I ſie verſtehjen, they understand. Imperfect Tense. idy verſtand, I understood. I idy verſtände, I understood. du verſtandſt, thou understoodest. du verſtändeſt, thou understoodest. er verſtand, he understood. er verſtände, he understood. wir verſtanden, we understood. | wir verſtänden, we understood. ihr verſtandet, you understood. ihr verſtändet, you understood. fie verſtanden, they understood. ſie verſtänden, they understood. Perfect Tense. I have understood, etc. I have understood, etc. idy have verſtanden. id, habe verſtanden. du haſt verſtanden. bu habeſt verſtanden. er hat verſtanden. er Jabe verſtanden. wir haben verſtanden. ' wir haben verſtanden. ihr habet verſtanden. iljr habet berſtanden. ſie haben verſtanden. ſie haben verſtanden. Pluperfect Tense I had understood, etc. I had understood, etc. idi hatte verſtanden. idy hätte verſtanden. du hatteſt verſtanden. du hätteſt verſtanden. er hatte verſtanden. er hätte verſtanden. wir hatten verſtandent. wir hätten verſtanden. ihr hattet verſtanden. ihr Hättet verſtanden. ſie hatten verſtanden. ſie hätten verſtanden. First Future Tense. I shall understand, etc. I shall understand, etc. id, werde verſtehen. id werde verſtehen. du wirſt verſtehen. du werbeſt verſtehen. er wird verſtehen. er werde verſtehen. wir werden verſtelen. wir werden verſtehen. ihr werdet verſtehen. ihr werdet verſtehen. ſie werden verſtehen. ſie werden verſtelen. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 156.] 333 COMPOUND VERBS. SC Second Future Tense. I shall have understood, etc. I shall have understood, etc. id) werde verſtanden haben. idy' werde verſtanden habert. du wirft verſtanden haben. Du werbeſt verſtanden haben. er wird verſtanden haben. er werde verſtanden haben. wir werden verſtandert haben. wir werden verſtanden haben. ilhr werdet verſtanden haben. ihr werdet verſtanden haben. ſie werden verſtanden haben. I ſie werden verſtanden Haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should understand, etc. idy wiirde verſtehen, or ich verſtände (Imperf. Subj.). Du witrdeſt verſtehen, 6 du verſtändeſt er würde verſtehen, w er verſtände 16 wir würden verſtehen, " wir verſtänden ihr würdet verſtehci, 66 ihr verſtändet 66 ſie würden verſtehen, 66 fie verſtänden u . 66 Perfect Tense. I would or should have understood, etc. id wiirde verſtanden haben, or id hätte verſtanden (Plup. Sub.). du würdeſt verſtanden haben, 6 du hätteſt verſtanden er würde verſtanden Habert, 66 er hätte verſtanden us wir wirden verſtanden haben, - wir hätten verſtanden 66 66 ihr würdet verſtanden haben, es ihr hättet verſtanden 66 66 fie würden verſtanden haben, 6 ſie hätten verſtanden o so IMPERATIVE MOOD. verſtehe (du), understand. i verſtehen wir, let us understand. verſtehe er, let him understand. | verſteht ihr, understand you. | verſtehen ſie, let them understand. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. verſtehen, to understand. | Perf. verſtanden haben, to have un- derstood. L'ARTICIPLES. Pres. verſtehend, understanding. | Perf. verſtanden, understood. 334 [$ 157. THE VERB. $ 157. There are two classes of Doubly-compounded Verbs: 1. Those having as prefixes Separable Compound Par- ticles (mostly compounded with da, her, hin, and vor): dabei' (there-by); bleiben, to remain; dabei bleiben, to persist in (it). daher' (there-hither); fahren, to drive; daher' fahren, to drive along. Daheim' (there-thither); bringen, to bring; bahin' bringen, to bring there. danie’der (there-down); werfen, to throw; Danie'berwerfen, to prostrate. Daran' (there-on); ſetzen, to place; daran' ſeben, to hazard. darein' (there-in); ſehen, to see; darein' ſehen, to look into. herab' (hither-down); laſſen, to let; herabʻlaſſeri, to let down. heran' (hither-to); kommen, to come; heran'fommen, to advance. herauf' (hither-up); bliden, to look; Heraufbliden, to look upwards. Heraus' (hither-out); ziehen, to draw; heraus’ziehen, to draw out. herbei' (hither-near); rufen, to call; Perbei'rufen, to call near. herein' (hither-in); faffen, to let; herein'laſſan, to admit. herü'ber (hither-over); kommen, to come; herü’berkommen, to come over. herum' (hither-around); gehen, to go; Yerum'gehen, to go around. herun'ter (hither-under); nehmen, to take; herun'ternehmen, to take down. hervor' (hither-forward); heben, to lift; hervor'heben, to make prominent umher' (around-hither); treiben, to thrive; umher'treiben, to roam idly about hinab' (thither-down); fahrent, to drive; hinab'fahren, to travel down. hinan' (thither-up); kommen, to come; hinan'fonimeni, to get near to. hinauf (thither-up); gehen, to go; hinauf gehen, to go up.. hinaus' (thither-out); ſehen, to see; hinaus' ſehen, to look out. hinein' (thither-in); gelen, to go; hinein gehen, to enter. hinii'ber (thither-over); fahren, to drive; hini' berfahren, to cross over. hinweg' (thither-away); (dyreiten, to stride; hinweg ſtreiten, to stride away. hinzu (thither-to); fügen, to join ; hinzu'fügen, to add to. vorau' (before-to); (diden, to send; voran'ſchicken, to send ahead. voraus' (before-out); ſagen, to say; voraus'ſagen, to predict. vorbei' (before-by); falren, to drive; vorbei' fahren, to drive past. vorher' (before-hither); fehen, to see; vorher'ſeljen, to foresee. vorü’ber (before-over); eilen, to hasten; vorü'bereilen, to hasten past. Rem. The compound separable particles are placed after the verb in the same way as simple separable particles ($ 150, 2): Er ging um die Mauern herunt, He went around the walls. 2. Verbs having prefixes compounded of (simple or compound) separable with inseparable prefixes, as: an'-er; erken'nen, to recognize; an'erkennen, to acknowledge. vorher'-er ; erken'nen, to recognize; vorher erkennen, to recognize beforehand. Rem. 1. The first of these participles is separable: Er erkannte es ait, He acknowledged it. Er erkannte ihn vorher, He recognized him beforehand. $ 158, 159.]. 335 REFLEXIVE VERBS. Rem. 2. Some verbs thus compounded drop the first prefix, however, when the position of the verb in a sentence would require the separation of the par- ticle from the verb: Was midi anbetrifft, As far as it concerns me. (but) Es betrifft mid, nid)t, It does not concern me. Rem. 3. Some verbs which are formed from nouns and adjectives with a simple prefix have the appearunce of being doubly compounded: Verab'ſdienen, to detest, ablor (from der Ab'ſdieu, the horror). Beur'theilen, to judge, form an opinion of (from das Ur'theil, judgment). 6. REFLEXIVE VERBS. (Zuriidziclende Zeitwörter.) § 158. The number of verbs that are used only reflex- ively is much larger in German than in English, as : Idy beſinne midi, I remember. Sody ſchnc midi, I long. Rem. 1. The reflexive use of transitive verbs also is much more extensive than in English; many verbs take a modification of their meaning when thus used reflexively, as : Id verlaſſe mich auf ihn, I rely upon him (verlaſſen, to leave, abandou). Idi crinnerc mid darauf, I remember it (erinnerit, to remind). Idy freue midi darauf, I rejoice at it (frcucit, to make glad). Rem. 2. Some transitive verbs used reflexively require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative instead of the accusative case, as: fidh anmaßen, to assume. fid idimeidielit, to flatter one's self. 1 cinbildeni, to imagine. Tu vorſteuen, to imagine. Rem. 3. Some intransitive verbs also are used reflexively, without change of meaning: fd) eile (or cile midi), I hasten. Fdy nahe (or nahe mid)), I approach. Rem. 4. Transitive verbs often take a reflexive instead of a passive form: Der Himmel vedeckt ſid, mit Wolkeit, The sky is covered with clouds. $ 159. The Reflexive Verb ſid; freuen, to rejoice : INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id freue mid, I rejoice. idy freue midi, Í rejoice.* du frcuſt did), thou rejoicest. du freueſt did, thou rejoicest. er freut ſid), he rejoices. er frcuet ſid, he rejoices. wir freuen uns, we rejoice. wir freuen uns, we rejoice. ihr freuet cidy, you rejoice. ilx freuet cidi, you rejoice. fie freuen ſid), they rejoice. fie frenien ſidh, they rejoice. * See Subjunctive Mood. 336 [$ 159. THE VERB. • Imperfect Tense. id freute midh, I rejoiced. I id freuete midh, I rejoiced. du freuteſt did, thou rejoicedst. 1 du freueteſt did), thou rejoicedst. er freute ſich, he rejoiced. er freuete fid), he rejoiced. wir freuten uns, we rejoiced. I wir freueten uns, we rejoiced. ihr freutet cud), you rejoiced. ilyr freuetet cud), you rejoiced. fie freuten ſid, they rejoiced. fie freueten ſid), they rejoiced. id habe midh gefreut. du haſt did gefreut. er hat ſich gefreut. wir haben uns gefreut. ihr habet end gefreut. ſie haben ſidi gefreut. Perfect Tense. I have rejoiced, etc. idy habe mid) gefreut. du habeſt did gefreut. er Habe ſidi gefreut. wir habent ius gefreut. ihr Gabet end, gefreut. ſie haben ſidh gefreut. id, hatte midi gefrent. du hatteſt did gefreut. er hatte ſidigefreut. wir hatten uns gefreut. ihr hattet eudi gefreut. ſie hatten ſidi "gefreut. Pluperfect Tense. I had rejoiced, etc. id) hätte midi gcfrcut. dit hätteſt did gefreut. er hätte ſich gefreut. wir hätten uns gefreut. ihr hättet cud gefreut. ſie hätten ſidigefreut. · First Future Tense. I shall rejoice, etc. I shall rejoice, etc. id, werde mid, freuen. idy werde mid) freuert. dit werdeſt didi freuen. er wird ſidi freuen. er werde ſich freuen. wir werden uns freuen. wir werden uns freuert. ihr werdet euch freuen. ilyr werdet euch freuen. ſie werden ſidi freuen. ſie werden ſid freiren. Second Future Tense. I shall have rejoiced, etc. I shall have rejoiced, etc. idy werde mid, gefreut haben. id) werde mich gefrent haben. du wirſt did, gefreut haben. but werdeſt didi gefreut haben. er wird ſid, gefreut haben. er werde ſidi gefreut haben. wir werden uns gefreut haben. wir werden uns gefreut haben. ihr werdet end gefreut haben. ilyr werdet cuch gefreut haben. ſie werden ſich gefreut haben. fie werden ſich gefreut haben. $ 159, 160.] 337 IMPERSONAL VERBS. CONDITIONAL MOOD). Present Tense. I would or should rejoice, etc. id wiirde midh freuen, or id freucte mid (Imperfect Subj.). du würdeſt dich freuen, 6 du freueteſt didi er würde fidi freuen, s er freuete fidi wir würden uns freuen, “ wir freuetent uns ihr würdet euch freuen, « ilju freueten cudi ſie würden ſich freuen, " fie freueten ſidi Perfect Tense. I would or should have rejoiced, etc. idy wiirde midi gefreut haben, or idy hätte midi gefreut (Pl. Sub.). dil würdeſt did, gefreut haben, " di hätteſt didi gefreut so er würde fidh gefreut laben, "6 er hätte ſid, gefreut 66 66 wir würden uns gefreut haben, - wir hätten uns gefreut " " ilr würdet cudi gefreut Gaben, so ihr hättet eudi gefreut " " fie würden ſidh gefreut haben, 6 ſie hätten fidi gefreut IMPERATIVE MOOD. freuc (du) did, rejoice thou. I freuen wir uns, let us rejoice. freue er fid), let him rejoice. freuct (ihr) cud, rejoice ye. , freuen ſie ſid), let them rejoice. INFINITIVE MOOD. . Pres. frenen ſid), to rejoice. Perf. fich gefreut haben, to have rejoiced. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ſich freucnd, rejoicing. | Perf. fid; gefreut, rejoiced. 7. IMPERSONAL VERBS. (Unperſönlidie Zeitwörter.) $ 160. Verbs which express natural phenomena are impersonal, having the pronoun es (it) for their nomi- native: Es donnert, it thunders. Es dyneiet, it snows. Rem. 1. Some intransitive verbs are used impersonally, the logical subject of the verb being put in the accusative or dative case; in such cases es is often dropped if another word opens the sentence: Es friert midj or midy friert, I feel cold, (but id) fricre, I am freez- EB mangelt ihn an Nid;ts, or ihm He lacks nothing. [ing). mangelt nichts, (but) Er mangelt baaren Geldes, He is in need of ready money. 338 [$ 161. THE VERB. Rem. 2. The passive and reflexive form of many active verbs are frequently used impersonally: Es wird viel davon geredet, Much is said about it. Hier wird nid)t geraudit, “Smoking is not allowed here.” Es frägt ſid), 08- It is questionable whether- Rem. 3. Es is often used expletively (like the English expletive there): Es brennt ein Haus, there burns a house (for ein Haus brennt, a house is burning). Rem. 4. Es giebt, etc., is frequently used for es find ($ 107,5), there are: Es giebt viele Leute, dic- There are many people, whom 8. THE PASSIVE VOICE. (Die Paſſivform der Zeitwörter.) $ 161. Conjugation of the Passive Voice of the tran- sitive verb lieben, to love ($ 134): INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. · I am loved, etc. I am loved, etc.* idy werd-e geliebt. id) werd-e gelicbt. du wirſt geliebt. du werd-eſt geliebt. er wird. geliebt. er wer$-e geliebt. wir werd- en geliebt. wir werd - cn geliebt. iljr werd - et geliebt. ilyr werd-ct geliebt. ſie werd- en geliebt. ſie wer D-en geliebt. Imperfect Tense. I was loved, etc. I was loved, etc. id wurd-e gelicbt. id) wiird-e geliebt. du wurd-eſt geliebt. du w i ro-eſt geliebt. er wurd-e geliebt. er würd-e geliebt. wir wurd- eit geliebt. wir jv Ü r0- cit geliebt. ihr wurd-et geliebt. ihr w ü r d - et geliebt. ſie wurd- en geliebt. ſie wür$- en geliebt. Perfect Tense. I have been loved, etc. I have been loved, etc. ich bin gclicbt worden. idy ſci geliebt worden. du biſt geliebt wordent. du ſei- cſt geliebt worden. er iſt geliebt worden. er fei geliebt wordent. wir ſind geliebt worden. wir ſei-en geliebt worden. ihr ſeid geliebt wordci. ihr ſei-et geliebt worden. ſie ſind geliebt worden. ſie ſei-cit geliebt worden. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 339 Pluperfect Tense. I had been loved, etc. I had been loved, etc. id war geliebt worden. id) wär-C geliebt worden. du warſt geliebt worden. du wäi - eſt geliebt wordeii. er war geliebt worden. er wär-e geliebt worden. wir wv a r - cn geliebt wordeii. iljr war - et geliebt worden. ihr w är - et geliebt worden. ſie war-en geliebt worden. ſie wär- en geliebt worden. First Future Tense. I shall be loved, etc. I shall be loved, etc. id werd-e geliebt werden. idy word-e gelicbt werden. du wirſt geliebt werden. du werd-eſt geliebt werdeni. er wird getiebt werden. er ·werd-e geliebt werden. wir werd - eit geliebt werden. wir werd- en geliebt werden. ihr werd-ct geliebt werden. ilir werd - et geliebt werden. ſie werd-eit geliebt werden. ſie werd-cli geliebt werden. Second. Future Tense. I shall have been loved, etc. I shall have been loved, etc. ich werde gelicht worden ſein. | id) werdc gclicbt worden ſein. du wirſt geliebt worden ſciit. du werdeſt geliebt worden fcilt. er wird geliebt worden ſein. er werde geliebt worden ſeill. wir werden geliebt worden ſein. wir werden geliebt worden fcint. ihr werdet geliebt worden ſein. ihr werdet geliebt worden ſein. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Perfect Tense. Present Tense. I would or should be loved, etc. I would or should have been loved, etc. id) wiirde gclicbt werden. idy wiirde geliebt worden ſein. du würdeſt geliebt werdci. du würdeſt geliebt worden ſein. er würde geliebt werden. wir würden geliebt werden. wir würden geliebt worden ſein. ihr würdet geliebt werden. ihr würdet geliebt worden ſcin. ſie würden geliebt werden. ſie würden geliebt worden ſcin. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ſei (du) aclicbt, be (thou loved). I ſeien wir gcliebt, let us be loved. ici er geliebt, let him be loved. ſcid (ihr) geliebt, be (you) loved. | ſeien ſie gelicbt, let them be loved. INFINITIVE MOOD.' Pres. gelicbt werden, to be loved. | Perf. geliebt worden ſein, to have been loved. PARTICIPLES. Pres. -- | Perf. geliebt, lored. 340 [$ 162, 163, TIE VERB. 9. POTENTIAL VERBS. (Hülfszeitwörter des Modus.) $ 162. The Potential Verbs (called by German gram- marians the Auxiliaries of Mode) are ſollen, wollen, fön= uen, mögen, dürfen, müſſen. They are used only to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs ($ 120,3): Er muß das Budy lefen, He must read the book. Rem. 1. The limited or qualified independent verb is often understood : . Er hat es gemußt, He was compelled to do it. Rem. 2. The Potential Verbs are inflected in all the moods and tenses like independent verbs, with the exception that wollen alone is used in the im- perative mood. Rem. 3. In the compound tenses the participial form is employed only when the independent verb is omitted ;- when it is not omitted, the infinitive form of the potential verb is used instead of the participial form : Er hat das Budy leſen miſſcn, He was compelled to read the book. (but) Er hat es gemuſt, He was compelled (to do) it. Rem. 4. They all belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs ($ 143–145). Rem. 5. All Potential Verbs but ſolent and wollen take the umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive. Rem. 6. The Potential Verbs have been dereloped thus: Gothic; skulan, viljan, kunnan, magan, thúarban, motan, Old-Ger.; scolan, wëllan, chunnan, mugan, durfan, muozan, Mid.-Ger. ; suln, wëllen, künnen, mügen, dürfen, müezen, New-Ger. ; ſollen, wollen, können, mögen, dürfen, müſſen, $ 163. The verb ſollen indicates: 1. Moral obligation or duty : Er ſollte es thun, He ought to do it. Wir hätten es thun ſollen, We ought to have done it. 2. Obligation, duty, or necessity (usually dependent upon the will of another): Du ſouſt Gott deinen Herrn lieben Thou shålt love the Lord thy God von ganzem Herzen, - with all thy heart. Dieſe Furdit foli endigen (Sch.)! This fear shall end ! An meiner Aufmerkſamkeit ſoll es There shall be no lack of attention nidit fehlen, on my part. $ 164.] 341 POTENTIAL VERBS. 3. A report, rumor, or general impression: Er ſoll ſehr krant ſein, They say he is very sick. Er ſoll im vorigen Jahre nady He is supposed to have gone to Amerika gegangen ſein, America last year. Rem. 1. Solen is used in many hypothetical and conditional sentences : Sie ſollen audy nody ſo reidy ſein- Should they be ever so rich- Wenn er morgen ſterben ſollte- If he should die to-morrow- Rem. 2. Solen is sometimes employed to express in past time an action that was beginning when another action took place: Das Pferd foute eben verkauft The horse was just to be sold when werden, da ſtarú es, s it died. Rem. The independent verb (as thun, gehen, bedeuten) is often understood : Was ſoll id) hier ? What shall I (do) here? Sou die Thür auf oder zu ? Shall the door stay open or shut ? Wozu ſoll das ? What is the use of that? Das hat er gewollt, He ought to have done it. $ 164. Conjugation of the verb ſollen. Rem. The Translation to be given to the Potential Verbs varies greatly according to circumstances, as is seen in the remarks on ſollen.. The defini- tions given in the paradigms are therefore to be understood simply as being among the more usual ones. Principal Parts: ſollen, ſollte, geſollt. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idi ſoli, I ought. L iď foll-e, I ought.* du ſol-ſt, thou oughtest. du joll-eſt, thou oughtest. er ſoli, he ought. er ſoll-e he ought. wir foll-ent, we ought. wir ſoll-ent, we ought. ihr ſoll-(e)t, you ought. ihr ſoll-et, you ought. ſie ſoll-cit, they ought. ſie roll-on, they ought. Imperfect Tense idh foll-te, I should iď ſoll-te, I should. du foll-teſt, thou shouldest. ou foll- teſt, thou shouldest. er ſoll-te, he · should. er foll-te, he should. wir foll- ten, we should. wir foll-tent, we should. ile joll-tet, you should. ilir ſoll-tet, you should. ſie ſoll -tent, they should. fie ſoll-ter, they should. * See Subjunctive Mood, $ 124. 342 [$ 164. THE VERB. Perfect Tense I have been obliged, etc. I have been obliged, etc. id) habe gefolt (or ſollen). id have gejollt (or follen). du haſt gejollt (“ ſollen). Du habeſt. gefout (“folen). er hat geſollt (“ follen). er labe gejollt (" ſollen). wir haben geſollt (“ ſollen). wir haben geſoúlt (“ folleri). ihr habet gejollt (“ ſollen). ihr habet geſolt (" ſollen). ſie haben geſout (“ ſollen). ſie haben geſout (“ ſollen). Pluperfect Tense. I had been obliged, etc. I had been obliged, etc. ich hatte geſout (or ſollen). id hätte geſollt (or ſollen). du hatteſt geſoût (“ foữen). du hätteſt geſolt (“ folen). er hatte gejollt (“ ſollen). er hätte gejollt (“ ſollen). wir hatten geſout (“ ſollen). wir hätten geſoût (“ ſollen). ihr hattet gejollt (“ follen). ihr hättet gejollt (" ſollen). ſie hatten geſollt (“ ſollen). fie Hätten geſoût (“ ſollen). First Future Tense. I shall be obliged, etc. I shall be obliged, etc. id) werde ſollen. idy werde ſolen. dit wirſt follen. du werdeſt follen. er wird ſollen. ef werbe follen. wir werden ſollen. wir werden ſollen. iſyr werdet folen. ifr werdet ſollen. fie werden ſollen. ſie werden ſollen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been obliged, etc. I shall have been obliged, etc. id) werde geſolt haben. id) werde gefout haven. du wirſt gefolt haben. du werdeſt gejollt haben. er wird gefolt haben. er werde geſollt haben. wir werden gefollt haben. wir werden gefolt haben. ihr werdet gejollt haben. ihr werdet geſout haben. ſie werden geſollt haben. ſie werden geſoüt haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be obliged, etc. ich würde ſollen, or id) ſollte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt ſollen, " Du ſollteſt us er würde folen, “ er ſollte . wir würden ſollen, “ wir ſollten 66. ihr würdet ſollen, " ihr ſollten fie würden ſollen, 66 ſie ſollten 66. $ 164-166.] 343 POTENTIAL VERBS. < Perfect Tense. I would or should have been obliged, etc. id) wiirde gefolt haben, or id hätte geſout (Pluperfect Subj.). but würdeſt geſout haben, 16 du hätteſt geſout er würde gejollt Habert, 66 er hätte gefolt wir würden gefolt haben, 66 wir hätten geſolt ihr würdet gejollt haben, 66 ihr Hättet geſollt. " " ſie würden geſollt haben, “ ſie hätten gefolt INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ſollen, to be obliged. Perf. geſolit haben, to have been obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ſollend, being obliged. I Perf. gefolt, been obliged. $ 165. The Potential Verb wollen usually signifies wil- lingness, inclination, desire, intention, or determination: Er will nid)t mit uns gehen, He is not willing (or does not wish) to go with us.. Idy will gleiđı gehen, I will go immediately. Sie können thun was Sie wollen, You may do what you like. Rem. 1. Wollen frequently denotes that an action is about to take place: Die Uhr wollte eben fdylagen, The clock was about to strike. Rem. 2. It may be used to indicate that an assertion has been made by another person : Er will den stometen, welcher er- He asserts that he has already seen wartet wird, (don geſehen haben, the comet that is expected. Rem. 3. The independent verb is often omitted : Was wollen Sie haben)? What do you wish? Was l)at er gewollt (or haben wol- What did he wish? ... Yen? $ 166. Conjugation of the verb wollen (see § 164, Rem.). Principal Parts: wollen, wollte, gewollt. · INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id) will, I am willing. I id woll-e, I am willing. * du willſt, thou art willing. I du woll-eſt, thou art willing. er will, he is willing. er woll-e, he is willing. wir woll-en, we are willing. wir woll-cnt, we are willing. ihr woll-et(t), you are willing. ihr wol-et you are willing. ſie woll-on, they are willing. ſie woll-cit, they are willing. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 344 [S 166. THE VERB. Imperfect Tense. id) woll-te, I was willing. id) woll-te, I was willing. du wol-teſt, thou wast willing. du woll-teſt, thou wast willing. er woll-te, he was willing. er woll-te, he was willing. wir woll-teit, we were willing. wir woll-teit, we were willing. ilr woll-tet, you were willing. iljr woll-tet, you were willing. ſie woll-teit, they were willing. I ſie woll-ten, they were willing. Perfect Tense. I have been willing, etc. idy habe gewollt (or wollen). du haſt gewoût (“s wollen). er hat gewoût (" wollen). wir haben gewollt pus wollen). ihr habet gewollt (" wollen). ſie haben gewollt (" wollen). I have been willing, etc. id, habe gewout (or wollen). du habeſt gewollt (" wollen). er habe gewollt (" wollen). wir Kaben gewollt (" wollen). ihr habet gewollt (" wollen). ſie haben gewollt “ wollen). Pluperfect Tense. I had been willing; etc. I had been willing, etc. idy hatte gewollt (or wollen). id hätte gewollt (or wollen). du Vatteſt gewollt ("s wollen). du hätteſt gewollt (s wollen). er hatte gewollt (“ wollen). er hätte gewollt (" wollen). wir hatten gewollt (" wollen). wir hätten gewollt (" wollen). i'r hattet gewollt (" wollen). ihr hättet gewollt (as wollen). ſie hatten gewollt (" wollen). ſie hätten gewollt (" wollen). . First Future Tense. I shall be willing, etc. I shall be willing, etc. id) werde wollen. id werde wollen. du wirſt wollen. du werdeſt wollen. er wird wollen. er werde wollen, wir werden wollen. wir werden wollen. ihr werdet wollen. ihr werdet wollen. ſie werden wollen. fie werden wollen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been willing, etc. I shall have been willing, etc. id werde - gewollt haben. ich werde gewollt haben. du wirſt gewollt Vaben. du werdeſt gewollt haben. er wird gewollt haben. er werde gewoût haben. wir werden gewollt haben. wir werden gewollt haben. ihr werdet gewollt haben. ihr werdet gewollt haben. ſie werden gewollt habent. ſie werden gewollt haben. $ 166, 167.] 345 POTENTIAL VERBS. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be willing, etc. idy wiirde wollen, or id wollte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt wollen, 66 dit wollteſt er würde wollen, 66 er wollte wir würden wollen, 66 wir wollten ihr würdet wollen, 6 ihr wolltet ſie würden wollen," ſie wollten Perfect Tense. I would or should have been willing, etc. id) wiirde gewollt haben, oriđhätte gewollt (Plup. Subj.) du würdeſt gewollt haben, 66 du hätteſt gewollt 66 " er würde gewollt haben, " er hätte gewollt 66 wir würden gewollt haben, 6 wir hjätten gewollt 65 66 ilję würdet gewollt haben, 5 ihr hättet gewout fie witrden gewollt haben, 6 ſie hätten gewollt IMPERATIVE MOOD. wolle (011), be willing. wollen wir, let us be willing. wolle er, let him be willing. wollet (ilju), be willing. I wollen fie, let them be willing. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. wollcu, to be willing. Perf. gewoüt haven, to have been willing. PARTICIPLES. Pres. wollend, being willing | Perf. gewollt, been willing. $ 167. The Potential Verb können indicates: 1. Moral or physical possibility : Ér fann leſen und direiben, He can read and write. 2. A concession or contingency: Sie können mich erwarten, You may expect me. Idy fann midy geirrt haben, I may have been mistaken. 3. The independent verb (as thun, ſagen, leſen, ſpredjen, verſtehen, etc.) is frequently omitted: Was kann idy dafür (thun)? How can I help it ? Id kann niđịt weiter, I can do nothing more. Er hat es gewollt, aber er hat es He wished (to do) it, but he was not nidit gekonnt, able (to do) it. P 2 346 THE VEᎡB. [S 168. $ 168. Conjugation of können (see 164, Rem.): INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idi kanit, I can. id könn-e, I can.* du fanii-ſt, thou canst. bu fönn-eſt, thou canst. er faun, he can. er könn-e, he can. wir könn-en, we can. wir könn-en, we can. ihr könn-(e)t, you can. ihr könn-et, you can. ſie fönn-en, they can. fie fönn-en, they can. Imperfect Tense. id konit-te, I could. id fönn-te, I could. du konn -teſt, thou couldst. du könn - teſt, thou couldst. er konn- te, he could. er könn- te, he could. wir fon 11 - ten, we could. wir kön it-ten, we could. ihr kon n - tet, you could. ilr könn-tet, you could. ſie konn-ten, they could. Perfect Tense. I have been able, etc. I have been able, etc. ich habe gekonnt (or fönnen). idy Yave gekonnt (or können). vu haſt gekonnt (" fönnen). er hat gekonnt (“ können). er babe gekonnt (“ können). wir haben gekonnt (“ können). wir haben gekonnt (“ können). ihr habet gekonnt (fönnen). ihr habet gekonnt (“ können). . ſie haben gekonnt (“ können). fie haben gekonnt (“ können). Pluperfect Tense. I had been able, etc. I had been able, etc. id) hatte gefonnt (or fönnen). idh hätte gekonnt (or fönnen). bu hatteſt gekonnt (“s können). bu hätteſt gekonnt (< fönnen). er hatte gekonnt (“können). er hätte gekonnt (“ können). wir hatten gefonnt (" können). wir hätten gekonnt (" fönnen). ilir hattet. gefonnt (“ können): ihr hättet gekonnt (" könneni). ſie hatten gekonnt (“ können). ſie hätten gekonnt (“ können). First Future Tense. I shall be able, etc. I shall be able, etc. id werde könnten. ich werde könnent. du wirſt können. du werbeſt können. er wird · können. er werde können. ihr werden können. wir werden können. ſie werdet können. ihr werdet können. wir werden können. fie werden können. - - $ 168, 169.] 347 POTENTIAL VERBS. Second Future Tense. I shall have been able, etc. I shall have been able, etc. ich werde gekonnt haben." idy werde gekonnt haben. Dit wirſt gekonnt haben. bu werdeſt gekonnt haben. er wird gekonnt haben. er werde gekonnt haben. wir werden gekonnt habenr. wir werden gekonnt haben. ihr werdet gekonnt haben. ihr werdet gekonnt ħaben. ſie werden gekonnt haben. ſie werden gekonnt haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. C idh wiirde fönneit, or id könnte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt können, wo du fönnteſt er würde können, 66 er könnte wir würden können, 6 wir könntent Thr würdet fönnen, ihr könntet fie würden können, 5. ſie könnten Perfect Tense. I would or should have been able, etc. idy wiirde gekonnt habeit, or id) hätte gekonnt (Pl. du würdeſt gekonnt haben, " Du hätteſt gefonnt Go er würde gekonnt haben, " er hätte gekonnt 66 66 wir würden gekonnt haben, - wir hätten gekonnt " ihr würdet gekonnt haben, « ihr hättet gekonnt " ſie würden gekonnt haben, “ ſie hätten gekonnte INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. könnent, to be able. Perf. gekonnt habent, to have been able. PARTICIPLES. Pres. könnend, being able. | Perf. gekonnt, been able. $ 169. The Potential Verb mögen indicates: 1. Permission or concession (like may in En Du magſt gehen, Thou mayst go. Er mag ein tapferer Solbat ſein, (I concede that) he may be a brave soldier. 2. Desire or liking (especially in the imperf. subj.): Idy mödhte wiſſen, I should like to know. Möchte es dody geſdjehen, Oh, that it might happen! Idy habe es nicht thun mögen, I did not like to do it. Idy mag es ihm nicht ſagen, I should not like to say it to him. 348 [8 170. THE VERB. . $ 170. Conjugation of mögen (see § 164, Rem.) : : Principal Parts: mögen, modhte, gemocht. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idy mag, I may. idy mög-e, I may.* du magſt, thou mayst. du möj-eſt, thou mayst. er mag, he inay. er mög-e, he may. wir mög-ent, we may. wir mög-cit, we may. ilir mög-(e)t, you may. ilir mög-ct, you may. ſie mög-ell, they may.. ſie mög-en, they may. Imperfect Tense. id modi-te, I might. . ich mödh-te, I might. du modi-teſt, thou mightest. du möch-teſt, thou mightest. er inoch-te, he might. er mödy-te, he might. wir modı-teit, we might. wir möch-ten, we might ilir mod)-tet, you might. ihr mödi-tet, you might. ſie modh-ten, they might. ſie mödi-ten, they might. Perfect Tense. I have been permitted, etc. I have been permitted, etc. idy habe gemocht (or mögen). idy have gemodt (or mögen). bu haſt gemodit (" mögen). du habeſt geinodyt " mögen). er hat gemodyt (as mögen). er habe gemodt (" mögen). wir haben gemodit (“ mögen). wir haben gemodit (" mögen). ihr habet gemodit " mögen). ihr habet gemodit (" mögen). fie haben gemodit (““ mögen). ſie haben gemodit (“ mögen). Pluperfect Tense. I had been permitted, etc. I had been permitted, etc. ich hatte gentodit (or mögen). id hätte gemodit (or mögen). du hatteſt gemodit " mögen). but hätteſt gemodyt (“ mögen). er hatte gemodit (“mögeit). er hätte gemocht (“ mögen). wir hatten gemodit (" mögen). wir hätten gemodit (“ mögen). ilır Hattet gemodit (“ mögen). ihr hättet gemodit (“ mögen). ſie hatten gemocht (“ mögen). I ſie hätten gemodit (" mögen). First Future Tense. I shall be permitted, etc. I shall be permitted, etc. ich werde mögen. id werde mögeir. du wirſt mögen. bu werdeſt mögen. er wird , mögen. er werde mögen. wir werden mögen. wir werden mögen. ihr werdet mögen. ihr werdet mögen. ſie werden mögen. ſie werden mögen. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. $ 170, 171.] 349 POTENTIAL VERBS. Second Future Tense. I shall have been permitted, etc. | I shall have been permitted, etc. idy werde gemodit haben. id, werde gemodt habcn. du wirſt gemodyt haben. bu werdeſt gemodt haben. er wird gemodt haben. er werde gemodit haben. wir werden gemodyt Habeit. wir werden gemodyt haben. ihr werdet gemodyt Haben. ſie werden gemodyt Haben. ſie werden gemodit haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be permitted, etc. idy wiirde mögen, or id mödyte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt mögen, " du mödyteſt er würde mögen, " er möchte wir würden mögen, 6 fvir mödyten ihr würdet mögen, ihr mödytet 66 fie würden mögen, 6 ſie möchten Perfect Tense. I would or should have been permitted, etc. idh würde gemodit haben, or id) hätte gemodht (Plup. Sub.). er würde gemodyt haben, 66 er hätte genodyt " wir würden geinodyt haben, " wir hätten gemodit o ihr würdet gemodyt Haben, wo ihr hättet gemodit 66 i ſie würden gemodit haben, " fie Hätten gemochte INFINITIVE MOOD. Perf. gentodht haben, to have been permitted. PARTICIPLES. Pres. mögend, being permitted. | Perf. gemocht, permitted. $ 171. The Potential Verb dürfen indicates: 1. Permission (by law, or by the will of another): Jedermann darf Waffen tragen, Every body can (legally) bear arms, aber nicht jeder darf das Wild but not every body is permitted to fdjießen, shoot wild game. Jetzt dürft ilir ſpielen, You may play now. Rem. With a negative diirfen is usually translated by “must (not):" Hier diirfen Sie nidit rauden, You must not smoke here. 2. Dürfen sometimes has the signification of " to take the liberty," " to dare :" Er darf nid)t kommen ohne die Er- He dares not come without the per- Taubniß ſeines Vaters, mission of his father. 350 [8 171, 172. THE VERB. 3. It sometimes has the signification of may or can: Wir diirfen auf unſeren Bruder We may be proud of our brother. ſtolz ſein, Darf ich midi darauf verlaſſen? Can I rely upon that? 4. The imperfect subjunctive often signifies: 1. A logical possibility: Es diirfte jetzt zu ſpät ſein, It may now be too late. 2. It may be used as a polite manner of making a statement under the form of a hypothesis : Es diirſte nidyt ſdywer ſein, das It might not be hard to prove that. nadhzuweiſen, 5. The independent verb is often omitted: Er hat nid)t ausgehen dürfen, He did not dare go out. (but) Er hat es nid)t gedurft, He did not dare (do) it. § 172. Conjugation of dürfen (see § 164, Rem.): INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id darf, I am permitted. , id dürf-e, I am permitted.* du darf-ſt, thou art permitted. du Dürf-eſt, thou art permitted. er darf, he is permitted. / er dürf-t, he is permitted. wir dürf-en, we are permitted.wir dürf- eit, we are permitted. ihr dürf-(e)t, you are permitted. ile dürf-ct, you are permitted. fie dürf-en, they are permitted. / fie dürf-en, they are permitted. Imperfect Tense. id durf-te, I was permitted. | id dürf-te, I was permitted. bu durf-teſt, thou wast permitted. du dürf-teſt, thou wast permitted. er durf-tc, he was permitted. er dürf-te, he was permitted. wir durf-teit, we were permitted. wir dürf-ten, we were permitted. ihr durf-tet, you were permitted. ile dürf-tet, you were permitted. fie durf-ten, they were permitted. I fie Dürf- ten, they were permitted. Perfect Tense. I have been permitted, etc. I have been permitted, etc. ich habe gedurft (or dürfen). du haſt gedurft (“ dürfen). dut habeſt gedurft (“ dürfen). er hat gedurft (“ dürfen). er habe gedurft (" Sürfen). wir haben gedurft (“ dürfen): wir haben gedurft (" dürfen). ihr habet gedurft (dürfen). ihr habet gedurft (“ dürfen). ſie haben gedurft (“ dürfen). ſie haben gedurft (“ dürfen). * See Subjunctive Mood, $ 124. S $ 172.] 351 POTENTIAL VERBS. I had been permitted, etc. idy hatte gcurft (or diirfen). id, hätte gedurft (or dürfen). du hätteſt gedurft (“ dürfen). er hatte gedurft (" dürfen). er hätte gedurft (“ dürfen). wir hatten gedurft (“ dürfen). wir hätten gedurft (“ dürfen). ihr hattet gedurft (“ dürfen). ihr hättet gedurft (" Dürfen). ſie "hatten gedurft (“' Jürfen). fie hätten gedurft (“ dürfen). First Future Tense. I shall be permitted, etc. I shall be permitted, etc. idy werde diirfen. id) werde diirfen. du wirſt Sürfen. du werdeſt dürfen. er wird dürfen. er werde dürfen. wir werden dürfen. wir werden dürfen. iljr werdet dürfen. ilir werdet Dürfen. ſie werden dürfen. ſie werden dürfen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been permitted, etc. I shall have been permitted, etc. idy werde gedurft haben. id) werde gedurft haben. du wirſt gedurft haben. du werdeſt gedurft haben. er werde gedurft haben. wir werden gedurft haben. wir werden gedurft haben. ihr werdet gedurft haben. ihr werdet gedurft haben. ſie werden gedurft haben. fie werden gedurft haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be permitted, etc. id) wiirde dürfent, or ich diirfte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt dürfeni, 66 du Sürfteſt er würde Sürfen, “ er dürfte wir würden dürfen, “ wir dürften ihr würdet dürfen, “ ihr dürftet fie würden dürfen, “ ſie dürften Perfect Tense. I would or should have been permitted, etc. id) wiirde gedurft haben, or ich hätte gedurft (Pluperfect Subj.). du würdeſt gedurft haben, 6 du hätteſt gedurft er wiirde gedurft fjaben," er hätte gedurft wir würden gedurft haben, “. wir hätten gedurft ihr würdet gedurft Haben, 6 ihr hättet gedurft fie würden gedurft haben, ſie hätten gedurft 352 [$ 173, 174. THE VERB. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. dürfen, to be permitted. | Perf. gedurft haben, to have been obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres. dürfend, being permitted. | Perf. gedurft, permitted. $ 173. The Potential Verb miiſſen corresponds in signi- fication with the English verb must. Rem. It indicates physical, moral, or logical necessity, and in other tenses than the present indicative it must be rendered by such circumlocutions as to be obliged to, to be forced to, to have to. 1 $ 174. Conjugation of the verb müſſen (see 164, Rem.): Principal Parts: müſſen, mußte, gemußt. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. idy muſ, I must. idy milfſ-C, I must.* du muß-t, thou must. du müſſ-eſt, thou must. er muß he must. er müſſ-e, he must. wir mü li-eit, we must. wvir m ü fi- cit, we must. ihr müff-(e)t, you must. ihr miſſ-et, you must. fie müſſ-en, they must. ſie mit fi-en, they must. Imperfect Tense. idy mußte, I was obliged. id) miißte, I was obliged. du mußteſt, thou wast obliged. bu müßteſt, thou wast obliged. er mußte, he was obliged. er miſte, he was obliged. wir mußten, we were obliged. wir mitten, we were obliged. iljr mußtet, you were obliged. ihr müßtet, you were obliged. fie mußten, they were obliged. I ſie müften, they were obliged. Perfect Tense. I have been obliged, etc. I have been obliged, etc. id habe gcmußt (or miſſen). idy have gemiſt (or miſſcn). bu haft genuift (“s müſſen). bu labeſt gemußt (" müſſen). er hat gemußt (" müſſen). er habe gemußt (" müſſen). wir haben gemuſt (" müſſen). wir haben gemuſt (" milfſen). ihr habet gemußt (" müſſen). ihr habet gemußt (“ müſſen). fie haben gemußt (“ müſſen). Il fie haben gemuſt (“ müſſen). * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 8 174.] 353 POTENTIAL VERBS. Pluperfect Tense. I had been obliged, etc. I had been obliged, etc. id; hatte genußt (or miiſſen). idy hätte gemußt (or müiffen). du hatteſt gemußt “ müſſen). du hätteſt gemußt (" müſſen). er hatte gemußt (“ müſſen). er hätte gemuſt (“ müſſen). wir hatten gemuſt (-s müſſen). wir hätten gemußt (“mitſien). iljx hattet gemuſt (“ müſſen). ihr Jättet gemußt (“ müſſen). ſie hatten gemußt (“ müſſen). I ſie hätten gemußt (“ müſſen). First Future Tense. I shall be obliged, etc. I shall be obliged, etc. ich werde miſſen. id, werde miſſen. du wirſt müſſen. but werdeſt müſſen. er wird müſſen. er werde müſſen. wir werden müſſen. wir werden inüſſen. ihr werdet müſſen. ihr werdet müſſen. ſie werden müſſen. ſie werden müſſen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been obliged, etc. I shall have been obliged, etc. id) werde gemußt haben. id) werde gemußt haben. du wirſt gemußt haben. but werdeſt genußt habeii. er wird gemnußt haben. er werde gemußt haben. wir werden gemuſt haben. wir werden gemußt haben. ihr werdet genußt haben. iljr werdet gemußt haben. ſie werden geniußt haben. fie werden genußt haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be obliged, etc. td wiirde miiſſen, or i đi miißte (Imperfect Subjunctive). du würdeſt miteit, " du müjteſt er würde müſſen, 66 er müßte wir würden müſſen, 66 wir inüßten ihr würdet müſſen, 6 iljr müßtet " ſie würden müſſen, 6 fie müßten < < < < Perfect Tense. I would or should have been obliged, etc. id; wirde gemußt haben, or ich hätte gemuſt (Pl. Sub.). du würdeſt gemußt haben, 66 du hätteſt gemußt " er würde gemußt haben, 66 er hätte genußt " " wir würden gemuſt haben, 66 wir Gätten genußt 66 66 ihr würdet gemußt haben, " ihr hättet gemußt ſie würden gemuſt haben, 66 fie hätten genußt no s 354 [$ 175–177. THE VERB. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. miiſſen, to be obliged, etc. | Perf. genuft haben, to have been obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres. müſſend, being obliged. | Perf. gemußt, obliged. 10. SYNTAX OF THE VERB. (Syntag des Zeitwortes.) $ 175. The verb agrees with its subject in person and number: Er geht nach der Stadt, He is going to the city. Exc. 1. The pronouns es, das, dies (dicſcs), was, allcs, when used indef- initely as the subject of the verb, do not control the number or person of the verb: Id bin 68, Sie ſind es, It is I, it is they. Das ſind meine Nidyter (Sd.), Those are my judges. Weſentlid)e Fehler dieſes (Leff.), Important mistakes these. Exc. 2. Courtly and official titles, though in the singular (as Majeſtät, Hoheit, Ercellenz), have a plural verb: Euer Majeſtät gerufen, Your Majesty is graciously pleased. Rem. 1. When, of two or more subjects in different persons, one of them is in the first person, the verb should be in the first person plural: Dii, dein Bruder und id; wollen Thou, thy brother and I, will (i. l., (wir wollen) ſpazieren gehen, we will) take a walk. Rem. 2. When one subject is in the second and the others are in the third person, the verb should be in the second person plural: Du, dein Bruder und deine Sdywe- Thou, thy brother and thy sister, fter feid (ihr ſeid) eingeladen, are (i. C., you are) invited.. $ 176. Some verbs, that are transitive in English, and, as such, govern the objective case, are rendered by in- transitive or reflexive verbs in German, and govern the genitive or dative case ($ 178, 179). $ 177. The following verbs govern the Accusative Case: 1. All transitive verbs (8 118,1; $ 83, 1): Er lieſt das Budy, He reads the book. $ 177.] 355 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 2. Verbs used in expressing weight, measure, cost, time when, and time how long : Es dauerte cinen Tag, It lasted a day. E8 wiegt ein Pfund, It weighs a pound. Potsdam liegt vier Mcileit von Potsdam lies four (German) miles Berlin, from Berlin. Es koſtet einen Thaler, It costs a thaler. Er kommt dicſon Avend, He comes this evening. Rem. 1. When the time of the occurrence of an event is particularly speci- fied, it is put in the accusative case; when it is indicated in a general way, it is put in the genitive case: Er kommt dieſen Abend, Er kommt oft dcs Morgens, He often comes in the morning. Rem. 2. The accusative case is used (mostly in connection with such ad- indicated by the verb: Er geſt den Berg hinauf, He goes up the mountain. 3. Many impersonal verbs, as: Dürſten, to make thirsty. angelen, to concern. Hungern, to make hungry. jammern, to grieve. frieren, to make cold. verdrießen, to vex. fdläfern, to put to sleep. ſdymerzen, to pain. freuen, to make happy. wundern, to surprise. Es friert midy, I am cold. Es wundert mid), it surprises me. 4. The reflexive pronouns of most reflexive verbs 'is put in the accusative case: dy freue midy, I rejoice. Sie freuen ſid), you rejoice. Rem. 1. Some intransitive and impersonal verbs are sometimes used with a transitive signification, taking an object in the accusative case: Er ging ſeinen Weg, He went his way. Es regniet Steine, It rains stones. Er weinte bittere Thränen, IIe wept bitter tears. Rem. 2. The verbs lehren and fragen may govern two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing: Er Yehrte mich die Muſik, He taught me music. Das frage id) didi, I ask you that. Rem. 3. The verbs nennen, heißen, ideiten, (dhimpfen, taufen, govern two accusatives, both referring to the same person or thing: Er nannte midi ſeinen Freund, He called me his friend. Das nennſt du arbeiten ? Do you call that working ? 356 [$ 178. THE VERB. UL Rem. 4. For verbs governing the accusative and genitive cases see $ 178, 2: for those governing the accusative and dative see $ 179, 2. $ 178. The following verbs govern the Genitive Case: 1. The following intransitive verbs: Ndyten, to regard e ntrathen, to do without. pflegen, to foster. bedürfeni, to need. genießen, to enjoy. dyonei, to spare. Vegehren, to desire. gefdweigen, to pass by ſpotten, to mock. braudjen, to want. . in silence. verfehlen, to fail. gebraud,eii, to use. gewalyreit, to observe. vergeſſen, to forget. gedenken, to think. Varren, to wait upon. wahreni, to guard. denken, to think. ladjen, to laugh. wahrnchmei, to observe. enthelren, to do without. lohnen, to reward. walten, to rule. ermangeln, to fail. inangeln, to fail. jvazteni, to attend. Das Weib bedarf in Kriegesnöthen In the horrors of war woman needs des Beſdükcrs (Sd.), a protector. Sie ſpotten icincr, Prinz ! You deride me, prince! Rem. 1. Of these verbs only ermangeln and goldwcigen are used exclu- sively with the genitive case. The others were also formerly used only with the genitive case, and are yet used with it in poetry and other dignified styles of composition. They are at present, however, generally used as follows: 1. Transitively, and followed by the accusative case (the verb generally receiving a different signification when used transitively from that which it has when used intransitively): Einer Beleidigung vergeſſen, To forget (intentionally) an injury. Eine Jahreszahl vergcſſcn, To forget the number of a year. 2. Or they are used intransitively and are followed by certain prepositions, which govern their appropriate cases, as : denken (gedenken), by an; ad tert, harren, walten, by auf; ladyen, ſpotten, walten, by iiver: Wer der Gefahr ſpottet, gedenkt Who scoffs at danger is mindful of ihrer; der wahre Held aber denkt it; but the truc hero does not gar nidit an die Gcfalır, think at all of danger. Alle ladjen iiber ſeine Thorhcit, All laugh at his folly. Rem. 2. The verbs fcin, werden, Icbcnt, ſterben, verbleidien, are followed by the genitive in some expressions, as: Idi bin der Meinung, daß— I am of the opinion that- Er ſtarb eines plötzliden Todes, He died a sudden death. 2. The following transitive verbs require, in addition to the accusative of the person, the genitive of the thing: Anklagert, to accuse. Befdjeiden, to inform. erlaſſen, to discharge. Velehren, to inform. Beſdhuldigen, to accuse. erledigen, to release. berauben, to rob. bezeihen, to accuse. entlaſferi, to free from Veridyten, to inform. entbinden, to free from entledigen, to free from, § 178.] 357 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. entblößeni, to strip. Yos predien, to acquit. verſidyern, to assure. entheben, to exonerate. mahnen, to remind vertröſten, to delude. entkleiden, to disrobe. überführen, to convict. verweiſen, to banish. entladen, to disburden. Überheben, to exempt. würdigen, to deem worthy. entſetzen, to displease. iiberweiſen, to convict. zeihen, to accuse. entwöhnen, to wean. überzeugen, to convince. (and others.) freiſprechen, to acquit. verjagen, to drive out. gemahnen, to remind verklagen, to accuse. Nichts kann ihn ſeines Schwurs Nothing can free him from his oath. entbinden, Man hat ihn des Hodivcrraths They have charged him with high angeklagt, treason. Rem. 1. Some of these verbs may be followed by the dative of the person Das verſidiere id) Ihnen, I assure you of that. Rem. 2. The genitive is often replaced by a preposition (as von, iiber, auf, an), which is followed by its appropriate case : Nidits kann ihn ſeines Sdwurs Nothing can release him from his (or von ſeinem Schwur) entbinden, oath. Rem. 3. If the verb is placed in the passive voice, the genitive construc- tion still remains unchanged: Er wurde des Hodivcrraths anges He was charged with high treason. 3. The following reflexive verbs take, in addition to the reflexive pronoun in the accusative, a complement- ary object in the genitive: Sid) anniaßen, to assume. Sidy erfreuen, to rejoice (at). , annehmen, to take interest (in). 1 erinnern, to remember. 11. bedenken, to deliberate (upon). 1 bedienen, to use. 1 erwehren, to ward off. i befleißen, to apply (to). , freuen, to rejoice (at). befleißigent, to apply (to). getröſten, to hope (for). · begeben, to forego. 11 rühmen, to boast (of). 1 Vemädytigen, to master. ſdämen, to be ashamed (of). Demeiſternt, to master. 11 tröſtent, to console one's self (for). beſcheiden, to acquiesce (in). 1 überheben, to take pride (in). ll beſinnent, to recollect. , interfangen, to attempt. 11 entäußern, to renounce. o iinterſtehen, o bi entüredhen, to forbear (from). unterwinden, “ 66 enthalten, to refrain (from). vergewiſſern, to ascertain. , entſdylagen, to get rid (of). vermeſſen, to boast (of). 1 cntſinnen, to recollect. 1 verſehen, to expect. 1 erbarmieni, to pity, be merciſul. 1 verſidjern, to assure (of). 358 [$ 179. THE VERB. Sidy verwundern, to wonder (at). Sidy wundern, to wonder (at). weigern, to refuse. (and others.) Der Geredyte erbarmt ſich ſeines The just man is merciful to his Viches, beast. . Er kann ſid, kaum des Ladeus He can scarcely keep from laughing. enthalten, Rem. After many of these verbs the genitive case may be replaced by a preposition (as an, auf, iiber): Du darfſt did deiner Wahl (or Thou needest not be ashamed of thy über deine Wahl) nicht ſchämen, choice. $ 179. The following verbs govern the Dative Case: 1. Many (simple and compound) intransitive verbs: Ahnen, to forebode. mangeln, to fail. trauen, to trust. banken, to thank. nahen, to approach. trotzen, to defy. dienen, to serve. nützen, to serve. wehrer, to ward off. drohen, to threaten. paſſen, to fit. weiden, to yield. fludien, to curse. djaden, to injure. winken, to hint. folgen, to follow. (dyeinen, to seem. ziemen, to become. gleichen, to resemble. (dimecen, to taste. zirnen, to be angry. Helfen, to help. ſteuern, to tax. (and others.) Idy danke Ihnen Herzlidiſt, I thank you with all my heart. Wir folgen ihm burd, den Wald, We follow him through the forest. Abhelferi, to remedy. entgegengelent, to go to- mißtrauen, to distrust. anhangen, to adhere. ward (to meet). nadjalmen, to imitate. auffallen, to strike. entgegenkommen, to come nadjeifern, to rival. aushelfen, to supply. to meet. . nadyſtehen, to be inferior to. begegnen, to meet. entſpredient, to correspond. nadyſtellen, to waylay. bekommen, to agree. erliegen, to succumb. unterliegen, to succumb. Veifallen, to occur. gefallen, to please. vorgehen, to outstrip. beiſtehen, to assist. gehören, to belong. vorkonimen, to occur. einfallen, to occur. gehorchen, to obey. widerſpredjeni, to contra- entfliehen, to escape. gelingen, to succeed. zuhören, to listen to. [dict. entgehen, to avoid. mißfallen, to displease. (and others.) Das hat mir ſehr gefallen, It pleased me very much. Es iſt mir eben vorgekommen, It has just occurred to me. 2. Many (simple and compound) transitive verbs goy- ern, in addition to a direct object in the accusative case, an indirect object in the dative case : Borgen, to borrow. laſſen, to leave. melder, to announce. bringen, to bring. reihen, to loan. nehmen, to take. geben, to give. liefern, to deliver. · rauben, to rob. flagen, to complain. lohnen, to reward. ſagen, to say. $ 179, 180.] 359 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. to denken, to present. ſtehlen, to steal. . zahlen, to pay. ſchicken, to send. weigern, to refuse. zeigen, to show. ſdreiben, to write. widmen, to dedicate. (and many others.) Er bradyte mir den Brief, He brought me the letter. Ich ſchickte ihm das Budy, I sent him the book, Man raubte ihm das Gelb, They robbed him of his money. Abgeben, to deliver. erklären, to explain. unterſagen, to forbid. anbieten, to offer. erzählent, to relate. vorwerfen, to reproach. anzeigen, to announce. geſtehen, to confess. vorzeigen, to show. Darbieten, to proffer. mittheilen, to impart. zuſagen, to promise. entreißen, to wrest. nadiſagent, to repeat. zuſdireiben, to ascribe. empfehlen, to recommend. nad ſehen, to indulge. (and many others.) Idy erzählte ihm die Geſdiidite, I related the story to him. : Er hatte uns die Nadyridyten mit- He had communicated the news getheilt, to us. Rem. 1. If the verb is placed in the passive voice, the indirect object still remains in the dative case : Die Nadjrichten wurden uns mit- The news was communicated to us. getljeilt, Rem. 2. Some reflexive verbs ($ 158, Renn. 2) have the reflexive pronoun (as the indirect object) in the dative case ($ 174, 4) Id Vildete es mir ein, I imagined it (to myself). Rem. 3. Some impersonal verbs are followed by the dative case : Es alnet mir, I havė misgivings. Mir fdwindelt, I am dizzy. Rem. 4. The dative of the person is used after many verbs (as ſein, werden, gehen, ergehen, ſtehen, ſiten) and after many verbal expressions (as leid thun, weh thun, Wort halten, zu Hülfe kommen), thus: Es iſt mir nid)t wohl, I am not well. Es geht ihm ganz gut, It goes very well with him. Wie ſitzt mir das Kleid ? . How does the dress fit me ? Das thut mir ſehr leid, I am very sorry for that. $ 180. Some verbs are followed by the dative or the accusative case, according to the signification with which they are used: Sfd verſicherte ihn, I insured him.' Ich verſiderte ihni, I assured him. (Trauenidit dem äußeren Sdyein, Do not trust outward appearances. Der Prediger traut das Brautpaar, The preacher marries the couple. Rem. A few verbs may be used with the dative or accusative without differ- ence of signification: Er Yehrte mich die Muſik, He tanght me music. Er lehrte mir die Muſik, + wir sehr leid, 66 66 66 66 360 [$ 1811-83. THE ADVERB. . (Das Adverbiunt.) $ 181. There are but few primitive adverbs. The chief of these are: 1. The followings particles (all of which, however, except ab and eilt, are used also as prepositions): Av, down, downward. Vei, about, nearly. um, about, past, at an end. an, on, up, forward. durch, through, thoroughly. Vor, forward, formerly. auf, up, upward. in (ein) in. 311, too, also in the direc- aus, out, at an end. iad, after, afterward. tion of. . Wir werden ab und zu gehen, We will go to and fro (up and down). Von nun ani, From this time forward. Fahr aug, Fahr ein, From one year to another. Idj kenne ihn durd) und durd), I know him most thoroughly. [merly. Nach wie vor, (Afterward as before) now as for- 2. The adverbs ja, ehe, oft, nun, etc. : Ja, je cher, je lieber, Yes, the sooner the better. Das iſt oft geſdiehen, That has often happened. Von nun an, From this time forward. $ 182. Most Adverbs are formed (by inflection, deriva- tion, and composition) from nouns, adjectives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, prepositions, and adverbs. bald, soon (from the Goth. and 0.-G. adj. bald=bold; M.-G. bald-rapid). kaunt, scarcely: M.-G., kûme; 0.-G., chumo (from the adj. kum=sick, weak). ſehr, very: M.-G., sêr ; 0.-G., sêro (from the adj. sēr=painful, which is from the Old-German ngun das ser=the sore, the pain). § 183. Adverbs are formed from Nouns: 1. The genitive case of some nouns is used adverbi- ally ($ 81, 2, 4), as: Morgens (des Morgens), in the morning (gen, of der Morgen, morning). Abends (des Abends), in the evening (gen, of der Abend, evening. anfangs, in the beginning, at first (gen. of der Anfang, beginning). theils, partly, in part (gen. of der Theil, part). § 183.] 361 ·FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Rem. 1. Sometimes the genitive of an adjective or an adjective pronoun and the genitive of' a noun are joined together into one word ($ 89, Rem. 1): feineswegs, by no means (nom. kein Weg, gen. keines Weges). gliidflidierweiſe, fortunately (nom. glüdlide Weiſe, gen. glüdlicher Weiſe). dergeſtalt, in such a way (nom. Die Geſtalt, gen. der Geſtalt). jederzeit, at any time, always (nom. jede Zeit, gen. jeder Zeit). Rem. 2. In some compound adverbs the new declension has replaced the old in the genitive of the adjective or adjective pronoun, as : allenfalls, in any case. widrigcnfaus, in the contrary case. jedenfaus, at all events größtentheils, for the most part. Rem. 3. In forming some compound adverbs, feminine nouns take the genitive termination (-8), as: abſeits, aside, apart; mcinerſeits, for my part (from die Seite, side). beſeits, on this side; ſcinerſeits, on his parts Rein. 4. The termination of the genitive singular (-8) is given to some ad- verbs that have been formed from the genitive plural, as : allerdings (from aller dinge), by all means; ncuerdings, lately; recently. Rem. 5. After the analogy of chemals, formerly (in Mid.-Ger., ê mâles= aforetime), are formed in the New-German the following adverbs : damals, at that time. niemals, never. icinals, ever, at any time. vormals, formerly, once on a time. nadimals, afterward. Rem. 6. Very many adverbs take the genitive ending (-8), after the analogy of the adverbs that are formed from the genitive singular of masculine nouns, as will be noticed below ($184, 2; $ 187, 2; $ 188, 2, 4, and 5). 2. Adverbs are formed from the dative of nouns, either alone or in composition, as: morgen, to-morrow (M.-G., morgen, inorne; 0.-G., morgane, which is the dative singular of the noun morgen, morning). bisweilen, at times (Weilen, dat. plur. of die Weile, a while). 3. Adverbs are formed from the accusative of nouns, either alone or in composition, as: weg, away (acc. sing. of der Weg, the way). allewege, every where (acc. pl., alle Wege, all ways). einmal, once (acc. sing., ein Mal, one time). zeitlevens, as long as one lives (acc. sing., die Zeit des Lebens). veiſpielsweiſe, by way of example (acc. sing., die Weiſe). 362 [8 184-186. THE ADVERB. $ 184. Adverbs are formed largely from Adjectives: 1. All adjectives, whose nature permits them to be used adverbially, are so used without change of form: Das Bud, iſt aut gebunden. The book is well bound. Wir fahren ſehr fdinell, We are traveling very fast. Sie hatten tapfer gekämpft, . They had fought valiantly. Rem. 1. Some words, that are now used only as adverbs, were originally adjectives ($ 182, Rem.). Rem. 2. l'articiples, like adjectives, may be used adverbially (8 129, Rem. 4): Mit ſiedend heißem Waſſer, With boiling-hot water. 2. A large number of adverbs are formed from ad- jectives by taking a genitive ending, -8 (after the anal- ogy of the adverbs formed from the genitive of nouns): Es fängt bereits an zu regnen, It is beginning to rain already. Gehen Sie redt3, und dann linfa, Go to the right and then to the left. Er hat es anders gemeint, He meant it differently. Rem. 1. Adverbs thus formed belong mostly to the New-German period. Rem. 2. Some adverbs, and especially superlatives ($190, 3), take the genitive termination -ens, after the analogy of such nouns as Balken, gen. Balkens, as : Und iibrigens wollte er- And moreover he wished to- Rem. 3. By this last analogy are formed the ordinal adverbs, crſtens, zwei- tens, drittens, etc. ($ 105, 2). Rem. 4. A few adverbs have added an unorganic -t to the genitive form, and thus they have the appearance of being superlatives, as: Es war einſt.ein Sönig, There was once a kinga Inlängſt, als wir in Berlin wa- Not long since, when we were in ren- Berlin- § 185. For the formation of adverbs from Numerals, see $ 105. $ 186. The chief simple adverbs that are formed from Pronouns are the following: hier, here. da, there. wanit, when. her, hither. dann, then. wo, where. hin, thither. dort, yonder. ſo, thus. Rem. 1. These pronominal adverbs have been developed thus : Goth.: - - thar, thana, hvan, hrar, sua, 0.-G.: hiar, höra, hina, clar, danna, doret, huanne, hậur, SÔ, M.-G. : hier, hër, hin, da, danne, dort, wanne, wa, sô, N.-G.: hier. Jer. Hin. Da. Dann. fort. wann. mo. fo. § 186-188.] 363 FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Rem. 2. Hier, her, and his are formed from a demonstrative pronoun that is now found only in the Gothic (his, hija, hita=der, die, das=this, that). Rem. 3. Da, daun, and dort are formed from the demonstrative pro- noun der, die, das (Gothic sa, sô, thata ; accusative thana, tho, thata). Rem. 4. Wann and wo are formed from wer, who. Rem. 5. The indefinite pronouns viel, wenig, genug, and etwas are often used adverbially (8 112): Er iſt viel größer als id), He is much taller than I am. Die Geſdiidite der Stadt iſt nur The history of the city is only a little wenig befannt, known. Das Tud, iſt nid)t breit genug, The cloth is not wide enough. Er war ctwas aufgeregt, He was somewhat excited. $ 187. Derivative Adverbs are found by means of the terminations -eit, -lings, lid. 1. The termination -en is employed in forming adverbs from a few other adverbs: Xußen, without, outward (from aus). oben, above, aloft (from ob). innen, within, inward (from in). hinten, behind (from hin). unten, under, below (from unter), vorn, before (from vor). 2. A few adverbs are formed by adding -lings to ad- jectives, nouns, or verbs: Blindlings, blindly, rashly, at random (from Vlind, blind). häuptlings, head foremost, head over heels (das Haupt, head). rittling8 (reitlings), astride, astraddle (reiten, to ride). [back). · rüdlings, backward, from behind (der Nild, obs. from Niden, meudyling$, insidiously, like an assassin (mencheln, to assassinate). 3. Many words with the termination -lid, are used only adverbially ($ 86, 2, 6), as: Freilid), certainly, indeed. (dywerlid), scarcely, hardly. endlidy, finally, at last. fidjerlid), certainly, surely. fürzlidy, shortly, recently. walırlid), truly, really. § 188. Of the many ways in which Compound Adverbs may be formed, the following are most important: 1. By uniting two nouns (especially with Weiſc, a way or manner, for the last noun): Scherzweiſe, jocosely, in fun, in jest (ber Sdjerz, joke, die Weiſe, way). ſpottweiſe, mockingly, derisively (der Spoit, derision, die Weiſe, way). tropfenweiſe, in drops, by drops (der Tropfen, drop, die Weiſe, way). . 364 [8 188. THE ADVERB. 2. By uniting an adjective and a noun: Gleidfalls, likewise, also ($ 183, 1) (gleidy, like; der Fall, case). größtentheils, for the most part (größten, greatest; der Theil; part). geradeswegs, straightway (gerade, straight; der Weg, way). 3. A numeral and a noun (especially Mal, see $ 105): Einmal, once, once on a time. dreimal, three times. 4. By uniting an adjective pronoun and a noun:: Alenfalls ($183, 1, Rem. 6), at all meinerſeits ($ 183,1), for my part. jedenfalls, in any case. [events. jederzeit ($ 183, 1, Rem.), at all times. 5. By uniting a preposition and a noun: Abſeits ($ 183, 1), apart to one side. Keizeiten (§ 183, 1, 2), betimes, in good time, early, soon. Visweilen, at times, at intervals, occasionally, now and then. hinterrüds, from behind, behind one's back, underhandedly. überhaupt, in general, on all occasions, in the main, at all. überniorgen, day after to-morrow. zuweilent, at times, sometimes, occasionally. 6. By uniting a preposition and a pronoun: Indeſſen, in the mean time. überdies, besides, moreover. 2 Bergauf, up the mountain. jalrein, 2 year in, year out. bergab, down the mountain. jalraus, 5 from one year to another. ſtromauf, up stream. fopfüber, head foremost. ſtromab, down stream. fopfunter, headlong. 8. By uniting two adverbs: Aishard, immediately. ebenſo, just so. hierſelbſt, exactly here. ſogleid), immediately. baſelbſt, exactly there. ſobald, as soon (as). dennod), however. vielleidyt, perhaps. hierher, hither. dorthin, thither. Verein, in (hither). hinein, in (thither). Veraus, out (hither). hinaus, out (thither). 9. By uniting two prepositions : Durdjaus, entirely. inzwiſchen, in the mean time. vorüber, si es 10. By uniting an adverb and a preposition : Hierdurch, by this means. Hiernad), according to this. wodurcly, whereby. $ 188.] 365 . FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Rem. 1. Compound adverbs, formed by uniting the adverb da and a prepo- sition, are usually employed instead of the dative and accusative of the de- monstrative pronoun dcr, dic, das ($ 112, 2, Rein. 3), when used absolutely, and not referring to a person ; if the preposition begins with a vowel, the original r (dar, see § 186, Rem. 1) is retained: Dabei, thereby, by that, by it, by them (for bei den, bei den). dadurdy, thereby, by this or those means (“ burd, bas, durd) die). dafür, for that, for this, instead of that (“ für das, für die). dagegen, against this, against that (“ gegen das, gegen die). damit, therewith, with that, with them ( “ mit dem, mit den). baran, thereon, thereby, by it, by them ( 66 an dem, an die).. barauf, thereupon, thence, from that ( " auf dem, auf den). daraus, therefrom, thence, out of this (“ aus dem, aus den). Darin, therein, within, in it, in that (“in dem, in den). Darüber, thereover, thereupon, over that (" über das, über die). daruni, for that reason, therefore, for that ( " in das, um die). Darunter, thereunder, among it, among them { " unter dem,unter den). davon, therefrom, thence, from it, from them “ von dem, von den). Dawider, against this, that, or them (" wider das, wider die). Dazu, thereto, from that purpose, to that (“ zu dem, zu den).: Dazwiſdien, there between, between them (" zwiſdjen den). Rem. 2. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad- verb hier and prepositions, instead of the dat. and acc. of the demonstrative pronoun dicſer (§ 111), when used absolutely and not referring to persons : Hierbei, hereby, by this, by these (for bei dieſem, bei dieſen). hierburd), 66 66 66 66 66 (“ durdy dieſes, durd, dieſe). hiermit, herewith, with this, with these ( “ mit dieſem, mit dieſen). 1. etc., etc., etc., etc., etc. Rem. 3. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad- verb wo and prepositions, to take the place of the dative and the accusative of the absolute interrogative and relative pronoun was ($ 113, 1, Rem. 2): Warum, why, on what account, for which, for what ( for um was). wobei, whereby, at which, at what, during what ( 6 bei wëm). wodurd), whereby, by what means, through what ( “ Durdy was). wofitr, wherefore, for which, for what ( “ für was). wogegen, against which, against what (" gegen was). womit, wherewith, with or by which or what ( " mit wëm). wonady, whereupon, after or for which or what (nad) wëm). woran, whereon, by which or what, on what is an was). worauf, whereupon, upon which, upon what ( “ auf was). woraus, wherefrom, whence, out of which or what ( " aus wëm). worin, wherein, in which, in what. (uint was). worüber, whereupon, upon or at which or what ( “ über was). wovon, whereof, from or of which or what (5 von wëm). wozi, whereto, why, to or for which or what ( “ zu vën). 366 [$ 188, 189. THE ADVERB. Obs. The dative of was (0.-G., hwëmu; M.-G., wëm) is obsolete in the N.-G. ($ 113, 1). For the dative with a preposition, the compound adverbs womit, wo nad), tv o z 11, etc., must be used. 11. Some compound adverbs have been so modified and contracted that their origin is no longer felt," as : Heute, to-day (M.-G., hiute; O.-G., hiuto; contr. from hiû tagû, on this day). immer, ever (M.-G., iëmer; 0.-G., iomêr=je mehr=ever more). zwar (truly) (M.-G., ze wâre; 0.-G., zi wâre=in Wahrheit=in truth). nie, never (M.-G., nie; 0.-G., nio; Goth., ni áiv=not ever). nur, only (M.-G., neur, neuver; 0.-G., ni wäre=nidyt wäre, or wenn es nidyt wäre). nein ! no! (M.-G., nein; 0.-G., nein (from ni ein=nid)t eins=not once]). niminer, nerer (M.-G., niemer; 0.-G., niomêr=nie je mehr=not ever more). irgend, any where (M.-G., iergent; 0.-G., io wergin=at any place). nirgend, nowhere (M.-G., niergent; 0.-G., ni io wergin=not ever at-a-place). 12. Some compound adverbs are formed by joining several words into one word : Insbeſondere, especially, in particular (in das Beſondere). insgeſammt, altogether, collectively, in a body (in das Geſammte). insfünftige, for the future, henceforth (in das Rünftige). inſofern, as far as, in as much as (in ſo fern). Rem. In German, as in English, there are many adverbial expressions that have received conventional adverbial meanings, while the words have remained separate : Durch und Durdy, entirely. in der That, in fact. nady und nad), gradually. in Eile, in haste. zur Hand, at hand. mit Fleiß, industriously. vor der Hand, for the present. zu Hauſe, at home. ohne Zweifel, without doubt. zur Noth, if needs be. 1. CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. (Eintheilung der Adverbien.) $ 189. The following are the leading classes into which adverbs are divided with reference to their sig- nification: 1. Adverbs of time, as: Wann? when ? Wie lange ? how long ? Wie oft, how often? jetzt, now. je, ever. oft, often. heute, to-day. nie, never. felten, seldom. dann, then. immer, always. zuweilen, at times. $ 189.] 367 CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. geſtern, yesterday. ninimer, never. wieder, again. neulidy, lately. nod), yet. nodymal, again. nadyher, afterward. lange, a long time. einnial, once. morgen, to-morrow. ſtets, continually. zweimal, twice. bald, soon. beſtändig, continually. mehrmals, several times. endlidy, finally. zeitlebens, as long as one mandmal, often. früh, early. lives. ſtündlid), hourly. ſpät, late. [ing. ewig, eternally. täglich, daily. Morgens, in the morn- ewiglid), eternally. wöchentlidy, weekly. Abends, in the evening. von nun an, from now monatlidy, monthly. Madits, in the night. forward. jährlid), yearly. Heute bin id) zweimal nach der I have gone to the city twice to Stadt gegangen, day. 2. Adverbs of place, as: Wo ? where? Woher I whence! Woljin? whither ? hier, here. her, hither. hin, thither. da, there. herein, (hither) in. hinein, (thither) in. dort, yonder. heraus, (hither) out. hinaus, (thither) out. baheim, at home. Gerab, (hither) down. hinab, (thither) down. oben, above. herunter, (hither) down. vorwärts, forward. unten, below. von obent, from above. rüdwärts, backward. hinten, behind. von unten, from below. Heimwärts, homeward. vorn, in front. von hinten, from behind. fort, forward. braußen, without. von vorn, from in front. weiter, further. drinnen, within. von fern, from afar. nady oben, (toward) above. zu Hauſe, at home. von oben herab, from nadı unten, (toward) below. Nirgend, nowhere. above, from on high. nach Hauſe, home (-ward). Dort iſt der Jäger, Yonder is the hunter. Warum willſt du draußen ſtelen? Why will you stand out there ? 3. Adverbs of manner and degree, as : Wie? how? in, yes. felir, very: ſo, thus, so. gewiſ, certainly. ganz, quite. ebenſo, just so. fidyerlid), certainly. ziemlid), quite. anders, otherwise. freilidy, of course. viel, much. leidyt, easily. body, certainly. wenig, little. (dwer, with difficulty. wirklid), really. genug, enough. fdinell, rapidly. wahrhaftig, really etwa, somewhat. langſam, slowly. . nein, no. redit, right. fdriftlid), in writing. nidyt, not. Hödyſt, extremely brieflid), by letter. feineswegs, by no means. wenigſtens, at last. Die Alpen ſind ſehr hody, The Alps are very high. Ja, es iſt wirklidi ſo, Yes, it is really so. Rem. Most adjectives, when used adverbially, become adverbs of manner. 368 [$ 189, 190. TIIE ADVERB. 4. Adverbs expressive of cause, means, or instrument (being mostly compounds of wo, da, and hier with prep- ositions), as: Woran ? whereupon ? barani, thereupon. hieran, hereupon. wobei ? whereby ? Dabei, thereby. hierbei, hereby. wodurdy? whereby? dadurdy, thereby. hierdurd), hereby. wofür ? why? Dafür, therefore. hierfür, for this. womit ? with what? Damit, therewith. hiermit, with this. wonady ? according to what? Danad), accordingly. hiernad), by this. worüber ? about what? darüber, about that. pierüber, about this. wovon ? from what? davon, from that. hiervon, from this. warum ? why? Darunı, therefore. hierum, about this. wozu ? for what purpose? Dazu, for that. weswegen? on what account? deswegen, on this or that account. Aegypten wird dadurdi (durd, den Egypt is therehy (by the mud of the Sdjlamm des Nils) befruditet - Nile) made fertile- Die Uindrehung der Erde wird an The revolution of the earth is best Beſten daraus bewieſen proved by that prosou 2. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. (Steigerui.j der Adverbien.) in the same way as when they are used adjectively: Hod), highly; höher, more highly; hüdiſt, most highly. ſchön, beautifully; ſchöner, more beautifully; ſchönſt, most beautifully. 1. The relative adverbial superlative is formed by uniting am (an dem) with the dative of the superlative: Die Lerdye ſingt ſchön, The lark sings beautifully. [fully. Der Sanarienvogel ſingt fdjöncr, The Canary-bird sings more beauti- Die Nadſtigall ſingt am ſchönſten, The nightingale sings most beautifully. : . 2. The absolute adverbial superlative is indicated in three ways: 1. By the simple superlative form: (id)) danke gehorſamſt, "I thank you most obediently." Rem. In meiſtbietend, veſtınöglid), and nächſtforgend, however, the superla- 2. By uniting aufs, zum, im (auf das, zu dem, in dem), with the super- lative: Er hat uns aufs freundlidſte ge- IIe greeted us in the most friendly grilſt, way. Nidt im geringſtent, Not in the slightest degree, $ 191–194.] 369 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 3. By the superlative with the ending ens ($ 184, Renr. 2): Madje dody wenigſtens den Verſud)! Make at least the attempt ! Rem. The use of this form is mostly confined to the adverbs beſt e118, 1) i dyſte 118, 1 ängſt en 8, me iſte 118, 1 ä сly ſte 118, ſpäteſtens, wenig- ſte 118. 4. By the use of the positive degree preceded by such adverbs as ſehr, ungemein, äußerſt, yödyſt, etc. $ 191. Of words that are not used otherwise than as adverbs, the only one that is compared is oft, öfter, öfteſt. Rem. The comparative degree with a genitive ending (öfters) is frequently used in the signification of oft (in the positive degree). For the superlative (öfteſt) the word häufigſt is generally used. 3. SXNTAX OF ADVERBS. (Syntar der Adverbien.) $ 192. Adverbs modify the signification of verbs, ad- jectives, and other adverbs: Er (dyreibt ſelten, He writes seldom. Er ſdreibt ſehr ſelteni, He writes very seldom. Er ſdyreibt ſehr lange Briefe, He writes very long letters. $ 193. Many adverbs frequently partake of the nature and perform the office of conjunctions (as da, daher, denn, Dod), nun, wenn, ſehr, wie, darauf, daher, damit, indeſſen, wo, wo- her, wohin, etc.). Such words are called by some writers conjunctive adverbs, by others adverbial conjunctions § 194. The following general rules apply to the posi- tion of adverbs: 1. The adverb is placed before an adverb or adjective Der Berg iſt ſchr hodi, The mountain is very high. Wir falren ſehr ſdynell, We are going very rapidly. Rem. Genug (enough), however, when used as an adverb, and modifying an adjective or other adverb, is placed after the modified adjective or adverb: Er iſt reid genug, He is rich enough. Er kommt oft genug, IIe comes often enough. 370 [$ 195. THE ADVERB. 2. The adverb is placed after the verb when the verb occurs in simple tenses and in main sentences; it is placed before the verb when occurring in compound tenses or in subordinate sentences: Sie ſingen ſchr (djön, They sing very beautifully. Sie haben ſehr ſchön geſungen, They have sung very beautifully. Dan hat uns geſagt, daß ſie ſchr We have been told that they sing ſdjön ſingen, very beautifully. Rem. The negative particle nidit (not) follows this law when it refers to the predicate of the sentence or to the entire expression, taking the last position when there are several adverbs; if it refers to a single word of the sentence, it is placed immediately before that word: Er fommt Heute nicht, Ile does not come to-day. Er iſt heute nicht getommen, He has not come to-day. Aue denten nidit wie Sie, All think not as you (i. C., all think differently from you). Nicht alle denken wie Sie, Not all think as you do. $ 195. Many adverbs have no exactly corresponding word in English, or they are frequently used in signifi- cations that vary greatly from those of the correspond- ing English words. Thus: 1. Hier, here; da, here, there, now, then ; dort, there, yonder: 1. Hier, refers only to the place of the speaker. 2. Dort, refox only to a place at a distance from the speaker. 3. But da may refer to a time or place, near or distant. Er wollte um drei lihr hier ſein, He was to be here at three o'clock, iind iſt nocy nidyt da, and he is not here yet. Herr Weiß iſt nach Prag gegangen; Mr. Weiss has gone to Prague; he er muß idyon da ſein, must be there by this time. Von da an, From that time forward. Rein. Da is often used as a conjunctive adverb (or a conjunction): Da (conj.) nody Alles lag in wei- While all lay in far distance, then ter Ferne, you had decision and courage; Da (adv.) hatteſt du Entſchluß und and now, when success is insured, Muth; now you begin to faint and Und jetzt, da (conj.) der Erfolg ges tremble. • fichert iſt, Da (adv.) fängſt du an zu zagen (Sd.), $ 195.] 371 . SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 2. Erſt, when signifying first or firstly, and indicating the priority of one action to another, receives a full tone of voice: Erſt Worte, und dann Streidhe (Sd).), First words and then blows (“deeds"). Rem. Signifying only, not earlier, not further, not more, erſt does not re- ceive a full tone of voice: Er iſt erſt geſtern angekommen, He only arrived yesterday. Er iſt erſt zehn Jahre alt, He is only ten years old. 3. The affirmative adverb ja (yes) is often used in the signification of certainly (I hope that), indeed : Hat er es getiyan? Ja! Has he done it? Yes! Sie werden ja kommen, You will certainly (I hope) come. Er iſt ja mein Vater ! Why, he is my father! 4. Nod (still, yet), used before numerals or indefinite pronouns, is translated by more or another in English: dh habe stod eine Bitte, I have another request. Er hat noch zwei Büder gekauft, He has bought two books more. Rem. Nodh fo is translated by however, ever so : Sei er audy nodi ſo reidy, Be he ever so rich. 5. Schon (already) is frequently omitted in translat- ing into English: Er iſt ſdoit angekommen, He has already arrived. Er iſt ſchon geſtern Abend zurüd- He returned (already) yesterday gekommen, evening. Rem. Sdion often expresses emphasis (as of confidence or certainty): Sie werden mich ſchon verſtehen, You will (I hope) have understood Sdhon den folgenden Morgen- The very next morning- [me. 6. Wohl (well) frequently expresses logical possibility or probability : Schlafen Sie wohl! . (May you sleep well!)=good-night! Es kann wohl ſein, It may (indeed) be. Sie lyaben es wohl geleſeit, You have read it (I suppose). Rem. Wohl sometimes is used to express intensity or emphasis : 3d mödyte wohl wiſſen, I should really like to know. Ja wohl! • Yes! (Yes, indeed!) 372 (196. THE PREPOSITION. fora. Z110, zuo, PREPOSITIONS. (Die Vorwörter.) $ 196. Prepositions are either primitive, derivative, or compound: 1. The primitive prepositions are: an, auf, aus, bei, durd), für, in, mit, ob, um, vor, von, zu. Rem. 1. The primitive prepositions were originally adverbs; all except von are yet used also as adverbs; at least they may be considered as such when used as prefixes to compound verbs. Rem. 2. The primitive prepositions have been developed thus: Goth.: ana, iup, ut, bi, · (bi-az), thaírl, faur, in, 0.-G.: ana, ûf, uz, bî, biz, duruh, furi, in, M.-G.: ane, uf, ûz, bî, biz, durch, vür, in, N.-G.: an, auf, aus, bei, bis, burdh, für, in. Goth.: (mith-), nêhv, (uf), - (af-ana), faúra, du, 0.-G.: miti, náh, oba, umbi, vona, M.-G.: mite, nâch, obe, umbe, vone, vor, N.-G.: init, nad), oben, um, von, vor, zu. 2. The derivative prepositions are derived as follows: 1. From nouns, as: halb (halber, halben), traft, laut, ſtatt, trotz, vermöge, wegen. 2. From adjectives, as : gemäß, längs, mittels (mitteiſt, vermittels, vermit- terſt), nädyſt, ſammt, ſeit, unfern, unweit. 3. From participles, as : während, unbeſdiabet, ungeadytet. 4. From adverbs, as : außen, binnen, bis, gemäß, Hinter, neben, nebſt, olie, unter, über. 3. Compound prepositions are mostly formed by pre- fixing a preposition or adverb to a noun or to another preposition, as: Anſtatt, binneit, um-willen, außerhalb, entgegen, zufolge, innerhalb, Siesſeit, zuwider. oberhalb, jenſeit, unterhalb, gegenüber, Rem. 1. The derivation and the composition of some prepositions is now “no longer felt” ($ 49, Rem. 3 ; $ 223 ; § 233). Rem. 2. Most prepositions that are derived from nouns and adjectives, and most compound prepositions, have had their origin or have first been used as prepositions during the New-German period. $ 197, 198.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 373, 1. CONSTRUCTION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. (Nection der Vorwörter.) § 197. Prepositions do not govern a single case only (as the objective in English), but they govern the three oblique cases, the genitive, dative, and accusative ($ 80, Rein. 1) of substantives, whether nouns or pronouns: . Anſtatt ſeines Bruders (gen.), Instead of his brother. Mit ſeinem Bruder (dat.), With his brother. Dune ſeinen Bruder (acc.), Without his brother. Rem. The primitive prepositions especially are not always independent gor- erning words, in the same sense that verbs and adjectives are. But often the preposition that is to be employed, as well as the case it is to 'govern (as, if accusative or dative), is determined by the preceding verb, adjective, or noun: Er ſteigt auf den Berg, He is climbing up the mountain. Er leidet an Nheumatisnius, IIe is suffering from rheumatism. Er geht in den Garten, Ile is going into the garden. Er iſt in dem (im) Garten, He is in the garden. § 198. The following prepositions govern the genitive case: Diesſeit, mittels (mittelſt, vermit: vermöge, jenícit, tels or vermittelſt), während, halb Chalber or halben), ſtatt (or anſtatt), wegen, außerhalb, unbeſchadet, un-willert, innerhalb, ingeadytet, längs (or entlang), oberhalb, unwcit, trok, unterhalb, infern, zufolgc. Rem. 1. The last three, längs, trok, and zufolge, may also govern the da- tive case. Rem. 2. The following lines, containing most of these prepositions, are com- mitted to memory in schools in Germany: 1 n weit, mittelſt, kraft und w ährend, laut, vermöge, ungeadytet, oberhalb und unterhalb innerhalb und außerhalb, diesfeit, jenſeit, halben, wegen, ſtatt und läng8, zufolge, tro B, ſtehen init dem Genitio, oder auf die Frage „weſſen ?" Dod) iſt hier nicht zu vergeſſen, daß bei dieſen leßtern drei audy der Dativ riditis fci. Rem. 3, None but derivative or compound prepositions govern the gen. case. 374 [$ 199–201. THE PREPOSITION. feit, vei, nad, $ 199. The following prepositions govern the dative case: Xus, . gemäß, ſavitit, außer, mit, von, binnen, nädiſt, zu, entgegen, nebſt, zunädiſt, gegeniiber, (ob), zuwider. Rem. The most important of these are included in the following lines : Sdreib mit, i ady, nä dyſt, 11 eBft, ſa init, bei, jeit, von, 311, 3 u wider, entgegen, außer, aus ſtets mit dem Datid nieder. $ 200. The following prepositions govern the accusa- tive case : Bis, durd, für, gegen, ohne, un, wider. (gen), (ſonder), Rem. They are included in the following lines : Bei durdy, für, opne, um, bis, ſonder, gegen, wider, dreiß ſtets den Accuſativ, und nie den Dativ nieder. $ 201. The following prepositions govern either the accusative or the dative case, according to certain rules ($ 244–253): An, unter, auf, vor, hinter. liber. zwiſdjen. Rem. 1. The following lines, containing these prepositions, contain also the rules for their use: An, auf, Hinter, neben, in, über, unter, vor und z w if den ſtehen mit dem Accuſativ, wenn man fragen kann; „wohin ?" Mit dem Datio ſtehn ſie ſo, Daß man nur fann fragen ,wo ?" nevent, $ 202, 203.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 375 2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. (Vorwörter mit dem Genitiv.). $ 202. Diesſeit (this side of) and jenſeit (the other side of, beyond ), refer only to place: Dicsſeit des Fluſſes, On this side of the river. Jenſeit des Gebirges, The other side of the mountain. Rem. 1. They are both used, though rarely, with the dative case: fenſeit jenem Hügel (Sd.), 'The other side of that hill. Rem. 2. The addition of -8 gives an adverbial force to both of them: Er wohnt dies ſeits, id) jenſeits, He lives on this side, I on the other. Rem. 3. They are both used as nouns, especially in reference to this world and the world to come: Ein Jenſeit, das Verein ins Dieg- Another life that extends into this feit reidit, life. S 203. Halb, halber, halben (on account of, for the sake, as regards) always follow the noun they govern: Er reiſte nur Bergnügens halber Ile went to the Springs only for the ins Bad, sake of pleasure. Des Geldes Halber, For the sake of money. Rem. 1. Való is rarely used with the force of a preposition except in com- position with a pronoun: Weshalb ? On what account? Deshalb, on this account. Rem. 2. Halber is preferred to halben when the noun it governs ends in -en :* Er hat, ſeiner vielen Sdulden hal- He had to run away on account of ber, fliehen müſſen, his many debts. Rem. 3. Halbeit is united with the pronoun it governs into a compound word, taking an unorganic t or ct as letters of union (§ 107, Rem. 2): Meinethalben, on my account. Unſerthalbeni, on our account. Rem. 4. Feminine nouns in -heit, -fcit, -ing, when followed by halber and not preceded by an article or adjective, often take an unorganic ending = (after the analogy of some compound nouns, see § 58, 2, Rem. 2): Er reiſte Geſundheits halber ins He went to the Springs for the sake Bab, of his health. Rem. 4. Ďalber is sometimes preceded by int, placed before the noun: Un des Friedens Halver, For the sake of peace. Rem. 5. Halben is formed from the dative plural die Halbe (the half, side); Halber is an irregular form of barben; all is a contraction of the accusative singular (M.-G., halbe--half). 376 [$ 204-206. THE PREPOSITION. $ 204. From the accusative of the same noun (die Halbe) have been formed the four following prepositions: Außerhalb, outside of, without, beyond. innerhalb, inside of, within. oberhalb, on the upper side of, above. unterhalb, on the lower side of, below. Nürnberg hat außerhalb und in- Nuremberg has many stately edifices nicrhalb der Mauern viele ſtatt- outside of and inside of its walls. lide Gebäude, Worms liegt oberhalb, Bingen Worms lies above, and Bingen be- unterhalb der Bundesfeſtung low Mainz, a fortification of the Mainz, (German) Confederation. Rem. 1. Junerhalb may refer also to a specified space of time: Innerhalb einer Stunde, eines Tages, Within an hour, a day. $ 205. Kraft (by the power of, in virtue of ), denotes rather a moral than a physical cause (compare vermögc, § 212): Straft ſeines Amtes, By virtue of his office. Rem. 1. Kraft has become a preposition by the dropping of the preposition in, which formerly preceded it : „Da er nid)t in Kraft eines verlie- As he does not rule by virtue of a lenen Amtes regiert," borrowed office. legal language (Kanzleiſtu!) into the language of literature. It was first used by good writers in the seventeenth century. $ 206. Längs or entlang (along, lengthwise of): Längs des Thales, Along the valley. Entlang des Waldgebirges, Along the forest-covered mountain. Rem. 1. Both forms are frequently used with the dative case: längs dem Ufer, Along the shore. Entlang dem Strome, Along the stream. Rem. 2. Längs is occasionally (entlang more frequently than längs), found with the accusative case : längs den Saal hinab, Down along the Saal. Entlang den Felſenpfad, Along the rocky path. Rem. 3. Entlang frequently follows the noun which it governs : (Gen.) Des Weges entlang, Along the way. (Dat.) Dem Beet entlang, (Acc.) Den ganzen Berg entlang, Along the whole mountain. 207–209.] 377 CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. Rem. 4. Entlang is sometimes used (with the accusative of nouns) indicat- ing time (meaning through): Dandyen jugendliden Tag ent- Through many a day of my youth. lang (3.), $ 207. Laut (according to, by the wording of) refers to something spoken or written: Laut des Befehles, According to the order. Laut des Vertrages, By the wording of the treaty. Rem. 1. Laut is used by some writers also with the dative case : it is es- pecially used with the dative plural of nouns when they are not preceded by an article or by an adjective: (Gen.) laut früherer Bricfe, According to former letters. (Dat.) Laut Briefcit aus meiner Hei- According to letters from my home. matis, Rem. 2. Laut has passed to be a preposition by dropping the preposition jadi (formerly written ia di Laute=according to the wording). $ 208. The four words mittels, mittelſt, vermittels, ver- mittelſt have the same meaning (through, by means of, through the instrumentality of-not referring to per- sons; see durd (S 238): • Wir kamen mittelſt (or vermittelſt) We reached the shore by means of eines Stalnes ans Ufer, a skiff. Dampfſdyiffe werden häufig ver- Steam-boats are frequently driven by mittelſt einer Sdıraube bewegt, means of a screw. Rem. 1. The form vermittelſt is most frequently employed; and mittelſt is more usual than either vermittels, or mittels. Rem. 2. The four fowms are derived from the Genitive of the adjective mit- ter, which was first used adverbially ($ 107, 2) and then as a preposition. The form vermittelſt was current in the 17th century; mittelſt first appears in the writings of Steinbach (173+). Rem. 3. The -t is added unorganically to the genitive ending ($ 107, 2). Rem. 4. The provincial use of these prepositions with the dative case, which has occasionally crept into the works of even such writers as Goethe, is not approred by German grammarians. $ 209. Statt or anſtatt (instead of, in place of): Anſtatt (or ſtatt) ſeines Bruders, Instead of his brother. Rem. 1. The placing of Statt after the noun it governs, which was very general in the Middle-German, is now considered antiquate: Un ſeines Bruders Statt (compare in English, in his brother's steud). Rem. 2. The noun Statt (stead) has become a preposition by the dropping of an, which formerly was generally employed before it. 378 [$ 210–215. THE PREPOSITION. $ 210. Trok (in spite of, in defiance of, nothwithstand- ing): "Trok des Regens gingen wir nadı In spite of the rain we went to the dem Muſeun, nuseum. Rem. 1. Trok indicates more active opposition than ungeadytet, and is therefore perhaps more properly to be construed with the dative case : Trok dem Verbote, In spite of the prohibition. Rem. 2. Trok has become a preposition by dropping the preposition zu (m) in znn Trotz (in defiance of). $ 211. Unbeſdhadet (without injury to or detraction from): Seiner Ehre unbeidhadet, Without detracting from his honor. Rem. 1. Unbedi adet may precede or follow the noun it governs. Rem. 2. It is sometimes used with the dative case. $ 212. Um-willen (for —'s sake, for the sake of, on ac- count of): Idy bitte did), um Gottes willen, I entreat you, for God's sake, not to es nicht zu thun, do it. Unt des Friedens willen, For the sake of peace. Rem. Occasionally, though rarely, examples are met with where one par- ticle (um or willen) is omitted. $ 213. Ungeadhtet (notwithstanding, in spite of, without regarding): Ungeadhtet des Negens, gingen wir In spite of the rain we went to the nach dem Muſeum, museum. Rem. Ungeadytet may precede or follow the noun. $ 214. Inweit or unſern (not far from, near): Er wohnt unfern Des Thores, He lives not far from the gate. Unweit des Berges liegt das Dorf, The village is not far from the mountain. Rem. 1. The parallel forms on weit, oly n fern, are now rarely used. Rem. 2. Unweit and unfern are occasionally found used with the dative. Rem. 3. Both words have had their origin during the New-German period. $ 215. Vermöge (by virtue of, in conformity with, by the power of): Alle Körper ſtreben vermöge ihrer All bodies tend towards the center Sdywere nady dem Mittelpunkt of the earth, through their at- Der Erde, traction of gravitation. Vermöge des Vertrages, By virtue of the treaty. $ 216-219.] 379 CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 319 Rem. 1. Vermöge may be used in most cases where kraft and laut are employed. Rem. 2. Vermöge was originally a noun preceded by nad). $ 216. Während (during the time of): Während des Krieges, During the war. Rem. 1. Während (from währen, to endure) was first used as a parti- ciple or adjective (as in währendem Kriege); it was next used with the quali- fied noun in the genitive (währendes Krieges, compare des Morgen, $ 81,3); it was first used as a preposition in the last half of the eighteenth century. 8 217. Wegen (on account of, for the sake, or purpose of): Wegen des Regens (or des Regens On account of the rain I remained wegen) blieb id) zu Hauſe, at home. strife. Nidit Streitens wegen kam idy her, I came not here for the purpose of Rem. 1. Wegen can thus either precede or follow the noun. Rem. 2. Wegent has become a preposition by dropping the preposition Von from von Wegen, a form that is now antiquated except in some fixed expressions, as : Von Nedits wegen, For the sake of justice. Rem. 3. Wegen is suffixed to the personal pronoun, taking an unorganic - or -et as letters of union (§ 107, Rem. 2): Meinetwegent, on my account. Seinetwegen, on his account. $ 218. Zufolge (in consequence of, in pursuance of, in accordance with): Er that dieſes zufolge meines Auf- IIe did this in accordance with my trags, commission. [tions. Zufolge gewagter Spekulationen, In consequence of rash specula- Renn. 1. When the noun follows zufolge, the noun is put in the dative case : zufolge der neueſten Nadıridyten, 1 According to the latest intelli- (or) Den neueſten Nadjviditen zufolge,) gence. Rem. 2. Formerly the two words were separated (zu Folge). $ 219. Many other words are used as prepositions, governing the genitive case (especially in the language of trade and commerce), as: Angeſichts, in view of (from das Angeſidit, face). behufs, in behalf of (" der Befuf, behalf, behoof). namens, in the name of (der Namen, namc). . feitens, on the part of ( 5 die Seite, side). hinſichtlich, with respect to ( Sie Hinſidit, respect). riidfſichtlidi, with regard to ( 66 Sie Rückſidit, regard). 380 [$ 220, 222. TIIE PREPOSITION. Angeſichts der Gefahr, In view of the danger. Namens des Amtmanns, In the name of the officer. Seitens der Elterni, On the part of the parents. Hinſiditlich der Folgen, In view of the consequences. Riiffidtlid des Vortheils, With regard to the interest. Rem. When used with personal pronouns, the form ſeits (instead of feiten3), is employed (§ 109): Meinerſeits, for my part. 3. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE CASE. (Vorwörter init dem Dativ.) $ 220. Aus (out of, from) primarily refers to place, indicating origin, source, or to the place whence: Aus der Stadt fommen, To come out of the city. Er ſtammt aus einer edlen Familie, He comes from a noble family. Rem. 1. A us sometimes is used as referring to a period of time: Ein Diditer aus dem Dreizchutent A poet of the thirteenth century. Jahrhundert, Rem. 2. It often refer to the material or to the parts of a thing: Ein Sefäß aus Thon, A vessel of clay. Der Menſdy Veſteht aus Leib und Man cosnists of body and soul. Seele, . Rem. 3. It may refer to the inner motive cause of an action : Er handelt ſo aus Geiz, He does so from avarice. Rein. 4. It may refers to the material or parts of a thing: er krank iſt, Das weiß id) aus Erfalrung, That I know from experience. § 221. Außer (out of, outside of, beyond, except) refers only to position—not to motion: Außer dein Hauſe zu ſein, To be out of the house. Er iſt außer Gefahr, He is out of danger. Außer ihm, haben Alle ilgre Pflidit All except him have done their getljan, duty. Rem. Außer (Mid.-Ger., ûzer; Old-Ger., ûzar) is from the Old-Gier., ûx (1118), the ar being a derivative syllable. § 222. Bei (near, at, with) refers only to position-not to motion): Bei dem Hauſe ſteht ein Baum, Near the house stands a tree. In der Salad)t bci Leipzig, In the battle of (near) Leipsic. $ 223-225.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE CASE. 381 Rem. 2. Bei may indicate approximation, connection, possession, etc.: Er wohnt bei mir, He resides with me. Gdy labe kein Geld bei mir, I have no money with me. Bei dieſer Nadiriđit, At this news. Rem. 3. Bei is used in making oaths or protestations : Bei meiner Ehre, Upon (by) my honor. $ 223. Binnen (within, inside of) refers only to definite periods of time: Binnen einer Stunde werde ich Within an hour I will take my de- abreiſen, parture. Binnen einem Falre, Within a year. Rem. 1. Binnen (M.-G., binnen), has come from the Lower-German (§ 4) into the High-German ($ 6), and is a compound of be innen (bci innen). Rem. 2. The reference to space originally indicated by binne n is now re- tained only in such compounds as : Der Binnenſee, inland sea. Das Binnenland, the interior part of a country. § 224. Entgegen (towards, cgainst) expresses a direc- tion of or tendency to a motion toward an object, eitlier in a friendly or hostile sense: Der Menſdenfreund kommt dem The benevolent man meets in a Bittenden freundlid, cntgegcit, kindly way one who asks a favor. Der Tapfere geht dem Feinde mu- The brave man goes courageously thig entgegeit, to meet the enemy. Der Wind war uns entgegent, The wind was against us. Rem. 1. Entgegen always comes after the noun it governs. Rem. 2. When motion is indicated, entgegeit may perhaps be considered an adverb (i. C., a prefix of the compound verb, as entgegengelse 11) Rem. 3. Entgegen is sometimes used as synonymous with zuwider: Er hat dem Befehle cutgcgcn (or He has acted contrary to the com- zuwider) gelandelt, mand. Rem. 4. The word entgegen (M.-G., engégen ; 0.-G., ingegin, inkakan) was formed by the union of in kakan=in gegen=en-t-gegen. The t is add- ed by false analogy, after imitation of ent in inseparable compound verbs. $ 225. Gegenüber (over against, opposite to) refers to the relative position of two objects (which often have a hostile relation to each other) : Bei Zorndorf ſtanden dic Nufſen At Zorndorf the Russians stood ar- ben Preußen gegeniiber, ' rayed against the Prussians. de unul. 382 [$ 226-228. THE PREPOSITION. Rem. 1. This preposition sometimes precedes the noun it governs : Gegenüber dem Muſeum iſt die Opposite the Museum is the new neue Bibliothek, Library-building. Rem. 2. Gegenüber is compound of gegen über = toward over (or over toward). $ 226. Gemäß (in conformity with, agreeably to) may precede or follow the noun it governs: Gemäß meinen Vorſatze (or niei- I do as I had intended (or according niem Vorſatze gemäß3), handle to my intention), so do I act. idy for Rem. Gemäß was formerly an adjective (in M.-G., gemaeze; in 0.-G., gimazi, kimazi=nady den Maße). $ 227. Mit (with, in connection with): Der Vater geht nått den Kindern The father goes out with his chil- aus, dren. Ertrage deine Leiden mit Geduld! Bear thy sorrows with patience ! Rem. 1. Mit is often used to denote the identity of time of one event with another: Wir ſtanden mit Tagesanbrud) auf, We arose at daybreak. Rem. 2. Mit is frequently used in denoting the means of conveyance: Einen Brief mit der Poſt (djicken, To send a letter by mail. Mit der Eiſenbahn fahren, To travel by railroad. $ 228. Nad denotes primarily motion or direction to or toward a place (see zu, § 235): He has gone to Berlin. Sie ſegclten nad Norden, They sailed toward the North. Rem. 1. The particle zu or hint is frequently added, being placed after the noun that is governed by nad): Der Haſe lief nadi der Stadt zit, The hare ran toward the city. Es donnert nad, dem Gebirge hin, It thunders in the direction of the mountains. Rem. 2. Nad is used inexpressing a motion toward a person or thing, for the purpose of reaching, touching, or procuring it: Nadi Jemand ſchlagen, To strike at a person. To send for a physician. Nad femand fragen, To ask about a person. Rem. 3. Nad frequently signifies "after," whether referring to time or to place : Nadı dem fünften Mai, After the fifth of May. Einer ging nad dem Anderit, One went after another. $ 229-233.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 383 Rem. 4. Nadfrequently signifies according to, or in accordance with ; used in this signification, nad may be placed after the noun it governs : Wünſdien, cording to our wishes. Das (dyniedt nad Wein, That tastes of wine. Er malt nadi der Natur, He paints from nature. Meiner Meinung nadı, In my opinion. $ 229. Nächſt or zunädiſt next to or next after): He sat next to me. Der Kronprinz ritt zunädiſt dem The Crown Prince rode next to Könige (or dem Könige zunädiſt). the king. Rem. 1. 3 un ä dy ſt may precede or follow the nouns it governs. Rem. 2. N ä diſt, the superlative of 11 aye (92), was not used as a pre- position before the New-German period. $ 230. Nebſt (together with) refers to a connection Die Stadt ſah den Hunger nebſt The city saw famine, together with ſeinem ganzen Gefolge mit ſdyred (or and) all its consequences, ap- liden Sdjritten ſid) nähern (Sd).), proach with fearful steps. Rem. 1. Nebſt is an irregular derivative from neben. $ 231. Ob, denoting position over or above, is obsolete, except in poetry or in legal language: Ob dem Altar hing eine Mutter Orer the altar hung a picture of the Gottes (Sd.), Virgin Mary. Rem. For oD (M.-G., ob; 0.-G., obe, oba) in New-Ger., über is used. $ 232. Sammt (together with) indicates a more intimate or natural connection than is expressed by nebſt and mit: Das Sdiiff ſammt der ganzen The ship, together with the entire Mannſdjaft und Ladung ward crew and cargo, became a prey to ein Naub der Weltri, the waves. Rem. Samtmt (M.-G., samet; 0.-G., samant) is derived from the Old- German adjective sam (compare the English 'same'), which is allied to the Latin semper (always) and the Greek oúv (with). $ 233. Seit (since, during) refers to a period of time that is specified with reference to the moment of its commencement, or to its duration: Seit vorgeſtern habe id) ihn nicht I have not seen him since day before geſehen ($ 256), yesterday. Er iſt ſeit einem Falre frank, He has been sick a year. Rem. Seit (M.-G., sít; 0.-G., sid) is allied to the Goth. adj. seithu=late. THE PREPOSITION. [$ 234, 235. $ 234. Von (from) indicates source or origin in the most general way: Von Berlin gingen wir nad, Bonn, From Berlin we went to Bonn). Von dieſem Tage an, From this day forward. Rem. 1. Von is also used to express the material of which a thing is made, or the contents or property of a thing : Der Tiſch iſt von Holz, The table is of wood. Er iſt ein Mann von Ehre, He is a man of honor. Rem. 2. It often denotes separation, and is also frequently used for the partitive genitive: Zeln von Hundert abzielen, To take ten from a hundred. Zwei von meinen Freunden, Two of my friends. Rem. 3. Von may denote possession : Der König von Preußen, The king of Prussia. Die Umgebungen von Berlin, The environs of Berlin. Rem. 4. It is used in limiting the signification of some adjectives and verbs : Er iſt klein von Geſtalt, lle is small in stature. Idy kenne ihn von Anſehen, I know him by sight. Rem. 5. Von may be used to express the originator, the instrument, or the cause of an action or a result: Ein Gemälde von Nubens, painting by Rubens. Der Hund wurde von dem Herrn The dog was beaten by the man. geſdilagen, $ 235. Zu indicates, priņarily, motion to a person : Er geht zu ſeinem Bruder, He went to his brother. Sie ſang zu ihm, ſie ſprady zu She sang to him, she spoke to him. ihm (G.), Rem. 1. Zit indicates also position or rest in place (being used in this sense before names of cities and villages especially): Er wohnt zu Berlin, He resides in Berlin. Die Univerſität zu Göttingen, The university in Gottingen. Rem. 2. Zu indicates motion to an object or place, in many fixed expres- sions, that were established during the Middle-German period : He goes from place to place. Das Kind geht zu Bett, The child goes to bed. Rem. 3. Zu is used in indicating time when, especially in many general expressions (compare also a 11, $ 245; and i in, Ş 2+2): Bu Ende des Falres, At the end of the year. . Bim erſten Male, For the first time. $ 236-238.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 385 Rom. 4. Zu is employed in expiessing many relations that grow out of the primary meaning of motion towards and that of rest in) a place, as : Er geht zu Fuß, zu Pferde, He goes on foot, on horseback. Pommern gehört 31 Preußen, Pomerania belongs to Prussia. Er taufte Tud) zu einem Nodt, He bought cloth for a coat. Rem. 5. Zu was originally an adverb; it was first used as a preposition in the 0.-Ger. period. Being first used with pronouns, and then with reference to persons in the Mid.-Ger. period. Its use was then extended to names of things, indicating motion or position with reference to them. $ 236. Zuwider (against, contrary to) indicates a mo- tion or tendency in a stronger or more hostile sense than that which is expressed by entgegen (§ 224): Das Glück war uns zuwider (Sď.), Fate was against us. Der geſunden Vernunft zuwider, Contrary to sound reason. Rem. Z uwider always follows the noun which it governs. Obs. The following verses contain several of the prepositions that govern the dative case. Daphnis an die Quelle. Nach dir ſaimadt idy, zu Dir eil' idy, du geliebte Quelle, du! Aus dir ſchöpf idy, bei dir rul' idy, ſely dem Spiel der Wellen zu ; Mit dir derz' id), von dir lern ich Heiter durch das Leben wallen, Angeladit von Frühlingsblumen und begrüßt von Nachtigallen. 4. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. (Vorwörter mit dem Accuſativ.) $ 237. Bis (till, until, as far as, to) refers to both time and space: Von Berlin bis Potsdam ſind vier From Berlin to Potsdam it is four Deutſche Meilen, German miles. Von Oſtern bis Pfingſten ſind vier From Easter until Whitsuntide it Wodjen, is seven weeks. Rem. 1. The article can not be used before a noun governed by bis. Rem. 2. Some other preposition frequently follows bis: Bis nad Meitternadit, Until after midnight. Bis auf den letzten Heller, Down to the last farthing. $ 238. Durch (through, by means of, by): Wir fuhren durdh die Stadt, We rode through the city. Durch das ganze Jahr, Through the entire year. Durd Fleiß hat er es erreicht, He has acquired it by diligence. 386 [8 239,240. THE PREPOSITION. $ 239. Für (for, instead of, in favor of): Er ſtarb fiir das Vaterland, He died for his country. Er ging fiir ſeinen Bruder in den He went to the war instead of his Strieg, brother. Ein Geſdent für einen Freund, A present for a friend. Rem. 1. Für is used in many expressions where a noun is repeated : Schritt für Sdritt; Tag für Tag, Step by step; day by day. Rem. 2. Für is used before a noun taken as the equivalent of another noun, in such expressions as : Id Halte ihn fiir einen ehrlidien I consider him to be an honest man. Mann, Rem. 3. Für loses its prepositional power in was füir (see $ 113, 3). § 240. Gegen (toward, against) indicates motion, direc- tion, or tendency in either a friendly, hostile, or indif- ferent sense (see wider, $ 243): Wir ſegelten gegen Norden, We sailed toward the North. Er war ſehr freundlid; gegen uns, He was very kind toward us. Die Verbündeten zogen gegen die The Allied forces moved against the Franzoſen, French. Rem. 1. Gegen may also indicate direct contact (against): Er lehnte fich gegen die Wand, He leaned against the wall. Rem. 2. It may indicate approximation of time or number: Gegen ſieben Ulr des Morgens, Toward seven o'clock in the morning. Gegen adythundert Perſonen, Toward eight hundred persons. Rem. 3. Gegen may be used in expressing a comparison of two objects: Er iſt gegen Did) ein Nieſe! He is a giant compared to thee! Rem. 4. Gegen may be used in expressing exchange: Nur gegen baare Zahlung, Only on cash payment. Rem. 5. Gen, an abbreviation of gegen, is only used now in some fixed expressions; it is never preceded by the article: Gen Himmel; gen Oſten, Toward heaven; toward the East. $ 241. Ohne (without) is in general the opposite to mit in signification: Ohne Geld; ohne Zweifel, Without money; without doubt. Rem. 1. The former construction of o h 11 e with the dative (in the Middle- German) is yet preserved in the adverb ohnedem (besides that). Rem. 2. The use of o lile in the sense of besides (a uſer) is antiquated : Es waren fünfzig Perſonen ohne There were fiſty persons without die Kinder, (counting) the children. § 242, 243.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 387 Rem. 3. The use of ſonder, instead of ohne, is now antiquated, or poetic; fonder can never be followed by the article: . Werdy ein Wirtyslaus ſonder Glei- What an unequaled inn! den (Sd.)! § 242. Um (around, about), implying either motion or rest: Wir gingen um die Stadt herum, We went around the city. Die Gäſte faßen um den Tiſd), The guests sat around the table. Rem. 1. Before the hours of the day um denotes a specific time: Die Sonne geht jetzt um Halb ſedys The sun rises now at half past five Uhr auf, o'clock. Rem. 2. Unt is used before some other divisions of time to express approxi- mation of time (about): Er wird um Mittag kommen, He will come about noon. Rem. 3. Uit may be used to express price, reward, etc.: Das werde id; um feinen Preis thun, That will I not do for any prite. Rem. 4. Init is used in comparing number, size, or degree: Er kam um zwei Tage zu ſpät, He came too late by two days. Rem. 5. Um frequently signifies for, concerning: Um Hülfe rufent, To call for help. Sid unt etwas bekümnern, To concern one' self about a thing. Rem. 6. In in some figurative expressions signifies loss, overthrow, de- struction, etc. : Er iſt um ſein Vermögen gekommen, Ile has lost his property. $ 243. Wider (against) implies hostile opposition: Es war wider ſeinen Willen, It was against his will. Wer nid)t für mid) iſt, der iſt Who is not for mc, is against me. wider mid), Rem. The adverb wieder (again) was written in the same way as the preposition wider (against) until the beginning of the last century. Obs. The following verses contain most of the prepositions that govern the accusative case : Philemon an ſeinen Freund. Durdh Did iſt die Welt mir ſdjön, ohne Did würd idſie haſien ; Für Did leb id) ganz allein, um Dich will ich gern erblaſſen; Gegen Did ſoll kein Verläumder ungeſtraft ſidy je vergeln, Wider Dich kein Feind fidi waffnen ; id will Dir zur Seite ſtehn. 388 [$ 244, 245. THE PREPOSITIONBO . 5. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE CASES. (Vorwörter mit dem Dativ und Accuſativ.) § 244. The nine prepositions ait, auf, kinter, in, neben, über, unter, vor, zwiſchen, govern the Accusative Case when motion toward the object they govern is expressed. They govern the Dative Case when rest within or mo- tion inside of the object they govern is expressed: Er legte das Bud) auf den Tiſd), He laid the book on the table. Das Buch liegt auf dem Tiſdi, The book is lying on the table. Rem. 1. In general when these prepositions have reference to place or to space, they govern the dative if they answer to the question where? —and the accusative if they answer to the question whither? (see $ 80, Rem. I). Rem. 2. Usually even when these prepositions are employed otherwise than with reference to space, the above general rule will serve as a key to the cor- rect use of the cases, as: Ein Gedidit an den Mond, A poem to the moon. Er arbeitet an einem Werte, He is laboring on a work. Rem. 3. Where the use of the prepositions rests upon relations that are too abstract to be governed by the above laws, the following general rules will be of assistance: 1. Auf and über are generally used with the accusative case. 2. An, in, unter, vor and zwiſden are generally used with the dative case. $ 245. An (on) indicates primarily nearness or contact upon the upper surface of a body, or lengthwise with a body: Er hängte das Bild an die Wand, He hung the picture on the wall. Einen Ning an den Finger tragen, To wear a ring on the finger. Rem. 1. An is employed in expressing definite time when (especially be- fore days of the week or the month ; see un § 243; and $ 83, 4): Er ſtarb am 5. Mai 1847, He died on the fifth of May, 1847. Am vorigen Mittwody um 6 Uhr, Last Wednesday, at six o'clock. Rem. 2. An may be employed in expressing a number or measure ap- proximately: Es waren an ſedishundert Perſo- There were about six hundred per- nei verſammelt, sons assembled. Rem. 3. An may be used in expressing grounds of proof drawn from ex- ternal signs: Wir erkannten ihn an der Stimme, We know him by his voice. 8 245-247] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 389 Rem. 4. Uit is used in many cases to express the direction of an action of the mind or feelings : Idy glaube ait einen Gott, I believe in one God. Hier iſt ein Brief an Sie, Here is a letter, directed to you. Rem. 5. Ant with the article (am) is used in forming the relative superla- tive of adverbs ($ 190, 1). Rem. 6. An is used to express the relation of office : Er iſt Profeſſor an der Univerſität He is a professor in the university zu Göttingen, of Göttingen. Rem. 7. An is used, instead of tire genitive case, in completing and limit- ing many predications : Er leidet an Nheumatismus, He is suffering from rheumatism. Er iſt jung an Sahren, He is young in years. . 8 246. Auf (on, upon) denotes primarily position upon the upper surface on the upper part of a body: Er lente das Budi auf den Tiſd), He laid the book upon the table. Das Budy liegt auf dem Tiſdie, The book is lying upon the table. Rem. 1. Auf often indicates position or direction, in a very general manner: Er wohnt auf der redyten Seite der He resides on the right-hand side of Straße, the street. Er ſteigt auf den Thurm, He is going up the tower. Er iſt auf der Sagb, He has gone a hunting. Er iſt böſe auf uns, He is angry at us. Er wartet auf ſeinen Bruder, IIe is waiting for his brother. Rem. 2. Auf is used in indicating exact expressions or limitations of time, measure, or number : Sei auf die Stunde da! Be there at the hour. Er hat ſeine Rechnung bis auf den He has paid account to the last far- letzten Heller bezahlt, thing. Rem. 3. Auf is used to express sequence of time or order : Auf Negen folgt Sonnenſdyein, Sunshine follows rain. Ich habe es anfſeinen Befehl gethant, I did it by his order. Rem. 4. Anf is used in some adverbial expressions (especially in expressing the absolute superlative $ 190, 2). § 247. Hinter (behind, back of) almost always refers to place: Der Hund lief hinter das Haus, The dog ran behind the house. Der Garten iſt hinter dem Hauſe, The garden is behind the house. 390 [$ 248–250. THE PREPOSITION. Rem. 1. When both of the bodies referred to are in motion, hinter gov- erns the dative case, and the adverb her is added : Noland ritt hinternt Vater her(ii.), Roland rode behind (i. e. following) his father. § 248. In (in, into) refers especially to place, time, condition, manner, material, or contents: Wir gingen in die Stadt, We went into the city. Er wohnt in der Stadt, Ile resides in the city. Er ſtarb int vorigen Oktober, lle died last October. Er hat es im Sdierz geſagt, He said it in a joke. Dafitr hat er zweilundert Thaler He paid for that two hundred tha- in Gold bezahlt, lers in gold. § 249. Neben (by, near, close to, by the side of) refers al- most always to place: Er faß neben ſeinem Bruder, He sat near (next to) his brother. Er ſetzte ſidy neben ſeinen Bruder, IIe seated himself near his brother. Rem. When both objects are in motion, in eben governs the dative and the adverb her is added (see Hinter, $ 247): Der Bediente ging niebeit Dem The seryant went along at the side Wagen her, of the wagon. $ 250. Ueber (over, above, across) refers primarily to place: Wir gingen über die Briide, We went over the bridge. Der Stnabe hat ſeinen Ball über das The boy has thrown his ball over Haus in den Garten geworfen, the house into the garden. Das Gemälde hängt iiber der The painting is hanging over the Thüre, door. Rem. 1. With the dative case über denotes position above an object, without coming in contact with it; with the accusative, it denotes motion over or across an object, either with or without contact with it. Rem. 2. Ueber may also signify beyond, or the other side of: Iteber dem Meere, Beyond the sea. Das geht über ſeine Kräfte, That is beyond his strength. Heute iiber acht Tage, A week (eight days) from to-day. Rem. 3. Uever signifies also by way of (via): Wir ſind von Paris iiber Köln und We came from Paris by way of Co- Hannover gekommen, logne and Hanover. Idy habe den Brief iiber Bremen I sent the letter by way of Bremen. geſdrickt, $ 251, 252.] - CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS391 . Rem. 4. Ueber is in many cases used before the object to which a feeling or sentiment is directed : Aue ladjen über ſeine Eiteiteit, All laugh at his vanity. Er iſt böſe über irgend Etwas, He is angry at something or other. Rem. 5. Ueber (M.-G., über ; 0.-G., uban; Gothic, ufar) is derived from the same root as ob (in Gothic, ufzup), see § 231 : $ 251. Unter (under, below, beneath) refers primarily to Wir ſaßen unter dem Baume, We were sitting under the tree. Wir ſetzten uns unter den Bauin, We seated ourselves under the tree. Rem. 1. Unter is also used in many figurative expressions, as in those indicating submission or subjection to superior authority : Das land war damals unter The land was at that time under Fremdherrſdaft, foreign sway. Inter ſoldhen Bedingungen, Under (upon) such conditions. Rem. 2. In expressions relating to time, unter usually signifies during: Es war unter der Regierung It was during the reign of Frederick the Great. Rem. 3. Unter frequently signifies among, between: Idy ſaß unter den Zuſdauern, I sat among the spectators. Idy redine ihn unter meine Freunde, I count him among my friends. Rem. 4. Unter (M.-G., under ; 0.-G., and Gothic, undan) is probably allied to the Latin inter, and the Sanscrit antar=anong. $ 252. Vor (before, in front of, in the presence of, ante- cedent to): Er ſtand vor dem Hauſe, Hewas standing in front of the house. Er erſdien vor dem Nidter, IIe appeared before the judge. Er kam vor Sonnenaufgang, IIe came before sunrisc. Rem. 1. Vor is rarely used with the accusative, except with its primary signification which refers to space (1. e., before, in front of ): Er trat vor ſeinen Richter, He took his place before the judge. Rem. 2. Vor is frequently used (with the dative) in expressing the cause of a feeling or action: Sie weinte vor Freude, She wept from joy. Er zitterte vor Angſt, He trembled from ſear. Ren. 3. Vor and file formerly had the same signification. In the Lower- German dialects vor is yet used to a great extent for fü r. 392 [$ 253, 254. THE PREPOSITION. § 253. Zwiſden (between, betwixt, in the inidst of): Belgien liegt zwiſchen Frankreid) Belgium lies between France and und Deutſd)land, Germany. Er kam zwiſchen neun und zehn He arrived between nine and ten Uhr Des Morgens an, o'clock in the morning. ,,Der Feind jäete Unkraut zwiſchen The enemy sowed tares in (the midst den Weizen," of) the wheat. Rem. Zwiſchen is a contraction from the Middle-German en-zwischen (0.-G., in zwisken, which is from the O.-G. adj. zui-ise=zweifad)=twofold). Obs. The following verses contain the propositions that govern the dative and accusative cases : An den Mond. Auf Dich blicket, auf Dir weilet oft mein Aug’ in füßer Luſt; An Dir haft' ich, an Didy ſend' id) mand, Gefühl aus froyer Bruſt! Jn Dich ſeßet, in Dir findet meine Phantaſie viel Scenen, linter die ſie gern ſid, träumet, unter denen dort die ſchönen Seelen, über dieſe Erd' erhöhet, über Gräbern wandeln. Bor mid tritt dann, vor mir ſteht dann der Entſdluß recht gut zu Handeln. Zwiſden dieſen Sträuchen ſilz' idy, zwiſchen ſie ſtiehlt ſich Dein Strall. Neben midh ſinkt, neben mir rulyt ſie, die Freundin meiner Wahl; Hinter midi ſtil Hingeſdyliden, ſtand ſie ladjend hinter mir, ind wir reden von den Sternen, unſren Lieben und von Dir. 6. Remarks upon Prepositions. (Bemerkungen über die Vorwörter.) § 254. The following is an alphabetical list of prep- ositions, with their primary meanings and the cases they govern: An (acc. and dat.), on, at. gegenüber (dat.), opposite to. anſtatt (see ſtatt). halb, halben, or halber (yen.), in be- auf (acc. and dat.), on, upon. half of. aus (dat.), out, out of. hinter (acc.), behind. außer (dat.), outside of. in (acc. and dat.), in, into. außerhalb (gen.), outside of. innerhalb (gen.), inside of. bei (dat.), near, by. jenſeit (gen.), on the other side of. binnen (dat.), within. fraft (gen.), by the power of. bis (acc.), until. längs (gen. and dat.), along. diesſeit (gen.), on this side of. laut (gen.), by the wording of. durdy (acc.), through. mit (dat.), with. entgegen (dat.), against. mittels, mitteľſt (gen.), by the entlang (see längs). means of. für (acc.), for. nady (dat.), after. gegen (acc.), against. neben (acc. and dat.), near. 255-257.]. REMARKS UPON PREPOSITIONS. 393 nebſt (dat.), together with. unter (acc. and dat.), under. Ob (dat.), over. unterhalb (gen.), on the under side of. oberhalb (gen.), on the upper side. unweit (gen.), not far from. ohne (acc.), without. vermittels, verniitteiſt (see mittels). ſammt (dat.), together with. vermöge (gen.), by means of. feit (dat.), since. von (dat.), from. ſonder (acc.), without. vor (acc. and dat.), before. ſtatt (gen.), instead of. während (gen.), during. trotz (gen. and dat.), in spite of. wegen (gen.), on account of. über (acc. and dat.), over. wider (acc.), against. um (acc.), around. zu (dat.), to. um-willen (gen.), for the sake of. zufolge (gen. and dat.), according to. unbeſdiabet (gen.), without injur- zunädiſt (dat.), next to. unfern (gen.), not far from. [ing. Zuwider (dat.), against. ungeađitet (gen.), notwithstanding. zwiſdyen (acc, and dat.), between. $ 255. With the following exceptions all prepositions precede the nouns they govern: Exc. 1. Halb (1) alber, halben), and 3 u wider always follow the noun. Exc. 2. Entgegen, gegenüber, and 3 u n ä dyſt usually follow the noun. Exc. 3. Gemäß: n ady, ungeady tet, wegen, and 3 ufolge may pre- cede or follow the noun. Rem. When zufolge follows the noun, the noun is put in the dative case. Exc. 4. The noun stands between the two parts of u m-wille 11. $ 256. In German, as in English, many adverbs of time and place may be used as indeclinable substantives, and may be preceded by prepositions: Es iſt nicht weit von hier, It is not far from here. Von da an, From that time forward. Er iſt auf heute verſagt, He is engaged for to-day. [morrow. Bon geſtern Vis iibermorgeit, From 'yesterday till day after to- $257. Some prepositions may govern an entire subor- dinate sentence (instead of a single word); when thus used, they have rather the character of conjunctions than of prepositions: Er ging weg, ohne uns etwas das He went away, without saying any- von zu ſagen, thing about that. Er geſtand Alles, außer wer ſeine He confessed everything, with the ex- Mitſduldigen ſeient, ception of who his accomplices were. Er Yobte midy, ſtatt mid) zu tadeln, He praised me instead of blaming me. R2 394 (S 258–260. THE CONJUNCTION. $ 258. Many of the idiomatic differences between the English and the German languages are owing to the fact that many verbs, adjectives, and nouns are con- ceived in such different ways as to require different prepositions after them in completing predications: Idy glaube an einen Gott, I believe in one God. Er iſt reidy an Gütern, aber arm He is rich in landed estates, but an baarem Serbe, poor in ready money. Ein Mangel-an Gers, A lack of money. Der Gefangene iſt ſtolz auf ſeine The prisoner is proud of his inno- Unſduld, cence. Er iſt ſehr begierig auf Abenteuer, He is very desirous of aclventures. Was wiró aus ihm werden! What will become of him ? Idy bin ganz erſtaunt über ſein I am quite astonished at his be- Betragen, havior. Er iſt groß von Geſtalt, He is large in size. THE CONJUNCTION. (Das Bindewort.) $ 259. Only a few Conjunctions are primitive words, as: und, and (M.-G., unt, unde; 0.-G., endi, enti, anti; Anglo-Saxon, and). Aber, but (M.-G., aber, afer ; 0.-G., afur, afar ; Goth., afar [from af=ab]). Oder, or (M.-G., oder; 0.-G., odar; Goth., aíththáu). Rem. Of a few conjunctions the origin is "no longer felt” ($ 49, 2), as : Weder, neither (from M.-G., en-wëder, ne-wëder=not of the two; the * negative particle ne has been dropped). Entweder, either (M.-G., einturēder, froni ein-de-wëder=one of the two). $ 260. Almost all conjunctions are, (1) either adverbs or prepositions, used as conjunctions: or (2), deriva- tives and compounds of adverbs and prepositions with each other or with nouns or pronouns: Da er nicht fertig war, muſte er As he was not ready, we had to go allein gehen, alone. Während Sie refen, werde id) While you are reading, I will write. ſdhreiben, Er ging nadh der Stadt, nadident He went to the city after he had er den Brief geſdyrieben hatte, written a letter. Idy fand ihn nidit, obgleid, ich ihn I did not find him, although I look- range ſudite, ed for him a long time. $ 261.] 395 THE CONJUNCTION. Rem. From the fact that they serve also to connect subordinate with main sentences, relative pronouns may also be considered as conjunctions : Wo iſt das Budy, weldies Sie heute Where is the book which you bought Morgen gekauft haben, this morning. $ 261. The most important Conjunctions are the fol- lowing: Aber, but. mithin, consequently. allein, but. nachdem, after. als, as, then, when. niditsbeſtoweniger, nevertheless. als ow, as though. nur, but, only. alſo, consequently. nun, therefore. audy, also. ob, whether, if. auf daß, in order that. obgleid) (obſdon, obwohl), al- außerdem, moreover, ohne, except. [though, though. bevor, before. ſeit, since. bis, until. ſeitdem, since. da, since. dhngeachtet, notwithstanding. Daher, therefore. fo, thus, therefore, if. dagegen, on the contrary. ſobald als, as soon as. damit, in order that. ſonſt, otherwise. Darunı, therefore. überdies, besides. Daß, that, in order that. übrigens, furthermore. benin, for, because. ungeachtet, notwithstanding. Dennocy, notwithstanding. um, in order (to). Deshalb, therefore. vielmehr, rather. deſſenungeadytet, nevertheless. während, while. deswegen, therefore. wann, when. Dod), yet, still. weil, because ehe, before. wenn, when, if. falls, in case that. wenn audy, although. ferner, further. wenngleid), although. folglich, consequently. wenn djon, although. gleidjwohl, however, yet. wie, as, when. hingegen, on the contrary. wiewohl, although. indem, while, because. wo, where, when. indeſſen, however, yet. wofernt, in case that. je nachdem, according as. zu bem, besides. jedody, however. zwar, indeed. Rein. The most important corresponding conjunctions are the following: bard—bald, sometimes--sometimes. um 10,) Defto, & the-the. je je, entweder-oder, nicht-fondern, either-or. not-but. 396 ($ 263. THE CONJUNCTION. nid)tvielmeyr, not-but rather. nicht nur- nicht allein, ſondern audy, not only—but also. nicht bloß- ! dogleidi-o dod), although-still. ſowohl-als, as well—as. theils—theils, partly--partly. weber-nod), neither-nor. wie-ſo, as-so. $ 263. Conjunctions may be divided, with reference to the grammatical office they perform in connecting sentences, into two classes : 1. Co-ordinative Conjunctions, which are used to con- nect equally independent sentences: 1. The following seven co-ordinative conjunctions cause no alteration in the position of the verb in the sentence: Und, aber, ſondern, ſowohl-als. oder, allein, denn, Wir gingen nach Halle, und von We went to Halle, and from there da gingen wir nady Leipzig, we went to Leipzic. Wir gingen nicht nady Prag, ſon: We did not go to Prague, but we dern wir gingen niad) Münden, went to Munich. Rem. Aber, however, may also be placed after the subject, or after the verb: Der Vater aber ſpradi- But the father spoke- Der Strauſ hat Flügel, er kann The ostrich has wings, but he can aber nicht fliegen, not fly. 2. The following co-ordinative conjunctions are usually placed at the be- ginning of the sentence or clause; when so placed they cause the subject to fol- low the verb in simple tenses, and to follow the auxiliary in compound tenses (see $ 280): Alſo, beswegen, jedodi, audy, (je)-deſto, mithin, außerdem, (deſto)—beſto, nidhtsdeſtoweniger, bald—bald, body, nody, bagegeit, entweder, nidit nur, ) daher, falls, nidit alleint, Daruni, fernier, nicht bloß, Demnad), folglich, nur, dennody, gleichwohl, ohngeadytet, deſfenungeachtet, theils-theils, Deshalb, indeſſen, überdies, Desgleichen, inſofern, übrigens, hingegen, $ 263.] 397 TIIE CONJUNCTION. ob, weil, wenn, banit, wo, vielmehr, (wie)-10, zubern, während, (weder)--nod), zwar. Die Sonne (djeint, daher iſt es The sun shines, therefore it is so hot. ſo heiß, Saum hatte er das geſagt, Scarcely had he said that, 2. Subordinative Conjunctions, which are used to con- nect subordinate to principal sentences; they cause the verb to be placed at the end of the subordinate sen- tence: AIS, je nadidem, ungeadytet, als ob, nadidem, während, nunt, wann, bevor, bis, obgleidy, obſdyon, wenn nidit, obwohl, wenn aud), daß, ſeit, wie, feitdem, wiewohl, faưs, ſobald als, ſo oft als, woferni, inden, ſo lange als, zwar. Es war ſchon ſehr ſpät, als id) nad) It was already very late when I Hauſe kam, came home. Rem. 1. In subordinate sentences the auxilaries of compound tenses and the simple tenses of the potential verbs are placed after the main verb: Ehe wir nad) Hauſe gekom met Before we had come home, it had wareit, hatte es fdyon angefangen already begun to rain. zu regnen, Rem. 2. When the compound tenses of the potential verbs are used in sub- ordinate sentences, the auxiliary of these verbs is placed between the nomi- native and the infinitive of the main verb (see $ 131, Rem. 2, and $ ): Er ſagt, daß er es nidit hat fin- IIe said that he had not been able Den fönnen, to find it. Rem. 3. When daß is omitted, the natural order of the words is preserved : Idy glaube er iſt nod) nid)t angc- I think that he has not arrived yet. tommen, Rem. 4. If wenn is omitted, the order of words in the subordinate sentence is the same as in interrogative sentences (see § ): Wenn ich die Zeit dazu hätte (or If I had the time (or had I the time), hätte id; die Zeit dazu), ſo würde I would like very much to go to idy ſehr gern mit Ihnen heute Potsdam with you to-day. nach Potsdam gehen, 398 [264-266. THE CONJUNCTION. Remarks upon Conjunctions, (Bemerkungen über die Bindewörter.) Obs. The number of words that perform the office of conjunctions is very large, and their correct use must be learned mostly by practice. We give below remarks upon the signification and use of some of those which the English-speaking person would be most apt to use erroneously. $ 264. Ind (and) is employed almost entirely as in English: Der Vater und der Sohn, The father and the son. · Rem. In a few cases, however, the German idiom does not permit the direct translation of and by und, as: How can you go out and not take Wie können Sie ausgehen, ohne him with you? ihn mitzunehmeit. He became better and better, Er wurde i min er beſſer. It became hotter and hotter, Es wurde immer Heißer. $ 265. Aber, allein, ſondern, vielmehr (but): Rem. 1. Allein indicates a contradiction, in some degree, to the statement in the preceding sentence, or of the consequences which might follow from it; aber simply indicates something different from the preceding statement; aber can always be used instead of allein, but allein can not always be used instead of a ber : Ich hoffte es, allein (or aber) id) I hoped for it, but I found myself fand midy getäuſdyt, mistaken. Rem. 2. Sondern is only used after a negative sentence; it indicates that the second sentence corrects an error in the first; aber is used (after nega- tive sentences eren) when no contradiction exists between the two sentences: Er befiehlt es nicht, fondern er He does not order it, but he de- wünidit es, i sires it. Er befiehlt es (zwar) nid)t, aber He does not order it (it is true), but er wünſdit es, he desires it. Rem. 3. Vielmehr is closely allied in signification and use to ſon derni, but is often more emphatic or definite in meaning : Fdy fürchte ihn nid)t, vielmehr vers I do not fear him, but rather I despise him. $ 266. Als, wie, wenn, wann, are used as follows: 1. As an adverbial conjunction, als (when) refers only to past time : Als wir in Berlin ankameni, war Mr. Kraft had already left for Dres- Herr Kraft ſdon nad Dresden den when we arrived in Berlin. $ 266.) 399 THE CONJUNCTION. Rem. 1. U18 (than) is used after the comparative degree of adjectives or adverbs: Heute iſt das Wetter milder To-day the weather is milder than als es geſternt war, it was yesterday. Ren. 2. Als Daß (preceded by z u) gives a negative signification to the subordinate sentence which it introduces : Er iſt 3 u klug als daß er an Ge- He is too intelligent to believe in ſpenſter glauben ſollte, ghosts. Rem. 3. After a negation or an expression equivalent to a negation, als signifies except: Nidi të nennt er ſein, als ſeinen He calls nothing his own, except his Nittermantel (Sd.), knightly mantle. Wer ſonſt iſt Schuld daran, als Who else is to blame for it, except Shr in Wien? (Sch.) you in Vienna ? Rem. 4. U18 is often used interchangeably with wie, as (see No. 2, below). Rem. 5. Als is often followed by o B or wenn: Er ſieht aus als ob er frank ſei, He looks as though he is sick. Er ſieht aus als wenn er frank He looks as though he were sick. wäre, 2. Wie (as), preceded by ſo, is used in comparing to- gether two adjectives or adverbs in the positive degree: Heute iſt das Wetter nidit ſo heiß The weather is not so hot to-day wie es geſtern war, as it was yesterday. Rem. 1. In German, as in English, ſo (as) is often omitted : „Sci flug wie die Sd/langert, und "Be wise as serpents and harmless. oline falſd wic die Tauben," as dores." Rem. 2. A18 is often used instead of wie: Es iſt eben ſo heiß als (or wie) es It is just as hot as it was yesterday. geſterit war, Rem. 3. Used as an adverbial conjunction, wie signifies “how," as: Idy weiß wirklicy nid)t, wie ich das I really do not know how to do madjen foll, that. 3. Wann (when) refers to time past, present, or future; it is only used as a conjunction in introducing indirect questions: dh weiß nodi nidit, wann wir ab- I do not know yet when we will reiſen werden, leave. 400 [$ 267. THE CONJUNCTION. 4. Wenit (when), when referring to time, applies only to indefinite time: Wir fahren zu Berg, We go to the mountains, we return Wir kommen wieder, again, when the cuckoo calls, Wenn der Sukuk ruft, when the songs awaken. Wenn erwadien die Lieber (Sd).), Rem. Wenn is more generally used in hypothetical sentences, signifying of: Wenn die Slod ſoll auferſtehen, If the bell is to come forth, the Muß die Form in Stüde gehen (Sc.) mould must be broken to pieces. § 267. Damit, um zit, auf daß (in order that, in order to): Rem. 1. Damit, originally an adverb (signifying therewith), when used as a conjunction, usually refers to the means of accomplishing a purpose : Id beſtrafe iſjn, damit er fidbef- I punish him, that he may become jere, better (by it). Ren. 2. When especial emphasis is to be laid upon the causal relation of Damit, darum is often placed at the opening of the main sentence, which precedes the subordinate sentence: Darunt eben leiht er seinein, Just for that reason does he lend to Damit er ſtets zu geben habe (Leff.) nobody, that he may always have something to give. Rem. 3. Damit nid)t frequently signifies lest or that not : Idy ſage dir es nodymais, damit I say it to you once more, lest you Du es nidyt vergiſſeſt, , should forget it. Rem. 4. Auf baß is now rather antiquated : „Ehre Vater und Mutter, auf daß "Honor thy father and thy mother, es dir wohl gehe auf Erden," that it may be well with thee in the land. Rem. 5. The single conjunction daß is frequently used for a uf Daß: Bleibt nidht in England, daß der Do not remain in England, that the Brite nicht ſein ſtolzes Herz an Briton may not feast his proud Eurem Unglitc weide (Sd.), heart upon thy misfortune. Rem. 6. When a shorter expression is desired, int—zu (with an infinitive) is frequently used instead of a uf daß : Idi beſtrafe ilyn, am ilyn zu beffern. I punish him to make him better. Rem. 7. Um zu is also used after an adjective or adverb preceded by zu: Er iſt zu edel, um ſid) zu rädsen, He is too noble minded to avenge himself. · § 268, 269.] 401 TIIE CONJUNCTION. $ 268. Obgleid), obſchon, obwohl, wenngleich, wenn ſdon, wenn aud (though, although): Rem. 1. When the subordinate sentence precedes the main sentence, the latter is usually introduced by ſo, followed by dod or dennoch (still): Qualeich der Lehrer im Ganzen zu- Although the teacher was upon the frieden war, ſo war dod man whole satisfied, still there were djes Einzelne zu tadeln, many things to be found fault with. fd) weiß es, obgleid (or obwohl) I know it, though no one of you in- Steiner von Ihnen midy davoni formed me of it. benadrid,tigt hat, Rem. 2. 06-greidy and wenn greidy often take a pronoun or other monosyllabic word between their parts: Ob id) gleidh geſagt habe- Although I have said, Rem. 3. Wenn-audy often signifies even if; the two words are often separated, or reversed: Der Verſud) war nody immer reid)- The attempt was still richly re- lid, belohnt, wenn aud nur ein warded, even if only a part of the Theil des Verſpredjens erfüllt promise was fullfilled. wurde (Sd.), Das konnte geſdjeljent, and, wenn That might hare taken place, even. Guſtav Adolf 2c. (Sd.), if Gustavus Adolphus, etc. (but) Wenit er auch alt iſt, ſo iſt Dodi Although he is old, still his spirit is fein Geiſt jugendlid), youthful. $ 269. Daher, darum, deshalb, deswegen, alſo, folglid), demnad), mithin (consequcntly, therefore) : Rem. 1. Daher has reference rather to the physical cause : Der Sdinee iſt auf den Gebirgert The snow has melted upon the geſchmolzen; daher ſind die mountains; therefore the rivers Flüſſe angeſ(wollen, have risen. Rem. 2. Darum, deskall, deswegen1, refer more to the moral than to the physical cause: Es gefiel ihm nid)t mehr unter den He no longer enjoyed human so- Mendjen, daher (or deswegeni) ciety, therefore he retired to sol- zog er ſich in die Einſamkeit zu itude. rüd, Er iſt zu leidytſinnig, deshalb kann He is too trivial, therefore I can id gar nicht mit ihin zufrieden not be at all pleased with him. fein, Rem. 3. Darum is used in a most general way, to indicate a physical, moral, or logical cause: Es iſt ſdönes Wetter ; darum It is fine weather, therefore I will gehe id) ſpazieren, go and take a walk. THE CONJUNCTION. [$ 269-271. Obs. Darum is sometimes contracted into Drum: Eine Durdılaudytigkeit läßt er ſidy He has himself called "his Excel- nennen; druiit muß er Soldas lency," therefore he must be able ten halten können (Sch.), to have his soldiers. Rem. 4. Alſo, folglich, demnadı, mithin, indicate rather a logical conse- quence: Er hat es ſelbſt gethan, und kann He did it himself, therefore he can alſo Niemand tabeln, blame nobody. Wir ſind Menſden, folglich ſind We are men, therefore we are mor- wir ſterblid), tal. Obs. 1. Demnadi (dem nach) is frequently equivalent to according to that: Er iſt geſtern abgereiſt, uud kann He started yesterday, and may con- dennad heute ankommen, sequently arrive to-day. Obs. 2. Mithin indicates that the consequent is included in or grows nat- urally out of the preceding statement : Mein Bruder kommt heute Abend My brother does not come this even- nidyt, mithin ſind wir allein, ing, so we will be alone. $ 270. Bevor, che (before): Rem. 1. Bevor refers only to time; ehe may also express a preference or choice : Bevor (or che)er die Stadt verließ. Before he left the city. Ehe ich mir das gefallen laſſe, wil Before I put up with that, I will idy lieber auf jeden etwaigen Vor- rather renounce every possible ad- theil verzichten, vantage. Rem. 2. Bevor is now much less used than chc. Rem. 3. The comparative degree eher (sooner) is sometimes placed in the sentence preceding the one containing ehe or bevor: Dir Nid;ts cher zu ſagen, bevor To say nothing to you, before twelve zwölf Tage geſdwunden (find), days are past. Dody eher dylinge Tellus midi And may Tellus swallow me down, hinay, che id; meinen Eis vers rather than that I should break letzte (Sd.), my oath. Rem. 4. Sometimes nidit is added, pleonastically, after che; especially is Man ſoll nid)t früher aufhören, One should not cease before the che die Hände nidit erlalment, liands become weary. $ 271. Falls, im Falle (daß), wofern (in case that, if): Rem. These forms are especially appropriate when their use would prevent an unpleasant repetition of wenn (if ) in the same sentence. Id will's Dir Veiheit, falls Du I will loan it to you, in case that mir's bald wiedergeben kannſt, you can soon return it to me. $ 272-274.] 403 THE CONJUNCTION. § 272. Wo where) is also used referring to time (when): Stennſt du das Land, wo die Zitro- Do you know the land where the nien blühen (G.), citrons bloom? In der Zeit, wo- At the time, when- Rem. Wo was formerly much used instead of wenn ; this signification is now given mostly in rather short and in fixed expressions, as: Wo nidit ; wo ich nicht irre, If not; if I am not mistaken. $ 273. Uebrigens, überdies, zu dem (moreover, besides) : Er iſt für ſein Alter flug, übrigens He is shrewd for his age; moreover, iſt er älter als ſie glauben, he is older than you think. Rem. Neberdics and zu dem are more specific than it brigens. $ 274. Denn, da, indem, weil (because, for, as, since): Rem. 1. Dennt gives rather the explanation of a statement: Iď gehe nicht aus, denn es regnet I do not go out, for (i. e., as you see) fortwährend, it keeps raining continually. Rem. 2. Weil (because) answers to the question warum? (why?): Warum gehen Sie nid)t ans ? Why do you not go out? Weil es fortwälrend regnet, Because it keeps raining continually. Rem. 3. Dein is frequently used to introduce explanatory sentences that are interposed between the words of main sentences : Id vin-Denn warum ſol id) es I hare been—for why shall I deny läugnen—ehr fleißig geweſen, it-very industrious. Rem. 4. Denil (meaning than) is not used now as much after compara- tives as it was formerly; its present use in this signification is rather con- fined to dignified composition : „Meine Sünde iſt größer, denn ſie "My punishment is greater than I mir vergeben werden möge", can bear” (Gen. 4, 13). Rem. 5. Denn is, however, frequently used to prevent the repetition of ald: I'd beſudie ilit jetzt melir als I visit him now more as a friend Freund, denn als Arzt, than as a physician. Rem. 6. Denn is often used expletively, especially in questions: Wer kann es ihnı denit geſagt haben? Who can have told it to him? Obs. Thus used, Denn does not receive an emphatic tone of voice. Rem. 7. Da, though primarily an adverbial conjunction of time (signifying when, (see § 266, 4, and als, $ 263,1]), is sometimes used to express the logical cause, especially when the main sentence contains a question: Da er nidit getommen iſt, muß er As he has not come, he must be frank ſein, sick. Wie kamiet ilyx burddas Waſſer, IIow did you come through the wa- pa body der Strom die Brüde ter, since the stream has carried fortgeführt [G at]? (Sd).) the bridge away? 40+ 18 275. THE INTERJECTION. Rem. 8. Judem, like da, is primarily a conjunction of time; it also is used to express the logical cause : Indem er aber alſo gedadite, ſiehe! But while he was reflecting, behold! da erſdien ilm ein Enger, an angel appeared to him. Ich kann es dir nidit geben, indent I can not give it to you, for I have idy es ihnı fdjon früher verſpro- already promised it before to him. djen Туаре, THE INTERJECTION. (Das Empfindungswort.) $ 275. Among the principal interjections, or words used as such, are the following: - 1. Of joy, as: al !-al-eil-judi (judiye ! Heiſa l or Hoci !)=hurrah! 2. Of sorrow, as: adj 1-well or o well !=alas!—leider l=unfortunately! 3. Of astonishment, as: adı !-all-ih l-hola 1-Potstauſend ! 4. Of laughter, as: Haha! 5. Of aversion, as : pfui ! (pfu’-i)=pshaw !—fie!=fie! Rem. 1. The word ſo ! is used in a great variety of connections, as, for ex- ample, to indicate astonishment, inquiry, assent, or satisfaction. Rem. 2. Many words that belong to other parts of speech are frequently used with the force of interjections, as : Gut! good! Wohlan! be of good courage! Heil I hail! Gottlob ! God be praised ! Vorwärts I forward ! Gott bewahre ! God forbid ! Halt 1 halt! stop! Adieu ! Good-by! Rem. 3. The interjections heil I and wohl l and others, are followed by the dative case, as: Wohl (jei) ihm! May it be well with him! Heil (ſei or werde) bir Hail to thee! Rem. 4. Some interjections may be followed by the genitive case, as : Oh, des Thoren ! Oh, the fool! Pfui, der Sđande ! Pshaw! the shame! Rem. 5. Sometimes the genitive is replaced by the preposition über, as : Pfui, iber die Schande! Pshaw! for shame! Rem. 6. As most interjections are elliptical expressions, some of them. may be followed by a noun in either of the cases, as : 2, Thor ! 0, der Thor! Oh, the fool! O, dem Thoren (kann es nid)t ſchaden)! 6 66 " D, den Thoren (fenine id)! 66 66 66 $ 276–278.] 405 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. (Die Wortfolge.) $ 276. In nothing is the genius of a language more strongly manifest than in the arrangement of words in sentences. The two following are among the most prominent characteristics of the German sentence : 1. The order of words in main sentences differs from that in subordinate sentences : Er iſt krank, IIe is sick. Er fann nid)t ausgehen, weil er He can not go out, because he is frankiſt, sick. 2. There is a marked tendency to present the sentence as a unit—that is, with the modifying and limiting words and clauses enclosed between the copula and predicate in main sentences, and between the subject and copula in subor- dinate sentences: Herr Weiß hat ſeinem älteſten Mr. Weiss has to-day given to his Sohn, Wilhelm, die letzte Äus- son William the last edition of the gabe der Deutſdien Literatur-Oes History of the German Literature ſdhidite von Heinrid) Sturz, heute, by Heinrich Kurz, as a Christmas als Weihnaditsgeſdient)gegeven, present. Wir wollten geſternt nad Potsdam We wished to go to Potsdam yester- gehen, weil das Wetter (für dieſe day, because the weather was so Jahreszeit ſo ganz außerordent very unusualy beautiful for this lidy ſchön) war, season of the year. $ 277. The essential parts of a sentence aresthe subject, the predicate, and the copula. 1. The subject is the nominative of the verb. 2. The predicate expresses what is affirmed of the subject. 3. The copula is the inflected part of the verb. Rem. The predicate is often included in one word with the copula. § 278. In main indicative sentences the regular order is: (1), the subject; (2), the copula; (3), the predicate. Subject. Copula. Predicate. Subject. Copula. Predicate. Das Wetter iſt leiß, Das Wetter bleibt Heiß, The weather is hot. The weather remains hot. Das Wetter wurde Beiſ, Herr Sèraft iſt ein Deutſcher, The weather became hot. Mr. Kraft is a German. 406 [$ 279. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. I Wir We ait, He sold. EX He Er Subject. Copula. Predicate. 1 Subject. Copula. Predicate. Idy habe geleſen, Das Wetter iſt heiß geweſen, have read. The weather bas hot been. Wir müſſen warten, taben warten müſſen, must wait. We have wait (must). kam Er iſt angekommen, arrived. He has arrived. Die Bögel ſingen, Wir werden geweſen ſein, The birds sing. We shall (been, be). § 279. The object of the verb is placed between the copula and the predicate: Subject. Copula. Object. Predicate. Der Kaufmann hat Das Haus verkauft, The merchant has the house (dyreibt Den Brief ab, copies the letter. (dyreibt den Brief, He writes the letter. Idy habe das Budi geleſeni, have the book read. Rem. 1. The object of a verb, whether direct or indirect, stands between the copula and the predicate (or after the copula when the copula and the predicate are combined into one word): Subject. Copula. Object. Predicate. Er iſt feinem Bruder gefolgt, bas his brother - followed. iſt eines Verbrediens angeklagt worden, has with a crime charged been. Idi habe meinen Freund (um Nath gefragt), I have my friend for advice asked. habent ihr Vorhaben ins Werk geſeft, They have their scheme into execution carried. ſetzten ihr Vorhaben ins Werk, They carried their scheme into execution, Sie hielten Den Dieb They held the thief Obs. In some phrases (as um Nath fragen, ins Werk lezen, feſthalten) the words preceding the verb follow the same laws of position as the prefixes of separable compound verbs. He Sie Sie - le fest, fast. 279, 280.] 407 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. Rem. 2: When there are two nouns governed by a verb, the personal noun takes the precedence: Subject. Copula. Personal noun. Object. Predicate. Der Vater hat ſeinem Sohne ein Budy geſdhenkt, The father has to his son a book given. Der Vater (djenkte ſeinem Sohne ein Budy, The father presented to his son a book. Sie Haben den General des Hodiverraths angeklagt, They have the general with high treason charged. Obs. But when particular emphasis is placed upon the personal noun, it is placed after the noun referring to a thing : Der Vater hat ein Budy ſeinem Sohne geſdenkt. Rem. 3. A personal noun in the accusative precedes one in the dative case: fiďy habe ilren Sohit meinem Freunde empfohlen, I have your son to my friend recommended. Rem. 4. The oblique cases of personal pronouns precede other substantives ·(nouns or pronouns) in the oblique cases : Idi Habe ihm ifren Sohn e mpfohlen, I have to him your son recommended. Idi Habe es ihrem Bruder geſdrict, I have it to your brother sent. Ich habe ihm bas geſagt, I have to him that said. Rem. 5. Of two personal pronouns in different oblique cases, the one in the accusative precedes the one in the dative or genitive case : Fdy habe 18 ilin geſagt, I have it to him Idh ſagte es ilm, - I said it to him. Id werde ilyn Ihnen vorſtellen, I shall him to you introduce. said. $ 280. The subject is placed after the copula in the following cases: 1. In interrogative and exclamatory sentences. 2. With the imperative mood. 3. When an adverb or adverbial conjunction introduces a main sentence. 4. When wen it is omitted (see $ 266, 4). 5. When the predicate introduces a sentence. 408 $ 280.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. er ihr Be soon ihn a sentence." Copula. Subject. Predicate. Iſt der Menſdi ſterblid)? Is man mortal? Haben Sie Das Budy geleſen? Have you the book read ? Scheint die Sonne ? Shines the sun ? Wäre body geſund! Were (only) . well! Seid aufmerkſam! (ye) attentive. Kommen bars wieder! Come (you) again! Hier iſt das Buch, Here is the book. Heute iſt Das Wetter Felir ſdyönt, To-day is the weather very fine. Daher kann idi nidit trauen, Therefore can him not trust. Wäre Das Wetter ſo heiß, Were so hot. (Predicate.) (Object.) war Der Tag, Cold the day Ernſt iſt Earnest is Sterben müſſent Alle, Die must all. Ahtreiben wollen wir verhaßten Zwang, Drive off will we the hated oppression. Geſiegt hat der Mutl, Conquered has bravery. (Object). Copula. Subject. Predicate. Den Mann habe ich nie gekannt, That man have never known. kenne nicht, Him know , I not. nicht not Was life. 证II $ 281.] 409 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. § 281. There is more definiteness in the position of adverbs and adverbial phrases in' the German than there is in the English language: Rem. 1. Adverbs of manner stand immediately before the predicate (or at the end of the sentence, if the predicate is included in the copula): Subject. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. Sie hat Das Lied vortrefflidy geſungen, She has the song admirably sung. Sie fang Das Lied vortrefflidí, She sang the song admirably. Idi Habe ihn ernſtlid; gewarnt, I have him earnestly warned. 3) Туаре es auf dieſe Weiſe getlan, I hare it in this way done. Rem. 2. Adverbs of time or place precede adverbs of manner : Sie Gat Das Lied geſtern Abend vortrefflid, geſungeni, She has the song yesterday evening admirably · sung. Wir habent in Berlin felir angenehm gelebt, We have in Berlin very agreeably lived. Rem. 3. Adverbs of time usually precede adverbs of place: Wir ſind vor vier Tagen in Berlin angekommen, We have four days ago . in Berlin arrived. Rein. 4. Of two or more adverbs of the same kind, as of time or place, the more particular usually follow the more general: Sie werden morgen Abend um adit. Ulr ankommen, They will to-morrow evening at eight o'clock arrive. Sie hatten in Berlin in Viktoria-Straße Numero 20 gewohnt, They had in Berlin in Victoria-street number twenty resided. Wir können das Budh nirgends im Hauſe findent, We can the book . nowhere in the house find. Ecc. The adverbs of time fdyon (already), n a dy (still), erſt (first) may precede or follow a more definite adverbial expression of time, as : Veute nod), or noch heute ; morgen (don, or fdyon morgen; erſt heute morgen, or heute Morgen erft. Rein. 5. When adverbs have more special reference to a substantive, they usually precede it: Sogar ſeine Gegner erkennen ſeinen Werth an, Eren his opposers recognize his worth. 410 281, 282.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. Rem. 1. This inversion of the subject and copula takes place also when the personal pronoun es is used expletively for the subject : (Es) wird ein Gewitter fom- There will a thunder-storm come. net, (Es) ſind Berbreden began- There have been crimes committed. gen, Rem. 2. It also takes place when a relative sentence precedes a main sen- tence: Wer es iſt, weiß idi nid)t, I do not know who he is. Rem. 3. Sometimes the subject precedes the copula in interrogative and exclamatory sentences : Gott ſei dir gnädig! God be gracious to thee! Er möge glüdlich ſein! May he be happy. man is. dar, § 282. In subordinate sentences the general order is: (1), the subject; (2), the predicate; (3), the copula : Sulject. Predicate. Copula.. Idy weiß, daß Der Menſdy ſterblich iſt, I know that mortal Id begreife nidit, warum er To unzufriedent var. I understand not why he so discontented was. Der Mann, ber ſo frank The man, who so sick was. Der Amerikaner, der Leute anfam, The American, who to-day arrived. Wenn die Sdwarben (jeimwärts ziehen. When the swallows homeward fly. Rem. 1. When the compound tenses of the potential verbs, or of the verbs raſſen, heißen, fehen, hören, lelfen (see $ 131, Rem. 2), are used in subordinate sentences with the infinitive of other verbs, the copula (auxiliary) is placed before the predicate or before the object of the verb: Weil er es nid)t hat thun können, Because he was not able to do it. Dbgleid, id) ilm niđst have a rvci- Although I was not permitted to ten helfen dürfen, help him work. Geringere Bürger, weldie Nidits Citizens from the lower classes, who beſaßeit, was ihnen Vaterland possessed nothing that could make 11110 Herd hätte lieb maden their country and their homes dear können (Sd.), to them. Idy war zu ſehr gewohnt, mid; init I was too much in the habit of oc- mir ſelbſt zu beſchäftigen, als daß cupying myself with my own idy mit Aufmerkſamkeit hätte ein thoughts, to consider a work of art Kunſtwerk betracyten ſollen (G.), with attention. $ 282–284.] 411 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. Rem. For the sake of euphony, the copula is often omitted when the verb in the subordinate sentence is in the perfect or pluperfect tense: Ich verlor nid)t Alles, da foldier I did not lose all, as such a friend Freund im Unglück mir geblie- has remained to me in my misfor- ben [iſt](Sc.), tune. Was war mein Dank dafür, daß What was the reward to me, that I, idy, ein treuer Fürſtenfnedit, Deit a true servant of the prince, who Völkerfluch auf midy gebürdet had drawn upon myself the curse [hatte], dieſen Srieg, der nur ilit of the people, had made the princes groß gemadit (hat], die Fürſten pay for the war which has made [habe] zahlen laſſen ? (Sd).) him alone great ? $ 283. Attributive adjectives usually precede the noun they qualify: Der gute Mann, The good man. Rem. 1. Very long attributive adjective clauses are frequently employed in the German language; these are usually translated into English by subordi- nate relative sentences : Ein (der Deutſden Spradie voll- A foreigner (who is) well acquainted kommen kundiger) Frenider, with the German language. Die (Dent Stranken ſehr Heilſame) The medicine that is very beneficial Arznei, to the sick man. Rem. 2. Sometimes the attributive adjective is placed, as for the sake of emphasis, after the noun which it qualifies : Niemand als Du, ſoll dieſen Krieg, Nobody but yourself shall end this den fürd terlidheit, enden (Sd.), fearful war. Rem. 3. For the sake of euphony, the attributive adjective clause may be placed, as in English, after the noun it qualifies ; in this case the attributive adjective is not inflected ($ 84, Less. XVIII, 1): Audy manden Mann, Also many a man and many a hero, Und manden Held, good in peace, and strong in war, Im Frieden gut was born in the Swabian land. Und ſtark im Feld, Gebar das Sdiwabenland (Sdı.), 8 284. For the prepositions that follow the substantive, instead of preceding it, see $ 255. Part Fourth; CONTAINING VOCABULARIES. I. PERSONAL PROPER NAMES. Rem. 1. In this list are included only the most usual of such names as have different forms or different pronunciation in the German and English lan- guages. Rem. 2. A few proper names from the Greek, Latin, and Hebrew languages are also added. The final syllable is dropped from many Latin and Greek proper names. A'delbert, (gen.--8), m., Ethelbert. Eliſa, —8, or Eli'ſe, —118, f., Eliza. Ade'le or Adeli'ne, —8,8., Adeline. Emil, -8, m., Emilius, Emil. A'Delheit, -8, f., Adelaide. Emi'lie, —118, f., Emily. Adolf or A'dolph, —8, m., Adolphus. Epitur', -8, in., Epicurus. Aestulap',-8, m., Esculapius. Epifurä'er, -, m., Epicurean. Aeſop', —8, m., Esop. epifurä'iſd), adj., Epicurean. Aga'the, —18, f., Agathe. | Ernſt, —ens, m., Ernest. Agʻnes, ~, f., Agnes. Eugen', --8, m., Eugene. A'laridy, —8, M., Alaric. Suge'nie, —113, f., Eugenie. Albert or Albredit, ~8, m., Albert. E'va, —8, f., Ere or Eva. Ale’ris, 46, or A'ler, -218, f., Alice. / Flo'rcnz, —cns, m., Florence. Alfonſo,-8, m. Alphonso. Floren'tia, —8, f., Florence. Ana’lie, -118, f., Amelia. Franz, -ens, m., Francis. Andre'as, -, m., Andrei. Franzis’ta, -8, f., Frances. Fried'rid), -8, 11., Frederick. An'ne, -118,5 Ga'nymed, -, in., Ganymede. An'ton, —8, m., Anthony. Ge’org, -6, M., George. Auguſt, —8, m., Augustus. Ger' hard, —8, m., Gerhard. (trude. Augu'ſte, -118, f., Augusta. Ger'trauð or Ger'trud, —8, f., Ger- Bal'duin, -, m., Baldwin. Go'liatſ), —8, m., Goliath. Beliſar', —8, m., Belisarius. Gottfried, 48, m., Godfrey. Blan'ka, -8,f., Blanche. [face. Gotthard,-8, n., Godard. Bonifaz', -ens, or —ius, m., Boni- Gottlieb, 38, m., Theophilus. Bourboʻnen, pl., Bourbons. Gre'gor, 48, m., Gregory. Brigit'te, -ens, f., Bridget. gregoria'niſd), adj., Gregorian. Calvin,-B, m., Calvin. Gui'bo, -8, m., Guy. Charlotte, -18, f., Charlotte. Gu'ſtav, —8, m., Gustavus. Clod'wig, —8, m., Clovis. Van'ne, -18, f., Jane. Chri'ſtus, -i, m., Christ. Hans, -ens, M., John. Cle'niens, —, M., Clement. Hedwig, —8, f., Edwiga. Dionys', -, m., Dionysius, Dennis. Hein'rid), —8, m., Henry. [Helena. Dorothea, —8, 1 f.Dorothy. Here'ne, -118, or Helena, -8, f., Helen, Dorothee', -18,1° Heliodor', -8, m., Heliodorus. Eberhard,-, m., Eberhard. Henriet'te, -18, f., Henrietta, Harriet E'duard, —8, m., Edward. Her'mann, --8, m., Herman. Eleonoʻre, --118, f., Eleonora. Hero'bes, --, m., Herod. Eli'as, —, ., Elisha. | Herodot, -8, m., Herodotus. An'na, -, ! f. Ann, Anna. 416 PERSONAL PROPER NAMES. Hi’ob, —8, m., Job. Homer', -3, ., Homer. home'riſdy (adj.), Homeric. Horaz', -, m., Horace. Hum'frieb, —8, m., Humphry. Innocenz, —ens, m., Innocence. I'faat (I'-fa-at), -, m., Isaac. Iſai'as, —, m., Isaiah. IS'maer, —8, mn., Ishmael. Ja'fob, -, m., Jacob, James. Ja’ſon, -8, m., Jason. Jeremi'as, -, M., Jeremiah. Je'ſus, -, m., Jesus, Fo’ab, —8, m., Joab. Johann',-8, m., John. Johan'na, ~B, f., Joan, Jane. Jo'nas, —, m., Jonah. Fo’ſeph, —8, m., Joseph. Foʻſua, —8, m., Joshua. Ju’lius, - , m., Julius. Ju’lia, --8, f., Julia. Julian', —8, mn., Julian. Juſtinian', -3, m., Justinian. juſtinia'niſdy (adj.), Justinian. Sia'int (ſta'-in), - , m., Cain. Karl, —8, m., Charles. Karl der Große, Charlemagne. Saroli'ne, -18, f, Caroline. Sta'ſtor, —8, m., Castor. Stathari'ne, -118, f., Catharine. le'onhard, —8, m., Leonard. Leono're, —18, f., Leonora. li'vius, -, M., Livy. Loʻrenz, “ens, m., Lawrence. Luci'e, -18, f., Lucy. Lud'wig, —8, n., Lewis, Louis. Lui'ſe, -, f., Louisa. Luſkas, —, M., Luke. Lufrez', -e118, 11., Lucretius. Ma'honcd, -8, m., Mohammed. Mari'a, —8, f., Maria. Mari'e, —118, f., Mary. Mar'tha, -8,f., Martha. Matlil' de, -113, f., Matilda. Matthä'us, --i, mn., Matthew. Mar, —ens, or Marimi'lian, --B, m., Maximilian. Merfur", -3, 1N., Mercury. Methu'ſalem, --$, m., Methusaleh. Mi'chael (Mi'-dja-el),—8, m., Michael. Mo'riz, -ens, m., Maurice. Mo'ſes (gen. Moſis), m., Moses. Moſa'iſd (adj.), Mosaic. Na'than, - , m., Nathan. Nehemi'as, —, M., Nehemiah. Neptun', $, m., Neptune. Ni'lolaus, –, m., Nicholas. 1oooa'cer, -, m., Odoacer, Oreſt', -B, m., Orestes. Dvid', —8, m., Ovid. Paul,--, m., Paul. Pe'ter, —8, m., Peter. Sti'lipp,—8, m., Philip. + Pila'tus, –, m., Pilate. Pli'nius, –, m., Pliny. Pompe’jus, –, m., Pompey. Properz', -ens, m., Propertius. Ra'dhel, -8, f., Rachel. Nai' mund, —8, m., Raymond. Nebet'fa, -8, f., Rebecca. Nu’Dolphy or Nu'dorf, —8, m., Rackph, Nutſ, —8, f., Ruth. [Rudolph. Saʻlomo, -B, m., Solomon. Sebald', -8, m., Sebaldus. Siegʻmund, --8, m., Sigismund. Sim'fon,-, 11., Samson. Sueton', —$, m., Suetonius. Ta'citus, --, 11., Tacitus. Terenz', -ens, m., Terence. The’odor, -8, n., Theodore. There'ſe, —18, f., Theresa. Tho'mas, —, M., Thomas. Ti'tian, ---8, m., Titian. Veit,-, in., Vitus. Virgil, —8, m., Virgil. Walter, -6, m., Walter, Wilhelm, --s, m., William. Wilhelmi'na, —8, f., Wilhelmina. Wolfgang, —8, m., Wolfgang. (Xa'ver, —8, m., Xavier, II. GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. Rem. In this list are given only those names that are most frequently em- ployed, and which differ materially in form and pronunciation from the cor- responding names in English. In many cases the personal nouns and the ad- jectives that are formed from names of places are also given. Na'chen,-, Aix-la-chapelle. [tains. | Berlin', -3, Berlin. [ner. Die Abruzzent, pl., the Abruzzi Moun- Ein Berli'ner, -, pl., a Berli- Abyſſi'nien, -, Abyssinia. [sinian. Berli'niſdy (adj.), of Berlin. [cay. Ein Abyſſi'nier,-8, pl.-, an Abys- (Der Golf von) Biska'ya, Bay of Bis- Abyſſi'niſdi (adj.), Abyssinian. Der Boʻdenſee, —8, Lake of Constance. Das Adria'tiſdie Meer, -8, Adriatic. Bölmen,-8, Bohemia. [mian. A'frika, ~8, Africa. Ein Böh'me, --11, pl. -1, a Bohe- Ein Afrika'ner, -, pl.-, an Afri- Böly'miſd) (adj.), Bohemian. Afrika'niſd) (adj.), African. [can. Der Both'niſdie Meer'buſen, Gulf of Die Al'pen, pl., the Alps. Bothnia. Die Ju’liſchen Alpen, Julian Alps. Braun'ſdyweig, —8, Brunswick. Ame'rika, -—B, America. [American. Brüſſel, --, Brussels. Der Amerika'ner, -8, pl.-, the Burgund',-8, Burgundy. Amerika'niſd) (adj.), American Chi'na, -3, China. Die An’den, pl., the Andes. Ein Chine'ſe, -11, pl. -11, Chinese. Die An'geln, pl., the Angles. [on. Chine'ſiſdy (adj.), Chinese. Die Angelſadiyſen, pl., the Anglo-Sax- Angelſüdjijd) (adj.), Anglo-Saxon. Cy'pern, —8, Cyprus. Antwer'pen, —8, Antwerp. Dü'nemark,-8, Denmark. Die Apenin'nen, pl., the Apennines. Ein Dü'ne, -n, pl. -11, a Dane. Ara’bien, 48, Arabia. Dä’niſdy (adj.), Danish. Ein Ara'ber, -3, pl. -, an Arab. Deutſdı’land, Germany. Ara'biſdy (adj.), Arabian. Ein Deutſcher, a German. X'fieit, —8, Asia. Eine Deut' ſdhe, a German. Ein Aſiať, -en, pl.-en, an Asiatic. Deutſdy (adj.), German. Aſia'tiſd (adj.), Asiatic. Nort'beutídy (adj.), North-German. Affy'rient, —, Assyria. Sid'deutſ) (adj.), South-German. Athen', -8, Athens. Die Do'nau, -, the Danube. Das Atlan'tiſdie Meer, -3, the Atlan-Dres’den, -8, Dresden. Auſtra'lien, -8, Australia. [tic Ocean. Die Dü'nen (pl.), the Downs. Die Azo'riſden Inſeln, pl. the Azores. Dün'firdyeit, -_$, Dunkirk. Das Uzo'viſdje Meer, the sea of Azof. Düſſeldorf, —8, Dusseldorf. Va'den,-8, Baden. Egyp'ten,-8, Egypt. [tian. Bai'ern, —8, Bavaria. Ein Egyp'ter, —8, pl. —, an Egyp- Ein Ba'ier, -11,pl.--N, a Bavarian.' Egyp'tiſd (adj.), Egyptian. Die Bedui'nen, pl., the Bedouins. | Eljaſ, Alsace. Belgien, -8, Belgium. Eng’land, -8, England. [glishman. Berberei', -, Barbary. Ein Engʻländer, —8, pl.-,. an En- Ein Beraber, —8, plog --, a Berber. / Engʻliſdi (adj.), English. 418 GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. Die Etſd), the Adige. Ein Staliä'ner, -S, pl. -, an Ital- Euro'pa,-B, Europa. Italiä'niſdy (adj.), Italian [ian. Ein Europä'er, —8, pl. ~, a Euro- Ja'pan, -B, Japan. [nese. Europä'iſdy (adj.), European.[pean. Ein Japaneſe, -11, pl. -11, a Japa- Flan'dern,-8, Flanders. [of Flanders I japane'ſiſdi (adj.), Japanese. Ein Flam'länder,--s,pl.---, a citizen Judä'a, -3, Judea. Flü'miſd) (adj.), Flemish. Ein fu'de, -11, pl. --11, a Jew. Florenz', Florence. Eine Fü'din,-, pl.--nen, a Jewess. Frankreid), France. [Frenchman. Fü'diſd) (adj.), Jewish. Ein Franzo'ſe, --1, plur. I, a Kärn'then,-8, Carinthia. Eine Franzö'ſin, -, pl. —nen, a Das Sas'piſdie Meer, -—8, the Caspian Franzö'ſiſd), French. [French lady. Kiſſingen, --, Kissingen. [Sea. Gali’zien, - , Galicia. Stobʼlenz, Coblenz. Gal'lien, -8, Gaul. Söln, -8, Cologne. Ge’nua,-8, Genoa. Der Ro'merſee, Lake Como. Geor'gien, -8, Georgia. Kon'ſtanz, Constance. Die Gothen, pl., the Goths. | Stopenha'gen, -8, Copenhagen. Go'tliſd) (adj.), Gothic. Scorintly, -8, Corinth. Grie’djenland, -8, Greece. Train,-8, Carniola. Ein Grie'die, -11,pl. —-11, a Greek. Sra'kau, --B, Cracow. Grie’dyiſd (adj.), Greek. Strim, -, Crimea. Großbrita' nien, -8, Great Britain. Leipzig, -, Leipsic. Großgrie' dienland,-8, Grecia Magna. Li'banon, -8, Lebanon. Der Haag,-8, the Hague. Liſſabon,-8, Lisbon. Habsburg, --B, Hapsburg. Li'thauen, -8, Lithuania. Hamburg, Hamburg. Die Lombardei', -, Lombardy. Hanno'ver, Hanover. - [Hanoverian. Der lo’renzbuſen,-8, Gulf of St. Law- Ein Sjannovera'ner, -8, pl. --, a Lothringen, —8, Lothaire. [rence. Hannovera'niſd), L ., Hanove- Litt'tid), -6, Liege. Hanno'veriſdı, 5 (alg.), rian. Luzern', -, Lucern. Ein Hebrä'er, -, pl. --, a Hebrew. Mäh'rent, -, Moravia. 'Hebrä'iſdy (adj.), Hebrew. | Mai’land, —8, Milan. Holland, -3, Holland. [man. Mainz, Mayence. - Ein Holländer, -,pl.-, a Dutch Maroffo, 8, Morocco. [Moor. Hol'ländiſdy (adj.), Dutch. Ein Marrokka'nier, _B, pl. ~, a Die Hun'nen, pl., the Hunns. Marokka'niſd) (adj.), Moorish. In'dicn,-8, India. [ican) Indian. Die Mark, -, the Mark (of Branden- Ein India'ner,-8,pl.-, an (Amer-| burg). Ein In'dier, --B, pl. ~-, an (East) Mär'fiſd) (adj.), of the Mark. In'diſd) (adj.), Indian. [Indian. Die Mar’ſen (pl.), an ancient people Fr'land, -8, Ireland. of North-Germany, near Ems. Der Fróländer, -6, pl. ~, the Irish- Me'deln, —8, Malines. I'riſd) (adj.), Irish. : [man. Das Mit'telländiſdie Meer, -8, the Jsland, -8, Iceland. Mediterranean See. Sta’lien, --B, Italy. Die Moldau, ---, Moldavia. GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. 419 Die Mol'bau, -, the (river) Moldavia. Ein Sdyot’te, —11, pl. -11, a Scotch- Mo'jel, —, Moselle. Sdjottiſd) (adj.), Scotch. (man. Mos' fau, —8, Moscow. Sdwa'ben, —B, Suabia. [bian. Mün'djen, -B, Munich. Ein Sdwa'be, -11, pl.--11, a Sua- Sdiwä'biſdy (adj.), Suabian. Nea'pel, -8, Naples. Sdywe'den, -S, Sweden. Die Niederlande, pl., the Netherlands. Ein Sdywe'de,—11, pl.—11, a Swedé. Nie’derländiſdi(adj.), of the Nether- Sdwe'diſdy (adj.), Swedish. Nor'wegen, —8, Norway. [lands. Die Sdyweiz, —, Switzerland. Nürn'berg, Nuremberg. Ein Sdyweiʻzer, —8, pl.–, a Swiss. Deſt'errcid), -8, Austria. - Eine Sdyweiʻzerin, --, pl. -11en, a Ein Deſterreidjer, -6, an Austrian. Schwei’zeriſdi (adj.), Swiss. [Swiss. De'ſterreidiiſdy (adj.), Austrian. Sibirien, —8, Siberia. Oſt'gothen, pl., Ostrogoths. Sicilien, —, Sicily. Oſtin'dien, -8, East India. Spanien, —$, Spain. [iard. Paris', Paris. Pelopones', -, Peloponnesus. Spa'niſd) (adj.), Spanish. Per'fien, —8, Persia. • Spei'er, ~B, Spires. Po'len, -8, Poland. Stey’ermarf,-8, Styria. Ein Poʻle, -11, pl., --11, a Pole. Die Tatarci', -, Tartary. Polniſdy (adj.), Polish. Ein Tatar', -8,pl. -eii, a Tartar. Pom'merit, -, Pomerania. The'ben, -8, Thebes. Ein Pom'mer, -8,pl. -11, a Pome-| Die Themi'ſe, —, the Thames. Por'tugal, -8, Portugal. [ranian. Thü'ringen, -8, Thuringia. Ein Portugie'ſe,-1, pl. -11, a Por- Die Tiber, -, the Tiber. tuguese. Das Tyrol', —8, the Tyrol. Portugie'ſiſd (adj.), Portuguese. | Toska'na, -8, Tuscany. Pots'bam, 8, Potsdam. Trient, -8, Trent. Preu'ßent, —8, Prussia. [sian. Trier, —8, Treves. Ein Preu'ße, --11, pl. —1, a Prus Trieſt", -B, Trieste. Preußiſdy (adj.), Prussian. Die Türkei', -, Turkey. Regensburg, -8, Ratisbon. Ein Tür'fe, --11, pl. —11, a Turk. Der Nyein, -8, Rhine. Tür'fiſd) (adj.), Turkish. Das Rie' ſengebirge, -3, the Capathian Ungarn,-8, Hungary. [rian. Nom, B, Rome. [Mountains. Ein Un'gar, --8,pl.-en, a Hunga- Ein Nömer, —8, pl.-, a Roman. Un'gariſch (adj.), Hungariun. Nöʻmiſdy (adj.), Roman, Romish. Die Vanda'len, pl., the Vandals. Nuféland, -8, Russia. Venedig, -8, Venice. [netian. Ein Nuſſe, -11, pl. -11, a Russian. Ein Venezia'nier, —8, pl. -, a Ve- Nuſſiſd (adj.), Russian. Venezia'niſdy (adj.), Venetian. Sad'ſen, -Ø, Saxony. Die Verei'nigten Staa'ten von Ame'- Ein Sady'ſe, -11, pl. -11, a Saxon. rifa, the United States of America. Sädyſiſdy (adj.), Saxon. Virgi'nien, -B, Virginia. Sdile’ſien,-8, Silesia. Dic Walladici', -, Wallachie. Schottland, -3, Scotland. | Weſtgotlen (pl.), Visigoths. 420 ABREVIATIONS. Die Weidy jel, —-, the Vistula. | Wieʼneriſd) (aclj.), Viennese. Weſtfalen, —B, Westphalia. Die Volga, —, the Volga. Wien, -3, Vienna. Worms, Worms, Bormio. Ein Wieʼner, -8,11l. --, a Viennese. IWürtemberg, -6, Wirtemberg. 1 Br. III. ABREVIATIONS. Rem. Abreviations are employed in German to a far greater extent than they are in English. The list below includes only the most usual abbreviations. a. a. D..... ............... am andern Orte............. at the other place. a. a. D..... ................ am angeführten Orte....... at the place mentioned. Abdiii..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... Abſdynitt...................... section. N. D.......................... an der (Oder, etc.) ......... on the (Oder, etc.). a. M., or a/M............ am Maiit ..................... on the Maine. Nim. Anmerkung..................... remark. Aufl., or X18]............ Auflage, or Ausgabe ....... edition. Bd. (Bde.)............ Band (Bände)............... beb....................... bedeutet ....................... signifies. beſ., or beſond............. beſonders ..................... especially. Breite C., Cour. .................... Courant.. ................ currency. Daſ........................... dafelbſt ... ............... there, at that place. f. Gr.. der Große...................... the Great. bgl., or dergl............. bergleidheni .................... the like, such. das heißt ........ ............ that is to say, that is. b. i. ......................... Das iſt ......................... that is. .................... Diskonto... discount. $. I. .............. dieſes Jahres ................. ................ this year. į M., or 08. M3........ dieſes Monats ............... this month (inst.). 8. B. der Verfaſſer ................... the author. f. S., fj., fig. ..... ....... folgend (-er, -2, -28)........ following. Fortſ, F..... .................. Fortſetzung folgt ............ to be continued. franco ............. post-paid. Fr........................ Frai........................... Mrs. Fri............. Fräulein ...................... Miss. ro'or....................... Frederick d'or. [schen. G., Gr.,07 Sgr. ......... Grofdieni,or Silbergrodjen Groschen or Silvergro- gel.......... geleftet ........................ stitched. (name). geſt. .............. geſtorben ...................... dead, late. Holopr. .................... Handelsſpradie. .............. language of commerce. Hptiv. ...................... Hauptwort .................... noun. Hptſt. .................... Hauptſtadt.................... capital. Hr. (HH.)................... Herr (Herren) ............... Mr. (Messrs.) F.... .......... Jahr............................ year. ........... ........... ABREVIATIONS. 421 ....... Falyrly. ....... Fahrhundert ................. century. Staiſ., or Staiſerl. ......... kaiſerlid........................ imperial. Statis. S............ katholiſche Kirdje............. Catholic Church. Sön., or Königl.......... königlid). royal. St. R. ........... ........ kaiſerlidh-königlid) ........... imperial and royal. frz..............er • Sreuzer. reuzer.......................... creuzer. . ........................... Länge. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... longitude (long). lat........................... lateiniſc) ....................... Latin. [(inst.). lauf. Mont. .............. Yaufenden Monats. .......... in the current month life........................... Lieferung ..................... number. Lſtrl......................... Pfund Sterling ............. pound sterling. M. H. (M. H. H.) ...... Mein Herr (Meine Herren) Sir (gentlemen). m. Br. ....................... mittäglidie Breite........... southern latitude. 11. A., or N. And......... nad Andern................... according to others. Ngr. ........................ Neugroſdyen................... New Groschen. N. B. ....................... 11ördlidie Breite ............. northern latitude. No., Nr., Nro. (Nros.) Numero, Nummer (–11)... number (numbers). N. S........ Nadıſdyrift.................... Postscript (P.S.). D. &...... ............. öſtlidie Länge ................. Þf., Þfg. ................ Pfennig ....................... Pfennig. Pfd. ....... Pfund ......................... pound. st. 2.. Doktor der Philoſophie .... Doctor of Philosophy. proteſtantiſd). ................ Protestant. 2. F. ... Quadrat Fuß........ ... ... ... square foot. Q. M. Quadrat Meile.............. square mile. N.................. Neaumur ................... Reaumur. Nab............. Nabatt. ............ ........ abatement, discount. 91....................... Nheiniſd)....................... Rhenish. NtyIr., or rt........... Neidjsthaler .................. Rix dollar. S.(S., or ſ.)............ Seite (fiele). .............. page (see). f. D........... Siehe dieſeś ... ... ... ... ... ... see this (article). 1. g. ........... ſogenannt ..................... so called. Spradie ...................... language. pr. ......................... prid) .......................... pronounce. ſt. ........................... ... ſtarb (ſtatt)................... died (instead o 1. 3. ......................... ſeiner Zeit .................... at time. Thlr., Th1................. Thaler...... Thaler. II. (1.) .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... Uhr (und)..................... o'clock (and). 11. Y.(11. A.)............ unter andern (und andere). among others (ant. 11. N. A. 2. ................ und ait aiderit vrten....... und an andern Orten....... and at other places. 11. a. St. .................. und andern Stellen ......... and other places. 11. Dergl. m. ................ und dergleidjen melyr , and more of the same u. m. Ogr. ............... und mehr dergleidien ) **** kind. u. f. f. ....................... iind fo fernier ) . 11. f. w...................... und ſo weiter 5 ............ and so forth. proteſt. .... S pr........................ 422 MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. V. 3. .......................borigenl Sauro................ last yea v. M. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... vorigen Monats ............. last month (ult.). V. D. ......................... von oben ....................... from above. V. u. ....................... von unten..................... from below. W. .......................... Weſten ......................... west. Zou, (Zeile).......... ()................. inch (line). z. B......................... zum Beiſpiel. ..............., for example. IV. MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. Rem. These vary greatly in the different states of Germany. We give only some of the leading coins, weights, and measures of the principal Ger- man states. 1, Prussian Money (used in North Germany). ¡Gold)............ Ein doppelter Friedrichsd'or=10 Thaler= ............ $7.12 11 ........... Ein Preußiſder Friedridisd'or=5 Thlr. 20 Sgr.= ... 4.20 (Silber).......... Ein Thaler=30 Silbergroſdien=360 Pfennige=...... 71 Ein Silbergroſdjen=12 Pfennige= .......... ......... (Nupfer)......... Ein Sediſer=6 Pfennige= ............. 14 Ein Dreier=3 Pfennige= ................................ Ein Pfennig= . 1 .......... 2. Bavarian Money (used in Southwestern Germany). Golb)............ Ein Dukat=5 Gulden 40 Kreuzer=.... ................$2.26 Silber).......... Ein Vereinsthaler=31 Gulden=2 Preuß. Thaler= 1.42 .......... Ein Zweiguldenſtüd=120 Kreuzer= ......... 82 11 ........ Ein Gulden=60 Kreuzer=....... ......... Ein Halbguldenſtüd=30 Kreuzer=.................... Fer) ......... Ein Kreuzer=4 Heller=........ .......... Ein Heller= .......... ...................... 41 map of thing 3. Austrian Money. Eine Krone=13 Gulden 757 N Kreuzer= .............$6.48 Eine halbe Mrone=6 Gulden 87 NKreuzer= ........ 3.24 Ein Zweiguldenſtüd=200 NKreuzer=.................. 96 Ein Gulden or Florin=100 Nifreuzer= ...... ...... Ein Viertelflorinſtüd=25 Nitreuzer= .................. (Kupfer) ......... Ein Vierfreuzerſtüd=.............. .......... Ein Kreuzer = ..... ! .......... Ein Halbkreuzerſtüd=.... Rem. Vier Preußiſche Thaler=ſieben Bairiſche Gulden=fedhe Deſterreichiſdie Florin=$2.84. ....... ........ 1 Att done to come MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 423 4. German Weights. Ein Zollcentner=100 Zolpfund=50 Kilogrammes = English pounds 98.04 Ein Zollpfund=} Nilogramıne= .......... Ein Preußiſdies fund=32 Loth=468 Grammes = ... " 66 97 Ein Loth=14.6 Grammes = .......... .............. English ounces 48 66 << 5. German Measures. 1. LINEAR MEASURE. Eine deutſche (geographiſ(je) Meile (15 Meilen=1° geo- graphiſde Breite)= ..... .............English miles 4.06 Eine Preußiſde Meile = 24,000 Rheiniſdie Fuß = 5372 Mètres = ..................... 66 66 4.07 Eine Stunde=eine halbe Deutſdje Meile= .................... 66 5 2.03 Eine Ruthe=12 Rheiniſdie Fuß=3.766 Mètres..........English feet 12.36 Ein Rheiniſdier Fuß=12 Zol=313. Millimètres = ......... 66 66 1.03 Ein Zoll=12 Linien=26.2 Millimètres= ......... ..........., English inches 1.03 CS 2. SURFACE MEASURE. Eine Quadratmeile (Preußiſd)=.......... ......... English square miles 21.09 Eine Quadratruthe=144 Quadratfuſ= ........... English square feet 152.67 Ein Morgen in Preußen=180 Quadratruthen; in Baiern=400 Quadrat- ruthen; in Sadijen=2 Ader=150 Quadratruthent.. 3. MEASURE OF CONTENTS. Ein Preußiſches Quart=64 Kubikzol=1.145 Litres= English quarts 1.28 Ein Preußiſdier Eimer=60 Quart=69.1 Litres= ..... English gallons 19.00 Ein Preußiſder Sdieffel=48 Quart=55.38 Litres=.. English bushel 1.92 Eine Metze=7 Scheffer=3 Quart8=3.435 Litres = .. English quarts 3.88 V. CLASSIFIED LIST OF WORDS. Das Weltall. The Universe. Der Gott, ---B, pl. Götter, God, gods. Die Natur', -, Nature. 11 Sdjöp' fer, -3, the Creator. Natür'lidy, natural. [ter. Je'ſus Chri’ſtus, - ti, Jesus Christ. Die Mate'rie, -, der Stoff, -08, mat- Der Hei'lige Geiſt, ---C8, Holy Ghost. Materiell, kör perrid), material. Die Dreiei'nigkeit, ---, the Trinity. Der Atom', --es,pl. --e, atom. Der En'gel, ~8, the angel. 1. Nör'per, -8,pl. --, body. " Teu'fel,-8, devil. Ein fe'ſter Kör’per, a solid body. 11 Him'mel, -8, heaven. Die Fe'ſtigkeit, ---, solidity. Die Hölle, ---, hell. Das Gas, ---es, pl. --e, gas. Das Fe'gefeuer, —8, purgatory. 1 Geſchöpf', -e8,pl. —, creature. 424 LIST OF WORDS. Der Menſdh. 2. Man. Der Mann, —es, pl. Männer, man, Die Frau, -, pl.-en, woman, wife. husband. Mut'ter, —, pl. Mütter, mother. ,, Ba'ter, --S, pl. Vä'ter, father. 1. Tody'ter,—, pl. Tödy'ter, daughter. ,, Sohn, -es, pl. Söhöne, son. , Sdwe’ſter, pl. ~-11, sister. 1. Bru'ber,-8, pl. Brü'der, brother. ,, Tan’te, -, pl. --11, aunt. ,D'heim, —8, pl. —2, uncle. Couſi'ne, -, pl. -1, the cousin. , Better, -8, pl. -11, cousin. 11 Nidj'te, -, pl. -1, niece. Nef'fe, -n, pl. —-11, nephew. , Groß'mutter, grandmother. , Großvater, grandfather. Ur'großmutter, great-grand- ,, Ur'großvater, great-grandfather. mother. ,, En' fel, -8, pl. -, grandson. ,, Enſkelin, -, pl. --nien, grand- Die E’lterit, parents (has no sing.). daughter. Der Sdwie'gervater, father-in-law. 1 Schwie'germutter, mother-in-law. , Sdywie'gerſohn, son-in-law. , Sdywie'gertodíter, daughter-in-. 1 Sdywa'ger, _$, pl. Sdwä'ger, [in-law. brother-in-law. , Sdwägerin,-,pl. --nen, sister- Stief'vater, stepfather. 1 Stiefmutter, stepmother. 1. Stief'ſohn, stepson. l Stief'todyter, stepdaughter. 11 Bräu'tigain, – pl.-, bridegroom.l Braut, -, pl. Bräute, bride. , Witt'wer, —8, widower. I , Witt'we, -, pl. -en, widow. Das Al’ter, —8, old age. | fu'gend, -, youth. Der Greis, --18, pl. -, old man. Der Zwil'ling, -8, pl. —, twice. , Sna'be, -11, pl. -1, boy. | Das Mäd’djen, --8, pl. ~, girl. Die Geburt, —, birth. | Der Tod, -68, death. 1. Berloʻbung, -, betrothal. | Die E'le, -, marriage. law. Der Körper. The body. Die A'der, -, pl. -11, rein. | Die Ferſe, -, pl. —11, heel. Der Arn, -es, pl. mé, arm. Der Fin'ger, —8, pl. —, finger. Das Au'ge, —B, pl. -11, eye. i i Fuß, -$, pl. Füße, foot. Der lug'apfel, -8, pl. Augʻäpfel, l 1 Gau'men,-8, pl. —, palate. eyeball, profile of the eye. Das Gehirn', -es, pl. —e, brain. Die Au’genbraue, -, pl. -11, ) eye- 1 Gelenk', -es, pl. -e, joint. 1 Au'genbraun, pl.-en, brow. I Seſidit', -8, sight, face. [ber. Das Auſgenlid, -S, pl. -er, eyelid. 1 Glied, -18, pl. -er, limb, mem- Der Ba'ken, -8,pl. -, cheek. Der Hals, —es, pl. Hälſe, neck. 1 Bart, --es, pl. Bärte, beard. Die Hand, -, pl. Hände, hand. Das Bein, -e8, pl. -e, leg. Das Haupt, -e8, pl. Hälp'ter, head. 1 Blut, --e8, blood. Die Haut, -, pl. Häute, skin. Die Bruſt, —, pl. Brüſte, breast. Das Herz, -ens, pl. -11, heart. Der Bu'ſen, -8,pl. —, bosom. Die Hüfte, -, pl. -11, hip. . | 9Daltºntent,—8, p. –, thumb. ! Mel'le, -, pl. -11, throat. 1 EU'bogen, -8,pl. -, elbow. Das Stnie, -8,pl. e, knee. Die Fauſt, -; pl. Fäuſte, fist. | Der Sturo'den, —8, pl. -, bone. LIST OF WORDS. 425 Der Snö’deer, -3,pl. -, knuckle, an- Der Nüç' grat,—es, pl.—e, backbone, Die Leber, -, pl. --11, liver. [kle., Schä'del,-8, pl.-, skull. (spine. 12 Lip'pe, -, pl. -11, lip. , Schen'ker, —8, pl. —, thigh. 1. Loʻce, -, pl. ~~17, curl. Die Sdylä'fe, -, pl. —11, temple. 1 lun'ge, -,.pl. -11, lung. ., Sdilagʻader, -, pl. --11, artery. Der Ma'gen, -—B, pl. —, stomach. Der Sdooſ, -es, pl. ~e, lap. Das Mark, —8, marrow. Die Schul'ter, -,pl. -11, shoulder. Der Mund, -e8, pl. Münder, mouth. 1 Sei'te, -, pl. --11, side. [brow. Die Mu8^fel, -, pl.–11, muscle. 1 Stirn, -, pl. -en, forehead, Der Na'gel, —8,pl. Nägel, nail. 1 Wa'be, -, pl. -11, calf. Die Na'ſe, -, pl. --1, nose. , Wan'ge, -, pl. -11, check. Der Nerv, -en, pl. -eii, nerve. Der Zahn, -es, pl. Zähne, tooth. Die Nie’re, -, pl. —11, kidney (loins). Das Dhr, —8, pl. —en, ear. Die Ze'le, —, pl. -—1, toe. Die Nip'pe, —, pl. -11, rib. 10 Zun'ge, —, pl. — 11, tongue. Der Nü'den, —8, pl. -, back. Kleiderſtikke. Articles of Dress. Der Aer'mel, -8,pl. —, sleeve. [let. Der Stattun', -es, pl. —e, calico. Das Arm'band, -8,21.-bänder, brace- Das Kleid, -es, pl. -er, dress-coat. Der Batiſt'; -28, pl. —e, cambric. Die Kleider (pl.), clothes. Die Bein'kleider (pl.), pantaloons. Der Sopf'putz, -28, head-dress. Der Beſatz',~$, pl.-ſätze, trimming. . Stra'gen, —8, pl. —, collar. Die Brille, -, pl. -11, spectacles. Die Mütze, —, pl. —11, cap. , Bruſt'nabel, -,pl.-1, breastpin. ) Näly'nadel, -, pl. -11, needle. " Bür’ſte, -, pl. — 11, brush. Der Ohr'ring, -es, pl. --, earring. Der De’gen, —8, pl. —, sword. Die Poma'de, —-, pl.–11, pomade. ,, Födjer, —3, pl. --, fan. [ring. Der Ne'genſdzirn, --C8, umbrella. , Fin'gerring, -es, pl. —e, finger- , Ning, -43, pl. —e, ring. ! Flor, -es, pl. Flöre, crape. , Frad, —8, pl. Fräcke, dress-coat. Die Fran'ſe, -, pl. --11, fringe. Der Sdilaf'rod, -28, dressing-gown. Das Futter, -, pl. —, lining. Sdlei'er, -8, pli —, veil. Geſchmei'de, —8, jewelry. | Die Sdnür bruſt, pl. -brüſte, stays. Der.Gürtel, --8, pl. —, belti sash. Der Sdul, --C8, pl. -e, shoe. , Gum'miſdyul, India-rubber over Die Schür'ze, -, pl. —11, apron. shoe. Der Son'nenſdirm, -e8, parasol. Die Haar'bürſte, -, pl.-n, hairbrush. Die Spitzen (pl.), lace Haar'nadel, -, pl. -11, hairpin. 1 Spoʻren (pl.), spür. . Der Hals'ſdjinud, -28, necklace. Der Stie'fel, 48, pl. --, boot. [jack. Das Hals'tudy;-18,pl. -tüdyer, cravat. 1 Stie'feifnedyt, -—8, pl. -e, boot- 1 Hemd, -es, pl. —en, shirt. Die Stie' feliidiſe, --, shoe-blacking. Die Hoſen (pl.), pantaloons. Der Strumpf, -e8, pl. Strüm'pfe, 1 Hoſenträger (pl.), suspenders. stocking. Der Samn, -e8, pl. Nämme, combo Die Taſdie, --, pl. -—en, pocloet. 426 LIST OF WORDS. Das Ta'ſdentud), —B, pl. -tücher, Die We’ſte, —, pl.--11, vest. handkerchief. [coat. Zahn'bürſte, --, pl. -11, tooth- Der Ueberrod, -28, pl. -röde, over- brush. [pick. Die Un'terhoſen (pl.); drawers. Der Zalyn'ſtodier, -, pl. -, tooth- Krankheiten. Maladies. Der An'fall, ---S, pl. -fälle, fit. 1 Die Hunds'wuth, -, hydrophobia. Die Blat'tern (pl.), small-pox. Der Hu’ſten, -S, cough. , Blind’heit, —, blindness. Yu'ſten, to cough. Der Brud), -es, pl. Brïdie, rupture. Der Krebs, -B, cancer. Die Fall'ſuđıt, -, apoplexy. .. Die Ma’ſern (pl.), measles. Das Fie'ber, —, pl. — , fever. 1. Nar'be, -, pl. —-11, scar. þös'artige Fieber, malignant fever , Ohn'madit, -, fainting. Drei'tägige Fieber, tertiary fever. ' „ poden (pl.), small-pox. 1 gelbe Fieber, yellow fever. 1 Quiet'ſdjung, -, pl. -en, contu- hi'tige Fieber, burning fever. Der Sänu'pfent, —8, a cold. [sion. fal'te Ficber, fever and ague. 1 ſid, erfäl'ten, to take cold. 11 nervö’ſe Fieber, nervous fever. Die Sdwä'che;, faintness. !Sdjar' ladyfieber, scarlet fever. I r Sdwind ſudit, -, consumption. Der Ty'phus,-, typhius fever. Das Sei'tenſtedjen, --S, pleurisy. Die Froſt' beule, -,71. --11, chilblain. , Stam'niein,-8, stammering. 11 Gefdwulſt',-, pl. -ülſte, sivelling Die Stunım'heit, -, dumbness. Das Geſdiwür', -es, pl.--e, ulcer. , (fal’lende) Suďt,--, epilepsy. Die Gidit, —, gout. Taub'heit, —, deafness. 1 Hei'lung,,pl.-en, heeling, cure , Ue'belkeit, —-, nausea. , Hei'ſerkeit, —, hoarseness. , Berren' kung, -, pl.--en, disloca- Hei' fer, hoarse. 1. Waſſerſudit, -, dropsy. [tion. Das Hül'nerauge, -es,pl.--11, corn. Wun'de, -, pl. —11, wound. Das Haus. 6. The House, 1. KINDS OF HOUSES. 2. PARTS OF A HOUSE. Die Bank, -, pl. —en, bank. Der Bal'ken, -8,pl.-, beam. Bibliothek —, pl. -en, library. Das Brett, -e8, pl. -er, board. Börſe, -, pl. -11, exchange. Der Brun'nen, 48, pl. --, well. , Brü'de, -, pl. -11, bridge. Das Dad), -es, pl. Dädjer, roof. , Cape('le, -, pl. --n, chapel. Die Die'le, -, pl. -en, ceiling. , Caſer'ne, “-, pl. -11, bàrrack. Das Erd'geſdioß, -es, ground floor, Der Ei'ſenbahnhof, --es, railroad sta- parterre. [shutter. tion. • Der Fen'ſterladen, --s,pl.-, window- Das Gefäng'niß,-€8, pl. —e, prison. , Fußboden, —8, pl. -Göten, floor. 1. Gewäd)8'haus, -28, green-house. Das Gewöl'be, —8, pl.-11, vault. Die Hütte, —, pl. --1, hut. Der Kamin', -es, pl. --e, chimney. 1. Stir'dhe, -, pl. -11, church. Die Kanı'mer, -, pl. -11, chamber. Der Kirdy' hof, church-yard, cemetery. Der Rel'ler, —8, pl. —, cellar. ! Sirokythurm,-8, church tower. Die Mit'dje, -, pl. -11, kitchen. LIST SFA 427 OF WORDS. Die Safriſtei', sacristy, vestry. | Die Pum'pe, -, pl. -11, pump. Das Sloʻſter, —S, pl. Nloſter, cloister. Der Nie'gel, ---,pl.-, bolt, door-bar. , Land'laus, country house, villa. , Saal, -es, pl. Säle, parlor. Die Münʻze, -, pl. -11, mint (coin). Das Sálaf'zimmer, —8, pl. —, bed- Das D'pernhaus, -28, opera-house. wu _ps opera-house. I room. [ney. Der Palaſt', -es, pl. Palä'ſte, palace. Der Sdyorn’ſtein, —8, pl. -2, chim- Die Poſt, -, pl. -en, post-office. 1 Stod, -es, 2 Das Schau'ſpielhaus, theatre. Das Stockwerk, -es. Jo floor, story. Die Scheu'ne, -, pl.-11, barn. Die Stu'be, -, pl. -11, room. (steps. Das Spital, -, pl. Spitäler, hospi- 1. Treppe;—, pl. -11, stairway, , Treibhaus, hot-house. (tal. Das Trep pengeländer, baluster. 1. Zeug häús, arsenal.... # Trep'penhaus, baluster. [story 1 Zol'haus, custom-house. Eine Treppe hodly, in the second Möbeln. Furniture. Der Beifer. -8. pl. ~, tumbler, cup., Das Rü'dengeräth, 1 kitchen utensils. Das Bett, -es, pl. --en, bed. I Sü'dyenſchirr, S Die Bett'deđe, —, pl. —, coverlet. Der Kü'denroſt, kitchen range, grate. • Das Bett geſtell, —8, bedstead. . Die lam'pė, --, 01.-11, lamp. , Bett'tudy,---, pl. -tücher, sheet. | Later'ne, pl.-11, lantern. [candle. Der Strol'ſack, —8, straw bed. Das Lidit, -18, pl. -- or -er, light, Die Matra'ize, -, pl. —en, mattress. | Gezoʻgene lidter, mould candles. Das Kopf/fiſſen, —, pl. —, willow. Gegoſſene Lidhter, dipped candles. Fe'berbett, feather bed. Der Licht' bodit, candle-wick. ,, Bit'djerbrett, book-shelf. Die Lidit putze, snuffers. Der Bü'djerſdrank, bookcase. [goose. Der licht'ſtod, candle-stick. Das Bügeleiſen, flat iron, tailor's Die Pfan'ne, --, pl. —11, pan. : Hü'geln, to iron. Der Pfropfen, —8, pl. —, cork. Die Commode, -, pl.-11, bureau. | Der Pfro'pfenzieher, the corkscrew. Der Ei'mer, 48, pl. —, bucket, pail. Die Sdíau'fel, pl. --1, shovel. [board. Das Faß, -es, pl. Fäffer, cask. Der Sdrank, —8, pl. Sdıränke, cup- Die Feu'erzange, -, pl. --11, tongs. Die Sdub'lade, -, pl. —en, drawer. Das Gemälde, “S, pl. -11; painting. Das Sdywve'felhölz'den, match. , Hand'tud, -s, pl. -tüdyer, towel. Der Spie'gel, —8, pl. --, mirror. Der Keſſel, —8, pl. -, kettle. , Stüht, -e8, pl. Stühle; chair. Die Ster'ze, -, pl. -11, wax candle.' Da8 Sieb, -18,pl. —e, sieve. » Miéſte, -, pl. -n, chest. I So'pla, --S, pl. —8, sofa. Sol'le, -, pl. -11, coal. Der Tep'pidi, —es, pl. ~e, carpet. Braun’kohle, lignite. li Tic'gel, —8, pl. —, skillet. in Holzkohle, charcoal. Der Tiſdy, -es, pl.-e, table. Schwarz-kohle, 1 mineral coal. Das Tiſdi'tudy, tablecloth. Stein'kohlém Topf, --es, pl. Töpfe, pot. Der Rorb, —es, pl. Körbe, basket. Die Wand’uhr, -, pl. --en, clock. , Kron'leuditer, --8, chandelier. Das Waſdı'beden, --8, washbowl. , Serug; -es, pl. Nritge, pitcher. Die Wie'ge, -, pl. —11, cradle. 428 LIST OF WORDS. Mahlzeiten und Gerichte. 8. Meals and Dishes. 1. MEALS. | Das Ei'weiß, the white of eggs. Das Frülyſtück, -—es, pl.—e, breakfast Der Dot'ter, —8, the yolk. Der Effig, --, vinegar. Frühſtüden, to breakfast. 1 Mittageſſen, --8, dinner. Das Fleiſd), -es, meat. Zu Mittag effen, to dine. X'bendeſſen, —B,? supper. Nalb'fleiſd), veal. 1 A'bendbrod,.-8,5" Nind'fleiſd), beef. Zu Abend eſſen, to take supper. | , Gaſt'mahl, -es, pl.-mähler, ban- Gebra'tenes Fleiſdy, roast meat. Der Gaſt, -es, pl. Gäſte, guest. [quet. | Ham' melbraten, roast mutton. , Appetit', -8, appetite. Kalbs'braten, roast veal. Geſegʻriete Malil'zeit ! (a blessing on Ninds'braten, roast beef. Die Stalbs'cotelette, —, pl. --11, veal the meal!) Der Süſe, --8, pl.-11, cheese. 2. DISHES. Die Mild), -, milk. Das Brod, -es, pl. --, bread. Der Nahn, -es, cream. Weiß'brod, wheat bread. Die Sah'ne, -, S Sdwarzbrod, brown bread. Molken (pl.), whey. Altbackenes Brod, stale bread. 1 Buttermildy, buttermilk. But'terbrod, bread and butter. Das Obſt, -08, fruit. Die Stru'ıe, —, pl. -11, crumb. 1. Sru'ſte, -, pl. -1, crust. Das A'pfelmuſ, apple-sauce. 1. Klei'e, —, bran. 1. Sompoť', -8, sauce. Der Teig, -68, dough. | Der Pfeffer, -8, pepper. Das Salz, —es, salt. Die Butter, -, butter. Die Sardel'len (pl.), sardines. Das Ei, -08, pl. -er, egg. Der Senf, -e8, mustard. Der Ei'erkudjen, —8, omelet. Die Sup'pe, —, soup. Setz'eier, poached eggs. , Tor'te, -, pl. -—11, tart. Nülr'eier, scrambled eggs. Getreide und Gemiiſe. 9. Grains and Vegetables. Die Bol'ne, -, pl. --n, bean. Der Blu'menkohl, cauliflower, , Erb'ſe; -, pl. -11, pea. Braun'kohy, brown cabbage. Der Flachs, -es, flax. 6au'extoy, Die Ser’ſte, —, barley. Das Gras, -es, pl. Grä’ſer, grass. Das Sorn, —es, grain. Die Gür'fe, – pl. -11, cucumber. Straut, —es, pl. Sträu'ter, herb. Der Ha'fer, —8, oats. 1 Un'fraut, weed. Das Heu, -28, hay. Die Streſſe, -, pl. -11, cress. Die Hir'je, -, millet. 1 Lin'ſe, -, pl.--11, lentil. Startoffel, -, pl. —11, potato. · | Der Mais, -28, Indian corn. Der Klee, —8, clover. Die Paʼſtinake, -, pl. --n, parsnip. 1 Kohl, -es, cabbage. 1, Peterfi'lie, ---, parsley. Das Sau'erfrant. À sour-kraut. LIST OF WORDS. 429 Der Pilz, --es, pl. —en, mushroom. Die rothe Nü’be, beet. 1 Neis, -e8, rice. weiße Nübe, turnip. ! Net'tig, —es, pl. --e, radish. Sel'lerie, -, celery. 1. Meer'rettig, horseradish. Der Spar'ger, —8, asparagus. 11 Nog'gen, -8, rye. Il Spinat', -$, spinage. Die Nibe, —, pl. -—11, rape. Weizen, -—8, wheat. 1 gelbe Rü’be, carrot. Die Zwie’bel, -, pl. —n, onion. . Obſt und Obſtbäume. 10. Fruits and Fruit-trees. Die A'nanas, —, pl. --, pine-apple.) Maulbeere, mulberry. Der A'pfel, —B, pl. Aepfel, apple. Sta'chelbeere, gooseberry. Die Apfelſi'ne, ---, pl. -—11, orange. Die Birne, -, pl. --11, pear. 1 Apriko'ſe, —, pl. -11, apricot. Citro'ne, --, pl. —11, lemon. Der Baum, -es, pl. Bäunie, tree. 1. Dattel, -,pl. —11, date. A'pfelbauin, apple-tree. Fei'ge, --, pl. -—11, fig. Birn'bauni, pear-tree. , Kaſta'nie, -, pl. -11, chestnut. Pflau'menbaum, plum-tree. .. Man’del, -,pl. -11, almond. Fci'genbaum, fig-tree. , Melo'nie, -, pl.—11, melon. Das Blatt, -18,pl. Blätter, leaf. 1. Nuß, -, pl. Nüſſe, nut. Der Stanın,-e8, pl. Stämine, trunk Budynuß, beechnut. Die Nin'de, -, pl.–11, bark. Ha’ſelnuſ, hazlenut. Der Zweig, -28, pl. —e, bough. Wall'nuß, walnut. Die Wur'zel, -, pl. -11, root. Die Dli've, —, pl. -en, olive. Die Bee're, -, pl. -11, berry. Pfir'fidye, ---, pl. -—11, peach. Bron'beere, blackberry. Pflau'me, -, pl. —11, plum. Erdbeere, strawberry. 1. Quitte, -, pl. --11, quince. Heidelbeere, bilberry. Wein'traube, -, pl. -11, grape. Him'beere, raspberry. Der Wein'ſtock, -es, pl. -ſtöde, grape- Johan'nisbeere, currant. vine. Standen und Waldbäume. 11. Shrubs and Forest-trees. Der A'Horn, —8,pl. —e, maple. Die Fid'te, —, pl. -—11, pine. . Die Bir'ke, – pl. —11, birch. ,Lär'de, -, pl.—11, larch. Bu'dje, pl. -11, beech. Lin'de, -, pl. —11, lime-tree. Il Ce’der, -, pl. -11, cedar. Myrthe, -, pl. —11, myrtle. 1 Cypreſſe, ---, pl. -11, cypress. Tor Pap'pel, -, pl. -—11, poplar. 11 Ei'de, -, pl. --11, oak. Tan'ne, -, pl. —11, fir. Er'le, -, pl. -11, alder. Ul'me, -, pl. --11, elm. 11 E'ldie, —pl. -11, ash. 1. Wei'de, --, pl. —17, willow. 1 Es’pe, -, pl. --11, aspen. Blumen. Flowers. . Das Geis'blatt, honeysuckle. Der fasmin', -e8, jasmine. , Felän'gerjclie’ber, $ woodbine. Die Li'lie, -, pl. —-11, lily. Die Gold'blume, marigold. ,, Mai'blume, lily of the valley. 12. 430 LIST OF WORDS. 13. Die März'liebe, -, pl. -11, daisy. | Die Son'nenblume, sunflower.: Mohn'blume, poppy. Der Stordy'ſdınabel, crane's bill (gera- 1. Nel'fe, -, pl. —11, pink. nium). Neſ'jel, —, pl. ~11, nettle. Das Tau'ſendſdjön, pansy, heart's ease Der Nit'terſporn, larkspur. Die Tulpe, -, pl. —11, tulip. Die No'le, -, pl. -11, rose. Das Vergiß'nieinnid)t, forget-me-not. Sdlüſſelblume, primrose. I , Wind'rösdien, anemone. . . Vögel. Birds. Der Voʻger, -8, pl. Vögel, bird. Der Straʼnid}, —8, pl. ---, crane. " Naub'vogel, bird of prey. Ku'fuk, —&, cuckoo. , Sing'vogel, bird of song. Die Ler'de, -, pl. —11, lark. , Sumpf'vogel, wader. , Mö've, -, pl. -1, gull. [gale. , Zug'vogel, bird of passage. 1. Nady'tigall, -, pl. —en, nightin- , Adler, —8, 11. —, eagle. Der Papagei', -en, pl. —en, parrot. Die Amſel, -, pl. -11, blackbird. To Pfau, —en, pl. --en, peacock. Der Budy'fink,—en, pl.-ent, bullfinch. , Ra’be, --en, pl. —en, raven. Die Doh'le, —, pl. -1, jackdaw. Das Neb'huhn, partridge. , Droſſel, —, pl. -1, thrush. Der Nei'ler, —, pl. —, heron. , El'ſter, -, pl. -11, magpie. Das Nothkehr'djen, robin redbreast. 1 Eu'le, -, pl. -1, owl. Die Sdine'pfe, -—, pl. --1, snipe. ,, En'te, —, pl. -11, duck. , Sdwalbe, -, pl. -11, swallow. Der Falſke, —1, pl. -n, falcon. Der Sdiwan,-8, pl. Sdwäne, swan, Der Faſan',-en, pl. —en, pheasant. ,, Sper'ling, —8, pl. —, sparrow. Die Gans,-. pl. Gänſe, goose. , Stord), --e8, pl. Stördie, stork. Der Ha'biđit, -8, pl. -e, hawk. Li, Strauß, -en, pl. -en, ostrich. , Hahn,-es, pl. Hähne, cock. Die Tau'be, -, pl. —en, dove. Die Hen'ne, -, pl. --1, hen. Der Truthahn (die --Fenne), turkey. Das Huhn, -S, pl. Hül'ner, chicken. Die Wadi'ter, -, pl.–11, quail. Der Stana'rienvogel, Canary bird. Der Zaun’könig, wren. Die Krä'he, -, pl. —11, crow. 14. Sängethiere. Mammals. Der Af'fe, --1, pl.—1, ape. Der I'gel, —8,pl. -, hedgehog. 1r Bär, -en, pl. -en, bear. Das Sanin'djen, —8, pl. ---, rabbit. ,, Bi’ber, —8, pl. —, beaver. Die. Ka'tze, —, pl. —1, cat. , Dads, -es, pl. —e, badger. Die Kuh, ---, pl. Kühe, cow. Das Eidy' hörndien, -S, pl.-, squirrel Der Ludje,-e8, pl. --e, lynx. Der Eʻber, -8, pl. —, wild boar. Der Lö'we, -n, pl. —11, lion. , E'fel,-8, pl. —, ass, donkey. Die Maus, -, pl. Mäuſe, mouse. » Fudis, —8, pl. Füchie, fox. Der Odis, --en, pl. —en, ox. Die Gem'ſe, -, pl. -1, chamois. Das Pferd, -es, pl. -e, horse. Der Ha’ſe, —11, 07.-11, hare. Die Stu'te, -,.pl.--11, mare. , Hirſd), -es, pl-e, stag. Das Pferd'dyen, -S, pl. --11, colt Ir Hund, -es, pl. -e, dog. Die Natte, -,21. —11, rat. LIST OF WORDS. 431 Das Neh, -es, pl. —, roe, deer. Sdiwein, -es,pl.-e, hog. Der Stier, -es, pl. ~e, bull. I Der Ti'ger, —B, pl. -, tiger. L Wolf, -28, pl. Wölfe, wolf. Die Zie'ge, -, pl. -n, kid. Fiſche. 15. Fishes. Der Aal, -es, pl. -e, eel. Der Star'pfen, --8, pl.-, carp. Die Au'ſter, -, pl. -11, oyster. , Krebs, -es, pl. -e, crawfish. Der Barſdy', -es, pl. - e, perch. L 1 Ladis, —, pl.—e, salmon. , Büd’ling,—B, pl.-, red herring Die Mu'ſdiel, -, pl. -11, shell. Die Forelle, -, pl. —n, trout. Der Schell'fijd),-es,pl.—e, haddock. 1. Garne'le, -, pl. —n, shrimp. Die Sdyild'kröte, —, pl. -11, turtle. Der Hai, —$,pl. -e, shark. 1 Schlei'he, -, pl. -1, tench. Hä'ring, -es, pl. --e, herring. !! Hedyt, -es, pl. ~e, pike. , Tumm'ler, so 11 Hum'mer, --B, pl. —, lobster. , Stör, —8, pl. -e, sturgeon. , Kabeljau', -8,pl. —, codfish. 1 Wall’fiſdi, —es, pl. -ė, whale. Ser Schweinfiid), 1 porpoise. Chemiſche Subſtanzent. 16. Chemical Bodies. . Der Sau'erſtoff, --18, oxygen. Luft:förinig, aeriform. , Waſſerſtoff, hydrogen. Das Metall', -08, pl. --, metal. Il Stic' ſtoff, nitrogen. Das Gold, gold. Die Stickſtoffſäure, nitrous acid. Silber, silver. , Salpe'terſäure, nitric acid. 1 Su'pfer, copper. Das ſalpe'terſaure Silber, nitrate 11 Blei, lead. , Roh'lenſtoff, carbon. [of silver. o Zini, tin. Die Kohl'enſäure, carbonic acid. 1 Ei'ſen, iron. Der kohʻlenſaure Salt, carbonate Der Stall, steel. of lime. 1 Zink, zinc. Phos'phor, —8, phosporus. 1 Koʻbalt, cobalt. Sdiwe'fer, --B, sulphur. [acid. Das Meſſing, —8, brass. Die ſdywe' felige Säure,sulphurous Erz,-es, pl. —e, ore, bronze. ir Sdywe'felſäure, sulphuric acid Der Diamant', —B, pl.--en, diamond. Der (dywe'felſaure Kalk, sulphate 1 Smaragd',-8, pl. -e, emerald. of lime. [iron. l 1 Agat; -es, pl. -e, agate. Das Sdywe'feleiſen, sulphuret of 1 Mar’mor, -8, marble. ni Chlor, —8, chloriñe. 1 Gyps, -28, gypsum. Die Säu're, -, pl. -n, acid. Die Streid'e, —, chalk. Das Salz, —es, pl. -e, salt. Der Salk, -e8, lime. Salzig, saline. , Thon, --B, clay. Die Luft, –, air. Alaun', -$, alum. Luf'tig, aerial. Die Mi'ne, -, pl. -11, mine. 432 LIST OF WORDS. Wiſſenſdhaften. Die Natur'wiſſenſdiaft, —, science. Sciences. Die Geometrie',-, geometry. Aſtronomie', astronomy. 1 Che’miſdy, chemical. 1 Stern’tunde, as Der Cheʼmiter, chemist. Der Aſtronom', astronomer. , Geologie', -, geology. [ogist. , Phi’loſophie', -, philosophy. Der Geolog', -en, pl.-en, geol Der Philoſophy, philosopher. Mineralogie', -, mineralogy Philoſoʻphiſd), philosophical.. Der Mineralog', -en, mineralo- Theologie', -, theology. , Bota'nik, —, botany. [gist. Der Theolog', -en, theologian. Der Botaʼniter, botanist. Theolo'giſdy, theological. 1 Mathema'tif, —, mathematics. Tu Philologie', -, philology. Die Arithmethif, --, arithmetic. ! Medizin', -, medicine. [law. , Algebra, —, algebra. " Nedits’wiſſenſdraft, —, science of Kiinſte. 18. Die (djönen Münſte, fine arts. : Die Die Sän'gerin, pl. -—iten, singer. 1 Aeſtheʼthik, -, æsthetics. | 1 Didyt kunſt, —, poetry. ! Kunſt, -, pl. Sünſte, art. Der Did)'ter, --8, poet. Der Künſt'ler, -8, artist. Ne'defunſt, —, rhetoric. Bauſkunſt, ~, ļ architecture. Die Ne'de, -, pl. -11, oration. II Ardjitettur', -,1 Der Ned'ner, -_$, pl. —, orator. Der Bau'meiſter, architect. 1 Vers'kunſt, --, prosody. 1 Ardjitett, sa ! Zeidh'nenkunſt,—, art of drawing. Bild’hauerkunſt, , 1 Nu'pferſtid)kunſt, artof engraving. Pla'ſtik, —, sculpture. o Skulptur', -, ) 1. Stu'pferſtich, engraving. Der Bild'hauer, —8, sculptor. , Stein'druderfunſt, lithography. Malerei', -, painting. 1 Schreib'funſt, —, chirography. Der Ma'ler, —$, pl. --, painter. Budy'druđertunſt, art of printing. 1 Striegs'kunſt, military art. Ton'kunſt,-,ml { music. ! Feld'meſkunſt, field surveying. Der Muſi'fer, —8, musician. L Ingenieur'kunſt, engineering. 1 Geſang', -es, singing. L 1 Apothe'ferkunſt, pharmacy. , Sän'ger, -8, singer. Der Apotheʼter, apothecary. Grammatiſdhe Ausdriidc. 19. Grammatical Terms. Die Gramma'tik, --, pl.—en, gram-| Die Proſodie', -, 1 m prosody. , Spradʻlehre, -, pl.–1,5 mar. , Vers' funſt --,S! Orthographie', -, 1 orthography. Der Budy Der Budy ſtabe, —11, pl.–11, letter. » Nechyt'ſdireibung, sº Etymologie',-,} etymology. ter. [ital letter. 11 Wortlehre, -, s 1 große Anfangsbuchſtabe, cap- 1 Votal', -3,pl.-,} vowel. 1. Sat-lehre, -, , Stimm'laut, -08, s. ,Syntax; -, syntax. LIST OF WORDS. 433 Der Ronſonant', -en,) conso- | Das Prono'men, -S, pl. --, ! pro- 1 Mit'laut, pl. ~e, Š nant. 1 1 Für'wort, noun. Der Ne'detheil,-es, pl.-,) part of Das perſön’lidie Fürw., personal Die Wort'form,-, pl.—en,š speech. pronoun. Der Arti'kel, --Ø, pl. ~; article. ,beſitz'anzeigende Fürw., pos- Das Geſdiredits'wort, S" sessive pronoun. Der beſtimmte Art., definite article hin'weiſende Fürw., demon- , unbeſtimmte Art., indefinite strative pronoun. Das No'men, --8, pl. -, ) [article unbeſtimmte Fürw., indefi- !! Hauptwort, —8, noun. nite pronoun. , Nenn'wort, pl. -wörter,) , fra'gende Fürw., interroga- Der Gemein'namen, —$, pl. -1 tive pronoun. [pronoun. common noun. , bezügʻlidie Fürwort, relative 1 Ei'gennamen, proper noun. Das Verb, —8, pl.--a,) ... Die Deflination', pl.–en, I declen- l , Zeit'wort ſ verd. [tion. 1 Fau'biegung,pl.—en, » sion. Die Stonjugation', -pl.—1,conjuga- Die ſtarke Deklin., old declension. Die ſtarke Stonj., irregular conj. i idwadie Deklin., new declen. 1 ſdwadhe Konj., regular conj. 1 gemiſchte Defl.,mixed declen. Das Akti'vum, —8, active voice. Das Adjektiv, —8, Paſſivum, —8, passive voice. » Ei'genſ(jaftswort, adjective. 1 Ad'verb, -8,pl. ~a, 1 ad- 1 Bei'wort ) · Neben-or Um'ſtandswort,S verb. Die Stei'gering der Adjektiva, Die Präpoſition', ] comparison of adjectives. Das Vor'wort, preposition. Der Nu'neral,-8, pl.-en,) numer-| Berhältnißwort, ) Das Zahl' wort, Doa Rohrmort al 1 Die Poniunktion') conjunction. Das Grund zahlw., cardinal num. Das Bin'dewort,'s 1 Ordnungszahlwort, ordinal Die Interjektion', interjec- number, Das Empfin'dungswort, tion. Zeiteintheilung.. Die Ewigkeit, ---, eternity. u Zeit, —, pl. —en, time. Das Falrhun'dert, —8, century. Al'ter, or Zeit'alter, age. ! Jahr, -es, pl. Jahre, year. Der Mo'nat, --8, pl. ~e, month. Die Wo'die, -, pl. -11, week.. Der Tag,.-es, pl. ~e, day. Die Nadit,-i pl. Nädy’te, night. 1 Stun'de, -, pl. —n, hour. 1 Minu'te, -, pl. —11, minute. 1. Sekun'de, —, pl. -11, second. , Morgenröthe, -, dawn. Der Ta'gesanbrud), -e8, daybreak. 20. Divisions of Time. Der Son'nenaufgang, —; sunrise. , Mor'gen, —8, pl. —, morning. ir Vor'mittag, forenoon. : , Mit'tag, noon. Nachmittag, afternoon. , A’bend, —8, pl. --,'evening. Die Mit'ternadyt, midnight. Ge'ſtern, yesterday. Vor'geſtern, day before yesterday. Vor adit Tagen, a week ago. [day. Heute über adit Tage, a week from to- Mor'gen, to-morrow. Ue'bermorgen, day after to-morrow. Die Fal/reszeit, season of the year. 434 LIST OF WORDS. Der Win'ter, —8, winter. . „ Frül'ling, -3,} spring. Das Früly jabr,-8,5 Der Sommer, —8, summer. Herbſt, -es, fall. Ja'nuar, -3, January. , Februar, -3, February. März,e8, March. April, —8, April. ,,Mai, -8, May. fu'ni, —8, June. | Der Septem’ber, -3, September. Okto'ber, —B, October. Novem'ber, -3, November. Dezem'ber, -8, December. ; ,, Sonn'tag, -8, Sunday. ,, Mon'tag, —*, Monday. u Dienis'tag, -8, Tuesday. Mitt'wody, —8, Wednesday. Die Mitt' wodie, -, 5" Der Don'nerstag, --8, Thursday. , Frei'tag, —8, Friday. " Samo'tag, Bm Saturday. ,, Auguſt', -es, August. : Sonnabend, -8, Religionen. 21. - Religions. Das Chri'ſtenthum, —8, Christendom | Die Methodi'ſtiſche Kirche, Methodist Die Stir'de, —, pl. --n, church. I Der Methodiſt', Methodist. [Ch. , Armenia'niſche Kirde, Armenian , Neformit'te Kirche, Reformed Ch. Church. . 1Nöʼmiſd)-Statho'liſdje Stirdje, Ro- Der Armenia'ner, Armenian. man-Catholic Church. Bapti'ſtiſdie Stirdye, Baptist Ch. Der Satholik, Roman Catholic." Der Baptiſt', Baptist. 1 Frei'e Gemein'de, Free Religious Episkopalia'niſdie Kirche, Episco- Association (of Free-thinkers). pal Church. [lian. Das Fu’denthun, Jewry. [Jewess. Der Episkopalia'ner, Episcopa Der Fu'de; die Jü'dint, Jew, ,, Grie' dyiſd) - Sathoʻliſche Kirdye, Der Foʻlam, Mohammedanism. [dan. Greek-Catholic Church. Der Malomeða’nter, Mohamme- .. Luthe'riſdie Stirdie, Lutheran Ch. Das Hei'denthum, paganism. [heathen Der. Luthera'nter, Lutheran. Der Hei'de, 11, pl. —11, pagan, Profeſſionen und Handwerke. 22. Professions and Trades. Der Apothe’ker, —8, apothecary. Der Brau'er, --8, pl. -, brewer. Arzt, -es, pl. Aerzte, physician. Der Wund'arzt, surgeon. Buchdrucker, --18, pl. -, printer. , Zahn'arzt, dentist. Fabrikant, -en, pl. —en, manu- Bä'der, —-3, pl. —, baker. , Färber,-8,pl.-, dyer. [facturer. , Banquier', -8,pl. -_8, banker. Fiſdi’händler, —8, fishmonger..: i Barbier', -8,21.--, barber. Fleiſdier, —8, pl. —, butcher.. : ,, Bau'er, —8, pl. —11, peasant. Die Bäu'erin, —, pl. —nen, peasant Ger'ber,—8,pl.-, tanner. [man. woman. Gla’ſer, ---, pl.-, glazier. Der Bau'mciſter, --8,pl.--, architect. Hirt, -en, pl. --en, shepherd. i Bi'ldhof, —8, pl. Biſdjöfe, bishop. Bött dycr, —8, pl. --, cooper. Der Budy bändler, book-merchant Dufl'lyändler, fruit-merchant LIST OF WORDS. 435 er. Die Obſthändlerin, fruit-woman. | Der Sdau'ſpieler, -8, pl. —, actor. Der Pfer'dehändler, horse-dealer. Die Sdau'ſpielerin, pl.-uten, actress. ,, Tudy’händler, dry-goods mer- Der Sdlädj'ter, -8, pl. -, butcher. chant. , Sdiloſſer, —8, pl. —, locksmith. Der Juwelier", —B, pl. ~e, jeweller. 1 , Sdimied, -es, pl. -e, smith, , Sü'fer, -8,pl. ~, cooper. blacksmith. 1. Nünſtler, -8, pl.-, artist. Der Gold'ſdymied, goldsmith. Die Künſtlerin, —, pl. -nen, artist. ,Huf'idhmied, horseshoer. Der Nu'pferſtedier, —8, engraver. , Stu'pferſchmied, coppersmith. ,, Lelyérer, —$, pl. -, teacher. ... Meſſerſchmied, cutler. Sdul'lehrer, school-teacher. , Waffenſchmied, armorer. Die Lely'rerin, —, pl. --nen, teacher. Sdynei’der, —8, pl. —, tailor. Der Mau'rer, --$, pl. —, mason. Schorn' ſteinfeger,chimney-sweep.. Der Frei'maurer, free-mason. Sdrift'ſteller, -8,*--, author. , Metz'ger, —8,pl. --, butcher. Tagʻlölner, —8,pl.-, day-labor- 1. Mül'ler, —8, pl.m., miller. [maker. ,, Mu'ſiker, —8, pl. —, musician. Tiſdy'ler, —B, pl. —, cabinet- Nä'herint, pl. -nen, seamstress. , Tapezie'rer, —8, pl. —, uphol- Der Natur' forſdier, —8, naturalist. sterer. Pabſt, —es, pl. Päbøſte, pope. Ulr'nadier, —8, pl. —, watch- Pfar’rer, -8, pl. --, vicar. maker. Philoſoph', -en, pl. —en, philos Verfaſſer, —8, pl. —, author. Pre’diger, --8, preacher. [opher. ,,Wedhe'ler, —8, pl. -, money- , Prie'ſter, —8, pl. —, priest. changer. Nedakteur', 48, pl. -e, editor. Win'zer, —8,pl.-, vine-dresser. ,, Red'ner, --8, pl. -, orator. Zim'mermann, —8,pl. Zim'mer- , Satt'ler, -6, pl. --, saddler. lente, carpenter. Fremdwörter. 23. Foreign Words. Der An'fer, anchor (from Latin, áncora ; Greek, äykupa). [China). Die Apfelſine, orange (from Dutch, appelsina; French, pomme de Sine= 1 Nu'ſter, oyster (from Latin, óstreum; Greek, otpeov). . But'ter, butter (from Latin, butyrum ; Greek, Boútupov). Der Frad, dress-coat (from French, frac; Low-Latin, fróccus=woollen stuff). Die In'ſel, island (from Latin, insula). Sto’ſtent, to cost (from Italian, costáre; Latin, constáre). Der lö'we, lion (from Latin, leo; Greek, léwv). Das Pferd, horse (from Late Latin, paraverêdus an extra post-horse). Die Pfir'fidy, peach (from Latin, pérsicum málum=Persian apple). Der Neis, rice (from French, ris; Latin, oryza; Greek, opusa; Arabic, aruz). Das Sdad), chess (from Persian, shah=king). Die Stra'ſe, street (from Latin, via strata=paved road). 1 Tafle, cup (from French, tasse; Arabic, tas). in Tor'te, tart (from Low-Latin, torta ; Latin, tortus=twisted).' 1. Tul'pe, tulip (from French, tulipe ; Turkish, tulban=turban). Der Zie'gel, tile (from Latin, tégula; from tégere=to cover). 0 VI. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Abbreviations. adj., adjective. pron., pronoun. adv., adverb. demon., demonstrative. conj. or C., conjunction. v. aux., auxiliary verb. indecl., indeclinable. v. imp., impersonal verb. int., interjection. v. intr., intransitive verb. part., participle. v. ir., irregular verb. pl., plural. v. refl., reflexive verb. prep., preposition. v. tr., transitive verb. A. Der A’bend, -8, pl. ~e, evening. Die Ady'tung, -, respect. Das Abendeſſen,-8, supper. Adieu', int., good-by, farewell. Das A’benteuer, —8, pl.-, adventure Die Adreſſe, -, pl. --11, address. A’ber, conj. ($ 265), but, however. l Adreſſi'ren, to address (letters). Der X'berglaube, -n8, superstition. Xehn'lid), adj., similar, like. Ab'brennen, z. ir. tr., to burn down. | Die Lehn'liq;feit, -, similarity. Die Ab'fahrt, -, pl. --en, sailing. Der Affe,-n, pl. ---11, ape. Ab'feuern, v. tr., to fire off. Das A'gio, —8, premium (on coin). Abgeben, v. ir. tr., to deliver. Die Al’tie, -, pl. --1, share. [pany. Ab'helfen, v. ir. intr., to remedy. L , Al tien-Geſell'ſdjaft, stock com- Ab'leiten, v. tr., to derive. Der Aktionär', -8,pl.-€, sharehold- All’rciſeni, v. intr., to leave, depart. Allein', conj., but, only. [er. Die Abʼreiſe, -, pl. -en, departure. Al'ler, pron., all, every. AQ'ſegeln, v. intr., to sail (away). I Alerlei', indecl. adj., of all kinds. Der Abſatz, -08,pl. Abſätze,stop, heel. Algemein', adj., general, common. Ab'ſdrecen, v. tr., to frighten away. AUmä'lig, adj., gradual. All'ſdreiben, v. tr. ir., to copy, tran- Das Almoſen, 48, pl. --, alms. scribe. [purpose, aim, view. X18, conj., when, as, than, except, but. Die Ab'fidit, —, pl. -en, intention, Alsdann', adv., than. Ab'fidytlidy, adj. intentional. Alſo, adv., so, thus; conj., therefore. Ab’ſtammen, v. intr., to be descended. Au'zu, adv., quite too. Al'ſtatten, v.tr., to perform, discharge. Der Altar', -8, pl. Altä're, altar. Einen Beſud' ab'ſtatten, to pay a Das Al'ter, -8, pl. --, age, old age. Ab'trocknen, v. intr., to dry up. [visit. Das Al'terthum,-8, pl. -tlyümer, an- Al’trünnig, adj., faithless (to). Alt, adj., old. [tiquity. Adit, eight. Der Am'bos, -68, pl. -ſe, anvil. Die Adyt, —, care, attention ; ſidy in Das Amt, -es, pl. Xem'ter, office. Adit niel'men, to take care, be on An, prep., on, at, hy, to about in; one's guard. adv., on, forward. VOCABULARY. 437 An'bieten, v. ir., to offer, hold out to. An'ſpredjen, v. ir. tr., to address. An'der, pron., other. Einen um etwas an'ſpredjen, to An'ders, adv., otherwise. ask or claim a thing of a person. An'derswo, adv., elsewhere. Der Aus’ſprud), -es, pl. -ſpridie, An'derthald (§ 103, 2). claim. An'deuten, v. tr., to show. Die An' ſtalt, —, pl. —-n, preparation. Die Anekdo'te, -, pl. —n, anecdote.1 establishment. Der An' fang,—8, pl.-fänge, beginning. Anſtatt, prep. (with gen.), instead of; Anfangen, v. ir. tr., to begin, conj., instead of. commence. | An'ſtoßeri, 2. tr., to hit against, strike. An' feinden, v. tr., to treat hostilely. Der An'ſtoß, —es, pl. An'ſtöße, hit, An'geben, v. ir. tr., to give. blow, offense. An'geblid), adj., pretended. Un'ſtrengen, v. tr., to exert, strain. An'geboren, adj., hereditary. An'ſtrengend, adj., exhausting. An'gehen, v. ir. intr., to concern. Die An'ſtrengung, —, exertion. Die An'gelegenheit, —, pl.-en, affair. Der Antiquar', -8, pl. --e, dealer in An'genehm, adj., agreeable, pleasant. second-hand books; Antiquar'- Das An'geſidit, —es, pl. —er, face, Exemplar', second-hand copy. countenance. | An'thürmen, v. intr., to rise like tow- An'geſidits, prep., in view of. ers (overtower). Die Angſt, -, pl. Aengʻſten, anxiety, Die Ant'wort, —, pl. —en, answer. fear, anguish, terror. Antworteni, v. intr., to answer. Aengſt’lidy, adj., anxious. [ue. An'mad)ſen, v. intr., to grow on. An'halten, v. ir., to hold fast, contin- Die An'weiſung, -, pl. —en, note. An' heben, v.intr., to begin, commence; Die An'wendung, -, application. . v. tr., to lift up, raise. | An'weſend, adj., present. Der An'fer, -8, pl. —, anchor. An'zeigen, v. tr., to notify, advertise. Die An'ferulr, anchor-watch. ' Die An'zeige, -, pl. —11, adver- An'flagen, v. tr., accuse, charge. tisement. Au’kommen, v. ir. intr., to arrive. An’zieheni, v. ir. tr., to draw on, to at- An’fünden, anʼkündigen, v. tr., to pro- tract, interest, to put on. claim, announce, publish. Der An'zig, suit of clothes. Die An’kunft, ---, arrival. Der Apfel, —8, pl. Ae'pfer, apple. An'laden, v. intr., to smile or laugh at. Der A'pfelweint, cider. [shop. Die An'leihe, -, pl. --11, loan. Die Apotheke, -,77.—11, apothecary An'nehmen, v. ir. tr., to accept; v. refl. Der Apothe'fer, apothecary. to interest one's self, take interest. Die Ar' beit, —, pl. -en, labor, work. . An'reben, v. tr., to accost, address. Ar’beiten, v. intr., to labor, work. Die An’rede, -, pl. --, address. Der Ar'beiter, laborer. An'rithren, v. tr., to touch. Ar’beitſam, adj., laborious. An' ſchaffen, v. tr., procure, obtain, get. Der April', --8, April. An'ſdauen, v. tr., to view, to look at. Die Ardjäologie', ---, archæology. Au ſehen, v. ir. tr., to view, behold. Arm, adj., poor. Die An'ſidyt, —, pl.--eli, opinion, Die Ar'muth, -, poverty. point of view. Der Arm, --18, pl. --, arm. 438 VOCABULARY. 07 Der Ler'mel, —8, pl. --, sleeve. Auf'ſtehen, v. ir. intr., to rise up, to Die Armee', -, pl. Arme'en, army. rise. , Art, —, pl. -en, species, kind, Aufſteigen, v. intr., to mount, ascend. way, nature. Auftragen, v. tr., to carry up, put on. Ar'tig, adj., of a kind, agreeable. Der Auftrag, -es, pl. -träge, Ein ar'tiges Stind, a well-behaved commission. [ken. child. | Xuf'waden, v.intr., to wake up, awa- Der Arti'fel, —8, pl. —, article. | Auf'warten, v. intr., to wait upon. Die Arznei', -, pl. -en, medicine. Einem ſeine Auf'wartung madjen, Afde, —, ashes. to pay one's respects to a per- Aſtronomie', -, astronomy. Auf'weden, v. tr., to awaken. [son. Der Aſtronom', -el, astronomer. | Aufzieleni, v. ir. tr., to draw up, raise Aſtrono'miſd), astronomical. up, rear, educate. Der A'theni, -3, breath, respiration. Das Auge, -B, pl. —en, eye. Ath'men, v. tr., to breathe. Der Au'genblic, moment. [ous. 1. At’las, -jes, pl. --ſe, satin. Au'genblidlid), adj., instantane- Die Au'genbraue, —, eyebrow. Auf, prep., on, upon, at, to, towards; Das Au'genleiteit, —8, disease of auf einmal, all at once, at once; the eyes. auf daß, c., so that, in order that. Uu'genſdyeinlid), adj., apparent. Aufblüheit, v. intr., to expand, to Der Auguſt', -3, August. blossom. [in succession. Aus, prep., out, out of, from, of; adv. Aufeinau'ber, adv., one after another, out, orer, at an end, finished. Der Aufenthalt, -6, stay, sojourn, Ans'beffern, v. tr., to mend. abode. [the dead. Aus'bredien, v. ir. intr., to break out. Auferſtehen, v. ir. intr., to rise from Xus'breiten, v. intr., to spread out, ex- [agation. Auffallend, adj., striking, strange. DieXus'breitung, extension,prop- Die Aufgabe, —, pl. -11, exercise. Die Aus'bauer, —, endurance. Der Aufgang, -8, pl. -gänge, rising. Xus'dehnen, v. tr., to stretch, expand. Aufgeben, v. ir. tr., to give up, to sur-. Die Aus'behnung, —, expansion. render. [stay. Xus'brüden, v. tr., to press out, ex- Aufhalten, v. ir. refl., to stop, delay, press. [expression. Aufhören, v. intr., to cease, discon-| Der Aus’drud, -es, pl. sbrüde, tinue. Ausdrüdlid), adj., explicit. Die Auflage, -, pl. -n, edition. Auseinan'ber, adv., asunder, apart. Auf'madien, to open. Aufmerken, v. tr., to observe, notice. (aus’erfüren, aus'erkor, aus'er- Aufmerkſam, adj., attentive. koreni, is an antiquated form, used Aufmerkſamkeit, -, attention. · in poetry). Die Auf'opferung, -, sacrifice. | Qus'führen, v. tr., to execute. Auf'recht, upright, erect. Auf'regen, v. tr., to excite. Die Ausgabe, -, pl.--11, edition. Der Aufruf, -8, call, appeal, sum- Xus'gehen, v. ir. intr., to go out. Der Aus'gang, --es, exit. mon. VOCABULARY. 439 Aus'halten, v. ir. intr., to hold out. | Aeu' ßerſt, adv., extremely. Das Ausland, foreign countries. Ausſtellen, v. tr., to exhibit. Aus’ländiſd), adj., foreign. Die Aus’ſtellung, -, exhibition. Aus'nehmen, v. ir. tr., to except. Xus'ſtrecken, v. tr., to stretch out. Aus'nehmend, adv., remarkably. Die Aus'trocknung, -, drying up. Die Aus'nahme, —, pl. -1, ex-Aus'verkaufen, v. tr., to sell out. ception. [enough. Xus'wählen, v. tr., to select. Ausʻreidjen,. v. intr., suffice, have Die Aus'wahl, -,pl.-ent, selection. Aus'ſpredjeni, v. ir. tr., to pronounce, Aus'wandern, v. intr., to emigrate. speak out.. [tion. | Aus'wendig, adj., from memory, by Die Aus'ſpradje, -, pronuncia- heart. Ausſehen, v. ir. intr., to look out. Xus'zahleur, v. tr., to pay out. Die Nus'fidit, —, prospect, view. Aus’zeidinen, v. tr., to distinguish. Au'ßerhalb, prep., outside of, beyond. Aus'gezeidynet, adj., excellent. Au' ßerordentlid), adj., extraordinary. Die Art, —, pl. Aerte, axe, hatchet. Baar (or bar), adj., bare, pure; Baares| Bar, adj. (see baar). Geld, cash ; baare Bezahlung, Die Barmlerʻzigkeit, -, mercy, pity. cash payment. Der Baron', —8, pl.-e, baron. Bar'fuß, adj., barefoot. Die Baro'niit, -,21.-ncn, baro- Der Bady,-es, pl. Bä’dye, brook. ness. Die Bade, --, pl.--11, cheek. Der Bär, —en, pl. -en, bear. Ba'den, v. tr., to bake. , Bart, -28, pl. Bär'te, beard. Der Bü'der, baker. Bär'tig, adj., bearded. Das Bab, —es, pl. Bä'der, bath, wa-| Bart'los, adj., beardless. *tering-place. [bathe. ,, Baß,-ffes, pl. Bäſ’ſe, bass, base. Ba'ben, v. tr., intr., and refl., to Bauen, v. tr., to build, cultivate. Die Bahn, -, pl.-ermthe road, way. Der Bau'er, -8, pl.–11, peasant. Der Bahn'hof, railroad station. Die Bäu'erin, peasant woman. Bald, adv., soon, early. Die Bau'funſt, —, architecture. Bal'dig adj., early, speedy. Der Bau'meiſter, architect. Der Bal'ken, -8,pl. —, beam. Der Baum,-es; pl. Bäu'me, tree. Der Ball, -e8, pl. Bül'lc, (1) ball, Das Bäum'djen, —8, small tree. sphere ; (2) ball, festive dance. Baum'leer, adj., treeless. Die Balla’be, -, pl. —-11, ballad. Die Baum'wolle, -, cotton. Das Band, -es, pl. Bän'der, ribbon. Bearbeiten, v. tr., to work over, revise. Der Band, -es, pl. Bän'de, volume. Die Bcav'beitung, -, revision. Bän'digeit, v. tr., to tame. (sive. Beſben, v. intr., to tremble. Ban'ge, adj., anxious, apprehen- Beban'fent, v. refl., to give thanks. Die Satf,-, p. 23&tºfc, bench, bank.| Sebait’ert, 0. ar., to regret, to pity. Die Bank'note, -,pl.en, bank- Beded'en, v. tr., to cover. note. [banker. Beben’fen, v. refl., to deliberate. Der Banquier', -3, pl. —B, Bedent'lid), adj., critical. Sanyºnett, 0. tr., to banish. Bedenklidfeit, anxious thought. 440 VOCABULARY. Bedie'nen, v. tr., to serve, use; v.refl., Das Bein, —es, pl. ~e, leg, bone. to help one's self. Die Bein'fleider (pl.), pantaloons, Bedeu'ten, v. intr., to signify, mean. trowsers. Die Bedeu'tung, -, meaning. Das Beiſpiel, -S, pl. -e, example. Bedeu'tend, adj., important. , Bei'ſpielswei'ſe, adv., by way of Bedin'gen, v.tr., to stipulate, condition. example. Die Beding'ung, -, condition. Bei' ßen, 2. ir. tr., to bite. Bedürfen, v. ir. tr., to need. Bei'ßig, adj., biting. . [sist. Bedürfétig, adj., needy, wanting. | Bei ſtehen, v. ir. intr., to stand by, as- Beei'len, v. refl., to hasten. Der Bei'ſtand, -e8, assistance. Die Been'digung, -, end, ending. Bei'ſtimmen, v. intr., to agree with Die Beeʼre, -, pl. -1, berry. one, to coincide with one's views. Der Befehr', -es, pl. e, com- Bei'wohnen, v. intr., to be present, at, mand. . [to be. I attend. Befin’den, v.ir. refl., to find one's self, | Bekannt' (part. from beken'nen), known Beflei'ßen, v.ir. refl., 2 to apply one's | Der or die Bekann'te, -1, pl. -11, Befleiſſigen, v. refl., s self. acquaintance (a person). Beför'derit, v. tr., to promote. Die Bekannt' (diaft, acquaintance. Der Beför'derer, --8, promoter. (self). Bekla'gen, v. refl., to complain. Bege'ben, v. ir. refl., to betake (one's Befom'men, v. ir. tr., to get, obtain, Die Bege'benheit, -, pl. -en, procure. [self. Begeg'nen, v.ir. tr., to meet. [event. Veküm'mern, l. refl., to trouble one's Die Begier'de, -, desire, wish. Bela'gern, 2. tr., to besiege. [siege. Begie'rig, adj., desirous, eager. * Die Bela'gerung, -, pl. -en, Begin'nen, v. ir.tr.; to begin, com- | Belau' fen, v. refl., to amount. mence. Bele'gen, v. tr., to overlay, cover. Beglei'ten, v. tr., to accompany. Belei'digen, v. tr., to offend. Begrei' fen, v. ir. tr., comprehend, un-| Die Beleidigung, -, pl. —en, derstand. offense, wrong, injury. Begreif'lidy, adj., comprehensible. Belie’ben, v. intr., to wish, have the Der Begriff', —8, pl. ~e, idea, kindness, please. conception. Bel'len, v. intr., to bark. Begrün'den, v. tr., to found, establish. | Bemädy'tigen, v. refl.,? to take posses- Behal’ten, v. ir. tr., to retain, keep. get the mastery over. Behan'deln, v. tr., to handle, treat. Behaup'teni, v. tr., to assert, affirm. Die Bemer'fung, -,pl. —11, re- Behel'fen, v. ir. refl., to help one's self. mark, observation. Behülf'lid), adj., serviceable, con Die Benen'nung, —, naming. ferring help. | Benö'thigt, adj., in need of, needing. Behen'de, adj., agile, nimble, quick. Beob’aditent, v. tr., to observe. Cous. Die Behörde, -, pl. -—11, authority. Bequem', adj., convenient, commodi- Bei, prep., near, at, with, by. Bereit, adj., ready, prepared. Beide, adj. (pol.), both. . ! Bereits', adr., already, VOCABULARY. 441 Die Beta tt) Lulu, -, p. , pron., somebody, any Der Jä'ger, -8, pl. --, hunter. | body. Das Jahr, —es, -e, year. [century. Se'ner, pron., that, that one. Das Fahrhun'dert, —8, pl. ---, Fen'ſeit, prep., the other side of, beyonıl Die Jal/reszahl, -, number of Fen’ſeits, adv., beyond. the year. Jetzt, adv., now, at present. , Jah'reszeit, -,pl.-en, sea Jetz'ig, adj., present, existing. son of the year. Die fu'gend, youth. Der fa'nuar, —8, January Jung, adj., young, youthful. fe, adv., ever ; conj., the (see deſto). Der Jung'e, -1, pl. -1, youth, Se'ber, pron., every, each... young man. Das Ra’ber, --8, pl. —, cable. Sai'ſerlid), adj., imperial. [ship). ! Kabinett, -es, pl. -e, cabinet, Die Kajü'te, -e, pl. -11, cabin (of a small room. Das fall, -28, pl. Nälber, calf. Der Nadett, en, pl. --en, cadet. Der Kalbs'braten,-8, roast veal. Der Kadet'tenoffizier, -8, pl.-, ! Das Kalbs'cotelett, --C8, real cut- cadet-officer. 1 Salb'fleiſſ), -es, real. [let. Staf'fee, -8, coffee. Der Kali, -28, lime. Stahl, adj., bald. Der Stall’fels, limestone cliffs, Der Rahn,-es, pl. Näh'ne, boat, skiff. calcareous rock. I Sai'ſer, —B, pl. -, emperor. Salt, adj., cold. VOCABULARY. A Die Kälte, —, cold, coldness. Die stlap'perídlange, rattlesnake. Der Stampf, —es, pl. Sämpfe, battle, Slar, adj., clear. Näm'pfen, v. intr., to fight. [fight. Die Slaſſe, —, pl. -11, class. . 1 Stana'rienvogel, —8, Canary bird. Sla'fiſdy, adj., classical. Die Kano'ne, —, pl. -11, cannon. Das Klavier', -3, -e, piano-forte. Die Nano'nenfugel, cannon-ball. Der Stree, -e8, clover. Die Stap'pe, —, pl. -eii, cap, hood. Das Kleid, -es, pl. -er, garment, Der Sar'pfen, -, pl. -, carp. clothes, dress. Die Star'te, --, pl. -11, chart, map. Stlei'den, v. tr., to clothe, dress. 1. Startof'fel, -, pl. -11, potato. Klein, adj., small, little. Der Sartof'felader, -, potato field. Das Nli'ma, -S, pl. Klima'ta, -te or Kä'ſe, -es, pl. -, cheese. -ten, climate. 1. Katalog', -e8, pl.-e, catalogue. Klin'gent, v. intr., to sound, be heard. , Stat/joliť,-en, pl. —en, Catholic. Klin'geint, v. intr., to ring a bell. Sathoʻliſd), adj., catholic. Klo'pfen, v. intr., to knock (at a door). 1 Nattun', -es, pl. —, calico. | Das Nlo'ſter, —8, pl. Slö’ſter, cloister, Stau'fen, v. tr., to buy. convent, monastery. Der Sauf'mann, -es, pl. Kauf'- Nlug, adj., wise, sensible, learned. Veute, merchant. Der Ana’be, —11, pl. -11, boy. Staufmän'niſdı, adj., mercantile. I Stuecht, -es, pl. ~e, servant. Stauni, adv., scarcely. Tu Itno'den, —8, pl. —, bone. Lo Stuo'ten, -8, pl. —, knot. Der Keil, -es, pl. -e, wedge. 1 Kodi, —28, pi. Nö'dje, cook. Steil'förmig, adj., wedge-shaped; Die Rö'dyin, —, pl. -rien, cook. adv., like a wedge. No'chen, v. tr. and intr., to cook, boil. Stein, pron., no, not any, no one. Der Stof'fer, —8, pl. —, trunk, chest. Der Stell'ner, —8, pl. —, waiter. I Rohr, -es, pl. --e, cabbage. * Sen'nien, v. ir. tr., to know, to be ac- Der Rohl'ader, field of cabbages. quainted with. Der Stef'ſel, --8, pl. -, kettle. Kom'men, v. ii. intr., to come. Die Stet'te, —, pl. -11, chain. Koʻmiſd), adj., comical. Der Siel, —8, pl. ~e, quill. Der Sommis', -, pl. -, clerk. Das Kind, -08, pl. --er, child. Die Konfeſſion', -, pl. —en, confes- Das Nind'dien, -, pl. --, little sion of faith. child, baby, infant. Der Stongreß', -es, pl.-e, Congress. Die Kind'heit, -, childhood. Kö'nig, —8, pl. --e, king. Sin'diſd), adj., childish. Söniglid), adj., royal. Die Sir'de, --, pl.--11, "church. (tory. Das Kö'nigreich, -, pl. --, Die Kir'dhengeldjichte, church his kingdom. Der Nird,'tſurm, church tower. Sön'nen, v. ir., to be able. Die Nir'idje, , pl. -11, cherry. Der Stopf, — 8, pl. Kö'pfe, head. Das Kiſſen, —8, pl. -11, cushion. I Das Kopf'well, --8, headache. Mla'gen, v. intr., to complain. lol forb, --18, pl. Sürbe, basket. Die Klap'per, -, pl. -11, rattle. Der Sork'madjer, basket-maker. 456 VOCABULARY. Das Korn, -e8, pl. Kör'ner, grain, , Krumm'beinig, adj., bow-legged. Der Kör'per, -8, pl. -, body. [corn. Der Ku'djen, -S, pl. —, cake. So'ſten, v. intr., to cost. Die Stu'gel, --, pl.–11, ball. Koſtbar, adj., costly. Der Ku'fuf, —8, pl. ~e, cuckoo. Die Roſtbarkeit, —, costliness. Die Rundſchaft, -, pl. -e11, knowl- Die Straft, —, pl. faräf'te, might, edge, information. strength. [force. Künftig, adj., future. Straft'voll, adj., energetic, full of Die Kunſt, ---, pl. Kün’ſte, art. Der Rra'gen,-8, pl. —, or förä'gen, Der Kunſt' fleiß, -68, artistic in- Nrant, adj., sick. [collar. dustry. Die Krant'heit, -, pl. -en, sick I Nünſtler, —8, pl. —, artist. ness. [sickness. Künſt'lid), adj., artificial. Das Iran' fenlager, -8, sick-bed, Der Kunſt'djatz, -es, pl. -ſchäte, Der Kranz, -es, pl. Krän’ze, wreath. artistic treasure. Das Kraut, -e8, pl. Bräu'ter, plant, | Das Kunſt'werf, work of art. , Kreuz, -es, pl. —e, cross. [herb. Der Kurfürſt, -en, pl. -eni, elector. Die Kreuz' fahrt, -, pl. --en,? cru- ) Kurz, adj., short. Der Kreuz'zug, -8, pl. -züge,) sade. Kurz'weilig, adj., amusing. !! Streuʼzer, -, pl. -, creuzer. Das Ku'pfer, -8, copper. . ! Strieg, -es, pl. —, war. Das ſu'pferſtechen, —8,. engray- Die Kriegs'noth, calamity of war. ing on copper. Siri'tiſd), adj., critical. . Der Nu'pferſtedjer, -8, pl. -, Die Stro'ne, -, pl. —11, crown. engraver on copper. Der Stron'prinz, -en, pl. -en, Der Kuß, -es, pl. Nüſſe, kiss. prince royal. [mug. / Nüſſen, v. tr., to kiss. Der Frug, -es, pl. Krüge, pitcher, Die Küſſte, -, pl. —11, coast. Krunim, adj., crooked. Der Kut'ſdier, -8, pl. --, coachman. La’chen, v. intr., to laugh. Der land'mann, countryman. Lä'djeln, v. intr., to smile. (cal. ✓ Lands'mann, (fellow)-coun- lö'derlidy, adj., ludicrous, comi- tryman. Der Lachs, —18, pl. Lädi'ſe, salmon. Die Land'reiſe, journey by land. La’den, . ir. tr., to load. [ing, cargo. Land'ſdaft,-,pl.--en, land- Die la'bung, -, pl. —en, lad- scape. [painter. Ln'den, v.tr., to summon, invite.[shop. Der Land'idhaftsnarer, landscape Der la'ben, —8, pl. Läden, shutter, Land'ſoldat, land soldier (mi- Die La'ge, -, pl.-n, position, place, litia). . Das La'ger, --$, pl. Lä'ger, bed, camp Das Lanid' volk, country people. Lalim, adj., lame. land'wärts, adv., landward. Läh'men, v. tr., to make lame. Der Landwind, land breeze. Das Lamm, -es, pl. Läm'mer, lamb. Der Landwirth, farmer, landlord. Die Lam'pe, -, pl.--1, lamp. [land. I lang, adj., long. Das Land, -e8, pl. Lün'der, country, Lang'e, adj., a long while. Die Land'macyt, land forces army Die Läng'e, -, length, VOCABULARY. 457 Lang'jam, adj., slow. Die Ler'de, —, pl. -1, lark. Lang'weilig, adj., slow. | Ler'nen, v. tr., to learn. Der Lärm, -es, noise, bustle, uproar. Leſen, v. ir. tr., to read. ſer. Laſſen, v. ir. tr., to let, leave, permit, Das Le’ſebudy, reading-book, read- order, to have (done). Letzt, adj., last. Die Laſt, —, pl. -en, burden. Letz'ter, adj., latter. Das Laſt'thier, beast of burden. Der Leudt'thurm, light-house. · Latei'niſch, adj., Latin. Die Leu'te (pl.), people. Lau'fen, v. ir. intr., to run. Das lidht, -es, pl. --er, light, candle. Der Lauf,-es, pl. Läu'fe, course. Lie'ben, v. tr., to love. Laut, adj., loud; prep., according to, Lieb, adj., dear, agreeable. by virtue of. Die Liebe, —, love. Läu'ten, v. intr., to sound, be rung. Lie’ber, adv., rather, sooner. le'ben, v. intr., to live. Lieb'lidy, adj., lovely, charming. Das Le'ben, -8, life. Der Lieb'ling, pl. ~e, favorite. Leben'dig, adj., lively, active. Liebenswürdig, adj., amiable. Leb'haft, adj., lively, active. Das Lied, -es, pl. -er, song. Die Lebensart, -, style of living. Lie' fern, v. tr., to deliver. Der Lebenslauf, course of life. I Die Lie'fering, -, pl. -en, num- Die Le'bensmittel, means of ex- ber (of a serial publication). istence, necessaries of life. Lie'gen, v. ir. intr., to lie, recline. Das Leber, ---S, pl. -, leather. Die Limona'de, -, lemonade. Leer, adj., empty, vacant. | Link, adj., left, left hand. Die Legation', -, pl. --en, legation. Links, adv., to the left hand. Legen, v. tr., to lay, put, place. Die Literatur', -, pl.-en, literature. SÄn'legen, to put on. Litera'riſd), adj., literary. (Bei'legen, to give to. Da: lob, —es, praise. Lely'ren, v. tr., to teach.. lo'ben, v. tr., to praise. Die Lehʻre, —, pl. --11, doctrine. Das Lody, -08, pl. Lö'djer, hole, cavity Der Lehrer, -8, pl. --, teacher. Lohnen, v. tr., to reward. Die Lehrerin,--, pl. —ent, teacher Das Loos, -es, pl. ~e, lot. Das Lehr'jahr, year of study Los, adj., free from, without. Lehr'reich, adj., instructive. Lö’fen, v. tr., to loosen, solve. Leiſt, adj., light, easy. : [ry). Der Löʻwe, -n, pl. -11, lion. Leit, adv. (es thut mir leid, I am sor- Die Luft, —, pl. Lilf’te, air. Lei'ten, v. ir. tr., to suffer. [grief. Lü'gen, v. intr., to lie, tell falsehoods. Das Lei'den, —8, pl. -, suffering, Die lü'ge, pl. --11, lie, falsehood. Leidenſchaftliđı, adj., passionate. Der Lüg'ner, —8, pl. -, liar. Die Lei'er, —, pl. -—11, løre. Der Lum'pen, --, pl. -en, rag, tatter Leil'en, v. ir. tr., to loan, lenů. Das Lum'penpapier, paper (made Die Lein'wand, —, linen. of rags). Lei'ſe, adj., low, soft, gentle. [plish. Die Luſt, -, pl. lüʻſte, pleasure, joy, Leiſten, v. tr., to do, perform, accom desire, inclination. Lei'ten, v. tr., to lead, conduct. li' ſtern, adj., longing, repacious. Die Lektion', -11, pl. -en, lesson. I Lu'ſtig, adj., jolly, merry. U 458 VOCABULARY. M. Ma'chen, v. tr., to make, do. Die Meer'enge, -,pl.-11,straits. power. the sea. Mädy'tig, adj., mighty, powerful, Der Meer'rettig, —8, horseradish having control. Das Mehl, -e8, flour. Madame', Mrs. | Mehr (comp. of viel), more. Die Magd, -, pl. Mägʻbe, maid. Melʻrere, pron., several. Das Mäd’den, —8, pl. ~, girl, | Mehr'mals, adv., several times. maid. F | Mei'den, v. ir. tr., to avoid. Das Mahl, —es, pl. —e, repast. Die Mei'le, —-, pl. -11, mile. Der Mai, —8, May. Mei'lenweit, adv., miles distant. Mein, pron., my. [mine. Das Mal, -es, pl. --e, time. Der Meine, or Der Meinige, pron.., Ma'len, v. tr., to paint. Mei'nen, v. intr., to mean, think. Der Ma'ler, —8, pl.--, painter. | Die Jei nung,-, p.